378 Volume 2 Part I Civil Specifications

Proposed B + G + 5 floors Residential Building
Plot no. IC3-B37, International City Phase-3, Dubai UAE
For
SHEIKH JASSIM FAISAL M. T. AL-THANI
Represented by
Mr. JAMAL M.M. YASIN ABUHIJLEH
VOLUME 2 PART I
CIVIL & ARCHITECTURE SPECIFICATION
TENDER DOCUMENTS
MAY 2014
M. E. Engineering Consultants
Contents
SECTION 1: GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 4
SECTION1a: SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 37
SECTION 2: DEMOLITION & SITE CLEARANCE ............................................................................................ 44
SECTION 3: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS ........................................................................................... 46
SECTION 4: CONCRETE WORK ...................................................................................................................... 53
SECTION 5: SHORING ..................................................................................................................................... 89
SECTION 6: DE-WATERING............................................................................................................................. 94
SECTION 7: PILING .......................................................................................................................................... 97
SECTION 8: MASONRY .................................................................................................................................. 107
SECTION 9: WATER PROOFING ................................................................................................................... 119
A.
B.
BASEMENT WATERPROOFING................................................................................................. 119

FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING FOR BURIED FOOTINGS, TIE BEAMS, NECK COLUMNS,
SLAB ON GRADE etc. ................................................................................................................. 123
C.
WET AREAS WATERPROOFING ............................................................................................... 126
D.
CONCRETE ROOFS .................................................................................................................... 128
E.
WATERSTORAGE TANKS WATERPROOFING ......................................................................... 132
F.
DAMPROOFING BEHIND EXTERNAL CLADDING .................................................................... 134
G.
PODIUM DECKS, LANDSCAPE AREA ABOVE BASEMENT SLAB, PLANTERS BOX,
SWIMMING POOL WALL & FLOOR AND INVERTED ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM ... 136
SECTION 9A: CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 140
A.
CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM NOT EXPOSED TO UV................................................ 142
B.
CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM EXPOSED TO UV ........................................................ 142
SECTION 9B: CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM ........................................................................ 143
A.
B.
C.
INTEGRAL-CRYSTALLINE-WATERPROOFING-OF-CONCRETE-ADMIXTURE ...................... 143

CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERSTOP ......................................................................... 149
DURABILITY ENHANCING ADMIXTURE FOR MASONRY MORTAR & CONCRETE MASONRY
UNITS ........................................................................................................................................... 155
D.
CONCRETE RESTORATION AND PROTECTION ..................................................................... 158
SECTION 10: CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY ..................................................................... 161
SECTION 11: METAL WORK .......................................................................................................................... 192
SECTION 12: FINISHINGS.............................................................................................................................. 202
SECTION 12a: CERAMIC TILING, QUARRY STONE & POOL DECK .......................................................... 219
SECTION 12b: EXTERNAL CLADDING ......................................................................................................... 234
SECTION 12c: WOODEN FLOORING ............................................................................................................ 243
SECTION 12d: RESILENT FLOORING ........................................................................................................... 247
SECTION 13: WINDOWS AND GLASS .......................................................................................................... 254
SECTION 13a: METAL AND TERRACOTTA CLADDING .............................................................................. 272
Section1, General
SECTION 13b: CURTAIN WALLING ............................................................................................................... 284
SECTION 14: PAINTING AND DECORATING ............................................................................................... 296
SECTION 15: ROADWORKS, KERBS AND PAVINGS .................................................................................. 307
SECTION 16: LIFTS ........................................................................................................................................ 322
SECTION 17: POWDER COATING ................................................................................................................ 331
SECTION 18: SEALANTS ............................................................................................................................... 336
SECTION 19: CUBICAL PARTITIONS & LOCKERS ...................................................................................... 342
SECTION 20: FIXINGS .................................................................................................................................... 344
SECTION 21: FACADE CLEANING SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 348
SECTION 22: GRP .......................................................................................................................................... 355
SECTION 23: GRC .......................................................................................................................................... 360
SECTION 24: PRECAST CONCTETE PANEL CLADDING / FEATURES ..................................................... 367
SECTION 25: SLOTTED ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL/CEILING PLANKS ................................................... 375
SECTION 26: RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING ....................................... 381
SECTION 27: FIRESTOPPING ....................................................................................................................... 388
SECTION 28: FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS ........................................................................................ 396
SECTION 29: PLANTING ................................................................................................................................ 401
Appendix 1: Schedule of Site Offices and Facilities ........................................................................................ 402
Appendix 2: No Objection Certificates (NOC) .................................................................................................. 403
Appendix 3: List of Approved Suppliers ........................................................................................................... 404
Appendix 4: Soil Test Report ........................................................................................................................... 455
Section1, General
SECTION 1: GENERAL
1.
Scope of Works:
The Works comprise the Refurbishment - Construction, Completion, Commissioning, Maintenance and
Handing over of RESIDENTIAL BUILDING (Basement + Ground + 5 floors) Plot No. IC3-B37,
International City Phase 3, Dubai, UAE.
The project consists of the following (but not limited to):
Basement
(Area= 2375.82m ).The basement consists of parking for 66cars and services namely the
generator room, pump room, fire & domestic water tanks, irrigation
water & storm water tanks and a store. A lift lobby with two lifts and
two staircases are provided for vertical circulation.
Ground floor
(Area= 1592.79m ).
First Floor
(Area= 1098.51 m ). This floor has a lift lobby, 2 staircases, corridors, 2 lifts, services
rooms (garbage, Water meters, telephone and electrical room) in
addition to 3 studios and 11 one bedroom apartments. Gym with
sauna & toilet/shower facilities (separate for men & women) is
provided. A swimming pool with Jacuzzi is provided along with
landscaped areas.
Typical floor
(Area= 1098.03m ).
The typical floor is from the 2 to 4 floor. Each floor consists of lift
lobby, 2 staircases, corridors, 2 lifts, services rooms (garbage,
Water meters, telephone and electrical room) in addition to 4
studios and 12 one bedroom apartments.
Fifth Floor
(Area= 655.64m ).
The 5th floor consists of lift lobby, staircases, corridors, 2 lifts,

services rooms (garbage, Water meters, telephone and electrical
room) in addition to 1 studio and 10 one bedroom apartments. An
external canopy is provided with monorail at the edge for BMU
services.
Roof Floor
(Area= 32.68m ).
The roof has all services and machines which are covered by steel
structure having louvers (have to be done by a specialist). The roof
also has the roof telephone room, solar room and one of the
staircases for access.
2.
The ground floor includes the main entrance area, entrance lobby,
lift lobby, staircases, and MEP rooms (substation, LV room,
telephone room, water meter cabinets, pool pump room and
garbage room). There are 12 studios and 1 one bedroom
apartment present in this floor. The ground floor also has parking
for 22 cars in addition to some landscaped areas along the plot
boundaries. A two way ramp of 6m wide is provided to reach the
basement floor. Provision for gas riser is provided.
nd
th
The Main contractor will be responsible for the management, supervision and co-ordination of the
works.
The contractor should allow for safe access routes into the site through the existing entrances.
The contractor will take all reasonable steps to minimize transference of noise, dust and debris.
Section1, General
3.
Provisional Sums
A number of items have been included as provisional sums. The Employer reserves the right to either tender
them separately and delegate them to the Contractor or procure them at his end and supply them to the
Contractor for installation at this (Employers) sole discretion. These sub-contractors/suppliers shall be treated
as domestic sub-contractor/supplier of the Contractor and not as nominated sub-contractor/suppliers unless
designated as Nominated Sub-Contractors.
Specifications included in this Volume for items that are provided under provisional sums are for guidance
only. They are liable for changes during the course of the contract at the discretion of the Engineer and the
Employer.
4.
Attendance and Facilities to the nominated sub-contractors
The Contractor shall be provided all related attendance to the nominated sub-contractors, coordinate the
various works, and provide facilities as described under the pricing preambles of the provisional sums:
A. The Contractor shall provide to the nominated sub-contractors the following but not limited to:
Temporary Site Office
Reasonable site offices and facilities depending on the nature and volume of their works. The
Contractor shall be provided assistance for obtaining telephone and facsimile connections.
However all connection and running charges for the telephones and facsimile and shall be
borne by the nominated sub-contractors.
Storage Sheds
Sufficient storage sheds for storing their equipment to be positioned or work to be performed.
Water and Electricity
Water & electricity required for the performance including for testing and commissioning of
their works.
Hoisting & Lifting
Lifting including loading and unloading of all heavy equipment.

Aluminum, glazing and external cladding installation in place shall be carried out by the
specialist sub-contractor using his own scaffoldings, cradles/other means. However lifting
loading and unloading of the units to the required areas/floors shall be carried out by the Main
Contractor.
Site crane, hoists, etc. shall be shared to lift personnel and equipment that can be handled by
them.
Fire Proofing
All fire proofing / sealing of all openings, penetrations, crossings, provisions, of fire barriers,
etc., (Fire barriers between floors of the curtain wall & cladding system shall be provided by
the specialist Sub-Contractor.
Scaffolding
All scaffolding require by the sub-contractors except for the aluminum sub-contractor for the
performance of their works.
B. Builders works to be carried out by the Main Contractor for the nominated sub-contractors are
described in the pricing preambles of the relevant trades and provisional sums. However this is not to
be considered as exhaustive and the Contractor shall provide all builders works that are generally
Section1, General
provided and needed for the completion of the works.
C. All the above requirements shall be included by the Contractor in his prices while pricing the same in
the provisional sums.
5.
Definitive List of Attendance Items
A definitive list of Attendance Items required by the MEP sub-contractors is indicated below for the
guidance of the Contractor. The Contractor shall carefully review these items and ensure that these are
covered either as measured items of the BOQ (in the various bills) or covered under the head Attendance
and Profits in the provisional sum bill.
Also included is Annexure -2. The list of items to be covered under the MEP scope of works for guidance
of the Contractor.
Any other items not covered in the above lists but is considered essential for the project, shall be
considered by the Contractor as within his scope of work as part of his contractual obligation and
responsibilities.
ANNEXTURE 1
MAIN CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK MEP RELATED
1. Steel Ladder, Crossover and Access platform in shafts & OTS roof and or water tanks.
2. Chequered plate/cover for cable trenches.
3. Floating slab & Concrete for inertia base of any related equipment.
4. Acoustic analysis & treatment for building and equipment.
5. Concrete work for manhole, grease traps, sand trap, earthlings pit, trenching, sump pit, inspection
chamber, water meter chamber, thrust block, pipe support, LPG tanks & Machinery base.
6. Architectural louvers for the MEP services (excluding Grills and Gratings and similar items which are
an integral part of MEP system).
7. Openings in wall or shear wall, slabs, falls ceiling.
8. Permanent or temporary access panels/doors in walls & false ceiling.
9. Epoxy paint for plant rooms.
10. Electrical & water required for installation testing commissioning and start up till handling over.
11. Car park offices and facilities like water, electricity & telephone lines.
12. The usage of site Hoisting & lifting facilities including the carnage of chillers to their final location.
13. Security & watching.
14. Rest area, drinking water, site toilets for MEP staff & labor force.
15. Receiving & storing of provisional sum material.
16. Reasonable storage area & shaded open stocking areas.
17. Housing keeping from central positions.
18. Builders work in connection with MEP work, like cutting, chasing and making good of walls, floors &
Section1, General
ceiling.
19. Third party for testing & commissioning (MEP and / or subcontractors / suppliers).
20. Authority and connection fees to be considered as part of MEP scope.
ANNEXTURE 2
Scope of work of MEP Sub- Contractor
1. Ordinary firefighting sleeves including fire stop.
2. Swimming Pool part:
2-1 Make up water to balancing water tank
2-2 Plan room drain including provision for back wash drain
2-3 Power connection to main control panel including termination and connection
3. Rubber pushes to fit sanitary ware.
4. Final painting & signage of visible MEP services, colors are subject to Engineers approval.
5. All interlock between fire alarm panel & kitchen hoods fire system, LPG, Garbage & FM200/ clean
agent.
6. Interlock between lighting control system with BMS and all other equipment as per data schedule &
drawings.
7. Power and supply for window cleaning system.
8. Sand trap intake exhaust louvers and doors grills.
9. Power supply to garbage chute panel and its fan including isolating switch.
10. Fire & water supply to garbage chute including piping, sprinkles & valves.
11. Scaffolding, platform, block chain, duct lifter inside building.
12. Lighting for dumb waiter.
13. MEP services required for kitchen equipment, & laundry.
14. Access control systems form part of MEP scope of work.
15. Sanitary fixtures and accessories receiving, unloading in scope of main Contractor handling and
installation is in scope of MEP.
16. All meters & telecommunication equipment are under and it is considered to be included in MEP
scope of work.
17. Health Club facilities services such as water & power supply & drainage work are included in MEP
scope of work.
18. Full coordination with various Contractors is to be taken care of by MEP sub-contractor to define final
locations, sizes and arrangements of MEP services.
19. Protection of MEP work during installation up to handling over.
20. PVC traps serving sanitary were individually (Main Contractor).
6.
Abbreviations of Standards
Section1, General
The following abbreviations have been used for the standards applicable to the works under the contract:
BS
CP
ASTM
ACI
ISO
ANSI
AASHTO
DIN
BSEN
EN
UL
IEC
CENELEC
British Standards
Code of Practice
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Concrete Institute
International Organization Standardization
American National Standards Institute
American Association of State Highways & Transportation
Officials
Deutshes Institute for Normung
European Standards Adopted as British Standards
Euronorms Harmonized Standard
Under Writers Laboratories INC.
International Electrotechnical Commission
Committee European de Normalization Electro technique
Referenced Standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effects as if bound
with this specification.
7.
Standards
The works have been designed to incorporate and utilize economically, goods, materials, and workmanship to
various specifications which are detailed herein. Reference is commonly made to British standards (BS) and
British Standards Codes of Practice (CP) and to the American Society for Testing and Materials Standards
(ASTM). Different National or International Standards ISO, DIN, etc., that correspond to the specified BS or
ASTM Standard may be used provided that their requirements are not less stringent, and provided that the
Contractor presents copies such standards translated into English. If a redesign of the works is necessitated
by the adoption of such alternatives the costs incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
Except where specifically indicated otherwise all references shall be deemed to refer to the current standards
(the latest edition or issue) as of the date of the signing of the contract.
8.
Environmental Concerns
The Contractor shall make himself conversant with all the orders, circulars, laws and bye-laws of the local
authorities, concerning preservation of environment and shall strictly adhere to them. Any issues that are
detrimental or are in violation shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer immediately and the Contractor
shall take such remedial actions as accepted by the Engineer.
9.
Units of Measurement and Abbreviations
All units of weight and measurement shall be based on the Metric system of weights and measurements
except standard products which may be expresses in nominal units of the imperial system.
The metric terms and symbols occurring in the contract documents are based on the Systems International
daunts (S1 System).
Abbreviation
m
m2
m3
Kg
Tone
10.
Description
Liner Meter
Square Meter
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
1000 Kilogram
Abbreviation
Description
mm
cm
No/Nr
C
LS
Millimeter
Centimeter
Number
Celsius
Lump Sum
Definitions
Wherever in the contract documents or on the drawings the words as directed, as described, as ordered,
as required, as permitted or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction.
Description, order, request, requirements or permission of the Engineer is intended. Similarly, the words
approved, acceptable, satisfactory and words of like import shall mean approved by, acceptable to, or
Section1, General
satisfactory to the Engineer.
11.
Inconsistency in Contract Documents
The Contractor shall execute the works according to the provisions of the Contract Documents. Any work
indicated in one of the documents but omitted and /or not stated in one or more of the other documents shall
be treated as though it were included in all of them.
Any discrepancies between the quantities or their descriptions in the Bills of Quantities, the Specification and /
or the Tender Drawings, shall be referred for clarifications prior to the submissions of the Tender which shall
be clarified as Addendum to the Tender. Any discrepancies noted after the Tender has been accepted shall
be referred to the Engineer for a ruling. The ruling of the Engineer shall be final and bending on the Contractor
and the Contractor shall execute the works accordingly without any increase in cost or extension of time to the
project.
If the Contractor should discover that any work has been omitted from and / or not indicated entirely or
partially in all the documents, he shall report the facts immediately to the Engineer. If the work is something
which in the opinion of the Engineer could not have been foreseen by an experienced Contractor, the
Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a variation order stipulating the details of the work to be done.
Save as aforesaid in the above paragraph, no additional payment shall be made in respect of work carried out
in connection with discrepancies among the various contract documents.
12.
Errors in Computing Contents of Contract Documents
The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors which he makes in computing any quantities of material
and labor required or costs involved or through any lack of knowledge of the site or misunderstanding of
anything shown or replied on the drawings or in the specifications and/or the Bills of Quantities.
The Contractor must refer any discrepancy in the Drawings or the Specifications to the Engineer before
proceeding with any of the works. The decision of the Engineer as to the interpretation of the discrepancy will
be final as specified above under Inconsistency in Contract Documents.
Any item or items of work not specifically shown on the Drawings or referred to in the Specifications but which
would be necessary for the proper construction of the works in accordance with the best practice is implied
and must be included for as incidental to the contract sum.
Any item for which the Contractor has not inserted a price in the Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to be
covered by other prices or rates therein.
13.
Temporary Site Offices, Sanitary Facilities and Equipment
Provide and maintain on the site for the duration of the works the following including any relocation of such
offices/facilities necessitated due to progress of the works or other reasons, if required.
a) Temporary offices for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors personnel including all necessary sanitary
facilities. Such offices shall be open at all reasonable hours to receive instructions, notices and other forms of
communications.
b) Suitable and adequate temporary offices for the sole use of the Employer/Engineer/Project Manager.
All requirements in respect of Employer/Engineer/Project Manager temporary offices shall be new when
installed.
Offices shall be of an enclosed type having rooms on either side of a central corridor.
The offices shall be of weather and dust tight construction, being air-conditioned to a comfortable office
standard of 20degree C 24 degree C during summer, with fluorescent ceiling lighting, sufficient to provide a
maximum of 500 lux at desk level. Air conditioning units shall be of the mini split type.
Provide sufficient electrical power socket outlets within the offices (240 V, 3 pin type).
Locate site offices for the Employer/Engineer/Project Manager shall comply with the requirements included in
Section1, General
Volume 3, Appendix A. The offices shall be available in full working order to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within the period stipulated to commence the works in the Tender Documents and remain so until completion
of the whole of the works.
All keys for the Engineers site offices shall be held by the Engineer until such offices are removed.
Computer Facilities:
Branded IBM Compatible Computers shall be provided for the Employer/Engineer/Project Manager offices of
latest maximum configuration available at the market at the time of mobilization, which shall not be less than
the following:
Hard Ware as Follows:
CPU Intel Core i7-2500 3.3G 6M 1155 box Processor
- Kingmax DDR III 1600 8GB Nano (Single Piece) RAM
- LG DVD RW 22x SATA DVD (write drive for engineer and Employers representative only)
- WD HDD 2 TB SATA Hard Disk
- PNY VGA Quadro 2000 1024 MB PCI EXP-Graphic Card
- Sound Card and Speakers
- Optical MS mouse
- 19 LED Screen
- A/E enhanced keyboard
- Cooler Master Case RC-P100K-KKN2, USP 100, All black VER2 fan
- G/B PSU GE-M800A-D1 Odin Pro 800w W/EU
- Separate dedicated Internet line to be provided to be accessible through network (Type: Business one).
- Ethernet Card 10/100
- HP A4 / A3 Colored Printer
Provided Soft Ware as follows:
Original Soft Ware of MS Windows 7 64Bit (Arabic enabled with SP2 i.e. Service Pack 3), MS office 2010
(Arabic enhanced), Antivirus Software, Networking software for all computers and AutoCAD Rel. 2011, Adobe
Acrobat Professional, Java Applet (updated Version), WinZip, Winrar, Printkey, MS Project and Prima Vera
Project Planner (P6) for two computers only.
Sufficient, as required quantities stationary and computer, printer, scanner, and photocopier, requirements of
toner, ink cartridges, special color printing paper and other requirements.
One computer literate Secretary (full time) shall be employed exclusively for the Engineers office.
The Contractor shall provide daily cleaning attendance and office boy exclusively for the use of the Engineers
staff.
Kitchen equipment common for all offices:
i) Refrigerator 12 cu. f.
ii) Water Filter
iii) Sink Unit
iv) Electric kettle
v) Microwave
vi) Gas Stove
vii) Consumables
2 Nr.
2 Nr.
2 Nr.
2 Nr.
1Nr.
2 Nr.
Sufficient Qty.
Adequate firefighting equipment to the approval of the Local Fire Authority and the Engineer.
Approved signboards written in Arabic and English. The size of the signboard and lettering including the
wordings shall be as directed by the Engineer. Signboards shall be taken over from enabling worksubcontractor (others).
Pay for all connection and related charges, and call / use charges for telephone, telefax and computer lines
(U.A.E calls only).
Section1, General
10
Maintain Employer / Project Manager / Engineers Site Office, including routine/preventative/corrective
maintenance for all systems and furniture. In addition, provide full time janitor service for daily dusting, floor
and window cleaning, and removal of rubbish.
The Contractor shall obtain necessary approvals from concerned Regulatory Authority and relocate site
offices as required during the period of construction to allow the permanent works to proceed.
Dismantle and remove from the site all offices, latrines, sign-boards and other temporary works on completion
of the whole contract and make good and leave site in clean and tidy condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
14.
Toilet Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain clean portable toilet facilities on site as specified elsewhere are not
permitted by the local authorities or the employer, or if during the progress of the work the temporary facilities
are to be removed or relocated. The Contractor shall include in his contract sum for the above provision as
applicable.
The Contractor shall not use the permanent facilities within the building unless permitted by the Engineer in
writing. If use of permanent facilities within the building is permitted these shall be maintained in a clean and
sanitary condition to the satisfaction of Engineer.
After completion of works the permanent facilities shall be restored to perfect condition and handed over long
with the works by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.
15.
Sign Boards
One (1No.) Project Sign Board/s to be provided as per the related drawing and according to the local
regulations.
The Contractor shall maintain the signboards in a clear and tidy condition provide power and pay for it for the
duration of the project.
On completion of the project the signboards shall be dismantled and removed from site either to the Employer
stores or to the Contractors store as directed by the engineer.
16.
No Objection Certificates (NOCs)
Copies of No objection Certificates (NOCs) received from authorities are enclosed as Appendix 2 for
reference. The Engineer does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy of the information provided in
the NOC or that shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall carry out necessary exploratory works and
investigations to obtain sufficient information as required.
The cost of locating or verifying the location of existing services, maintaining, protecting from damage during
construction and liaison with the various Service Authorities and complying with their dictates shall be borne
by the Contractor unless provided for elsewhere. This is applicable to those services that are visible on site
and shown on drawings and NOCs.
Any re-routing shall be carried out by the Contractor in co-ordination with the concerned authorities and as
directed by the engineer.
17.
Site Hoarding
Site hoarding has to be provided as per the related drawing and according to the local regulations and
marketing section of client The Contractor may augment, rectify and replace sections of this hoarding as
required but the approval of the Engineer and maintain the same in a neat, clean and tidy conditions
throughout the contract period by replacing damaged portions, repainting soiled or deteriorated painted
sections and remove on completion. Adequate number of entrance with gates/barriers shall be provided and
manned at all times as approved by the engineer.
The fresh look of the hoarding shall be maintained at all times until completion of the works. Adequate
number of entrances with gates/barriers shall be provided at suitable locations and shall be manned at all
times as approved by the Engineer.
On completion of the project the site hoarding shall be dismantled and removed from site as directed by the
Section1, General
11
engineer leaving the site clean and clear.
18.
Temporary Works and Reinstatement
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary roads and tracks necessary for movements of plant
and materials, and clear them away on completion and make good all works damaged or disturbed.
The Contractor shall submit drawings and full particulars showing the site layout of all temporary works to the
engineer for his approval before commencing any works. The Engineer may require modifications to be
made if he considers them to be insufficient and the Contractor shall give effect to such modifications but
shall not relieved of his responsibilities for the sufficiency thereof.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain weatherproof sheds for storage of material pertinent to the works
both for his own use and for the use of the employer and clear them away on completion of the works.
All injury to the surface of the land, to the beds of water courses, projecting banks, etc., where disturbed by
the works (other than where specifically ordered by the engineer) shall be repaired by the Contractor or
Authorities concerned, at the Contractors expense. All such making good shall be to the approval of the
engineer.
The requirements detailed above shall be provided and maintained at the expense of the Contractor.
The employer shall not be liable for loss or injury of/ any type due to any temporary works.
19.
Locating, Protecting, Maintaining and Diverting Services and Public Utilities
The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services and public utilities such as electrical
cables, telephone lines, sewers, water supply lines, gas lines, pipes, wires, fences, etc., on the site, both
above and below ground. Service and other utilities may exist in certain locations not indicated on drawings.
Completeness or accuracy of information given on the drawings are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to ascertain their whereabouts from the concerned authorities before commencing any work
on site. The Contractor shall also obtain any re-routing requirements from the concerned authorities and
shall be responsible to carry out such works accordingly to the satisfaction of the authorities and the
engineer.
All electrical cables discover during excavation and found to be redundant shall be handed over to as
directed by Authority / Engineer.
Where diversions of services are not required in connection with the permanent works, the Contractor shall
protect, uphold, maintain and keep the same in working order in their existing locations and shall restore
them to their original condition on completion to the satisfaction of the engineer.
The Contractor shall make good, at his own expense, all damaged caused to any of the services and public
utilities by him or his sub-contractors, except where the Public Authority or Private Party Owning the same,
elects to make good the damage under their own arrangements. The cost incurred in making good damages
by the Public Authority or Private Party shall be paid to them by the Contractor on demand.
All costs in connection with the above works shall be borne by the Contractor without extra cost the
Employer.
The Employer shall not be liable for any loss or injury in connection with any of the above works.
20.
Watching
The Contractor shall allow for all necessary watching for the security of the works and the protection of the
public, including shelter and other facilities for any watchmen so required.
21.
Water for the Works
The Contractor shall provide all necessary water for the project including that required for testing and
commissioning of the MEP works including those of the sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors,
irrespective of availability of main supply. The Contractor shall provide all temporary plumbing and storage,
pay all charges, and alter, adapt and maintain temporary water supply arrangement as necessary and
Section1, General
12
remove and make good on completion.
22.
Temporary Power and Lighting for the Works
The Contractor shall provide all necessary artificial lighting and power for the execution and security of the
project and for protection and for the purposes of testing and commissioning of the MEP works including
those of the sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors, irrespective of availability of main supply, with
all meters, temporary wiring and fittings, etc., pay all charges, and alter, adapt and maintain the temporary
electrical power supply as necessary and remove and make good at completion.
23.
Safety and Security
It will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide full and continued security and safety for the site
including all site facilities until the substantial completion certificate is issued and all the works are completed
and the Contractor has demobilized.
The Contractor shall nominate qualified site based safety engineer dedicated for the project. He will within 30
days of handing over the site (to the Contractor) formulate a safety plan for the works and submit the same
for the approval of the engineer. Any comments of the engineer shall be incorporated and re-submitted till
final approval is obtained.
The safety engineer and the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring of that the safety plan as adhered
to and shall co-ordinate with the sub-contractors and or other persons required to be working on or near the
site for proper implementation during the execution of the works.
He shall make himself full conversant with the safety regulations and requirements of standard engineering
practice, of the local authorities and implement them effectively to the approval of the engineer.
Safety practice shall comply with the requirement the Local/Governing Municipality/development Control
Authorities.
The safety plans shall include but not be limited to the following safety, fire and personnel welfare aspects:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
Protective clothing
Overhead working
Scaffolding, general access, access to work places
Protection/Barricades to openings, edges and excavations
Transportation
Plant, Machinery & Tools
Carnage and Hoisting Equipment
Working at Height
Fire prevention Fire Fighting
Work in enclosed spaces
Electrical works and Temporary electrical works
Cylinder gases storage transport in use
Welding and gas cutting
Grinding Wheels
Cartridge operated fixing tools
Medical first aid, on-site medical first aid room and associated trained nursing staff, emergency
transport and hospitalization of injured persons
q. Smoking control regulations
r. Accident reporting and statistics
s. Training and Instruction
t. Hygienic facilities, i.e. rest rooms, messing facilities, washrooms and sanitary facilities, hot and cold
water, etc.
u. Provision and correct use of safety equipment
v. Appropriate use of known safety sign in all the jobs/tasks performed.
w. Use of hazard hats and safety boots for all site personnel, laborers and all others persons requiring
access to the site.
The Contractor shall also implement the following as part of the project safety procedures:
1. Program of safety orientation and training of all personnel/labor prior to commencing work on the site.
Section1, General
13
2. Provide safety and fire prevention procedures to be clearly posted about the site in relevant languages.
3. Routine checks on Contractors as well as sub-contractors first aid and other medical facilities to ensure
adequacy of supplies and services.
4. Routine checks on firefighting equipment and safety equipment to ascertain proper functionability.
5. Ensuring that all personnel wear proper safety clothing and apparel.
6. Handle claims for accidents sustained by employees or third parties working on project.
7. Enforce safety regulations
8. Maintain site safety records.
The Contractor shall provide among other items, the following safety were the employer and Engineers staff
at site / visiting the site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Safety helmets
Safety Shoes
Protective Eye Glass
Ear muffs
The safety engineer shall report to the engineer on the status of planning and implementation of activities to
ensure safe construction and operation of the works periodically, as agreed with the engineer.
Contractor shall submit for the engineers approval, detailed procedures for the control of fire, Medical firstaid and security, applicable to the site.
Contractor shall liaise with the engineer and shall observe and ensure that all their personnel observe, all
relevant security procedures particularly those applicable to performing works in an ongoing operating
environment.
24.
Contractors Quality Assurance and Quality (QA/QC)
The Contractor shall nominate a Site QA/QC Manager for approval by the Engineer. The QA/QC Manager
shall be an employee of the Contractor, reporting directly to the Contractors main office, and to the
Engineer. Additionally, the QA/QC Manager shall remain independent of the Contractors field operations.
And have the authority to accept or reject the Contractors work.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective QA/QC system. The Contractor shall b responsible for
ensuring that this sub-contractors and suppliers conform to the quality requirements as provided in the
contract documents.
The Contractor shall establish a Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) system to perform sufficient
inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his sub-contractors and nominate sub-contractors,
to ensure that all aspects of supply, construction, finishes, technical and functional performance, and
identification are covered. This control shall be established for all construction work performed as prescribed
in the contract except where the technical provisions of the contract provide for specific control by
inspections, test or other means. The Contractors QA/QC system shall specifically include the surveillance
and tests required in the technical provisions of the specification.
The Contractors QA/QC system is the means by which the Contractor assures himself that this construction
complies with the requirements of the contract documents. The system shall include as a minimum at least
three phases of inspection for all definable phases of construction as follows:
a) Preparatory Inspection:
Preparatory Inspection shall be performed prior to beginning any work on any definable phase of
construction and as shown in the approved construction program. It shall include a review of contract
requirements; a check to assure that all materials and /or equipment have been tested, submitted, and
approved; a check to assure that provisions have been made to provide required control testing; and plan
mock ups where appropriate and as required by the Engineer; examination of work area to ascertain that all
preliminary work has been completed; and a physical examination of materials and equipment to assure
that they conform to approved shop drawings or submittal data and that all materials and/or equipment are
on hand. The engineer shall be notified at least twenty four (24) hours in advance of the preparatory
inspections and such inspections shall be recorded in the QC report as specified here in.
b) Initial Inspection:
Section1, General
14
Initial inspection shall be performed as shown in the approved construction program and as soon as
representative portion of the particular phase of the construction has been accomplished and shall establish
the acceptable standard of workmanship, including a review of control testing for compliance with contract
requirements, review of mock up, identifying defective or damaged materials used, omissions, and
dimensional requirements. The engineer shall be notified at least twelve (12) hours in advance of the initial
inspection and such inspection shall be recorded in the QA/QC reports as specified herein.
c) Follow-up Inspections:
Follow-up inspections shall be performed daily to ensure continuing compliance with the contract
requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular phase of construction. Such
inspection shall be recorded in the QA/QC Reports as specified herein.
The Contractor and sub-contractor shall operate a quality system in accordance with ISO 9001 or ISO 9002
and shall furnish to the Engineer for his review as soon as practicable and in no event later than thirty (30)
days after receiving the letter of acceptance, a QA/QC plan which shall include the procedures, instruction,
and records to be used. This document will include as a minimum the following:
a) The QA/QC organization chart.
b) Qualification criteria of personnel
c) Authority and area of responsibilities of the QA/QC personnel. The Contractors QA/QC Manager shall
not have any duties other than the implementation of the QA/QC program.
d) Plan for accomplishing quality control inspections including that of his sub-contractors and nominated
sub-contractors works.
e) Detailed listing and designation of all tests to be performed. The engineer reserves the right to
determine which test may be performed by the technicians employed by the Contractor and those that
must be performed by an independent testing laboratory.
f)
Method of documenting QA/QC operations, inspections and testing.
g) A copy of a letter of direction to each Contractors representative responsible for QA/QC, outlining his
duties and responsibilities and signed by a responsible officer of the Contractor.
h) A narrative discussion of how Contractors QA/QC staff will accomplish the tasks assigned under
QA/QC procedure.
i)
An explanation as to how the Contractors QA/QC plan relates to other staff elements with regards to
all submittals, as-built drawings, safety and revisions to the contract.
Construction operations will not commence until the engineer has accepted the Contractors QA/QC plan.
However, the engineer may permit at his direction to proceed on specific phases of construction for which
the plan has been submitted and accepted. Progress payments will not be processed for any portion of work
that has a QA/QC requirement until that portion of the QA/QC plan has been submitted and accepted.
Prior to submittal of the Contractor QA/QC plan for acceptance, the Contractor shall meet with the engineer
to discuss the QA/QC system. The meeting shall develop mutual understanding relative to details of the
system, including the forms to be used for recording the QA/QC procedures, inspection, and administration
of the system.
The Contractors QA/QC organization shall be sufficiently staffed to perform the following tasks:
a) Conduct phased inspections (preparatory, initial and follow-up) as described above.
b) Perform all testing required under the Contractors QA/QC report herein after.
c) Prepare daily QA/QC reports in accordance with Contractors QA/QC report clause stated hereinafter.
d) Review and approved all submittals including shop drawings.
Section1, General
15
e) Inspects materials as they are delivered on site to ensure compliance with approved shop drawings
and Contract Specification.
f)
Conduct off-site inspections of supply items fabricated or assembled and services to be incorporated
into the work. Provide monthly report of off-site QA/QC activities. The Contractors QA/QC
representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for the release of the fabricated items for
shipment to the job site.
g) Maintain record of all QA/QC activities. These records shall be made available to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of issue of the letter of acceptance, report to the engineer, the
names and qualifications of personnel assigned full-time to the QA/QC function for approval of the engineer.
The named personnel shall prepare the QA/Qc program and remain as the basis of the QA/QC staff until a
QA/QC program has been submitted and accepted.
If at any time during the life of the contract the engineer determines the QA/QC staff is not capable of
performing all the tasks listed above, then the engineer may direct the Contractor to revise and / or
supplement the present organization structure at no additional cost to the employer.
Contractors QA/Qc Reports: The Contractor shall submit a daily QA/QC report in triplicate not later than the
end of the next working day. The report shall contain a record on inspections and tests for all work
accomplished subsequent to the previous report and shall include the following information:
A. Trade(s) of construction underway during the time frame of the report (i.e. earthwork, concrete work,
structural steel erection, etc.)
B. Phase wise inspections (preparatory, initial or follow-up), phase of construction and location of
inspection and /or tests that were made.
C. Results of inspection, including nature of deficiencies observed and corrective actions taken or to be
taken.
D. Report of tests performed, including those determined as failures and remedial action to be taken. Tests
results, including all computations shall be attached to the report form. Where test results cannot be
completed by the time the report is submitted, a note shall be added to the effect that the test was
performed, along with the date when the test results will be made available. Delayed tests results shall
be submitted with the report form on the date received.
E. Results of inspection of materials and equipment upon arrival at the site and prior to incorporation into
the work for compliance with submittal approvals, damaged and storage.
F. Instructions received from the engineer.
G. In all cases, the report must be verified and signed by the person delegated with this responsibility by
the Contractor. The verification is to contain the statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in
the work are in compliance with the terms of the contract except as noted.
H. Site safety.
The engineer shall approved laboratories used to perform test.
The engineer reserves the right to utilize the Contractors control testing laboratory and equipment to make
spot tests and to check the Contractors testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional
cost to the employer.
If recurring deficiencies indicate that the QA/QC system, personnel, inspections, tests and/or records are not
providing adequate control, the Contractor shall take corrective action as deemed necessary and as
directed by the engineer. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective
action. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative at the site of the work, shall be
deemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the engineer may
issue an order stopping all or part of the works until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The
Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to any such stop orders the subject for claim related to
Section1, General
16
extension of time or for excess costs or damages.
The Contractor shall notify the engineer in writing of any proposed change to the QA/QC system. No such
change shall be implemented without approval in writing by the engineer.
a. Latest Document
The QA/QC program shall provide for procedures, which will ensure that the applicable portions of the
contract (and any variations there to make in accordance with clause 51 of the General Conditions of
Contract) and the latest and approved shop drawings and samples are used for fabrication.
b. Testing and Inspection Devices
All measuring and testing devices shall be calibrated periodically against certified standard equipment.
Copies of certified calibration reports issued by relevant authorities / agencies should be made available for
review by the engineer.
c. Test Methods
The test shall include typical, routine and sample tests specified in British Standard or ASTM or equivalent
International Standards relating thereto and those corresponding to any special requirements or change
contained in the Specification. In addition, the engineer may direct special tests to be made to prove that the
equipment and materials supplied comply with the specification. The methods of tests for equipment and
materials not covered by a recognized standard and for which tests have not been specified shall be as
directed by the Engineer.
Material shall be tested before leaving the manufacturers premises as well as after delivery on the works
and the engineer shall have the right to reject material after delivery notwithstanding the preliminary test at
the manufacturers premises.
Should the employer decide not to send an inspector to the manufacturers works, the Contractor shall
obtain from the manufacturer, certificates of tests, etc., showing that the material have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the specification, but the omission of the employer to send an
inspector nor the submission or manufacturers certificates of test as aforesaid shall not relieve the
Contractor from his contractual responsibilities and commitments or shall affect the right of the employer or
the engineer to reject after delivery materials found to be unsuitable in accordance with the specification.
The Contractor shall meet all expenses in connection with the testing and inspection.
25.
Laboratories used to Perform Tests shall be approved by the Engineer
The engineer reserves the right to utilize the Contractors control testing laboratory and equipment to make
spot tests and to check the Contractors testing procedures, techniques, and tests results at no additional
cost to the Employer.
If recurring deficiencies indicate that the QC system, personnel, inspections, tests and/or records are not
providing adequate control, the Contractor shall take corrective action as deemed necessary and as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective
action. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative at the site of the work, shall be
deemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the engineer may
issue an order stopping all or part of the works until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of
the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject for claims relating to extension of time
or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed change to the QC system. No such
change shall be implemented without approval in writing by the engineer.
a. Latest Documents
The QC program shall provide for procedures which will ensure that the applicable portions of the contract
(and any variations thereto made in accordance with clause 51 of the General Conditions of Contract) and
the latest and approved shop drawings and samples are used for fabrication.
b. Testing and Inspection Devices
Section1, General
17
All measuring and testing devices shall be calibrated periodically against certified standard equipment.
Copies of certified calibration reports issued by relevant authorities/ agencies shall be made available for
review by the engineer.
c. Test Methods
The tests shall include typical, routine, and sample tests specified in British Standard or ASTM or equivalent
International Standards relating thereto and those corresponding to any special requirements or change
contained in the specification. In addition, the engineer may direct special tests to be made to prove that the
equipment and materials supplied comply with the specification. The methods of tests for equipment and
materials not covered by a recognized standard and for which tests have not been specified shall be as
directed by the engineer.
Material shall be tested before leaving the manufacturers premises as well as after delivery on the works
and the engineer shall have the right to reject material after delivery not with standing the preliminary test at
the manufacturers premises.
Should the employer decide not to send an inspector to the manufacturers works, the Contractor shall
obtain from the manufacturer, certificates of tests, etc., showing that the material have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the specification, but the omission of the employer to send an
inspector nor the submission or manufacturers certificates of test as aforesaid shall not relieve the
Contractor from his contractual responsibilities and commitments or shall affect the right of the employer or
the engineer to reject after delivery materials found to be unsuitable in accordance with the specification.
The Contractor shall meet all expenses in connection with the testing and inspection.
26.
Method Statement
The Contractor shall compile and submit a detailed schedule of method statements that are to be furnished
by him and his sub-contractors including nominated sub-contractors in fulfillment of his responsibilities as
specified and required to complete the project.
27.
Safeguard of Life and Health
The Contractor shall take and apply all necessary measures for the safeguarding of the life and health if his
workmen, including the provision and maintenance of adequate medical first aid facilities throughout the
contract period.
28.
Safety
The Contractor shall nominate a suitably qualified person to undertake the duties of safety officer and safety
supervision on site.
He shall make himself fully conversant with the safety regulations and requirements of standard engineering
practice and of the local authorities and implement them effectively to the approval of the engineer.
29.
Fire Protection
Adequate precaution shall be taken against fire throughout all the Contractors and sub-contractors
operations. Flammable material stocks shall be kept to an absolute minimum, and if any, shall be properly
handled and stored. Gasoline and other flammable liquids as well as pressurized gas tanks shall be stored
in and dispensed from safe containers. However, storage of such containers shall not be within the building.
Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall not permit fires to be built or open type heating
devices to be used in any part of the works.
Construction practices, including cutting and welding, and protection of adjacent materials during
construction shall be in accordance with standard practices for such work. The Contractor shall provide a
sufficient number of approved portable fire extinguishers properly, distributed within the building and around
construction site.
The Contractor shall comply with all safety regulations requirements of the Public Authorities and relevant
standard engineering practices.
Section1, General
18
The Contractor shall make arrangements for periodical inspection by local fire authorities and shall
cooperate with the said Authorities to promptly carry out their recommendations to ensure compliance.
30.
Scaffolding
The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, dismantle and clear away at completion proper and adequate
scaffolding including that required for sub-contractors and specialists. Putlog holes should be made good to
match the adjacent surface as the scaffolding dismantled. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all
safety precautions in connection with the stability of the scaffolding and for entire sufficiency for the work.
Scaffolding shall be a complete system from a manufacturer approved by the engineer. The Contractor shall
provide shop drawings and design calculations to prove the sufficiency of the proposed system for the
intended applications for the approval of the engineer as and when called for contractual responsibilities or
obligations.
31.
Contractors Design
The Contractor shall responsible for all designs that are designated or implied as his responsibility either
directly or indirectly
The Contractor shall comply with the relevant standards and codes in this design, adopting the design
parameters specified or shown on drawings. If the details are not readily available he shall ascertain the
requirement from the engineer in writing. The Contractor shall design the element and submit his design
along with detailed design calculation for the approval of the engineering at least 15 days in advance of the
scheduled dates of production / procurement.
The Contractor shall carry out any modification/redesign required, based on the comments of the engineer
and resubmit for his approval. The process will be repeated till final approval is accorded. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any delays in the above process and shall not be entitled for any additional coats or
time on this account.
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of items other than the above the needs design to the engineer for
confirmation and shall undertake the design work as approved. No claim shall be entertained for any design
requirement of any item not listed above if the same is not brought to the notice of the engineer during the
tender period.
Any approval accorded by the engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual
responsibilities and obligations.
The Contractor shall warrant the design as Fit for purpose and shall indemnify the Employer and the
engineer for any and all failures arising from such design. The Contractor shall provide details of his
professional indemnity insurance to cover the design work and liability undertaken by him, to the Employer
32.
Sheds
The Contractor shall provide and maintain weatherproof sheds, air conditioned where necessary, for
storage of materials pertinent to the works and clear them away at the completion of the works.
Cement and other perishable material storage areas shall have floors raised 150 mm off the ground. The
Contractor shall clear away at completion and make good all work disturbed.
33.
Keeping Site Free from Rubbish
The premises and the project site shall be maintained in a reasonably neat and orderly condition by the
Contractor and his sub-contractors and kept free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during
the entire construction period. The Contractor shall remove all crates, carton and other flammable waste
materials or trash from the work areas at the end of each working day.
Floors shall be broom-cleaned, or its equivalent, during the course of the work. Additional cleaning of all
other items which are provided as a part of the contract, including removal of dust, dirt, stains, and finger
marks from all finished wood, metal, marble or glass surfaces, shall be performed by the Contractor as
required to the approval of the engineer, before handover of the works.
Section1, General
19
The Contractor shall responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance of the premises and the project
site and for the co-ordination of the clean-up work of all trades. The Contractor shall ensure that each trade
shall clean and maintain its portion of the work as required and as directed by the Engineer. If the premises
and job site are not maintained properly, the engineer, may have any accumulations of waste materials or
trash removed and deducts such costs from payments due to the Contractor.
Elevator shafts, electrical pipe and duct shafts, chases, enclosed spaces and similar spaces which are
generally unfinished, shall be cleaned by the Contractor and left free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortar
drippings, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust, before requesting the engineer to make final
inspection of the work.
All areas of the building in which painting and finished work is to be performed shall be cleaned by the
Contractor or his sub-contractor(s) thoroughly just prior to the start of the work, and these areas shall be
maintained in satisfactory condition for painting and finishing. This cleaning shall include the removal of
trash and rubbish from these areas; broom cleaning of floors; the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust and
other extraneous materials from all finished surfaces, including but not limited to, all exposed structural
steel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, duct work, conduit and also all surfaces visible after all
permanent fixtures, grilles, registers and other such fixtures or devices are in place.
The Contractor shall institute an effective program of rodent and pest control for the entire site within the
construction limits. During the construction period, services of an experienced exterminator shall be utilized
if desired and as directed by the engineer. The Contractor shall provide suitable covered containers for all
edible rubbish and shall enforce their use by all employees. Containers shall be emptied and the contents
removed from the site as often as required to maintain an adequate rodent/pest control program.
34.
Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall arrange to have monthly record photographs of the works taken. These photographs
shall cover such extent of the works as the engineer will direct. The days upon which the photographs are
taken shall be as decided by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide the engineer with two sets of the monthly progress photographs with dates
imprinted on them.
One set shall comprise the following:
- One color negative of each photograph for an anticipated average maximum of fifty exposures per month.
- Seven colors prints (294 x 210 mm) off each a maximum of twenty of the negatives as selected by the
engineer.
The prints are to be processed by an approved professional laboratory and shall be in color on heavy weight
paper with matt finish. A label giving a brief description shall be affixed in the bottom right hand corner of
each photograph. Each photograph shall be provided in an approved clear plastic cover for binding.
The copyright of all photographs shall be vested in the employer and the negatives and prints shall be
delivered to the Engineer within 4 days of developing. The photographs shall not be used for any other
purposes what so ever without the employers approval.
35.
Setting Out
The Contractor shall employ an experienced Land Surveyor to carry out all setting out and surveying work.
Before the commencement of the works the Contractor will be supplied with the information necessary to
establish the lines and levels of the works. The engineer has shown on the drawings all the survey markers
established but can give no warranty for their existence at the start of the contract nor will he accept
responsibility for replacing any survey markers found to be missing. Where survey markers have been
established by the engineer the Contractor shall check the accuracy of their position and level and shall
immediately notify the engineer of any discrepancies.
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, supply the engineer with records in approval from relating to
all reference pegs and bench marks and shall keep such records up to date by formal notice to the
Engineer.
All survey reference pegs shall be carefully preserved except where construction requires their removal, and
before such removal the approval of the engineer shall be obtained.
In order to establish the existing ground levels over the areas of the works, the Contractor shall establish a
Section1, General
20
grid over the site and agree the levels with the engineer. The Contractor shall prepare drawings
representing the configuration of the areas which shall be signed by the engineer and the Contractor as
record.
The Contractor shall establish bench marks and grid lines at each floor showing exact floor elevations and
other lines and dimensional reference points as required.
36.
Shop Drawings
Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings on reproducible sheets, prepared
specifically for the project for all disciplines and as instructed by the engineer. The shop drawings shall
show adjacent conditions and related work. Accurate field dimensions and conditions shall be shown. Any
special coordination with other trades required shall be clearly noted. All drawings shall be prepared using
AutoCAD rel. 2007 software.
Not with standing any specific requirements. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress
of the work it appears to the Contractor that for the proper execution of a specific part of the works, shop
drawings are necessary, these drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the engineer
for approval. The engineer shall have authority to order at any time and the Contractor shall provide any
number of shop drawings which, in the opinion of the engineer are necessary for the proper execution of a
specified work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the above mentioned work unless these shop
drawings are approved by the engineer.
All shop drawing shall be properly checked and coordinated with all connected trades/disciplines by the
Contractor and shall be signed by a designated qualified coordination engineer as proof of verification and
correction and submitted to the engineer.
37.
Record Drawings
The Contractor shall maintain one complete set of drawings of all disciplines (Architectural, Structural,
Electrical, Mechanical, Civil, Landscaping, External works, etc.), at site exclusively to note all
deviations/changes and submission at the time of completion of the works. All changes/deviations and
details such as levels of foundations, routing of services, invert levels of pipes, cables, manholes, etc., the
position of tees, bends, clean outs and other appurtenances, details of underground services encountered
and any other relevant data, locating dimensions where appropriate shall be accurately and neatly recorded
on these drawings as work proceeds. All changes noted/recorded on the drawings shall be submitted to the
engineer for approval as and when the changes occur and are recorded.
38.
As Built and Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals
The Contractor shall 15 days if issuance of provisional completion certificate, prepare a complete new set of
drawings for all disciplines of the project as executed incorporating all changes/deviations and all the
recorded data on the set of record drawings maintained at site and submit the same in duplicate to the
engineer for approval. The Contractor shall verify and reflect any modifications and/or changes noted by the
engineer on the submittals and shall resubmitted to the engineer for approval. This process shall be
repeated until final approval of the engineer is accorded. When approved by the engineer, the Contractor
shall submit three copies of As-built drawings duty stamped As Built as follows before issuance of taking
over certificate.
a. Three set of white paper copies duly marked As built each trade/discipline in 4 ring white plastic file.
b. One electronic copy on compact disc., (AutoCAD Rel. 2007).
The FINAL PAYMENT CERTIFICATE will not be made until the AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND O & M
MANUALS are submitted. The final payment certificate will not be made except for the actual works that
have been completed in accordance with the specifications and been duly presented on the As Built
Drawings.
TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE will not be issued until a full set of As Built Drawings and O & M manuals
are submitted and accepted by the Employer /Engineer.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for the correction preparation
Section1, General
21
and supplying of the above requirements.
39.
Customs and Local Dues
All state dues, toll rates, duties, fees and charges in connection with the works shall be deemed to be
included by the Contractor in his contract unit rates.
40.
Expatriate Labor
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of expatriate labor and staff if required
and for the housing, health, welfare and repatriation of same shall conform in all respects with the conditions
and requirements of any law and of any regulations or orders of the government of the country where in the
site is situated or any authority which may be applicable including any such Law, Regulation or Order passed
or made or coming into force after the date of Tender and /or during the execution of the works.
41.
Alternative Materials
Should the Contractor wish to offer alternative items or materials to those specified he shall supply details of
such alternatives together with details of any reduction in the contract price should the alternative be allowed
to be substituted for the specified items or materials. All offered alternatives shall comply fully in all respects
with the specifications of the particular items or materials. Acceptance or refusal of any alternatives will be
entirely at the discretion of the engineer.
If during the course of the contract certain materials or items required for use in the works should be
unobtainable, despite the best effort of the Contractor, the Contractor may offer for the approval of the
engineer alternative materials or items, provided that they possess the minimum requirements of the
originally specified material.
In the event of acceptance of any alternative materials or items a suitable price reduction shall be made in
respect of any decrease in value but not price addition shall be made in respect of increase in value.
In the event of refusal of any alternatives materials or items the Contractor shall not be relieved of any of
obligations under the contract and shall be solely liable for any delay or loss occasioned by his failure to
provide the materials or items as specified.
42.
Material, Goods and Workmanship Generally
The whole of the goods materials and workmanship incorporated in the works shall be new and of the best
quality available and shall be to the approval of the engineer. Should the engineer discover on the works any
materials other than those specified or approved, he may order their removal from the site and for their
replacement as specified. All cost incurred for such removal and replacement, and of associated works shall
be borne by the Contractor.
43.
Schedule Procurement of Material
The Contractor shall produce a Schedule of Procurement of Materials and submit the same within 3 weeks
of commencement of works for the approval of the engineer. This schedule shall give the following
information:
Item to be procured
Quantity
Date of submission for approval
Date of approval
Date of order
Expected date of arrival at site
Date required on site
The Contractor is required to procedure documentary evidence that all materials or items have been ordered
in sufficient time to ensure their arrival on site sufficiently in advance of their incorporation in the works.
No claim will be considered for extension of the contract period due to non-availability of materials as a result
of the Contractors failure to comply with this requirement.
Section1, General
22
44.
Sample and Testing Materials
A. Samples
Prior to ordering or delivering any materials or manufactured item to the site, the name and address of the
supplier(s) and, where required by the engineer, adequate samples, schedules and manufacturers
certificates of all the materials and goods to be used in the works shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval at no extract cost to the project.
In case of rejection further samples, until final approval is accorded, shall be submitted. The Contractor shall
have no claims to extra cost or time lost due to improper submissions, the resultant rejections and the
approval process.
If considered necessary and ordered by the engineer, the samples shall be tested for compliance at the
Contractors expense in a laboratory approved by the engineer.
B. Testing
The Contractor shall be responsible for the sampling, storage, transportation and laboratory testing of
products and materials as required in the specification.
The Contractor shall make available on site necessary equipment for the use of the engineer for tests to be
conducted at site.
E.g.
-Slump cone with base plate and tamping rod.

-Thermometer suitable for measuring concrete temperature.
-Magnetic flux principle instrument for non-destructive method of testing paint film thickness.
- Etc.
In additional, suitable experienced labor to carry out the operations in connection with the above shall be
provided by the Contractor as required by the engineer.
The Contractor shall allow for the costs of the above in his units areas.
45.
Co-ordination of Builders Work
The Contractor shall coordinate the requirements for holes, fixing and other similar builders work.
The Contractor shall ensure that such builders work as shown on the drawings is in accordance with his own
and his sub-contractors requirements. Details of holes, fixing, etc., which are not shown on the drawings but
are required by the Contractor or his sub-contractor shall be submitted to the engineer for his written
approval. No holes or fixings shall be performed without prior approval by the engineer. No claim will be
entertained for this work and for any abortive work executed due to lack of co-ordination.
46.
Periodic Reports
The Contractor must present to the engineer detailed daily/weekly reports and monthly summary report
showing the following:
Labor force working during the period.

Quantity and type of materials and equipment used during the period.
Quantity of works executed.
Climatic conditions with special reference to any direct effect they may have on the works.
Unforeseen circumstance (if any) which may hamper the progress of the works.
Graph showing the relation between the executed portions o the works and the corresponding
portions in the work program.
The Contractor shall prove to the engineer upon his request the correctness of the above mentioned reports
without having the right to use such documents to support a claim for any extra payment or compensation
whatsoever in regard or in relation to such reports. However this shall not vitiate the right of the engineer to
use the report as evidence to decide on any aspects connected with delays and claims.
Section1, General
23
47.
Construction Program
The Contractor shall prepare a co-ordinated program of all the works, including incorporation of the works of
his sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors and submit the same for the approval of the engineer.
The program shall be prepared using proprietary software Prima Vera.
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the engineer, within 30 days of issue of notice to commence a fully
weighted S curve indicating planned construction effort and related labor and plant histograms.
S curve shall be updated with actual progress on weekly basis and incorporated in the Contractors Weekly
Report.
48.
Site Progress Meetings
During the course of the work, site progress shall be held at regular intervals, at least once every two weeks,
or at other intervals as directed by the engineer, for the purpose of coordinating the Contractors works and
to ensure that full compliance with the various sequences of the contract are maintained. Minutes of such
site meetings will be recorded by the Engineer and copies will be distributed to all persons concerned and
full effect shall be given to all instructions contained therein.
Prior to such meetings the Contractor shall give to the Engineers Representative details in writing of that
portion of the works he proposes to construct during the coming two weeks with details of the plant and
methods he proposes to employ. These proposals shall be discussed at the meeting and no work based on
such proposals shall proceed without the approval of the Engineers Representative.
The Contractor shall have no claim against the employer for costs incurred by him in changing the method of
working or in the provision and use of other additional plant.
49.
Safety of Adjoining Existing Buildings, Roads, Services, Etc.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for the works particularly those
excavations which are adjoining existing buildings, roads, services, etc., and shall protect such buildings,
roads, services, etc., from damage or collapse.
50.
Safe Access and Maintenance of Traffic Flows
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary roads and tracks necessary for movement of plant
and materials, and clear them away at completion and make good all works damaged or disturbed.
The necessity for, provision of, details of, and maintenance of temporary road diversions and existing road
closures shall be subject to the approval of the engineer, the traffic police and the municipality.
No public or private facility shall be removed or interrupted without written permission of the engineer. Such
permission will not be given until suitable permanent or temporary alternatives approved by the engineer
have been provided by the Contractor or in the case of accommodation works, by the owner of the facility or
his agents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangements with the Statutory Undertakings, Public
Authorities and the Engineer, as appropriate, concerning the phasing into his program, of all works which
need to be done by the Contractor or his sub-contractors.
The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by the Public, Statutory Authority or the
Employer for providing safe passages to the adjoining building, for the support and full protection of all
mains, pipes, cables and other apparatus during the progress of the works, and shall construct and provide
to the satisfaction of the Authority concerned, all works necessary for the prevention of damage or
interruption of services. If in the execution of works, any subsidence is caused by any act of neglect or
default of, or any damage to any apparatus, or any interruption of or delay to the provision of any service, by
the Contractor, he (the Contractor) shall bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred by the authority
concerned in making good such damage and shall make full compensation to the authority for any loss
sustained by reason of such act to neglect, default, damage, interruption or delay.
The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the works, afford facilities to properly accredited
agents of any Public, Statutory Authority and the Engineer for access to all or to any of their apparatus
Section1, General
24
situated in or under the site, as may be necessary for inspecting, reporting, maintaining, removing, renewing,
or altering such apparatus in connection with the construction of the works or for any other purpose
whatsoever.
The position of Services mains, drains, sewers and telephone lines shown on the drawings have been based
on information extracted from the records of the various bodies and must be regarded as approximate only.
The engineer does not guarantee either the accuracy of the information or that the location of such
apparatus is as shown on the drawing, or no warranty must be implied as to the position, depth, size or
gradient thereof. The Contractor must make his own enquires of the statutory undertakers, public Authorities
and the engineer and satisfy himself as to the exact position of such apparatus and the depth, size and
gradient thereof.
51.
Protection of Finished Works
The Contractor shall carefully protect his own finished work, the works of his subcontractors and the works of
Local Authorities if any, up to the time of completion and final handover of the project. The Contractor shall
be liable for the reinstatement of any work damaged during the progress of the works, caused by any reason
whatsoever.
Any and all temporary barricading, diversions, enclosures as required to suit the nature of the works. Shall
be provided to protect the works including for the works of his sub-contractors.
52.
Working Environmental Conditions
It shall be the Main Contractors responsibility to ensure that the temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained in respect of his own works and those of the domestic sub-contractors and nominated subcontractors to suit the following:
I. As per the dictates of the manufacturer/supplier/applicator for each and every item used in the project like,
timber doors, partitions, timber flooring, waterproofing to wet areas, painting and tapes used to cover
cracks and/or joints, false ceilings, etc. The listed items are only examples and are not to be considered
as an exhaustive list.
II. Where toxic items are applied / used.
III. Welfare of men working in enclosed areas / cladded spaces.
IV. Where explosive, flammable or otherwise hazardous products and materials are being handled.
The exact methods used shall be subject to the approval of the engineer. The Contractor shall provide
details of materials/ areas requiring environmental control and a method statement of his proposed
procedures for the approval of the engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all local and international codes and guide lines are strictly followed as
applicable.
All costs incurred for the above including any payment / arrangements with authorities in connection with the
above shall be borne by the Contractor.
53.
Access to or Possession or Use of the Site
The Contractor shall restrict access to the site to those persons entitled to be present under the Conditions
of contract and to persons authorized by the employer to visit the works. The employer shall give the
Contractor sufficient notice prior to bringing his invites onto the site and the Contractor shall allow for taking
reasonable precautions during such visits against the possibility of injury to persons. All visitors to site must
be provided with hard hats. No minors shall be allowed on site.
The Contractor shall provide at all times throughout the duration of the works, from commencement to the
date of the certificate of final completion, proper means of access including ladders, scaffolds, etc., and the
necessary attendance to move and adapt same as directed, for the inspection by the engineer.
The Contractor shall remain solely responsible for complying with regulations imposed by any statutory
authority regarding access to the site including allowing for the cost of such compliance.
Section1, General
25
The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to confine his activities to, and to prevent his workmen
from trespassing beyond the site area, working limits and any nuisance or detriment caused to the public, the
employer, or owner, or occupier of existing adjacent premises or land, including premises handed over to the
employer prior to final completion by the Contractor or those employed by him, shall be stopped immediately
if any compliant is made. If such trespass does occur the Contractor shall make good at his own cost any
loss or damage arising by reason of such trespass and shall indemnify the employer from any claims
resulting from the same.
The Contractor will be held solely responsible for ensuring that no nuisance arises from whatever cause and
if such nuisance arises through neglect of proper precautions the Contractor shall indemnify the employer
against all claims, which maybe in this respect. The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose other
than carrying out this contract and the sitting of spoil, heaps, etc., necessary for the execution of the works.
54.
Limitation of Working Space
The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operation of the workmen to the
site and shall not unreasonable encumber the area with his material. Storage of site materials or for any
other purposes is strictly not allowed under Authority regulating.
Appropriate and sufficient temporary barricades shall be provided to the approval of the engineer to confine
the Contractors activities and personnel, to ensure privacy and safety.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for complying with Local Authority regulations regarding fencing
the site, storage of materials and spoil heaps, unloading of materials, temporary buildings, sanitary
arrangements, etc. No claims for delay or costs will be entertained in the event of work being stopped for a
breach of regulations.
55.
Limitations of Working Hours
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of clause 45 of the conditions of contract. Where night
shift construction work is involved prior approval from Authority shall be obtained.
56.
Construction Procedure, Progress Reporting and Co-ordination Procedure
A. INTRODUCTION
The scope of Project Control Service to be performed by the CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited
to, functions as described under the following major headings:
Preparation of Project Control Procedures and Documentation
Project Planning & Scheduling
Project Progress Measurement
The Contractor shall use computer systems for the Project Control Services listed above. Such systems shall
be capable of electronic interface between the Contractors Hone office (if applicable) and the
CONSTRUCTION SITE. Software facilities shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as approved by the
Engineer. However, preference will be given the primavera package Microsoft Project 1998.
The Project Control Service requirements and systems described hereafter are provided for guidance and
establishment of minimum PROJECT requirements. The CONTRACTOR may use his own house systems,
provided by the ENGINEERS requirements as stated herein are met and are approved by the engineer.
B. PROJECT CONTROL PROCEDURES AND SYSTEMS
The CONTRACTOR shall develop detailed procedures for each of the major control functions described in
this section, for review and APPROVAL by the engineer.
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a systems plan, identifying each computer (hardware, software and
communications links) to be used in the control and reporting of the WORK, the interface between systems
where applicable, and SCHEDULE for implementation of the systems.
Systems Users Manuals shall be provided for each system, detailing computer hardware and software used
in the works.
Section1, General
26
C. OVERALL PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING
The CONTRACTOR shall implement the overall Project Planning and Scheduling Controls on a hierarchical
basis consisting of four levels:
C1
Level 1 Master Schedules

Level 2 Overall project CPM Network and initial 90-DAY Starter Schedule.
Level 3 Detailed SCHEDULES
Level 4 Week Look Ahead schedules
LEVEL 1 Master Schedule
Overall Progress curves shall be developed to monitor the progress of the WORKS. The curves shall be
based on the APPROVED Overall Project Master Schedule, including breakdowns for all disciplines, and
shall cover:
a. DRAWINGS/Documents, Product Descriptions and Data Sheets Progress.
b. Subcontracting Services progress.
c. Procurement Progress.
EQUIPMENT/Packages
BULK MATERIALS
Overall Procurement Progress
d. Construction progress
-
Each area by trade/discipline

Each Subcontract
Over CONSTRUCTION Progress
e. Commissioning Progress
-
Each System
Total Progress
f. Overall WORK Progress

The S Curves will be supported by summary bar charts developed from level 2 CPM Networks.
The curves shall be updated monthly to display actual versus plan progress as well as projected trend for the
remaining period. These shall be issued as part of the Monthly Progress Report.
g. Overall Manpower Histogram
Manpower histograms shall be developed showing the planned manpower, by discipline, for the entire
duration of the WORKS, separately for overseas office (if applicable), local office and the CONSTRUCTION
WORKSITE activities. Actual mobilize manpower shall be indicated to show comparison with planned
manpower, and monthly updates shall be included in the monthly progress report.
C2
Level 2 Overall Project CPM Network
A. A computerized networks shall be prepared in precedence format, and the coding structure shall provide
reference to project phase and plant number as per WORK breakdown structure for ease of activity
identification and report sorting.
B. By use of sub-codes as per WORK breakdown structure, the network activities shall relate to overseas
office (if applicable), engineering and procurement, and CONSTRUCTION activities. For this purpose,
the network coding structure shall be developed by the CONTRACTOR for the review and APPROVAL
of the Engineer.
C. It is essential that the network contain logic that relates engineering DRAWINGS with detailed SHOP
DRAWINGS related to EQUIPMENT AND VENDOR data.
D. Procurement WORK for each EQUIPMENT / package item shall show the activities associated with the
Section1, General
27
Bid, Evaluation, and Commit Cycle, including Engineer review period, with additional activities for
manufacture, information, shipment and delivery to SITE.
E. For sub-contract work, each CONSTRUCTION Subcontract Bid, Evaluation and Award cycle shall be
identified separately. CONSTRUCTION networks shall be prepared primarily on area basis. The
CONSTRUCTION networks for each area shall contain sufficient detail to allow identification of start of
each major trade activity, logic links between each trade, and in particular to each area relative to
EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS deliveries; through installation of EQUIPMENT / packages and achieving
overall CONSTRUCTION completion.
F. A separate commissioning network shall be developed, identifying activities for each system.
G. The network shall be updated monthly for actual progress and minor change in activity logic and/or
durations to suit current information. All logic and duration changes shall be reviewed with the engineer.
Following the update, a critical listing shall be produce identifying chain of events with a float of thirty
(30) days or less. The critical activity listing shall be reviewed with the engineer to identify problem areas
and corrective actions necessary. The critical activity listing shall be included in the Monthly Progress
Report along with suggested corrective actions.
H. As referenced in the overall Project Master Schedule, key milestone in the CPM network shall be
identified and assigned fixed target dates, to validate the durations of the major activities shown on the
Overall Project Master Schedule and consequently to identify critically where applicable.
I.
The complete CPM network may contain a large number of activities (excluding logic restraints for a
precedence network) and therefore it is recommended that the network be prepared on a sub-net basis,
with ENGINEERS review of the individual sub-nets as they are completed. The total network shall be
completed within ten (10) weeks after the EFFECTIVE DATE of the CONTRACT.
J.
Review and APPROVAL periods by ENGINEERS shall be identified as separate activities within the
network.
C3
90 DAY Starter Schedule
At the commencement of the PROJECT, and prior to development of detailed logic networks, a 90-day starter
schedule shall be issued which shall illustrate in detail all major works anticipated within the period, by
discipline/trade. This schedule is available and implemented.
C4
LEVEL 4 Detailed Schedules
The control tools included in this level are primarily all documents which are used to track and measure
progress of the WORK at identifiable deliverable levels, including, but not limited to:
A. DRAWINGS/Documents SCHEDULE
A detailed SCHEDULE shall be prepared for all DRAWINGS including workshop drawings and other
documents to be developed on the PROJECT for each discipline of engineering. Based on the level 2
network, SCHEDULE requirement dates shall be incorporated for each document, by discipline. Planned and
actual dates of completion of different stage for each DRAWING/Document shall be shown. Wherever the
SCHEDULE date cannot be accomplished, this will be reflected in the forecast. These shall include all
SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS< MATERIAL requisitions and other documents to be produced for each
engineering discipline. This SCHEDULE shall also be computerized to enable generation of reports to meet
ENGINEERS requirements like:
-
Summary table by discipline and by type of documents planned together with actual achievements for
the period and cumulative.
Documents planned for completion but not complete.
Documents due for issue in next period.
B. Procurement SCHEDULE
A detailed procurement SCHEDULE shall be prepared covering all requisitions on the PROJECT in the form
Section1, General
28
of Procurement Control Log. Based on the Level 2 network, SCHEDULE requirement dates shall be
incorporated for each stage against each requisition to show the WORK accomplished, and wherever
SCHEDULE dates cannot be met, the forecast dates shall be indicated for the immediate and further stages.
The required at SITE date shall also be indicated against each requisition and where the forecast date is likely
to exceed the required at SITE date, recommended recovery action shall be indicated by the CONTRACTOR
under Remarks Column.
C. Subcontracting Schedule
Using the detailed Level 2 Network as the basis, a detailed subcontracting SCHEDULE shall be prepared for
all filed contracts planned to be let on the PROJECT, in the form of Subcontracts Control Log. This
SCHEDULE shall show the required dates under all subcontract stages (from formulation of subcontracts
documents, review bids received and award of the contracts) according to the agreed milestones.
D. Manufacturing and MATERIALS Delivery SCHEDULE
Based on the Level 2 Detailed Network, all SCHEDULED manufacturing and delivery requirements shall be
incorporated for each major purchase order. The MATERIALS status shall indicate the SCHEDULE, forecast
and actual manufacturing status as per the identified stages of manufacturing process and delivery dates
against major purchase order.
E. Linkage between Network Activities and Documents
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that a system is used whereby all engineering documents and MATERIAL
requisition in the Control Register are directly linked with related activity numbers on the CPM network so that
all planned, actual and forecast dates of deliverable match with the network activity SCHEDULES.
C5
Planning and Scheduling of CONSTRUCTION WORKS

a. CONTRACTOR shall commence the SITE WORK on the dates indicated in the AGREEMENT and
complete the WORKS on or before the dates indicated in the AGREEMENT.
b. At all times, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish sufficient work forces, MATERIALS, facilities,
CONSTRUCTION plant and EQUIPMENT, workout the hours, perform the WORK in character,
sequence and timings, and control progress of the WORKS so as to achieve completion of the
WORKS on or before the scheduled completion dates specified in the AGREEMENT.
c.
CONTRACTOR shall produce a WORK SCHEDULE for APPROVAL and use the detailed work
SCHEDULE as the basis of reporting progress of the works, forecasting and SCHEDULE control.
CONTRACTOR shall revise the Work SCHEDULE only to reflect the effect of approved VARIATIONS
ORDERS, and at regular weekly intervals the CONTRACTOR shall update the work SCHEDULE to
reflect actual progress of the WORKS.
d. If the CONTRACTORS performance of the WORK deviates from or does not conform to the Work
SCHEDULE, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written plan of SCHEDULE recovery for the WORK to
the ENGINEER, detailing all activities to be undertaken by the CONTRACTOR to improve
performance so as to achieve compliance with the Work SCHEDULE.
e. The CONTRACTOR will plan and schedule field activities well in advance of the start of SITE WORK.
The engineer will review and comment upon the engineering and procurement SCHEDULES to
ensure that the engineering and procurement work priorities are aligned with the construction plan for
the PROJECT. Field planning and scheduling updates shall take into account the current status of
engineering and procurement activities and shall include, but not limited to the following:
Submitting for review of the engineer, the basis and formats for the types SCHEDULES to be used
by the CONTRACTOR indicating the frequency of up-date.
Preparing within agreed time scale(s), the following documentation for WORKS.
-
Section1, General
Overall Construction Schedule.

Detailed Construction Schedules / CPM networks for construction activities.
Detailed Commissioning Schedule.
Summary bar charts and S Curves for progress of the WORKS
Subcontractors resource based Construction bar chart schedules and physical progress
S Curves.
29
Furthers details on Construction Planning requirements are detailed in Clauses H to K.

Level 4 3 Week Look-Ahead Schedules for DRAWINGS / Documents, Procurement and
Construction Activities
C6
C7
Detailed quantified WORK program Schedules.

Manpower Loading Charts (direct and indirect and showing split by craft).
Construction Equipment Loading Charts.
Three-week Look-Ahead Schedules shall be prepared covering activities in detail for all
trades/disciplines, to indicate specific items of WORK to be accomplished over the forth coming 2
weeks and activities completed in the previous week. This SCHEDULE shall form part of the Weekly
Progress report and be updated weekly. This SCHEDULE shall highlight any internal or external
information flow or decision restraints that are hindering progress.
Level 3 and 4 schedules provide the detailed basis for update of the level 1 and Level 2 Schedules
and Overall Project Master Schedule, by either direct electronics or manual interface.
Provision of SCHEDULES / Networks to ENGINEER
The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with the various SCHEDULES and networks together with
updates through electronic mail, floppy discs and hard copies throughout the duration of the PROJECT.
D. PROJECT PROGRESS MEASUREMENT
D1
Basis of Progress Measurement
The CONTRACTOR shall develop a detailed Progress Measurement System for review and APPROVAL of
the ENGINEER. Planned and Actual Progress for the total PROJECT shall be assessed for all activities on
the PROJECT. Progress will be split over the following:
a. Drawings/Documents
b. Subcontracting
c.
Ordering, manufacturing and Delivery of EQUIPMENT
d. CONSTRUCTION (including progress of CONSTRUCTION activities and commissioning activities).

e. Overall PROJECT Physical Progress will be calculated based upon fixed weight factors for the major
components of the PROJECT as specified below:
f.
D2
DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS
SUBCONTRACTING
Ordering, Manufacturing and delivery of EQUIPMENT / Packages and
Bulk Materials.
Construction including commissioning.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit computerized systems which allows for the weighting of various
activities and shall use a common unit of measurement relative to the total PROJECT for accurate and
meaningful measurement of Overall Project Progress.
DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS and Subcontracting Progress measurement
a. For DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for the APPROVAL of the ENGINEER,
a weighted listing of all DRAWINGS/Documents with their planned and forecasted actual issues dates.
This listing shall include but not be limited to the following:
Product description and date sheets

List of requisitions for purchase
List of requisitions for subcontracts
Detailed design drawings
Section1, General
30
Workshop drawings
b.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit for the ENGINEERS APPROVAL a computerized Document Status
System which records and reports document progress with appropriate summarization
c.
Capabilities. The system shall be capable of interfacing with network activities.
d. Progress shall be determined completeness of documents, which include SHOP DRAWINGS, product
descriptions, data sheets, specifications, and materials requisitions for each discipline. Weightage for
each document shall be based on the estimated man hours needed for the same.
e. For calculating progress of various types of documents in various disciplines, the CONTRACTOR shall
propose standard progress stages/milestone for each type of document occurring throughout the life
cycle of each document along with allocated percentage progress for each stage milestone. These
standards may or may not be universal across drawings types and/or disciplines. The incremental
progress for each step shall be recognized when the milestone is achieved. No intermediate prorated
progress credit between two successive milestones shall be recognized. The proposed measurement
system shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval. The milestone percentage (%) progress for
various documents types to be fallowed shall be submitted for the Engineers review and approval. The
Contractor may add additional document types as appropriate.
D3
Subcontracting Progress Measurement
The Contractor shall submit for the engineers review and approval a system of measuring the progress for
subcontracting activities. Total subcontracts shall be weighted depending upon their estimated
cost/complexity.
The following milestone and percentage progress shall be used for each subcontractor:
-
Issue RFQ to bidders
35%
Award recommendation and

Approval by the Engineer
Sub-contract award
55%
Total
D4
10%
_______________
100%
==============
Ordering, Manufacturing and Delivery of Equipment / Packages and Bulk Materials
a. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval a system for progress measurement of
ordering, manufacturing and delivery of the equipment / packages and bulk materials.
b. The system shall include activities starting with issuing inquiry, receiving bids, evaluation, ordering and
continue through delivery to SITE. Each shall be weighted depending upon the estimated
cost/complexity.
c.
The following milestone and percentage progress shall be used to measure progress for each category
of equipment / package items and bulk material:
Order placed
10%
Issue of final approved shop drawing

Product Description and data sheets
10%
Materials Inspected / Tested and Accepted
60%
FOB 10%
Receipt at SITE
Section1, General
10%
_____________
31
TOTAL
D5
100%
==============
Construction Progress Measurement system
The CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit to the ENGINEER for review, comment and approval, a
quantitative system for measurement of CONSTRUCTION progress. Detailed activity weight factors will be
calculated based upon estimated efforts required to perform the unit quantity. The system will be fully
detailed and computer based and shall be the basis of weekly/monthly reporting of PROJECT progress. The
CONTRACTOR may develop his own weighting system which shall be implemented only after APPROVAL
of the ENGINEER.
A. PROGRESS MONITORING
a.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for measuring and monitoring progress on a weekly

basis, by marking up the weekly work SCHEDULE with the physical work completed and
recording the actual percent completely on each activity.
b.
The percentage achieved shall be measured using the ENGINEERS APPROVED progress
measurement procedure. Overall physical progress will be calculated by using weighted
factors and summarized as required by rolling up at higher levels.
c.
The actual progress will be compared with the scheduled progress and for any shortfall, the
CONTRACTOR shall promptly propose to the ENGINEER appropriate recovery plan and
adjustments to immediate works programs and SCHEDULE to ensure that over scheduled
progress is achieved and planned completion dates are maintained.
B. PROGRESS REVIEWING
a.
The CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain complete and accurate details of the works
as they progress.
b.
For the purpose of reviewing progress of the works, the Contractor shall report and present
details of progress of the works, in accordance with the agreed format.
c.
At all times the CONTRACTOR shall allow the ENGINEER to have access to the
CONTRACTORS documents and records that support the CONTRACTORS reporting of
progress of the works
d.
The CONTRACTOR shall review and up-date these documents at mutually agreed intervals
and issue the same for the engineers review.
e.
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a detailed physical progress measurement
system for the engineers review and approval.
f.
The CONTRACTOR shall monitor actual progress of the works against the schedule using
detailed work schedules as applicable, identifying problem areas and shall propose
schedule recovery plans.
g.
The CONTRACTOR shall measure and report to the ENGINEER actual productivity against
predetermined standards to ensure manpower loading is adequate and effective utilized to
achieve the desired progress.
h.
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare monthly graphical presentations of the actual versus
planned trends for progress, man-hours, and productivity for the review of the ENGINEER.
i.
The CONTRACTOR shall develop forecasts for the activities still be completed, to establish
whether current schedule completion dates can be met.
j.
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare DRAWING and MATERIALS hold-up reports, for the
engineers review, due to non-availability of required drawings and materials, impeding the
current work schedule.
Section1, General
32
k.
CONTRACTOR shall conclude schedule risk analysis on a quarterly basis using a

computerized system to predict probability of project completion as per target and present
the analysis to the engineer with full backup.
C. PROGRESS REPORTING
a.
i.
The Contractor shall implement an engineer approved progress reporting system. The
Contractor shall submit to the engineer daily, weekly and monthly progress reports,
providing the following information as a minimum:
Daily Reports
Highlights of manpower and major CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT employed, MATERIALS received,
key milestone achieved and other major activities of the day.
ii.
Weekly Reports
Highlights of the weeks activities. The actual progress versus planned progress in quantitative terms,
work availability and planned work for following week and major areas of concern along with proposed
corrective actions. Manpower and construction equipment loading chart showing actual versus
planned numbers and a three week look-ahead schedule shall be submitted by each subcontractor.
The Contractor shall submit a summarized weekly report for the total project in a format approved by
the engineer. The report shall be submitted on the first working day of each week.
iii.
-
Monthly Progress Report

This report shall be submitted to the Engineer by the 5th day of each month.
The exact format of the report will be mutually agreed between the engineer and the Contractor. As a
minimum, it shall include the following:
Section1, General
Executive summary narrative highlighting major home office (if applicable), Local
Office and construction worksite activities accomplished during the month.
Status of works, overall and a comparison between planned and actual
Areas of concern.
Proposed remedial actions recommended correcting stated situations and avoiding
potential problems.
Effectiveness of remedial actions taken previously.
Narrative and summary of drawings/documents progress-actual progress planned.
Narratives and summary of subcontract award progress-actual progress planned.
Narrative and summary of procurement progress-actual progress planned.
Construction progress activities performed and progress achieved. Actual versus
planned by subcontracts and overall construction.
Plans and schedules including important activities in the immediate future, up-dates
and forecasts.
SITE MATERIALS delivery details and forecasts including specific information on
late materials deliveries likely to affect progress.
Progress, productivity and man-hour data to include planned, actual and forecast
progress together with trend identification and analysis, by each subcontract.
Project Schedule status, highlighting the status of critical activities along with
schedule trend analysis, indicating actions proposed to be taken to ensure timely
completion of the project.
Project milestone status.
Drawings and materials hold-up analysis and report.
Productivity analysis for each subcontractor.
Project trends summary.
Photographs
The CONTRACTOR shall supply once a month at his own cost and as directed by
engineers three mounted sets of 20 No. color prints of progress photographs of a
size not less than twenty five (25) cm by twenty (20) cm of such portions of the
works in progress or completed, as may be directed by the engineer. Each set to be
annotated and bound in a suitable album, in a format to be agreed with the
33
engineer. All photographs and negatives shall become the property of the Engineer.
b.
Progress Meeting Records
i.
The Contractor shall prepare the agenda for the meeting and arrange distribution at least two
(2) days prior to the meeting.
ii.
The engineer shall record the minutes of all progress meetings with particular attention to
actions agreed upon, dates by which actions to be taken and by whom and shall follow-up
the implementation of these actions.
D. OVERALL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

a.
b.
An overall construction schedule shall be developed within thirty (30) days after the effective
date of the contract and incorporated into the project master schedule. Construction
requirements and priorities will be reflected in the engineering and procurement schedules.
The Contractor shall submit for comments, to the engineer. The overall construction
schedule in the form precedence diagram, drawn on a time scale. It shall depict the logical
sequence, relationships and duration of the major activities to be performed during
construction by the Contractor and the subcontractors. The submission shall include
computer printout and floppy disk containing all relevant data.
The time schedule shall clearly show the major interactions of the work between the
Contractor and the various subcontractors and for each individual unit or facility including
commissioning. The schedule shall be based on the latest information with regard to
availability of equipment/packages and construction drawings at the site and other data from
the list as provided by the Contractors overseas head office (if applicable).
c.
The critical and sub-critical activities shall be shown in different colors.
d.
The extent of detailing of the network shall meet the engineer requirement such that the
effect of any significant delay or change in the course of the execution of the works can be
clearly explained, evaluated and controlled.
e.
After discussions and agreement with engineer on the overall construction schedule and
timing, the overall construction schedule shall form the basis for the detailed construction
schedules.
E. DETAILED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

a.
The Contractor shall build up a detailed CPM CONSTRUCTION network logic diagram with
activity durations and resource allocation, in accordance with the overall construction
schedule and the CONSTRUCTION WORK breakdown structure. It shall depict the logical
sequencing and relationships of engineering, procurement and subcontracting to
construction, fabrication, erection, and commissioning.
b.
The logic diagram shall be developed in precedence format and the critical activities shall be
identified together with optimum resource requirements and shall be submitted for the
engineers approval thirty (30) days prior to commencement of site activities.
c.
Revisions to the logic, durations of scheduled activities and milestone dates shown on the
logic diagram schedules shall only take place after full consultation with the engineer.
F. SUBCONTRACTORS SCHEDULE
a.
Immediately after the mobilization of each subcontractor, Contractor shall prepare a

resource based bar chart schedule for entire scope of work and the duration of the
subcontract. The activities will be prioritized keeping in view the interface and dependency
with respect to other SUBCONTRACTORS WORK item as defined in detailed
CONSTRUCTION network logic. Resources and estimated efforts will be define for each
activity by which the weighted factors will be calculated and physical progress S curves
drawn for further monitoring.
b.
Throughout the CONSTRUCTION period, the CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain
Section1, General
34
continuously, dynamic work program schedule for each subcontractor taking into
consideration the latest drawings, materials and access availability status and monitor the
activity completion schedules and schedule progress. Output of these schedules will be
rolled up for updating Contractors schedules as well as detailed and overall construction
logic networks.
G. DETAILED WORK PROGRAM SCHEDULE
Schedules falling under this category are as follows:
57.
a.
Twelve (12) week look-ahead schedule: This schedule shall be derived from the update
logic diagram. It will be issued as part of the Municipality Progress Reports and shall cover
the activities for the following Twelve (12) weeks. Drawings and materials requirements will
be correlated to meet the forward programs. The related HOLD-UP reports will be
generated if after comparing with the current drawing status report and materials delivery
status reports there is a slippage to the availability dates of either.
b.
3 Week Look-Ahead Schedule: this schedule shall be derived from the twelve (12) week
look-ahead, it will include the past week and the following two weeks (2). This will be a
detailed schedule at working level and shall identify all activities for all work discipline, in
each and every year.
c.
Construction Manpower Planning: the Contractor shall submit for the engineers review, his
proposed manpower planning for labor and his estimate of the man-hours needed for the
construction, in the form of histograms. These will be broken down by trade for the entire
duration of the construction activities. Resource scheduling calculations shall be made on
the basis of the network schedule. The Contractor shall however be responsible for resource
planning, as required, to meet the scheduled progress and recover slippages at no cost the
Engineer.
d.
Construction Equipment Planning: The Contractor shall submit to the engineer, for review,
his proposed plan for deployment of construction equipment and facilities, at no cost to the
engineer, to recover any shortfalls in the progress and in the progress and in order to ensure
timely completion of the project.
Regulatory Authorities Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible to make himself aware of all the Local Municipality and other
Regulatory /Jurisdictional Authorities requirements and regulations and ensure that they are
implemented to the satisfaction of the Municipality and other Regulator/Jurisdictional Authorities and
to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall pay all charges in connection with the Municipality Building Permit inclusive of,
but not limited to, Drainage fees, Insurance fee (deposit) and Building permit charges.
The tender price shall include all costs associated with collection of the Municipality Building Permit.
58.
Maintenance During Defects Liability Period and Guarantees

Starting from the date of issue of Substantial/Provisional completion certificate the Contractor shall be
responsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the following services free of charge, at his own
cost:
1. The servicing/ Repairing and Restring to satisfactory working order of all system and equipment
including replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or installation
defect during operation.
2. Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly, yearly as
applicable to the approval of the engineer). Including provision of labor, spare parts and supply of
consumable materials for all systems as required for the safe operation and guarantee of
performance of all the systems.
Section1, General
35
3. Necessary staff to carry out the above shall be resident on the job site during the said year.
4. On call emergency services (24 hours), particularly for fire alarm system.
5. Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for a period
of one year.
6. At the end of defects liability period the Contractor shall be responsible for final handing over of all
installed systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both engineer and Employer.
59.
Training of Employer Personnel

The Contractor shall responsible for the training of operators assigned by the Employer for operation
of all major equipment and controls as decided by the engineer. Training should be provided by
original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least one week and/or when requested by Employer
prior to issuance of take-over certificate.
Examination and Take Over of site from the Enabling Works Sub-Contractor (If applicable)
60.
The Contractor shall examine the site and the various installations that need to be taken over from the
Enabling Work Sub-contractor for compliance with requirements, for construction of his (the main
Contractors) works and shall record and submit a written report listing any conditions pr items not
fulfilling the requirements or are considered detrimental for further progress of his work to the
engineer. The examination, report and listing shall be carried out in the presence of the Enabling
Works Sub-contractor.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the works until all defects are rectified and unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected to the approval of the engineer.
In case the taking involves exposing of examination after same works are to be performed by the
main Contractor, the main Contractor shall take over the works in two stages:
-
At the time of taking over initial conditional takeover to be reviewed checked and taken over
exposing by main Contractor.
Final takeover of all review has been completed.
Acceptance of the site and commencement of works by the Contractor shall be deemed as
acceptance without any defects / unsuitable conditions and no subsequent claim whatsoever in this
regard by Contractor will be entertained.
Items to be taken over from the Enabling Works Sub-contractor shall be, but not limited to the
following:
61.
Site
Site Hoarding
Site sign Boards
Shoring Works
Dewatering System
Piling Works
Site Visit
The Contractor shall examine the Soil Investigation Report and take into account the
recommendations therein. Similarly he shall visit the site, study the conditions both physical apparent
and anticipated, obtain all information about requirements arising out of site conditions before
commencing works and be responsible for any variations or extra-work resulting from the site
conditions or contents of soil investigation report without additional time and/or cost implications to the
contract.
Section1, General
36
SECTION1a: SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. GENERAL
1.1 Performance Criteria
The performance criteria included in the Performance Specification sets the minimum standards with which
the Detailed Design shall comply, and the means by which compliance shall be checked and controlled prior
to completion of each element of the Works.
1.2 Design Submittals
The Specialist Contractors design submittals shall be reviewed by the Engineer during the evaluation period,
and any alteration and/or agreements reached shall be incorporated into the Contract Drawings and Contract
Specification.
1.3 Design Intent
a) The Drawings are only intended to indicate the required visual effect.
b) Although the Drawings show considerable detail and dimensions, no warranty or representation is
given herewith as to the accuracy of such dimensions or the adequacy or buildability of such details.
Should the Specialist Contractor adopt the details or arrangements indicated on the Drawings it shall
be deemed that he has checked their buildability and performance in terms of the Performance
specification, all applicable Regulations, Codes of Practice, Standards and manufacturers/ suppliers
recommendations for any products referred to. The Specialist Contractor shall undertake full design
responsibility for all adopted designs and details.
1.4 Material Preferences
a) Where a preference for a particular material, type of construction, dimension, size or thickness is
indicated in the performance Specification or on the Drawings, or a particular method of construction
is implied, the specialist Contractor shall either guarantee that the preference indicated will satisfy the
requirements of the Tender Document or if he considers them, in his expert opinion, to be inadequate
or inappropriate, make alternative proposals in his Tender satisfying the performance and visual intent
requirements of the Performance Specification and Drawings.
b) If, with his Tender, the Specialist Contractor submits no such alternative proposal to any of the
preferences indicated in the Tender Documents then the solutions proposed in the Performance
Specification and on the Drawings shall be deemed to be acceptable and be warranted by him.
2. SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
2.1 General
a) To the extent that the Specialist Contractor designs any part of the works the same shall be designed
with all reasonable skill and care in conformity with the normal standards of the relevant disciplines.
b) All elements of design and construction work shall be fit for their intended purpose and location, and
shall be fully co-ordinated with adjoining elements of construction.
c) The Specialist Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for development of the
designs specified to meet the specialist requirements of his own fabrication techniques.
d) The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for the Detailed Design and selection of materials,
which shall be used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and which satisfy the
requirements of the Performance Specification.
Section1a, Specialist Contractors Design Requirements
37
2.2 Design Response

a) The Design is that shown on the Drawings and the Performance Specification.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall provide, with his Tender, a response to the Design, maintaining the
design intent and criteria provided.
c) The Specialist Contractor shall submit with his tender, sufficient drawings and technical specifications
as required detailing his proposed solutions to the Drawings and Performance Specifications in order
that a realistic technical appraisal of his Tender can be made by the Engineer.
d) Prior to Contract award, the Specialist Contract shall agree a set of Contract Drawings and a Contract
Specification with the Engineer which provides detailed descriptions of all work proposed, including
full technical details of components, materials and attachments, structural calculations, etc.
e) During the course of the works, the Specialist Contractor shall provide such additional supplementary
information necessary to substantiate and complete the Detailed Design to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
f)
The Specialist Contractor shall not alter the Contract Specification without the Engineers prior
consent.
2.3 The Drawings
a) The Drawings are those listed in the Instructions to Tender.

b) Used for Tender purposes, the Drawings provide the design and visual intent with which the Specialist
Contractor shall base the Tender.
2.4 The Performance Specification
a) Used for Tender purposes, the Performance Specification describes the design and performance
criteria of the works with which the Specialist contractor shall comply when providing a technical
response with the Tender.
b) The Performance Specification identifies preferred materials which the Specialist Contractor shall
confirm as being suitable for their specified purpose. If he considers them unsuitable he shall advise
the Main Contractor at the Tender Stage.
2.5 The Detailed Design
a) The Specialist Contractor shall provide and be responsible for the Detailed Design of the works.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall complete the Detailed Design of the works to meet the requirements of
the Drawings, the Performance Specification and all other criteria which, in his specialist knowledge,
are relevant to the design and installation.
I.
Where a particular material, type of construction, dimension, size or thickness is stated in

the Performance Specification or on the Drawings or a particular method of construction
may be implied, the Specialist Contractor shall guarantee that the preference indicated
will satisfy the requirements of these documents. If the Contractor considers these to be
inadequate or inaccurate, then alternative proposals shall be made when submitting his
Tender.
II.
If the Specialist Contractor submits no alternative proposal to any of the preferences

indicated with his Tender then the solutions proposed in the Performance Specification
and on the Drawings shall be deemed to form part of his proposals.
c) The Detailed Design shall not alter the design intent, appearance or performance of the Design.
38
d) The Detailed Design shall comply with all relevant Codes of Practice, Regulations, Fire Regulations,
Local Building Regulations, Safety Regulations and any other regulations applicable to the installation,
together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, By-Laws and other enforceable instruments
applicable to both the design and execution of the installation.
e) The Detailed Design shall finalise all manufacturing and installation detailed and guarantee
performance of the works.
f)
The Specialist Contractor shall submit Tender Response Drawings and tender Response
Specifications in order that Design Development may commence.
g) Prior to Contract award, a set of Contract Drawings shall be agreed which provide detailed
descriptions of all work proposed including typical technical detailed of components, materials and
attachments, structural calculations, etc. The Performance Specification shall be adjusted to reflect
the solutions agreed for contract purposes.
h) During the course of the works, Specialist Contractors Supplemental Information shall be provided to
substantiate and complete the Detailed Design to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
i)
The Specialist Contractor shall not alter the requirements of the Performance Specification without the
Engineers prior consent.
2.6 The Detailed Design Process
a) When preparing the master programme, the Specialist Contractor shall make reasonable allowance
for completing design/ production information.
b) During the Contract the Specialist Contractor shall submit via the Main Contractor to the Engineer the
required number of copies of design/ production information. The Engineer will note his comments on
one copy, then return these to the Main Contractor.
c) The Main Contractor shall co-ordinate any interface required and return the drawings to the Specialist
Contractor.
d) The Specialist Contractor shall ensure that any necessary amendments are made without delay.
Unless and until the Engineer confirms that resubmission is not required, submit copies of amended
drawings etc. and ensure incorporation of necessary amendments, all as before.
3. SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS DRAWINGS
3.1 Working Drawings
a) Working Drawings, and where appropriate structural, thermal and acoustic calculations etc. shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review in good time so as to allow any revisions to be carried out and
not affect planned manufacturing periods.
b) The Engineers shall review the working Drawings for compliance with the Contract drawings, to check
general visual performance and overall functional matters only. The Detailed Design and construction
of components and materials shall remain the responsibility of the Specialist Contractor.
c) The Engineers review of Working Drawings shall not relieve the Specialist Contractor of his
responsibility for errors or for supplying components and materials to the full satisfaction of the
Engineers.
d) The Working Drawings shall be fully dimensioned in metric to an agreed scale appropriate to the
detail and include (but not be restricted to):
I.
Full size details describing materials, components and equipment, construction, finishes,
provision for movements, fabrication and erection tolerances.
39
II.
Layouts and assemblies of all detail construction and junctions, details of materials, method of
jointing, details of all site connections and fixing and sealing methods, finishes and all
pertinent information.
III.
Method of fabrication and construction.
IV.
Finishes.
V.
Structural Calculations.
e) The Specialist Contractor shall submit Working Drawings in accordance with the Contract Conditions,
and shall not proceed with fabrication of components until they are formally returned by the Engineer
with either A, B or C stamped on each Working Drawing.
f)
Drawing stamped Category A: No Objection. Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed

in accordance with the Working Drawings submitted. Unless indicated to the contrary on such
Working Drawings, the work shall comply with the Contract Documents.
g) Drawing stamped category B: No Objection. Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed at

the Specialist Contractors own risk, in accordance with the Working drawings submitted subject to the
Specialist Contractor taking necessary action based on the Engineers comments and all annotations
added to the returned Working drawings. Unless indicated to the contrary on such Working Drawings,
the work shall comply with the Contract Documents. The required number of copies of amended
Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineers.
h) Drawings stamped Category C: Objection. No work shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed.
The Specialist Contractor shall submit new Working Drawings to the Engineers for review until resubmission is no longer required.
i)
The receipt of Working Drawings by the Specialist Contractor from the Engineers marked A, B or C
shall not constitute agreement of a variation, nor shall it imply payment.
j)
When preparing the Working Drawings, the Specialist Contractor shall consult the current Contract
and Drawings and adjust the Working Drawings to allow for site tolerances, discrepancies and
changes in the Design where necessary.
k) Where the Specialist Contractor considers the Design may be affected by the Working Drawings, he
shall notify the Engineers immediately.
l)
Where necessary, the Specialist Contractor shall re-draw manufacturers standard details in order to
ensure their compatibility with the Design and the Working Drawings.
m) The Engineers shall have the right at all reasonable times to visit the Specialist Contractor (or his subcontractors) design office or works to check on progress.
n) The Working Drawings shall be in English and titled in the manner determined for the Contract with
the title block fully indicating the part of the works to which they apply. The Working Drawings shall
be numbered in sequence and agreed numbering system shall be used in order to facilitate easy
cross-references of general arrangements and details.
o) The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any discrepancies, errors or omissions in
the Working Drawings, whether or not such drawings were reviewed by the Engineers.
p) Information contained in any of the Drawings shall be treated as confidential and not be utilised for
any purpose other than for the works. Such information shall not be communicated to third parties for
other purposes without the specific acceptance of the Engineers.
q) The Specialist Contractor shall maintain on Site a full set of Design and Working Drawings.
r)
Upon completion of the Detailed Design, manufacture and installation phases, the Specialist
40
Contractor shall provide the Engineers with (6 No.) Record Drawings plus one negative of each,
showing clearly the final as manufactured/ as-built product.
s) No Working Drawings will be accepted if produced at scale and reduced. The Working Drawings shall
be fully co-ordinated, taking into account all interface conditions, tolerances and, where appropriate,
on-Site dimensions in order to ensure that the works are installed without alteration, unless otherwise
stated herein or agreed with the Engineers.
t)
Submittals to be returned no later than 14 days after receipt.

3.2 Erection Drawings
The Specialist Contractor shall, where deemed necessary by the Engineers, produce Erection Drawings
showing the dimensional layout of the structure from which Working Drawings shall be produced.
Erection Drawings shall be produced to a relevant and agreed scale correlating the piece markings with the
location in the structure.
4. SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
4.1 Technical Literature and Calculation
The Specialist Contractor shall ensure that sufficient relevant information and any design calculations are
submitted to the Engineers which demonstrates compliance with the Performance Specification and Contract
Documents.
5. SITE WORK
5.1 Co-ordination
a) The Main Contractor shall arrange, and the Specialist Contractor shall attend and contribute to,
regular Detailed Design co-ordination meetings. The Specialist Contractor shall produce, adapt and
update Working Drawings based on such meeting to ensure that the Detailed Design and execution of
the works are fully co-ordinated.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall dimensionally co-ordinate the Detailed Design of the works with the
dimensional requirements of works being designed by any third party to ensure that co-ordinated
detailed Working Drawings are produced. The Specialist Contractor shall co-ordinate the execution
and completion of the works with the execution and completion of the work of third parties and shall
provide all information necessary and undertake all tasks required by the Engineers for the purpose of
ensuring that the works and the project works are carried out and completed in an economic manner.
For the purpose of this clause the term third party shall include all other contractors, all Statutory
Undertakers, all Suppliers of goods, material and plant and all others engaged pursuant to the
Contract, whether on or off the Site.
6. MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6.1 General
a) Not more than one week before completion of the works the Specialist Contractor shall submit a
detailed operating and maintenance manual (using only the format provided by the Engineers) which
shall give details for the proper operation and maintenance of the works or any component, fitting, or
accessory consistent with the performance and other requirements of this Contract and which shall
clearly state the following:
I.
Method of operation and maintenance.
II.
Any sequence related to operation and maintenance.
III.
Identification of parts requiring operation and maintenance giving reference to location of the
item on manual drawings, together with manufacturers reference numbers, addresses and
41
telephone numbers of firms from whom materials or parts can be obtained.

IV.
The Specialist Contractor recommendations shall pay particular regard to safety in operation
and maintenance.
V.
The Specialist Contractor shall provide all manual drawings, sketches and diagrams
necessary to illustrate the nature of the operating and maintenance works described in the
manual.
VI.
Where manual drawings, diagrams, sketches and the like are A4 size they shall be appended
and bound into the manual; if larger, then one negative copy together with a copy on C.D.
shall be provided.
b) The works shall not be accepted as practically complete until the detailed operating and maintenance
manual has been submitted to the satisfaction of the Engineers.
6.2 Record Drawings
a) The Specialist Contractor shall prepare detailed, full and accurately dimensioned record drawings
showing the works as finally supplied and installed.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall provide one negative copy of the finally accepted record drawings
together with a copy on CD.
7. SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS SUBMITTALS
7.1 Tender Specification
a) The Specialist Contractor shall submit with his Tender a specification giving sufficient preliminary
information to adequately describe his proposals so that a realistic evaluation of the Tender can be
made.
b) Such specifications shall be set out to follow the order of headings set out herein so that the proposals
to each requirement can be easily checked.
c) Consideration will be given to the quality, contents visual appearance, and neatness in layout and
general excellence of the proposals and selection may be made in favour of quality, contents and
appearance rather than the lowest tender sum.
d) Tenders not accompanied by an adequate tender specification may not be considered if there is
insufficient information for a proper evaluation of the proposals to be made.
7.2 Detailed Drawings, Performance Specification and Calculations
No alteration to the performance or other requirements of this Performance Specification shall be made
unless a variation instruction is issued by the Engineers which expressly require such alteration.
8. GENERAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

8.1 Scope of Works
a) General: The design, fabrication, installation and performance requirements specified are intended to
establish minimum performance levels, general design principles and the visual appearance required.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the whole of the installation achieving or
surpassing the design and performance criteria for all components and all sub-assemblies of the
installation.
42
c) Scope: Performance specified work shall comprise the design, testing, manufacture, delivery to site,
installation including all materials, labour, plant and attendances and complete cleaning down of the
Works and shall include all necessary fixings to the structure and adjoining elements of the works to
the areas indicated on the drawings.
d) The Performance Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings.
8.2 Structure and Structural Support
The Specialist Contractor shall at Tender stage identify dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.
8.3 Structural Loadings on Works
The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining all dead and live loads imposed on the works in
addition to incidental impact or other loads likely to arise during normal use and maintenance of the buildings.
8.4 Deflections
a) The performance specified work and its fixing shall be designed to accommodate differential structural
movements, deflections and thermal movements arising from any load imposed thereon from within
and from surrounding construction.
b) The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the extent of such movements/
deflections.
8.5 Integrity
The Specialist Contractor shall calculate the sizes and thicknesses of all materials and components of his
proposed systems in accordance with British and International Standards and Codes of Practice, making due
allowance for the use of the proposed buildings and to ensure that his works will resist all dead loads, live
loads.
43
SECTION 2: DEMOLITION & SITE CLEARANCE

1.0
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Scope of Specification
a)
This specification deals with the general requirements for the demolition of buildings,
other structures and services above and below ground level and/or for the clearance
from site of other superficial obstructions, shrubbery, materials and the like. The
Contractor is to allow for the provision of adequate screens, necessary watering to
allay dust and removal of all debris from the site
b)
The Contractor is responsible for taking all necessary precautions for the protection of
trees, shrubs and existing structures on site that may need to be retained if indicated
and shall be held responsible for reinstating or replacing any items of work damaged
by him during the execution of the works, to the approval of the Engineer.
c)
Prior to removing any trees or vegetation, approval of Municipal Horticulture Section

shall be obtained.
Survey before Commencement

Before commencing the Works, The Contractor shall study all available drawings and carry
out a thorough survey and examination of buildings, structures or services to be demolished
or site to be cleared. The Engineer shall be fully informed of the results of this survey. The
amount and extent of the demolition and/or site clearance together with the time schedule
shall then be agreed with the Engineer.
2.0
DEMOLITION
Demolition Procedure
a)
Extent of the Work.

The Contractor shall demolish, break-up and remove buildings, structures and superficial
obstructions on the site in the way of or otherwise affected by the works. He shall clear each
part of the site at times and to the extent required or approved by the Engineer.
b)
Demolition Techniques.
Demolition shall be carried out using techniques, which will not be detrimental to adjacent or
adjoining structures or parts of structures, which are not to be demolished. Where shown on
the drawings or where directed by the Engineer, underground structures, culverts, chambers
and foundations other than building foundations shall be removed to such a level as may be
indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate in trench and breakout
redundant pipes, ducts and surrounds. Trenches and pits resulting from site clearance below
ground level shall be properly cleaned out and filled with compacted suitable material,
compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm to achieve at least 95% MDD.
3.0
GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE

Debris and Obstructions
Before commencing any excavating or fill, the area shall be cleaned of all debris, materials or
obstructions, which in the opinion of the Engineer would adversely affect the uniformity or stability of
fill.
4.0
PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY
Existing Facilities
(i)
Existing highways, facilities, adjacent property, trees and plants designated for preservation
Section 2, Demolition & Site Clearance
44
shall be suitably protected from injury or damage by the Contractor from his operations.
5.0
(ii)
The form of protection of vegetation within the Site shall be a type and standard approved by
the Relevant Department.
(iii)
The Contractor shall ensure that access to adjoining properties is not impeded by his work.
DISPOSAL OF OLD MATERIAL

Materials to Remain Property of Employer
(i)
Where specified, certain materials arising from the site clearance are to remain the property
of the Employer. All fossils, antiquities and other objects of interest or value which may be
found or uncovered on the Site shall remain or become the property of the Employer and the
Contractor shall forthwith:
a)
b)
Use his best endeavors not to disturb or damage the object;

Cease work, which would endanger the object or prevent or impede its removal;
c)
Inform the Engineer of the discovery and precise location of the object.
(ii)
The Engineer will issue instructions on the procedure to be adopted which may include
conditions to permit the examination, excavation or removal of the object by a third party.
(iii)
Subject to the provisions of the conditions of Contract and of this Specification, all materials
arising from site clearance which are surplus to or unsuitable for use in the Works shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by him either off the Site to an
approved tip or if agreed by the Engineer on the Site in an approved manner.
(iv)
The Contractor shall propose two sites for disposal of unsuitable or surplus material, one of
which shall be specified as having priority and which must be filled before the second is used,
together with a separate location where debris, such as concrete, kerbing etc., shall be
disposed of. The Contractor shall seek approval for all the nominated sites from the
Municipality before work commences.
Section 2, Demolition & Site Clearance
45
SECTION 3: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS

1.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by this section concerns excavations and earthworks of any kind including
transportation of excavated materials, backfill and filling as required for the various types of buildings,
as well as for external works.
The Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and its bearing capacity, and shall be fully
responsible for ascertaining all necessary information concerning permanent water table, periods of
rainfall, flooding of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work.
The methods of excavation, which the Contractor desires to use, shall be at the sole discretion of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the complete safety of all
site personnel, including any third party, together with all buildings on site, including buildings
completed by any third party.
Hauling of material from cuttings or borrow pits to the embankment or other areas of fill shall proceed only
when sufficient compaction plant is operating at the place of deposition.
The Contractor shall report to the Consultant when excavations are completed and are ready to receive
blinding concrete, and shall obtain consent before depositing concrete. In the event of excavations being
made larger than the sizes shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the Consultant, the
Contractor shall fill in the excavated void to the correct profile with selected fill compacted in layers not
exceeding 150 mm to the required density, or mass concrete as described hereinafter under "Concrete
Work", at his own expense.
The final 150 mm depth of all excavations shall be taken out by hand unless the Consultant allows
otherwise and the bottom leveled and rammed immediately prior to placing concrete. Should any
harmful material be encountered at the bottom of any excavation, it shall be removed and the extra
depth filled with mass concrete as directed by the Consultant.
Where shown, the excavation shall be blinded with concrete as soon as possible after the final trimming
of the bottom of the excavation, but not later than 24 hours, after which time fresh approval shall be
sought and obtained from the Consultant before proceeding this work.
Construction traffic shall not use the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless the Contractor maintains the
level of the bottom surface at least 300 mm above formation level. Any damage to the surface arising
from such use of the surface shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
Excavation and earthworks shall conform to BS 6031 (1981) and approval of the Consultant.
2.
SITE CLEARANCE
The sites of structures shall be cleared of all trees, bushes, scrub, crops, grass and all other vegetable
growth including grubbing ups all roots. All rubbish and grubbing matter shall be burned or disposed of
offsite at tips to be provided by the Contractor. All compost materials and excavated surfaces soil shall be
spread and leveled evenly over garden areas.
3.
EXCAVATION PERMITS
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits relating to excavation works and shall bear
all costs involved. The Contractor shall abide by all conditions, etc. laid down in such permits.
4.
TYPES OF EXCAVATIONS
4.1
Excavation shall be classified according to the nature of the materials to be removed either as excavation
in rock or excavation in earth. Excavation in rock shall be defined as including all excavations in hard and
consolidated materials which cannot be removed by normal excavation tools and equipment and which
require drilling, blasting or other special means for their removal. All excavation other than in rock shall
Section 3, Excavation & Earthworks
46
be defined as excavation in earth.

4.2
The use of explosives to remove rock encountered in the course of excavation will not be allowed without
the prior written consent of the Consultant and concerned authorities. The storage and use of all such
explosives shall fully comply with the By-laws and ordinances of Army and all Government Departments
concerned.
4.3
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all safety precautions concerned with the use of
explosives and for all damage to life and property as a result thereof. The explosives shall be stored
in a locked and adequately safe store and the Contractor shall maintain a register for their control and
use.
5.
SITE SURVEY AND SETTING OUT

Before work commences on the site, the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the levels of the site
and obtain the verification of the Consultant of these levels. Levels shall be taken on a grid to be
agreed by the Consultant, and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these levels for record
purposes. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and maintaining a site datum level.
"Zero" datum shall be the level of the top of the ground floor slab of the proposed buildings.
Information pertaining to the nature of the ground may be given to the Contractor, when available but
without any guarantee of its correctness or accuracy.
The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the works to the specified lines, levels and
positions in relation to the building lines and existing structures.
6.
EXISTING SERVICES
The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services on the site, both above and below
ground. Such services shall be removed, sealed or rerouted in a manner prescribed by the Public
Authorities concerned including additional requirements for future services at the Contractors own
expense.
The Contractor shall also be held responsible for all damage sustained by any of the services adjacent to
the site resulting from the works. Excavations to locate services shall be carried out by hand.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all liaison with local and service Authorities and for obtaining all
necessary permissions, licenses and approvals, arranging for disconnection of existing services as well
as for all payments of fees, changes etc. in respect of the works.
7.
POOR GROUND & TREATMENT OF SOFT AREAS

Any subterranean cavity found within the area of the buildings shall be dredged of any soft material
and then filled to the Consultant's instruction to ensure that the cavity concerned does not adversely
affect the permanent works in any way.
Under foundations the wells or cavities will be filled with mass concrete or equivalent cement grout.
Elsewhere, wells will be filled with approved consolidated filling as indicated in item 10 below, to match
the surrounding ground but cavities will be left or filled as instructed by the Consultant.
Where soft areas occur treat as follows:
Initially non-friable boulders of sizes between 150 - 300 mm shall be end tipped over the area and rolled
until the area is stabilized to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Further stones of 10 - 70 mm size shall be
rolled into the area until all the areas are leveled and well bound.
8.
SHORING EXCAVATIONS
The Contractor shall to the satisfaction of the Consultant, shore the sides of excavations for structures,
trenches and pits to prevent them for slipping or falling. Should any slips, falls or settlement occur they
shall be made good by the Contractor, at his own expense, with selected fill or with mass concrete as
47
may be directed by the Consultant.

In removing shoring from the sides of excavations, care shall be taken to avoid bringing loads onto any
concrete until it has hardened sufficiently to carry such loads.
Timber or other materials used for shoring the sides of excavations shall be removed as the work
proceeds except when ordered to be left in by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall, not later than four weeks before commencing any excavation, submit to the
Consultant for inspection calculations and working drawings for the proposed scheme of strutting and
retaining the sides of the excavations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and for the maintenance and
protection of any adjacent property, structures and roads.
Trenches and pits shall be kept free of water at the expense of the Contractor.
9.
MINERALS
The Contractor is strictly prohibited from digging for sand, gravel or other minerals and no sand or gravel
arising from the excavations may be used in these works.
10.
REQUIRED BEARING CAPACITY

The Contractor shall submit the necessary soil investigation report, if so required by the Consultant and
notify the Consultant to obtain his instructions if the required bearing capacity:
I)
ii)
Is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the drawings.

Is not obtained at the depth shown on the drawings.
The soil Investigation report should include:

a)
Subsurface exploration of site soils and rocks.
b)
Ground water investigation.
c)
Laboratory testing of soil, rock and water samples.
d)
Description of subsurface and groundwater conditions.
e)
Selection of geo-technical parameters.
f)
Developing foundation recommendations, including construction considerations for the proposed
works.
g)
Developing recommendations for site preparation, including earthworks.
h)
Reporting the results of all field, laboratory and analytical work in a final geo-technical report.
i)
Review of foundation drawings to determine if they are incomplete with the recommendations of
the geo-technical reports.
The report / works shall not be limited to the above but shall include all that is required to confirm the
adequacy of the foundations and the safety of the proposed structure.
Excavation bottoms are to be approved before the new works are laid on them. The Contractor shall
inform the Consultant when excavations are ready for inspection, if after approval, surfaces become
unsuitable due to flooding or other causes the Contractor shall excavate further, backfill with concrete
or with suitable materials and compact to the Consultant's approval at his own expense.
Should the soil condition, after the Consultant has been informed that the excavations are ready for
inspection, be such that the Consultant deems it necessary to carry out loading tests, the Contractor shall
perform such tests to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Any expenses incurred in consequence of the
performance of such tests are deemed to be included by the Contractor in his own tender.
48
11.
STOCK PILING
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for stock piling and the material should not be placed
directly in its final position. All locations for stock piling must be approved by the Consultant and the
Municipality.
12.
BACKFILLING
Foundations, trenches, column bases and the like are to be backfilled with selected excavated material
as shown in the structural drawing. The imported fill to comply with the following:
Soaked CBR : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990
Not less than 30% at 95% maximum dry density (MDD) 4 days soaking or
Not less than 15% at 95% MDD as required and instructed by the Consultant.
Liquid Limit : BS 1377, Part 2, 1990
Not more than 35
Plasticity Index : BS 1377, Part 2, 1990
Not more than 6
Water Soluble Salts : BS 1377, Part 3, 1990
Test 7 & 5 for water-soluble chloride and sulphate respectively, not more than 2% by weight of dry
material expressed as chloride and sulphate content.
Fill must be well rammed and consolidated to the satisfaction of the Consultant, in layers not exceeding
150 mm thick, and sufficiently watered during consolidating to achieve maximum consolidation. The
maximum size of the material shall not be greater than 63 mm, not more than 20% shall pass the 200
mm sieve and it shall be free of all debris, vegetable matter and the like. Maximum dry density is
determined according to BS 1377, 1990.
Organic Matter
Maximum limit is 0.1%, test method to be latest edition of BS 1377.
Number of field density tests shall be a minimum of 3 for each 500 m2 of fill area or unit whichever is
smaller. For areas larger than 500 m2 the number of tests shall be increased proportionately.
Number of field density tests for services trenches shall be a minimum of 3 for each 500 L.M. length for
each lift or per unit whichever is less.
Dune sand will not be accepted as imported material irrespective of it meeting the suitable fill
requirements.
13.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Surplus excavated material and all unsuitable material shall be removed from site and run to spoil by
the Contractor in tips provided by himself and approved by the Municipality and the Consultant or as
otherwise directed by the Consultant.
14.
COMPACTED FILL BENEATH GROUND SLABS, FOOTINGS, ETC.

The area shall be trimmed to a clean properly compacted uniform surface to the lines and levels shown
on the drawings. Any soft areas considered unsatisfactory by the Consultant shall be taken out and the
extra depth filled with approved compacted fill material.
The fill is to be non-plastic granular material, well graded, strong, with a maximum particle size of 50 mm,
with not more than 15% passing a 200 mm sieve, free of all debris, vegetable matter and the like.
Filling is to be compacted as soon as possible after deposition, and with plant approved by the Consultant
49
and complying with the following:

Fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding a 150 mm compacted thickness and compacted to not less
than 95% of the maximum dry density (MDD) as determined according to BS 1377, Part 4, 1990 for all
embankment layers.
The top 300 mm of fill up to formation level shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 30% at 95% MDD. The
remaining underlying fill material shall have a minimum CBR of 10% at 95% MDD.
During construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct construction traffic uniformly
over the full width of the embankment. Damage to compacted layers by construction traffic shall be made
good by the Contractor at his own expense. If the Contractor wishes to continue to use the surface of
embankments for constructional plant before trimming to formation level he shall bring up and maintain
the area between the extremities of any carriageway, including any shoulders to a level not less than 150
mm above formation level. Any damage to the sub grade caused by the use of such surface shall be
made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
Where embankments 1.2 meters or less in height are to be constructed, the top 150 mm of the ground on
which the embankment material is to be placed shall be compacted to a density not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density.
Where embankment height is in excess of 1.2 m the top 150 mm of the ground on which the
embankment material is to be placed shall be compacted to a density not less than 90% of MDD.
Where the soaked CBR of formation in cut is less than 10% but greater than 5%, a thickness of 200 mm
or as shown on the drawings immediately below formation shall be replaced with an equivalent thickness
of material of minimum soaked CBR of 10% at 95% MDD. However where soaked CBR of the formation
is less than 5%, then 300 mm thick layer immediately below the formation shall be replaced with similar
thickness layers of suitable material of minimum soaked CBR of 10% at 95% MDD. The fill material shall
be compacted to not less than 95% MDD. Soil improvement shall be considered as the first option if
judged more practicable and economical by the Consultant.
All references to soaked CBR's shall be as determined according to BS 1377, Part 4 and Part 2, 1990.
The fill is to be compacted using a vibrating compactor of not less than 1.5 tone. The fill is to be
thoroughly compacted in layers not more than 150 mm thick. Adequate water is to be used for
compaction and the density after compaction shall not be less than 95% of the maximum dry density as
determined according to BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.
Backfilling and compaction operations to make up the levels under the ground slabs shall proceed at the
same time as backfilling to the final external levels. The difference in level of backfill between inside and
outside of walls shall not be permitted to exceed 200 mm unless noted otherwise.
Compacted fill shall not be obtained from the site but imported from a source to be approved by the
Consultant.
15.
NON COMPACTED FILL

Non compacted fill shall be non-plastic granular material to the approval of the Consultant.
16.
PROTECTION OF SERVICES
The Contractor shall maintain and protect all permanent mains, services etc. serving adjacent buildings
where affected by excavations.
17.
KEEPING EXCAVATIONS FREE FROM WATER

The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all excavations free from water, from whatever cause
arising from whatever means. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage that may
50
result from his failure to keep the excavations free from water. The method adopted for dewatering shall
in no way contravene the regulations of the local authorities. The system or systems to be employed
shall be approved by the Engineer, such approval if given shall not waive the Contractors responsibilities
and liabilities under the Contract.
18.
TESTING FOR DENSITY & COMPACTION

Before commencement of pavement works and during the earthworks construction the Consultant shall
instruct control tests to determine the degree of compaction. These shall include:
a)
Dry density / moisture content relationship : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.
b)
In-Situ Dry Density Tests : BS 1377, Part 9, 1990.
c)
CBR Tests : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.
d)
In-Situ Density by the Nuclear Method : ASTM D2922.
e)
In-Situ Moisture Content : ASTM D3017.
The areas shall be rejected if the resulting test results do not satisfy specified requirements.
Tests for laboratory testing (Density, Moisture content, CBR, Plasticity Index, maximum size, sulphate
and chloride content tests) shall be carried out at a frequency of at least one group of tests per 1500 m3
of fill.
19.
DEWATERING
Where the excavation level is below the water table and it is necessary to pump continuously from the
excavation or to install a specialist form of dewatering equipment around the perimeter of the site or
excavation, the Contractor will be responsible for ensuring the safety and stability of all adjoining
ground, property, structures, services or utilities above or below ground level.
Continuous or permanent dewatering of the excavation of site may not be undertaken without the written
approval of the Consultant to the work, and the methods to be employed shall be to the Consultants
approval.
During the execution of pumping operations, records shall be kept and agreed weekly with the
Consultant of all equipment, pumping times and water levels. The water pumped from excavations or
well points shall be pumped to disposal points or sumps as approved by the Consultant and if so
required be passed through settling tanks before disposal.
20.
USE OF WATER FOR EARTHWORKS

The use of saline water for earthworks will only be permitted if the percentage of water soluble salts in the
compacted fill does not exceed 2 % by weight of dry soil.
21.
EXPLOSIVES & BLASTING

Explosives may only be used in the works with the prior written approval of the Consultant and all
safeguards and conditions that the Consultant may specify are to be agreed in writing. Permission must
also be obtained from the relevant Government Authorities.
22.
GROUND PREPARATION BELOW FORMATION

Where any material below the natural ground level under embankments or below formation level in
cuttings is required to be excavated it shall be removed to such a depth and over such areas as are
shown on the drawings, or as the Consultant shall direct, and disposed of in a manner depending on its
nature and condition at the time. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with the material defined on
the drawings, or as the Consultant shall direct and shall be compacted as specified, except in
circumstances where the backfill has to be deposited below standing water. In such cases the Contractor
shall use only an approved granular material of maximum size not greater than 300 mm and which on
analysis by sieving complies with the requirements of Table 1 below and may be deposited below water
without the associated use of compaction plant.
51
Table 1: Free Draining Material

B. S. Sieve Size
Percentage by Weight Passing
10 mm
5 mm
0.60 mm
0.075 mm
Up to 100
Not more than 85
Not more than 45
Not more than 5
Where the Consultant shall direct, approved rock fill shall be placed directly on to naturally occurring
material. Such rock fill material shall have a "10 percent fines" value or not less than 10 tones when
tested in accordance with BS 812 and shall be graded from 300 mm to 150 mm with not more than 10%
less than 150 mm in size. The rock fill material shall be deposited and compacted to the satisfaction of
the Consultant.
23.
SETTLEMENT
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end
of the maintenance period of the Contract, unless stated otherwise in the specification.
52
SECTION 4: CONCRETE WORK

1.0
CONSTITUENT MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
61.1.
Cement
(a)
General
The cement used shall be Portland Cement conforming in all respects with ASTM standard specification
C 150, type 1, or to BS EN 197-1:2000 unless otherwise required. The Contractor shall obtain the written
approval of the Engineer to the proposed cement manufacturer.
(i)
(ii)
Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000 but contain not less than 4% and
not more than 13% proportion by weight of tri-calcium aluminate.
Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland cement (MSRPC)
Cement complying with BS EN 197-1:2000 but containing not less than 4% and not more than 8%
proportion by weight of tri-calcium aluminate, or cement complying with ASTM C 150 Type II. In
either case the cement shall not contain more than 2.7% proportion by weight of sulphur trioxide.
(iii)
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (SRPC) shall comply with BS 4027:1996 or ASTM 150, type V and
also shall comply with the following requirements:
Cement shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The acid soluble alkali level measured as Na2 0+0.658 K20 shall not exceed 0.6% by weight
and shall be determined by the test method described in Clause 16.2 of BS 4550, Part 2.
The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290 KJ/Kg at 7 days.
The specific surface area shall not be greater than 325 m2/Kg and not less than 225 m2/ Kg
when tested as described in the relevant BS.
The temperature of the cement shall not exceed 38 C at the time of incorporation into a
concrete mix.
(iv)
Low heat Portland cement shall comply with BS 1370.
(v)
Portland blast furnace cement shall comply with BS 146.
(vi)
High Slag Blast Furnace cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000.
(vii)
Portland pulverized fuel ash cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000.
(viii) Super sulphated cement shall comply with BS 4248.

(ix)
White Portland cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000
(x)
All cement shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer. Certificates signed by the
manufacturer, issued by an approved independent testing agency in the country of origin, shall be
provided for each delivery stating that the cement complies in all respects with the relevant British
Standard and giving the date of manufacture.
(b)
Cement Test and Analysis

Prior to any shipment to site the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with the manufacturers statement of
specification and test certificate together with the date of manufacture certified by own independent
agency in the country of origin. The date, quantity of cement and the number of the relevant delivery note
shall also be stated. Before or after delivery the Engineer shall have the right to reject any cement if the
result of additional test he may request do not meet the required standard. The Engineer shall have
access to the cement store and have the right to take samples for these additional tests.
Section 4, Concrete Works
53
The Contractor shall remove all rejected cement from the site without delay.
(c)
Handling and Storage
(i)
Cement delivered to site in bags shall be stored under cover on a raised floor. The covering shall be
raised above the surface of the material to permit adequate ventilation, and shall be arranged to protect
the cement from moisture. Cement from broken bags shall not be incorporated in the permanent works.
(ii)
Cement delivered in bulk, in batches not exceeding 100 tones, shall be transported to the site in closed
purpose made containers and shall be stored on elevated, airtight and weatherproof storage bins. Each
batch shall be stacked separately and used in order of delivery.
(iii)
Different types of cement shall be stored in separate locations and each storage area shall be clearly
identified.
(iv)
At the time of use all cement shall be free flowing and free from lumps. Cement that has been in storage
for a substantial time shall be tested in accordance with the respective BS to determine its suitability for
use. Any cement that has become injuriously damaged by damp or other causes shall at once be
removed from site. No cement shall be used after 6 months of its manufacturing.
(v)
Unless otherwise specified sulphate resisting cement shall be used for all concrete work up to and
including the ground floor level, and ordinary Portland cement for all work above this level.
(vi)
All cements whether stored in bulk or in bags, barrels or containers in warehouses or on site shall be
sampled for testing according to BS EN 196-7:2005, or according to BS EN 197-1:2000. Test samples
over and above those specified shall be taken at any time if so requested by the Consultant. Testing of
cement shall be in accordance with the methods required by ASTM C150 or BS EN 197-1:2000.
61.2.
Aggregates
(a)
General
(i)
Unless otherwise specified on drawings aggregates shall be from an approved source and shall consist
of naturally occurring materials complying with the requirements of BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008 for
graded or single size aggregate and ASTM C.33. For the purpose of test requirements aggregates shall
be defined in accordance with BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008, latest edition.
(ii)
Aggregates shall be chemically inert and shall consist of sound, hard, clean, durable sand gravel or
gravel or stone, whole or crushed rock or washed sand or a combination thereof. They shall be of high
crushing strength and free from adherent coating such as clay, earth, vegetable and organic matter,
alkalis or acids, bituminous material or any other deleterious matter or impurities.
(iii)
Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated
materials or flaky or elongated particles in such a form or in sufficient quantity to effect adversely the
strength or durability of the concrete or any materials which will cause expansion in the concrete after
hardening has commenced or taken place. Also for reinforced concrete, any materials which may attack
the reinforcement.
(iv)
The provisions of all sections relating to aggregates shall apply to both reinforced and plain concrete
unless otherwise stated.
(v)
Prior to commencing the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval samples of
aggregates, results of all specified tests, details of sources of supply and details of types of crusher
and/or screening machinery or washing equipment he proposes to use. No aggregates shall be used
until such approval is given by the Engineer.
(vi)
Sampling and testing of aggregates shall be as required by BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 and in

accordance with BS EN 932-1:1997 "Methods for Sampling & Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands, and
Fillers". All sampling shall be done by or under the supervision of the Engineer or his representative.
54
(vii)
Aggregates shall meet the limits set out in Table 4 below.
(b)
Fine Aggregates
(i)
Grading of fine aggregates, when analyzed by the method of sieve analysis described in BS EN 9331:1997 shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in Table 2 of BS EN
12620:2002+A1:2008. The fine aggregate shall be described as fine aggregate of the grading zone into
which it falls, e.g. (C.M.F.) BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008. The sand must be selected to produce a
concrete of the required quality.
(ii)
Physical and chemical properties shall comply with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.
(iii)
The total chloride ions in the mix shall not exceed the limits in BS 8110 or BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.
The total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix, expressed as SO3 should not exceed 4% SO3
by mass of the cement in the mix. The sulphate shall be calculated as the total from the constituents of
the mix. This does not apply to concrete made with super sulphated cement.
(iv)
The content of Shelly material based on percentage by weight of calcium carbonate shall not exceed
20%.
(c)
Coarse Aggregates
(i)
The grading of coarse aggregate, when analyzed by the method given for sieve analysis in BS EN 9331:1997 shall be within the limits given in Table 1 below. In addition, flakiness index and elongation index
shall not exceed 25%. Determination of flakiness and elongation indices shall be in accordance with BS
812, Part 105.1 and 105.2 respectively.
(ii)
Physical and chemical properties shall comply with BS EN 12620:2002.
(iii)
The content of shell material when determined in accordance with BS EN 933-7:1998 shall not exceed
the following:
-
(iv)
Fractions of 10 mm single size or graded or all-in aggregate that is finer than 10 mm and coarser
than 5 mm - 10%.
Fractions of single sizes or of graded or all-in aggregate that is coarser than 10 mm - 5%
The reduction in strength between the soaked and unsoaked 10% fines values shall not exceed 50 kn.
The unsoaked test shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 933-3:1997 and the soaked test after
immersing the aggregate specimen in distilled water for 24 hours.
10% fines values shall be not less than the following for different types of concrete:
: Heavy-duty concrete floor finishes
: Pavement wearing surfaces
: Others
150 kn.
100 kn.
50 kn.
(d)
All-in Aggregates
(i)
All-in aggregates complying with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 shall not be used for reinforced concrete
but may be used for mass concrete if approved by the Engineer. Single sized aggregate to BS EN
12620:2002+A1:2008 may only be used for reinforced concrete when combined in 2 or more sizes to
provide a well-graded mixture approved by the Engineer. The grading of all-in aggregate when analyzed
by the method of sieve analysis described in BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 shall be in accordance with
Table 3 below.
(e)
Storage and Handling
(i)
All aggregates for the manufacture of concrete shall be stored on a drained concrete hard standing, laidto-fall away from the mixer, or other approved surface to prevent the aggregate from being contaminated
by the ground or other foreign matter. Each type of grading of aggregate shall be kept separate by the
55
use of partition walls, etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that graded
coarse aggregates do not segregate in storage heaps. To avoid contamination by excess silt and fine
matter the bottom 250 mm of all stockpiles shall not be used.
(ii)
Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until in the Engineer's opinion it has been drained, unless the
Contractor measures the moisture content continuously and adjusts the quantity of fine aggregate and
added water in each batch of concrete mixed, to allow for free water contained in the fine aggregate.
(iii)
Just before use the aggregate shall be washed down with potable water to reduce the content of
sulphates, chlorides and other extraneous materials.
(iv)
The choice and preparation of sites for stockpiling of aggregates, the number and sizes of stockpiles and
the methods adopted to prevent segregation of component sizes shall be agreed with the Engineer.
(v)
Coarse aggregate shall be stockpiled in three separate grading, 40-20 mm, 20-10 mm, and 10-5 mm.
When aggregates of different grading are stockpiled close together the stockpiles shall be separated by
bulkheads.
(vi)
Stockpiles are to be on concrete or other hard surface sufficiently sloped so that water is not retained in
the base of stockpiles.
(vii)
All aggregates are to be handled from the stockpile in such a manner as to secure a typical grading of the
material, care being taken to avoid crushing the aggregates and contamination with extraneous matter.
(viii) "Aggregates need not be stockpiled when a crushing - screening plant is used in tandem with a
watching plant properly equipped with several bins for different sized aggregates having the
appropriate weighting scales at each bin such that a mix of the desired gradation is obtained
consistently and the whole operation is conducted to the satisfaction of the Engineer".
(ix)
Beach sand shall not be used in building works (concrete, mortar, plaster, render, etc.).
(x)
For the limits and frequencies of testing pertaining to physical, chemical and mechanical properties of
aggregates the Contractor is referred to Tables 1 and 2 respectively.
56
Table 1 : COARSE AGGREGATE

Sieve Size
mm
Percentage by mass passing BS sieves for nominal sizes
Graded aggregates
Single sized aggregates
40mm to
5mm
20mm to
5mm
14mm to
5mm
40mm
20mm
14mm
10mm
5mm
50
100
100
37.5
90 to 100
100
85 to 100
100
20
35 to 70
90 to 100
100
0 to 25
85 to 100
100
14
25 to 55
40 to 60
90 to 100
0 to 70
85 to 100
100
10
10 to 40
30 to 60
50 to 85
0 to 5
0 to 25
0 to 50
85 to 100
100
0 to 5
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 5
0 to 10
0 to 25
45 to 100
2.35
0 to 5
0 to 30
57
Table 2 : FINE AGGREGATE

____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2 : Sand
____________________________________________________________________________________
Sieve Size
Percentage by mass passing BS sieve
mm
________________________________________________________________________
Overall Limits Additional limits for grading
________________________________________________________________________
C
M
F
______________________________________________________________________________________
10
100
89 to 100
2.35
60 to 100
60 to 100
65 to 100
80 to 100
1.13
30 to 100
30 to 90
45 to 100
70 to 100
600 um
15 to 100
15 to 54
25 to 80
55 to 100
300 um
5 to 70
5 to 40
5 to 48
5 to 70
150 um
0 to 15 '
_____________________________________________________________________________________
' increased to 20% for crushed rock fines except when they are used for heavy-duty floors.
Note :
Individual sands may comply with the requirements of more than one grading. Alternatively,
some sands may satisfy the overall limits but may not fall within any one of the additional limits
C, M or F. In this case and where sands do not comply with Table 4 an agreed grading
envelope may also be used provided that the supplier can satisfy the purchaser that such
materials can produce concrete of the required quality.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
58
Table 3 : ALL-IN AGGREGATE

____________________________________________________________________________
Sieve Size
mm
Percentage by mass passing BS sieve for nominal sizes
40mm
20 mm
10 mm
5 mm'
50
100
37.5
95 to 100
100
20
45 to 80
95 to 100
14
100
10
95 to 100
100
25 to 50
35 to 55
30 to 65
70 to 100
2.36
20 to 30
25 to 100
1.18
15 to 40
15 to 45
600 um
8 to 30
10 to 35
10 to 30
5 to 25
300 um
5 to 15
3 to 20
150 um
0 to 8
0 to 8
0 to 8
0 to 13
' Used mainly in pre-cast concrete products

'' Increased to 10% for crushed rock sand.
59
TABLE 4:
LIMITS OF PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL & MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES OF AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE

______________________________________________________________________________________
No.
Kind of Requirement
Test Methods
Permissible Limits
ASTM Fines
Coarse
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1.
Grading
BS EN 932-1
Standard
2.
Material finer than 0.075mm
BS EN 932-1
max. 3%
max. 1%
Natural, uncrushed/crushed rock
max. 7%
max. 1%
3.
Clay lumps and friable particles
C 142 max. 1%
max. 1%
4.
Light weight pieces
C 123 max. 0.5%
max. 0.5%
5.
Organic impurities
C 40
not darker than standard color solution.
6.
Water absorption
C 128/
C 127 max. 2.3%
max.2%
7.
Specific gravity (apparent)
C 128/
C 127 min. 2.6%
min. 2.6%
8.
Shell content in aggregates :
BS EN 933-7
Coarser than 10mm
max. 5%
Between 5mm and 10 mm
max. 15%
Between 2.36mm and 5 mm
max. 10%
Finer than 2.36mm
Note 1
9.
Particle shape :
Flakiness Index
BS EN 933-3
max.25%
Elongation Index
BS 812-105.2
max.25%
10.
Acid soluble sulphates, C1 for
BS EN 1744-1
reinforced concrete made with
SRPC cements,
max.0.03%
max. 0.01%
OPC & MSRPC cements
max.0.05%
max. 0.02%
For mass concrete made with
SRPC cements
OPC & MSRPC cements
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
For pressed concrete and steam

cured structural concrete
Acid soluble sulphates, SO3
Soundness, MgSO4, (5 cycles)
Mechanical Strength, 10% fines
value
or impact value
Los Angeles Abrasion
Potential re-activity,
Note 2 of Aggregates
Of Cement Aggregate combination
Drying shrinkage
Unit weight and voids
Durability index
Aggregate crushing value
BS EN 1744-1
C 88
max.0.03%
max.0.05%
max. 0.02%
max. 0.04%
max.0.01%
max.0.3%
max. 12%
max. 0.01%
max. 0.3%
max. 12%
BS EN 1744-1
BS EN 1097-2
C131/C535
min. 100 KN
max. 30%
max. 30%
C 289 innocuous
innocuous
C 227 six-month expansion
BS EN 1367-4
max. 0.5%
C 29
<10% voids
D 3744
> 90%
BS EN 1097-2 < 20%
< 20% loss
Note :
1.
There is no requirement of shell content in sands passing 2.36 mm size sieve.
2.
Aggregates may initially be assessed for reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 289 and if potential
reactivity is indicated, then mortar bar tests in accordance with ASTM C227 shall be carried out.
The aggregate shall be considered conforming to specifications if representative samples pass the above
tests.
60
Just before use, the aggregate shall be washed down with potable water to remove the content of
sulphates, chlorides and other extraneous materials.
Coarse aggregate : The grading of coarse aggregate when analyzed as per BS EN 933-1:1997 shall
comply with BS EN 12620:2002.
REQUIRED ROUTINE TESTS FOR AGGREGATES
No.
Requirement / Test Method
Test Frequency Rate
1.
Grading : BS EN 933-1 & 2:1997
Each two weeks or per 100m3, whichever

is more frequent.
2.
Material finer than 0.075 mm

: BS EN 933-1 & 2:1997

is more frequent.
3.
Clay lumps and friable particles : ASTM C142

is more frequent.
4.
Organic Impurities : BS 1377, Test 8
Each month or per 200 m3, whichever is

more frequent.
5.
Water Absorption : ASTM C128 / C127

more frequent.
6.
Specific Gravity : ASTM C128 / C127

more frequent.
7.
Shell Content : BS EN 933-7:1998
Each two months or per 100 m3,

whichever is more frequent.
8.
Particle shape : BS EN 933-3:1997
Each two months or per 100 m3,

whichever is more frequent.
9.
Acid soluble chlorides, Cl :

Quantitative BS EN 1744-1:1998, Annex A.2 & A.3
Quantitative BS EN 1744-1:1998, Annex A.4
On each delivery to site.

Each two weeks if result is more than 75%
of the limit and each month if the result is
less than 75% of the limit.
10.
Acid soluble Sulphates, SO3: BS EN 1744-1:1998,

Annex A.5
Each two weeks if result is more than 75%

of the limit and each two months if the
result is less than 75% of the limit.
11.
Soundness, Mg SO4 (5 cycles) : ASTM C88
Each two months.
12.
Mechanical strength,
10% fines or impact value : BS EN 1097-2 1998.
Los Angeles abrasion : ASTM C131/C535.
Each three months.

Each three months.
13.
Moisture variation in sand by moisture meters.
61.3.
Water
(a)
Water quality
(i)
Twice daily.
Water used for mixing concrete shall be clean, free from oil, grease, vegetable matter or other organic
impurities. Mixing water shall be potable and shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1008:2002
61
and shall have a pH in the basic range (7 to 9).

(ii)
In sampling water for testing, care shall be taken that containers are clean and that samples are
representative. Water from public reticulation systems for human consumption will be accepted without
test.
(iii)
Inorganic impurities shall not exceed the following limits:

Max. Concentration
Total dissolved solids
Chlorides (Cl)
Sulphate (SO4)
Alkali Carbonates
& Bicarbonates
(b)
Limit
2000mg/litre
250mg/litre
350mg/litre
500mg/litre
ASTM Test method

BS 1377- 3:1990, Method 8
D 512
D 516
D 513
Water Storage
Water storage tanks shall be sited in the shade and insulated. All distribution pipes are to be insulated or
painted white.
(c)
Water Temperature
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the water at such a temperature that allows the
concrete to be deposited at a maximum temperature of 32 C.
61.4.
Concrete Additives
(a)
Standards
(i)
The use of concrete additives shall only be permitted with the written approval of the Engineer and shall
be in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 212.
In case any admixtures are used, the rates and methods of application shall be strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
The suitability of any admixture shall be verified by trial mixes, subject to any appropriate tests on fresh or
hardened concrete as directed by the Engineer.
(ii)
Admixtures shall comply with the following British Standards where applicable:
BS 1014
BS EN 934-2:2001
(iii)
(b)
Pigments for cement, magnesium oxychloride and concrete

Concrete and Admixtures
Admixtures containing chloride salts will not be permitted under any circumstances.
Storage and Handling
(i)
Admixtures shall be stored in manufacturers containers, clearly labeled to avoid errors, protected from
extremes of temperature, all in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
(ii)
Additives shall be introduced into the concrete mix by approved dosing equipment. For Admixtures
added directly to the mixer the mixing time shall be increased as necessary to ensure an even dispersion.
2.0
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

Concrete shall be a mixture of cement, aggregates and water and additives if required. The no. of mixes
may be required to be increased over those contained in Table 5 below. The mix proportions, workability
and strengths of various types shall conform to Table 5. The term water/cement ratio means the ratio by
weight of the water to the cement in the mix, expressed as a decimal fraction. The water is that which is
free to combine with the cement in the mix. This includes free water in the aggregate but excludes water
absorbed or to be absorbed by the aggregate. The aggregate density for this purpose shall be taken in a
saturated surface dry condition. The moisture absorption for each source and type of aggregate shall be
62
determined and checked regularly in accordance with the test method ASTM C128/C127 and to the
frequency recommended.
In case cylinders are used for determination of concrete compressive strength in accordance with ASTM
C39, the corresponding cube strength shall be obtained by using a multiplication factor of 1:2. The term
aggregate/cement ratio means the ratio by weight of aggregate to cement in the mix. For this purpose
the aggregate is taken in a saturated surface-dry condition as for the water/cement ratio above. The air
content of air entrained concrete shall be expressed as a percentage by volume of concrete determined
by ASTM C231, "Air Content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method" at least one test for each
3
500 m of concrete shall be made or as directed by the Engineer. The slump of the freshly mixed
concrete shall be determined in accordance with BS EN 12350-2:2000 or ASTM C143. For each mix of
each grade the equivalent slump measured by the core test shall be determined by trial mixes. Control
shall be maintained by measuring the slump at the point of placing.
To ascertain strength of concrete preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the trial mixes designed to
select the job mix and shall be made and tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-3:2002. Works test
cubes shall be those used for control during construction and shall be made and tested in accordance
with BS EN 12390-3:2002
The criteria and requirements given are intended to produce the required strength, durability and
workability which will enable the concrete to be properly compacted to its full depth and finished to the
dimensions and within the tolerances shown on the drgs and required by the specification. The
water/cement ratio shall not exceed the upper limits specified in Table 5 below for each type of concrete.
2.1
Prescribed Mix Concrete

Ordinary prescribed mixes will be as specified and in accordance with BS 8500-1:2002, BS 8500-2:2002
and BS EN 206-1:2000.
2.2
Designed Mix Concrete
(a)
General
(i)
All mixes shall be designed by the Contractor to produce concrete of the required strength and complying
with the requirements of BS 8500-1&2:2002 & BS 8110:1997.
(ii)
The grade of concrete is denoted by the number which indicates the characteristic compressive strength
2
of the concrete in N/mm determined from cube tests at 28 days without accelerated curing, prefixed by
type of cement to be used in the mix. The grade designation is numerically equal to the characteristic
strength in N/sq. The grades are 7,10,15,20,25,30,40,50,60.
For reinforced concrete with dense aggregate, grades less than 20 shall not be used. The
characteristic strength is that determined from test cubes at 28 days.
The grade of concrete specified would be as described on the structural drawings and the Bill of
Quantities.
The characteristic strength of concrete is defined as the crushing strength of concrete cubes at 28
days below which not more than 5% of the test results may be expected to fall, when determined by a
statistical analysis based on a normal distribution.
(b)
Trial Mixes
(i)
Laboratory tests shall be carried out to ascertain that mixes are will satisfy the specification with the
available materials. Field trial mixes shall be prepared under full-scale site conditions and tested in
accordance with BS EN 12390-3:2002.
(ii)
Trial mixes shall be prepared for all concrete grades to be incorporated in the works before any structural
concrete is placed.
(iii)
Before any trial mixes are prepared the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer for
63
provisional approval:
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
The manufacturer and source of cement.

The source of supply of fine aggregate.
The source of supply of coarse aggregate.
The source of supply of water.
The grading of the coarse and fine aggregate.
The combined aggregate grading.
The water/cement ratio and details of free water available.
The aggregate/cement ratio.
The workability of the mix and the range in which it will be maintained.
The details of any proposed additives.
The type of measuring and mixing plant stating capacity.
The 28 days designed compressive strength.
(iv)
Each trial shall be carried out using the same materials, type of plant and equipment as will be used for
the works.
(v)
Three separate trial mixes shall be prepared for each grade of concrete and six 150 mm preliminary test
cubes shall be made for each trial mix, two for testing 7 days after casting and four for testing after 28
days.
(vi)
The sampling, making, curing and testing of the preliminary test cubes shall be carried out in accordance
with the methods described in BS EN 12390. All specimens shall be labeled in accordance with the
requirements of the Engineer.
(vii)
The trial mix proportions shall be approved if the requirements of BS EN 8500:2002 are satisfied.
(viii) Trial mixes shall be tested to determine the extent of bleeding in accordance with ASTM C 232, drying
shrinkage in accordance with BS EN 12350 / BS EN 12390, air content if applicable, workability and fresh
and hardened concrete densities.
(ix)
The trial mix proportions may be provisionally approved on the basis of the 7-day Design Strength
results when the average strength of the six cubes is not less than the value given for trial mixes in BS
EN 8500:2002. However, it remains the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the minimum
specified strength for each type of mix at 28 days will be achieved.
3.0
QUALITY CONTROL
3.1
General
In order to ensure that the quality of materials and mix portions are maintained throughout the concreting
operations, sampling and testing shall be carried out using the relevant procedures set out in BS EN 932,
BS EN 12620:2002, BS EN 12350 and BS EN 12390 in accordance with a routine testing program, which
shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to the commencement of concrete work. Unless the Engineer
otherwise directs, the program shall include at least the test specified in the following paragraphs. All tests
shall be carried out by an approved independent laboratory.
3.2
Aggregates
Required routine tests on aggregate shall be as described earlier.
3.3
Concrete
(a)
Sampling Rates
(i)
Slump tests shall be carried out at the average rate of one test per 5m of concrete mixed on site and on
every load of ready-mixed concrete delivered to site.
The maximum permissible slump, measured at the point of placing of the concrete, shall be 75 mm for
general concrete work and 100 mm for pumped concrete. Any variation from these slumps necessitated
64
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
(i)
by the use of plasticisers and the like shall be approved by the Engineer. Any concrete with a slump
varying from the design value by more than one third or 25 mm, whichever is greatest, shall be rejected.
3
Samples for works cube tests shall be taken at the average rate of one per 25 m or part thereof of
concrete of a particular grade placed, with a minimum of one sample taken every day that the mix is
+
used. A sample consists of six cubes. Cubes shall be cured in water at 23 Deg.C /- 2 Deg.C
3
Bleeding tests shall be carried out at a rate of one per 25 m or part thereof.
Works Cube Tests
Samples shall be taken at the point of placing or from the delivery vehicle if ready-mixed concrete is
being used. From each sample six 150 mm cubes shall be made, two for testing at 7 days after
casting and four for testing at 28 days. All cubes shall be clearly marked with their identification and
accurate records shall be supplied to the Engineer giving:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Identification of test cube

Date and time of sampling
Mix designation
Location of sample batch after placing
Method of compaction
Date of testing
Results of test
(ii)
Criteria of acceptance & rejection of concrete shall be as per BS EN 8500:2002 / BS EN 206-1:2000.
(iii)
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete which has failed to meet the strength requirements of this
specification is not likely to be capable of fulfilling its purpose in the structure, three cores shall be cut
from the area represented by the test cubes. The actual location shall be decided by the Engineer. The
cost of cutting the cores and any resultant delay shall be borne by the Contractor regardless of whether
the quality of the deposited concrete proves to be satisfactory or not. Where the average compressive
strength, found by testing the three cores taken from the structures and adjusted to the equivalent cube
strength at 28 days, is confirmed as below the strength requirements, then the Engineer may instruct that
further cores be cut in order to determine the full extent of the defective concrete and further
investigations e.g. load test, etc. be carried out. Defective concrete shall be cut out and replaced or
alternative remedial action shall be taken, as the Engineer directs, and the cost of such work and of
cutting the additional cores shall be borne by the Contractor.
(iv)
The results obtained from the tests carried out on molded cubes at 28 days shall be the means of
ensuring that the concrete meets the compressive strength requirements of the specification. Tests shall
be carried out at 7 days to establish a relationship between the 7 days and 28 days strengths. The
relationship shall be used to interpret further test results in order to predict the probable value of the
corresponding 28-day strengths. The Engineer shall be advised without delay should any sample appear
likely to fail to meet the specification so that necessary action can be taken to minimize the effect of such
failure.
4.0
CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION

Concrete shall be as shown in Table 5 below. The number of mixes may require to be increased. The
criteria given in the Table are designed to produce concrete of the required strength and durability. If the
maximum aggregate size is 10 mm then the cement content stipulated for the class of concrete given in
Table 5 shall be increased by 45 Kg. per cu.m.
Table 5 : Table of Concrete Mixes
_______________________________________________________________________________
Concrete
Max. Size
Min. Qty.
Max. Free Water/
Characteristic Cube
Class
Aggregate
of Cement
Cement Ratio
Strength, CCS
________________________________________________________________________________
3
mm
Kg. / m
7 day
28 day
2
N/mm
________________________________________________________________________________
45/20
20
400
0.425
33
45
65
40/20
20
370
0.475
30
40
37/20
20
350
0.50
26
37
35/20
20
330
0.525
25
35
30/20
20
310
0.55
20
30
25/20
20
275
0.60
16
25
15/20
20
250
0.65
10
15
________________________________________________________________________________
o
The CCSs are for concrete which has been cured at a temperature of 20 C +/- 1 C and are the values
below which no more than 5% of the test results fall. The 7-day strengths shall be used only as a guide.
Concrete shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 except where BS 8007:1987 or this specification
differs. Sampling for test purposes shall comply with BS EN 12350-1:2000 (on site) and BS 1881125:1996 (in laboratory). Concrete for water retaining shall be watertight and shall comply with the
recommendations of BS 8007.
Concrete for paving or precast units shall be tested to BS EN 12390-5:2000 and shall have a minimum
2
2
flexural beam strength of 3.5 N/mm at 28 days. If the concrete has a specified CCS of 40 N/mm or
2
greater than the minimum flexural strength shall be 4 N/mm .
If concrete specimens are cured at higher temperatures, or for longer periods than BS EN 12390-2:2000
111 requires the adjusted CCS shall be calculated as follows :
100 f'/f = A + B log (24D (T+12)/1000).
f'
f
T
D
A&B
=
=
=
=
=
adjusted CCS
specified CCS
curing temperature
age at testing in days
are coefficients given in the following table.
The above equation applies only to OPC, MSRPC and SRPc.

_________________________________________________________
2
Recorded Cube Strength, N/mm
A
B
_________________________________________________________
Less than 15
10
67.5
15 to 35
20
60.0
Greater than 35
30
52.5
__________________________________________________________
0
This calculation may be applied for curing at temperatures up to 27 C.

Before placing concrete the Contractor shall obtain approval of the mixes proposed for each class of
concrete and the average target strengths. The mixes shall be designed to achieve the minimum
workability for the Contractor to place and compact the concrete with the equipment proposed for use.
The mean strength shall exceed the CCS by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation expected from
2
the concreting plant, except that no standard deviation less than 3.5 N/mm shall be used as a basis for
2
designing a mix. Unless otherwise approved a standard deviation of 7 N/mm shall be used for initial
mixes.
The ultimate compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined on test specimens obtained and
prepared in accordance with BS EN 12390-1:2000.
Mixes for structural concrete shall be designed by the Contractor. The class of concrete is denoted by
the 28-day characteristic cube strength and the maximum size of aggregate.
66
The chloride and sulphate levels in the concrete mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Maximum Limits of Chloride and Sulphate content as a percentage of Weight of Cement in the Mix.
___________________________________________________________________
Type of Concrete
Chlorides as Cl
Sulphates as SO3
According to BS 1881, Part 124
____________________________________________________________________
For reinforced concrete
if made with OPC/MSRPC
if made with SRPC
Prestressed concrete
and heat cured
reinforced concrete
0.30
0.06
3.70
3.70
0.10
3.70
For mass concrete

if made with OPC/MSRPC
0.60
3.70
if made with SRPC
0.12
3.70
_____________________________________________________________________
Note : The OPC and MSRPC cements can also contain chlorides, the relevant standard BS EN 197
allows upto 0.1% Cl. Therefore any chloride content present in the cement has to be taken into account
while computing total Cl in the mix. In case the cement contains the maximum limit of 0.1% Cl, then the
aggregates, water and admixtures used for Prestressed concrete or heat cured reinforced concrete
should be absolutely free of chlorides.
WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE: TABLE 7

_______________________________________________________________________________
Degree of Workability 20 mm max. size
40 mm max. size
Aggregate
Aggregate
____________________________________________________
Slump, mm
Compacting
Slump, mm
Compacting
Factor
Factor
_______________________________________________________________________________
Low
13-25
0.82-0.88
20-50
0.88-0.88
Medium
25-50
0.88-0.94
50-100
0.88-0.94
High
50-127
0.94-0.97
100-125
0.94-0.94
_______________________________________________________________________________
5.0
MIXING AND TRANSPORTATION
5.1
Mixing
(a)
Mixing Concrete
(i)
(ii)
Concrete shall be batched by weight only. The weight of cement and each size of aggregate as indicated
by the mechanisms employed shall be within tolerance of +2% of the weights per batch agreed by the
Engineer. The weight of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water
contained in them. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water
contained in the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Contractor by a method
approved by the Engineer immediately before mixing, and further as the Engineer requires.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mixer manufacturer in
accordance with BS 1305 or in a batch type mixer, a specimen of which has been tested in accordance
with the requirements of BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix proportions
being used. The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerance specified by the
67
manufacturer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerances by
adjustment.
(iii) The weighing and water-dispersing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. The accuracy shall
be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against accurate weights and
volumes when required by the Engineer.
(iv) Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any
fresh concrete is mixed. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of
cement to the other.
(v)
Under no circumstances shall different types of cement be used in same mixer.
(vi) Mixers shall not be loaded in excess of the manufacturers rated capacity which shall be clearly
displayed on the mixer in terms of volume of concrete mixed.
(vii) The materials shall be mixed until they are uniformly distributed and the mix is of uniform consistency and
color but in no case less than 2 minutes after all the materials have been added to the drum. The mixer
shall revolve at the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
(viii) On cessation of work including all stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixers and all handling plant
shall be washed with clean water. If old concrete deposits remain in the mixer drum, it shall be rotated
with clean aggregate and water fed into the drum prior to production of new concrete.
(ix) Total CL from all constituents in the concrete mix shall not be greater than 0.3 and 0.7 by weight of
cement for mass concrete made with SRPC and OPC respectively and 0.10 and 0.30 by weight of
cement for reinforced concrete made with SRPC and OPC respectively. Total SO3 from all components
in the hardened concrete shall not be greater than 4% by weight of cement.
(x)
Sulphate resisting concrete is to contain sulphate-resisting cement with a minimum cement content of
3
370 kg/m and a maximum free water cement ratio of 0.45 by weight, irrespective of required strength of
concrete.
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Ready Mixed Concrete
Ready mixed concrete, as defined in BS 8000-2.1:1990, from a central batching plant may be used in the
works upon the agreement of the Engineer. The quality and strength of cement shall be determined by
the Site and Lab tests conducted under the supervision of the Engineer. No test results supplied by the
ready mix manufacturer shall be accepted as proof of quality and strength of concrete. Prior to the
delivery of any concrete to the site details of the proposed supplier shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
Arrangements shall be made for the Engineer to inspect the plant if so required and to be present during
the preparation of trial mixes. The source of ready-mixed concrete shall not subsequently be changed
without the further approval of the Engineer.
The requirements of this specification in respect of materials, testing, storage, batching and mixing shall
apply equally to the central batching plant. The concrete shall comply in all respects with the provisions
of BS 8500:2002.
Work test cubes shall be taken on site at the specified rate irrespective of any cubes which may have
been taken by the supplier.
Mixer trucks shall provide a minimum of 100 rotations at a rate of not less than 7 revolutions per minute to
ensure thorough mixing. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer truck mixer units and their mixing and
discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 8500:2002.
Extra water shall only be added at the site with the specific approval of the Engineer and in the event of
such an addition, works tests cubes shall be taken to check that the minimum strength requirements have
been achieved.
Copies of all delivery notes shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Name of supplier, serial number of ticket and date

Truck number
Name of Contractor
Name of Contact and location of site
Grade of concrete
Specified workability
Type and source of cement
Source of aggregate
Nominal maximum size of aggregate
Time of loading at suppliers works
Time of loading at suppliers works
68
l)
m)
n)
o)
5.2
(i)
(ii)
Quantity of concrete
Arrival and departure times of trucks
Time of completion of discharge
Extra water added with the approval of the Engineer.
Transportation
The concrete shall be transported to the site in an approved type of truck mixer or agitator truck such that
the materials do not segregate. The discharge chute and other dirty areas shall be washed down after
delivery to prevent spillage on the roads.
The maximum time between the addition of cement to the mixer or agitator truck and the discharge of
concrete shall be one hour, regardless of whether retarders have previously demonstrated to the
Engineer that concrete can be transported successfully for longer periods and received the Engineer's
written approval.
6.0
PLACING, COMPACTING AND CURING
6.1
Placing Concrete
(a)
Engineer's Approval
The Engineer shall receive a minimum of 24 hours notice of the Contractor's intention to place concrete
and the Engineer's approval shall be obtained before concrete is placed in any part of the works. If
concreting has not started within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall be obtained. In the
event of failure to receive the Engineer's approval the notice and approval procedure shall be repeated as
above.
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Temperature Conditions
Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not more than 32 Deg.C and the form work and
reinforcement shall be at a temperature low enough to prevent the flash setting of the concrete.
No concrete shall be mixed or placed while the temperature is above 40 Deg.C on a rising thermometer
or above 43 Deg.C on a falling thermometer. The day's concreting shall be planned in such a manner as
to ensure that each bay or panel is completed at an approved construction joint before the temperature
rises above the permissible limit.
Placing Generally
The concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer unless
carried in purpose made agitators, operating continuously, when the time shall be within one hour of the
introduction of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously and fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ
concrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction joint is formed. When
in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours no further concrete shall be placed against it for 24 hours.
Concrete shall be placed gently in position to avoid segregation and care must be taken to ensure that
reinforcement, water bars or any other embedded items are completely surrounded by concrete and
voids or cavities are present in the body of the concrete. Concrete shall be placed as near as possible to
its final position and not moved by the use of internal vibrators, to ensure that no reinforcement, formwork
or embedded items are disturbed under any circumstances, especially after the initial set of the concrete.
Concrete shall in no circumstances be placed in standing or flowing water except with
the
prior
approval of the Engineer, and utilizing purpose design equipment and methods e.g. tremie pipes,
hydrovalve etc.
Generally concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm
and each layer shall be well consolidated before the subsequent layer is placed. In the case of columns
and walls the compacted depth may be increased to a maximum of 450 mm.
Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 2 meter and shall not be pumped or
discharged through aluminum alloy.
When trunking or chutes are used they shall be cleaned before and after each pour.
69
(d)
Pumped Concrete
Concrete may only be transported by pumping if the following information is submitted to the Engineer for
prior approval:
a) Details of mix design.
b) Details of pumping equipment including distribution pipe layouts for static pumps.
c) Area and volume of concrete to be placed in one operation.
d) Distance and height over which concrete is to be pumped.
e) Details of standby equipment.
6.2
Compacting Concrete
(a)
Equipment
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Immersion type vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 10,000 oscillations unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer.
External vibrators shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and shall operate at not less than 85 Hz.
Surface vibrators shall be of double beam type to the approval of the Engineer, used in conjunction with
immersion vibrators to ensure full compaction across the entire width of the section.
Vibrating roller compactors for dry lean and rolled concrete shall be to the Engineer's approval. The
number of passes required shall be determined by trials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Sufficient standby equipment shall be retained on site during concreting operations to ensure that
suitable equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.
Compaction equipment shall only be operated by workmen trained in the use of the particular
machinery.
Workmanship
Compaction shall commence as soon as there is sufficient concrete within the formwork to immerse the
vibrator, when poker vibrators are used, or as soon as the maximum depth of uncompacted concrete has
been achieved when using external vibration. Compaction shall continue during the placing operation so
that at no time shall there be a large volume of uncompacted concrete within the formwork.
Concrete shall not be moved across the surface of the forms by means of internal vibration.
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration or other means during placing, and worked around
reinforcement, tendons or duct formers, water bars or other embedded items and into corners of
formwork to provide a solid void-free mass having the required surface finish. Vibration shall be applied
continuously during the placing until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner that does
not promote segregation. Over vibrating shall be avoided to minimize the formation of a weak surface
layer.
For poker type vibrators the tubular part of the tool shall be immersed vertically into the full depth of the
concrete to be vibrated, at points spaced to suit the radius of action of the vibrator and workability of the
concrete but not exceeding 500 mm centers. Where the underlying layer is also fresh concrete the
vibrator shall also penetrate that layer by 100 mm to ensure that the surfaces knit together.
Vibrators shall not be allowed to touch reinforcement or other embedded items and shall not be permitted
to touch the form face to avoid damage to the formwork (poker burns).
Where external vibrators are used, the design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators shall be such
as to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Additional vibration may be required after initial compaction to obviate the effects of minor surface
settlement, causing plastic settlement cracks at reinforcement locations and changes to concrete section.
(viii)If and when the formwork is stripped, the surface is found to be honeycombed, the Engineer may
give instructions for the whole or part of the work to be removed and replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
6.3
Curing
(a)
General
(i)
Curing and protection shall start immediately after compaction of the concrete. Concrete surfaces shall
be cured for a minimum of 7 days by a method approved by the Engineer. Formed surfaces shall be
similarly protected and cured if formwork is removed before 7 days have elapsed.
70
(b)
(i)
Curing Methods
The method of curing treatment adopted shall ensure that sufficient moisture is present to complete the
hydration of the cement. It shall not:
a) Disfigure permanently exposed surfaces
b) Affect the bonding of subsequent coatings
c) Increase the concrete temperature
(ii)
(iii)
Hessian or other absorbent material shall be kept wet for the duration of the curing period. An
adequate supply of fresh salt-free water shall be kept on site for this purpose. The Engineer may insist
that Hessian be overlaid with polythene sheet to assist water retention during rapid drying weather
conditions.
Curing compounds shall be to the Engineers approval. Curing membranes shall have a minimum
efficiency factor of 90% when tested in accordance with Clause 2709 of the Department of Transport
Specification for Road and Bridge Works. Compounds shall be white pigmented or aluminized and shall
be degradable to avoid affecting the final surface finish of concrete.
7.0
REINFORCEMENT
7.1
Materials
(a)
Standards
(i)
Hot rolled mild steel bars and hot rolled high yield bars shall comply with the requirements of BS
4449:2005+A2:2009, latest edition.
Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of BS 4483:2005, latest edition or any
equivalent standard. Steel shall be fusion-bonded epoxy coated if so required by the particular
specification or denoted elsewhere in the contract documents.
Hard drawn mild steel wire shall comply with the requirements of BS 4482:2005.
Tying wire shall be either:
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
a) 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wire

b) 1.2 mm diameter stainless steel wire
(v)
Reinforcement yield stress fy shall be 460 N/mm2.
(b)
Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
(i)
Where specified on drawings reinforcing bars, fabric and special steel connections shall be protected
against corrosion with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating applied in accordance with the latest edition of
ASTM A775 Standard and shall be supplied from an approved coating factory using approved epoxy
resins. All cutting and bending procedures shall be to the coating factory's recommendations and
instructions, as agreed with the Engineer. The coating factory representative shall be required to attend
the site at regular intervals to inspect all aspects of the work to ensure his product is used fully in
accordance with his recommendations. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a copy of certificate
of compliance for each shipment of coated bars. The certificate of compliance shall state that
representative samples of the coated bars have been tested and the test results comply with the
requirements herein specified. Copies of test results shall be retained by the coating factory for seven
years and originals shall be forwarded to the Engineer upon completion of the works.
When the epoxy coating is damaged, (cut ends, accidental damage, etc.) the coating shall be repaired
with patching material conforming to the latest edition of ASTM A775 and shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The repair to the damaged area shall be carried
out as soon as possible and before oxidation of the surface occurs. In no case shall the repair be delayed
more than 8 hours. Any trace of rust or oxidation must be removed by grinder or wire brush prior to touchup.
All reinforcement shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Bar bending equipment
shall have padded supports and contact areas and shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels supplied
by, or approved by the coating factory representative.
Reinforcement of all types shall be stored on site in protected racks above ground in an approved manner
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
71
so as to avoid damage to the coating. Direct metal to coating contact should be avoided wherever
possible.
Equipment for handling epoxy-coated bars shall have padded contact areas. Bundles shall be lifted with
a strong back or have multiple support to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in the bundle. Bars or
bundles shall not be dragged or dropped. Any coating damage due to handling, shipment and placing
shall be repaired as described above. All chairs, tie-wires or other devices used to connect, support,
secure or fasten epoxy coated reinforcement shall be made of, or coated with, a dialetric material such as
nylon, epoxy or plastic. All bundles shall be identified at the factory with durable tags to allow checking of
coating quality control at site. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner which may
cause injury to the material. Bars with shapes not shown on the drawings shall not be used. The
Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards or similar to ensure that the coating is not damaged
during fixing and the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of the
concrete or other operations. Prior to concreting the Contractor shall ensure that the reinforcement is
cleaned of all concrete from previous pours and any damage to the coating is repaired.
The insertion of bars into or removal of bars from concrete already placed will not be permitted.
Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from concrete at joints shall not be bent without the prior
approval of the Engineer. Secondary reinforced concrete members for which no reinforcement details
have been given, shall have a min. ratio of reinforcement to concrete of 0.5 %.
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Testing of Reinforcing Bars

A copy of the manufacturers test certificate for ultimate strength, elongation and bend tests together with
the chemical analysis of the steel shall be submitted to the Engineer for each consignment of
reinforcement steel delivered to site.
Sampling and testing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 in all respects
and batches shall be rejected if the average results from each batch are not in accordance with the
specification.
The samples shall be adequate for the test to be carried out, shall be representative specimens of the
steel being used in the works and shall have mill identification marks along the test length. If identification
marks are not rolled into the steel, the source of supply shall be submitted at the time of submission of the
samples.
Tests for epoxy coating to bars shall be carried out to the latest edition of ASTM A775 at the following
frequencies:
a) Coating thickness - minimum of two bars from each size coated from each production shift, but not
less than two bars for every:
- 5 tons of reinforcement of diameter less than 20 mm
- 10 tons of reinforcement of diameter 20 mm or greater
b) Bend tests - same rate as for coating thickness.
c) Impact test - certification for each individual batch of powder.
d) Abrasion test - certificate to be as for impact test.
e) Chemical resistance - each batch to be certified.
f) Cathodic despondency - each batch to be certified.
(d)
(i)
(ii)
Surface Condition
Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose
rust or mill scale, grease or any other substance which may adversely affect the steel or concrete
chemically or reduce the bond.
The Engineer may instruct the cleaning of any reinforcement which has remained exposed on site for
long periods, resulting in a high concentration of chlorides on the surface.
7.2
Cutting, Bending and Fixing of Reinforcement
(a)
Cutting and Bending
(i)
(ii)
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shape and dimensions shown in the Contract documentation
or to schedules approved by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements and tolerances of BS
8666:2005.
Reinforcement shall not be heated before bending. Hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or
72
(iii)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
bent again once having been shaped, except with the approval of the Engineer.
Mild steel bars projecting from concrete may be bent provided that the bend radius complies with the
requirements of BS 8666:2005. High yield bars, partially embedded may only be rebent with the approval
of the Engineer and with a minimum bend radius in compliance with BS 8666:2005.
Fixing Reinforcement
The number, size, form and disposition of bars shall be strictly in accordance with the /drawings and
bending schedules or as directed by the Engineer.
Reinforcement shall be checked after fixing and no concrete shall be placed around the reinforcement
without the written approval of the Engineer.
All reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position. At intersections the bars shall be bound together with
tying wire and loose ends of the wire shall be turned towards the inside of the member.
The position of reinforcement should be checked before and during concreting, particular attention being
paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections.
The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards or similar to ensure that the reinforcement is not
displaced by being walked on during the placing of the concrete or other operations.
Spacers, chairs and other supports detailed on drawings, together with such other supports as may be
necessary shall be used to maintain the specified position of steel reinforcement. Spacers or chairs shall
be placed at a maximum spacing of 1 m in each direction and at a closer spacing if required.
Unless otherwise specified on drawings:
a) The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required cover minus 5mm.
b) Where reinforcement is located in relation to one face of a member only the actual concrete cover
shall not exceed the nominal cover plus :
- 5 mm on bars up to and including 12 mm in size
- 10 mm on bars over 12 mm up to and including 25 mm size
- 15 mm on bars over 25 mm size
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Spacers shall be of such material and design as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement
and not cause spacing of the concrete cover. Spacer blocks shall not be used where the concrete face
will be visible in the finished work unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Concrete spacer blocks shall not exceed 50 mm square. The mix used for spacer blocks shall be
comparable in strength, durability, porosity and appearance to the surrounding concrete. The maximum
nominal aggregate size shall not exceed 10mm.
During concreting operations, a competent steel fixer shall be in attendance to ensure that the
reinforcement is maintained in position as placing and compaction proceeds.
Laps and Joints
Laps and joints shall be made only by the method specified and at the positions shown on the drawings
or as agreed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified minimum laps as defined in BS EN 1992-11:2004.
Welding may only be permitted for bars having the required welding properties ("weldable" and "readily
weldable" reinforcement as defined in BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 or equivalent). The competence of the
operators shall be demonstrated prior to, and periodically during, welding operations. All welding shall be
in accordance with the relevant British Standard and the recommendations of the reinforcement
manufacturer. For structural welds involving transfer of load between bars, tensile testing of samples of
each size of bar shall be carried out at an approved independent laboratory prior to any welded joints
being formed on site.
When required length of run of weld exceeds five bar diameters, the weld shall be divided into sections
with a space between runs of not less than five bar diameters. The locations of all welded joints should be
approved by the Engineer.
Couplers shall be purpose made fittings to the approval of the Engineer, fixed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
Tensile testing of joints for each size of bar to be used shall be carried out at an approved independent
testing laboratory prior to any such joint being formed on site.
Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings steel fabric shall be lapped at least 300 mm at the ends and
sides for square meshes.
For the cross wires of longitudinal mesh fabric, and for the short way of expanded metal fabric, 150 mm
73
lap is required but for the longitudinal wires of wire fabric and for the long way of expanded metal fabric
the lap shall be at least 300 mm for fabric weighing less than 4 kg/sq., 450 mm for weights between 4 and
8 kg/sq. and 600 mm for heavier fabric.
8.0
FORMWORK & FINISHES
8.1
Surface Finishes
(a)
Unformed Surfaces
(i)
Unformed surfaces shall receive one of the following as specified on drawings.

Class U1
Class U2
Class U3
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
The concrete shall be uniformly leveled and tamped.

When the concrete has hardened sufficiently the Class U1 finish shall be wood
floated to give uniform surface, free from tamping marks.
When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitence being worked to the surfaces, the Class U1 finish
shall be steel trowelled by hand or machine to produce a dense, smooth uniform
surface, free from trowel marks.
The concrete surface shall not be wetted to assist the production of the surface finish.
Concrete surfaces to receive thin tile or sheet finishing shall be free from any defects which would
adversely affect the appearance of the applied finish.
Formed Surfaces
Formed surfaces shall receive one of the following specified finishes unless otherwise specified on
drawings.
Class F1
Irregularities in the finish shall be no greater than those obtained from the use of properly
designed grout tight forms of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Small
blemishes caused by entrapped air or moisture will be permitted, but the surface shall be
free from voids, honeycombing or large blemishes.
Class F2
The finish shall be smooth and have uniform texture and appearance and shall be
obtained by the use of properly designed forms of closely jointed material having a hard
smooth surface. The particular material shall be used consistently throughout the
structure. Any imperfections shall be made good as directed by the Engineer.
Class F3
The finish shall be Class F2, with formwork designed to achieve a surface finish giving
variation not exceeding 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge.
(c)
Remedial Work
(i)
Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be inspected by the Engineer before any remedial
work, subsequent treatment or any other treatment which would hinder the proper inspection of the
concrete, is carried out. Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated prior to inspection by the
Engineer shall be liable for rejection.
(ii)
Concrete which in the opinion of the Engineer is defective or which is not true to an acceptable line or
level shall be cut out and rebuilt without delay, unless the Engineer agrees that a repair may be
satisfactorily effected. Such agreement shall not preclude the subsequent rejection of the repaired work.
(iii)
Making good ("bagging up") of Class F2 or F3 surfaces shall be carried out within 24 hours of removal of
formwork.
(iv)
Shutter tie holes shall be filled with an approved non-shrink mix of equivalent strength to that of the parent
material.
74
8.2
Formwork
(a)
Formwork Design
(i)
(ii)
The design of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor not withstanding any approval which
may be given by the Engineer.
Forms shall be of such quality and strength that throughout the placing, compaction, vibration and setting
of the concrete the designed and constructed formwork maintains rigidly, position and level within the
allowable tolerances. If timber forms are used they should of sound, well-seasoned timber and free from
all loose knot.
Formwork shall be so designed and constructed so that the finished concrete is to the shape, size,
position and finish shown on the drawings and to meet the following basic requirements.
a) To safely support all loads that might be applied until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support
such loads itself.
b) To be sufficiently watertight to prevent loss of liquid.
c) To fit lightly against previous concrete work to prevent lapping, loss of liquid or grout.
d) To be capable of being cleaned out immediately prior to concreting with temporary access holes
provided as necessary.
e) To permit removal of side forms without disturbing the soffit formwork.
f) The positioning of props to be such as not to overstress any part of the completed structure.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings formwork to all slabs and beams shall be constructed with
the following upward camber :
Beams and slabs spanning between supports : 7 mm at midspan for each 5 m span.
Cantilever beams and slabs : 12 mm at free end for each 3 m span.
Where specified triangular fillets shall be fixed in the forms to provide a chamfer to all external angles in
the finished work.
Where internal ties are used they or their removable parts shall be capable of being extracted without
damage to the concrete or its surface finish. No permanently embedded metal part shall have less than
the cover specified for reinforcement.
Formwork shall be provided to the top faces of sloping work where the slope exceeds 15 Deg. from the
horizontal.
Falsework shall be adequate to safely transfer all loads to a safe bearing level. If required by the Engineer
calculations to demonstrate the adequacy of Falsework shall be forwarded for approval.
Concrete shall not be placed until the relevant form work has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer through this shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements as to soundness, finish and
accuracy specified.
Preparation of Formwork Prior to Concreting
Before concrete is placed the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned.
The inside surfaces of all formwork, except permanent pre-treated and lined formwork shall be sparingly
coated with an approved release agent to prevent adhesion to the concrete. Special care shall be taken
to keep reinforcement and any hardened concrete against which new concrete is to be placed free from
the release agent.
The release agent shall be an approved material, marketed as such and shall be one of the following
types) Cream emulsion.
a) Neat oil with surfactant added
b) Chemical release agent
The release agent shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and
shall not at any time be diluted by the addition of water or any other material.
The same type and make of release agent shall be used on all formwork to concrete which will be visible
in the finished work.
No openings, chases, holes or other voids shall be formed in the concrete without the prior approval of
the Engineer. All joints in formwork shall be close fitting to prevent bleeding of cement paste from the
concrete.
All permanent fixings, conduits, pipes, etc. and formwork to all holes and openings shall be securely and
75
accurately fixed in their correct position before the concrete is placed. No fixings shall be made in the
structural concrete without written permission, and they shall comply with the requirements of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall obtain from each sub-contractor complete details of the latter are requirements for
holes and fixings which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Removal of Formwork
Removal of formwork shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004.
The Engineer shall be notified when the Contractor intends to remove any formwork.
The minimum periods between concreting and removal of formwork are shown below, however,
compliance with the requirements shown shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to maintain
forms and props in position until the new construction is sufficiently strong to support its own weight and
any incidental additional loads without damage.
_________________________________________________________________
Ordinary Portland Cement
Rapid Hardening Portland
Concrete
Cement Concrete
__________________________________________________________________
Slab, props left under
6 days
3 days
Beam Soffits
10 days
5 days
Props to Slabs
10 days
5 days
Props to Beams
16 days
8 days
Vertical surfaces such as
walls, columns and sides of
beams
1 day
1 day
__________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the concrete work caused by or arising from the
removal and striking of the forms and supports. The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibility towards the stability and safety of the shuttering and the relevant structure. Any
work showing signs of damage through premature or excess loading is to be entirely re-constructed at the
Contractor's expense. After removal, the Contractor shall not undertake or start any repair work without
the Engineer's inspection and approval.
(iv)
(d)
(i)
(ii)
(e)
(i)
(ii)
Where props are to be left in place, the soffit forms may only be removed if the design of the formwork
allows such a sequence of operations without the props being in any way disturbed.
Early Loading
Concrete shall not be subjected to loading, including its own weight, which will induce a compressive
stress in it exceeding 0.33 of its compressive strength at the time of loading, or of the specified 28 day
strength whichever is the lesser.
The assessment of the strength of the concrete and the stress produced by the loads shall be subject to
agreement of the Engineer.
Tolerances
Permissible deviations from the dimensions and levels indicated in the Contract Documentation for in-situ
concrete are given in Table 7.2.5.1.
The tolerances specified are for general use only and shall not apply where :
a) A greater accuracy is necessary to enable plant or components to be incorporated to fulfill their
intended purpose, or for subsequently applied coverings to comply with specification.
b) The specified cover to the reinforcement is not maintained.
c) The requirements for surface finishes Class U2, U3, F2 and F3 necessitate closer tolerances.
d) Tolerances are specified on the Drawings.
76
9.0
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
9.1
Construction Joints
(a)
Location
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
The number of construction joints shall be kept to the minimum necessary for the execution of the
work. The location of joints shall be agreed by the Engineer before concreting is commenced.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer construction joints shall be at right angles to the general
direction of the member.
Preparation of Joints
In horizontal or inclined members the joint shall be formed by the insertion of rigid stopping-off forms. The
forms shall be split along the lines of the reinforcement passing through them so that each portion can be
positioned and removed separately without disturbance or shock to the reinforcement or concrete.
Stop ends made of expanded metal lath or similar material may only be left permanently in the concrete
with the approval of the Engineer. Where such stop ends are used no metal may be left permanently in
the concrete closer to the surface of the concrete than the minimum specified cover to the reinforcement.
In vertical members the upper surface of the concrete lift shall be horizontal and the external face of the
joint shall be neatly formed by means of a timber edging fixed to the formwork.
All contact surfaces of the existing concrete in the construction joint, except within 25 mm of permanently
exposed faces, shall be treated to remove laitence together with any porous areas below the laitence to
expose the aggregate.
The treatment shall preferably consist of using a wire brush and water spray as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently. If the surface is too hard for this to be effective, the surface shall be roughened by
sand blasting or the use of a scaling hammer or other mechanical device. Particular care shall be taken
not to disturb any of the remaining materials.
Before fresh concrete is placed against the joint the surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials and
washed with water. All free water shall be removed immediately before placing the fresh concrete, which
shall be well compacted against the joint.
9.2
Movements Joints
(a)
Joint Filler Material

Joint filler board shall be one of the following, as specified on the drawings:
i) Pre-formed bitumen impregnated fiber joint filler board, non-extruding in compliance with Ministry of
Transport Specification for Roads and Bridges, Clause 2630.
ii) Bitumen bound cork with asphalt paper encasement, non-extruding in compliance with Ministry of
Transport Specification for Roads and Bridges, Clause 2630.
iii) Cellular non-absorbent pre-formed low-density joint filler. All materials to be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendation.
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(c)
Slip Membranes
Slip membranes shall be preformed plastic sheet, the mating surfaces of which will give a coefficient of
2
friction not exceeding 0.2 when subjected to a load of 270 kN/m .
Slip membranes shall be fitted strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
PTFE Bearing
PTFE bearings shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Bearings shall consist of a lower PTFE coated
reinforced elastomeric stationery pad of minimum 2 mm thickness and an upper PTFE coated reinforced
neoprene sliding load bearing pad, with expanded polystyrene surround. Dimensions shall be determined
to the approval of the Engineer, based on loading indicated on the drawings.
(d)
(i)
(ii)
Sealant
Horizontal sealant to be cold poured polysulphide rubber to BS EN ISO 11600:2003.
Vertical sealant shall be cold applied polysulphide rubber in compliance with BS EN ISO 11600:2003.
77
(iii)
(iv)
(e)
All sealant shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
The sealant shall be of suitable color, as directed by the Engineer.
Damp-proof Membrane
Where specified damp-proof membrane shall be of bituminous material with PVC backing to a total
minimum thickness of 1.5 mm, installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
10.0
WATERTIGHT CONSTRUCTION
10.1
General
All the above specification requirements for concrete works shall apply to watertight construction unless
otherwise specified hereafter or on the Contract Drawings.
10.2
Concrete Aggregates
Water absorption, when measured by a procedure approved by the Engineer, shall not exceed 1%.
10.3
Water Bars
Water bars shall be purpose made heavy-duty pre-formed flexible water stops of extruded PVC. All
junction pieces shall be purpose made units obtained from the same manufacturer. Site jointing shall be
by heat fusion, carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Fixing
methods shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
10.4
Pipework Penetration
All pipes penetrating watertight concrete shall be provided with an integral puddle flange. Sleeves for later
installation of Pipework may only be included with the prior written approval of the Engineer. Sealing of
annular spaces around pipes through sleeves shall be by a method approved by the Engineer.
11.0
12.0
PROPRIETARY REPAIR PRODUCTS

(i)
Repair materials shall be proprietary products or systems.
(ii)
The products or systems selected shall be modified cementitious materials.
(iii)
Prior to approval of material the Contractor shall provide details of previous applications under
similar conditions showing satisfactory in-situ performance over a minimum period of 10 years.
(iv)
All material shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
under the direct supervision of experienced operatives representing the manufacturer.
PRECAST CONCRETE
Precast concrete elements shall be used only where specified or as approved by the Engineer.
All precast concrete works shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 and aggregates shall comply with
BS EN 12620:2002.
Concreting precast units shall be carried out continuously without any interruption of the pouring
operation for each unit.
Moulds used for any pre-cast concrete shall be approved by the Engineer.
The concrete shall have smooth surfaces true and free from blemishes obtained by using steel or
other approved modules as formwork.
78
13.0
PRECAST HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCKS (HOURDIS) For Ribbed Slabs

Aggregate shall be so sized, graded, proportioned and thoroughly mixed in a batch mixes with such
proportions of cement and clean water as to produce a homogenous concrete mixture. However, in no
case shall the proportion of cement in the mixture be less than five ( 5 ) standard bags (each weighing 50
kgs.) per cubic meter of concrete.
Pre-cast hollow concrete blocks (hourdis) for ribbed slabs shall be manufactured in approved vibrating
machines. If for any reason the strength requirement is not achieved, the cement shall be increased at
the Contractors own expense. The blocks shall be cured for twelve (12) consecutive days and shall be
at least twenty one (21) days old before incorporation in the works. The blocks shall be of an approved
pattern capable of withstanding a compressive pressure applied at the ends of 50 kgs / cm2 based on the
gross cross sectional area of the block obtained without deducting voids.
The blocks shall be hard, sound, durable, sharp, clean with well-defined arises, free from cracks and
flaws or other defects and of the dimensions shown on the Structural Drawings. The blocks shall be
obtained from an approved local factory.
Pre-Cast hollow concrete blocks (hourdis) shall be laid exactly in line with the cells on the long
dimensions. Close edged blocks shall be used at the end; the dimensions of the ribs and size of
reinforcing bars shall be exactly according to the Structural Drawings. In narrow widths specially made
half blocks shall be used and full blocks shall not be used along their length (with the cells along the long
dimension of the rib).
The blocks are to be laid on adequate forms. All blocks shall be well cleaned and thoroughly wetted with
clean water before the concrete is poured and laborers shall not be allowed to walk on them. Any block
found to be defective or damaged during concreting operations shall be removed and replaced before
pouring the concrete, all at the Contractors expense.
14.0
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
14.1
GENERAL
This specification cover the manufacturer, supply of prestressed concrete members, pre-stressing
steel, pre-stressing components, pre-stressing equipment and plant and post tensioning requirements
of prestressed concrete.
14.2
STANDARD AND DESIGN GUIDES

This specification cover the manufacturer, supply of prestressed concrete members, pre-stressing
steel, pre-stressing components, pre-stressing equipment and plant and post tensioning requirements
of prestressed concrete.
i)
ii)
14.3
Materials and construction shall be in accordance with BS 8110-1:1997 Section 8 and Annex A. in
case of conflict BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 takes precedence over BS 8110 and Structural Design
Engineer approval need to be taken before proceeding with any deviation.
Reference should also be made to concrete society Technical Reports 43 post-tensioned concrete
floors design handbook (1994) and 47 Durable bonded post-tensioned concrete bridges (1996).
DESIGN
14.3.1 Qualifications
The design of prestressed concrete elements of the work is to be carried out by a firm specialized in
the design of such works. The contractor is to submit to the consultant for approval prequalification
documents in respect of the proposed specialist.
79
The contractor shall follow the guide lines contained in the latest editions of the codes, specifications
and standards listed above and other relevant standards and codes, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
Plant and field inspection and testing of concrete and all ingredients there in, and reinforcement, prestressing components and equipment shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by
the Engineer at the Contractors expense. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting as directed by the Engineer, at any time during the progress of the work which shall be carried
out by the Contractor at his own expenses.
The Contractor shall provide free access to visit and inspect the materials, stockpiles and facilities,
proposed works, plants and sources of materials by the Engineer.
All tests including re-testing of rejected materials and work shall be done at the Contractors expense.
14.3.2 Design Standards
The design is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 or AS.
3600, as approved by the Consultant.
14.3.3 Design Criteria
i)
The design criteria (dimensions, loadings & other pertinent data) are shown on the drawings.
ii)
Deviations from these design criteria will be permitted only with the prior approval of the consultant.
iii)
The Contractor may submit to the Consultant for approval an alternative structural.
14.3.4 Submissions
i)
The Contractor is to submit to the Consultant for approval general arrangement, reinforcement and
detail drawings, together with design calculations, at least four weeks before construction is due to
start on site,
ii)
Two sets of drawings and calculations are to be submitted for Acceptance by the consultant, five sets
of drawings for construction purposes.
14.4
TYPE OF SYSTEM & METHOD STATEMENT

The contractor shall submit to the Consultant for agreement all details of the prestressing system as
appropriate before construction and a detailed statement on proposed methods, sequences and
timing of operations. Details to be submitted shall include but not be limited to the following:
14.5
Tendons
Sheathing or Ducting
Anchorages
Any anti-corrosive or Friction-reducing compounds for unbounded systems
Drainage and bleed details for grouted tendons
Methods of installation
Supports
Stressing
Grout mix and method of grouting including vent location
Corrosion protection details
Fire resistance
GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a written warrantee stating that all Works have been
carried out in accordance with the drawings and specifications and the approved design and will be
80
free from defects material and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of issuance of
the substantial completion certificate and shall be covered by an appropriate performance indemnity
insurance cover. The contractor shall agree to repair (including any replacement of materials)
resulting from defective materials or workmanship during the warrantee period at no additional cost to
the Employer.
The Contractor shall also pass on to the Employer any and all warrantees provided by the Specialist
Sub-Contractor and manufacturers of individual members of the system.
The Contractor shall also provide a minimum 25 years design life warrantee.
14.6
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
14.6.1 Prestressing Tendons

i)
Prestressing tendons shall confirm to:

BS 4486:1980 hot rolled bars
BS 5896:1980 stress relieved seven wire strand or equivalent to the approval of the Consultant
ii)
Before delivery to site, Manufacturers certificates shall be submitted to the Consultant as evidence of
compliance with the relevant standards.
iii)
Low relaxation and normal relaxation wire and presstressing strand shall be supplied in coils of
sufficiently large diameter to ensure that the physical properties will be retained and that the wire or
strand will pay off reasonable straight from the coils.
iv)
Tendons shall be delivered to the site properly protected from inclement weather conditions.
v)
Manufacturers test certificates for each coil and strand or wire and each type of bar supplied to site
shall be submitted to the Consultant before installation. Each certificate shall contain the information
required by BS 4486:1980 or BS5896:1980. Each coil of wire or bar shall clearly marked for
identification against the certificate.
vi)
Coatings for unbonded tendons shall be a calcium grease, manufactured from highly refined
napthenic mineral oil and be free from harmful impurities such as chlorides, sulphides or nitrates
except in harmless traces. It shall be applied at pressure to ensure penetration of the interstitial
spaces between the individual wires of the strand. A manufacturers product certificate shall be
supplied by the contractor.
The sheathing shall comprise black HDPE applied to the greased strand in factory condition as part of
a continuously monitored process. The use of PVC sheathing is not permitted.
14.6.2 Un-tensioned reinforcement

Un-tensioned reinforcement shall comply with BS 4449:2005. Grade 250 & 460 B
14.6.3 Sheaths (Ducts for Tendons)
i)
Sheaths shall be formed of material that will not react adversely chemically with concrete, grease or
steel.
ii)
Cable ducts shall be manufactured from spirally wound corrugated or smooth galvanized steel strip.
iii)
Other materials for ducts may be used with the approval of the Consultant.
14.6.4 Anchorges
Anchorages shall comply with BS 4447 and BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 to appropriate section in Clauses
81
8.7.4.1 or 8.7.5.2. The Contractor shall provide the Consultant with quality control documentation for
the anchorages.
14.6.5 Concrete strength at transfer
Sufficient concrete cubes shall be cast to demonstrate that the required in situ strength of concrete at
transfer has been reached. No member shall be strength until the strength of each of two cubes taken
from the concrete used is not less than the specified transfer strength. The test cubes shall be made
and tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-2:2000 but shall be cured in similar conditions to the
concrete to which they relate.
14.6.6 Grout
i)
Grout material for filling prestressing ducts shall comprise ordinary Portland cement and water. The
water and cement ratio should be as low as possible and shall not exceed 0.45.
ii)
Fluid and hardened properties of grout shall be submitted to the consultant for approval before
construction.
iii)
Trials are to be carried out on the proposed grout mix, based upon the contractor shall carry out fullscale grouting trials using the same equipment and procedures as those proposed for the works.
14.6.7 Tensioning Apparatus

i)
Tensioning apparatus shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.7.3.
ii)
Apparatus shall be operated in accordance with the system manufacturers written instruction and
shall be maintained in good working condition.
iii)
All load-measuring equipment shall be tested in accordance with the quality plan of the accredited
manufacturer.
14.6.8 Handling and storage

Care should be taken to avoid mechanically damaging work-hardening or heating prestressing
tendons while handling. All prestressing tendons should be stored clear of the ground and protected
from the weather from splashes from any other materials and from splashes from the cutting operation
of an oxy-acetylene torch, or arc-welding processes in the vicinity. In no circumstances may
prestressing tendons after manufacture be subjected to any welding operation or on-site hear
treatment or metallic coating such as galvanizing. This does not pre-clude cutting as given in 8.5.
Protective wrappings for tendons should be chemically neutral and suitable protection be provided for
the threaded ends of bars.
When prestressing tendons have been stored on site for prolonged period, the engineer should
ensure by tests that the quality of the prestressing tendons has not been significantly impaired by
either corrosion, stress corrosion, loss of cross sectional area or changes in any other mechanical
characteristics.
14.7
WORKMANSHIP
14.7.1 General
i)
Workmanship shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clauses 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7.5 and Annex and
relevant clauses of TR47 where grouted tendons are used. Prestressing operations shall be carried
out under the direction of experienced and competent supervisors and all personnel operating
tensioning and grouting equipment shall have been certified as competent by the system supplier. All
prestressing materials and equipment shall be used in strict accordance with the recommendations of
82
the manufacturer of the stressing system.

Cutting to length and trimming of ends shall be by high-speed abrasive cutting wheel.
ii)
The contractor shall submit the following to the Consultant for agreement prior to any work.
Fully dimensioned drawings, plans and cross- section of tendon and anchorage layouts, indicating
tendon profiles at regular intervals along each length, support details, stressing sequences etc.
Stressing end and dead end anchorages shall be clearly defined.
Any ordinary reinforcement sizes and locations required to supplement the post-tensioning design
including bursting reinforcement at anchorages to suit anchor type and layout.
Minimum concrete strength at each stage of stressing and anchorage capacities.
Calculations of forces and elongation of tendons with jack pressure-gauge readings at each
stressing stage taking into account all short-term and long-term losses including anchorage
friction, wedge pull-in, jack losses, duct friction, etc.
Vent locations for bonded tendons and details of vent closures.
14.7.2 Construction Joints & Pour Sizes

i)
The Contractor shall locate and form construction joints to suit the structure and so as not to cause
any short-term or long term distress to the structure.
ii)
Construction joints in suspended slabs and beams are to be located within the middle third of any
span, unless agreed otherwise by the Consultant.
iii)
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for approval a drawing marked up with he proposed
locations of construction joints.
iv)
The Contractor shall carefully prepare construction joint surfaces to expose the coarse aggregate to
provide a key by a method to be agreed with the consultant.
v)
Pour sizes, except as agreed otherwise between the Consultant and contractor, shall be as shown in
Table 1.
Table 1
Maximum areas & dimensions of concrete pours for prestressed post tensioned concrete
elements.
Element
Maximum Areas (m)
Slabs (single end stressed tendons)
500
Maximum dimensions (m) in direction of

tendon
25 metres
750
50 metres
Slabs (double end stressed tendons)
14.7.3 Safety
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure safety during and after stressing
operations and during grouting and shall make reference to BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.7.2.
Appropriate procedures shall be set out in the contractors method statement.
14.7.4 Soffit Marking
Tendons positions shall be marked on the soffit to indicate locations in both plan and elevation within
the slab. The system to be used for identification shall be agreed with the Consultant and shall be
83
recorded on the as-built drawings.
14.7.5 Anchorages, tendons and sheathing

i)
Anchorages and tendons shall be protected against damage and corrosion at all times. The
requirements of BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clauses 8.3 and 8.7.5.1 shall be complied with. Under no
circumstance shall prestressing steel be subjected to any welding operation, heat treatment or
metallic coating after manufacturer.
ii)
Joints in sheathing shall be sealed. At anchorages, joints shall be sealed to prevent ingress of
concrete or egress of grout.
iii)
Anchorages and sheathing ducts shall be firmly fixed in place so they are not disturbed during
concreting.
iv)
Anchorages shall be protected in the final condition in accordance with the recommendation in
Section 7.7.3 of TR43 or other details as agreed by the Consultant.
14.7.6 Post - Tensioning

i)
Tendons may be stressed either by pre- tensioning or by post-tensioning, according to the particular
needs of the form of construction. In each system, different procedures and types of equipment are
used and theses govern the method of tensioning the form of anchorage and, in post- tensioning, the
protection of the tendons.
All wires or strands stressed in one operation should be taken, where possible, from the same parcel.
Each cable should be tagged with its number and the coil number or numbers of the steel used.
Cables shouldnt be kinked or twisted, and individual wires and strands should be readily identifiable
at each end of the member. No strand that has become unraveled should be used.
14.7.7 Tensioning Procedure

i)
Before tensioning, it should be demonstrated that all tendons are free to move in the ducts.
Tensioning should be carried out under competent supervision in such a manner that the stress in the
tendons increases at a gradual and steady rate. Tensioning should not be carried out at temperature
below 0 C without the approval of the engineer.
The supervision in charge of stressing should be provided with particulars of the required tendons
loads and extensions. Allowance should be made during stressing for the friction in the jack in the
anchorage although the former is not necessary when using load cells.
Stressing should continue until the required extension and/or tendon load is reached. The extension
should allow for any draw-in of the tendon occurring at the non-jacking end, but measurement should
not commence until any slack in the tendon ahs been taken-up. A comparison between the measured
tendon force and that calculated from the extension provides a check on the accuracy of the
assumption made for the frictional losses at the design stage; if the difference is greater than 6%
corrective action should be taken but only with the approval of the engineer. Full records should kept
of all tensioning operations, including the measured extensions, pressure-gauge or load-cell readings
and the amount of pull-in at each anchorage.
Where a large number of tendons or tendon elements is being tensioned and the full force cannot be
achieved in an element because of breakage slip or blockage of duct, of the replacement of the
element is not practicable, the engineer should consider whether a modification in the stress levels
can still conform to relevant limit state.
In the case of curved tendons, or tendons made up of a number of consistent elements, or tendons
loaded in stages, the engineer should specify the order of loading and the magnitude of the load for
each component of the tendon.
84
Tensioned tendons, anchorages and duct forms should be effectively protected against corrosion
during the period between stressing and covering with grout concrete or other permanent protection.
Ducts should be plugged at their ends and vents.
ii)
Tensioning shall not start until the Contractor has advised the Consultant, within a time previously
agreed, when stressing is due to commence and that the following has been carried out and agreed:
All required test have been completed

A method statement has been agreed
The structure to be stressed (including any joints) has achieved the specified strength).
Allowance has been made for formwork to accommodate shortening, bending or uplift during
stressing.
All tendons are free to move between jacking points and members are free to accommodate the
horizontal and vertical movements due to the application of prestress.
Calculations of the total force and extension for each tendon after allowance for anchorage
friction, wedge pull-in, jack losses and duct friction have been approved.
Details of any grout mix proposals have been agreed.
iii)
Cropping of tendons shall be by mechanical means such as an angle grinder or shearing devise, not
by burning.
iv)
Load-extension graphs shall be plotted for the first tendon of each typical length during stressing.
v)
Stressing of tendons shall continue until both the required load and the calculated extension have
been reached, provided that both the following conditions have been satisfied.
The load in the tendon does not exceed 80% of the specified characteristics breaking load during
stressing or 75% of the specified characteristics breaking load after anchoring.
The measured extension of the tendon under its specified load differs from the calculated value by
more than 10% for tendons less than 20m long and 60% for tendons greater than 20m long.
14.7.8 Anchoring
When the prestress has been applied to the satisfaction of the Consultant, the tendons shall be
anchored in accordance with the system manufacturers instructions. If the pull-in of the tendon at
completion of anchoring is greater than that agreed, the contractor shall inform the consultant.
14.7.9 Grouting
i)
For grouted tendons, the grouting after tensioning shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.9
and Annex A, and Concrete Society Technical Report 47.
ii)
All grouted and venting points shall be suitably marked to enable identification of the duct to which
they are connected.
14.7.10 STRESSING SEQUENCE AND PROCEDURE

14.7.11 (Six) cubes shall be taken for crushing prior to stressing operations
14.7.12 In general band beam tendons shall be stressed first, then slab tendons, unless noted otherwise.
14.7.13 Stressing shall be carried out as follows:
Initial Stress:
25% of stressing load to be applied to all strands at minimum 24 hrs following
of pour and at minimum cylinder strength 9 MPA.
Final Stress:
100% of stressing load to be applied to all strands at minimum 72 hrs
following completion of pour and at minimum cylinder strength 25 MPA.
85
15.0
GROUND FLOOR SLABS

Ground floor slabs are to be cast as specified in the drawing. The slab should be power floated after
vacuum de-watering process to the approval of the Engineer. Further, the slab should at least conform to
the AR3 class requirements defined under BS 8204:2003 (or Latest) for classification of abrasion
resistance.
Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement as the proposed method of ground floor slab
concreting in accordance with the manufacturer or suppliers guide lines and recommendations for
vacuum dewatering method.
The floor slab should be suitably cured by ponding for minimum 14 days and no vehicular traffic should
be allowed over it for the first 7 days.
The relevant table is reproduced below:
BS 8204
Class
Duty
Tope of
Concrete
Application
Concrete
Grade
N/mm2
Minimum
Cement
Content
Kg/m2
Special
Severe abrasion
and impact
Special
mixes
Very heavy
duty
Eng.
Workshop
etc.
Special
mixes
sprinkle finishes
AR1
Very
high
abrasion
steel
wheel traffic and
impact
High
strength
toppings
Heavy
duty
industrial
work
shop,
special
commercial,
etc.
60 85
475
0.1
AR2
High
abrasion
steel
or
hard
plastic
wheel
traffic
Direct
finish
concrete
Medium duty
industrial and
commercial
C50
400
0.2
AR3
Moderate
abrasion rubber
tyre traffic
Direct
finish
concrete
Light
duty
industrial and
commercial
C35
325*
0.4
Table 3:
and
Maximum
depth of
wear mm
0.05
BS 8204:2003 (or Latest) Classification of abrasion resistance and proposed

limiting depths of wear accelerated abrasion test.
Minimum cement content shall be as per Contract Specifications.
Power Floated Floor Slabs

(i)
Produce a smooth even finish to receive directly applied floor coverings without use of screeds.
(ii)
Use power machines on concrete stiff enough to take weight of machines after surface moisture
has evaporated.
(iii)
Power float to be used to regulate and close surface and remove surplus mortar.
86
(iv)
Power trowel after further moisture has evaporated with successive trowellings at minimum one
hour intervals with blades tilted at greater angles to produce a hard wearing surface.
(v)
Hand finishes margins to match remainder of work.
(vi)
Making good with latex screeds at the Contractors expense will normally be accepted.
Hand Trowelling
(i)
Produce a smooth hard and even finish.
(ii)
Successive Trowelling by experienced labor with steel trowels with a delay of an hour between
each Trowelling to allow further moisture to evaporate.
(iii)
Surplus weak mortar to be scraped from surface as Trowelling proceeds.
The dusting of neat cement on to the surface or wetting down before Trowelling will not be permitted.
16.0
A.
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES

General
All reinforced concrete sub-structure shall be protected from aggressive actions of soil, ground water and
all detrimental influences due to soil quality at the site.
Substructures, i.e., foundations, including basements, strap and tie beams, sump pits, lift wells, etc.,
which are in contact soil shall be protected as detailed below.
The concrete surfaces to which the membrane is to be applied shall be cleaned of all grease, oil, dust,
loose material, etc. and shall present a sound surface, free of all sharp protrusions.
Before applying the membrane the blinding surface shall be suitably primed with a primer recommended
by the manufacturer of the membrane.
All angles and corners, internal and external, shall be reinforced with an extra strip of 300 mm wide
membrane. External angles shall be suitably splayed to prevent sharp corner and internal angles shall be
provided with cement sand fillet 50 x 50 mm to provide smooth transition.
The contractors rate shall allow to for all the requirements specified herein.
B.
Qualifications
The waterproofing systems including protection and all associated accessories and works shall be
executed by a specialist firm(s) having at least 7 years experience in U.A.E in installation of materials
described herewith. The specialist (s) shall provide evidence of successful completion of similar works for
the approval of the Engineer before commencing any work.
The manufacturers qualified representatives shall visit the job site immediately prior to commencement of
works and as and when required and directed by the engineer to satisfy the engineer and to instruct the
specialist (s) in the correct methods of execution of the works.
C.
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the engineer:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Samples of each material: size and quantity to be as agreed with the Engineer.
Catalogues, test certificates, etc.
Shop drawings
Method statement
87
D.
Warranty
The contractor shall submit to the engineer a guarantee stating all works of waterproofing system of the
basement have been carried out in accordance with the drawings and specifications and shall be
guaranteed free from defects in material and workmanship and shall be leak proof for a period of ten
(10) years from the date of issuance of the completion certificate. The contractor shall agree to repair
(including and replacement of materials) any leaks resulting from defective materials or workmanship
during the guarantee period at no additional cost to the client.
The contractor shall also pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the sub-contractor and
manufacturers of individual members of the system.
E.
Basement & Sub-structure

Two layers of 4 mm thick SBS modified bituminous membrane shall be laid fully torched on to the blinding
concrete with minimum laps of 100 mm all around.
An extra length of minimum 300 mm of the horizontal membrane shall be left over to carry up vertical
surfaces to maintain continuity of the membrane and shall be protected as detailed below.
The membrane shall be protected against damage from reinforcement and site traffic by a layer of cement
sand screed of 30 mm thickness laid over one layer of 1500 gauge (0.375 mm) thick polyethylene sheet
or filter membrane of 280 gm/m2 as density indicated on drawings. Aggregate size for screed shall be 6
mm and shall be used at the discretion of the engineer. The area of the membrane laid at any one time
should not exceed that which can be protected by screed in the same period. Care should be exercised in
the sequence of laying screed to ensure that the membrane laid is not damaged due to site traffic or other
trade works or any other reason.
The extra portion of 300 mm of the horizontal membrane left over shall be turned up after removal of form
work and shall be torched on to the exposed vertical prime surfaces. Primed vertical surfaces shall be
provided with one year of bituminous membrane fully torched on to the walls including over the 300 mm
portion member carried up from the horizontal layer. The continuity of the membrane shall be maintained
by minimum laps of 100 mm all around. The membrane on the external exposed vertical surfaces shall be
carried up to a minimum of 150 mm above the finished ground level (i.e. side walk, road surface, paving,
etc.) and tucked into a continuous, purpose made groove in the substructure and secured firmly with
approved sealant/mastic recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
The membrane applied to the vertical surfaces of the substructure shall be protected against abrasive
backfill by a 6 mm thick rigid bituminous protection board, spot bonded to the membrane.
All areas of the membrane exposed above ground shall be protected from exposure deterioration with
appropriate aluminum sheet flashing or application of mineral chipping faced membrane as indicated on
drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall allow for all the above requirements in his rates.
88
SECTION 5: SHORING
1.0
Hard/Soft Secant Pile Walls
1.1
General
All materials and work shall be in accordance with sections 3, 6 of these specifications, except where they
may be conflict of requirements, in which case this Section shall take precedence.
1.2
Guide Walls
The design and construction of guide walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take into
account the actual site and ground conditions and the equipment to be used on site to ensure stability
and avoid undercutting as appropriate.
Guide walls shall be constructed in reinforced concrete or other suitable materials. The minimum depth of
guide wall shall be 500 mm and the minimum shoulder width shall be 300 mm for walls in reinforced
concrete.
1.3
Hardening Concrete Mixes

The Contractor shall submit details for the self-hardening concrete mix (soft pile) proportions to be used
prior to commencing the works.
Cement materials, aggregates (if used), additives and water shall be in accordance with section 3 of this
specification.
Trial mixes shall be prepared for each mix unless there are existing data showing that the mix proportions
and method of manufacture will produced hardened material of the strength, permeability, shrinkage
properties and durability required, having adequate workability for compaction by the method to be used
in placing. All testing shall be carried out in an approved laboratory.
No variations outside the limits set out in the proportions shall be made nor in the original source of
materials without demonstrating compliance with the specification.
Self-hardening mixes shall be checked for compliance with the proportions. Cube samples shall be made
at the rate of four samples for each 50 m3 of self-hardening concrete or part thereof.
The Contractor shall keep a detailed record of the results of all tests on self-hardening mixes and their
ingredients. Each test shall be clearly identified with the pile to which it relates and the date it was carried
out.
1.4
Support Fluid
Where support fluid is issued to maintain the stability of the pile bore, it shall be in accordance with the
relevant clause of the Piling Specification. (Bentonite).
1.5
Boring
1.5.1
Boring Near Recently Cast Piles

Piles shall not be bored so close to recently cast piles, which contain workable or partially set concrete
piles or self-hardening mixes that a flow of concrete or instability could be induced or damage caused to
any installed piles. The Contractors sequence of construction shall be submitted prior to work
commencing in accordance with Concrete Works and Piling specifications.
Section 5, Shoring
89
1.5.2
Stability of Bore
Temporary casing shall be used in unstable ground with or without support fluid to maintain the stability of
the bore. The process of advancing the bore and the temporary casing shall be such that soil is not drawn
in the bore from outside the area of the pile and cavities are not created outside the temporary casing.
1.5.3
Cleanliness of Pile Base

Prior to placing steel or concrete. The Contractor shall remove from the base of the pile as much loose
disturbed and remolded materials as practical and in accordance with the method of construction.
1.5.4
Cleaning of Support Fluid

Prior to placing steel or concrete, any support fluid including water shall be wholly or partly removed and
replaced while maintaining the fluid head if it does not comply with the Contractors limits for support fluid
prior to concreting.
1.5.5
Steel Reinforcement
Shall be placed in accordance with the relevant clauses of the Piling Specification. The quantity of steel
reinforcement shall be as designed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
1.6
Placing and Compacting Concrete

Placing of concrete shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of the Piling specification. The concrete
workability shall be determined using the slump or flow table. The slump or flow shall be measured at the
time of discharge into the pile boring and shall be in accordance with the limits as specified under
performance requirements.
1.7
Tolerances
1.7.1
Guide Wall
The finished face of the guide wall closest to any subsequent main excavation shall be vertical to a
tolerance of 1 in 200 and shall represent the reference line. There shall be no ridges on the face and the
centerline of the guide wall shall not deviate from its specified position by more than +5 mm in 3 m.
The minimum clear distance between the guide walls shall be the pile diameter plus 25 mm and the
maximum distance shall be the pile diameter plus 50 mm.
1.7.2
Secant pile
At cut-off level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile center from the point shown on the setting out
drawings shall be 25 mm in any direction except that an additional tolerance of 10 mm shall be permitted
for each additional 1.0 m that the cut-off level is below the top of the guide wall.
The exposed face of the pile shall be vertical within a tolerance of 1:100 in any direction.
An additional tolerance of 100 mm will be allowed for concrete protrusions resulting from cavities formed
by over break in the ground. Where very soft clay layers or peat layers are anticipated or obstructions are
to be removed prior to or during boring, an additional over break tolerance will be agreed with the
engineer.
The Contractor shall carryout necessary preparation of the secant pile wall surface in terms of chipping
and cleaning of piles to be readied for guniting to the approval of the Engineer prior to its handover to the
basement Contractor. Gunnting shall be carried out by the Main/Basement Contractor.
1.7.3
Steel Reinforcement
A vertical tolerance of + 150/-50 mm shall generally be permitted on the level of steel projecting from a
Section 5, Shoring
90
pile cut-off.
1.8
Capping Beam
After the construction of the secant pile wall the top portion of the secant piles shall be chipped to have a
sound surface for casting the capping beam. A capping beam shall be constructed to the sizes dictated
by the design requirements and cured prior to the stressing of tie back anchors to transfer the anchor load
evenly to the shoring system and to function as a single unit. The design and construction of the capping
beam shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take into account the actual site and ground
conditions.
1.9
Backfilling of Empty Bore

Where concrete is not brought to the top of the guide wall, the empty pile bore shall be backfilled as soon
as possible with approved material. Prior to backfilling, bores shall be clearly marked and fenced off so as
not to cause a safety hazard.
1.10
Water Retention
The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any joint, defect or pile where on exposure of the wall
visible running water leaks are found. Any leak, which results in water flow emanating from the surface of
the retaining wall, shall be sealed.
1.11
Performance Requirements
A. Concrete for Soft piles -
20 N/mm2
B. Concrete for hard pile -
40 N/mm2
C. Slump
175 (+,-) 25
2.0
Contiguous Pile Walls
2.1
General
All materials and works shall be in accordance with sections 3, 6, of these specifications, except where
there may be conflict of requirements, in which case this section shall take precedence.
2.2
Guide Walls
The design and construction of guide walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take into
account the actual site and ground conditions and the equipment to be used on site to ensure stability
and avoid undercutting as appropriate.
Guide walls shall be constructed in reinforced concrete or other suitable materials. The minimum depth of
guide wall shall be 500 mm and the minimum shoulder width shall be 300 mm for walls in reinforcement
2.3
Support Fluid
Where support fluid is used to maintain the stability of the pile bore it shall be in accordance with piling
specification (Bentonite).
Section 5, Shoring
91
2.4
Boring
2.4.1
Boring Near Recently Cast Piles

Piles shall not be bored so closed to recently cast piles which contain workable or partially set concrete
piles to avoid instability or cause damage to any installed piles. The Contractors sequence of
construction shall be submitted prior to work commencing in accordance with sections 3 & 6 of this
specification.
2.4.1
Stability of Bore
Temporary casing shall be used in unstable ground with or without support fluid to maintain the stability of
the bore. The process of advancing the bore and the temporary casing shall be such that soil is not drawn
into the bore from outside the area of the pile and cavities are not created outside the temporary casing.
2.4.3
Cleaning of Support Fluid

Prior to placing steel or concrete, any support fluid including water shall be wholly or partly removed and
replaced while maintaining the fluid head if it does not comply with the Contractors limits for support fluid
prior to concreting.
2.4.4
Steel Reinforcement
Shall be placed in accordance with Section 6. The quality of steel reinforcement shall be as designed by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
2.5
Placing and Compacting Concrete

Placing of concrete shall be in accordance with section 6. The concrete workability shall be determined
using the slump or flow table. The slump or flow shall be measured at the time of discharge into the pile
boring and shall be in accordance with the limits as specified under performance requirements.
2.6
Tolerances
2.6
Guide Wall
The finished face of the guide wall closest to any subsequent main excavation shall be vertical to a
tolerance of 1 in 200 and shall represent the reference line. There shall be no ridges on the face and the
centre-line of the guide wall shall not deviate from its specified position by more than +5 mm. in 3 m.
The minimum clear distance between the guide walls shall be the pile diameter plus 25 mm. and the
maximum distance shall be the pile diameter plus 50 mm.
2.7
Contiguous Piles
At cut-off level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile centre from the point shown on the setting out
drawings shall be 25 mm in any direction except that an additional tolerance of 10 mm shall be permitted
for each additional 1.0 m that the cut-off level is below the top of the guide wall.
An additional tolerance of 100 mm will be allowed for concrete protrusions resulting from cavities formed
by over break in the ground. Where very soft clay layers or peat layers are anticipated or obstruction are
to be removed prior to or during boring, and additional over break tolerance will be agreed with the
Engineer.
2.8
Steel Reinforcement
A vertical tolerance of +50/-50 mm shall generally be permitted on the level of steel projecting from a pile
cut-off.
2.9
Backfilling of Empty Bore
Section 5, Shoring
92
Where concrete is not brought to the top of the guide wall, empty pile bore shall be backfilled as soon as
possible with approved material. Prior to backfilling, bores shall be clearly marked and fenced off so as
not to cause a safety hazard.
2.10
Water Retention
Any leak which results in water flow emanating from the surface of the retaining wall shall be controlled by
dewatering.
2.11
Concrete for hard pile 35 N/mm2 Cylinder compressive strength
Slump
3.0
- 175 +, - 25 mm
Planking and Strutting

The terms planking and strutting will be deemed to cover sheet piling. Underpinning, secant pilling or
any other method the Contractor elects to adopt for shoring the sides of excavation and also for shoring
the sides of adjoining buildings, public roadways, etc... The Contractor will be held responsible for shoring
the sides of all excavations, adjoining building and the like and no claim for additional excavation,
concrete or other material and workmanship will be considered in this respect.
The shoring system of deep excavation of 2 m and above shall be carried out by competent approved
specialist sub-Contractors having a minimum of 5 years experience in similar works. The Contractor shall
provide a method statement for the system he proposes along with substantiating detailed calculations for
the approval of the Engineer. However any approval accorded by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibility and contractual obligations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages, subsidence by any neglect or any default and shall
make good all damages and subsidence and shall make full compensation to the Employer and other
concerned parties for any loss sustained due to above.
In the event of any collapse occurring during the excavation, the Contractor shall re-excavate and reinstate such excavations at his own expense. No additional excavations will be paid for should the
Contractor better the sides of the excavations.
If the temporary shoring is to be left in place the top 1 to 2 m or such heights as directed by the local
authorities, shall be cut and removed in accordance with the requirements of the Municipality and as
directed by the Engineer at no extra cost to the project.
Section 5, Shoring
93
SECTION 6: DE-WATERING
1.0
General
This specification is provided as issued to the de-watering Sub-Contractor under the Enabling works
contract.
However they shall be applicable to this contract as a continuation of the De-watering works.
Design, furnish, operate, maintain and remove temporary dewatering systems to lower and control water
to maintain stable, undisturbed sub grades at the lowest excavation levels as specified and indicated.
Work to be done as part of dewatering includes the lowering of the water table, the lowering of hydrostatic
pressure, preventing surface water from entering the excavation during construction, installation of
recharging systems and/or disposing of discharge water, and installing and monitoring observations wells
and geotechnical instruments. Common dewatering methods include sump pumping, deep wells, well
points, French drains or combination thereof.
Discharge of construction dewatering effluent may require treatment facilities, and discharge monitoring
to confirm compliance with rules, regulations, laws and ordinance of the Municipality and all other
authorities having jurisdiction.
The Contractor shall also carry out inspection at regular intervals as agreed with the Engineer to ensure
that no movement, damage, foundation disturbance, subsidence and the like occurs.
The de-watering system catering for dewatering upto about 50 cm below the final excavation level of the
bottom of blinding concrete for pile-cap/raft shall be handed over by the Enabling Works Contractor at the
commencement of the project.
De-watering shall be stopped only after casting the floor slab at the level indicated on structural drawings.
1.1
Qualifications of De-Watering Contractor

Dewatering specialists Firm shall:
(i)
Have a minimum of 10 years current U.A.E based experience in the design and construction of
well points, deep wells, recharge systems, French drains or equal systems.
(ii)
Have completed at least 5 successful dewatering projects of equal size and complexity and with
equal systems within U.A.E.
If the dewatering system does not maintain the groundwater level to obtain the specified sub grade
conditions, the Engineer shall be notified and the system shall be modified appropriately at no additional
cost to the Employer.
If dewatering system causes sub grade soils to be unable to meet density requirements due to
dewatering interruptions or an inadequate system, notify the Engineer and modify system to perform as
specified at no additional cost to the Employer.
Obtain and comply with permits, laws, regulations, rules and codes of Local Municipality and all other
authorities having jurisdiction.
Approval of the shop drawings submitted by the Contractor shall not in any way relieve the Contractor
from full responsibility for errors therein or form the entire responsibility for complete and adequate design
and performance of the system in controlling the water level in the excavated area and for control of the
hydrostatic pressures to the depths specified. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper
design, installation, operation, maintenance and any failure of any component of the system.
Section 6, DE-WATERING
94
1.2
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer:
A dewatering plan including:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Shop drawings to a scale agreed with the Engineer. Drawing shall indicate the locations and
sizes of berms, dikes, ditches, all deep wells, observation wells, sand and gravel filters,
settlement points, well points, sumps, recharge systems and discharge lines, including their
relation to sedimentation ponds.
Capacities of pumps, prime movers, and standby equipment.
Detailed description of dewatering, maintenance, and system removal procedures.
List of applicable laws, regulations, rules, and codes to which dewatering design conforms.
A modified dewatering plan within 24 hours, if open pumping from sumps and ditches results in boils, loss
of fines or softening of the ground.
A modified dewatering plan when required
Preconstruction conditions survey of buildings and utilities around the site.
1.3
Materials
Provide and maintain erosions/sedimentation control devices as indicated or specified and in accordance
with the dewatering plan.
Provide casings, well screens, piping, fittings, pumps, power and other items required for dewatering
system.
When deep wells or well points are used, provide pumping units capable of maintaining high vacuum and
handling large volumes of air and water at the same time.
Provide temporary pipes, hoses, flumes, or channels for the transport of discharge water to the indicated
or specified sedimentation ponds or drainage systems.
Provide pumps for dewatering sedimentation systems.
Provide cement grout.
Provide portable sedimentation basins/tanks when sedimentation ponds are not available.
Provide and store auxiliary dewatering equipment, including pumps and hoses on the site in the event of
breakdown, at least one (1) pump for every five (5) or part used.
1.4
Workmanship
Furnish, install and maintain dewatering system in accordance with approved dewatering plan. Locate
dewatering system components so that they do not interfere with construction.
Carry out dewatering program in such a manner as to prevent undermining or disturbing foundations of
existing structures or of work on going previously completed.
Do not excavate until the water has been drawn down to a minimum of 0.5 meter below the bottom of the
planned excavation.
Do not excavate until the dewatering system is operational and the excavation may proceed without
disturbance to the final sub grade.
Unless otherwise specified, continue dewatering uninterrupted until the structures, pipes and
appurtenances to be built there have been completed such that they will not be floated or otherwise
damaged by an increase in groundwater elevation.
95
Implement the approved modified dewatering plan and repair any damage incurred at no additional cost
to the Employer if open pumping from sumps and ditches results in boils, loss of fines or softening of the
ground.
Where sub grade materials are unable to meet the sub grade density requirements due to improper
dewatering techniques, remove and replace the materials at no additional cost to the Employer.
Lay temporary French drains (under drains) where indicated in trenches beneath bottom level or
excavation. Provide trenches to accommodate under drain and surroundings material. Lay under drains
below bottom or normal excavation with open joints wrapped in non-woven geotextile fabric, and entirely
surrounded by screened gravel or crushed rock to prevent the admission of fines into the underdrains.
Provide at least 3 inches between bottom of pipe or structure and highest point of underdrain pipe. Fill the
space between the underdrain and pipe or structure with compacted screened gravel or crushed rock.
1.5
Dewatering Discharges
Install and monitor discharge systems when specified, indicated or deemed necessary.
Install sand and gravel filters in conjunction with well points and deep wells to prevent the migration of
fines from the existing soil during the dewatering operation.
Transport pumped or drained water without interference to other work, damage to pavement, other
surfaces, or property. Discharge pumped water to a sedimentation pond or drainage system and as
approved by the Local Municipality Authorities.
Do not discharge water into any storm or sanitary sewer system. Discharged water must be visible or
allowed to be observed to verify compliance with U.A.E Regulations.
Provide separately controlled pumping lines.
The Engineer reserves the right to sample discharged water at any time.
Do not pump water found to be contaminated with oil or other hazardous material into sedimentation
ponds or drainage systems without treatment.
1.6
Removal of Dewatering
Do not remove dewatering system at least until the floor slab indicated on structural drawing has been
poured and is cured. Dewatering system shall be removed only after written approval is obtained from the
Engineer.
Backfill and compact sumps or ditches with screened gravel or crushed rock.
Remove well points and deep wells. Backfill abandoned well holes with cement grout having a water
cement ratio of 1 to 1 by volume.
If an equal system has been used, remove and backfill in accordance with approved dewatering plan.
96
SECTION 7: PILING
1.0
SCOPE
This Specification covers the construction of Concrete Piling System for the foundations of the works
under the Contract, adequate to support the loads specified, design & redesign, construction of piles,
testing & replacement of defective piles & all incidental works necessary to complete the works
satisfactorily in accordance with the drawings, approved drawings, relevant BS, ASTM & ICE Standards
& as directed by the Engineer.
Where materials & workmanship of reinforced concrete shall be in accordance with Section 4 Concrete
Work. Other items in piling that are not described or need to be further explained shall be in accordance
with relevant specification in other Sections of this document.
2.0
STANDARDS
The standards applicable to this Section are but not limited to the following:
ASTM A 252-98
ASTM D1143-81 (1994)
ASTM D3689-90 (1995)
ASTM D3966-90 (1995)
ASTM D4945-96
Specification for Welded & Seamless Steel Pipe Piles/Cast in Place

Concrete Piles.
Method of Testing Piles under Static Axial Compressive Load.
Method of Testing Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile Load.
Method of Testing Piles Under Lateral Loads.
Method of High Strain Dynamic Testing of Piles.
ICE
Institute of Civil Engineer.
BS 5228:Part 4:1992
Code of practice for noise & vibration control applicable to Piling

Operations.
Code of practice for Site Investigations.
Code of practice for Foundations.
Safety precautions & procedures for the Construction & Decent of
Machine-board shafts for piling & other purposes.
Structural use of Concrete.
BS 5930
BS 8004:1986
BS 8008:1996
BS 8110
3.0
Contractors Design
The Contractor shall be responsible for all design of the pilling & shoring works.
The Contractor shall comply with the relevant standards & codes in this design, adopting the design
parameters specified or shown on drawings. If the details are not readily available he shall ascertain the
requirements from the Engineer in writing. The Contractor shall design the elements & submit his design
along with detailed design calculation for the approval of the Engineer at least 15 days in advance of the
scheduled date of production/procurement.
The Contractor shall carryout any modifications/redesign required, based on the comments of the
Engineer & resubmit for his approval. The process will be repeated till final approval is accorded. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any delays in the above process & shall not be entitled for any
additional coats or time on this account.
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of items other than the above that needs design to the Engineer
for confirmation & shall undertake the design work as approved. No claim shall be entertained for any
design requirement of any item not listed above if the same is not brought to the notice of the Engineer
during the Tender period.
Any approval accorded by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual
responsibilities & obligations.
Section 7, PILING
97
The Contractor shall warrant the design as Fit for purpose & shall indemnify the Employer & the
Engineer for any & all failures arising from such design. The Contractor shall provide details of his
professional indemnity insurance to cover the design work & liability undertaken by him, to the Employer.
4.0
General
Piling shall confirm in all respects with the principles contained in BS 8004: 1996 & relevant clauses of
the ICE manual.
The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any ground conditions that differs from those
expected by the Contractor from his interpretation of the site investigation records which in his opinion
would materially affect the bearing capacity of the pile.
The heads of piles shall be within 75 mm of the correct plan positions.
Vertical piles shall not deviate by more than one degree from the vertical, & raking piles shall not
deviate by more than two degrees from the designed angle of rake.
Where piles have not been positioned or driven within the limits described in the Contract, no method
of forcible correction shall be permitted. The Engineer may require piles so positioned to be withdrawn
& re-driven, or take such other action as he considers necessary all at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner & at such times as to minimize noise &
disturbance.
Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for temporary lowering of the
water table by well points or any other method shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall however remain fully responsible for any effects of such ground treatment or control
of the level of water tables upon the existing roads, buildings & structures in the vicinity of the works.
Any proposals by the Contractor for the underpinning, needling, & shoring of existing structures in the
vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the Contractor & be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Record of Existing Services: Prior to commencing work, record of drain, cables, mains & other
services shall be obtained & made by the Contractor to ensure that his work will not cause damage to
these services.
5.0
INVESTIGATIONS
Details of soil investigations will be provided to the Contractor. However no responsibility shall be
accepted by the Employer/Engineer for the accuracy of the report including opinions & conclusions
therein. The Contractor is to carry out any further soil investigations he requires at his own expense.
6.0
PILING SYSTEM
Piles shall be cast-in-situ reinforced concrete, board system using Bentonite slurry, unless otherwise
specified, all as shown on the drawings & as directed by the Engineer.
The bearing capacity & crushing strength of each pile shall be as indicated on the drawings. The
allowable pile capacity shown on the drawings are derived by a combination of end bearing & skin
friction as indicated in the soil report.
The Contractor shall submit a method with his Tender Documents, detailed drawings & specification
for the piles he intends to use or for any alternative piling system he proposes to adopt based on
Contract Drawings & Specifications together with calculations & details of the type, number & length
of piles, loads carried, casting and/or driving methods, lengthening arrangements & pile caps where
Section 7, PILING
98
required for the approval of the Engineer. Such drawings, specification, method of piling & the plant to
be used are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer on a
daily basis upon commencing the works of the intended Program of piling activities for the following
day as approved by the Engineer, shall form an integral part of the Contract documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing piles/pile groups to withstand the loading specified
with a sufficient margin of safety as required by the loading test & relevant codes.
From the results of the non-production test piles & other available information, the Contractor shall
determine the lengths of piles necessary to carry the specified safe working loads & shall submit his
proposals to the Engineer for approval. He shall not cast any piles without prior approval of the
Engineer.
Approval so accorded shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide piles
capable of carrying the required loading.
7.0
CONCRETE FOR PILING

Unless otherwise specified or indicated all concrete for piling shall comply with the relevant clauses in
Section 4 Concrete Work.
Bores which have reached foundation depth shall not be permitted to stand unconcreted overnight.
8.0
COMPOSITION AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE

The composition of concrete shall be such that it meets the strength requirements as indicated on
Structural Drawings. The concrete mixes shall be as detailed under prescribed mixes & trial mixes in
Section 4 Concrete Work.
All concrete aggregates, cement & water shall be stamped & tested as per relevant codes as deemed
necessary & as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer as detailed under the relevant
clauses in Section 3 Concrete Work. All test samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own
expenses. Samples shall be obtained in accordance with the latest editions of BS & ASTM, ACI code
or any equally approves standard.
The minimum cover to the reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm unless otherwise shown on drawings & the
Contractor shall ensure that no steel is displaced from its position during the placement of concrete.
9.0
PLACING CONCRETE
Stability of Bore
-
For maintaining the stability of the bore, an adequate temporary casing shall be used in
Conjunction so as to ensure stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has been
placed. During construction the level of drilling fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintained
within the cased or stable bore so that it is not less than 1.0 m above the level of external
standing groundwater at all times.
In the event of rapid loss of drilling fluid from a pile excavation, the bore shall be backfilled
without delay & the instruction of the Engineer shall be obtained before boring at that location is
resumed.
Approved of the Engineer shall be obtained before water is used to assist boring.
Adequate precautions shall be taken at all times to prevent surface water or groundwater
seepage entering the pile bore.
The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that the best achievable shaft friction is developed in
the pile. The Contractor shall submit proposals to the Engineer for minimizing the effects of the
potential bentonite cake on the concrete/soil interface, for example, by scoring the face of the pile
Section 7, PILING
99
while withdrawing the auger.

A cleaning process of the bore holes shall be carried out before concrete is placed. Large debris/or
accumulated sediment shall be removed using appropriate approved methods, which shall be
designed to clean while at the same time minimizing ground disturbance below the pile bases. Water
or drilling fluid shall be maintained at such levels throughout & following the cleaning operation it shall
be ensured that stability of the bore is preserved.
No concrete shall be placed until all boring within a radius of 3 times the diameter of the larger pile
(center to center of piles) has been completed, nor until all the shells for any one cluster have been
completely bored. If this cannot be done, all boring within above limits shall be discontinued until the
concrete in the last pile cast, has been set for at least 24 hours. Concrete in piles shall be placed
using full length chute or tremie which is lubricated with grout.
All piles except those that are to be finished at a lower level shall be placed with their tops at least 1
meter above pile cut-off level in their respective pile caps. All boreholes, except for piles that are to be
finished at a lower level or unless otherwise specified, shall be filled with concrete to the top of the
hole so that the Engineer can be assured that all the bentonite has been displaced by the concrete.
Bore holes for piles where concrete is to be finished at a lower level and is not to be filled to the top of
the bore, if approved by the Engineer, shall be filled to the minimum of 1500 mm above the
designated cut-off level. Empty pile shall not be left open but shall be backfilled with surplus
excavated material to ensure site safety.
Completion of Piles: the Engineer shall be notified immediately if the concrete or grout placing in a pile
cannot be completed in a continues operation or the Contractor is unable to insert the reinforcement
or for any other cause is unable to complete the pile in the normal manner & the pile shall be re-bored
before the concrete has hardened. The re-bore shall extend 300 mm below the previous depth of
augering.
10.0
DRILLING FLUID
Bentonite, as supplied to the site & prior to mixing, shall be in accordance with specification Engineer
Equipment & Material Users Association EEMUA 163 Drilling Fluid Materials.
A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacture of the bentonite powder,
showing the properties of each consignment delivered to the site. This Certificate shall be made
available to the Engineer on request. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent
viscosity range (in centipoises) & the gel strength range ( in Pascals) for solids in water.
Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension which will maintain
the stability of the pile bore for the period necessary to place concrete & complete the construction.
The temperature of the water used in mixing the bentonite suspension, & of the suspension when
supplied to the borehole, shall be not lower than 5 C.
Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions shall be taken to
modify the bentonite suspension or pre-hydrate the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitable
in all respects for the construction of piles.
The frequency of testing drilling fluid & the method & procedure of sampling shall be proposed by the
Contractor for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may subsequently be
required, depending on the consistency of the results obtained, subject to approval.
Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable apparatus. The density
of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on the quality of
suspension being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to within 5g/L. Tests to
determine density, viscosity, shear strength & pH value shall be applied to bentonite supplied to the
pile bore. The results of these tests shall comply with the following table:
Section 7, PILING
100
Property
Method
Bentonite Content
Plastic viscosity
10 mm gel strength (Pa)
Density (g/ml)
API sand content (% vol)
Fluid loss in 30 min (ml)
Ph
Fann Viscometer*
Fann Viscometer*
Mud balance
API test
API test
pH meter or indicator
strips
Supplied to Pile Bore

During Drilling
4-5%
5-8%
Sampled from Pile

Bore Immediately
Prior to Converting
4%min.
3.10
2-30
1.03-1.07
3 max
40 max
8-11
7-20
10-40
1.03-1.10
3 max
40 max
8-11
20 max.
15-40
1.02-1.10
6 max
60 max
8-11
* Where the Fann Viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a number 52 sieve
(300 m) prior to testing.
Tests shall be carried out until consistent working pattern has been established; taking into account
the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension & previously used bentonite
suspension. When the results show consistent behavior, the tests for shear strength & pH value may
be discontinued, & tests to determine density & viscosity shall be carried out as agreed with the
Engineer. In the event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength & pH
value shall be reperformed for a period as directed by the Engineer.
The movement of drilling tools up & down the pile bore may produces local suction piston effects, by
pass currents & variations in the level of the bentonite suspension due to the displacement volume of
the drilling tool & Kelly bar. These effect may create scouring & over back of the excavation. The
Contractor shall ensure that the above are avoided by controlling the lifting speed of the drilling
equipment.
All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension, either clear or
contaminated, on to the ground of the site. Discarded bentonite shall be removed from the site without
undue delay. Any disposal of the bentonite shall comply with the regulations of the local Municipality.
Under no circumstance shall any suspension be allowed to discharge into any permanent drainage
system.
11.0
REINFORCEMENT
The reinforcement shall be deformed high grade steel confirming to ASTM 615-94 with a minimum yield
strength of 4600 kg/cm2, to sizes & lengths as indicated on the drawings & in conformity to the
specifications described under Concrete Work Section 4.
Reinforcement cages shall be inserted by applying steady pressure & not by the application of percussive
forces. The means of inserting the reinforcement cages shall not cause buckling or lateral displacement
of the cages, & shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Cover to reinforcement: Unless otherwise specified cover to reinforcement for 750 mm dia. Piles shall be
75 mm & for 1000 mm or higher dia piles shall be 100 mm.
12.0
PILE RECORDS
A record of all piles installed shall be kept by the Contractor & a copy of the record of work done each
day shall be given to the Engineer not later than mid-day of the working day after the pile is cast.
On completion of the piling, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a drawing recording the final
depth of all piles relative to cut off depth or penetration depth as appropriate
Section 7, PILING
101
The piling record sheet should include the following:

(i) Contract reference
(ii) Pile reference
(iii) Pile type, size & length
(iv) Date & time of casting
(v) Ground level or sea bed level relative to the site datums at pile position before boring.
(vi) Pile toe level
(vii) Pile cut off level ( top of pile )
(viii)
Plant information
(ix) All relevant information regarding progress or delays including observation or other interruption to
the sequence of work & all information in respect of unexpected piling conditions
13.0
SONIC INTEGRITY TESTING

In addition to the other specified tests all piles shall be sonic integrity tested in accordance with the
following requirements:
(i) The work must be carried out by an independent testing company approved by the Engineer,
experienced in the use of the equipment & in interpretation of the results with respect to castin-situ piles.
(ii) The pile head must be clean, accessible, sound & free from standing water. The area to be
hammered shall be ground smooth to the satisfaction of the testing company &/or the
Engineer.
(iii) The concrete should not be less than 7 days old at the time of testing.
(iv) Details of the appropriate length of the piles & the ground conditions should be made available
to the testing company.
(v) The method of testing, equipment to be used, output & report formats shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval before work commences.
(vi) A full report of the tests carried out complete with full references to individual piles & their
locations shall be provided to the Engineer within 7 days of the tests being carried out.
(vii) Any pile found possibly defective will be reported by the testing company to the Engineer
immediately, without waiting for the full report.
(viii) Sonic integrity tests on working piles to be subject to load tests shall be carried out before &
after the piles have been load tested &/or as directed by the Engineer.
(ix) Testing of piles shall be carried out once piles have been cut back to their final working level
&/or as directed by the Engineer.
14.0
TESTING EQUIPMENT
The loading ram & load measuring device shall be precisely centered between the test pile & the
reaction beam loading point. A self-aligning seating shall used in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. The overall height of the loading arrangement shall be kept to a minimum & the use of
packing pieces shall be minimized. In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic
jack load-measuring device are mounted on the pile head the whole system will be stable up to the
maximum load to be applied.
The hydraulic jack, pump, hose, pipes, couplings & other apparatus to be operated under hydraulic
pressure shall be capable of withstanding a pressure of 1.5 times the maximum pressure used in the
test without leaking. In addition to the primary load indicating system, the loading jack shall be
Section 7, PILING
102
equipped with a pressure gauge on the fluid inlet together with a load/pressure calibration. The
maximum test load expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be displayed & all operators
shall be made aware of this limit. If a power pack hydraulic system is used an emergency relief value
or power cut-off must be fitted. The hydraulic jack pump hose shall be long enough to keep the
operator clear of the testing.
Means shall be provided to control the test & read the dial gauges or displacement measuring devices
from positions clear of where failure of the test rig could constitute a hazard. The test shall be
controlled & the gauges read from a position clear of the test rig.
If in the course of carrying out a test any unforeseen occurrence should take place, further loading
shall not be applied until a proper consulting assessment of the condition has been made & steps
have been taken to rectify any fault. Reading of gauges should however be continued where possible
& if it is safe to do so.
15.0
LOADING TESTS (STATIC AXIAL COMPRESSIVE LOAD)

Before commencing work, the Contractor in collaboration with the Engineer shall establish tentative
penetrations & depth for the piles. This does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to deliver
piles having the bearing capacities required & passing the required load tests.
The Contractor shall not perform any load test without securing the written approval of the Engineer
on the method to be adopted & the equipment & tools to be used for the test. Loading tests shall be
carried out at the date ordered on individual piles selected by the Engineer.
Piles selected by the Engineer shall be tested in accordance with BS 8004:1986 or ASTM D1143 for
the test loads indicated on drawings as follows:
(a) The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer & shall be measured within
an accuracy of 2 percent. Settlements shall be measured with in an accuracy of 0.25 mm.
(b) The test load & unloading shall be applied in suitable increments & as smoothly & expeditiously
as possible.
(c) The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of settlement does not exceed
0.25mm per hour.
(d) The amount of settlement shall be recorded before the next increase of load.
(e) The full test load shall be maintained for 48 hours & the total settlement recorded.
(f) The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of recovery does not exceed
0.25mm per hour.
(g) The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next decrease of load.
(h) The Contractor shall within 24 hours of the completion of the test submit to the Engineer for each
pile tested graphs showing:
(i)
(ii)
Load & settlement plotted above & below a common line of time.
Settlement & recovery plotted vertically against a base line of load.
(j) The settlement of the pile under the test load & the recovery of the pile after its subsequent
removal shall be within the limits agreed with the Engineer.
Each pile to be tested shall be loaded axially with not less than 150% of the working load or as
specified on the drawings. The test shall not be commenced until the concrete has been set at least
Section 7, PILING
103
for seven days after concreting, & shall be maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for such
period as the Engineer may direct.
16.0
DYNAMIC PILE TESTING

Dynamic pile test shall be carried out by a specialist testing agency with a proven record & who is fully
conversant with the test, interpretation & reporting procedures using a pile driver analyzer, strain
transducers & accelerometers.
Dynamic pile test shall be carried out strictly in accordance with ASTM D 4945-89 for loads as
indicated on drawing & to piles selected by the Engineer at site.
The Contractor shall be responsible to ascertain & coordinate the requirements of the specialist
testing agency as regards the preparation of the pile surfaces, additional exposed lengths of the pile
(1.5 to 2 times the pile dia), providing hole in the center of the pile top (about 130mm dia x 155 mm
deep) for placing test rod, leveling of the pile top, etc.., & ensure that the same are provided either by
the Piling Contractor during piling or by the Contractor himself depending on the type of work & their
capabilities.
Based on the field test results the specialist testing agency shall perform the required laboratory
analysis & review the following:
-
Driving stresses (Compression or tension)

Integrity of the Pile
Bearing capacity
The specialist testing agency shall submit in triplicate a detailed report of the tests along with the
results & his finding, recommendations & comments to the Engineer.
All testing shall be as detailed under the laboratory testing clause.
17.0
FAILURE OF COMPRESSION PILE

A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions occur:
18.0
(a)
On completion of a load test, the residual settlement after rebound exceeds 6mm
(b)
The safe working load (designed pile load) as specified in the drawing shall not have
been achieved
(c)
The maximum settlement exceeds 10 percent of the least lateral dimension of the pile
under the ultimate load.
PILE LOAD TESTS (TENSILE)

Tensile test shall be performed on piles indicated on drawings or as selected by the Engineer.
In the event of the tensile test being conducted on piles which have been tested for compressive load, the
tensile test shall be conducted after a minimum period of 48 hours after completion of compressive load
test.
Each production piles that is to be tested shall be loaded axially with not less than 150% of the working
load or as specified on the drawings & shall be maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for such
further period as the Engineer direct.
Piles shown on drawings or as selected by the Engineer shall be tested in accordance with the ASTM
D3689 for axial tensile standard loading procedure & in accordance with relevant codes & Municipality
regulation & requirements.
The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer & shall be measured within an
Section 7, PILING
104
accuracy of 2 percent. Upward movements shall be measured with in an accuracy of 0.25mm.

Non production test piles shall be tested to 250% of the working load or to failure whichever occurs first.
19.0
FAILURE OF TENSION PILE

A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions occur:
-
20.0
On completion of a load test, the net upward pile butt movement exceeds 10mm.
The test load as specified in the drawing shall not have been achieved.
The upward movement suddenly increases disproportionately.
RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE
In the event of a pile failing a load test, notwithstanding any contrary proposals by the Contractor, the
Engineer may insist on the following methods of rectification (as minimum).
When a non production test pile fails & is confirmed that the failure is due to design aspects & not due to
defects in the piling operation, the Engineer shall order such changes in the design of the pile as he
considers necessary.
For each main piling operation test pile failure 3 piles further shall be tested. If these piles fails, the
Engineer shall order such changes in the design of the pile/pile group as he considers necessary.
In the case of the pile of the main piling operation failing a test load, but subsequent piles passing the
load test new piles shall be driven to replace the defective piles in positions agreed by the Engineer at the
expense of the Contractor.
In the event of additional works being carried out as a result of new piles being required under this
Clause, the cost of this additional work will be at the expense of the Contractor.
21.0
CORE TESTING OF PILES

10 percent of all basement type piles which are filled in blind boring shall be core tested in the following
manner:
(a)
The top 1000 mm of the pile shall be cut away to expose a height of 500 mm of pile above the
cut off level.
(b)
The top of the exposed pile shall be leveled to allow for a 100 mm diameter diamond cone
300mm deep to be taken in the centre of the pile.
(c)
The core shall be removed & tested for compressive strength & any contamination by deleterious
substances such a bentonite.
(d)
Once the core test has been approved the pile in question shall be cut down to its final level in
the pile cap.
(e)
Should a core test fail on a particular pile the Contractor may take a further 200 mm core after
cutting the pile down to 200mm above cut off level. If this test should also fail the pile shall be
condemned.
(f)
If any of the core tests on the 10% of the pile fail then all piles will be tested in the above
described manner at no extra cost to the Employer.
Section 7, PILING
105
22.0
REVIEW & MODIFICATION OF TEST PILE RESULTS

The Engineer shall review the results of the test pile & the recommendation of the specialist piling subContractor & will either issue instructions to precede with the work as per the existing drawings or issue
revised drawings/instructions after carrying out necessary modifications.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates to cater for the curing & test periods in addition to the period
required for Engineers review & issue of instructions to proceed with the works.
The Contractor shall be entitled for time extension only (without any monetary claims) equal to the period
of delays due to any design review, modifications & authorities approval. However no financial claims
Shall be entertained due to the above delays.
23.0
CLEARANCE OF WORKS
Upon the completion of the works the Contractor shall clear away & remove from the Site all
constructional plant, equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, etc. & leave the whole of the Site & works
clean & in perfect condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Section 7, PILING
106
SECTION 8: MASONRY
BLOCKWORK - Samples for approval
Samples of all types of blocks to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before any of them
are delivered to the site. The approved samples shall be retained on site for use as standards until completion of
the Contract.
The Contractor will be required to build for approval sample panels, minimum 1-meter square, of each type of
block and also of the various types and colors of painting, cavity work, and any other special features to be built
into the finished work. The number and variations of sample panels to be built shall be agreed with the Engineer
and the sample panels built prior to the permanent works being commenced.
The approved panels shall be retained on site and used as standards until no longer required by the Engineer.
1.0
BLOCKWORK TYPE
1.1
MANUFACTURED THERMAL BLOCKWORK FOR EXTERNAL WALL

Blocks: BS 6073, BS 1881, BS EN 772, ASTM C-518 compliance and to DCLD Approved
Manufacturer: As listed in Appendix 3: List of Approved Suppliers
Product reference: ABMT25-110
Polystyrene Insert thickness: 110mm
Individual Strength: 6 N/mm2
Average Strength: 7.5 N/mm2
Block weight: 21 kg.
Block density: 1875 kg/m3.
Fire rating: Four Hours
Category: Thermal Insulated Blocks.
Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 250 x 200;
R- Value: 3.27757 m2k/w
U-Value: 0.305 w/m2k.
STC. AVG without plaster: 61db
1.2
MANUFACTURED THERMAL BLOCKWORK FOR EXTERNAL WALL

Product reference: ABMT20-60
Polystyrene Insert thickness: 60mm
Category: Thermal Insulated Blocks.
Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 200 x 200
R- Value: 1.7690 m2k/w
U-Value: 0.52 w/m2k.
STC. AVG without plaster: 55 db
1.3
MANUFACTURED HOLLOW BLOCKWORK FOR INTERNAL WALL

Product reference: Hollow Block 8
Category: Hollow Blocks.
Section 8, Masonry
107

Water Absorption: 4.1
1.4

1.5

1.6
MANUFACTURED SOLID BLOCKWORK FOR SUBSTRUCTURE

Product reference: Solid Block 8
Category: Solid Blocks.
1.7
MANUFACTURED SOLID BLOCKWORK FOR SUBSTRUCTURE

Product reference: Solid Block 6
Category: Solid Blocks.
Section 8, Masonry
108
1.8
MANUFACTURED LIGHT WEIGHT AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKWORK

Blocks: To
DMS 1 Part 3: 2004 Specification for precast AAC masonry units
BS EN 771-4: 2001 - Specification for masonry units AAC Masonry units
Dubai Central Laboratory Department Technical Approval Certificate
Manufacturer: Al Jazeera Factory or equivalent approved
Product reference: Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC)
Average Normalized Compressive Strength: 3.2 N/mm2 (min.)
Block dry density: 525 kg/m3. Tolerance 50
Category: Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) thermalite block.
Thermal Conductivity at 35C and 60% R.H: 0.134 W/m.k (max.)
2.0
BLOCKWORK MATERIALS
2.1
Constituents
(a)
Cement
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
The cement used in the manufacture of concrete masonry blocks shall comply with the requirements of
BS 12 or BS 4027 as appropriate.
Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.
3
The cement content of manufactured blocks shall not be less than 200 kg/m .
Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement to BS 4027 for work up to and including the structural
ground slab level and ordinary portland cement to BS 12 for work above this level.
Aggregates
Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed materials, which shall fully comply
with BS 882.
Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.
The content of acid soluble chloride (Cl) shall not exceed:
0.06% by weight of fine aggregate
0.02% by weight of coarse aggregate
The content of acid soluble sulphates (SO3) shall not exceed 0.3% by weight of coarse and fine
aggregates.
Coarse aggregates used for the manufacture of concrete blocks shall be 10 mm nominal size for
standard blocks. Grading, when determined in accordance with BS 812 shall be within the limits of Table
1.1.2.1. Therein.
Water
Water shall be potable, clean and free of any organic and deleterious matter having a pH value of 7 to 9.
Organic impurities shall not exceed the following limits
-
(d)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
2.2.

Chlorides
Sulphates
Alkalis, carbonates and bicarbonates
2000mg/litre
250mg/litre
350mg/litre
500mg/litre
Additives
All pigments shall comply with BS 1014.
All admixtures shall comply with BS 5075 Part 1.
Admixtures shall not contain chlorides. They are preferred to be lignosulphate based water reducing
agents.
Block Manufacture
Section 8, Masonry
109
(a)
General
Arises shall be sharp and true, blocks which have damaged arises are not to be used in the works and
shall be discarded at the expense of the Contractor.
Immediately after molding, the blockwork shall be placed on clean, level, non-absorbent pallets. Blocks
shall not be removed from the pallets until inspected and approved by the Engineer. Blocks shall be
cured by being kept thoroughly wet by means of water sprinklers or other approved means for a period
determined by the Engineer, but in all cases for not less than 3 days. Blocks must not be left on earth or
sand during the curing process. Blocks shall be stacked in honeycomb fashion. Solid stacking will not be
permitted.
The blocks are to be produced to the following minimum compressive strength for the uses noted versus
each. Block strengths shall be consistent with those recommended and specified in the specification.
__________________________________________________________________
Minimum compressive
Uses for which
Strength
Blocks are suitable
Mortar Mix
__________________________________________________________________
Average
Lowest
Of 10 blocks
individual blocks
_________________________________________________________________
2
2
N/mm
N/mm
7.0
5.6
Protective skins S.R.
Ctm. (1:3)
To foundations
External non-load
Bearing walls
Load bearing wall
Ct.m. (1:4)
__________________________________________________________________
10.5
8.4
Load bearing wall
Below ground
S.R. Ct.m (1:3)
14.0
11.2
Soakaways and
Manholes
S.R. Ct.m. (1:3)
__________________________________________________________________
2.8
2.25
Internal non-load
Ct.m (1:6)
Bearing walls
___________________________________________________________________
Blocks not exceeding 75 mm thick and blocks for use in the ground are to be solid unless otherwise
directed. All other blocks are to be hollow.
All blocks intended to be used in substructures or may be in contact with soil shall be made from S.R.P.
cement.
(b)
Dimensions and Tolerances
(i)
Standard co-ordinated block sizes for walls shall be 400 mm long, 200 mm high and of width indicated on
the drawings.
Sizes shall be modular as specified in BS 6073 Part 2.
(ii)
(iii)
Load bearing blocks shall have thickness not less than 200 mm.
Hollow blocks shall have voids between 25 and 50 percent with a minimum external shell of 35 mm or
1.75 times the nominal maximum size of aggregate, whichever is greater.
No overall dimension (length, width or height) shall differ by more than 3 mm at any point.
Thermal Insulated Blocks will have Polystyrene Insert of 60mm, 75mm, 110mm
(iv)
(v)
2.3
Mortar
Section 8, Masonry
110
The sand to be used for mortar shall be clean, sharp and be chemically and structurally stable and
comply with the grading below. The lime to be used for mortar shall be imported hydrated lime complying
with BS 890. Sand for mortar shall generally comply with BS 1198 and 1199 as appropriate. Where
colored mortars are required these shall be obtained either by the use of colored cement or by addition of
pigments complying with BS 1014.
The cement and water to be used for mortar shall comply with the requirements given under concrete
works and the methods of measuring and mixing shall be the same. The following mixing table shall be
strictly adhered to in all cases.
Mixing Table
Nominal
Mix
Cement,
Kilos
Sand,
3
m
Imported Lime
(dry hydrate), Kilos
1:4
1.: imported lime
1
with 10% cement (1:10:2 /2)
361
145
1.00
1.00
161
Table of Grading
BS 410 approximately sand passing through sieve :
Sieve No.
Size, mm
Percentage
7
14
25
52
100
3
2.4
1.2
0.6
0.3
0.15
95 - 100
80 - 100
60 - 100
30 - 100
5 - 65
0-1
Note: The above figures represent the limits of percentage (by weight) passing sieves of the sizes
mentioned.
The mortar generally shall be cement and sand (1:4) mix. No lime or any other admixtures shall be
mixed with the mortar without the prior consent of the Engineer.
Where plasticiser is added to the mortar the following mixes shall be used :
a)
Building mortar, cement and sand (1:4) and
b)
Mortar for pointing, cement and sand (1:3).
The plasticiser shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
All mortar shall be used before the initial set has begun. Mortar shall not be remixed after the initial set
has taken place. The full description given in plasterwork shall apply also to the measuring, mixing, etc.,
of mortar for blockwork.
2.4
Ancillary Items
(a)
Damp Proof Courses

Damp proof course to block walls shall consist of one layer of tropical quality bitumised fiber felt damp
proof course complying with Type B of BS 743 and weighing not less than 3.3. kg per square meter.
(b)
(i)
(c)
Wall Ties
Standard wall ties shall conform to the requirements of BS 1243.
Movement Joints
Section 8, Masonry
111
Movement joint filler shall be 10 mm thick (unless specified otherwise) cellular non-absorbent low-density
joint filler sealed on both sides with an approved polysulphide sealant complying with BS 4254.
(d)
(i)
(ii)
Special Blocks
Special blocks for forming feature panels etc shall be to details shown on the Engineer's drawings.
Claustra perforated blocks shall be constructed generally as for precast concrete blocks but perforated as
indicated on drawings. They shall be formed in purpose made moulds to give faces finished fair to receive
a paint finish without plastering.
Blocks may be constructed of either :
a) White gypsum plaster.
b) Concrete (1:2:5) or
c) White concrete (1:2:5) using white Portland cement, and white aggregate as described in concrete
work and noted on the drawings or as described in the specification.
All blocks are to be finished with a fine finish to an approved ornamental pattern and shall be 100 mm
thick unless otherwise noted, with slots in ends of blocks to adapt reinforcement bars.
Claustra wall will normally be built with vertical strength joints reinforced with 12 mm mild steel reinforcing
bars vertically at each straight joint pinned to structure at each end and surrounded solid with mortar.
Blocks shall be bedded in a mixture of white cement and sand (1:4) and struck pointed to Engineer's
approval.
(e)
(i)
(ii)
(f)
Reinforcement
Expanded steel mesh joint reinforcement shall comply with BS 2989.
Bar reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.
Cavity Wall Insulation
(i)
(ii)
3.0
Cavity wall insulation shall be preformed rigid boards of closed cell extruded polystyrene to BS 3837.
Insulation board fixings shall be approved purpose made proprietary stainless steel wall ties complete
with polypropylene retaining clips.
BLOCKWORK - WORKMANSHIP
i.1 Construction
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
When delivered to the site, concrete blocks shall be dry and shall be maintained in this dry condition by
stock piling them on planks or other supports free from contact with the ground and if necessary by
covering them for protection against wetting. Blockwork shall be constructed in accordance with BS 5628
and laid in a workmanlike manner with true and regular horizontal courses and staggered vertical joints
with walls and partitions bonded to one another at junctions and angles. All blockwork shall be set out
and built to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
All joints shall be of consistent thickness (average 10 mm); all horizontal joints shall be properly level
and vertical joints shall be properly lined and quoins, jambs and other angles plumbed as the work
proceeds.
Not more than five courses of blocks shall be laid in any one-day within any one section of walling.
Cut blocks shall only be used where required for bonding purposes or to facilitate building in of other
components but shall not be used as a lintel bearing.
In hollow blocks, where required by the Engineer, hollows shall be only filled with concrete Grade 25
at ends of walls and jambs to openings below lintels, beams and slabs which bear on the wall. Filling
with mortar or material other than that specified will not be accepted.
Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than 4
courses lower than adjacent
sections unless the permission of the Engineer is first obtained and work left at different levels shall be
evenly stepped back.
Section 8, Masonry
112
(vii) In cavity wall construction one skin shall not be taken more than 3 courses above the adjacent skin.
(viii) Blocks shall be soaked with water before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be well wetted
immediately prior to recommencement of work.
(ix) The faces of walls shall be kept clean and free from mortar droppings and splashes.
(x)
All blocks shall be properly spread with mortar before being laid and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed
up solid through the full thickness of the wall at each course as the work proceeds.
(xi) Walls to be left unplastered shall have a fair face consisting of selected blocks pointed with a neat
weathered or flush joint as the works proceed using the same mortar mix specified for jointing.
(xii) Walls to be plastered shall have horizontal joints raked out to a depth of 15 mm to form a key for
rendering.
(xiii) Blockwork shall be bonded to concrete columns and the like with 200 x 60 x 6 mm non ferrous metal ties
cast in concrete and subsequently bent down ragged and built into every course of blockwork. Gunning
ties to concrete will not be employed without the prior consent of the Engineer.
(xiv) Load bearing block walls shall be formed of blocks of the wall thickness stated in the particular
specifications and shall comply with CP 111 "structural recommendations for load bearing walls.
Where the thickness of the wall needs to be increased over 200 mm the Contractor may either use blocks
of the required thickness or use two or more skins solid grouted between, in mortar and adequately tied
together to suit the design conditions to the approval of the Engineer.
(xv) Joints for fair face (unplastered) block work shall be finished off with neat flush or grooved pointing. The
arises shall be well defined and of perfect rectangular shape.
(xvi) Blockwork over lintels shall be reinforced with two layers of expanded metal mesh well embedded in rich
mortar and extending for at least 250 mm at both ends of the lintels and sills.
(xvii) All block walls shall be bonded to adjacent R.C.C. / steel structures by means of galvanized mild steel
cramps (hold fast) at every alternative course. Cramps shall comply with BS 1243, latest issue. The
cramps shall be at least 200 mm long with one end bent and the other shot fired into abutting concrete.
Alternatively cramps consisting of 12 mm high strength steel bars could be accepted. The bars shall be
embedded in concrete for a depth of 150 mm and protruding by not less than 300 mm into the block
course.
(xviii) Concrete elements adjacent to block work shall be scrabbled and roughened to form a suitable key and
interlock with abutting blocks. Partitions shall be bonded to main walls by toothing or interlocking at every
second course to a depth not less than 100 mm. Partitions where sanitary fittings or other equipment are
to be mounted shall be not less than 150 mm thick and suitably strengthened with grade 15 concrete.
3.2
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
3.3
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Movement Joints
The movement joint material and thickness shall be as specified and allowance shall be made for leaving
temporarily open courses immediately under all horizontal structural members and they shall be made
good and pointed up after the structural members have been fully loaded and before the completion of
that section of the works.
The movement joint material shall be laid to the width appropriate to the walling with clean; even butt
joints and the joint shall be kept clean of any material which may be detrimental to the operation of the
joint.
Movement joints shall be sealed on both faces with an approved polysulphide sealant.
Cavity Walls
In cavity wall construction the cavity shall be maintained at the width shown on the drawings or as
specified and shall be kept clean by efficient means throughout the construction of the walls and any
accidental mortar droppings shall be prevented from adhering to cavity faces of walls, wall ties, cavity
trays or insulation. Internal faces of block work shall be pointed to allow for the correct application of
insulation.
Wall ties shall be bedded minimum 50 mm in to each skin of walling and spaced 400 mm vertically and
800 mm horizontally, and staggered, with additional ties within 200 mm of the sides of openings, at
reveals, quoins, etc. The ties shall be of the butterfly twist type of no. 10 SWG mild steel wire zinc coated
and similar to those described in BS 1243. The length of the ties shall be approximately 80 mm less than
the total thickness of the wall.
Cavity wall insulation shall be installed in accordance with BS 6676 Part 2 (as appropriate) and in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Insulation boards shall not, under any circumstances, be pushed into a cavity but shall be fixed tightly
Section 8, Masonry
113
against the insulated skin of walling, which shall be clean, using approved fixings.
Boards shall be tongue and groove jointed with staggered vertical joints
and shall be evenly and
cleanly cut where required.
(vi) Spacing of wall ties with retaining clips shall suit sizes of insulation boards so as to retain all edges but
not to be less than the requirements of Clause 2.3(ii).
(vii) Allowance shall be made for leaving, temporarily, open courses immediately under all structural members
built into the walls. These open courses shall be left in the suitable positions to permit the structural
members to take up their full deflection. The open courses shall be made good and pointed up after the
structural members have been fully loaded and before the completion of the works.
(viii) Where the Contractor cannot obtain the required compressive strength in the hollow load bearing blocks
he may with the approval of the Engineer obtain an adequate strength in the wall by one or more of the
following methods :
(v)
a) Manufacture the blocks as solid blocks to obtain the compressive strength, or

b) Fill the cavities solid with concrete as the work proceeds, or
c) Introduce reinforcement.
Subject to producing adequate design detail as required by the Engineer, all the variations in
work shall be done wholly at the Contractor's expense.
3.4
Labor
Arches shall be constructed in purpose made concrete solid blocks as appropriate to the size shown on
the drawings. The Contractor shall provide and erect temporary shuttering of timber construction and
strike and remove on completion.
The Contractor shall cut and fit block work around steel work etc., leave or form chases for edges of
concrete slabs, staircase, ends of partitions, etc., cut chases for pipes, conduits, etc., and make good.
No hollow blocks shall abut any built in fixtures, e.g. door and window frames, apertures and louvers, etc.
All hollow blocks at jambs or doors and windows shall be filled in grade 15 concrete.
Door and window frames shall be bedded and exposed edges pointed in a sealant and fixing cramps
shall be built in.
The Contractor shall perform all cutting away and making good for all trades.
3.5
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
3.6
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Damp Proof Lining

Where indicated on the drawings, approved damp proof courses shall be laid on and bedded in mortar in
continuous lengths as far as is practicable. Damp proof course in walls shall consist of one layer of
tropical quality bitumenised fiber felt damp proof course complying with Type 3 of BS 743 weighing not
3
less than 3.3 kg/m . The damp proof course shall be well lapped at corners and joints and bedded in
cement mortar (1:4) mix and pointed both sides.
Joints shall be lapped 200 mm in straight runs and for the full width at junctions and angles with the
meeting surfaces sealed with bituminous waterproofing.
Where shown on drawings the Contractor shall similarly provide and build in a vertical damp proof course
at jambs of openings in cavity walls and a horizontal damp proof course above such openings and to
parapet walls.
Reinforced Block Walls
All blockwork exceeding 3 m high is to be reinforced with approved proprietary strip reinforcement fixed
horizontally in each alternate course and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Where noted on the drawings or in the specification reinforced block walls are to be constructed of hollow
concrete blocks grade P1 units to ASTM designation C90. The minimum compressive strength of the
2
blocks shall be 7.0 N/m .
Mortar and grout for reinforced block shall conform to ASTM designation C476.
2
The mortar shall be grade 'S' mortar with a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 12.0 N/m . The
1
mix proportions by volume of cement, hydrated lime to damp loose sand shall be 1 cement, minimum /4
1
1
to maximum /2 hydrated lime, and not less than 2 /4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes
of cement and lime and sand.
Section 8, Masonry
114
The grout shall be composed by volume of 1:1 5:2 parts of cement, sand, and small size gravel
respectively. The grout shall have a fluid consistency, which means that consistency shall be as fluid as
possible for pouring without segregation of the constituent parts.
(iv)
(v)
Steel bar reinforcement shall be in accordance with the relevant BS referred to in the concrete
specification. Wire reinforcement in bed joints shall conform to ASTM designation A305.
Field and preliminary testing procedures will be as follows:
a) Preliminary test results for mortar, grout, concrete blocks and block prisms in accordance
with following ASTM designation must be provided prior to masonry work commencing on
site.
b) Compressive tests on mortar and grout shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM
Designation C39. At least 6 samples shall be taken or otherwise as directed by the
Engineer.
c) 10 no. preliminary block compression test results from each block manufacturer must be
submitted prior to work commencing on site. Once a particular supplier has been selected
and approved by the Engineer a further 10 blocks from each consignment delivered to the
site shall be tested.
d) 3 no. block prisms shall be made for each 500 sq. of block work constructed on site or for
2
each day of work if less than 500 m is built per day.
The prism shall be made by bedding two blocks together with mortar and left undisturbed on
site for 7 days in protected position. After 7 days the prisms shall be carefully transported to
an approved laboratory and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 method prism test.
(vi)
All block work shall be laid true, level, plumb and neatly in accordance with the plans.
Units shall be cut accurately to fit all plumbing ducts, openings, electrical work, etc., and all holes shall be
neatly patched up with suitable concrete or mortar.
Extreme care shall be taken to prevent visible grout or mortar stains.
No construction supports shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted by the
Engineer.
(vii)
Block units shall be sound, dry, clean and free from cracks when placed in the structure.
All block units should be stored on the site in a neat and clean condition and kept off the ground and
protected from rain. The surfaces of blocks may be wetted with a light mist spray.
Where block unit cutting is necessary, all cuts shall be neat and true.
(viii) Mortar shall be mixed by placing one-half of the water and sand in the operating mixer. Then add the
cement lime and the remainder of the sand and water.
After all ingredients are in the batch mixer they shall be mechanically mixed for not less than 3 minutes.
Hand mixing shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
3.7
Bonding
For bonding the blockwork to the foundation the top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean,
with laitance removed and aggregate exposed before starting the block work construction.
Where no bond pattern is shown, the walls shall be laid up in straight uniform courses with regular
running bond.
Intersecting blockwork walls and partitions shall be bonded by the use of galvanized steel ties of suitable
size and each two alternate course. Corners shall have a standard blockwork bond by overlapping units
Section 8, Masonry
115
and shall be solid grouted.

3.8
Jointing
The starting joint on foundations shall be laid with full mortar coverage on the bed. D.P.C. shall be
provided if specified. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and uniform in thickness and shall be tooled as
shown on the plans. All walls shall have joints tooled with a round bar (or V-shaped bar) to produce a
dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block at the edges, unless specifically detailed
otherwise. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond.
Raked joints shall be not more than 12 mm deep and where exposed to the weather shall be tooled.
Where walls are to receive plaster the joints shall be struck flush.
Where joints are to be concealed under paint, these joints shall be filled flush and then pressed to
produce a dense surface without sheen. Joints, which are not tight at the time of tooling, shall be raked
out, pointed, and then tooled. Unless otherwise specified or detailed on the drawings, in hollow unit
blockwork the horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be 10 mm thick with full mortar coverage on the
face shells and on the webs surrounding cells to be filled with grout. If it is necessary to move a unit after
it has been once set in place, the unit shall be removed from the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar.
Concrete building bricks shall be laid with full head and bed joints.
3.9
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
3.10
Reinforcing Generally
When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core it shall not be sloped more than one
horizontal in six vertical. Dowels shall be grouted into a core in vertical wall reinforcing.
Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bonds around corners and where bonds or hooks are
detailed on the drawings.
Reinforcing steel shall be lapped 30 bars diameters minimum where spliced, and shall be separated by
one bar diameter or wired together.
Vertical bars shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192 diameters of
the reinforcement.
Horizontal reinforcing bars shall be placed in continuous blockwork courses, consisting of bond beam or
trough block units and shall be solidly grouted in place.
Vertical reinforcing steel shall have a minimum clearance of 6 mm from the blockwork and not less than
one bar diameter between bars.
Wire reinforcement shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout. Joints with wire reinforcement shall
be at least twice the thickness of the wire.
Wire reinforcement shall be lapped at least 150 mm at splices and shall contain at least one cross wire of
each piece of reinforcement in the lapped distance.
Reinforcing Details
a)
All reinforced block walls shall be reinforced with one Y12 vertical bar at 800 mm C/C in solid grouted
cells. One additional Y12 bar shall be placed at ends of walls, wall returns, wall intersections and on
each side of all openings. Short lengths of walls or at beam supports may require additional
reinforcement and this should be provided as shown on the drawings.
b)
Horizontal reinforcement in the walls shall consist of two Y12 continuous bars in solid grouted bond
beams at the top of foundations, at mid height of the walls and at the underside of floor/roof slabs. Two
Y12 bars grouted bond beams shall also be provided at the top and bottom of all openings and shall
extend 800 mm past such openings. Galvanized trussed wire reinforcement shall also be provided in the
bed joint every third course.
3.11
Grouting Generally
a)
Reinforcing steel shall be secured in place and inspected before grouting starts.
b)
Mortar dropping should be kept out of the grout space.
c)
All grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place.
d)
Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous unobstructed cell area not
Section 8, Masonry
116
less than 50 mm x 75 mm.

e)
Cells containing reinforcement shall be solidly filled with grout and pours shall be stopped 30 mm below
the top of a course to form a key at pouring joints.
f)
Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one continuous operation.
g)
The top of unfilled cell columns under a horizontal bond beam shall be covered with metal lath or special
units shall be used to confirm the grout fill to the beam section.
h)
All bolts, anchors, etc., inserted in the walls shall be solid grouted in place.
3.12
Low Lift Grouting

In hollow unit blockwork low lift grouting, the structure shall be grouted in heights of less than 1200 mm.
In double thickness blockwalls low lift grouting, the wall shall be grouted in heights of less than 200 mm or
6 times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less.
3.13
High Lift Grouting
a)
Cleaning holes shall be provided at the bottom of all cores containing vertical reinforcement in hollow unit
blockwork and in double thickness blockwork shall be provided by omitting alternate units on the first
course of one skin.
b)
Excess projections and mortar droppings shall be cleaned out of the grout space and off the reinforcing
steel with a jet stream of water or as required to clean the space.
c)
All grout shall be consolidated at time of pouring by puddling or vibrating and then reconsolidating by later
puddling before the plasticity has become low.
d)
The minimum dimension of the grout space shall be 50 mm.
e)
Double thickness blockwork shall cure at least 3 days and hollow unit blockwork shall cure at least 48
hours before grouting.
f)
Grout shall be poured to not more than 1200 mm depth, then wait approximately 1 hour and pour another
1200 mm depth. The full height in each section of the wall shall be poured in one day.
g)
Vertical grout barriers or dams shall be built across the grout space of double thickness blockwork to the
entire height of the wall to control the flow of grout horizontally. These barriers shall be less than 7.6 m
on center.
h)
All reinforcing steel shall be inspected in place before grouting and there shall be continuous inspection
during the grouting operation.
i)
In double thickness blockwork wire ties consisting of no. 9 wire rectangles, shall connect the skins and
shall be spaced not more than 300 mm o.c. vertically for stacked bond, not more than 600 mm o.c.
vertically for running bond, and not more than 800 mm o.c. horizontally.
3.14
a)
b)
i)
Special Notes
On no account may any reinforced blockwall be cut or chased out to accommodate conduits, water pipes,
etc.
All conduits requiring to be built into the wall shall be placed in an unreinforced cell as work proceeds. All
such cells containing conduits, water pipes, etc., shall be solid grouted.
All block work walls denoted on the drawings or in the particular conditions as 'reinforced' blockwalls shall
in any case comply with the following minimum requirements.
2
Blocks are to have compressive strength of 7 N/m .
Section 8, Masonry
117
ii)
Walls are to be reinforced as noted on the drawings or in the absence of detailed requirements the
minimum reinforcement provided shall be horizontal reinforcement as noted in Clause 8.01 together with
2
one 12 mm mild steel bar set vertically per 0.4 m (or part hereof) horizontal section area of blockwork
wall pinned to structure at each end and spaced evenly along length of wall.
1
iii) Mortar mix to be 1 part cement to /2 part hydrated lime to 4 parts sand.
iv) The reinforcement is to be solidly grouted in with cement mortar of fine aggregate concrete with a
compressive strength of 14 N.
v) The grouting is to be thoroughly compacted and executed in lifts not exceeding 120 mm high, with 1 hour
(minimum) interval between lifts but with full height of wall to be completed in one day.
Section 8, Masonry
118
SECTION 9: WATER PROOFING

A.
BASEMENT WATERPROOFING
A1
GENERAL
A1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
a. Supply and installation of waterproofing system to all concrete surfaces from slab on grade level down
to concrete blinding below basement slab including pile caps, retaining walls, underground lift pits,
water tanks and pile heads
b. Supply and installation of 3 channel re-injectable hose in construction joints.
c.
A1.2
Supply and installation of injectable water stops in expansion joints as applicable.
APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS
Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing
membrane manufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work and
climatic condition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the work
satisfactorily.
A1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of Substrates prior to the
application of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as necessary, to obtain subcontractors
representatives approval.
b. Subcontractors representative: Have subcontractors technical representative present during the
performance of the work as necessary to ensure proper preparation of substrate and installation of
waterproofing.
c.
A1.4
All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.
SUBMITTALS
a. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed material specifications and membrane installation
instructions, including methods and materials used for terminations, penetrations, flashing, protection,
compatibility and bonding.
b. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.
c.
Samples:
2. Membrane: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of membrane.
3. Protection board: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of protection board.
4. Injection hose: Provide 3x300 mm length samples of injection hose and related accessories.
d. Certification:
2. Submit manufacturers certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.
3. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment
and manpower available.
Section 9, Roofing & Waterproofing
119
4. Submit manufacturers certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.
A1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
1. Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight and as directed by the materials manufacturers.
2. Do not use old materials or materials damaged in handling and storage.
A1.6
WARRANTY
1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of the
basement.
2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in material and
workmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building for a period
of twenty years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.
3. The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.
A2
PRODUCTS
A2.1
MATERIALS
1. Membrane: A homogeneous 20% SBS modified elastomeric bituminous membrane 5 mm thick nonreinforced with no fillers such as FLEXOBIT by M/S BITUFA HOLLAND, U.A.E. distributor and
approved applicator M/s Western International, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Subject
Thickness
Length
Width
Mass per m
Bitumen quantity total
Filler content
Mass variation in
width direction
Flow temperature
Flow temp. after ageing
Cold bending
temperature
Cold bending
temperature after ageing
Tensile strength at 750%
elongation
*length
*width
Elongation at break
length
Elongation at break width
Test Method
EN 1849-1
EN 1848-1
EN 1848-1
EN 1849-1
NEN 2087
Unit
mm
M
M
G/m
G/m
%
-
Tolerance
+/15%
-1%
+/-1%
+10%/
-0
+5
+0,20
Nominal Value
5,0
5,0
1,0
5200
4000
0
1,0
C
C
-0
-0
100
85
+0
-25
EN 1110 /
EN 1296
+0
-20
ISO 37
ISO 37
N/mm
N/mm
+/-0,2
+/-0,2
0,4
0,4
ISO 37
ISO 37
%
%
-0
-0
1000
1000
NEN 2087
EN 1110
EN 1110 /
EN 1296
NEN 1109
2. Horizontal Protection: Membrane on 75 mm of lean blinding concrete, with protective 50 mm screed

on top of the membrane.
120
3. Vertical Protection: Ensure protective boards are of sufficient strength of preformed semi rigid board
to withstand pressure loads and provide absolute protection to membrane.
a. Against backfill -such as 8mm studded hdpe drainage protection sheet Delta MS
b. Against concrete-such as 6mm impregnated bituminous protection board
4. Primer: As recommended by the membrane manufacturer and formulated to ensure bond of the
membrane to the substrate.
5. Sealant: Hot applied SBS sealant, cold applied bituminous or approved equivalent at membrane
termination.
6. Metal flashings: 09 mm thick aluminium flashings at membrane terminations.
7. Injection Hose: The injection hose is to be re-injectable 3 channel hose such as TRIOJECT or equal
approved. The Injection hose must be a flat hose consisting of 3 injection channels capable of being
injected independently of each other as and when required.
8. Injection resin: The injection resin must be MC-INJEKTOPRESS 2300 NV or equal approved. The
resin must be 2 component polyurethane suitable for flexible crack injection and sealing with the
following properties.
Viscosity:
Pot life:
Shore A Hardness:
Crack width penetration:
100 mPas
100 minutes
50
down to 0.1 mm
9. Injection equipment: The pump to be used for injection must be a air driven one component high
pressure injection pump with an injection pressure of up to 390 bar. The injection pump must be
connected with a suitable gauge to control the pressure as required to enable a thorough injection
process.
10. Cable/pipe Sealing compound: One part water and gas tight sealing compound to seal cable
penetration and other pipe penetration through sleeve openings in the waterproofing. The sealing
compound shall remain flexible forever to enable new cables or pipes to be conducted through the
openings. The sealing compound shall be STOPAQ or approved equivalent.
A3
EXECUTION
A3.1
INSPECTION
1. Ensure substrates are dry, clean, smooth, and free of matter and conditions detrimental to bond and
performance of the membrane.
2. Verify that substrate and concrete blinding substrate are smooth, sound and suitable to accept
waterproofing.
3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades which require penetrations through the waterproofing
membrane are placed prior to the application of the membrane.
A3.2
PREPARATION
1. Comply with membrane manufacturers instructions for preparation of substrate. Sweep substrate as
necessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which will have detrimental
effect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.
121
2. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Make substrates
smooth.
3. Prime vertical substrates and other substrates where membrane is to be applied as recommended by
membrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials.
4. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hours before application of the membrane waterproofing.
5. All pipe penetrations shall be fitted with an approved pipe sleeve with a welded flange bolted and
sealed to structural concrete.
6. Groove or approved provision for membrane termination at grade shall be available.
7. All external corners shall be rounded or chamfered. All internal corners shall receive a 40x40 mm
mortar fillet.
A3.3
1.
INSTALLATION
MEMBRANE:
a. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions.

b. Apply membrane free of wrinkles and free of wavy edges.
c.
Extend membrane full height of basement walls and over entire horizontal basement and ground floor
area around tie beams, under slab on grade etc. as shown on drawings. Extend membrane under
trenches, pits and depressions.
d. Apply membrane fully torched onto surfaces as directed by manufacturer except horizontal surface
where membrane should be loose laid faulty seams.
e. All lap joints of sheets, to be torched and welded, with 100 mm side laps and end laps fully torched.
Apply heat to both sides of the overlaps in proper order and immediately press the overlaps tight.
f.
Have subcontractors technical representative thoroughly check all seams repair.
g. For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, pile head treatment and the like,
refer to the technical documents and approved shop drawings and provide collars, metal clamps,
sealant, etc. as required.
h. Extend membrane under bases before columns are placed and make watertight seal to all anchor
rods passing through the membrane.
i.
Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as ties, anchors, pipes, etc. to
overcome any water penetration.
j.
Use special sealants such as STOPAQ to seal cable and pipes through preinstalled sleeves.
2.
PROTECTION SCREED
Apply 50 mm uniform thickness of screed over waterproofing membrane which is placed horizontally
on the concrete blinding. Do not extend the screed over concrete pile heads.
3.
PROTECTION BOARD
122
1. Apply protection board onto membrane on all vertical and sloping surfaces to protect the
waterproofing from damages due to placing and the vibrating of the concrete, and to reduce drag
down on the membrane by the placing action of the concrete.
2. Apply full coverage and butt joints between boards, to moderate contacts.
3. Spot adhere the protection boards to the membrane with daubs of adhesive of type approved by the
membrane manufacturer.
A3.4
PILE HEAD WATERPROOFING

Refer to waterproofing details and carry out waterproofing accordingly.
A3.5
INJECTION HOSE IN CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
1. The injection hose must have a foam pad on the bottom assuring continuous full width access to the
surface of the concrete.
2. The injection hose must be firmly secured in position and protected by means of a steel mesh.
3. The injection hose shall be placed preferably at the center of the construction joint for concrete
sections up to 50 cm thick.
4. The injection points must be specially designed proprietary packers installed at a spacing not
exceeding 8 m.
A3.6
DEWATERING SYSTEM SWITCH OFF
1. Waterproof all temporary openings. Prior to dewatering switch off, repair all cracks below grade level
as per concrete crack repair section and inject one of the channels of the Trioject injection hose using
the approved low viscosity polyurethane resin.
B.
FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING FOR BURIED FOOTINGS, TIE BEAMS, NECK COLUMNS,

SLAB ON GRADE etc.
B1.
GENERAL
B1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
1. Supply and installation of waterproofing system to all concrete surfaces from slab On grade level,
buried footings, tie beams, and neck columns.
B1.2
1. Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing Membrane

manufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work and climatic
condition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the work satisfactorily.
B1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of substrates prior to the
application of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as necessary, to obtain subcontractors
123
2. Subcontractors representative: Have subcontractors technical representative present during the

performance of the work as necessary to ensure proper preparation of substrate and installation of
waterproofing.
3. All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.
B1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed material specifications and membrane installation
instructions, including methods and materials used for protection, compatibility and bonding.
2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.
3. Samples:
a. Membrane: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm cured samples of membrane.
b. Protection board: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm sample of protection board.
4. Certification:
B1.5
a.
Submit manufacturers certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.
b.
Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment and
manpower available.
c.
Submit manufacturers certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.
PRODUCT HANDLING
B1.6
WARRANTY
1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water.
workmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building for a period
of ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.
B2
PRODUCTS
B2.1
MATERIALS
1. 3 mm thick two-component SBS modified bitumen compound with special hydraulically hardening
fillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers. Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured by
MC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, and distributor and approved applicator M/s Western international. P.O
Box:73820 Dubai. UAE.
2. Material Specifications
Performance specifications
124
Chemical resistance
Flash Point
Crack bridging
Sulphur dioxide,Carbon dioxide,chlorides,weak

acids,sulphates and ground salt water
>200 degrees Celsius
>10mm
Flexibility
Bond strength
360 degrees, 10mm radius mandrel

Min 0.2N/mm2
Concrete Curing
Permeability
90% efficiency
2mm thickness, 5 bar
3. Horizontal Protection for slab on grade: 50 mm screed on top of the membrane.

4. Vertical Protection: Ensure protective boards are of sufficient strength of preformed semi rigid board
to withstand pressure loads and provide absolute protection to membrane such as a 3 mm thick
bitumen impregnated protection board.
5. Cable/pipe Sealing compound: One part water and gas tight sealing compound to seal cable
penetration and other pipe penetration through sleeve openings in the waterproofing. The sealing
compound shall remain flexible forever to enable new cables or pipes to be conducted through the
openings. The sealing compound shall be STOPAQ or approved equivalent.
B3
EXECUTION
B3.1
INSPECTION
waterproofing.
3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades which require penetrations through the waterproofing
membrane are placed prior to the application of the membrane.
B3.2
PREPARATION
1. Comply with membrane manufacturers instructions for preparation of substrate sweep substrate as
necessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which will have detrimental
effect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.
2. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Make substrates
smooth.
membrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials.
4. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hours before application of the membrane waterproofing.
B3.3
INSTALLATION
1. MEMBRANE:
a. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions.
125
b. Have subcontractors technical representative thoroughly check all seams. Repair.

c.
For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, pile head treatment and the
like, refer to the technical documents and approved shop drawings and provide collars, metal
clamps, sealant, etc as required.
d. Extend membrane under bases before columns are placed and make watertight seal to all anchor
rods passing through the membrane.
e. Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as ties, anchors, pipes,
etc. to overcome any water penetration.
f.
Use special sealants such as STOPAQ to seal cable and pipes through preinstalled sleeves.
2. PROTECTION SCREED
Apply 50 mm uniform thickness of screed over waterproofing membrane which is placed horizontally
on the concrete blinding.
3. PROTECTION BOARD
1. Apply protection board onto membrane on all vertical and sloping surfaces to protect the
waterproofing from damages due to placing and the vibrating of the concrete, and to reduce dragdown on the membrane by the placing action of the concrete.
2. Apply full coverage and butt joints between boards, to moderate contacts.
3. Spot adhere the protection boards to the membrane with daubs of adhesive of type approved by
the membrane manufacturer.
C.
WET AREAS WATERPROOFING
C1
GENERAL
C1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane to floors of washrooms, kitchens, and other
locations as shown on the drawings and schedules.
C1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and
approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing.
C1.3
INSPECTION AND TESTING

1. Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice that
the installation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofing
Subcontractor and by himself.
2. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have been carried out
to the Engineers approval.
126
C1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Product data: Submit manufacturers specifications, installation instructions and recommendations
for waterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materials
comply with specified requirements.
2. Samples: Submit cured film samples of waterproofing applied to concrete substrate.
C1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
1. Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers. Store materials in dry area out
of direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturers recommended temperature range.
C1.6
EXTENDED WARRANTY
1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects Liability
Certificate, against faulty workmanship and materials.
2. Upon written notification from the Engineer that the membrane waterproofing is defective promptly
repair or replace the defective work.
C1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
1. Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and penetrations work is
completed. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pin holing of membrane and to prevent lack
of bond of membrane to substrate.
2. Protect works of others from damage due to work of this Section.
C2
PRODUCTS
C2.1
MATERIALS
1. Product Description
All wet areas shall be waterproofed using a fluid applied, 3 mm thick .two-component SBS modified
bitumen compound with special hydraulically hardening fillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers.
Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured by MC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, GERMANY
U.A.E. distributor and approved applicator M/s Western International, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.
2. Performance specifications
Chemical resistance
Flash Point
Crack bridging
Flexibility
Bond strength

>10mm
Min 0.2N/mm2
Concrete Curing
Permeability
90% efficiency
127
C3.
EXECUTION
C3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Ensure substrate is completely dry to approval of waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Make substrates free of latence, form oils, cure and seal compounds and other substances
detrimental to bond. Any ridges and concrete irregularities shall be ground smooth.
3. At intersections with vertical surfaces (upstands, wall, etc.) a suitable cant strip shall be built as per
manufacturers recommendations.
4. All shrinkage, cold pour joints and non-moving structural cracks should be pre-treated as per
5. PVC plumbing shall be primed with a suitable primer as per manufacturers recommendation.
C3.2
INSTALLATION
1. Application
a. Prime substrate with a solution of 1 part NAFUFLEX 2 K with 10 parts of clean water applied by
brush.
b. Coating shall be applied as per manufacturers instructions, to a minimum thickness of 3 mm
unless shown otherwise in drawings or indicated in the bill of quantities.
c.
Allow membrane to cure for 36 hours before flood test.
d. Flood with a minimum of 25.4 mm (1) of water for 48 hours. Drains should be plugged and
barriers placed to contain the water.
e. If any leaks occur, repair the membrane as per manufacturers instructions.
D.
CONCRETE ROOFS
D1
GENERAL
D1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
1. Supply and installation of roof waterproofing system to all concrete roof slabs to keep water out of
building and to provide thermal insulation.
D1.2
Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing membrane
manufacturer, having not less than Fifteen years of proven experience in this type of work and climatic
D1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of Substrates prior to the
application of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as Necessary to obtain subcontractors
128
2. Subcontractors representative: Have subcontractors technical representative Present during the

performance of the work as necessary to ensure proper Preparation of substrate and installation of
waterproofing.
3. All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.
D1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed specifications and membrane Installation instructions,
including methods and materials used for terminations, penetrations, flashing, protection, compatibility
and bonding.
2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.
3. Sample: Provide 3 samples of all items specified.
4. Certification:
a. Submit manufacturers certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.
b. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment
and manpower available.
c. Submit manufacturers certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.
D1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
D1.6
EXTENDED WARRANTY
1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of the Roof.
2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in and workmanship
and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building: for a period of twenty
years from date of the Defects Liability.
3. Certificate. The guarantee must be backed by the manufacturer and an Insurance company.
D2
PRODUCTS
D2.1
MATERIALS
WATERPROOFING & THERMAL INSULATION COVERING ROOF AREA:
Preparation: Clean the entire substrate with compressed air prior to application.
Roofing System Covering: Combo-Roof System by Roof Care Co. L.L.C.
First Layer: 100mm Polyfoam of minimum density 48Kg/M3
Polytex liquid electrometric u.v. coating
Polyfab filter membrane
Screed to falls 1:120 minimum recommended
Polyboard filler board
Backing rod & Polyseal PS to all construction joints
Combotex HR Solar Reflective Material top
1st Layer:
POLYFOAM
Grade: Spray
129
Average thickness: 80-100 mm to comply with Authority U-Value requirement

Core density: 45-50kg/M3
Comp. strength: 2.5kg/cm2
Tensile strength: 3kg/cm2
Thermal conductivity: 0.0213W/(mk) (aged value)
Closed cells: 98%
Standards: BS 5241-part 1
2nd Layer:
POLYTEX
Grade: Brush apply
Density: 1.2gm/cc
pH: 8 - 8.5
Solid content: 60%
Elongation: 300%
Standards: BS 476 3
3rd Layer:
POLYFAB
Grade: Filter membrane
Mass: 120gm/M2
Thickness: 1.5mm
Elongation: 50%
Color: White.
4th Layer:
SHOTCRETE (Recommended fall 1:100)
Grade: Pouring
Admix: CORMIX P9
Mix class: 350 OPC
Slump: 125+/-25mm
Density: 2.5kg/ltr
5th Layer: POLYTEX HR
Grade: Brush apply
Specific gravity: 1.0-1.05
Water penetration: Nil
Standards: BS 1881 Part 5
Solar Index: Minimum 78
Construction joints: POLYBOARD
Grade: Impregnated filler board
Thickness: 12mm
Density: 220kg/M3
Standards: BS 1142
Construction joints: POLYSEAL PS
Grade: Pouring
Solid content: 100%
Temperature Resistance: -20 0C to 120 0C
Elongation: 400 %( at break)
Standards: BS 6920 - 88
D3
EXECUTION
D3.1
INSPECTION
waterproofing.
3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades that require penetrations through the waterproofing
membrane are placed prior to the application of the membrane
Verify that light weight screed slopes positively to drains.
130
D3.2
PREPARATION
a) General
1. Comply with membrane manufacturers instructions for preparation of substrate.
2. Sweep substrate as necessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which will
have detrimental effect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.
3. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
membrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hours
before application of the membrane waterproofing.
6. Groove or approved provision for membrane termination at up stands shall be available.
7. All external corners shall be rounded or chamfered. All internal corners shall receive a 40x40 mm
mortar fillet.
D3.3
INSTALLATION
a) MEMBRANE:
1. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions.
2. Apply membrane free of wrinkles and free of wavy edges.
3. Apply membrane fully torched onto surfaces as directed by manufacturer except horizontal surface
where membrane should be loose laid.
4. All lap joints of sheets, to be torched and welded, with 100 mm side laps and end laps fully torched.
Apply heat to both sides of the overlaps in proper order and immediately press the overlaps tight.
5. Have subcontractors technical representative thoroughly check all seams. Repair faulty seams.
6. For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, refer to the technical documents
and approved shop drawings and provide reinforcing strips, collars, metal clamps, sealant, etc as
required.
7. Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as vent pipes, etc. to
overcome any water penetration.
b) MEMBRANE FLASHING
1. Install membrane flashing in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions. Bond membrane
flashing fully to the substrate. Extend membrane flashings minimum 150 mm out onto the roofing
membrane. Extend membrane up vertical surfaces to extent shown. Lap joints of sheets and ensure
joints are sealed water and air tight, free of fish mouths and other defect.
2. Flash items such as pipes and other items passing through membrane watertight.
3. Flash membrane into drains.
4. Install fillers around penetrations and fill pocket with no shrink grout and liquid sealer.
c) TERMINATIONS
131
1. Provide water cutoffs at end of each days work.

2. Pull membrane loose from water cutoff and remove contaminated material before resuming work.
d) INSTALLATIONMETAL FLASHING
1. Install metal flashings at membrane termination where indicated on the drawings.
2. Do not install metal flashing until all membrane flashings have been inspected and approved by the
Consultant and membrane manufacturer.
3. Join flashings in a lock-jointed arrangement which will allow for expansion and contraction, faces free
from buckling, warp, wave, dents, oil-canning, or other defects.
4. Provide metal drips, cleats, clips and starter strips as shown or required, of sufficient thickness to hold
flashings in true planes and position without deformations.
5. Where aluminum is in contacts with cementitious materials, coat the back of the aluminum with
bituminous paint to prevent corrosion.
e) INSULATION
1. Place 50 mm thick insulation directly on membrane, tightly butt boards, and stagger end joints. Cut
insulation to shape and maintain 12 mm maximum clearance from projections and cants.
f)
PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
1. Immediately after installation of insulation, loose lay the separation sheet (water pervious fabric) over
insulation .Lapping sheets minimum 300mm.
2. Install precast concrete pavers level on paver seats or mortar as indicated in drawings with joints butt
to moderate contact.
g) FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Membrane manufacturers representative shall verify warranty requirements are achieved.
2. Flood test membrane 24 hours minimum following completion of membrane installation and prior to
insulation installation.
3. Restrict water runoff from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes. Flood
restricted area to depth for 24 hours.
4.
Repair any leaks which develop and retest.
5. At completion of flood test, remove drain plugs.

6. Coordinate inspection and testing activities described above with the Engineer.
h) CLEANING
1. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning agent.
2. Remove masking protection, equipment, material, and debris from roof and storage area.
E.
WATERSTORAGE TANKS WATERPROOFING
E1
GENERAL
132
E1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply and installation of waterproofing system to floors , walls and soffits of water tanks
E1.2
Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing membrane
manufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work and climatic
E1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers printed material specifications and

2. Installation instructions, including methods and materials used
3. Penetrations, flashing, protection, compatibility and bonding.
4. Shop drawings indicating installation details.
5. Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of the liner.
.
E1.4
CERTIFICATION
1. Submit manufacturers certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.

2. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment and
manpower available.
3. Submit manufacturers certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.
4. Submit manufacturers and resin suppliers certificate that the proposed liner is suitable for potable
water.
E1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
E1.6
WARRANTY
1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of the water
tank.
workmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from leaking out from the water tank for a
period of 10 years.
E2
PRODUCTS
E2.1
MATERIALS
1. Cast in HDPE liner with anchors such as 3mm thick Anchor knob sheet with 1150 knobs per sqm from
133
Anchor Lining systems, South Africa.

Technical data
.Minimum Pull Strength
35Kgs (per Anchor)
Density
Yield stress
Break stress
Yield elongation
Break elongation
Tear resistance
ASTM D1505
ASTM D 638 Type 4
ASTM D 638 Type 4
ASTM D 638 Type 4
ASTM D 638 Type 4
ASTM D 1004
0.94g/ml
15Mpa
27 Mpa
12%
700%
120N/mm
Puncture Resistance
ASTM D 4833
300N/mm
E3
INSTALLATION
E3.1 Concrete Protection liner AKS should be installed to structures in the longest possible vertical panels
to limit horizontal joints.
E3.2 The sheets must be well secured against the formwork to avoid movement or displacement when the
concrete is poured.
E3.3 Care must be taken to avoid damage to the lining, as any damage will need to be located and
repaired.
E3.4 All installation and welds must be carried as per manufacturers guidelines.
F.
DAMPROOFING BEHIND EXTERNAL CLADDING
F1
GENERAL
F1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane to exterior shell of concrete/blockwork
superstructure behind GRC cladding and other locations as shown on the drawings and schedules.
F1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and approved
by the manufacturer of the waterproofing.
F1.3

Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice that the
installation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofing Subcontractor
and by himself. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have been
carried out to the Engineers approval.
F1.4
SUBMITTALS
134
1. Product data: Submit manufacturers specifications, installation instructions and recommendations for
waterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
specified requirements.
2. Samples: Submit cured film samples of waterproofing applied to concrete substrate.
F1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers.
Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturers recommended
temperature range.
F1.6
EXTENDED WARRANTY
1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate,
against faulty workmanship and materials.
F1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and Penetrations work
is completed. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pinholing of membrane and to prevent
lack of bond of membrane to substrate.
Protect works of others from damage due to work of this Section.
F2
PRODUCTS
F2.1
MATERIALS
1. Product Description
1.7 mm thick .two-component SBS modified bitumen compound with special hydraulically hardening
fillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers. Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured by
MC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, GERMANY U.A.E. distributor and approved applicator M/s Western
International, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.
Performance specifications
Chemical resistance
Flash Point
Crack bridging
Flexibility
Bond strength

>10mm
Min 0.2N/mm2
Concrete Curing
Permeability
90% efficiency
F3
EXECUTION
F3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
135
1. Ensure substrate is completely dry to approval of waterproofing manufacturer. Make substrates free of
latence, form oils, cure and seal compounds and other Substances detrimental to bond. Any ridges
and concrete irregularities shall be ground smooth.
2. All shrinkage, cold pour joints and non-moving structural cracks should be pre-treated as per
F3.2
INSTALLATION
Coating shall be applied as per manufacturers instructions, to a minimum thickness of 1.7 mm unless
shown otherwise in drawings or indicated in the bill of quantities.
G.
PODIUM DECKS, LANDSCAPE AREA ABOVE BASEMENT SLAB, PLANTERS BOX, SWIMMING
POOL WALL & FLOOR AND INVERTED ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
G1
GENERAL
G1.1
The waterproofing system shall be an elastomeric cold spray applied system based on methacrylate
resins. The membrane system should comprise a primer and two separately applied coats of
membrane in contrasting colours. The waterproofing system shall have a current BBA certificate for
tanking and roofing applications. The waterproofing system shall not require protection boards or any
screeds to falls and will have a proven track record in providing Class 1 Water tightness in accordance
with BS8102 for landscaped areas. The waterproofing system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001
approved manufacturer and shall be applied by an Authorized, trained Contractor.
.
G1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and approved
by the manufacturer of the waterproofing.
G1.3

Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice that the
installation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofing Subcontractor
and by himself. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have been
carried out to the Engineers approval.
G1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Product data: Submit manufacturers specifications, installation instructions and recommendations for
waterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
specified requirements.
2. Samples:
a. Submit cured film samples of waterproofing membrane.
b. Submit 3 samples of Anti Root Membrane
G1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
1. Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers.
136
Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturers recommended
temperature range.
G1.6
EXTENDED WARRANTY
1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate,
against faulty workmanship and materials.
G1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
1. Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and Penetrations work
is completed. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pinholing of membrane and to prevent
lack of bond of membrane to substrate. Protect works of others from damage due to work of this
Section.
G2
PRODUCTS
G2.1
MATERIALS
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
a) Primer PA1, PAR, PAR1UV or ZED S94 PRIMER from Striling Lloyd
The primer shall be compatible with the waterproofing membrane and will be recommended by the
manufacturer of the waterproofing system depending on the substrate material and the construction
design.
b) WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE based on Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) Resin INTERITANK
from Striling Lloyd
The membrane shall be a two component 100% reactive methacrylate waterproofing membrane
applied in two coats of contrasting colour. The membrane shall be cold applied using a proportioning
spray pump system. Each coat of membrane shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers
guidelines to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0mm in order to produce a minimum total membrane
dry film thickness of 2mm. Wet film Thickness checks will be carried out every 2m to ensure that the
correct thickness is being applied. One coat systems or two coat systems of the same colour will not
be accepted.
Where the system is to be fully bonded to the substrate, a minimum of 1 tensile adhesion test is to be
carried out every 50m prior to the application of the membrane.
Before application of the second coat the fully cured surface of the first coat shall be examined and
any visible defects made good in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines. Only after this
QA/QC inspection is completed may the second coat, of a contrasting colour, be applied. Following
the application of the second coat of membrane the membrane will be checked for pinholes by
performing electrical holiday detection tests over the full surface area of waterproofing.
The membrane shall have a current BBA Certificate for tanking and roofing applications for roofs with
zero falls. The membrane shall be able to demonstrate a 10 year track record of applications in the
Gulf region and a clear track record of successful waterproofing projects.
Membranes containing isocyanates shall not be permitted.
137
The density of the applied cured membrane must be greater or equal to 1.10g/cm 3.
Technical Characteristics
PROPERTY
Minimum Thickness
Elongation
Density of cured membrane
Tensile Adhesion
Strength
Water Vapour transmission

Tensile Strength
Tear Strength
Shore Hardness
TEST METHOD
As approved by the Engineer
BS903:A2:1995 (ISO37:1994);
ASTM D412
ASTM D792
BSEN 4624:2003
Concrete Substrate
Steel Substrate
PVC Substrate
ASTM E96-80 at 230 C
BS 903:A2:1995 (ISO 37:1994);
ASTM D412
BS ISO 34-1:2004
BS2782: Part 3 Method 365B: 1992
ISO 868: 1985
Water penetration
Approved Document C, Requirement

C2(a) Section 4.7 of the National
Building Regulations
Crack-Bridging
ASTM C1305
Chemical resistance:
- Anti-freeze (ethylene glycol)
- Calcium Chloride
- Diesel Fuel
- Gasoline
- Motor Oil
- Sodium Chloride
TRL Research Report 248
VALUE
2mm minimum
>80% -<170%
1.10g/cm
0.7 MPa
2.0 MPa
2.0 MPa
<4g/m2 /day
9MPa
60 N/mm
40 (Shore D)
Zero
3.2mm @ -100 C
Resistant
Resistant
Resistant
Resistant
Resistant
Resistant
Resistance to Chloride ion

penetration
ASTM C1202-05
Resistance to Chisel Impact
BE27, Appendix B Part C (v)

SNCF Taber Method
H22 Wheel 1000 cycles
ASTM D4833-07
No penetration
MOAT 27: 5.1.4
>5m Head
No puncture
Resistance to abrasion
Resistance to Puncture
Resistance to Hydrostatic
Pressure
Pass
<0.60g
>500N
138
G3
EXECUTION
G3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
Concrete substrates should be designed and built in accordance with BS8110: 1985. All new concrete
substrates should be a minimum of seven days old. A minimum U2 concrete finish as defined by the
UK Department of Transport is required. A non U2 finish may be over coated but higher consumption
rates may be required. The following requirements must still be adhered to:
All surfaces must be dry, and free from laitance, oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, friable
matter, moss and algae growth as well as any other dirt.
Where necessary mechanical surface preparation such as diamond grinding, vacuum blasting or grit
blasting can be performed to provide a laitance free substrate. All blowholes and voids are to be
repaired with an appropriate concrete repair material prior to application of the waterproofing system
Any steel substrates shall be prepared to Swedish Standard Sa2.5
For all other substrates the compatibility of the waterproofing system must be checked with the
manufacturer of the waterproofing system.
G4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
G4.1
Membrane manufacturers representative shall verify warranty requirements are achieved.
G4.2
Flood test membrane 24 hours minimum following completion of membrane installation and prior to
insulation installation.
G4.3
Restrict water runoff from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes. Flood
restricted area to depth for 24 hours.
G4.4
Repair any leaks which develop and retest.
G4.5
At completion of flood test, remove drain plugs.
G4.6
Coordinate inspection and testing activities described above with the Engineer.
G5
CLEANING
G5.1
Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning agent.

Remove masking protection, equipment, material, and debris from roof
139
SECTION 9A: CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM

1.0
Function:
1.1
2.0
3.0
The prepared deck/s shall be protected from water and chloride penetration by a multilayered, liquid resin coating system having a durable slip resistant finish, designed for use on
reinforced concrete car park decks.
Description:
2.1
The system shall provide a slip resistant, non-squeal finish which will be unaffected by UV
degradation, standing water and common spillages from parked vehicles.
2.2
The system shall be available in a range of contrasting coloured finishes that allow
differentiation between pedestrian, vehicular rotation, designated and general parking bins
(the layouts are to be as shown on the drawings).
2.3
The system shall have good resistance to wear and shall be capable of being repaired or
overlaid in the long-term future without removal of the existing layers.
2.4
The wearing course shall consist of a coloured liquid resin encapsulating slip resistant
aggregate applied in one coat at a minimum coverage rate of 1.7kg/m to provide a profiled
finish with a typical dry film thickness of 2.0mm.
Technical Performance:
3.1
Wheel Tracking Test
Result: Zero Erosion
(Scuffing test after 500 wheel passes requirement for Type 1 Site Category as defined in
HD28/94) BSDD184)
3.2
Tensile Adhesion (BS EN ISO 4624:2003)

Result >1Mpa and >Strength of concrete substrate
i.e. mode of failure is within the substrate
4.0
3.3
Drying aids: Remove minimum four days prior to test
3.4
Test for moisture content: To BS 8203, Annex A using an accurately calibrated hygrometer
3.5
Location of readings: Corners, along edges, and at various points over the test area.
3.6
Acceptability: Do not lay resin flooring until readings show 75% relative humidity or less.
3.7
Bond Strength of resin flooring to Test to BS 8204-6, clause 11.4 and BS EN 1542.
Substrate Preparation:
4.1
Damage and imperfections in the surface finish of the concrete substrate should be made
good using a rapid cure repair mortar that is compatible with the deck coating system. Both
materials shall be produced by the same manufacturer. The repair mortar shall be capable of
being laid to a feather edge so as to reduce the additional preparation required and the
potential for inducing further micro cracking within the surrounding area, by breaking out
concrete during preparation.
4.2
Substrates must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of resin.
4.3
Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer.
4.4
Report: Submit.
4.5
Areas of noncompliance: Submit remedial proposals.
4.6
Chases/ Saw cuts: Cut/ break out at skirtings, free edges, movement joints, etc. for
termination of resin flooring.
4.7
Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Fill with repair product recommended by resin flooring
manufacturer.
Section 9A, Carpark Deck Coating System
140
5.0
6.0
7.0
4.8
Cleanliness: Remove surface contaminants, debris, dirt and dust.
4.9
Surface texture: Suitable to accept resin flooring and achieve a full bond over the complete
area.
4.10
The substrate must be prepared in strict accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations.
Application:
5.1
The system shall contain no bitumen, isocyanates or sensitisers and should present no risk to
the general public who may be in close proximity of the works.
5.2
The resin based wearing course shall be cold liquid applied and of a thixotropic nature to
ensure consistent thicknesses are achieved over all substrate irregularities.
5.3
The materials used must be based upon resin systems that do not react with moisture
although the substrate should be dry during application.
5.4
The system shall be moisture permeable and suitable for application onto both existing and
new concrete that is 14 days old, confirmed by the manufacturer.
5.5
All components/layers of the system shall be capable of being overcoated with the next layer
within two hours of application.
5.6
The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate that in order to maintain the system in the
long term without removal of existing material, all layers of the system will bond to the
previously laid material after any length of time with no detriment to the intercoat adhesion
achieved. This clause may not be set aside by the provision of temporary protection of the
works such as tenting.
5.7
After application of the completed system or any repairs the system shall be able to receive
vehicular traffic after 2 hours.
Quality Assurance:
6.1
All components of the system shall be supplied by a company that operates a quality system
registered to ISO9001:2000.
6.2
All materials must be supplied to site in unopened packaging, with batch numbers marked
and corresponding manufacturers certificates of conformity, and must be used within the
products shelf life or use by date.
6.3
Only contractors that are trained and authorized by the manufacturer may apply the system.
6.4
Site conditions should be regularly monitored to ensure the substrate is above the dew point
during application.
6.5
The adhesion of the system to the substrate must be assessed prior to application by random
spot testing to BS EN ISO 4624:2003 At least one test should be carried out per 50m2 subject
to a minimum of six tests per deck. The sampling must include all variations in the concrete
finish. A minimum tensile adhesion value of 1.0 N/mm2 should be achieved, with all results,
including the mode of failure, recorded for inspection by the Engineer.
6.6
Coverage rates and applied coating thickness must be monitored and recorded for each days
production together with material batch numbers, ready for inspection by the Engineer if
requested.
WARRANTY
7.1
8.0
7.2
Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete coating system of the
car parking deck.
Warranty shall be signed by the System supplier, applicator and Main contractor agreeing to
repair or replace defects in material and workmanship and failure of parking deck system for a
period of twenty years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.
7.3
The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.
System:
141
A.
CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM NOT EXPOSED TO UV

Aromatic Polyurethene Car Park Decking System Deckshield ID
8.1
Substrate: In-situ concrete with laser guided leveler, Isocrete Isopol SBR or Isocrete K-Screed
HDP.
8.2
Manufacturer: Flowcrete Middle East FZCO, The Flooring Technology Centre, Suite 1806,
JAFZA VIEWS 19, Jebel Ali, Dubai, UAE. Telephone: +971 4886 4728. Fax: +971 4886 4582.
8.3
Contact: Vik Vithlani Sales Director (+971 507081421)
8.4
E-mail: uae@flowcrete.com Web: www.flowcrete.ae
8.5
Primer reference: Deckshield SF primer with
8.6
Resin flooring reference: Deckshield ID.
8.7
Application: 1.5mm.
8.8
Colour: To Architects / Engineers / Clients Selection
8.9
Surface finish/ treatment: Deckshield SF fully blinded with quartz aggregate, broadcast into
the wet Deckshield SF. 1 x coat of Deckshield Finish.
8.10
Flatness/ Surface regularity:
8.11
Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
8.12
Classification of surface regularity to BS 8204-6: SR2
9.0
System:
B.
CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM EXPOSED TO UV

Aliphatic Polyurethene Car Park Decking System Deckshield ES
9.1
Substrate: In-situ concrete with laser guided leveler, Isocrete Isopol SBR or Isocrete K-Screed
HDP.
9.2
Manufacturer: Flowcrete Middle East FZCO, The Flooring Technology Centre, Suite 1806,
JAFZA VIEWS 19, Jebel Ali, Dubai, UAE. Telephone: +971 4886 4728. Fax: +971 4886 4582.
9.3
Contact: Vik Vithlani Sales Director (+971 507081421)
9.4
E-mail: uae@flowcrete.com Web: www.flowcrete.ae
9.5
Primer reference: Deckshield SF primer with
9.6
Resin flooring reference: Deckshield ES.
9.7
Application: 2mm.
9.8
Colour: To Architects / Engineers / Clients Selection
9.9
Surface finish/ treatment: Deckshield SF Primer, Deckshield Elastomeric Membrane,

Deckshield SF Bodycoat fully blinded with quartz aggregate, broadcast into the wet
Deckshield SF. Vacum excess quartz and apply Deckshield Finish and Deckshield UV Top
Coat.
9.10
Flatness/ Surface regularity:
9.11
Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
9.12
Classification of surface regularity to BS 8204-6: SR2
142
SECTION 9B: CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

A.
INTEGRAL-CRYSTALLINE-WATERPROOFING-OF-CONCRETE-ADMIXTURE
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.1.1.
Section Includes: Furnishing of all materials, services, application instructions, testing

guidelines, quality control requirements and supervision necessary for the supply and
installation of crystalline integral waterproofing admixture to concrete structures as
indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. The crystalline waterproofing
admixture shall be added to the concrete mixture at the time of batching and the concrete
shall be designed, batched, placed, finished and cured in accordance with the guidelines
set out by the American Concrete Institute and the instructions of the manufacturer.
1.1.2.
Related Section:
a) Section 4 - Concrete
b) Section 9 Waterproofing
1.2
References:
1.2.1.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
1.3
Applicable Standards: The following standards may be referenced.
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting; 1999.

ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting; 1988.
ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; 1992 (Reapproved 1997).
ASTM C 39/C 39M Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1999.
ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 1998a.
ASTM C 666 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and
Thawing; 1997.
BS 5075-2: 1998 Concrete Admixtures: Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures.
ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection
of Materials Used in Construction; 1998a.
COE CRD-C 48 Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
AASHTO T277 Standard Method to Test for Rapid Determination of Chloride Permeability
of Concrete.
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a.
BS 12390-8 Testing Hardened Concrete Depth of Water Penetration under Pressure.
System Description
1.3.1.
Crystalline Integral Concrete Waterproofing Admixture System: The admixture must

be a Permeability Reducing Admixture for Hydrostatic Conditions (PRAH) as indicated by
ACI 212.3R-10. The admixture is a dry chemical admixture supplied in sealed plastic
buckets and/or in disintegrating paper bags. The admixture will initiate and promote the
growth of long, narrow crystal structures sufficient to fill and block capillary pores and
micro cracks within the concrete in order to prevent the passage of water. The admixture
must remain available within the hardened concrete and must react to any future
presence of water to self-seal minor cracking that may occur in the future.
Section 9B, Crystalline Waterproofing System
143
1.3.2.
1.4
Additional System Requirements include construction joint details, penetration details,

water stops and remedial waterproofing steps.
System Performance Requirements
1.4.1.
Permeability: The coefficient of permeability for admixture treated concrete will be

reduced by a minimum of 70% compared to untreated concrete when tested using BS EN
12390-8 at 150 psi of pressure for 96 hours (Taywood- Valenta Method, ACI 212.3R-10).
1.4.2.
Permeability: No passage of water through treated samples when exposed to a vertical

water head equal to 140 meters (460 feet).
1.4.3.
Compressive Strength: Treated concrete must have compressive strength equal or

higher than plain concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days
and at one year.
1.4.4.
Drying Shrinkage: Minimum 20% reduced drying shrinkage for treated concrete
compared to untreated concrete when tested according to ASTM C157 or equivalent.
1.4.5.
Self-Sealing: Autogenous crack sealing of treated concrete for cracks with width of up to
0.5mm (0.02 inches) or greater; verified by independent testing.
1.4.6.
Chemical Resistance: Minimum 20% less weight loss compared to untreated specimen
after exposure to 5% sulfuric acid for 70 days.
1.4.7.
Carbonation Resistance: No increase in rate of carbonation compared to untreated

concrete when exposed to a 4% carbon dioxide atmosphere for 28 days.
1.4.8.
Sulfate Resistance: Improved resistance to sulfate attack compared to untreated

concrete when tested to the US Bureau of Reclamation Accelerated Method.
1.4.9.
Potable Water Contact Approval: Certified by NSF to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Drinking

Water System Components - Health Effects for use in structures holding potable water.
1.4.10. History: The waterproofing admixture must have demonstrated success in similar
applications that are no less than 15 years old.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1.General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and with
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
1.6
1.5.2.
Product Data: Submit Technical Data Sheets, the KIM Best Practices Guide and
Application Instructions including all instructions relating to jointing and penetration
details.
1.5.3.
Test Reports: Submit, for acceptance, complete test reports from approved independent
testing laboratories certifying that waterproofing system meets the performance and
testing requirements specified herein.
1.5.4.
Project References: Provide case study documents demonstrating successful

applications of the waterproofing admixture in similar projects over a period of no less
than 15 years.
Quality Assurance
1.6.1.
The waterproofing admixture shall comply with CAN/CSA A266 1-M in the latest
addition as both a WR type water reducing admixture and optionally as an air entraining
144
admixture and with ASTM C494 and as a Type D, water reducing and set retarding
admixture.
1.6.2.
Waterproofing admixture to be certified by the International Code Council (ICC) as a

Chemical Admixture Used in Concrete (AC198).
1.6.3.
Waterproofing admixture must be certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Drinking Water

System Components Health Effects
1.6.4.
Waterproofing admixture must bear a CE mark and conform to the performance and
quality requirements of EN 934- 2:2001.
1.6.5.
Waterproofing admixture shall hold a valid Agreement Certificate from the British Board
of Agreement.
1.6.6.
Waterproofing admixture shall hold a valid Appraisal certificate from BRANZ Limited.
1.6.7.
A meeting of involved parties must be held prior to installation. This meeting will clarify
procedures, roles and responsibilities among the parties. This meeting requires the
presence of representatives from the manufacturer, owner, concrete supplier, consulting
engineer/architect and all involved contractors.
1.6.8.
The concrete supplier shall conduct laboratory and field trials as necessary to
successfully incorporate the waterproofing admixture into their concrete mixture. Follow
the manufacturers testing guidelines.
1.6.9.
All parties shall follow the manufacturers written instructions as contained in the KIM
Best Practices Guide, published by the manufacturer.
1.6.10. All parties shall follow the manufacturers written instructions as contained in the
Application Instructions, published by the manufacturer.
1.6.11. All waterproofing system components shall bear a traceable manufacturers lot number.
1.7
1.8
Delivery, Storage And Handling
1.7.1.
Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened packages bearing the

complete product label and lot number.
1.7.2.
Storage: Store materials in a warm and dry location. Protect from humidity or moisture
contamination at all times.
1.7.3.
Handling: Observe all occupational health and safety requirements. Read and follow the
Material Safety Data Sheet for each product. Conform to all local regulations.
Warranty
1.8.1.
Provide 25-year manufacturers limited standard material warranty for the waterproofing
admixture.
1.8.2.
Provide 10-year manufacturers limited labor and material performance warranty for the
waterproofing admixture system. (additional service costs are applicable to this option)
145
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
Kryton International Inc.

1645 Kent Ave. NE
Vancouver, BC, Canada
www.kryton.com
T: 1.604.324.8280
TF: 800.267.8280
Fax: 1.604.324.8899
Email: info@kryton.com
2.1.2.Acceptable Applicator:
Crystalline Water Proofing Trading LLC.
PO Box91280, Abu Dhabi UAE
www.crystallineuae.com
T: +9712 5503364
F: +9712 5598256
Email: info@crystallineuae.com
2.1.3.
Acceptable Products:
1. Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM)
2. Krystol Waterstop Grout
3. Krystol Waterstop Treatment
2.2
2.1.4.
Substitutions: Substitutions are not permitted.
2.1.5.
Source Quality: Obtain all crystalline integral waterproofing products from a single
manufacturer.
Dosage
2.2.1.
3.0
Dosage of the waterproofing admixture shall be at 2% by mass of all cementitious

content of the concrete up to a maximum of 8kg/m3 (13.5 lb. / cu. yd.).
EXECUTIONS
3.1
3.2
General
3.1.1.
Safety: Comply with local regulations for health and safety. Read and observe all
precautions contains in the Material Safety Data Sheets for the products.
3.1.2.
Compliance: Follow all of the manufacturers written Application Instructions.
Project Conditions
3.2.1.
Structural Design: The concrete structure shall be designed to meet local building codes
and in addition shall be designed to minimize and control any occurrence of cracks within
the concrete mass. Follow ACI 224.R and ACI 301 regarding the placement of
reinforcement and crack control joints.
146
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.2.2.
Scheduling: Trial mixes conducted prior to the project start shall have determined
workability and setting times and strength development. This data shall be used to plan
appropriate schedules for placing, finishing and removal of formwork.
3.2.3.
Weather Conditions: For mixing, transporting and placing concrete under conditions of
high temperature or low temperature, follow concrete practices as referred to in ACI
305R-77 (Hot Weather Concreting) and ACI 306R-78 (Cold Weather Concreting)
respectively. For flatwork being placed in hot, dry or windy conditions, surface humidity
must be maintained by fogging or use of monomolecular film (evaporation retardant).
Concrete Batching & Mixing

3.3.1.
KIM admixture shall be added to the concrete at the time of batching at a concrete plant
that is acceptable to the manufacturer. Dosage shall be properly supervised and a record
kept of quantities and lot numbers.
3.3.2.
Concrete shall be batched following the approved mix design as determined through prior
3
trials. Content of cementing materials shall not be less than 300 kg /m (500 lb. / cu. yd).
Water content shall be kept to within the specified water to cementing material ratio and
this ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
3.3.3.
KIM admixture shall be added to the dry ingredients prior to batching and if this is not
possible, KIM should be added prior to the addition of other admixtures. Do not mix KIM
with other admixtures prior to addition. Add KIM separately from other admixtures.
3.3.4.
Allow KIM to thoroughly mix at medium/high speed for 1 minute per cubic meter/yard in
the batch and a minimum of 3 minutes. Place and finish in accordance with ACI
guidelines. If possible, hold back a portion of super plasticizer during the initial batching
and add the held portion at the jobsite immediately before discharging.
Concrete Placing
3.4.1.
Place concrete promptly. KIM concrete will be expected to perform as a waterproof

membrane. Therefore, superior consolidation is required. Follow ACI Guideline 309R for
properly consolidating concrete with special attention given to joint locations.
3.4.2.
Shotcrete: Shotcrete shall be placed by an ACI certified nozzleman in accordance with

ACI 506R Guide to Shotcrete.
Curing
3.5.1.
3.6
Curing is essential to reduce or eliminate shrinkage cracking: Wet cure concrete in

accordance with ACI 308 Guidelines. If wet curing is not possible, apply a curing
compound that meets ASTM C309.
Construction Joints, Penetrations And Tie-Holes

3.6.1.
Construction joints and control joints must be designed and spaced to isolate and control
shrinkage cracking following the guidelines in ACI 224.R and ACI 301. The locations of
joints must be indicated on the project drawings and be acceptable to the
architect/engineer.
3.6.2.
The Krystol Waterstop System, consisting of Krystol Waterstop Grout and Krystol
Waterstop Treatment, shall be installed in all non-moving construction joints and
shrinkage control joints according to Application Instructions 4.11 to 4.22 Use of
Krystol Waterstop System, as applicable.
147
3.7
3.8
3.6.3.
All pipe penetrations shall be treated as per the admixture manufacturers

recommendations. Application Instruction 5.32 Waterproofing Pipe Penetrations
(Existing Construction).
3.6.4.
After completion of pour, all tie-holes shall be treated as per the admixture
manufacturers recommendations. Application Instruction 5.31 Waterproofing Tie
Holes and Concrete Defects.
Field Quality Control

3.7.1.
Examination for Defects: Do not conceal KIM concrete before it has been observed by a
manufacturers representative and other designated entities. Concrete shall be examined
for structural defects such as faulty construction joints, cold joints and cracks. Such
defects to be repaired in accordance with manufacturers repair procedures.
3.7.2.
Observance of Leaks: Leaks that occur through well consolidated concrete or tight
cracks will self-seal within a few days or weeks. Leaks that occur through poorly
consolidated concrete or large cracks must be repaired in accordance with the
manufacturers repair instructions.
Interaction With Other Materials

3.8.1.
3.9
Backfilling: Normal backfilling procedures may be used after concrete has been cured for
at least seven days. If backfill takes place within seven days after concrete placement,
then backfill material shall be moist so as not to draw moisture from the concrete. In no
event shall backfilling take place before concrete has gained sufficient strength to
withstand the applied load.
Description:
3.9.1.
The system shall provide a slip resistant, non-squeal finish which will be unaffected by
UV degradation, standing water and common spillages from parked vehicles.
3.9.2.
The system shall be available in a range of contrasting coloured finishes that allow
differentiation between pedestrian, vehicular rotation, designated and general parking
bins (the layouts are to be as shown on the drawings).
3.9.3.
The system shall have good resistance to wear and shall be capable of being repaired or
overlaid in the long-term future without removal of the existing layers.
3.9.4.
The wearing course shall consist of a coloured liquid resin encapsulating slip resistant
aggregate applied in one coat at a minimum coverage rate of 1.7kg/m to provide a
profiled finish with a typical dry film thickness of 2.0mm.
148
B.
CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERSTOP
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Section Includes
1.1.1.
Crystalline waterproofing joint system Provide Krystol Waterstop System consisting of

Krystol Waterstop Grout and Krystol Waterstop Treatment, for all non-moving
construction joints to provide waterproofing by growth and penetration of hydrophilic
crystals into the concrete.
1.1.2.
Provide all written materials and site services necessary to complete the installation as
herein specified.
Related Sections
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Edit to add or remove sections as required for the project.
1.2.1.
1.3
Section 4 Concrete
References
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required by the text of the edited specification.
1.4
1.5
1.3.1.
COE CRD-C 48 Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
1.3.2.
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a.
Submittals
1.4.1.
Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery of the materials a copy of the

manufacturers certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements specified, shall
be submitted to and approved by the contracting officer.
1.4.2.
Product Literature: Manufacturers descriptive product literature shall be submitted and

shall consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and installation
instructions.
1.4.3.
Certified Laboratory Test Reports: Before delivery of materials, copies of the reports of all
tests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved by
the contracting officer.
1.4.4.
Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that
the previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed for
this project.
1.4.5.
Training: Contractor shall advise manufacturers representative 2 weeks prior to

placement of jointing materials to ensure manufacturers representative can be available
on-site for application training.
1.4.6.
Shop Drawings: Show construction join types, layout and location.
1.4.7.
References: Product must have a history of over ten years of successful use and must be
accompanied by a list of job sites of a similar nature.
Quality Assurance
1.5.1.
Provide Krystol Waterstop System consisting of Krystol Waterstop Grout and Krystol
Waterstop Treatment manufactured by Kryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent Avenue,
Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel: 604.324.8280 or other licensed manufacturing facility.
149
1.6
1.7
1.5.2.
Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer approved by the manufacturer or by

a non-approved installer under direct supervision of a manufacturers representative or
an independent materials engineering company.
1.5.3.
Prior to installation, hold a meeting of all relevant parties required for successful
installation of waterproofing products to verify installation methods and warranty
requirements. Relevant parties may include the waterproofing installer, installers of
adjacent work or work penetrating waterproofing, manufacturers representative and
project engineer/architect.

1.6.1.
Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged packages bearing the

manufacturers name, brand designation and batch number.
1.6.2.
Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture.
Warranty
1.7.1.
2.0
Provide manufacturers standard warranty document authorized by manufacturers

representative for 25 year material warranty from date of substantial completion for
projects utilizing the Krystol Waterstop System in conjunction with concrete treated with
KIM waterproofing admixture.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Waterproof Joint System For Non-Moving Joints:

2.1.1.
System Components: The Krystol Waterstop System shall consist of the waterproofing
grout Krystol Waterstop Grout and waterproofing coating Krystol Waterstop Treatment
manufactured by Kryton International Inc. - located at: 1645 Kent Avenue East,
Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll Free Tel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax:
604.324.8899; Email: info@kryton.com; Web: www.kryton.com
2.1.2.
Krystol Waterstop Grout Internal (K-322i) shall be used for the internal installation
method. Application Instruction 4.11 Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints
(Internal Method).
2.1.3.
Krystol Waterstop Grout External (K-322x) shall be used for the external installation
method (Application Instruction 4.12 to 4.22 Use of Krystol Waterstop System).
2.1.4.
Internal jointing (completely encased in concrete) shall be color coded to allow for visual
inspection of application procedures prior to covering with concrete. Color coding shall be
as follows: Krystol Waterstop Grout = Red, Krystol Waterstop Treatment = Yellow. Color
coding is not required for External joint installation.
2.1.5.
Waterproofing materials shall consist of cement, quartz silica and active ingredients that
promote the growth of insoluble, hydrophilic hydration crystals within the concrete.
2.1.6.
Waterproofing materials shall not contain chlorides.
2.1.7.
Waterproofing materials shall not provide waterproofing by way of hydrophobic

ingredients such as oils, stearates, silanes, silicate salts or other hydrophobic treatment.
Manufacturer must certify in writing the absence of these materials. Krystol Waterstop
Grout shall be non-shrink, non-toxic, fast setting, contain hydrophilic crystal producing
chemicals, and when mixed with water and installed according to the manufacturers
written procedures withstand water pressure of 417 m (1250 ft.) of head pressure when
tested in accordance with USACE C48-92.
2.1.8.
Krystol Waterstop Treatment shall consist of a cementitious powder and hydrophilic
150
crystal producing chemicals that when mixed with water and installed according to the
manufacturers written procedures shall promote crystal growth and penetration to a
minimum depth of 10 cm (4 in.) in both directions from the coated surface.
2.1.9.
Adjacent concrete (slabs and walls) shall be waterproofed with KIM (Krystol Internal
Membrane) as per section 03305 and Application Instructions 1.11 to 1.22 Use of KIM
Admixture where applicable.
2.1.10. Obtain all crystalline waterproofing products from a single source.

2.1.11. Substitutions: Not permitted.
3.0
EXECUTIONS
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The waterstop details will vary depending on the joint profile, whether the joint
is subject to hydrostatic pressure, and whether the concrete is cast-in-place or shotcrete. The Krystol
Waterstop system is intended for static (non-moving) joints only. It is common to use the internal method,
Application Instruction 4.11 Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (Internal Method), for wall-toslab joints, and the external method, Application Instruction 4.12 Waterproofing Horizontal & Vertical
Construction Joints (External Method), for vertical joints. Specific instructions for the external method
when used with shotcrete are available in Application Instructions 4.21 and 4.22 Use of Krystol
Waterstop System. Modified versions of the external method are available for shrinkage control joints
(Application Instruction 4.14 Waterproofing Horizontal & Vertical Control Joints) and joints not subject
to hydrostatic pressure, Application Instruction 4.13 Dampproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (1Step Method). Joints in suspended slabs are vulnerable to movement and should be kept watertight using
a flexible sealant following the procedure in Application Instruction 4.31 Waterproofing Suspended
Slab Joints. Additional information about specifying the best joint details is available at www.kryton.com
or from your Kryton representative.
3.1
3.2
Examination And Surface Preparation

3.1.1.
Safety precautions shall conform to the manufacturers MSDS and all local regulations.
3.1.2.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.1.3.
Concrete surfaces to receive waterstop material must be clean and free of contaminates
or debris. Remove from laitance, oils, curing agents, sealers and all foreign material from
surfaces to be treated. Use a chipping hammer or scrabbler to remove all loose or
protruding aggregates. Some exposed aggregate is ideal.
3.1.4.
Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting, then remove all standing water so
the surface is only slightly damp (saturated-surface-dry or SSD). Re-saturate surfaces
prior to installing each component of the Krystol
3.1.5.
Waterstop System.
3.1.6.
Strictly follow manufacturers published procedures for mixing, application and curing of
waterproofing products.
Installation
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The use of Internal or External installation will depend on the
design of the joint as described below. Note that Waterstop Grout Internal (K-322i) and Waterstop
Grout External (K-322x) are separate products and are not interchangeable. For detailed
installation procedures, consult Application Instruction 4.11 to 4.31 Use of Krystol Waterstop
System.
151
3.2.1.
Internal Installation For Wall-To-Slab Joints Subject To Hydrostatic Pressure:
A. The Krystol Waterstop System shall be mixed and installed in all horizontal non-moving
construction joints subject to hydrostatic pressure according to Kryton Application
Instruction 4.11 Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (Internal Method).
B. Apply Krystol Waterstop Grout (K322i) in center of joint area in a triangular strip. If
reinforcing bar is present, install as close to the center and possible.
C. Place plastic grout with 50 mm (2 in.) margin trowel, then use Kryton Triangle Trowel or
similar tool to from a continuous triangular line of grout.
D. The triangular line of Krystol Waterstop Grout shall have a base of 50 mm (2 in.) and a
height of 30 mm (1.25 in.) with uniformly angled sides. Ensure that the clearance around
the grout triangle is sufficient to allow for proper consolidation of concrete around the
joint. Recommended clearance is 150% of the largest nominal aggregate size in the
concrete. Ensure a minimum of 50mm (2 in.) cover between the Krystol Waterstop Grout
and the exterior of the concrete wall. Product usage is 15 m (50 ft.) of installed material
per 25 kg (55 lb.) pail.
E. Apply a coating of Krystol Waterstop Treatment after the Krystol Waterstop Grout has
reached sufficient strength not to be damaged by application of Krystol Waterstop
Treatment. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment with a stiff bristled brush employing a
circular, scrubbing motion to achieve maximum contact and penetration.
F. Spreading rate of the Krystol Waterstop Treatment is 1 kg/m2 or 0.2 lb./sq. ft. (3 lineal
meters per 1 kg for a 30 cm wide coating or 10 lineal feet per 2.2 lb. for 12 in. joint).
Krystol Waterstop Treatment shall be applied to the entire width of the joint and cover the
previously installed Krystol Waterstop Grout.
G. Forms may be closed immediately after inspection. Protect the completed Krystol
Waterstop System from rain, freezing or rapid evaporation for a minimum of 12 hours or
until covered by concrete.
3.2.2.
External Installation For Wall-To-Wall, Slab-To-Slab And Slab-To-Wall Joints Subject To

Hydrostatic Pressure
A. Krystol Waterstop Treatment:

1. The Krystol Waterstop System shall be mixed and installed in all non-moving
construction joints subject to hydrostatic pressure according to Application Instruction
2.12 Waterproofing with Surface Application (Spray Method) and Application
Instructions 4.12 and 4.21 Use of Krystol Waterstop System.
2. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment to the entire contact area where the two pours will
meet. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment with a stiff bristled brush employing a
2
3. Spreading rate for Krystol Waterstop Treatment is 1 kg/m or 0.2 lb./sq. ft. (3 lineal
4. Protect application from rain, freezing conditions and rapid evaporation.
B. Krystol Waterstop Grout
1. Form a keyway to intersect the joints. A suitable keyway may be made from a
dressed 40 by 40 by trimming one edge so it tapers to 30 mm (2 x 2 in. tapered to
1.25 in.). Do not use release agents on the keyway form.
2. Attach keyway to formwork, or for slabs and shotcrete, press the keyway into the
concrete/shotcrete while it is still slightly plastic.
3. Remove keyway forms from the hardened concrete.
4. The keyway must be clean and of free of release agents, debris and laitance. Soak
the keyway to a saturated surface- dry (SSD) condition. Do not leave standing water.
152
5. Pack keyway with Krystol Waterstop Grout (K-322x) as per manufacturers written
procedures. Usage is 7.5 m (25 ft.) of installed material per 25 kg (55 lb.) pail.
6. Protect the application from rain, freezing conditions and rapid evaporation for 48
hours.
3.2.3.
External Application For Shrinkage Control Joints
A. The Krystol Waterstop System will be installed at all shrinkage control joints according to
Application Instruction 4.14 Waterproofing Horizontal & Vertical Control Joints.
B. Create a crack inducing plane of weakness at all shrinkage control joint locations shown
on the drawings.
1. Form a keyway at the joint location. A suitable keyway may be made from a dressed
40 by 40 by trimming one edge so it tapers to 30 mm (2 x 2 in. tapered to 1.25 in.).
Do not use release agents on the keyway form.
2. Install a keyway on each side of the form at the joint location. For blind side walls,
substitute a crack inducing PVC waterstop (Greenstreak #639 or similar) for the
keyway on the blind side of the form.
3. Remove keyway forms from hardened concrete.
4. Keyway must be clean and of free of release agents, debris and laitance. Soak
keyway to saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. Do not leave standing water.
5. Pack keyway with Krystol Waterstop Grout (K-322x) as per manufacturers written
procedures only if there is no active leakage. Usage is 7.5 m (25 ft.) installed material
per 25 kg (55 lb.) pail. Consult the manufacturer for procedures to repair leaking
joints.
6. Protect the application from rain, freezing conditions and rapid evaporation for 48
hours.
3.2.4.
A.
Damproofing Of Joints Not Subject To Hydrostatic Pressure

Krystol Waterstop Treatment:
1. The Krystol Waterstop System shall be mixed and installed in all non-moving
construction joints not subject to hydrostatic pressure according to Application
Instruction 4.13 Dampproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (1-Step Method).
2. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment to the entire contact area where the two pours will
meet. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment with a stiff bristled brush employing a
3. Spreading rate for Krystol Waterstop Treatment is 1 kg/m2 (0.2 lb./sq. ft.) (3 lineal
4. Protect application from rain, freezing conditions and rapid evaporation for a
minimum of 12 hours or until covered by concrete.
3.3
Field Quality Control

3.3.1.
Do not cover the Krystol Waterstop System with concrete until it has been observed by
manufacturers field representative or Architect/Engineer.
3.3.2.
Inspection in two stages:
153
1. Following the installation of Krystol Waterstop Grout, an inspector shall visually inspect
the application to verify the presence of the red triangular strip in the correct location
and proper dimensions.
2. Following the installation of Krystol Waterstop Treatment, an inspector shall visually
inspect the application to verify the presence of the gold slurry coat covering the entire
contact area of the joint including the previously installed triangle of Grout.
3.3.3.
If a two stage inspection is not possible, a single inspection shall verify the presence of
the gold slurry of Krystol Waterstop Treatment which shall cover the entire contact area
of the joint. At or near the center of the joint shall be a raised triangle with the proper
dimensions for Krystol Waterstop Grout. A small section of the gold treatment may be
removed from the triangle to verify the presence of red grout underneath.
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Not all applications will be possible or relevant to water test.
Measure change in water level to determine if leaks exist if leaks cannot be directly
observed. Delete this section of not required.
3.3.4.
Where applicable, water test structures capable of holding water for 24 hours after
conclusion of curing period. Repair identified leaks and repeat water testing until structure
is watertight.
154
C.
DURABILITY ENHANCING
MASONRY UNITS
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
ADMIXTURE
FOR
MASONRY
MORTAR
&
CONCRETE
Section Includes
1.1.1.
Durability enhancing admixture Provide KMA, a specially formulated crystalline and

water repellent admixture that when added to the plastic mix will provide long-term
protection in cementitious mortar by reducing both permeability and absorption.
1.1.2.
Provide all written materials, mortar mix design and site services necessary to complete
the installation as herein specified.
Related Sections
1.2.1. Section 8 Masonry
1.3
References
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required for the final specification.
1.4
1.5
1.3.1.
ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
1.3.2.
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements & Specification for Masonry Structures and Related
Commentaries
1.3.3.
BS EN 480-5 Admixtures for Concrete, Mortar and Grout
1.3.4.
DIN 1048 Part 5 Testing concrete; testing of hardened concrete
1.3.5.
ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; 1992 (Reapproved 1997).
Submittals
1.4.1.

manufacturers certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements specified, shall
be submitted to and approved by the contracting officer.
1.4.2.
Product Literature: Manufacturers descriptive product literature shall be submitted and

shall consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and instructions
for additive addition.
1.4.3.
tests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved by
the contracting officer.
1.4.4.
Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that
the previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed for
this project.
Quality Assurance
1.5.1.
Provide KMA, admixture for masonry mortar & concrete masonry units manufactured by
Kryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent Avenue, Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel:
604.324.8280 or other licensed manufacturing facility.
155
1.5.2.
1.6
1.7

1.6.1.

1.6.2.
Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture.
Warranty
1.7.1.
2.0
Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer. Follow ASTM C270 Standard

Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry or ACI 530 Building Code Requirements &
Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries, or where applicable an
international equivalent.
Provide manufacturers limited product warranty document.
PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Mortar Dampproofing System

2.1.1.
System Components: The system shall consist of the crystalline and water repellent
chemical admixture, Krystol Mortar Admixture (KMA) manufactured by Kryton
International Inc. - located at: 1645 East Kent Avenue, Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll Free
Tel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax: 604.324.8899 or other licensed
manufacturing facility.
2.1.2.
Admixture shall consist of quartz silica, hydrophilic chemicals, and water-repellent

chemicals which promote the growth of insoluble hydration crystals within the mortar to
reduce both permeability and water absorption.
2.1.3.
The protection admixture shall not contain chlorides.
2.1.4.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
Materials
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The mortar should be specified in accordance with standard

recommended practices for selecting proportions for mortar, following ASTM C270, or where
applicable an international equivalent.
2.2.1.
Admixture: KMA, proprietary compound consisting of quartz silica and active ingredients,
when properly added to mortar, shall produce mortar that complies with the following:
a) Water Absorption: 50% reduction in water absorption of KMA mortar compared to the
control when tested in accordance with BS EN 480-5 Admixtures for Concrete, Mortar
and Grout Test Methods Part 5: Determination of Capillary Absorption.
b) Water Reduction: 5% reduction in water demand of KMA mortar as compared to a control
mixture of equal workability when following ASTM C270.
c) Permeability: No measurable leakage or dampness observed through KMA treated
mortar when tested in accordance with DIN 1048 Part 5 at a constant hydrostatic
pressure of 0.5 MPa (72.5 psi) for a period of 10 days.
2.2.2.
Notwithstanding other requirements, the mortar shall be cured and protected in

accordance with CSA A23.1-21.1.4, ACI 308-92 or where applicable an international
equivalent.
156
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Surface Preparation
3.1.1.
Safety precautions shall conform to the manufacturers MSDS, printed literature and all
current regulations.
3.1.2.
3.1.3.
Surfaces must be clean and free of oil, dirt, paint or other foreign material.
3.1.4.
Surface must be thoroughly soaked with clean water to a surface saturated dry condition
(SSD). Do not leave standing water.
Installation
3.2.1.
KMA shall be mixed according to Application Instruction 6.11 Protecting Masonry

Mortar
a) Dose KMA at 2% by weight of cement. When dosing on the jobsite, measure and add 1
liter (1 quart) of tightly packed KMA for each 40kg (88 lb.) bag of cement in your mortar
mix. Mix well. Reduce water if necessary.
b) Trial batches are strongly recommended to assess the local plastic and hardened
properties and to determine appropriate mix designs.
c) KMA can be added at any time during the batching process. However, the plastic
properties may vary with the time of addition depending on the mix proportions and site
conditions. Adjust the mixing sequence as necessary to optimize the mix for your
application. Allow KMA to thoroughly mix at medium/high speed for a minimum of 2
minutes or until the admixture is fully incorporated.
3.2.2.
Install mortar as normal
1. Install masonry mortar and masonry units as normal.

2. All site prepared mortar should be installed as soon as possible, but always within 1.5
hours after the original mixing.
3.2.3.
Moist cure mortar in accordance with CSA A23.1-21.1.4, ACI 308-92 or where applicable
an international equivalent.
1. Wet curing the mortar with a fog mist spray, sprinkler or wet burlap for 3 to 7 days is
recommended to achieve the full benefits of KMA.
2. Protect fresh applications from wind and direct sunlight.
3.3
Cleaning And Protection

3.3.1.
Protect masonry wall from damage during construction.
3.3.2.
Mortar must be cured a minimum of 28 days before applying paint or other coatings.
Surface preparation and application should follow guidelines supplied by the
paint/coatings manufacturer.
157
D.
CONCRETE RESTORATION AND PROTECTION
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Section Includes
1.1.1.
Concrete restoration and protection sytem Provide Hydrostop Restore & Protect Sytem
consisting of Hydrostop Grout, Hydrostop Coating, and Hydrostop Sealer, for restoration and
protection of above grade aging concrete.
1.1.2.
Provide all written materials and site services necessary to complete the installation as herein
specified.
Related Sections
1.2.1. Section 9 Waterproofing
1.2.2.
1.3
Section 4 Concrete
References
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required by the text of the edited specification.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.3.1.
ASTM D7234 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on
Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers.
1.3.2.
ASTM C1403 Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of Masonry Mortars
Submittals
1.4.1.

manufacturers certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements specified, shall be
submitted to and approved by the contracting officer.
1.4.2.
Product Literature: Manufacturers descriptive product literature shall be submitted and shall
consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and installation instructions.
1.4.3.
tests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved by the
contracting officer.
1.4.4.
Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the
previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed for this
project.
1.4.5.
Training: Contractor shall advise manufacturers representative 2 weeks prior to placement of

jointing materials to ensure manufacturers representative can be available on-site for
application training.
Quality Assurance
1.5.1.
Provide Hydrostop Restore & Protect System consisting of Hydrostop Grout, Hydrostop
Coating and Hydrostop Sealer, manufactured by Kryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent
Avenue, Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel: 604.324.8280.
1.5.2.
Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer acceptable to the manufacturer.

1.6.1.

158
1.6.2.
1.7
Warranty
1.7.1.
2.0
Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture. Do not store liquids at
temperatures below 4C (40F)
Provide manufacturers limited warranty document.
PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Concrete Restoration And Protection System

2.1.1.
System Components: The system shall consist of the waterproof repair grout, Hydrostop Grout,
the 2-part polymerized topping mortar, Hydrostop Coating, and the water-based water repellent
sealer, Hydrostop Sealer, all manufactured by Kryton International Inc. - located at: 1645 East
Kent Avenue, Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll Free Tel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax:
604.324.8899.
2.1.2.
Cementitious repair grout shall consist of cement, quartz silica and other hydrophilic chemicals
which promote the growth of insoluble hydration crystals within the concrete; 2-part topping
mortar shall consist of a powdered blend of cement, quartz silica and other special additives,
and a specialized liquid acrylic polymer; Water-repellent sealer shall consist of a unique waterbased blend of silane and siloxane compounds which chemically react with silicates below the
surface to produce a strong, water repellent effect.
2.1.3.
Obtain all restoration and protection products from a single source.
2.1.4.
Products shall contain no added chlorides.
2.1.5.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
Materials
2.2.1.
Concrete restoration and protection system: Hydrostop Restore & Protect System, the three
product system that repairs surface cracks and defects in concrete and creates a durable
barrier against water intrusion shall a substrate that complies with the following:
1.
2.
3.0
Pull Off Adhesion Strength: A pull off adhesion strength of 7 MPa (1,000 psi.) when
coated with Hydrostop Coating and tested in accordance with ASTM D7234 Standard
Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable
Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
Water Absorption Reduction: A water absorption reduction of 70% after 24 hours when
coated with Hydrostop Coating and Hydrostop Sealer and tested in accordance with
ASTM C1403 Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of Masonry
Mortars
EXECUTION
3.1
Examination And Surface Preparation

3.1.1.
The Hydrostop Restore & Protect System is intended for structurally sound, above grade aging
concrete.
3.1.2.
Safety precautions shall conform to the manufacturers MSDS and all local regulations.
3.1.3.
3.1.4.
Concrete surfaces must be clean and free of contaminates or debris. Remove dirt, organic
growth, oil, paint and other foreign material. High pressure water blasting is the preferred
cleaning method.
3.1.5.
Surface must be thoroughly soaked with clean water to a saturated-surface-dry condition

(SSD). Re-wet surface prior to installing Hydrostop Grout and Hydrostop Coating.
3.1.6.
Strictly follow manufacturers published procedures for mixing, application and curing of
products, as laid out in Application Instruction 8.11 Restoring Above Grade Concrete.
159
3.2
Installation
3.2.1.
Repair Damaged Areas and Cracks

A. Structural defects such as honeycombing, cracks, or holes should be routed out using a
sharp 25 mm (1 in.) wide chisel to a minimum depth of 13 mm (0.5 in). Use a vacuum if
necessary to remove dust, debris or water. Wash chase with water so that it is clean and
bring the concrete to an SSD condition.
B. Mix Hydrostop Grout with cool, clean water in the ratio of 1 part water to approximately 4
parts Hydrostop Grout. Fill in the chase or defect with Hydrostop Grout and strike off with a
trowel. Usage is 40 m (130 ft.) of crack repair per 18 kg pail.
C. Protect the freshly installed grout from wind and direct sunlight. Cure the repair by keeping it
damp for at least 24 hours. Cover with plastic or damp burlap to prevent water loss from
evaporation.
3.2.2.
Apply Hydrostop Coating

A. Hydrostop Coating comes supplied as a pre-measured kit. Shake Part B (liquid) and pour
the entire contents into a suitable mixing container. Slowly add the entire contents of part A
(powder) into the mixing bucket containing part B (liquid) while mixing with an electric drill
and paddle.
B. Ensure the concrete is in SSD condition and apply Hydrostop Coating to the concrete at a
2
rate of 1-2 kg/m (1.8 to 3.6 lb./sq. yd.) using a stiff bristle concrete brush, by spreading with
a push broom, or with a suitable sprayer designed for mortar or ceiling texture. Finish with
2
either the concrete brush or a trowel to desired texture. Usage is about 1 kit per 16.5 m
(180 sq. ft.).
C. Allow the coating to reach its initial set (4-5 hours) or until the coating feels set to the touch.
It is permissible for the coating to dry out during the initial setting period. After the initial set,
lightly dampen the surface with water and maintain moist curing conditions for a further 24
hours. Cover the coating with plastic or damp burlap as needed to maintain moisture levels.
*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* If applying paint over Hydrostop Coating, do not apply Hydrostop Sealer.
Cure Hydrostop coating for three days, and then allow the surface to dry. Follow the paint
manufacturers instructions for painting new concrete surfaces.
3.2.3.
Apply Hydrostop Sealer

A. Hydrostop Sealer comes supplied as a ready to use, sprayable liquid; no mixing is required.
B. Remove curing protection from the Hydrostop Coating and allow the surface to dry out until
no dark or damp areas remain.
C. Apply Hydrostop Sealer using a brush, roller, or low pressure spray equipment in a single
2
2
coat the rate of 7.4 m /L (300 sq. ft./gal.) or approximately 150 m (1,500 sq. ft.) per 18.9 L
(5 gal.) pail. Do not allow Hydrostop Sealer to pool on the surface; remove excess material
with a towel, sponge or roller before the surface dries.
D. Protect the surface from rain for 24 hours while water repellency develops.
END OF SECTION
160
SECTION 10: CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

1.0
1.1
CARPENTRY
Timber Generally
Timber shall comply in all respect with BS 881 and 589 : 1974 FOR Nomenclature of Commercial Timber,
including sources of supply and BS 1186 LATEST EDITION, Timber for and Workmanship in Joinery.
Sizes of timber shall be in accordance with BS 5450 (for hardwood) and BS 4471 (for soft wood)
Timber shall be of an approved variety and quality suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used and
equal to samples approved by the Engineer.
All timber shall be properly seasoned and shall be planed square, straight and true and shall be free from
the following defects :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Sapwood, splits, rings shakes, for pith.

Checks exceeding 300 mm in length.
Checks exceeding 6 mm in width.
Checks exceeding one quarter of the thickness of the timber in depth.
Knots of any description in surfaces for staining or polishing.
Knots of any description in glazing bars.
Knots exceeding one half the width of the surface.
Knots exceeding 20 mm mean in diameter.
Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged.
Loose knots or knot holes unless cut and plugged.
Pith pocket.
Decay and insect attack including pinworm holes,
All timber shall be treated with a wood preservative as per Cuprinol or approved equal.
In joined panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for staining or polishing shall have all
surfaces of the same species and same character of grain running in the same direction.
All plugs inserted after cutting out defects shall be the full depth of hole and the grain of the plug shall run
in the same direction as the grain of the piece.
Timber connectors where used shall be two single sided toothed plates (round or square) for permanent
joints to conform to BS 1579 LATEST EDITION.
Timber shown to be plugged to wall shall be properly and securely fixed by means of proprietary or
hardwood plugs cut on the twist.
Nails shall be in accordance with BS 1202, Steel Nails and screws shall conform to BS 1210, Wood
Screws of latest editions.
Timber to be used for each position of the works shall be as indicated on the drawings and as stated in
the Bills of Quantities. In general exposed joinery work shall be executed in first grade hardwood
obtained from an approved supplier.
Section 10, Carpentry, Joinery & Ironmongery
161
All ground and other timber to be built into concrete or block walls or otherwise covered shall first be
coated all over with approved wood preservative, suitable for the position in which the member is to be
incorporated.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Moisture Content
(i)
All timbers (softwood and hardwood) shall be kiln dried to a moisture content of 11% - 13%
(12% average) before transportation.
(ii)
Each batch shipped shall have accompanying documentation verifying this and any batch
without such documentation will be ejected.
Preservatives
(i)
When stated on the drawings/schedules treated timber shall mean timber treated with copper
chrome arsenate (CCA) fixed water-borne preservatives applied by
vacuum
pressure
impregnation in accordance with BS 4072.
(ii)
All softwood shall be treated as in Clause 1.3 (I) whether or not stated on
drawings/schedules.
(iii)
The Designer shall be informed of the firm undertaking the timber treatment and the
Contractor shall obtain from the firm a certificate of treatment for every consignment of timber
treated, which shall be re-submitted to the Engineer.
(iv)
Treatment shall be carried out after machining of timber except that brush or spray application
of the manufacturer's preservative, in two applications, to any
cutting or boring subsequent
to the initial treatment, will be carried out to the Engineer's approval.
(v)
All water borne preservative treatment shall be undertaken in good time for timber to dry out
before allowing the treated timber to contact any other materials or components.
Hardwood
(i)
All hardwood shall be in accordance with the requirement of BS 1186: Part 1 and BS 4047
and shall be of first quality, sorted and selected at time of fabrication for suitability of purpose
and to give a harmonious appearance to the approval of the Engineer.
(ii)
The species of hardwood shall be as indicated on the drawings/schedules.
(iii)
In addition to the requirement of Clause 1.1 (I) all hardwood shall show a straight and regular
grain throughout, shall have a consistent color in all locations and be free from knots on
exposed faces.
(iv)
Any hardwood showing visible imperfections will be rejected.
Softwood
(i)
All softwood shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186 Part 1.
(ii)
In addition to the requirements of Clause 1.1 (I) all softwood shall be free from pith showing
on the surface, sloping grain exceeding 1 in 8, checks and shakes, knots exceeding 25 mm
diameter, arrays and splay knots, decayed knots, or loose knots and knot holes.
(iii)
Softwood shall be one of the following :

Species(BS 881, 589: 1974)
Origin
________________________________________________________________
Whitewood/European spruce (Picea abies)
Europe
Scots pine/ Redwood (Pinus sylvestris)
Europe
(Douglas firBritish Colombian
162
pine (Pseudotsuga taxifolia)

1.6
Canada/USA
Plywood
Plywood shall consist of an odd number of plies arranged so that the grain of each layer is at right
angles to the grain of the adjacent layer or layers. The plies shall be hot pressed during adhesion and
shall have a finished thickness as shown on the drawings, or shall be prefinished plywood obtained
from an approved supplier.
In the case of plywood having 3 plies the core shall be not more than 60% of the total thickness.
In plywood having more than 3 plies the faces and all plies with the grain running in the same
direction as the faces shall have a combined thickness of between 40% and 65% of the total
thickness of the plywood.
The plywood shall be free from end joints (including scruff-joints in veneers), overlaps in core veneers,
dead knots, patches and plugs, open defects, depressions due to defects in core, insect attach
(except isolated pinworm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from discoloration
differing from that normally associated with species.
The Contract will not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing or otherwise fixing together sheets of
thinner previously formed plywood.
(i)
All plywood shall comply with the requirements of BS 6566 grade II and B on both faces and
shall be of Canadian or Finnish origin obtained from a manufacturer to be approved by the
Designer.
(ii)
Except where stated otherwise plywood shall be Exterior Grade WBP Bonding with synthetic
resin adhesives to BS 1203.
(iii)
Plywood shall be supplied by the manufacturer in the thickness as stated on the

drawings/schedules.
(iv)
Plywood shall be manufactured from hardwood and shall be free from end
joints,
(including joints in veneers) overlaps in core veneers, dead knots, patches
and plugs,
open defects, depressions due to defects in cure, insect attack (except isolated pinwork holes
through face veneers only), fungal attack and from discoloration differing from that normally
associated with species of timber used.
(v)
Face veneers shall be hard and durable and shall be capable of being finished to a smooth
surface to receive coatings.
Marine plywood shall be to BS 1088 and 4079 and of balanced construction.
(vi)
1.7
Blockboard and laminboard

Blockboard and laminboard shall be from an approved manufacturer and guaranteed not to wrap or
change in size or suffer any kind of deformation. It shall be of timber specified and glued with antiinsect synthetic resin waterproof glue all though. All strengthening boards shall be fixed during
manufacturer.
Blockboard and laminboard shall conform to the requirements of BS 3444, Blockboard and
Laminboard. Block board and Laminboard shall be free from defects as specified under Plywood.
1.8
Veneers
Timber for face veneer shall generally be first grade hardwood as indicated on the drawings and / or
in the Schedule of doors and obtained from an approved supplier.
The face veneers shall be hard, durable, and capable of being finished easily to a smooth surface.
They shall be free from knots, work and beetle holes, splits, dots, glue stains, filling and inlay of any
kind or other defects.
163
The face veneers shall be applied to one or both sides of wood panels as shown on the Drawings.
Where veneers are shown to be applied to one face only, the other side shall have a balancing veneer
applied to prevent warping.
Adhesives shall comply with the requirements of BS 1203, synthetic resin adhesives for plywood
(Phenolic and aminoplastic) and shall ensure proper adhesion between plies.
1.9
Plastic Laminate
The plastic laminate facings shall conform to BS 2572, Phenolic laminated sheet and shall be a
minimum 1.5 mm thick.
Color and pattern shall conform to the sample approved by the Engineer. Plastic laminate sheets
shall be applied with a waterproof, heat-resistant adhesive of a type recommended by the plastic
laminate manufacturer and applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Approved Products: Formica, Panelyte or Perstop.
1.10
1.11
1.12
Mechanical Fastenings and Fittings

(i)
Non-standard metal work used in cleats, brackets, straps etc and standard sections as
detailed in the drawings shall be from mild steel in accordance with Section K, Metalwork.
(ii)
All fastenings described below shall be of steel unless otherwise stated.
(iii)
All ferrous metalwork, nails, screws, bolts and other mechanical fastenings shall be protected
by galvanizing after manufacture in accordance with Section K, Metalwork or, where
appropriate the relevant British Standard for the item.
(iv)
Nails shall be high grip nails with annular ringed shank or helical threaded shank to
BS1202:Part 1
(v)
Screws shall be to BS 1210 or BS 1494
(vi)
Plain hexagon bolts shall be to BS 4190
(vii)
Washers, large diameter, shall be to BS 4320
(viii)
Expanding bolts shall be proprietary devices comprising corrosion resistant expanding insert
and removable bolt or threaded stud to suit the work being fixed, of a pattern and make to the
approval of the Engineer.
(ix)
Frame cramps shall be galvanized steel cramps of an approved pattern, shaped for building
in.
(x)
Timber connectors, where indicated on the drawings, shall be of the toothed plate type to BS
1579.
(xi)
All mechanical fastenings and fittings shall be adequately protected from corrosion and all
exposed bolts are to be capped with an approved dome headed nut.
Adhesives
(i)
Adhesives shall comply in all respects with BS 1204 and BS 5442 Part 3 and shall be used in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
(ii)
For joints in non-load bearing internal work and for joints in work where the moisture content
is always less than 16 per cent organic or casein glues may be used.
(iii)
For work under damp conditions (moisture content normally 20 per cent or more or conditions
liable to fungal attack) resin type adhesives shall be used.
Packaging, Delivery and Storage

(i)
All timber must be polythene wrapped at 12% moisture content prior to transportation.
164
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
1.13
Protection shall be such as to protect the timber against stain, discoloration and other surface
injuries during transportation and erection on site. Protection shall
be
of
such
composition that it may be easily removed when work is complete, without being harmful to
the surface of the timber.
The polythene shall be removed as soon as possible and the timber close stacked in the
shade, clear of the ground on leveled bearers in a manner that prevents sagging and permits
free air circulation.
When stored externally timber shall be covered during wet weather and uncovered during dry
weather.
Temporary covers should be kept from close contact with the timber.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, joinery that shall be finally fixed in an airconditioned environment shall be stored, immediately prior to fixing, in similar conditions to
those designed for that location and for a period sufficient to enable its acclimatization to that
environment.
Workmanship
(i)
Timber shall be sorted and selected at time of fabrication for suitability for purpose and its
function in the Works.
(ii)
The moisture content of timber shall be checked, before fixing, with a reliable, properly
calibrated meter and timber with a moisture content in excess of 2% above that specified shall
not be fixed.
(iii)
Timber shall be sawn truly square, straight and free from burrs.
(iv)
Joints shall be as shown on the drawings but where not specifically shown shall be the
recognized form of joint with regard to its location and such that they tighten under load, resist
tension as appropriate to their function and are without gaps or imperfections.
(v)
Loose joints shall be used where provision must be made for shrinkage or other movements
acting other than in the direction of the stresses of fixing or loading.
(vi)
All joints, arrises, recesses etc. shall be plumb, true and square.
(vii)
All units and members shall be installed such that they are truly plumb or
(viii)
The carpenter shall perform all necessary mortising, tensioning, grooving, matching, tonguing,
housing, rebating and all other works necessary for correct jointing.
(ix)
All metal plates, screws and other fixings that may be required or necessary for the proper
execution of the carpentry works shall be provided.
(x)
The carpenter shall also carry out all works necessary for the proper construction
framing, linings, etc., and for their support and fixing in the building.
(xi)
Nails, sprigs, etc shall be punched and puttied.
(xii)
Screw heads in work to be painted shall be countersunk and stopped.
(xiii)
Glued joints shall be used where provision need not be made for shrinkage or other movements
in the connections and where sealed joints are required.
(xiv)
Glued joints shall be cross-tongued or otherwise reinforced so as not to be wholly dependent

upon the adhesive.
(xv)
Surfaces to be glued shall be clean, free from dirt, dust, sawdust, oil and other contaminants
and shall have a good sawn or planed finish.
(xvi)
Adequate pressure shall be applied to glued joints to ensure intimate contact and shall be
maintained whilst the glue is setting.
(xvii)
Unless specific sizes are stated on the drawings/schedules screws shall be of a size and length
to suit pre-drilled holes in metalwork and the dimensions of the timber being fixed.
horizontal.
of
165
all
1.14
(xviii)
Screws shall be fully driven home and timber shall be pre-drilled where necessary.
(xix)
Screws fixed into masonry, concrete and blockwork shall be plugged using approved durable
proprietary fiber composition or plastic plugs of suitable size and length for the fixing and at
centers necessary to provide adequate support but not exceeding 600 mm.
(xx)
Masonry nails shall not be used for fixing timber to masonry, concrete or blockwork unless
approved by the Engineer.
(xxi)
Approved proprietary expanding masonry bolts/resin anchor bolts shall be used where shown
on the drawings, specified or instructed by the Engineer and shall be of a type, size and
strength suitable to their location and function and fixed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Inspection
Facilities shall be given to the Engineer for the inspection of all Joinery works in progress in the shops
and on the Site.
1.15
Making Good all Defects

Should any shrinkage or warping occur or any other defects appear in the Joinery work before the end
of the defects liability period, all defective work shall be taken down and renewed to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer and any work disturbed made good at the Contractors expense.
2.0
2.1
JOINERY
Timber Generally
Comply with Clause 1.1.
2.2
Moisture Content
Comply with Clause 1.2
2.3
Preservatives
(i)
Comply with Clause 1.3
(ii)
With regard to Clause 1.3(iii) specified treatment shall be carried out prior to assembly of pieces.
2.4
Hardwood
2.5
Softwood
Comply with Clause 1.5 except all softwood shall be free from knots exceeding 6 mm diameter.
2.6
Plywood
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
2.7

Face veneers shall closely match the general joinery timber unless described otherwise and
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to inclusion in the Works.
Plywood for joinery work shall be Grade 1 and A on both faces unless otherwise shown,
specified or approved.
Face Veneers
Teakwood face veneers shall be hard, durable and capable of being finished easily to a smooth
166
surface. They shall be free from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, glue stains, filling or inlaying of
any kind or defects.
2.8
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
2.9
Block board
Block board shall comply with BS 3444 and be manufactured by approved process with hardwood
veneers, minimum 3 mm thick, to both faces.
Clause 2.6 (ii) applies in respect of visible faces of blackboard.
Full sheets shall have edges lipped with matching hardwood 6 mm thick, the full thickness of the
sheet.
Decorative Laminated Plastic Sheet
(i)
Decorative plastic sheet shall be amino plastic faced phenolic resin laminated veneer to BS 3794
Class 1 or a comparable alternative to the Engineer's approval.
(ii)
The laminate shall be minimum 1.5 mm thick with decorative finish on one face only to the
manufacturer's standard color, pattern and texture as shown, specified or approved by the Engineer.
2.10
Adhesives
Adhesives shall comply with Clause 1.8
2.11
Doors
(i)
All timber doors shall be solid core type unless specified otherwise and to the size, thickness and
pattern as shown on the drawings/schedules.
(ii)
Timber for construction shall be as specified within this section.
(iii) Plywood for door facings shall comply with Clause 2.6, and shall not be less than 3 mm thick.
(iv) Plywood facing for painted finish shall be Grade 1 and A on one face.
(v)
Unless specified otherwise doors shall be hardwood lipped on all edges to the full width between
finished faces, minimum 15 mm thick.
(vi) Glazed apertures shall be in accordance with Section 13 and as detailed on the drawings and shall be
framed in hardwood to match edge lapwings with matching screw fixed beading.
(vii) Adhesives for facings and door construction shall comply in all respects with BS 1203, BS 1204 or BS
5442 Part 3 as appropriate.
(viii) When described as "fire check" or "fire resistant" doors and frame assemblies shall be constructed to
pass the fire tests described in BS 476 Part 20-22: 1987 for
the
periods
stated
on
the
drawings/schedules.
(ix) Where indicated on the drawings/schedules approved intumescent seals shall be let into grooves on
all edges of fire doors/frames fixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions
and to comply with Clause 2.10(vii).
2.12
Mechanical Fastenings
(i)
Mechanical fastenings shall comply with Clause 1.7(iii)
(ii)
Nails shall be to BS 1202 and shall be lost headed nails, suitable for stopping when used for
decorated work.
(iii)
Screws shall be to BS 1210 and shall be stainless steel or brass where specified.
(iv)
Cups screws shall be brass or stainless steel heavy pressed socket pattern.
2.13
Fittings
Materials and workmanship for metal, glass, etc, etc forming an integral part of joinery items shall
comply with the appropriate section of this specification.
2.14
(i)
Workmanship
Where Clause 1.10 is applicable to elements of joinery work the requirements of that clause shall be
167
complied with.
(ii)
Joinery shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186 part 2, and shall be accurately, properly and
soundly fabricated in a manufacturer's workshop.
(iii)
Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architraves, frames, glazing beads and the like shall be by
means of screws unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
(iv)
The terms "frame","framed" shall mean work put together by proper carpentry of joinery joints, such
as mortising and tensioning, dovetailing, doweling, etc, and the joints are to be as shown, specified or
directed.
(v)
Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and the like will not be deemed framed and will
not be accepted for framed work.
(vi)
Cutting of plywood and blackboard shall be neatly and accurately performed with fine tooth saws so
as to avoid splitting the face veneers, or intermediate plies.
(vii)
Where raw edges arise from cutting blackboard these shall be lipped with
factory-produced edges.
hardwood to match
(viii) Plastic laminate shall be fixed with an approved adhesive in accordance with BS 1203 and BS 1204
Part 1.
(ix)
Care shall be taken on fixing plastic laminates to eliminate all air from beneath the laminate and if air
is entrapped the portions and work so disfigured shall be removed and replaced.
(x)
After complete setting of the adhesive the plastic laminate shall be neatly beveled along all arises with
a plane.
(xi)
Where plastic laminate is fixed to doors or shelves, etc, without laminate to the outer edge, a raised
lipping is to be provided and the laminate finished flush against the lipping.
(xii)
Where blackboard and plywood are specified to have a laminated plastic sheet, a balancing veneer of
the same material and thickness shall be bonded to the back.
(xiii) Unless secret fixing is practicable or otherwise described clear finished hardwood shall be fixed using
non-ferrous or plated screws with heads let in and pelted with grain matched pellets of minimum 6 mm
thickness cut from the same timber.
(xiv) Built in fittings etc., are to be accurately constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings and
doors, drawers, etc. shall fit, and open and close smoothly and all work next to walls, floors and
ceilings or other fixed items shall be soundly fixed and scribed to fit snugly against same.
(xv)
Moldings shall be worked on the solid unless otherwise stated and shall be accurately worked to the
drawings.
(xvi) When circular work is shown on the drawings or specified it shall be built up with an appropriate
number of pieces, cut to the required shapes, which shall be put together in two or three thickness so
that they break joint, and shall be secured with hardwood keys and wedges or with hardwood pins,
whichever is more appropriate.
(xvii) Skirting, architraves, plates and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed to fit the contour of
any irregular surface against which they will be required to form a close butt connection.
(xviii) Doors shall be properly hung within frame/linings to give a uniform clearance.
(xix) Hardwood veneers shall be the species described or specified and shall be selected pieces free from
splits, dots, stains, insect and fungal attack or any other natural or man-made defects.
168
(xx)
Glass or synthetic fiber stitching will not be permitted for jointing veneer leaves together, and filling or
inlaying shall be avoided.
(xxi) All wood veneers shall be bonded to the core material with approved adhesives such that no lifting or
blistering shall occur.
(xxii) The method of construction must accommodate tolerances as shown on the drawings and allow for
ensuring that repetitive units can be accurately located in relation to grid lines or other setting out
points and that tolerance do not accumulate.
(xxiii) Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all junctions between joinery and the building carcass,
whether of masonry or frame construction, so that any irregularities or movement shall be adequately
accommodated.
(xxiv) All joinery shall be left finished smooth and clean by rubbing down by hand with fine glass paper.
(xxv) Should any joints or moving parts in joinery fit other than accurately and evenly or with acceptable
clearances or should any defect of timber become apparent, the joinery shall be repaired or replaced
as directed by the Engineer.
(xxvi) Pencil round all trafficked edges of boardwalk or bridge timbers.
3.0
IRONMONGERY
(i)
Ironmongery shall be of the pattern and finish as shown on the drawings/schedules or as specified
and obtained from approved manufacturer's delivered in protective packaging, clearly labeled and
stored in a secure store.
(ii)
Hinges and other items to be fixed flush with the timber shall be located within accurately formed
housings of suitable path.
(iii)
All Ironmongery shall be fitted firmly into its housing or surface mounted as appropriate with matching
screws or other fixings in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and to enable its
proper and easy operation.
(iv)
Where possible Ironmongery shall be fixed as a final operation or shall be removed and re-fixed as
necessary to facilitate decoration or other work.
The Ironmongery shall be kept carefully wrapped and protected until required and when fixed shall be
carefully protected against defacement by mortar and plaster droppings, paint splashes, smudges etc.
(v)
Where indicated on the drawings/schedules approved draught/dust seals shall be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
(vi)
All Ironmongery shall be properly eased, adjusted, lubricated and cleaned on completion and left in
good working order all to the Engineer's approval.
(vii)
Locks shall be suited as indicated on the drawings/schedules and all keys, with one duplicate shall be
adequately labeled and handed to the Engineer.
(viii) All Ironmongery unless otherwise specified shall be in solid polished brass obtained from an approved
supplier.
4.0
4.1
IRONMONGERY FOR TIMBER DOORS

General
The Contractor shall provide and fix the Ironmongery required by the specifications or shown on the
169
drawings complete, including all necessary screws, bolts, plugs and other fixings. The use of nails for
fixing Ironmongery will not be permitted. The Contractor shall hand over all work in a finished state
and to the satisfaction of the Designer. All Ironmongery shall be first quality, as described in the
Ironmongery Schedule.
The Contractor shall be required to submit for approval samples of all items of Ironmongery he
proposes to use for approval before ordering.
4.2
Finish
The finish of various items of Ironmongery shall be as shown on the drawing and described
Ironmongery Schedule.
4.3
in
the
Fitting and Testing

All screws used for fixing Ironmongery shall be of the correct type, material, finish, size and shape to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All Ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until completion of the work and any items
or parts which are damaged or defaced or found to be defective shall be replaced at the Contractor's
expense before handing over.
On completion of all locks, catches and similar items of Ironmongery, they shall be properly cleaned,
tested and oiled, and all keys shall be clearly labeled and securely fixed to the keys and handed to the
Engineer.
Door closures shall be fitted a maximum of two weeks before handover.
All floor and door springs are to be fully charged with oil and their operation checked to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.4
Keys and Master Keys

All locks are to be provided with 3 keys on a key ring neatly labeled.
(a)
Construction key set to operate lock sets during construction.
(b)
Grand master key set issued after work is completed. Initial use of this key shall automatically
cancel out the construction set.
(c)
Sub-master key set for separate buildings.
(d)
Operating key set including two key per lockset.
(e)
Steel wall mounted cabinet with a lock set for keeping the keys to prevent any unauthorized
opening of doors.
All keys shall be tagged, or otherwise marked, before delivery, with identification of the door for which
the lockset is intended.
As much as possible, all Ironmongery shall be the product of one manufacturer who maintains a fully
equipped plant with all necessary tools, fixtures, bondarizing and furnishing equipment, to perform the
requirements of this specification and manufacturing skill.
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of Ironmongery and manufacturer for the approval of the
Engineer before placing any supply order; The Engineers approval of such schedule shall not relieve
the Contractor from furnishing all items or ironmongery required under the Contract.
All lock cylinders shall differ.
4.5
Generally
On completion, check and adjust all Ironmongery, lubricating all moving parts as necessary to ensure
correct functioning.
On completion supply to the Consultant two copies of manufacturer's maintenance instructions for all
items for which these are published.
170
4.6
Fixing to Timber
(i)
Ensure that fore-end striking plates and face plates of "flush" fitted bolts, closures and the like are set
flush to line with the door face or edge.
(ii)
Ensure the rebates and mortises cut in timber to receive recessed fittings are cut in accordance with
the fitting manufacturer's instructions or to the minimum size to receive the fittings.
(iii)
Pre-bore holes for all screws. Fix to other surfaces in accordance with Ironmongery manufacturer's
recommendations.
4.7
Lock Schedules and Key List

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer 3 copies in a permanent form of a schedule listing lock
cylinder numbers, key numbers, lock suiting and door locations.
5.0
5.1
KITCHEN CABINETS
Scope
This specification covers the supply and installation of the kitchen cabinets with all necessary
accessories intended to be used for the works in accordance with the drawings, approved working
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.2
Cabinets Units
Kitchen cabinets shall be fabricated from Post Forming HPL Panel. The sheets shall matte finish with
properties of Wear resistant, Fire resistant, Anti Static etc. The above applications shall be done
in a factory fully equipped for the process and under controlled conditions.
The cabinet body; back, bottom, sides and top shall be made HPL Panel. Shutters shall be Post
Forming HPL Panel.
Drawer units shall be made of HPL panel fixed on sliding heavy-duty rails to bear a load of not less
than 30k kg from Blum Tandem Plus Blumotion concealed runners or equivalent. Handles shall be
Stainless Steel.
Hinges shall be heavy-duty spring loaded, self-closing, chrome plated from Blum or equivalent.
Worktops shall be of Granite (Black Absoluto) 30 mm thick rounded edges and shall be provided with
5 cm high back splash.
Sinks shall be of stainless steel of type and size as shown on the drawings. Sinks shall be provided
complete with all accessories, fittings and fixtures complete as chromium plated mixer taps, bottle
traps, chain, plug, waste stay, etc.
5.3
Working Drawings
Detailed working drawings for the design of the kitchen cabinets, based on these specifications and
drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to order. The drawings, when approved
by the Engineer, shall constitute an integral part of the Contract Documents.
5.4
Installation
The installation of the kitchen cabinets shall be carried out in accordance with the approved drawings
and the manufacturers written directions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.5
Built in Cupboards
Cupboards shall be made of Post Forming HPL Panel and installed in the positions shown on
171
drawings complete with Ironmongery and decoration as specified. Architraves and moldings where
indicated shall be of HPL, screwed on to frames and doors as shown on detail drawings. The sheets
shall matte finish with properties of Wear resistant, Fire resistant, Anti Static etc..
Shelves unless otherwise shown on the drawings shall be 12 mm thick white laminate finished HPL.
All exposed edges of HPL Panel shall be protected by hardwood edge strips tongued, glued and
pinned. Alternative design in proprietary melamine faced high-density chipboard construction may be
acceptable.
172
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
WOODEN DOOR
HW Set. 01
Door Type - D01 - Single Leaf Wooden Door.
Location: Staircase.
BISCFCE433IS
TESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt hinges, 102x76x3.

CE Marked in Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
No.
Silver
No.
CT250034PL
TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with Adjustable
Sweep Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment,
Back Check Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to
1,10m width. Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for Fire Doors.
1910908PP
TESA Universal Series Rim Panic Latch for Emergency Exit. Narrow
supports 280 x 39 mm, reversible, One Lateral Locking Point. Certified
by AENOR according to UNE-EN 1125, applicable to Fire Doors.
Supports and Bar finished in Silver.
Silver
No.
TE6R3010NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Adjustable Cylinder 40mm to be used with S1912

External Trim. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254.
Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish.
Group Master Keyed.
S.N.P.
No.
S1912EXIS16
TESA Sena model External Trim in Long Plate (44x215mm) with

Europrofile. To be used with TESA Rim Panic Devices. Satin Stainless
Steel finish (AISI 316L).
S.S.S.
No.
PCCIEGAIS800150
TESA Kick Plate, Satin Stainless Steel finish.800mmx150mmx1.5mm
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
TESA Floor Door Stop, Half-dome, Satin Stainless Steel finish, Supplied
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
173
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 02
Location: Flat Entrance
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, Reversible
Latch, 8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw Dead
Bolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for smoother operation. For Fire Rated
Doors, Tested to performance EN1303. Satin stainless steel finish.
S.S.S.
No.
4030E5SAI
MB0RBOMSSIS
TESA Europrofile Cylinder Rose Escutcheons, 10mm Thick, 53mm

Diameter. Grade AISI 304L Satin Stainless Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
Pair
TE653535NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder 35x35mm. 6 Spring Loaded

Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass
Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed.
S.N.P.
No.
MYA5R800SSIS
TESA "Yas" model Solid type Lever Handle on Rose, Stainless Steel
Levers on 53mm Diameter, 11mm Thick Rose. Grade AISI 304L
Stainless Steel finish.
S.S.S.
Set.
MIRILI4TSCR
Door viewer, satin chrome plated
S.C.P.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
174
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 03
Door Type - D04 - Single Leaf Wooden Door
Location: Toilet & Bath
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
TESA Mortice Lock 2030 Series with Latch and Deadbolt. Reversible,
with 50mm backset and 85mm between axes. 8mm Lever Spindle Hole.
Supplied with Europrofile Cylinder Hole, Antisaw Deadbolt. Certified
according to UNE 97-320-88 grade A. Forend and Strike Plate Finish in
Stainless Steel.
S.S.S.
No.
403050AI
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
50347SBLN
TESA Security TE5 Double Cylinder 35x35mm with Thumbturn &

Emergency release, 70mm length. 5 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins.
Made to DIN V 18254. Satin Nickel Finish.
S.N.P.
No.
MYA5R800SSIS
S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX4320IS
TESA Wall Door Stop, Cylindrical with rubber head, Satin Stainless Steel
finish, Supplied with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
175
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 04
Location: Handicap Toilet.
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
TR19305SSIS
TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 305x19mm Size, Including M8x70mm

Screw Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screws
included. Stainless Steel finish. To be fixed on the outside leaf close to
the door edge ( Bottom end of pull handle to be fixed no lower than
700mm and no higher than 1000mm from floor level ).
S.S.S.
No.
TR19305SSIS

included. Stainless Steel finish. To be fixed on the inside leaf of the
door.
( To be fixed horizontally as shown in pictorial. Both
ends of pull handle to be fixed no lower than 700mm and no higher
than 1000mm from floor level ).
S.S.S.
Pair
MB0REMESSMINIS
TESA Bathroom Thumb turn with Emergency Release on the outside,

53x80mm diameter, Grade AISI 304, Satin Stainless Steel finish.
S.S.S.
No.
TOPERCHAIS
TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick.
To be fixed on the inside leaf of the door.
( To be fixed no lower than 900mm and no higher than 1000mm from
floor level ).
S.S.S.
Set.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
176
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 05
Location: Telephone & Electric Rooms.

S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4030E5SAI
S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE653535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
MYA5R800SSIS
S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
BISCFCE433IS
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
177
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 06
Door Type - D08 - Double Leaf Wooden Door.
Location: Water Meter (Ground Floor).

S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4031U50AI
TESA 2030 Series Dead Lock for EuroProfile Cylinder. Reversible.

Cylinder Operates an Antisaw Dead Bolt. 50mm Backset. Unified Box
Format. Certified According to UNE 97-320-88 Grade A.
S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with thumbturm 35x35mm. 6

Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3
Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed.
S.N.P.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

Screw Back-to-Back Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screws
included. Stainless Steel finish.
S.S.S.
Set.
DB19SS12IS
Tesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Timber Doors. 304x19mm. Satin
Stainless Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
No.
GUARDAPOLIS
TESA Dust excluding socket. 25x38x13.5mm Dia. Satin Stainless Steel

Finish.
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
BISCFCE433IS
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
178
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 07
Location: Bedroom
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
4030E5SAI
S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
MYA5R800SSIS
S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
179
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 08
Location: Kitchen
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
S.S.S.
No.
4030E5SAI
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE653535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
MYA5R800SSIS
S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
180
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 09
Location: Gym Toilet

S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
TR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
PCCIEGAIS305150
TESA Push Plate, Satin Stainless Steel finish. 305x150x1.5mm
S.S.S.
Set.
50347SBLN

S.N.P.
No.
TOPERCHAIS
TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX4320IS
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
BISCFCE433IS
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
181
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 10
Door Type - D12 - Double Leaf Wooden Door
Location: Corridor.

S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
TR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
PCCIEGAIS305150
S.S.S.
Set.
DB19SS12IS
S.S.S.
No.
GUARDAPOLIS

Finish.
S.S.S.
No.
10
TOPERCHAIS
TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick
S.S.S.
No.
11
TOPINOX4320IS
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
BISCFCE433IS
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
182
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 11
Door Type - D14 - Double Leaf Wooden Door
Location: (W.M.C).
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
Silver
No.
CT250034PL
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
TR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
PCCIEGAIS305150
S.S.S.
Set.
DB19SS12IS
S.S.S.
No.
GUARDAPOLIS

Finish.
S.S.S.
No.
10
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
183
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 12
Location: Shower.
BISCFCE433IS

S.S.S.
No.
TR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
PCCIEGAIS305150
S.S.S.
Set.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
50347SBLN

S.N.P.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
184
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 13
Location: Plumbing Shaft.

S.S.S.
No.
TESA Cylinder Pull with europrofile hole, satin stainless steel finish.
S.S.S.
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
BISCFCE433IS
TIRADORBOMIS
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
185
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
ALUMINIUM DOOR
HW Set. 14
Door Type - L-01 - Four Leaves Aluminium Folding Door.
Location: Sub Station Room
ALUMINIUM DOOR HINGES
No.
12
HASP AND STAPLE SETS
No.
TESA Stainless steel range Padlock.Double security locking mechanism,

Solid brass body, stainless steel shackle and SS spring.
Group Master Keyed.
S.S.S.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
DB3/4LSS8IS
Tesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Steel & Aluminium Doors with
adjustible extended rod extension. 3/4 width 8 inches. Satin Tainless
Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
Pair
GUARDAPOLIS
TESA Dust excluding socket in Satin Stainless Steel Finish.

25x38x13.5mm Dia.
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
CL55TE6CR
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
186
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 15
Door Type - L02 & L02a Double Leaves Aluminium Door.
Location: Substation Room & Generator Room.
ALUMINIUM DOOR HINGES
No.
No.

Group Master Keyed.
S.S.S.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
DB3/4LSS8IS
Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
Pair
GUARDAPOLIS

25x38x13.5mm Dia.
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
CL55TE6CR
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
187
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
STEEL DOOR
HW Set. 16
Door Type - D15 - Single Leaf Steel Door.
Location: Solar Room & Tele. Room Roof
BISUL 45434IS
TESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt hinges, 4.5x 4x3.4mm
UL Listed, Fire Rated, Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish.
(MT Screws)
S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
188
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 17
Location: Roof Stair Case.
BISUL 45434IS
(MT Screws)
S.S.S.
No.
CT250034PL
Silver
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE653510NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Half Cylinder 45mm. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins.
Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel
Finish. Group Master Keyed
S.N.P.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX4320IS
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
189
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
No.
No.
HW Set. 18
Door Type - D17, D21 & D22 - Double Leaf Steel Door.
Location: Pump Room ; Generator Room; Garbage Room & LV Room.
BISUL 45434IS
(MT Screws)
S.S.S.
CL55TE6CR

Group Master Keyed.
S.S.S.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
DB3/4LSS8IS
Steel Finish.
S.S.S.
Pair
GUARDAPOLIS

25x38x13.5mm Dia.
S.S.S.
No.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
190
SN
Item Code
Description
Finish
Size
Unit
Qty.
HW Set. 19
Location: Pool Pump Room
BISUL 45434IS
(MT Screws)
S.S.S.
No.
4031U50AI

S.S.S.
No.
MB0RBOMSSIS

S.S.S.
Pair
TE6B3535NAM

S.N.P.
No.
DTR19225SSIS

S.S.S.
Set.
TOPINOX45IS
with fixing screws.
S.S.S.
No.
Set
Set
1
1
TOTAL FOR DOOR

TOTAL FOR SETS
Finish Codes :
S.S.S.
S.N.P.
S.C.P.
Silver
Black
L.T.
H.Z.
Satin Stainless Steel

Satin Nickel Plated
Satin Chrome Plated
Silver Sprayed
Black finished
Natural Brass
Zinc plated
191
SECTION 11: METAL WORK

1.0
MATERIALS
1.1
General Provisions
1.2
1.3
(I)
When a precise grade or alloy of metal is not specified the Contractor shall obtain the metal
from an approved specialist supplier or fabricator who shall be informed by the Contractor of
the particular application of the metal within the Works and it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to obtain the correct material suited to its application in the Works.
(iii)
All materials and components shall be the best of their respective kind, to the dimensions
shown on the drawings and where applicable sections shall be in accordance with the
relevant BS, DIN or approved equivalent standard.
Steel
(i)
Where the terms "steel" or "mild steel" are used it shall mean steel to BS 4: 1, BS 1449, BS
4360 or BS 4848 and shall be Grade 43a unless specified otherwise.
(ii)
Stainless steels shall be austenitic non magnetic steel unless specified otherwise and shall
be in accordance with BS 1449; Part 2 and BS 3100: 18/10/3 Chromium nickel
molunclenum group (BS Type 316) and finish shall be as specified. (e.g. Dull Polish, Mirror
Polish etc).
Aluminum
(i)
The term "aluminum" shall mean `wrought aluminum alloys for general engineering purposes'
in accordance with the BS 1470 - 1475 series and `cast aluminum' shall be aluminum cast by
permanent mould or gravity die techniques to BS 1490 using LM6 alloy.
(ii)
Fittings shall be aluminum alloy in accordance with BS 4951 the latest edition.
(iii)
All exposed surfaces shall be polished to a mirror like surface, free from defects, and shall
be light etched and anodized in a satin or a Matt champagne or silver or bronze or brown
finish as shown on drawings and as directed in writing by the Engineer.
(iv)
Aluminum shall be treated to comply with BS 1615, and BS 3987, to provide an anodization
not less than 20 microns thickness.
(v)
All aluminum sections shall present clear straight and sharply defined lines and shall be free
from defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.
(vi)
All screws, bolts and other necessary accessories shall be of aluminum or other noncorrodable material and shall match in color and consistency the finish of the anodized
aluminum.
(vii)
Aluminum elastic glazing beads shall be provided to all windows and doors, which are
assembled by pressure to fit with the relevant groove in the profile.
(viii)
The glazing bars shall be threaded or interlaced at points of intersections and machine
tenoned to frame.
(ix)
The Contractor shall submit samples of components to the Engineer for approval together
with test certificates which show that the components possess the following characteristics.
Mechanical Properties :
Cupping test to DIN 53156
Bend test to DIN 53152
Reverse impact to ASTM 27944-69
Indentation hardness to DIN 53153
Pencil hardness
Section 11, Metal Work
9 mm
Less than 5 mm
100-150 cm/kg
More than 100
2H
192
Cross cut test to DIN 53151
Gt.0
Continuous Heat Resistance :

After 1000 hours at 120 Deg.C
Slight yellowing of white shades
Chemical Resistance :
Test Medium
Time
_______________________________________________________
Premium petrol (gasoline)
Ethanol
Toluene
Butyl acetate
Trichloroethylene
Acetone
Hydrochloric acid, 10%
Sulphuric aid, 10%
Acetic acid, 10%
Soda solution, 1%
Nitric acid, 1%
Fuel oil
Ammonia, 10%
Caustic soda lye, 10%
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
Result
No change
No change
No change
No change
Softening
Softening
No change
No change
No change
No change
No change
No change
No change
Detached
Corrosion and Weathering Test :

Humidity test to DIN 50017 on zinc phosphated
steel sheet
No change after 500 hours.
Salt spray test to ASTM B 117 on zinc
No loss of adhesion
after 20
phosphated steel sheet

rounds
Weathering in Florida (USA) and industrial
climate
1.4
1.5
Excellent results
Brass and Copper

(i)
In addition to specified surface finishes, the Contractor shall where adequately treat or seal
the permanently hidden parts of metalwork from deterioration and corrosion (excluding
standard hollow sections).
(ii)
Mill finish aluminum will not be accepted unless specified or to the Engineer's written approval
or to be subsequently decorated.
Bolts and Nuts

Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of BS 4190 : ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws,
and nuts.
1.6
Washers
Plain washers shall be made of galvanized steel. Taper or other specially shaped washers shall be made
of steel or malleable cast iron and shall conform to the requirements of BS 4230, Metal washers for
general engineering purposes.
193
1.7
Galvanized Steel Pipes

Galvanized steel pipes shall confirm to the requirements of BS 1387, ISO Medium Series.
1.8
Protective Coatings and Finishes

(a)
Primers
Section of primers shall be in accordance with BS 5493 and shall comply to BS
3098 or BS 4652.
(b)
(c)
2523,
BS
Galvanizing
Where steel is referred to as `galvanized', galvanizing shall be applied by Hot Drip process to
BS 729 and BS 2989 and unless specified otherwise shall be 85 microns (6.0 g/m2)
Anodising
(i)
Where indicated on the drawings or specified elsewhere aluminium shall be anodised
in accordance with BS 1615 Grade AA25 and BS 3987 to the colour and finish approved by
the Engineer.
(ii)
Anodising shall be by the "Anoloc" process to give 25 micron minimum depth.
(iii)
Sections shall be anodised before cutting into length to suit the fittings dimensions.
(d)
Polyester Powder Coating

(i)
Powder coatings shall comply to BS 6496 or BS 6497 as applicable to the material to be

coated.
(ii)
Polyes`ter powder coating shall be to a minimum film thickness of 100 microns and carried
out by an approved specialist to the specified colour.
(iii) Steel to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first galvanized in accordance
with Clause 1.5(b) above.
(iv)
Aluminium sections to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first cleaned,

degreased and primed with two-pack etch primer.
(v)
As far as possible the assembled units as a whole shall be coated to avoid joint heat build-up,
scratches, touching up joints, etc. Powder coating shall be carried out in a well established
factory fully equipped for such works and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(e)
Painting
When described on the drawings/schedules painting of metalwork shall be in accordance with
Section N of this specification.
2.0
COMPONENTS
2.1
General Requirements
(i)
All components shall be obtained from an approved supplier/fabricator and the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a complete set of shop drawings.
Drawings must be submitted at least 4 weeks before starting fabrication, showing elevations,
plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of forming joints,
any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
(ii)
The design of metal components shall comply with the requirements of BS 4479 in as
much as they are applicable to the specific component, and where a British Standard exists
for that component it shall also be complied with.
(iii)
The shop drawings referred to in 2.1 (i) above shall conform to the design,
dimensions and general descriptions as shown on the drawings/schedules and as specified.
(iv)
After finalization of all details, prepare control samples as requested and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding with manufacture.
(v)
All fixings shall be of materials compatible with the component being fixed and where
194
dissimilar metals are used adequate precautions, such as coating or sleeving, shall be taken
to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
(vi)
All nuts and bolts shall be adequately protected from corrosion and all exposed bolts
including Carpenters and Joiners metalwork are to be capped with an approved dome headed
nut.
2.2
Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens

(i)
Aluminium windows shall be manufactured to BS 4873 and tested to BS 4315 Part b comply
with severe exposure rating as defined in BS 6375 Part 1.
(ii)
The Contractor shall obtain from the window manufacturer all design calculations in respect
of wind loading for external windows and screens and submit them to the Engineer for
approval.
(iii)
Aluminium framed sliding glass doors shall be in accordance with BS 5286.
(iv)
Glazing shall be installed at the factory at the time of manufacture in accordance with Section
M of this specification.
(v)
All fixings, ironmongery, locks and locking devices, fly screens, glazing, weather
stripping etc, necessary for the proper and intended function of the component shall be
included with the component and shall be allowed for within the Contractors Tender.
2.3
(vi)
Ironmongery to such fabricated components shall be comparable to the ironmongery used

elsewhere and suited to the proposed operation of the component and the component shall
be suitably strengthened, lapped and modified to receive the ironmongery.
(vii)
When shown on the drawings/schedules or specified, particular requirements for ironmongery

and any other integral parts of the component shall be included.
(viii)
All frames, angles, channels and the like shall be non-ferrous and fixed with countersunk
aluminium screws or as indicated on the drawings/schedules all of which shall be finished to
match exactly the colour and finish of the adjacent aluminium components and sections or to
the specified finish colour.
(ix)
All aluminium windows, doors, frames etc shall be factory assembled and reinforced
according to the drawings, complete with hinges, glazing gaskets and anchors. The only site
work allowed on aluminium units is fixing in position and glazing. The finished surfaces shall
present a clear surface free from alloy defects, scratches, or other surface blemishes.
(x)
All aluminium windows, doors, etc. shall be provided with necessary ironmongery required for
its efficient functioning. Ironmongery shall be in conformity with that specified under
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY and shall be coordinated and integrated to merge with the
overall system.
Substrate
The flexible substrate is a durable, flexible, translucent, dimensionally stable material consisting of a
polyester scrim embedded between two layers of white pigmented vinyl specially formulated to accept the
decorative graphics material.
The flexible substrate manufacturer must give written approval of compatibility of the substrate with the
decorative material used, and must warranty against failure of the substrate due to chemical
incompatibility with the graphic material and the materials used to transfer the graphics onto the substrate.
Typical characteristics of the flexible substrate are :
195
Property
English Units
Temperature stability
- 20 F to 170 F
29 C to 77 C
Light Transmission
28 % 2 %
28 % 2 %
Tear Weft
85 lbs / in min
15 kg / cm min
Tear Warp
113 lbs / in min
10 kg / cm min
Tensile Weft
150 lbs / in min
26.6 kg / cm min
Tensile Warp
150 lbs / in min
26.6 kg / cm min
Seam Strength
50 lbs / in min
9 kg / cm min
Thickness
0.021 .001
0.05 .0025 cm
Weight
1.22 lbs / sq.yd
670 gms / sq.m.
Dimensional Stability
1/32 Shrinkage
0.26 cm Shrinkage
max, per 12
max. per 1 m.
Metric Units
o
(Opacity)
Strength
Impact Resistance
No penetration
Flammability
Self Extinguishing
Does not
Support combustion
U. L.
Recognized
Whiteness Index (Ref.)
WI=103
a*=-1.65,
CIELAB L*=-90.20
Colour (reflective)
b*=2.82
196
2.4
Workmanship
2.4.1
General
(i)
All metalwork shall be undertaken in accordance with sound engineering and smithy practice
and as much metalwork as possible shall be undertaken in properly equipped workshops with
site work restricted to fixing and other operations that cannot be undertaken prior to delivery
to site.
(ii)
All finished components shall be wrapped, taped or otherwise protected with non-absorbent
coverings and delivered to site at a time to eliminate or reduce to a minimum, storage on site
prior to fixing.
(iii)
Protective coverings shall be sufficiently removed for jointing, assembly and fixing purposes
and afterwards replaced.
(iv)
After erection all metalwork with applied finishes shall be adequately protected from any
damage and any such work which is scratched, marked or damaged in any way shall be
suitably repaired if appropriate, to the Engineer's approval or, if so instructed by the engineer,
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
(v)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer evidence that the thickness of
protective/decorative coatings are not less than as specified and in cases of doubt the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to send sample pieces to independent testing
laboratories and the cost of all such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
(vi)
All window, door, screen, and other like frames shall be made to allow a 5 mm
tolerance all round the opening in the structure and junctions shall be finished off by applying
an approved sealant onto a closed cell polystyrene foam backing strip or as otherwise shown
on drawings or specified.
2.4.2
(vii)
Discrepancies in overall width or height exceeding 5 mm will not be allowed and where such
discrepancies occur the frame will be rejected.
(viii)
Welding shall be undertaken in accordance with the appropriate British Standard for the type
of metal being joined.
(ix)
Aluminium fixed against or into cementitious materials or stone/brickwork shall be adequately

protected by plastic spacers/sheeting or two coats bituminous paint applied to the fixed face
of the component.
Steel Elements
All steel parts shall be accurately set out, cut, framed, assembled and executed using proper bolts or
welding electrodes. All cut parts shall be saw cut, no oxygen burning shall be permitted except for pipe
supports. All welding shall be electrical welding,, clean and of proper workmanship. All cut parts and
welded section shall be ground even and filed smooth with rounded edges.
All steel members in contact with the soil shall be painted with two (2) coats of protective asphalt
paint. All doors, frames, staircases, etc. shall be given at least one (1) coat of approved rust inhibiting
primer before delivery to site.
Frames for doors and windows shall be provided with not less than (3) adjustable type anchors on
each jamb, minimum distance between anchors shall be eight hundred (800) mm.
All joints shall be machined to a close fit and all pins and screws shall be countersunk and dressed
flush after assembly.
Forging shall be sharp and true. Curves, intersections and members of the same size shall be halved
together.
197
The plain surfaces shall be smooth, free from warp or buckle. Moulded members and mitres shall be
clean, cut straight and true. Construction joints shall be welded their full length and cleaned off flush
on exposed surfaces.
All work shall be erected plumb and true to lines and rigidly secured to walls, floors or ceilings as
shown on drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Ironmongery for steel doors, etc. shall be as specified under CARPENTRY & JOINERY
2.4.3
Aluminium
The Contractor shall furnish and install all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings. Workmanship
and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards of first class aluminium
manufacturers.
All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where the grade of metal work is of recognized quality
acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plum, straight, square, level and in proper
elevation, plane location and alignment with other work. All work shall be designed for adjustment to field
variations, fitted with proper joints and intersections, adequately anchored in place, strictly in accordance
with best practice.
Aluminium for arches shall be extruded from soft aluminium sections to achieve the required radius as
stipulated and detailed in the drawings. Tenderers are contractually required to submit, for Engineers
approval, a sample of the proposed section together with all relevant and necessary data.
Where aluminium surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, white bronze or
small areas of other metals compatible with aluminium surfaces, they shall be kept from direct contact
with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc chromate primer or other suitable
primer, followed by one or two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint or other suitable protective
coating, excluding those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed
between aluminium and dissilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting members shall be hot dip
galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.
Aluminium surfaces in contact with lime mortar, concrete, plaster or other masonry materials, shall be
painted with alkaline- resistant coatings such as heavy bodied bituminous paint or water white
methacrylate lacquer.
Aluminium in contact with wood or absorptive materials which may become repeatedly wet shall be
painted with two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint or a coat of heavy bodied bituminous
paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats of alumiuium house paint
and seal joints with a good quality of caulking compound.
Where aluminium is in contact with treated wood, wood shall be treated with pentachlorophenol, 5%
minimum concentration or approved equal, followed with the protective measures described for aluminium
in contact with wood or other absorptive materials.
The aluminium work shall be designed and anchored so that the work will not be distorted nor the
fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of the metal.
Before shipment from factory, aluminium surfaces requiring protection shall be given a coating which will
protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance of the finish on aluminium items is
important, a coating of methacrylate type lacquer shall be applied as specified hereinafter.
Apply two sprayed coats of water white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimum thickness of 0.015 mm,
which when applied to the aluminium surface shall be capable of withstanding the action of lime mortar for a
period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 40 degree centigrade, the action of
10% (by weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 20 degree centigrade, and the action of atmospheric
weathering for a period of 12 months.
The coating shall be applied in the manufacturers plant to the exposed surfaces of all aluminium
components subject to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster, abrasion and other construction abuses.
Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication compounds, moisture, dirt,
accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by removing protective tape or
198
other coating, using mild soap or detergents and clear petroleum spirits.
Acids caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing
compounds care shall be exercised to prevent damage to seals or staining or damage to adjacent work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminium work until the completion of the
works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition shall be accepted.
2.5
2.6
Access Hatch Rooflights

(i)
Access hatch rooflights shall be obtained from an approved supplier and installed strictly in
compliance with manufacturers instructions.
(iii)
They shall be delivered to site as a complete assembly and include an opening glazing unit
hinged to the frame with rigid aluminium stays and locking collars securing the hatch in the
open position. The unit shall be hand operated with
internal and external opening
handles.
(iii)
They shall comprise an aluminium frames proprietary factory made unit, shall be fully
weatherproof and include all flashings and gaskets as integral.
(iv)
The units shall be domed of double-skinned insulated construction in wire reinforced opal
diffusing PVC, fully UV resistant, with Class 1 surface spread of flame rating according to BS
476 Part 7 1971 and graded self-extinguishing according to BS 2728 1970, test method 508A.
Extruded Aluminium Expansion Joints

Extruded aluminium expansion joints shall be of a proprietary make, and of types as indicated on the
drawings complete with all fixings and fixtures, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Extruded
aluminium expansion joints shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Floor and wall joints shall be sealed with an elastomer filled proprietary joint seal with extruded aluminium
retaining profiles on each side securely bolted to the structure. Retaining profiles shall be set below the
plaster or screed so that only the elastomer and the edges of the profiles show.
Joint width shall be 20 mm and the joint cover shall be capable of absorbing 35% free movement of the
joint width. All corners, cross connections, curbs, tee joints or other special accessories shall be shop
fabricated.
3.0
STEELWORK
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
3.1
3.2
All steelwork shall be provided and fixed complete with all plates, cleats, bolts, etc.,
cut to lengths and sizes and drilled as shown on the Drawings. Steelwork generally
shall comply with BS 4 part 1, BS 2994 or BS 4848 Part 4.
Rag bolts and nuts shall be mild steel to BS 1494 Part 2. Black bolts shall comply
with BS 4933 and washers to BS 4320.
The steel sections where specified to be factory rustproofed shall be rust-proofed by
hot dip galvanizing, metalizing or sheradizing process. The rust proofing shall be
sufficient to withstand the 72 hours salt spray test as provided for in BS 5466 : If
the rustproof coating suffers any damage during the progress of work, the damaged
part shall be re-coated to a minimum of the original thickness to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Fabrication
(i)
All fabrication and welding shall comply with BS 449 Part 2.
(ii)
Welding shall be carried out by skilled operatives with proven qualifications and experience in
using the same electrode, class and welding positions which will be required in the work and
shall comply with BS 1856. The competence of all welders shall be tested in accordance with
the relevant BS.
Priming
199
All steel items which are not galvanized or zinc coated are to be primed with a coat of approved rustproofing primer. Items which have been primed before delivery to site should immediately be touched up
with similar primer and every effort made to protect the members from damage during fixing. All structural
steelwork is to be adequately protected from the effects of the weather before fixing.
3.3
Workmanship for Steel

(i)
All steelwork including connections shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with the
appropriate BS to the tolerance specified.
(ii)
All holes shall be drilled to the appropriate size for the type and diameter of bolt being
used. For HSFG bolts the clearance shall not exceed 2 mm, except where oversize holes are
required for tolerance reasons and in this case special oversize washers will be supplied.
3.4
3.5
(iii)
All bolts shall have steel washers between the nut and the member being fixed. The head and
nut of all bolts shall have taper washers as necessary to give a bearing without bolt distortion.
When load indicating washers are used the load indicating device shall bear against a
hardened steel washer of the head or the bolt.
(iv)
Site connections will be formed with HSFG or black bolts, to BS, of such size and quality to
carry the loads required unless specified otherwise.
(v)
Stud welding and shot fired fastenings will not be allowed unless authorized in writing by the
Engineer subsequent to satisfactory performance tests and trials. Contact faces between
members which are to be formed with HSFG bolts shall be cleaned and left unpainted, unless
otherwise directed, and after fabrication the surfaces protected until time of assembly.
Contact faces between normally bolted connections are cleaned and protected locally with
red lead paint.
Welding
(i)
All welding at works shall be carried out in accordance with BS requirements. All welding
operatives employed shall be tested and qualified welders in accordance with BS
recommendations and the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, if required, evidence of
qualification.
(ii)
All welded connections shall be accurately made and the joint faces formed in accordance
with BS for metal type and thickness as appropriate and any necessary pre-treatment due to
metal thickness or type shall be undertaken. All welding electrodes shall be of the
appropriate type to be compatible with the metal being welded.
Inspection
The Engineer may employ, to act on his behalf, an Independent Weld Inspection Company to carry out
regular inspections and nondestructive, and visual examinations, whilst the fabrication and erection are in
progress to ensure compliance with the Specification and BS requirements and an adequate standard of
workmanship and supervision for the works.
The Contractor is to allow unrestricted access and facilities at his works or those of his sub-contractors or
on site for authorized personnel to carry out inspection procedures on behalf of the Engineer, in respect
of the fabrication, erection and or welding of the Steelwork.
3.6
Stability
All erected steelwork shall be true to line, level and plumb, and securely bolted and fixed with temporary
bracing to resist safely all loads from erection procedures and or all accidental and natural forces which
may occur. All
connections shall be permanently bolted when the members are fixed true to line,
level and plumb.
3.7
Steelwork Supply and Erection

(v) The Contractor will supply all bolts and fixings to be cast into the substructure in time to
comply with the program, together with detailed setting out drawings showing the size and
location of all items. The Contractor will supply and erect all steelwork and handover
completed and approved as required by the construction program.
200
(ii)
3.8
All steelwork supplied to site prior to erection shall be clearly marked for identification and
stored so as to prevent loss, damage or corrosion, (due to climatic conditions) of any
sections, parts, bolts, fittings, including deterioration of protective painting or other protective
coatings. Any such loss or damage shall be made good by the Contractor at no extra cost.
Protection
(i)
The Contractor will be responsible for all preliminary cleaning and priming at works
prior to delivery and all making good of the initial protective film on site due to damage in
transit or during erection prior to handing over of the steelwork.
(ii)
In addition all site bolted or welded joints shall after erection be painted as the
remainder of the steelwork. Where load indicating washers are used with HSFG bolts
particular care is to be taken to fill and seal the gap between the washer and the fittings
created by the indicating nibs.
(iii)
All types of paint of protective medium are to be used and applied to the steelwork in
accordance with the appropriate section of BS and CP requirements and the manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions for the type of paint or material being employed and also
the type and workmanship for cleaning and preliminary protection.
3.9
3.10
Galvanized Protection
(i)
Steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanized under factory conditions after preparation
for installation in accordance with BS 729 unless otherwise stated.
(ii)
All steelwork after fabrication is to be cleaned by picking and subsequently hot dip
galvanized in accordance with the BS to give a minimum coating thickness of 100
microns.
Design
(I)
The Engineer will supply the Contractor with the information and drawings he requires
preparing and completing his shop drawings. The Contractor shall,
unless
otherwise
specified, prepare and check shop drawings incorporating sufficient information for the proper
fabrication of the steelwork.
(ii)
In the event of any contradiction or ambiguity in the information or drawings supplied
by the Engineer becoming apparent the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and
obtain from him written clarification.
(iii)
The Contractor shall check dimensions and prepare shop drawings for the steelwork.
The Contractor shall be responsible, unless otherwise specified, for the design and sufficiency
of the structural steelwork. Where certain sections of the work have been designed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall check and verify the sufficiency of the design and take full
responsibility for it.
(iv)
Before commencing fabrication the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
Engineer in writing for all shop drawings. This approval will signify verification of the correct
interpretation by the Contractor of the Engineer's requirements but shall not signify approval
of the dimensions. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be entirely responsible
for the accuracy of the shop drawings, the correctness of detail and the proper design of
connections and joints. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with complete sets of
working drawings.
(v)
Structural metalwork items included in this project are entirely the design
responsibility of the sub-contractor.
(vi)
All structural steelwork shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of BS
449, "The use of structural steelwork in building" and other standards specified therein. The
Contractor shall carry out his design calculations accordingly and shall submit such
calculations for checking by the Engineer if requested to do so.
201
SECTION 12: FINISHINGS

1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Storage of Materials
(I)
(ii)
1.2
1.3
Sample Panels and Control Samples

(I)
Sample panels, minimum size 600 x 600 mm, shall be prepared for all finishes, finishings and
textured coating to be used in the Works.
(ii)
If the Engineer requires a control samples of a finishing materials, it shall be prepared in an

agreed location within the Works (e.g. the floor tiling to a complete room). The area to be
used as a control shall be completed and approved to the standard of workmanship and
appearance required by the Engineer before the application of the material is proceeded with
elsewhere in the Works.
Scaffolding
(I)
(ii)
1.4
Wallboards shall be stored flat in dry conditions and shall always be carried on edge.
Rolls of sheet materials shall be stored standing on end.
Scaffolding shall be erected to external facades and any other areas where it is required
before any work is commenced, so that good access is obtained to the whole of the working
area.
The scaffolding shall be supported independent of the working area and shall provide
platforms at about 2 metre intervals. A gap of at least 250 mm shall be left between the work
face and the scaffolding to allow sufficient clearance for working.
Test for Dryness

Moisture content shall be ascertained by use of a hygrometer or similar approved instrument. A
substrate will be considered "dry" in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer when all
readings taken in the corner, along edges and at various points over the area being tested show 75%
R.H. or less.
1.5
Uniformity
(I)
(ii)
1.6
To ensure consistency of appearance all flexible sheet or tiles of the same type, colour and
pattern, which will be visible together when laid, shall be from one batch.
In all cases wherever possible joints in tiling walls, floors and ceilings shall be
aligned/matched to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Recessed Duct Covers and the Like

Floor finishes shall be fitted into recessed duct covers to finish flush with the surrounding floor. Tiled
finishes shall be located so as to continue the joint pattern of the surrounding floor.
1.7
Changes in Finish at Doorways

Changes in colour or type of finish in doorways shall be situated under the centre line of the door leaf.
1.8
Protection of Floors
(I)
(ii)
(iii)
During floor laying operations the areas being treated shall only be accessible to the floor
layers.
Completed tiled floors shall not be subject to traffic until the bedding has stiffened and
sufficient bond has developed between the bedding and the finish to ensure that the tiles will
not be disturbed.
Light pedestrian traffic shall not be allowed over a finished floor until 4 days after completion
Section 12, FINISHING
202
of the laying; traffic heavier than pedestrian shall be excluded for 14 days after laying.
2.0
MATERIALS
2.1
The cement and water used for plastering shall be as before described in Section E, Concrete Work
and the sand shall be as before described in Section 8, Blockwork. Lime shall be hydrated complying
with BS 890, Class B. Any pigments used to colour cement or cement products shall be obtained
from an approved manufacturer and shall meet the requirements of BS 1014.
2.2.
Expanded Metal Lath

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
2.3
Expanded metal lath shall be manufactured from tight coat galvanised sheet made
In accordance with the requirements of BS 2989 Grade Z2, coating type "C" and shall have a
minimum aperture of 6mm measured the short way of the mesh. It shall weigh not less than
2
1.22 kg/m where used as reinforcement over different backgrounds and not less than 1.9
2
kg/m where used as a background for plastering or rendering.
Wire ties shall be galvanised, minimum 1.2 mm diameter for security metal latching.
Metal latching shall be provided over all junctions of concrete and Blockwork or any other
dissimilar materials which are to be rendered. The minimum overlap of the metal lath shall be
200 mm on each side of the joint.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for use in screeds shall be as specified under Concrete Work, but with maximum
size of aggregate 5 mm.
Aggregate for use in granolithic shall be selected granite or quartz between 5 mm and 10 mm in size.
2.4
Fine Aggregate (Sand)

Sand for use in plasterwork shall be as specified under Concrete Work and shall contain no more
that 0.06% chlorides. Fine aggregate for use in tyrolean shall be specially selected for that purpose.
2.5
Water
Water shall be clean, free any harmful matter, and free from any unusual proportions of dissolved salt.
Seawater or brackish water shall note be used. Analysis by an independent testing body shall be
made to determine the suitability of the water if required by the Engineer.
2.6
Epoxy Resin Mortar / Render

Epoxy resin based mortar / render shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
2.7
Additives
Additives for use in in-situ finishings shall only be used with the approval of the Engineer.
2.8
2.9
Beads and Stops

(i)
Beads and stops shall be manufactured from tight coat galvanised steel to B.S. 3989 Grade
Z2, coating Type "C", profiled to suit the depth of plaster or render to be applied.
(ii)
All external angles to rendered finishings shall have external angle beads to ensure a true
straight arrays. Rendered finishings brought up to door frames, window frames and the like
shall have architrave beads and where finishings end but do not abut other materials stop
beads shall be used.
Sealing Compounds
Sealing compounds for screeds finished with carpet tiles and doormats shall be PVA acrylic and other
203
polymer base Anti-Dust treatment from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

2.10
Levelling Compounds
Levelling compound for screeds which are to receive floor coverings shall be in powder form and
capable of application by addition of water to smooth out surface irregularities and set hard in hour
and allow the final covering to be laid after 8 hours from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
2.11
Welded-Fabric Mesh for Reinforced Rendering

Reinforcement for rendering shall consist of galvanised welded-fabric mesh with 50 x50 mm squares
having wires not less than 2.5 mm diameter.
2.12
2.13
Nails, Screws and Washers

(I)
Nails, screws and washers shall be galvanised or of stainless steel. Pins for shotfiring shall
be of steel with a tight coating of cadmium or zinc to comply with BS 1706.
(ii)
Clout nails shall comply with BS 1494, part 2.
Movement Joint Filler and Sealant

(I)
Movement joint filler shall be approved impregnated fibreboard or cellular polyethylene which
is compatible with the sealant being used and which does not give up bituminous or oily
products.
(ii)
Sealant shall be two-part polysulphide type as recommended by the manufacturer for the
situation in which they will be used. Butyl mastics and other forms of mastics shall not be
used without specific approval by the Engineer.
2.14
Brass Dividing Strip
2.15
Brass dividing strips shall comply with BS DD 19.

Surface Hardener, etc.
2.16
(I)
Where specified the cement and sand screeds shall be treated with sodium silicate based
surface hardener manufactured by and applied in accordance with the printed instructions of
an approved manufacturer.
(ii)
Power floated concrete slabs shall be treated with dust-proofed manufactured by and applied
in accordance with the printed instructions of an approved manufacturer.
Adhesives
(I)
Adhesives for fixing ceramic wall tiles shall comply with B.S. 5980, Class A.
(ii)
Adhesives used for fixing carpet shall be waterproof, peel-up type recommended for the
purpose by the carpet manufacturer.
(iii)
Adhesives used for fixing flexible PVC, thermoplastic or similar material in sheet or tile form
shall be recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.
204
3.0
WALL FINISHINGS AND FINISHES
3.1
Plastering and Rendering
(a)
(I)
General
The requirements for sand for finishing coats shall comply with the following:
__________________________________________________
BS Sieve
Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve
__________________________________________________
mm
%
2.36
1.18
600
300
150
100
90 - 100
55 - 100
5 - 50
0 - 10
(ii) The requirements for sand for undercoats and screeds shall comply with the following:
________________________________________________________________________
BS Sieve
Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve
________________________________________________________________________
mm
5.00
2.36
1.18
600
300
150
(b)
%
100
90 - 100
70 - 100
40 - 80
5 - 40
0 - 10
Thickness of Plaster and Rendering

(I)
The methods of measuring and mixing plaster shall be as laid down under Section E,
Concrete Work and the proportion and minimum thickness of finished plasterwork and
rendering shall be in accordance with the following:
__________________________________________________________________________
Plaster or Rendering
Mix
Minimum Thickness
__________________________________________________________________________
Cement, lime, sand
1
part
cement,
Two coats, total finished
thickness
plaster internally
1/4 part lime,
15 mm, to walls and ceilings.
4 parts sand
Wood or steel float finish.
Cement and sand

1 part cement,
Render coat, 15 mm finished
rendering finishes
4 parts sand with
thickness
internally and externallyapproved plasticiser
__________________________________________________________________________
205
(c)
Mixing and Use

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(d)
Preparation of Surfaces for Plaster, etc.

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(e)
Except where hand mixing of small batches is approved by the Engineer, mechanical mixers
of an approved type shall be used for mixing.
Hand mixing plaster and rendering shall be first mixed in the dry state, being turned over at
least three times. The required amount of water should then be added and the mix turned
over until such time as the mass is uniform in colour and homogeneous.
Mechanical mixers, mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each batch and kept
free of material from previous mixes. All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all
times be kept scrupulously clean and strict precautions shall be taken to avoid materials
becoming contaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or
accelerate the setting time. The plaster shall be completely used within thirty minutes of
mixing and hardened.
Plaster Retempering will not be permitted and all render or screed which has begun to stiffen
shall be discarded. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be remixed but removed
from the site.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearing
manufacturer's name and brand and shall be stored in dry and well-ventilated enclosure.
Irregularities in the surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be filled with mortar, without
lime, twenty-four hours before plastering is commenced. Joints in Blockwork, etc., are to be
well raked out before plastering to form a good key. Smooth concrete surfaces to be plastered
shall be treated with an approved propriety-bonding agent.
All surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar and
all traces of salt and adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.
All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water 5 to 10 minutes before plaster/render is
applied and all free water allowed to disappear before plaster is applied.
As far as practical, plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electrical
services, conduits, pipes and fixtures have been installed.
Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced.
This shall apply where walls columns and beams, particularly where flush, and similar
situations where cracks are likely to develop and as directed by the Engineer. The
reinforcement shall consist of a strip of galvanised wire mesh (10 to 15 mm hexagonal mesh)
450 mm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals not exceeding
450 mm at both edges. External angles shall be formed with galvanised steel angle beads
fixed with plaster dabs at not more than 450 mm centres.
A wall sample should be prepared by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the plaster
works and shall be removed at the Contractor's cost when he is instructed to do so.
Dubbing out on smooth dense concrete surfaces is not permitted.
Application of Plaster and Render

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
After preparation of the surfaces a key coat of cement slurry spatterdash of cement and sand
which shall contain 500 kgs of cement per one cubic meter of sand shall be applied to the
wetted surface to be plastered.
The Contractor shall form vertical guide screeds 50 mm wide on walls. The spacing shall not
exceed 1.50 meters. The screeds shall be plumb and shall all be in the same plane. The
sides of the screed shall be left rough to bond with plaster. The finished surface shall be true
to shape and angle, even in all directions, with straight arises free from cracks and trowel
marks and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Render shall not be applied by means of trowel between stops, laid, ruled and plumbed as
necessary within 24 hours of the spatter coat application, if used.
Render shall be floated to a true, even surface. If the surface is to be a smoothly finish then it
shall be further trowelled in a manner which forces the sand particles down into the render.
All render surfaces shall be free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other belishes.
Work shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner and internal and external angles shall
206
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(XI)
(ix)
(ix)
(iv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(f)
be true, straight and plump.

Render shall be made good to adjacent finishes, frames, skirtings, etc. and around pipes
sleeves and other fittings.
Render shall be worked into expanded metal latching, where used and into beads to form a
neat edge or arrays.
The under coat shall not be applied before the elapse of 24 hours on the application of the
spatterdash coat to ensure complete setting.
The under coat shall be lightly scratched in both directions to provide key for the finishing coat
and shall be kept moist with a spray for two days and then allowed to dry out.
Undercoats shall be applied firmly to achieve good adhesion, and in one continuous operation
between angles and joints. Rule to an even surface and cross scratch to provide a key for the
finish coat.
The finishing coat shall not be applied until the rendering or base coat has seasoned for 7
days and is firmly bounded to the background and has developed reasonable suction. The
finishing coat, rendering coat or base coat shall be wetted evenly with a fog spray. Where
cement plaster with a smooth troweled finish is specified or indicated on the drawings, the
finish coat shall be first floated to a true even surface, then troweled in a manner that will
force the sane particles down into the plaster and with the final troweling, leave the surface
finished smooth and free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other blemishes.
Cement plaster in all other spaces, where a smooth finish is not specified or noted on the
drawings, shall be given a sand float finish of a uniform texture, as approved by the Engineer.
Approved hydrated or slaked lime shall be added in the protection hereinafter specified to the
mix of the finish float coat to internal plaster which is to be lime washed.
All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean and
strict precautions shall be taken to prevent the plaster or other materials from being
contaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the
setting time.
Where wall or ceiling plaster is to stop with a clean edge to a line, the edge shall be formed by
means of a timber batten wedge in position to act as a screed stop and the batten to be
carefully removed leaving a square straight line at the edge of the plaster. Alternatively,
proprietary plaster stops may be used.
o
Plastering work shall not be carried out when the shade temperature exceeds 43 C. The
Contractor is responsible for preventing excessively rapid or localised drying out.
The following are the different types of plastering finish:
Types of Finish
(I)
Smooth finish
Finished with a steel-laying trowel to an even surface.
(ii)
Plain finish
Finished with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has disappeared from surface to give an
over all even texture.
(iii)
Rough textured finish

Finished with a coat or carpet float to give a rough and even open texture finish.
(iv)
Scraped finish
Finished with laying trowel to uniform thickness and after coat has set but before it is too hard,
aggregate exposed by scraping surface of skin to approved texture.
(v)
Haring finish
Thrown on while wet with trowel or scooped to an even texture and left to cast.
(vi)
Dry dash finish

Topcoat of render finished to uniform thickness; while coating plastic aggregate is thrown on
to cover surface.
(vii)
Sprayed finish
The sprayed finish shall be applied by an approved machine to give an even texture and
finish. Sprayed finish shall not be applied until all repairs and making good to the undercoat
are completed.
207
(g)
Curing of Plaster
Each coat of plaster or rendering work is to be maintained in a moist condition for at

days after it has developed enough strength not to be damaged by water.
(h)
least
three
Acceptance and Repairs

Plaster with cracks, blisters, trowel marks, discoloration or sand marks will not be accepted and shall
be replaced at the Contractor's expense. If plaster is damaged by related work, such as window and
door framing etc. then all damaged parts shall be repaired to match existing plaster in texture and
colour at the Contractor's expense.
(I)
Tyrolean Rendering
(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3.2
Tyrolean rendering shall consist of white cement and coarse washed sand complying with
1
Clauses 3.1.(a)(I) in the proportions of 1 : 1 /2 or 1 : 2 applied to a rendered undercoat.
Sufficient supplies of sand from a single source shall be stockpiled on site to ensure that the
Tyrolean finish is of even texture and colour throughout the works.
The rendered undercoat shall be applied in accordance with Clauses 3.1 (d) and (e) except
that the surface of the undercoat shall be finished smooth with wood float and not scratched.
The Tyrolean finish coat shall be applied by an approved hand-operated machine in layers to
build up an average thickness of 6mm and shall be allowed to cure and dry in the same way
as a final rendering coat.
Dry Linings
(I)
3.3
Gypsum wallboard shall consist of either 9.5 or 12.7 mm thick gypsum plasterboard
complying with BS 1230, having one face finished for direct decoration.
(ii)
Thermal wallboards shall consist of an insulation core having a thermal conductivity of not
less than 0.037 W/m Deg.C. bonded on one side to gypsum wallboard and on the reverse
side with a water-vapour resistant membrane.
(iii)
The edge profiles of wallboard shall be:
"Tapered" for smooth seamless jointing.
"Bevelled" for V-jointing.
"Square" for stippled textured coatings, cornerstrip jointing or plaster.
(iv)
Accessories for installing wallboard shall be approved propriety materials recommended by
the manufacturer of the board.
Ceramic Wall Tiles
(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be first quality tiles to conform with B.S.1281 and shall be
selected. Tiles shall be manufactured by an approved manufacturer.
Tiles for external use must be recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer. All tiles
shall be glued to plaster with an approved adhesive especially made for the purpose with
closely butted joints and later pointed in white or coloured cement.
Where tiling abuts against frame or other tiling at angles and around pipes, etc., it shall be
carefully cut and fitted to form a close neat joint. Open irregular joints filled with cement and
sand or plaster will not be permitted.
Movement beads in the face of wall tiling shall be positioned at internal corner, at junctions
between concrete blocks and concrete columns and at maximum 4.50 m vertical centres.
A silicon rubber based sealant shall be inserted between tiles and all sanitary fittings and shall
be by an approved manufacturer and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions.
208
4.0
FLOOR FINISHINGS AND FINISHES
4.1
Materials and Manufacturers

4.1.1
Cement.
Cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement to BS 12. White (non stain) cement shall conform
to the same specification standards.
4.1.2
Colour.
Colour pigments shall conform to BS 1014.
4.1.3
Sand (Fine Aggregate).

Sand (Fine Aggregate) for use in Tile and Slab finishings shall be as specified under
Concrete Work
4.1.4
Water
Water shall be as specified under Concrete Work.
4.1.5
Grout.
Grout for tiling work shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.6
Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a suitable cement based adhesive complying with BS 5980 : 1980, from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.7
Joint Sealant.
Sealant for movement joints shall be silicone based for internal use and 1 part polysulphide
based for external use, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.8
Backing Strip.
Backing Strip for joint sealant shall be round, closed cell, impermeable, expanded
polyethylene from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.9
Joint Filling Material.

Filling material for movement joints shall be flexible bitumen impregnated mineral fibreboard
from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.10 Damp Proof Course (Separating layer).

Membrane shall be polythene sheet, 1000 gauge thick.
4.1.11 Plasticisers.
Plasticisers shall be from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.12 Mastic
Mastic for waterproofing and damp proofing membrane shall be rubber / bitumen based from
a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
4.1.13 Precast Terrazzo Tiles, Skirting, Etc. .
The Precast terrazzo tiles and skirting shall be formed of white cement and granular marble
chipping of large grades in order to obtain a good wearing surfaces. The thickness of the
wearing layer shall be around half tile thickness. Precast terrazzo skirtings shall have square
top edges.
Precast terrazzo treads, risers, skirting, thresholds, etc. shall be of the design, dimensions
and thickness shown on the drawings and they shall be formed in the same proportions and
mixes as for tiles.
Where required, terrazzo units shall be reinforced with bars and treads shall have either a
209
non-slip aggregate (carborundum) incorporated into the top surface or a non-slip nosing
recessed into the surface near the edge as directed by the Engineer.
Grinding shall be done wet by means of appropriate carborundum stones. Filling shall be with
a neat cement grout of the same colour as the facing mix and this shall be worked into the
surface with a wooden scraper to fill all voids and air hoes. After a minimum period of 24
hours polishing shall be carried out as described in Workmanship.
Samples or terrazzo shall be provided for the Engineer to choose from.
4.1.14 Ceramic Floor Tiles.

Ceramic floor tiles shall be matt finish, vitrified plain clay tiles manufactured in accordance
with BS 1286 : 1974. Skirtings shall be cove edge type 100 mm high. Special pieces shall be
used for steps. Acid resistant tiles shall be used where specified. Tile patters and colour
shall be to the Engineers approval.
4.1.15 Glazed Wall Tiles.

Glazed wall tiles shall conform to the requirements of BS 1281 and the size shall be as shown
on the schedule of finishes or the drawings and or an approved pattern and colour. Single
edge and double edge rounded tiles, coves and corner pieces shall be used where required
and shall be of same quality, colour and finish.
4.1.16 Marble or Granite Slabs

Marble or granite slabs for flooring, skirting, treads, risers, door thresholds, column and wall
cladding shall be first quality, uniform in colour and texture, free from voids, earth veins and
lamination or structural weakness and of an approved texture and colour. The pattern,
dimensions and thickness of marble or granite slabs shall be as shown on the drawings, or as
stated in the Bills of Quantities. Samples of marble or granite slabs shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to order.
Metal anchorage consisting of craps, bolts, dowels, etc. shall be of approved preparatory
make from stainless steel or phosphor bronze.
4.2
Cement and Sand Floor Screeds

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
The surface of the concrete base must be clean, firm and rough to ensure a good bond. This
shall be achieved by hacking thoroughly to remove all latency and to expose the aggregate
over the whole area, followed by sweeping clean and hosing down to remove all dust.
The base shall be soaked with water for at least 12 hours and any surplus water removed
before laying commences.
To obtain the required thickness of screed, levelling battens shall be used, carefully fixed to
line and level and fully bedded. There shall be a minimum thickness of screed of 20 mm over
the top any conduit or duct.
2
The screed shall be laid in alternate bays maximum 15m with plain butt joints and length of
the bay shall not exceed 1.5 times the width. Movement and construction joints in the base
shall be carried through the screed.
Immediately prior to laying the screed, a thick brush coat of wet cement grout shall be applied
to the damp surface of the base concrete and shall be well scrubbed in. The brush coat must
not be applied more than 10 minutes before it is covered with screed.
Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes (i.e. of vinyl and rubber sheet or tile) shall consist of 1
part of cement to 3 parts of sand by weight and screeds to receive strong rigid coverings (e.g.
quarry and ceramic tile) shall consist of 1 part of cement to 4 parts of sand by weight. Sand
shall comply with the requirements of Clause 3.1.(ii).
210
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
4.3
PVC and Thermoplastic Floor Tiles

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
4.4
(a)
Thermoplastic floor tiles shall comply with BS 2592.

PVC (Vinyl) asbestos floor tiles shall comply with BS 3260 to be supplied by a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer and they shall be laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions and C.P. 203.
A high standard of finish will be required and it is essential that the preparatory screeds be put
down accurately to thickness and level. Unless otherwise stated the screeds will be 1:3,
cement and sand, trowelled smooth and level. Tiles will be fixed to the prepared screed with
approved adhesive and treated on completion with approved liquid sealer applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Cove skirtings will be fixed to backing with adhesive. Brass division strips are to be provided
at junctions of different colours and against other floor finishes and are to be bedded into the
screed and finished flush with the floor finish.
Flexible Sheet Flooring

(I)
(ii)
4.5
The mix shall only contain sufficient water with a maximum allowable slump of 50 mm that will
allow full compaction and shall be evenly spread to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater
than that required. The screed shall then be thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing
off to the required level with a screed board.
If a smooth surface is required the final working up shall be done with a wood float, steel
trowel, power float or other finish as specified elsewhere in the contract documentation. Care
shall be taken to avoid excessive trowelling which may cause crazing.
Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes or screeds which are finished as paving shall be laid
to a tolerance such that localised variations do not exceed plus or minus 2 mm under a 3
metre straight edge and plus or minus 10mm over large areas, measured from datum.
As soon as each bay is completed and has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to its
surface it shall be covered with polythene or similar sheets which shall be adequately lapped
and held down. The screed shall not be allowed to dry out for a minimum period of 7 days
and no traffic shall be permitted on the surface during this time.
Unbaked PVC sheet flooring shall comply with BS 3261, part 1, Type "A".
PVC sheet flooring will be fixed to the prepared screed with approved adhesive all as Clause
4.2 above.
Ceramic Floor Tiles

General
Ceramic floor tiling shall be carried out in compliance with BSCP 202 : Section 4 : 1972.
The overall thickness of tiles, mortar and screed shall be maximum of 100 mm. Bedding of Ceramic
tiles will be of a stiff plastic consistency, spread, compacted, cement sand mortar and leveled to a
thickness of 9 10 mm.
(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Unglazed ceramic floor tiles and skirting tiling shall conform to B.S. 1286 and shall be by an
approved manufacturer.
Tiles shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and makers name. They
shall be stored on raised platforms and properly covered to protect them from moisture. Tiles
must not be allowed to come into contact with water during storage.
Damaged materials and manufactured items shall not be used in the works specified under
this Section. Any materials and manufactured items damaged during and after bedding or
setting in position shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractors expense.
(vi)
Although recommended sizes and thickness of tiles, slips and slabs will be indicated
on the drawings, the final choice of size colour and thickness shall be decided by the
Engineers Representative at site.
Tiles shall be dipped in water and surface water allowed to drain off. The back of the tiles shall
be buttered with neat cement / water mix. (Or cement based adhesive), and the tiles lay on
bedding and tapped down to form a level surface. All joints shall be as close as possible and
211
shall in no case exceed half (0.5) mm in width on face for areas less than ten (10) square
meters and one (1) mm for areas over ten (10) square meters.
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(XI)
(ix)
(ix)
(iv)
(xv)
(b)
Floor and Wall Tile Movement Joints

(I)
(ii)
(c)
Water content of mortar must be limited to prevent formation of surface water when mortar is
compacted and surface water, which does occur, must be allowed to dry. Sufficient mortar for
2 3 hours work maximum shall be laid at any one time.
Tiles are to be bedded in cement and sand (1:3) with applied cement slurry on cement and
sand screed as described to make up the total finished floor thickness with perimeter and
intermediate joints at maximum 4500mm centres. Do not use admixtures without the
Engineer's approval.
Tiles shall be laid with continuous straight joints not wider than 2mm to true lines without
lipping and with a minimum of cutting. Work shall be so laid out that no tiles less than half tile
size shall occur.
Bedding joints shall be well filled and grouted at least 12 hours after completion with a mortar
mix tinted to match the colour of the tiles. All surplus grouting and mortar shall be cleaned off
immediately.
Tiles shall be neatly cut around pipes or other obstructions. All work shall be protected from
damage during the contract and shall be properly cleaned off on completion.
Clean off and polish tiles at completion. Protect external tiling from heat and inclement
weather until jointing has completely set. Do not allow water on to new tiling until bedding
and jointing have completely set.
Acid resistant tiles shall be grouted in a suitable acid resistant grout shall be applied in
matching colour according to manufacturers written instructions and to the Engineers
approval.
The surplus grout from the floor surface shall be gently wiped with fine sand. Sawdust shall
not be used.
Walking on tiles shall not be allowed for five (5) days after laying.
Perimeter movement joints shall be provided to the full depth of finish, bedding and screed in
al tiles floors.
Floor and wall tile movement joints shall be a minimum of 6 mm wide at the tile face. The
joints shall be packed with silicon rubber sealant after priming. The joint backing shall be 10
mm diameter foamed polyurethane strip to pass through the full depth of tile and rendered
backing.
Silicon Rubber Sealant shall be by an approved manufacturer and used strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Floor and Wall Tile Expansion Joints

The expansion joint materials are to be supplied by an approved manufacturer and used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
(d)
Ceramic floor and Wall Tile Adhesive

Ceramic floor and wall tile adhesive and grouting material shall be by an approved manufacturer and
used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
4.6
(a)
Terrazzo
Terrazzo Floor Tiles and Skirtings
(I)
(ii)
Portland cement, aggregates for the base layer and pigments used in the manufacture of the
tiles shall comply with Clause 2.1 above. Aggregates for the facing layer shall consist of good
quality, hard marble or other approved natural stone with similar characteristics. The marble
aggregates shall be graded, but shall not include a high fines or dust content and shall be
sharp and angular.
The base layer shall consist of not less than 3 and not more than 3.5 parts of aggregate to
one part of cement, proportioned by weight. The facing layer shall be such as to provide a
minimum-wearing surface of 6 mm after grinding and shall generally consist of 2.5 parts of
212
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
aggregate to one part of coloured cement.

The tiles shall be vibrated to an extent which allows the entrapped air to escape to the surface
and compacts the aggregate at the wearing surface and hydraulically pressed sufficient to
mould the facing to the base layer.
The surface of the facing layer shall be ground and slight imperfection shall be filled by
grouting with a neat cement paste coloured to match the original mix and well worked into the
surface before it is re-ground to a fine grit finish.
Skirting tiles shall have square or bevelled, ground top edges. Cut floor tiles shall not be used
for skirtings.
The tile faces shall be free from projections, depressions, flakes and crazes and the
aggregate shall be evenly distributed. The tiles shall be square and of rectangular cross
section with sharp and true arises, shall comply with the performance requirements of BS
4131 and shall be of the minimum thickness shown on the drawings.
Laying Terrazzo Tiles

(I)
The areas of concrete substrate to be tiled shall be brushed clean and dampened until
absorption ceases and the finished floor level shall be established by means of dots and
rules.
(iii)
The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be to the thickness shown elsewhere in the contract
documentation and shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand by volume and any
admixture approved by the Engineer, mixed semi-dry in a mechanical mixer with only
sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed
in the hand.
(iii)
A stiff slurry consisting of cement and water shall be prepared and spread on the back of the
tiles about 2 mm thick before they are laid on the bed and tapped firmly into position with a
rubber or wooden hammer. The tiles shall then be vigorously beaten with a wooden beater to
ensure a true surface and that contact between the tiles and bedding is complete.
(iv)
The tiles shall be laid with joints of about 3 mm and proper alignment shall be maintained with
continuous square joints in both directions. The joints shall line-up through doorways where
possible.
(v)
At least 24 hours after laying the tiles, the joints shall be filled with neat cement grout to a
colour approved by the Engineer. Care should be taken to fill and joints completely. Excess
grout shall be removed with a squeegee and shall be cleaned off the face of the tiling and
surrounding surfaces as the work proceeds.
(vi)
The tiles shall be laid with a minimum of cut tiles, but where it is necessary they shall be cut
with approved power driven saw and any rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Rough
cutting by means of a chisel or axe shall not be permitted.
(vii)
Cut tiles misfits shall be replaced with properly cut tiles. Straight edges shall be accurately
set to the lines established and reset at suitable intervals to keep the joints parallel over the
entire area.
(viii)
Broken tiles or tiles showing the least signs of defects will not be accepted and if laid by the
Contractor shall be removed and replaced with sound tiles, at his own expense.
(ix)
Tiles shall be laid out from the centreline of each space outward and adjustment made along
walls, partitions, and borders, so as to symmetries the pattern with a minimum of cut tiles.
Tiles of less than half of their full size along one side after cutting should be avoided.
(x)
Tiles shall be laid level or to 1% falls in "wet" areas, as may be required. Localised variations
in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of plus or minus 3 mm under a 3 metre
straight edge. Particular care shall be taken in "wet" areas to prevent low spots and the
pooling of water.
(XI)
Skirtings shall be fixed in such a manner that their vertical joints coincide with the horizontal
joints of the floor tiles.
(ix)
All terrazzo surfaces shall be polished on completion. Large areas such as floors shall be wet
213
polished by means of approved machines using a No. 140 carboundum wheel. Any narrow
surfaces, which cannot be polished conveniently by the machine, may be polished by hand
using a No. 140 carborundum stone and water. Care must be taken during any polishing
operation not to damage any angles or arises. Polishing shall be performed with addition of
appropriate lead and salt pigments as approved by the Engineer to produce a mirror like
glossy finish.
(c)
4.7.
4.8
(a)
Precast Terrazzo Units

(I)
Precast terrazzo units shall comply with the requirements of BS 4131.
(ii)
Precast terrazzo treads and risers shall also comply with Clause 4.4(a) above except that the
facing layer of the treads shall be such as to provide a minimum-wearing surface of 12 mm
after grinding.
(iii)
All exposed edges of the units shall be terrazzo faced.
Entrance Matting
(I)
Entrance matting shall be of open construction (allowing dirt to fall through into recessed
well).
(ii)
Mats shall have an absorbent pile surface with alternative ridges of aluminium and rubber,
and be fully reversible.
(iii)
Mats are set in recessed wells with 30 mm deep aluminium angle skirtings, and shall be flush
with adjacent floor finishes.
Epoxy Flooring (1.5 mm minimum self levelling)

General
(I)
Self levelling epoxy flooring shall be from an approved supplier and shall be resistant to
water, acid, oil, petrol and abrasion.
(ii)
It shall be applied level at a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm (as specified) to a sand cement
screed sub-base, whose surface shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and to the required tolerances. The finished surface shall be jointless, ductless,
chemically resisting and hard wearing.
(iii)
Application is to be according to manufacturer's instructions.
(iv)
A non-slip finish is to be applied by sprinkling 60 mesh aluminium oxide grains uniformly over
the surface before the epoxy sets. Care must be taken to ascertain the correct time for
applying the non-slip aggregate, by use of a test pane.
(v)
(b)
The colour of the flooring is to be as approved by the Engineer.
Epoxy Resin Based Sealer

(I)
Where specified the cement and sand screeds shall be treated with an approved surface
sealer to be obtained from an approved supplier, applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.
(ii)
The colour of the flooring is to be as approved by the Engineer.
5.0
WALL FINISHINGS
5.1
Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Adhesive
214
Wall tiling with adhesive bedding shall be carried out in compliance with BS 5385, Part 1: 1976 for
Internal work and BS 5385, Part 2: 1976 for External work.
The background for tiling shall be suitably prepared free from oil, grease, loose or friable materials
and shall provide an adequate key for bedding.
The maximum deviation of background shall not exceed 3 mm when measured under a two metre
straight edge.
Tiling work shall be carefully set out prior to starting to minimize the amount of tile cutting and to
ensure alignment of vertical and horizontal joints.
Tiles shall be dry when fixed, using adhesive, mixed and used strictly in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions and within the stated working time of the adhesive. The
manufacturers recommendations for safer handling and ventilation of working area shall be carefully
followed.
Adhesive shall be applied as a floated coat to a thickness of 5 to 6 mm. Tiles shall be firmly pressed
into position within the stated working time of the adhesive.
Tiles and fittings shall be set in adhesive to true vertical face with continuous horizontal and vertical
joints. Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and have even width not exceeding 1.5 mm. The
vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire true level and plane by uniformly applied
pressure under a straight edge of a rubber-faced block. Misfits as well as damaged or defective tiles
shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors own expense.
Special tile fittings shall be located as shown on detail drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
Bedding shall be allowed to set before grouting to avoid disturbance to tiles. Grout shall be applied in
matching colour according to manufacturers written instructions and worked in until joints are
thoroughly filled flush with the finished face of joint. Surplus grout shall be removed with a damp cloth
and joints tooled to a smooth finish. Acid resistant tiles shall be grouted with a suitable acid resistant
grout to the Engineers approval.
Immediately after the grouting has set, tiled surface shall be given a protective coat of non-corrosive
soap or other approved method of protection and joints shall be cured for 72 hours.
Wall tiling operation shall not be started until the floor tiling in the same area has been completed.
5.2
Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Cement: Sand Mortar

Cement and sand mortar (1: 4) ten (10) mm. thick shall be laid as base for wall tiling. The surface of
the mortar so laid shall be scratched in an approved manner when nearly set, to form key and shall be
cured for five (5) days before tiling starts. The surface shall be well wetted before the actual tiling
operation is commenced.
Tiles and fittings shall be set in cement and sand mortar (1: 4) mix, 6 mm thick to a true vertical face
with continuous horizontal and vertical joints. Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and have
even width not exceeding 1.5 mm. The vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire true
level and plane by uniformly applied pressure under a straight edge of a rubber faced block. Misfits
as well as damaged or defective tiles shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractors
expense.
The external and internal angles and side edges of glazed wall tiling shall be formed with angle beads
whereas top edges of tiles shall be formed with rounded edge tiles. Joints shall match the general
tiling and special fittings shall be used.
Joints in glazed wall tiles and fittings, after the edges of tiles have been thoroughly wet, shall be
grouted with a plastic mix of neat white or coloured cement immediately after a suitable area of tile
has been laid.
215
The joints shall be tooled slightly concave and the excess mortar shall be cut off and wiped off with a
damp cloth from the face of tile, before it sets hard.
Interstices or depressions found in the mortar joints after the grout has been cleaned from the surface
shall be roughened at once and filled to the spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins
to harden.
Immediately after the grout has had its initial set, glazed wall tile surfaces shall be given a protective
coat of a non-corrosive soap or toner approved method of protection and joints cured for 72 hours.
Wall tiles operations in spaces where floor tiles are required also, shall not be started until the floor
tiles are required also, installation had been completed.
5.3
Marble or Granite Slabs

Marble or granite floor slabs shall be laid on a bed of cement : Sand mortars 1 : 3 mix. The back of
the slab shall be properly sealed to ensure good bonding between the slab and mortar.
All slabs shall be tight butt jointed. Joints shall be thoroughly grouted with matching coloured cement
and wiped clean before setting hard.
All exposed faces and edges of marble or granite shall be polished smooth free from scratches or
other defects.
Marble or granite wall cladding shall be fixed in accordance with BSCP 298 : 1972. Cladding shall be
fixed to solid background by mechanical means such as cramps, dowels and similar fixings in
accordance with the working drawings. The cladding shall be supported at its lower edge and
securely tied back at the top. The thickness of the material behind the cramp should be 20 mm. The
fixing cramps shall be adequately inset in to the supporting background, preferably with undercut
holes and secured in place with 1 : 3 cement / sand or epoxy / polyester resin mortar dabs. The back
surface of the cladding shall be coated with an approved quality sealant.
Cladding shall be butt jointed with maximum 3 mm gaps.
The length and height dimensions of individual slabs shall be worked to within plus or minus 1 mm
from those specified. Thickness shall be within 3 mm from that specified. For wall cladding, all block
work, concrete or other backing must be formed so as to allow a minimum of 20 mm clearance
between the backing and the back of the cladding.
Cramp holes and mortises shall be carefully drilled or cut to avoid stunning or fracture of the material
adjacent to the hole or mortise.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing protection against weather or damage and
staining by other trades. Particular care must be taken against staining from timber, oil, wet straw,
washing from steel work or scaffolding or from any other injurious substances. On completion of
adjacent building operations the completed marble work shall be cleaned down and any defects in the
pointing and polishing shall be rectified.
The Contractor shall prepare fully dimensioned shop drawings from details shown on working
drawings supplied by the Engineer and from site survey. Key numbers of each slab shall be shown
together with details of metal anchoragets. No marble or granite shall be worked until these drawings
are approved by the Engineer.
6.0
CEILING FINISHINGS
6.1
Suspended Ceilings Generally
216
(I)
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings to show the final layout and sizes of members of
all suspension systems and co-ordinate the design and work on the suspended ceilings with
other trades to provide for the reception and installation of outlets, fixtures, access panels,
etc., pertaining to mechanical and electrical work, all for the Engineer's approval before any
work is commenced.
(ii)
Ceilings shall be erected in a rigid and secure manner by workmen skilled in this work so that
the final surface is free from any waves, buckles or sags.
They are symmetrical about the centre lines of the room or space, beginning with a tile or joint
line as required to avoid narrow tiles at the perimeter.
(iii)
The ceiling shall be finished at the junction with all walls and columns with edge trim fixed at
maximum 450 mm centres.
(iv)
Additional supports shall be provided above all access panels, light fittings, diffusers, etc., and
the tiles shall be accurately cut to accommodate all such fittings. Under no circumstances
shall any fitting be supported by the tiles, plank or strip membrane material.
(v)
Care shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are kept clean if subsequently removed for access
to services, for inspection or for remedial works.
(vi)
All suspended ceilings work shall be carried out in accordance with C.P. 290.
(vii)
The tile plank or strip membrane material shall be as specified elsewhere in the contract and
shall have a fire performance when tested in accordance with B.S 476 which satisfies the requirements of:
Class 0 - BS 476, Part 6 Class 1 - BS 476, Part 7
6.2
6.3
(viii)
The suspension system shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane

material and shall be constructed from hot dipped galvanised steel sections and galvanised
wire or similar non-corrodible materials and fixings.
(ix)
The suspended ceiling system shall incorporate proprietary mineral fibre tiles, which shall be
by an approved manufacturer and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written
directions.
Expanded Metal Latching Ceilings

(I)
Unless otherwise approved, framework shall consist of 9 mm x 25 mm, 16 g galvanised steel

channel sections at 600 mm centres wired to 11 mm x 38 mm, 16 g galvanised steel channel
sections hung on 3 mm x 25 mm straps. The straps shall be bolted to concrete soffit with
rawbolts.
(ii)
Covering shall be ribbed galvanised tying wire or to underside of timber framing at maximum
350 mm centres.
(iii)
The whole to form a suspension grid ready and of adequate strength to receive plaster or
other applied finish and with supports for light fittings where required.
(iv)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings as described.
Suspended Plasterboard Ceilings

(I)
Unless otherwise approved the suspension system shall consist of 80 mm x 26 mm x 0.5 mm

thickness ceiling section at 450 mm centres connected by wire connecting clip to 15 mm x 0.9
mm thickness intermediate channel at 1200 mm centres maximum suspended from the
concrete soffit by 25 mm x 0.5 mm strap hangers at 1200 centres maximum.
(ii)
Strap hangers shall be suspended from 27 mm x 37 mm x 25 mm x 1.6 mm thick soffit cleats

rawbolted or shot fired to concrete soffit. Strap hangers shall be bolted of soffit cleats and
screw fixed to intermediate channel.
(iii)
Perimeter channels shall be 20 mm x 27 mm x 30 mm x 0.5 mm thick to accept the ends of
217
ceiling sections. They shall be fixed to the wall at 600 mm centres maximum with
plasterboard screws fixed at 150 mm centres maximum to the channels.
6.4
(iv)
Plasterboard shall be 12.7 mm thick 900 mm wide x 180 mm long with tapered edges for
jointing and direct decoration screw fixed to the ceiling section members. All joints shall be
taped and filled and all screw holes filled to give a smooth jointless ceiling.
(v)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings as described.
Aluminium Ceiling
600 x 600 x 0.8 mm thick octagonal recessed aluminium tiles or 600 x 600 mm x 0.7 mm or 600 x 300
mm x 0.7 mm or 300 x 300 mm x 0.7 mm plain or perforated aluminium tiles as specified with bevelled
edges, chromated and stove enamelled with polyester paint finish. Suspension to be by concealed
type "Spring Tee" galvanised suspension system into which the tiles are clipped. Tiles are chamfered
on all edges to emphasise the rectangular feature. Tile edges are to be concealed by wall mounted
U-shaped self-clip galvanised trims. Perforated tiles to have fire and waterproof textile inlay for sound
absorption.
6.5
6.6
Aluminium Strip Ceiling

(I)
Modular false ceiling composed of 0.7 mm thick aluminium staves, with bevelled edges,
chromated and stove enamelled with polyester paint finish. Staves to be 100, 200 or 300 mm
wide as specified.
(ii)
The staves snap into place under a universal support element, which is supplied in steel
aluminium painted in black.
(iii)
A universal support beam is suspended by slotted strips from the structure; the staves snap
into the support beam and the setting out is finished of with a perimeter strip covering the cut
ends.
Mineral Fibre Ceilings

(I)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Mineral fibre suspended tiled ceilings shall be obtained from an approved supplier and shall
comprise feted mineral wool tiles which have an irregular deep-textured, non-directional
surface.
Tiles shall have a sound absorption coefficient of 0.56 at 500 Hz, and a noise reduction
coefficient of 0.73.
Tiles shall be 600 x 19 mm thick in concealed grid with square kerfed and rebated edge giving
2
monolithic appearance, weighing 6.1 kg/m .
Tiles shall be white finish.
218
SECTION 12a: CERAMIC TILING, QUARRY STONE & POOL DECK

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.
TYPES OF FINISHES
110
GRANITI TILE - TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE.

- Tiles: GRES PORCELLANTO Fully vitrufied.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal.
Product reference: To approval.
- Colour: To approval.
- Finish: Unpolished anti-slip.
- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.
- Thickness: as per size.
- Background/ Base: Cement sand screed.
- Intermediate substrate: Not required.
- Bedding: As clause 650 to 740.
- Reinforcement: Not required.
- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in
compliance with ISO 13007-1.
- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.
- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.
- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and
appearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10 m
centres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columns
and stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints in
the base.
- Accessories: Covered skirtings, plain skirtings, step or other nosings, nonslip inserts,
tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to
approval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.
111
CERAMIC TILE - TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE.

- Tiles: CERAMIC WHITE BODY.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal.
- Finish: Unpolished anti-slip.
- Thickness: as per size.
- Background/ Base: Cement sand screed.
- Bedding: As clause 650 to 740.
the base.
- Accessories: Covered skirtings, plain skirtings, step or other nosings, nonslip inserts,
tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to
approval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.
112
TILING TO EXTERNAL FACADE AND BOUNDARY WALL.
Section 12a, Ceramic Tiling, Quarry Stone & Pool Deck
219
Tiles: Ceramic.
Manufacturer: Nitto Seitosho Fascia Ceramics Tiles www.nittoseitosho.co.jp
Supplier: Mr. P.P Sood, Trade Engineering LLC PO Box 36472 Dubai Tel +971 4
2825150, +971 50 6443804, email trading@eim.ae
Product reference: Refer drawing and to Architect / Engineer / Clients approval.
Colour: To approval.
Finish: Matt.
Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings with special corner tiles.
Thickness: Minimum 9 mm.
Background/ Base: Mature render. Primed drywall surface.
Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.
Intermediate substrate: Not required.
Bedding: As clause710.
Reinforcement: Not required.
Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in
Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.
Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.
Type/ classification: CG2 .
Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and
appearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m
the base.
Accessories: Tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion
material to approval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.
112
TILING TO WALL.
- Tiles: Vitrufied porcelain or Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal
- Product reference: To approval.
- Finish: Matt.
- Thickness: Minimum 8 mm.
- Background/ Base: Mature render . Primed drywall surface.
- Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.
- Bedding: As clause710.
- Type/ classification: CG2 .
the base.
- Accessories: Tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion
113
GLASS MOSAIC TO POOL.

- Tiles: Crystal Glass Mosaic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Crystal Tiles http://www.crystaltiles.com or approved equal
- Product reference: B12C or to Architects selection.
- Colour: Multicolour to approval.
- Finish: Translucent and glossy.
220
120
Size: 1 x 2
Thickness: Minimum 8 mm.
Water Absorption to Comply with EN ISO 10545-3 1997
Frost Resistance to Comply with EN ISO 10545-12 1997
Bending Strength to Comply with EN ISO 10545-4 1997
Stain Resistance to Comply with EN ISO 10545-14 1997
Crazing Resistance to Comply with EN ISO 10545-11 1997
Chemical Resistance Class `A to Comply with EN ISO 10545-13 1997
Background/ Base: Mature render . Primed drywall surface.
Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.
Intermediate substrate: Gannite.
Bedding: As clause. 661
Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in
Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.
Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.
Type/ classification: CG2 .
appearance in each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m
and stairs. Structural movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints in
the base.
Accessories: Tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion
NATURAL STONE - MARBLE TILING TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval.
- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks.
- Colour: To Engineers and client approval.
- Origin: To Engineers and client approval.
- Finish: Polished and pattern to approval.
- Supplier: To approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious
to strength/ colour.
- Thickness: 30 mm .
- Sealer - SurfaPore C from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od
coat as per manufactures recommendation.
- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72
3
Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m . Apply
back sealer to stones before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top
sealer after final polishing using diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flow
when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%.
- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .
- Intermediate substrate: Not required .
- Bedding: As clause 740.
- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.
- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.
- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.
- Type/ classification: CG2.
the base.
221
Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to
approval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes.
121
NATURAL STONE MARBLE TILE AT STEPS TREAD AND RISER

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval
- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks
- Finish: Polished with Sawn edges and with depression/ groove with anti-slip emery
tape to approval.
- Size: To Engineers and client approval.
3
when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%..
- Preparation: As approved.
- Intermediate substrate: As approved.
- Bedding: As approved.
the base.
- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to
approval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes
122
NATURAL STONE - MARBLE TILING TO WALL

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval.
- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks.
- Finish: Polished and pattern to approval .
3
- Background/ Base: Blockwork wall/concrete.
- Intermediate substrate: Not required .
222
Installation: .
Framing: Galvanised structural framing rails necessary for alignment as per drawing.
Calculations and materials to approval.
Fixing: Proprietory Galvanised steel fixing brackets by Halfen, Harris and Edgar or
approved equal..
Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.
Grout: Not required.
the base.
Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to
approval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes.
131
NATURAL STONE GRANITE TILE AT ENTRANCE

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): JUPARANA.
- Petrological family: Igneous rocks.
- Colour: PINK.
- Origin: Indian Subcontinent.
- Finish: Honed with Sawn edges and pattern to approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or
other defects deleterious to strength/ colour.
- Size: 600 x 600 mm.
- Thickness: 30 mm.
3
when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%..
- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in
each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimeter
movement joints including door thresholds and around columns and stairs. Structural
movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints in the base.
- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval
at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes
132
NATURAL STONE GRANITE TILE AT STEPS TREAD

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): JUPARANA.
- Petrological family: Igneous rocks.
- Colour: PINK.
- Origin: Indian Subcontinent.
- Finish: Honed with Sawn edges and with depression/
groove with anti slip emery tape to approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or
223
other defects deleterious to strength/ colour.

Size: 300 x 600 mm.
Thickness: 30 mm with extended Rounded nosing to give full 60 mm bull nose edge.
Sealer - SurfaPore C from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od
3
Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .
Intermediate substrate: As approved.
Bedding: As approved.
Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.
Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in
each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimeter
movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints in the base.
Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval
-
141
NATURAL STONE NATURAL RIVER (WADI) PEBBLES TO PAVEMENT

- Stone:
- Name (traditional): PEBBLES.
- Petrological family:.
- Colour: Black.
- Origin: To approval.
- Finish: Natural or Machine shaped to approval.
- Size: 20 TO 60 mm.
- Background/ Base: Geotextile membrane.
151
-
SAND STONE FLOORING-1

Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Lalitpur yellow.
- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone.
- Colour: Yellow.
- Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval.
- Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects
deleterious to strength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site,
season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance with shop drawings
prepared by supplier.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per plan
- Thickness: 22 to 30 mm.
- Sealer - SurfaPore C from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od coat as per
manufactures recommendation.
224
152
-
Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,
Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m3. Apply back sealer to stones
before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top sealer after final polishing using
diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flow when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern
variation not to be more than 10%..
Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .
Preparation: As approved.
Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.
Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.
Type/ classification: CG2.
Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in each
conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimeter movement joints
including door thresholds and around columns and stairs. Structural movement joints coincides
with the structural movement joints in the base.
Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at all
exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel
framework/ Curtainwall framing.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Autumn Brown.
- Colour: Brown.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,
durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance
with shop drawings prepared by supplier.
- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,
- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in each
- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at all
225
130
-
161

Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing
.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Mandana Red.
- Colour: Maroon Red.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other
defects deleterious to strength, durability or appearance. Before
delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance with
shop drawings prepared by supplier.
- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,
- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in each
- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at all
COMPOSITE WOOD PLANK AT POOL DECK
-
Name: PINUFORM Patio System.

Colour: DRAK BROWN P-0001 and to Architects approval.
Origin: Germany.
Finish: DRT 220 cl
Supplier: Pinus Hlzimport Gmbh Karlsruhe KG www.pinus.de .
Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious
- Plank Size: 25 x 175
- End Profile LRR 100
- Substructure UCL 210
- Assembly clamp T clip nr 8d3
- Edge clip E clip nr 8
- Slope 1% to 2%
- Screws Concealed Stainless Steel
Background/ Base: Concrete Screed. Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as
suitable to purpose and appearance in each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not
more than 10m centres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around
226
columns and stairs. Structural movement joints coincide with the structural movement
joints in the base.
Accessories: Proprietary stainless steel joint strip with infill expansion material to approval
GENERALLY
210
SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES

- Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces
given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding.
- New background drying times (minimum):
- Concrete walls: 6 weeks.
- Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.
- Rendering: 2 weeks.
- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.
- New base drying times (minimum):
- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.
- Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.
215
FALLS IN BASES
- General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.
220
SWIMMING POOL TILING

- Watertightness of pool base/ substrate structure: Test and prove to be watertight.
- Time intervals between stages of the work (minimum):
- Completion (curing) of pool shell to start of rendering/ screeding/ tiling: 6 weeks.
- Completion of rendering/ screeding to start of tiling: 3 weeks.
- Completion of tiling to start of grouting: 3 days.
- Completion of grouting and sealing of movement joints to filling of pool: 3 weeks.
- Filling, emptying and heating pool: Minimize stresses.
- Maximum filling and emptying rate: 750 mm/24 hour.
- Maximum rate of heating water: 0.25C/hour.
250
SAMPLES
- General: Submit representative samples of the following: All the materials to be used for
the finsh and installation..
260
CONTROL SAMPLES
- General: Complete sample areas, being part of finished work, in locations as follows: To
approval.
PREPARATION
310
EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/ BASES GENERALLY

- Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove.
- Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding: Remove.
- Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean.
- Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.
320
EXISTING CONCRETE/ SCREEDS

- Loose or hollow portions: Cut out.
- Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer.
330
EXISTING PLASTER
- Plaster which is loose, soft, friable, badly cracked or affected by efflorescence: Remove.
Cut back to straight horizontal and vertical edges.
- Making good: Use plaster or nonshrinking filler.
340
EXISTING GLAZED BRICK
227
Defective areas: Cut out.

Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer .
350
EXISTING TILES
- Loose or hollow sounding tiles: Remove.
- Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer.
355
OLD ADHESIVE RESIDUES ON CONCRETE/ SCREED BASES

- Soft or unsound adhesive residues: Remove without damaging base.
360
EXISTING PAINT
- Paint with unsatisfactory adhesion: Remove so as not to impair bedding adhesion.
370
NEW IN SITU CONCRETE

- Mould oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with bedding: Remove.
380
NEW PLASTER
- Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
- Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
390
PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS
- Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive
decorative finish exposed.
400
BACKGROUNDS
- Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings.
- Surfaces to be tiled: Seal or prime if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
410
HACKING FOR KEY

- Keying: Roughen backgrounds thoroughly and evenly. Remove surface to depth of 3 mm.
- Backrounds to be keyed: to approval.
420
RAKING OUT FOR KEY

- Soft joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).
430
SPATTERDASHING FOR KEY

- Spatterdash mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.
- Consistency: Thick slurry with no segregation.
- Application/ finish: Thrown.
- Thickness: 3-5 mm.
- Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.
431
STIPPLING FOR KEY

- Stipple mix:
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.
- Application/ finish: Brush applied to a deep close texture.
- Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.
438
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR FULLY BONDED BEDDING

- Surface cement:sand matrix: Remove to expose coarse aggregate.
- Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:
- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding
coat.
228
Slurry: SBR Polymer modified cement.

Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.
Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR Polymer.
444
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR PARTIALLY BONDED BEDDING

- Surface finish: Brushed with no laitance.
- Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:
- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding
coat.
Slurry: SBR Polymer modified cement.
- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.
Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR Polymer.
450
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING - WITHOUT SEPARATING

LAYER
- Surface finish: Smooth.
- Surface preparation: Before laying mortar bed, dampen lightly.
451
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING

- Separating layer: Polythylene sheet not less than 65 micrometers (250 gauge).
- Lap at joints: 100 mm.
460
SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT
- Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
- Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.
FIXING
510
FIXING GENERALLY
- Colour/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/ room are not
permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
- Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base. Prime if recommended by adhesive
manufacturer.
- Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
- Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile backs.
- Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give
true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
- Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.
530
SETTING OUT
- Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
- Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively.
- Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.
- Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.
- Movement joints: If locations are not indicated, submit proposals.
- Setting out of Openings fittings, joints etc.: Drawing references: To details.
- Setting out of openings, fittings, movement joints: Submit proposals.
540
LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING

- Permissible deviation in level from datum for 2 mm.
550
FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING

- Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
- Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed anywhere on
surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should be
greater than 3 mm.
229
560
LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS

- Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint:
- 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.
- 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.
570
MORTAR BEDDING
- Bedding mix:
- Sand for walls: To BS 1199, type A.
- Sand for floors: To BS EN 12620.
- Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1.
- Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight:volume
relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes. Allow for bulking
of damp sand.
- Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Use a suitable forced action
mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type mixer.
- Application: At normal temperatures use within two hours. Do not use after initial set. Do
not retemper.
578
CRACK CONTROL REINFORCEMENT

- Type to BS 4483: Table A.1 D49/98 to approval .
- Installation: Place centrally in depth of bed. Lap not less than 100 mm and securely tie
together with steel wire.
- Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.
580
POROUS TILES
- Tiles to be bedded in cement:sand: Soak in clean water for at least 30 minutes. Fix as
soon as surface water has drained.
590
COVED TILE SKIRTINGS

- Sequence: Bed solid to wall before laying floor tiles.
- Bedding: Cement based adhesive.
600
SIT-ON TILE SKIRTINGS

- Sequence: Bed solid to wall after laying floor tiles.
- Bedding: Cement based adhesive.
610
MULTISTOREY EXTERNAL TILING

- Sequence: Start fixing at the highest level and work downwards. Protect exposed top
edges.
- Copings, sills, etc.: Complete as soon as practicable.
650
THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS)

- Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of
approximately 1 m. Trowel to ribbed profile.
- Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.
651
THIN BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)

- Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of about 1 m.
Comb surface.
- Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float
coat.
- Finished adhesive thickness (maximum): 3 mm.
660
THIN BED ADHESIVE - MESH BACKED MOSAIC (WALLS)

- Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
230
Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical
joints. Prevent slippage of sheets. Lightly beat mosaics into adhesive.
Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaic
tiles.
661
THIN BED ADHESIVE - PAPER FACED MOSAIC (WALLS)

- Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
- Preparing mosaic sheets: Pregrout. Remove surplus before fixing.
- Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical
joints.
- Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaic
tiles.
- Paper face: Before adhesive hardens completely, remove paper face. Complete grouting.
Wash off glue from face of mosaic.
670
THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)

- Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
- Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float
coat.
- Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.
690
CEMENT:SAND (WALLS)
- Preparation: Dampen background.
- Application: Apply floated coat: 1:3-4 cement:sand mortar bedding.
- Thickness (maximum): 10 mm.
- Finish: Equivalent to wood float. Before tiling allow to stiffen slightly.
- Tiling: Without delay, apply 2 mm thick coat of 1:2 cement:fine sand mortar to backs of
tiles, filling keys. Press tiles firmly onto float coat. Tap firmly into position.
710
THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)

- Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.
- Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly
onto position.
720
CEMENT:SAND BED (FLOORS)

- Mortar bedding mix: 1:3-4 cement:sand.
- Consistency: Stiff plastic.
- Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.
- Finished bed thickness: 15-25 mm.
- Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with adhesive.
Press tiles firmly into position.
730
SEMIDRY CEMENT:SAND BED (FLOORS)

- Mortar bedding mix: 1:3.5-4 cement:sand.
- Water content: A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fully compacted.
- Preparation: Dampen base.
- Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.
- Finished bed thickness (minimum): 25 mm.
- Finished bed thickness (maximum): 100 mm.
- Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with a neat
cement slurry. Beat tiles firmly into position.
740
CEMENT:LIME:SAND BED (FLOORS)

- Mortar bedding mix: 1:1: 3 cement:lime:sand.
- Lime:sand (coarse stuff): Ready-mixed to BS EN 998.
- Sand: To BS EN 12620.
Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1.
231
Consistency: Stiff plastic. A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fully
compacted.
Preparation: Dampen base.
Laying: Lay and compact bed to level.
Tiling: Tamp tiles firmly into position.
MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

805
SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS .

- Edging material: Stainless steel angle.
- Size: 75 x 50 x 5 mm.
- Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement:sand.
- Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Fixing to base: Stainless steel screws at 600 mm centers.
- Joint width: To match with the joint in base.
- Sealant: Forsroc or approved equal.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.
815
SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS

- Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base/ background. Centre over joints in base/
background.
- Width: To match with the joint in base.
- Sealant: Forsroc or approved equal.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.
825
STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS

- Manufacturer: To approval.
- Joint width: As required.
- Fixing to base: To manufacturers recommendation.
- Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base.
835
METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS

- Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement:sand.
- Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Fixing to base: Stainless Steel Screws at 300 mm centers or To manufacturers
recommendation.
855
CEMENT:SAND GROUTING MIX

- Grout mix:
- Cement: Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 type CEM/ 42.5.
- Sand:
Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS 1199 table 1, Type B.
Joint widths of 3-6 mm: To BS 5385-5 table 2.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1:1 .
- Pigment: To approval and comply with BS EN 12878.
- Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.
865
CEMENT:LIME:SAND GROUTING MIX

- Grout mix:
- Cement: Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 type CEM/ 42.5.
- Hydrated nonhydraulic lime: To BS EN 459.
- Sand:
232
Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS 1199 table 1, Type B.

Joint widths of 3-6 mm: To BS 5385-5 table 2.
- Proportions (cement:lime:sand): 1:1:3 .
- Pigment: To approval and comply with BS EN 12878.
Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.
875
GROUTING
- Sequence: Grout when bed/ adhesive has set sufficiently to prevent disturbance of tiles.
- Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
- Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from
blemishes.
- Profile: To approval.
- Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.
885
COLOURED GROUT
- Staining of tiles: Not permitted.
- Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If discoloration
occurs apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.
233
SECTION 12b: EXTERNAL CLADDING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.
010
-
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.
- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including Full size details at positions indicated on
drawings and/ or as desired by the Consultant .
- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed
incorporated products and finishes, including Thermal insulation, sealants, fittings and fixtures.
- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed
cladding.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/ background.
- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown on preliminary design
drawings.
- Schedule of builders work, special provisions and special attendance by others.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
- Areas of non-compliance with specification.
TYPES OF CLADDING
110
-
CLADDING TO Elevation
framework/ Curtain wall framing.
Lime stone:
- Name (traditional): Patara Honed.
- Alternative Name:
- Petrological family: Limestone.
- Colour: Beige Fine grain.
- Origin: Isparta Turkey for the lime stone or to approval.
- Supplier: MetaMar www.metamarmarble.com.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation
- Thickness: 13 mm for Lime stone
Fixings: As determined by clause 230, 305 and 315.
Joints:
- Type: Polyurethane sealant as clause 610.
- Bond pattern: Half lapped.
- Width (nominal): 8 mm.
- Profile: Recessed and Curved.
Cavity width (nominal): 100 mm.
- Air gap: Minimum 10 mm.
Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.
Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.
Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor
Vapour control: Bitumen / Rubber latex emulsion protective coating.
Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, pins and expanding
anchor.
Section 12b, External Cladding
234
Physical and Mechanical Properties

METRIC SYSTEM
Hardness
Bulk Specific Gravity (ASTM
C97) Dry
Density
Water Absorption by Weight
(ASTM C97)
Water Absorption by Volume (TS
699)
SI SYSTEM
BRITISH SYSTEM
Mohs
4 - 4.5
Mohs
4 - 4.5
Mohs
4 - 4.5
gr/cm
2.470 0.010
kg/m
2470 10
lbs/ft
154.20 0.62
gr/cm
2.707 0.001
kg/m
lbs/ft
168.99 0.06
1.507 0.202
1.507 0.202
3.691 0.492
2707 1
1.507
0.202
3.691
0.492
3.691 0.492
Effective Porosity (TS 699)
3.691 0.492
23.2 6.3
3.691 0.492
Real Porosity (TS 699)
8.76
8.76
8.76
Fullness Ratio (TS 699)
91.24
91.24
91.24
kg/cm
1169.9 57.2
MPa
114.7 5.6
Psi
16641 813
Compressive Strength (TS 699)

Compressive Strength (ASTM
C170)
.. Dry
.. Saturated
Compressive Strength After
Freezing (TS 699)
Changing of Compressive
Strength After Freezing (TS 699)
Bending Strength (TS 699)
.. Dry
.. Saturated
Strength to Blow (TS 699)
Abrasion Strength (Bohme) TS
699)
Bulk Specific Gravity (ASTM
C97)
Water Absorption by Weight
(ASTM C97)
Compressive Strength (ASTM
C170)
.. Dry
.. Saturated
Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C99)
. Dry
. Saturated
111
kg/cm
1334.9 72.2
1240.4 50.6
MPa
kg/cm
1031.7 40.7
MPa
11.80
kg/cm
112.7 15.5
140.4 24.2
MPa
kg.cm/
cm
cm/50
cm
23.2 6.3
27.75 1.188
kg.cm/
cm
cm/5
0cm
gr/cm
2470 0.010
kg/m
1.507 0.202
kg/cm
kg/cm
1334.9 72.2
1240.7 50.6
138.1 6.9
144.6 6.4
MPa
MPa
130.9 7.1
121.6
4.96
101.2
3.99
Psi
18988 1027
14644 720
Psi
146751 579
11.80
11.80
11.1 1.5
13.8 2.4
Psi
1602.8 221
1997 343.4
27.75
1.188
kg.cm/
cm
cm/50
cm
2470 10
lbs/ft
23.2 6.3
23.2 6.3
27.75 1.188
154.20 0.62
%
130.9 7.1
121.6
4.96
13.5 0.7
14.2 0.6
Psi
Psi
18988.3
1027
17644 720
1963.6 99.3
2057.2 91.3
FASCIA CERAMIC TILES NITTO SEITOSHO

- Ceramic:
- Name: Nitto Seitosho.
- Colour: Light Grey AQ471 and Dark Grey AQ472 and to Architects Approval.
- Origin: Japan.
- Finish: Matt.
- Size: Flat tiles 60 x 227 x 9 mm.
- Size: Corner tiles 1 (50+168) x 60 x 9 mm.
- Size: Corner tiles 2 (50+227) x 60 x 9 mm.
235
112
-
113
-
Size: Corner tiles 3 (50+60) x 227 x 9 mm.

Slip resistance value (SRV) minimum to BS 7932
Pendulum Test value (PVT) minimum to BS 7932
Surface roughness (Rz) to BS 1134
Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72
3
Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m .
Background/ Base: Concrete Screed.
Adhesive: Suitable product to BS EN 12004, Keraflex from Mapei or approved equal.
- Type/ classification: C2TE.
Joint width: 9 to 12 mm.
Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, Ultracolor plus from Mapei or approved equal.
- Type/ classification: CG2WA.
Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in
each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimeter
movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints in the base.
Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval
Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtain wall
framing.
Prefrabricated Crystallised Glass ceramic:
- Name: Neoparies.
- Colour: Pure White (403).
- Origin: Nippon Electrica Glass co. Ltd. Japan and to approval.
- Finish: Polished to approval.
- Supplier: Trade Enigneering LLC or to approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects
deleterious to strength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site,
season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance with shop drawings
prepared by supplier.
- Thickness: 16 mm.
Fixings: As per manucatures detail and as determined by clause 230, 305 and 315.
Joints:
Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, shims, washers, pins
and expanding anchor.
Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Lalitpur yellow.
- Colour: Yellow.
236
114
-
Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.

Supplier: To approval.
Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation
- Thickness: 22 mm.
Joints:
Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of SurfaPore C from Nanophos,
Greece or equivalent
anchor.
framework/ Curtainwall framing.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Autumn Brown.
- Colour: Brown.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm, 600 x 600 mm, 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation
- Thickness: 22 mm.
Joints:
Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of SurfaPore C from Nanophos, Greece or
equivalent
anchor.
237
115
-
116
-
CLADDING TO Elevation, Border, Coping and Riser

Sand Stone:
- Name (traditional): Mandana Red.
- Colour: Maroon Red.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm, 600 x 600 mm, 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation
- Thickness: 22 mm.
Joints:
equivalent
anchor.
CLADDING TO Elevation,
.
Stone:
- Name (traditional): Slate.
- Petrological family: Metamorphic.
- Colour: Grey.
- Finish: Cleft natural to approval.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 450 mm, 450 x 450 mm, 450 x 600, 600 x 600 mm as per Elevation
- Thickness: 12 mm.
Joints:
238
equivalent
anchor.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK
210
230
-
DESIGN
Cladding: Complete detailed design.
- Standard: To BS 8298.
Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.
FIXINGS
Standard: To BS 8298, clauses 2.3 and 3.10.
Designer/ Supplier: Halfen or approved equal.
Type: Secretly fixed.
Material: Stainless Steel grade 1,4401 to BS EN 10888 (Grade 316 to previous BS Codes).
Dimensions: Not less than recommended by manufacturers.
Extent of adjustment: To accommodate support structure/ background and cladding fabrication/
installation tolerances.
Method of fixing to backing wall: Expanding bolts and sockets.
245
-
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

Submit the following cladding particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support structure/ background.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and construction with methods of
adjustment and tolerances.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with Main Contract master programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with Main Contract master
programme.
- A quality plan in compliance with the CWCT Guide to good practice for facades, Section 6.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or relaxations.
261
-
STONE SAMPLES
General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples or arrange for samples that
represent the range of variation in appearance to be inspected.
271
-
FIXING SAMPLES
General: During detailed design, submit samples of every type. Clearly identify. Include
manufacturers recommended torque figures.
Shims: Submit dimensions.
281
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
2
Size: 100 m .
Location: To approval.
DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
305
-
INTEGRITY OF CLADDING
Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of slabs/panels, sizes, number and spacing of fixings,
configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of accessories to ensure the cladding
system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and
thermal movements without damage.
Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2 Standard Method appropriate to location, exposure, height,
building shape, and size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent structures.
239
Basic wind speed (Vb): 24 m/s.

Altitude factor (Sa): Determine in accordance with the code. depend upon the method adopted.
Direction factor (Sd): 1.
Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
Probability factor (Sp): 1.
Terrain and building factor (Sb): Determine in accordance with the code. depend upon the method
adopted.
.
- External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5.
- Internal
pressure
coefficients
(Cpi):
As
determined
from
BS 6399-2, clause 2.6.
- Dominant opening: To drawings .
Impact loads: to BS 8200:
- Location and category: To structural calculations.
Temporary imposed loads: To structural calculations.
315
-
INTEGRITY OF LINING
Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of slabs/ panels, size, number and spacing of fixings,
configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of accessories to ensure the lining will
resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and thermal
movements without damage.
325
-
PRELIMINARY TEST INFORMATION

Stone type: As clause 110.
- Petrographic examination to BS EN 12407.
- Water absorption coefficient by capillarity to BS EN 1925: Submit.
- Apparent density to BS EN 1936: Submit.
- Real density to BS EN 1936: Submit.
- Open porosity to BS EN 1936: Submit.
- Total porosity to BS EN 1936: Submit.
- Flexural strength to BS EN 12372: Submit.
330
-
ACCURACY OF ERECTION
Elevation joint widths: Within joint lengths, including in-line continuations across tranverse joints, as
follows:
- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than 25%.
- Variations: Evenly distribute, with no sudden changes.
Offset in elevation: Between nominally in-line edges across transverse joints not to exceed 15% width
of joint.
Offset in plan or section: Between flat faces or adjacent panels across joints not to exceed 15% width
of joint.
Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant manufacturer.
Finished work: Square, regular, true to line and plane with satisfactory fit at junctions.
TESTING
405
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Testing: Carried out by a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) approved independent
laboratory or Local approved laboratory.
415
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Testing: Carried out by the stone supplier/ contractor and witnessed/ certified by ______ .
425
-
STONE PRODUCTION TESTS

3
Frequency of tests: After quarrying every 15 m of stone.
Procedures:
- Water absorption coefficient by capillarity to BS EN 1925.
- Real and apparent density to BS EN 1936.
- Flexural strength to BS EN 12372
Results: Submit prior to fabrication.
240
435
-
SITE TESTING OF FIXINGS TO DETERMINE ULTIMATE LOAD

Number and location of test fixings: As desired by the consultant.
Test method: To BS 5080-1 and Construction Fixings Association guidance note Procedure for site
testing construction fixings.
445
-
SITE TESTING OF FIXINGS DURING INSTALLATION

Number and location of test fixings: As desired by the consultant.
Test method: To BS 5080-1 and Construction Fixings Association guidance note Procedure for site
testing construction fixings.
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
510
-
GENERALLY
Location of joints: Joints must occur only at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.
Electrolytic corrosion: Isolate dissimilar metals.
Prefabrication: Machine cut and drill products in workshop wherever possible.
Identification: Mark or tag products. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.
Natural bed: Indicate on a non exposed surface of each stone.
Cleanliness: Keep facework clean. Rubbing to remove marks and stains not permitted.
520
-
CUTTING OF STONE
Standard: To BS 8298 for production generally, including permissible deviations.
Bedding: Appropriate to position.
Oversize stones: Leave selected stone units oversize, to accommodate deviations within building
structure. Cut to precise dimensions taken on site.
- Selected units: Clearly identify on shop drawings.
530
-
INSPECTION OF STONE UNITS

Give notice:
- At appropriate stages of production.
- Before dispatch to site.
540
-
SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE
Contractors survey:
- Programme: Not less than 4 weeks before commencement of cladding installation.
- Scope: Geometric survey of supporting structure, checking line, level and fixing points.
- Coordinate: With surveys for adjacent cladding.
- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection.
Setting out: Establish erection datum points, lines and levels for a complete elevation at a time unless
otherwise agreed.
550
-
INSTALLATION OF INTERFACES
General: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly with neat overlaps to cladding to form weatherproof
junctions.
560
-
METALWORK
Material standards and fabrication: To approval.
570
-
WELDING
In situ welding: Not permitted.
575
-
WELDING
In situ welding: Permitted subject to completion of a hot work permit form and compliance with its
requirements.
580
-
FIXING
Torque figures and shim dimensions: Do not exceed fixing manufacturers recommendations.
Grouting: Secure fixings in place in cladding and support structure/ background with cement:sand,
epoxy or modified polymer mix, as recommended by the stone supplier.
241
590
-
External cladding: Do not use mortar spacer dabs. Keep cavity clear of debris.
Give notice:
- Before covering up loadbearing fixings.
- Before proceeding with next course on completion of: Plinth course and Every third stone course.
CEMENT:LIME:CRUSHED STONE MORTAR JOINTING
General: As section Z21.
Mix: Cement:lime:crushed stone 1:2:8-9.
Crushed stone: Colour matched and passing a 1.4 mm sieve.
- Colour matching: Submit samples.
Preparation: Wet stones thoroughly.
Laying: Full mortar bed with joints and voids filled.
- Cavities: Clear of mortar.
Appearance: Neat and consistent.
Temporary distance spacers: Remove.
610
-
SEALANT JOINTING
Sealant: Polyurethane.
- Manufacturer: fosroc or approved equal.
- Colour: To match the stone colour to approval.
- Application: As section Z22.
630
-
SEALANT MOVEMENT/ OTHER JOINTS

Sealant: Multiple component High performance polyurethane sealant.
- Manufacturer: Fosroc or approved equal.
- Colour: To match the stone colour to approval.
- Application: To approval.
Joint widths: Where not specified, to be as small as practicable. Allow for shrinkage, thermal and other
movements in structure and cladding.
242
SECTION 12c: WOODEN FLOORING

1.
GENERAL : WOOD GYMNASIUM FLOORING
1.1.
REFERENCES
1.1.1.
DIN Performance Standard 18032 Part 2
1.1.2.
EN Performance Standard 14904 World Standard
1.1.3.
FSC Forest Stewardship Council
1.1.4.
LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
1.1.5.
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
1.1.6.
PUR-Performance Uniformity Rating Standards
1.2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1.
Manufacturer
1.2.1.1. Manufacturer of resilient flooring shall be a firm specializing in manufacturing

products specified in this section.
1.2.1.2. Basis of design shall be AacerCush I sports floor system as provided by
Aacer Flooring. (877) 582-1181, www.Aacerflooring.com.
1.2.1.3. Materials other than those listed must be approved 10 days prior by written
addendum. Materials from non-approved manufacturers will not be accepted.
1.2.2.
Installer
1.2.2.1 The installation of the floor system described in these specifications shall be
completed by a firm familiar with the requirements of the system specified
and fully experienced in procedures required for installing athletic flooring
manufactured by Aacer Flooring.
1.2.2.2 Installer shall be liable for all matters related to installation for a period of one
year after the floor has been substantially installed and completed.
1.2.3.
Installer must have Aacer installation accreditation.

a) Optional: MFMA accreditation
1.2.4.
Performance Testing
1.2.4.1 Flooring system shall have been independently tested to the International
Standards: DIN 18032, Part 2 or EN 14904.
1.2.4.2 Independent DIN testing laboratory must be recognized by the MFMA and
test to all the required standards of the DIN testing methodologies.
1.2.4.3 Independent DIN testing laboratory shall have Scientific Body Membership in
the International Association of Sports Surface Sciences (ISSS).
1.3.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Specification -Submit Aacer Flooring specification sheets and shop drawings as

required.
Section 12c, WOODEN FLOORING
243
B.
Sample -Submit required number of samples of the specified system as requested

by the owner/architect.
C.
Maintenance Guidelines -Upon completion of floor, send the Aacer Floor

Maintenance Guide to the owner. This guide will explain the proper HVAC and
building maintenance requirements as well as floor cleaning and servicing
guidelines to assure proper floor performance and longevity.
1.4.
WORKING CONDITIONS
A.
The wood flooring and its components specified herein shall not be delivered or
installed until all wet trades and overhead work is completed. This includes all
masonry, painting, plaster, tile, marble, and terrazzo, as well as all overhead
mechanical trades. The building shall be fully enclosed and weather tight and all
permanent windows and doorways shall be installed. Permanent heating and air
conditioning shall be installed and working in accordance with building occupation
requirements.
B.
The concrete substrate shall be determined fully cured by industry standards. It

shall be free of all foreign materials and broom cleaned when turned over to the
floor installer. Permanent HVAC units for the building shall have been operating a
minimum of one week prior to the floor installation start up.
C.
During and after installation, building HVAC systems shall maintain a temperature
and humidity range compatible with the expected high and low moisture content
range of the flooring. The floor installer, based on the buildings HVAC control and
geographical situation, shall determine this range.
D.
Flooring must be stored on site in a dry, well-ventilated area while acclimating to

site conditions. Moisture content of wood shall be consistent with the ambient
conditions of the building as it will be maintained when occupied.
1.5.
WARRANTY
A.
Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete wooden
flooring system
1. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects
in material and workmanship and failure of flooring system a period of ten years
from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.
2. The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Barrier 6 mil polyethylene
B.
Resilient Pads
1. AacerCush 3/8 pad, extruded, black 60 durometer
2. Optional Pads (Specify of Delete)
a. Aacer Performance pad 3/4", extruded, black 60 durometer
b. Aacer Eco pad 7/16, recycled rubber, black 60 durometer
c. Aacer Bi-Power pad 12mm, EPDM, red 55 durometer
C.
Subfloor
1. Nominal 2x3x4 S4S, Spruce, Pine, of Fir with pads attached 12 on center.
244
2. FSC Certified (Specify or Delete) Subfloor must be certified by the Forest

Stewardship Council
D.
Flooring
1. 25/32 x 2-1/4 2nd and Better grade northern Hard Maple flooring, TGEM,
MFMA grade marked and stamped as manufactured by Aacer Flooring.
2. Optional Sizes and Grades (Specify or Delete)
a. 25/32 x 1-1/2 ; 25/32 x 2-1/2; 33/32 x 2-1/4,33/32 x 1-1/2
b. 1st grade, 3rd grade, 3rd and better grade
3. FSC Certified (Specify or Delete) Maple must be certified by the Forest
Stewardship Council
Expansion Bead (Specify or Delete) Flooring shall include 1/64 Expansion Bead.
E.
Fasteners
1. Flooring -2 barbed cleats.
F.
Finish Materials Any seal and finish approved by the MFMA
G.
Game Lines Compatible with finish and as specified by layout design.
H.
Wall Base Heavy duty, molded, vented cove base with pre-molded outside
corners.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1.
PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
A.
Floor installer shall verify slab tolerance of concrete and report any corrections to
general contractor.
B.
Room shall be broom cleaned and free of any foreign debris.
C.
Floor installer shall document site and working conditions prior to and during
installation. This documentation shall become a part of any warranty and may or
may not affect fulfillment of any warranty.
3.2.
INSTALLATION
A.
SUBFLOOR
1. Cover entire slab with 6 mil polyethylene, sealing and lapping joints a minimum
of 6.
2. Install sleepers with factory pads attached at right angle to long dimension of
room a maximum 9 on center for 25/32 flooring. (Note: 12 on center for
33/32, 8 on center for 3rd grade.)
3. Install solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position, and
below portable goals.
4. Provide 1-1/2 expansion voids at perimeter and all vertical obstructions.
B.
MAPLE FLOORING
245
1.
Install Aacer maple flooring parallel with the long dimension of room. Flooring shall
be power nailed every 10 to 12 O.C. with all end joints properly driven tight.
2.
Expansion joints may be required between flooring strips intermittently throughout

the floor. Requirements will be determined by site and geographical conditions.
3.
Provide a minimum 2 expansion void at all walls and permanent obstructions.
3.3.
FINISHING
A.
FLOOR SANDING
Machine sand entire floor with multiple grit papers to a smooth and uniform surface,
free from edger marks and drum drops.
Remove all sanding dust and lint from entire surface by vacuum and/or tack.
B.
FINISHING AND GAME LINES

1. Inspect entire floor to be sure surface is ready to accept seal and finish. Floor
should be free from dust and debris.
2. Apply (2) coats of approved seal and (2) coats of approved finish per
manufacturers label instructions.
3. Floor shall be buffed, cleaned and tacked between coats.
4. Apply game lines and logos as indicated by drawings between seal and finish
coats. Paint shall be compatible with finish.
C.
BASE INSTALLATION
1.
3.4.
Install vent cove base with cove base adhesive and/or mechanical attachment to
wall. Use pre-molded outside corners and mitered inside corners.
CLEANUP
A. CLEANUP
1. Remove excess debris and waste material from the work area.
2. General Contractor shall lock floor area after floor is finished to allow proper curing
time. If general contractor or owner requires use of gym before proper curing time,
they shall protect the floor by covering with non-marring Kraft paper.
246
SECTION 12d: RESILENT FLOORING

1. GENERAL : RUBBER FLOORING
1.1.
REFERENCES (Industry Standards)

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.1.1.
ASTM D 2047
Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of

Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James
Machine
1.1.2.
ASTM D 3389
Standard
Test
Method
for
Coated
Fabrics
Abrasion
Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abrader)

1.1.3.
ASTM E 84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
1.1.4.
ASTM E 648
Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor

Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
1.1.5.
ASTM E 662
Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid Materials
1.1.6.
ASTM F 150
Standard
Test
Method
for
Electrical
Resistance
of
Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring

1.1.7.
ASTM F 710
Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive

Resilient Flooring
1.1.8.
ASTM F 1344
Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile
1.1.9.
ASTM F 1859
Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering

Without Backing
1.1.10. ASTM F 1860
Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering With

Backing
1.1.11. ASTM F 1861
Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base
1.1.12. ASTM F 2169
Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads
1.1.13. ASTM F 2170
Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
1.1.14. ASTM F 2420
Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity on

the Surface of Concrete Floor Slabs Using Relative Humidity
Probe Measurement and Insulated Hood
1.1.15. FTM 4046 101
Static Decay
1.1.16. ESD S7.1 100
Resistive Characterization of Flooring Materials
1.1.17. ESD STM 97.2
Floor Materials and Footwear - Voltage Measurement on a

Person
1.1.18. MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
1.1.19. PUR
Performance Uniformity Rating Standards
Section 12d, RESILIENT FLOORING
247
1.2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1.2.1.
NFPA 253
Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source
1.2.2.
NFPA 258
Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by

Solid Materials
1.3.
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.
Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's product data, installation guide, and
maintenance guide for each material proposed for use (available on

www.nora.com).
1.3.2.
Samples:
Submit two A-4 size verification samples of each type of product
specified in colour selected for use.

1.3.3.
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) are available for adhesives, heat weld rod,
cold weld and cleaning agents.
1.4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1.
Manufacturer: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a minimum

of 10 years experience with resilient flooring of types equivalent to those
specified. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in this Section,
shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance requirements specified not
less than 10 days prior to bid date.
a. Colour Matching: Provide resilient flooring products, including wall base
and accessories, from one manufacturer to ensure colon matching.
b. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation.
1.4.2.
Installers Qualifications: Installer shall be nora approved for the requirements of

the project.
1.5.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.5.1.
Deliver materials in labelled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Protect from damage due to weather,
excessive temperatures, and construction operations.

1.5.2.
Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to

room temperature prior to installation.
248
1.6.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.6.1.
Maintain a temperature of 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) plus or minus 5 degrees

F (3 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring. Specified temperature
shall be maintained at least 48 hours before, during, and 72 hours after
installation.
1.7.
WARRANTY
1.7.1.
Provide
manufacturer's
standard
one-year
warranty
against
defects
manufacturing and workmanship of resilient flooring products.
in
Provide
manufacturer's standard limited wear warranty/conductivity warranty as specified

under each product as applicable.
1.8.
EXTRA MATERIALS
1.8.1.
Furnish full size units equal to 2 percent of quantity of resilient flooring installed
as extra materials.
Properly label and package extra materials.
Deliver to
Owner's designated storage area.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
2.1.1.
Provide resilient flooring by nora systems, GmbH, Hoehner Weg 2-4, 69469
Weinheim, Germany; telephone +49 6201 80-3950, or +49 6201 88-3950; Locally
sourced by nora systems Middle East, Ms. Lama ElKurdy; +971 4 450 8175; Fax:
+971 4 450 8374; lama.elkurdy@nora.com
2.2.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

NTS: SELECT 2.03B ESD SHEET GOOD FOR: OR-ROOMS
2.2.1.
Rubber Sheet for ESD Protection Control: FOR CLEAN ROOMS, ELECTRONIC
MANUFACTURING
Commercial Traffic.
1.
Product Name:
noraplan eco, Article 1490, smooth surface, 2.0 mm

thickness, 1.22m x 15lm roll size.
2.
Material:
nora rubber with abundant natural fillers and

environmentally compatible color pigments.
3.
Limited Wear Warranty:
4.
Standard:
5.
Abrasion Resistance:
5 year wear.
ASTM F 1859 rubber sheet floor covering without backing.

Taber abrasion test, ASTM D 3389, H-18 wheel, 500
gram load, 1000 cycles, gram weight loss not greater than
.60.
249
6.
Hardness:
ASTM D 2240, Shore A, equal to or greater than 85.
7.
Slip Resistance:
Static coefficient of friction (James Test): ASTM D 2047,

equal to or greater than 0.5.
8.
Asbestos-Free:
Products shall contain no asbestos.
9.
Flammability:
ASTM E 648; NFPA 253; NBSIR 75 950 result to be not less

than 0.45 watts per square centimeter, Class 1.
10. Smoke Density:
ASTM E 662, NFPA 258, NBS smoke density, less than 450.
11. Burn Resistance:
Cigarette and solder burn resistance.
12. Halogen-Free:
Products shall contain no halogens.
13. PVC-Free:
Products shall contain no poly-vinyl-chloride.
14. IAQ:
Product shall meet GreenGuard requirements.
15. Isolative Properties: antistatic < 2000V body voltage generation. IEC 60093/VDE
0303 T 30 >10 x 10Ohm.
16. ISO 14001:
Manufacturer shall be ISO 14001 Environmental

Management Systems Certified
17. Color:
As selected.
18. Technical Data:
Properties in acc. to EN 1817/ EN 14521 per annex

Technical Datasheet or by www.nora.com
19. Installation System: Use only nora pro install system products following the
current nora Installation Guide that may consist of part or all
of the following steps depending upon the substrate
conditions and requirements of the specific project.
Step 1 nora membrane (see Installation Guide for
requirements).
Step 2 nora primer (see Installation Guide for
requirements).
Step 3 nora leveler (see Installation Guide for
requirements
Step 4 nora patch (see Installation Guide for
requirements).
Step 5 nora adhesives, the flooring usage and substrate
conditions will determine the appropriate adhesive. Contact
your nora representative for specific recommendations.
250
3. EXECUTION
3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that spaces to receive resilient flooring are suitable for installation. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations including the following:
a. Substrates shall be dry and clean.
b. Substrates shall be free of depressions, raised areas, or other defects
which would telegraph through installed flooring.
c.
Temperature of resilient flooring and substrate shall be within specified

tolerances.
d. Moisture condition and adhesive bond tests shall be performed as

specified.
B. For applications on concrete, verify curing, hardening, or breaking compounds have

not been used. If there are any, do not proceed until compounds have been removed
as specified.
C. For applications on concrete slab on grade or below grade, verify vapor retarder
below slab was installed. If no vapor retarder was installed, do not proceed with work
unless an effective fully warranted surface moisture mitigation system is applied first.
D. Test for moisture as detailed in ASTM F 2170. Relative humidity shall not exceed
75%. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are
acceptable.
E. Perform adhesive bond test in each major area, minimum 1 per 1,000 square feet,
prior to installation. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and
no moisture is present. Do not proceed with work until results of bond test are
acceptable.
3.1.2.
PREPARATION
A. Comply with ASTM F 710 and manufacturer's installation guide for surface
preparation. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring adhesive by
method acceptable to manufacturer.
a. Concrete floors with steel troweled (slick) finish shall be mechanically
roughened (sanded) to ensure suitable profile and to promote a good
adhesion bond.
b. Concrete floors with curing, hardening, and breaking compounds shall be
abraded with mechanical methods only to remove compounds. Use
blastrac, diamond grinding or similar equipment with vacuum attachment.
251
B. Fill voids, cracks, and depressions with suitable smoothing compounds acceptable to
manufacturer. Remove projections and repair other defects to tolerances acceptable
to manufacturer.
C. Vacuum subfloors immediately prior to installation to remove loose particles (do not
use oil or wax based sweeping compounds). Use only water based compounds that
do not leave behind residues which can interfere with adhesion.
3.1.3.
INSTALLATION
A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturers printed installation guide.

Comply with the following:
a. Do not mix manufacturing batches of a color within the same area.
b. Do not install resilient flooring over building expansion joints.
c.
Do not install defective or damaged resilient flooring.
d. Layout resilient flooring to provide equal size at perimeter. Adjust layout as

necessary to eliminate resilient flooring which is cut to less than half full width.
e. Lay resilient flooring with arrows in the same direction (excluding borders and
some flash coving methods).
f.
Install resilient flooring without cracks or voids at seams. Lay seams together
without stress.
g. Scribe resilient flooring neatly at perimeter and obstructions.

h. Extend resilient flooring into reveals, closets, and similar openings.
i.
Remove excess adhesive immediately.
j.
Install reducer strips at exposed edges.
B. Install resilient wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation guide.
Install in longest practical lengths. Tightly adhere to substrate. Fill voids due to
seams in substrate materials with a suitable filler material.
C. Install resilient stairtreads and accessories in accordance with manufacturers printed
installation guide. Install reducer strips at exposed edges. Tightly adhere to
substrate only where recommended by manufacturer. Fill voids due to seams in
substrate materials with a suitable filler material.
D. noraplan SEAMLESS FLOORING INSTALLATION (WHEN REQUIRED). Rout
seams and heat weld together with coordinated colored heat welding rod or cold weld
with coordinated colored cold weld compound in accordance with resilient flooring
manufacturer's installation guide.
E. norament SEAMLESS FLOORING INSTALLATION (WHEN REQUIRED). Rout
seams and weld together with coordinated colored cold weld compound in
accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's installation guide.
252
F. FLASH COVING OF SHEET GOOD (WHEN REQUIRED). Extend flooring up the wall
in a flash-coved method, with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations, to a
height as indicated. Provide cove stick and suitable capping strip. All vertical internal
and external seams shall be cold welded with coordinated colored cold weld
compound. Follow resilient flooring manufacturer's installation guide.
G. SANITARY BASE (WHEN REQUIRED). All seams between sanitary base and
flooring, and between sanitary base sections shall be cold welded together with
coordinated colored cold weld compound in accordance with resilient flooring
manufacturers installation guide.
3.1.4.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Touch-up and repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and
replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
B. Clean flooring surfaces only after adhesive has fully cured, no sooner than 72 hours
after installation, unless agreed with nora representative. Clean surfaces using
non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturers maintenance
guide. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned.
C. Protect completed work from damage and construction operations and inspect
immediately before final acceptance of project.
D. No metal or plastic wheels, the shape of contact surfaces of equipment wheels must
be flat, shore hardness A of the wheels material must be 90. Office
chairs/furniture wheels shall be soft type (W according to EN 12529).
253
SECTION 13: WINDOWS AND GLASS

1. GENERAL
Section includes fabrication, supply and installation of aluminum framed doors /
windows
complete with all related necessary accessories, for completion to
the Engineers approval.
2. RELATED WORKS
Supply of finishing hardware.
Sealing under Joint sealants.
Glass and glazing.
3. STANDARDS AND DIRECTIVES
All metal works are to be executed according to the valid standards, directives,
government
Codes and building regulations, fire requirements and any other such applicable
regulations as:
a)
BS 952
b)
BS 6262 code of practice for glazing of buildings.
c)
BS 8000 Part 7 workmanship code of practice for glazing.
d)
DIN 1249 Flat glass for building construction.
e)
Din 1745 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy plate, sheet and strip
greater than 0.35 mm thickness, properties technical delivery conditions.
f)
DIN 1748 Wrought aluminum and aluminum extruded sections design,

permissible deviations.
g)
DIN 1783 Strips, plates and sheets of aluminum and wrought aluminum
alloys with thickness over 0.35 mm, cold-rolled: dimensions.
h)
EN 1364 part 1 for Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing
i)
EN 14449 for Tempered Safety Glass and Intumescent Interlayers
4. SHOP DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED

a)
Submit shop drawing indicating each door and door frame, the type of each
glass and frame, the materials being supplied, and the frame type finish.
Show the cutouts and reinforcement for hardware, anchors and locations of
exposed fastenings.
b)
Clearly indicate installation details for frames to walls. Show anchors, and
relationships of frame to applied finishes to walls and adjacent framing.
5. SPECIAL PROTECTION
a)
Instruct the Employer on proper care, operation and maintenance for all
doors.
b)
Suitable storage at site shall be provided by the General Contractor.
Section 13, WINDOWS AND GLASS
254
6.
c)
Under conditions of high humidity, ventilation or other, measures shall

be supplied by the Contractor to prevent the accumulation of surface
moisture.
d)
Supplier shall provide appropriate packaging to protect all finished

surfaces prior to leaving the factory and such protection shall be
maintained until the products are installed.
PRODUCTS
The following manufacturers and their products are acceptable.
Schuco by Alico or equal approved.
Other manufacturers are acceptable provided their products and applications meet
requirements of this section and are approved by the Engineer.
Hinges for Windows shall be equal to Schuco model Royal S50 N, outward opening with
double glazing.
7. MATERIALS
a)
Aluminum Extruded aluminum profiles of alloyAIMgSi 0.5 F22. or equivalent profiles

(WPC series) by US Aluminum Corporation.
b)
Steel parts for anchoring or bracing must either be or galvanized. During mounting
all necessary welding points shall be painted with epoxy zinc type protective coating.
c)
Stainless steel 316 type, brushed no. 4 finish.
d)
Selection of Profiles All required sections are to be chosen according to foreseen

application and data given by the detail drawings and the system manufacturer.
Thermally insulated outer and inner profiles must be continuously connected and
continuity of insulating bars maintained. All doors shall be capable of accepting 24
mm glazing panel.
8. GLAZING AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES

To the requirement of glass and glazing.
9. GLASS TYPES AND LOCATIONS
All glass in exterior aluminum doors and windows shall be 24 mm thick double glazing
units.
10. FINISH OF ALUMINIUM FOR DOORS
a)
b)
All exposed aluminum shall have powder coated finish.

Exposed fastening if occurring. Finished and coloured to match the finish and colour
of the material in which they appear. The finish provided shall be permanent and
durable.
11. FINISH OF HARDWARE FOR DOORS

Supply and install compatible hardware for all exterior aluminum doors and bi-parting
255
12. GLAZING
a)
b)
c)
The glazing of aluminum framed doors is to be executed using

permanently elastic EPDM gaskets.
Guidelines and directives of insulating glass suppliers are to be
strictly followed.
All glass unit assemblies shall be pre-fabricated and checked for
quality of seals and stamped / marked in the plant prior to delivery
and installation on site.
13. REINFORCEMENT
Where reinforcement is required, reinforce frames with galvanized steel channels,
plates or tubular section.
14. EXECUTION
14.1
14.2
Installation.
a)
Erect doorframes plumb, true and square, in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed directions.
b)
The anchoring of all aluminum elements must accommodate movements of the
building structure and of other elements attached, without loading or stressing
the aluminum construction.
c)
Accurately fit frames to provide tight installation and provide clearances required
due to expansion, contraction and deflection of building structure and frames.
d)
After adjustment, the anchorage devices shall be riveted, welded or positively
locked to prevent movement once alignment is achieved.
e)
Install all hardware, sills, cover plates, weather stripping and all other items,
shown, specified or necessary for a complete weather tight installation.
f)
Metal members shall be isolated where necessary to prevent corrosion due to
different metal-to-metal contact.
g)
Assume all responsibility for the design of the assembly, reinforcing, furring and
anchoring to suit each specific condition complying with the requirements
specified herein and as shown on the reviewed shop drawings.
Finish of Hardware.
Hardware to be as per supplier standard. All fittings to be powder coated matching
finish.
14.3
Installation - Doors
Install doors to ensure true alignment with frame, correct fit and smooth operation.
Install hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturers
instructions.
15. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

15.1
General:
Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure
of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing
materials; or other defects in construction.
256
15.2
Glass Design
Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for uetailing only. Confirm glass
thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for
various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses
and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
a) Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
b) Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project
from basic wind speed, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights
above grade indicated on Drawings.
c) Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically
or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
d) Maximum Lateral Deflection: Provide thickness required that limits center deflection
at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm),
whichever is less.
15.3
Thermal Movements:
Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
15.4
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties:

Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's
published test data.
15.5
Air Penetration Tests

a) Testing Method: In accordance with BS 5368: Part 1. Measure air velocity by means
of a directionally sensitive hot wire pyrometer used as an anemometer, or other suitable
instrument.
b) Wind Exposure: Limits specified for resistance to air penetration shall apply under
the following conditions:
a.
Wind Speed
: 140 km/sec.
b.
Pressure Difference
: 321 N/m2.
c.
Test Pressure
: 30 mm water gauge.
15.6
Water Penetration Tests

a) Testing Method: In accordance with BS 4315: Part 1 and Agreement Board MOAT
No. 1.
b) Wind Exposure: Limits specified for water penetration shall apply under the following
conditions:
a.
Wind Speed
: 18.7m/s.
b.
Pressure Difference
: 321 N/m2.
c.
Test Pressure, No Leakage 30 mm water gauge.
d.
Test Pressure No. Gross Leakage
: 50 mm water
gauge.
257
15.7
Resistance to Wind Pressure
a)
Elements shall resist sporadic pressure from wind gusts under specified exposure
conditions. There shall be no fracture or permanent deflection of any part, or any
deterioration expect as noted below of subsequent performance.
b)
Exposure Conditions: a. Wind Speed: 140 km/sec
c)
The deflection/span ratio of any part of a window or door shall not exceed 1/175 not
10 mm when exposed to pressure or suction.
16. REFERENCED STANDARDS

Products shall comply to the referenced standards. Following are the international
standards that are acceptable provided that the Contractor substantiates their
equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other components of the system.
Furnish copies of the current version if the referenced standards for comparison if so
required by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to insist on the named
product complying to the specified standard:
1. British Standards
2. American Standards
3. U.S. Federal Specifications
4. French Government Standards
5. West German Standard DIN 6
17. SUBMITTALS
20.1
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
20.2
Samples: 300-mm- square Samples for glass types and of 300-mm- long Samples for
sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color
of the adjoining framing system.
20.3
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying

that products furnished comply with requirements.
20.4
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant

manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing
channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
20.5
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the products comply
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
20.6
Certification of Guarantees: Provide the manufacturer's certification or guarantee of

performance of the following glass types supplied for the designed and specified
performance required:
1. Insulating Glass Units.
2. Tempered/Toughened Glass.
3. Coated Glass.
258
18. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Glazier Qualifications: An experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals"
article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product
test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current
sealant formulations within a 36-month period.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing
sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect
elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing
sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and
each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, and insulating
units) as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, tape sealants,* setting
blocks, and spacers).
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies:
Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to local authorities for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
and ANSI Z97.1.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product or
manufacturers and organizations, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer
to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following
inspecting and testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc
3. National Accreditation and Management Institute..
Mockups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated to verify
selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
259
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting fabrication.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion subject to the approval by the Engineer.
19. GLASS SPECIFICATION
19.1.
Main Glass: Emirates Glass, Saint Gobain, Glaverbel, Belgium, or equivalent

hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of the following
make up (6+16+6)
Outer layer: 6mm Tempered NN35T Blue Low-e on surface two of clear
Substrate
Inter Layer: 16mm Air Space
Inner Layer: 6 mm Clear float tempered glass at human contact level
Visible
Light Transmission %
Light Reflection / Out %
Light reflection / In %
12
13
Energy Reflection %
Energy Absorption %
22
Solar Energy
Energy Transmission
%
15
15
Solar Factor
Shading coefficient
U-Value W/m C
RHG
W/m
0.23
1.53
159
0.20
19.2.
Spandrel - 26mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
the following make up with FR extruded insulation and vapour barrier.
Outer layer: Same as noted on above as outer layer of main glass.
Inter layer: 16mm Air space
Inner layer: 6 mm obscured glass
19.3.
Bath Room - 26 mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed
unit of the following make up
Outer layer: Same as noted on above as outer layer of main glass.
Inner layer: 6 mm obscured tempered glass
260
19.4.
Railing
Single layer: 6mm clear float tempered glass + 1.52 PVB + 6mm clear float
tempered glass
19.5.
Skylight
Outer layer: 8mm Low-e on surface two of Blue tempered glass Substrate.
Inner layer: 6mm clear float tempered glass + 1.52 PVB + 6mm clear float
tempered glass
20. SAFETY GLASS - FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED-GLAZING

20.1.
Drawing reference(s):
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM DOOR LITE
Type Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449
Classification:
EW Integrity plus Radiation reduction.
Material :
Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant
Fire Resistance :
EW 30 / EW 60 / EW 120 compliance to EN 13501-2
Thickness Tolerance :
+2 to -1 mm
Length Tolerance :
2 mm
Impact Resistance :
2 (B) 2 classifications as per EN 12600
Thickness :
11 mm
Weight :
25 kg/m2
Sound Reduction :
37 db complying with EN 410-3
Light Transmission :
86% complying with EN 410
U value :
5.2 W/m2K complying with EN 673
g value :
0.73
Energy Transmission :
66% E
Energy reflection :
7%/7% E
Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com
All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to
complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should be part
of tested system and to manufacturers recommendations.
20.2.
Integrity plus Radiation reduction Safety glass for opening located far
from egress way
Integrity plus Radiation reduction Safety glass for opening located far
from egress way
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM LITE 120
Classification:
EW Integrity plus Radiation reduction.
Material :
Fire Resistance :
EW 120 / EI 15 compliance to: EN 13501-2
+2 to -1 mm
Length Tolerance :
2 mm
Impact Resistance :
Thickness :
14 mm
16 mm
20 mm
Weight :
31 kg/m2
36 kg/m2
46 kg/m2
Sound Reduction :
37db
40db
Complying with EN 410-3
Light Transmission :
85%
84%
82%
261
Complying with EN 410

Light Reflection :
9%/9% L
9%/9% L
8%/8% L
U value :
5.1 W/m2K
5.0 W/m2K
4.9W/m2K
complying with EN 673
- g value :
0.71
0.69
0.66
- Energy Transmission :
63% E
60% E
56% E
- Energy reflection :
7%/7% E
7%/7% E
7%/7% E
- Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com
- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to
complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should be
part of tested system and to manufacturers recommendations
-
20.3.
Other requirements: Units to be of
20.4.
Listed and labeled by an independent testing agency for fire-protection

ratings indicated, based on testing according to EN 1364 part 1
20.4.1. Test reports are to be submitted for the Engineers approval.

20.5.
Tempered Safety Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Tempered safety glass

made from multiple layered of toughened safety glass with intumescent
interlayers; in accordance with EN 14449
20.5.1. Fire-Protection Rating: Same as indicated for the assembly in which glazing
material is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing by an international
audit body like UL or TUV.
20.5.2. Fire Protection Type: Integrity and Insulation.
20.5.3. Unless otherwise specified in related specification sections, glazing
beads, accessories, sealants or gaskets shall be identical to those utilized in
the fire test of the fire rated glass.
20.5.4. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, "Contraflam" by Vetrotech
Saint-Gobain or equivalent product.
21. SAFETY GLASS - FIRE RATED INSULATED GLASS UNITS
21.1.
Thirty (30) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for opening
located on egress way
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM 30-2
Classification:
EI Integrity plus Insulation.
Material :
Fire Resistance :
EI 30 compliance to: EN 13501-2
2 mm
Length Tolerance :
2 mm
Impact Resistance :
Thickness :
20 mm
21 mm
Glass size as per thickness 1.5 x 2.5m
1.5 x 3m
Weight :
44 kg/m2
47 kg/m2
- Sound Reduction :
41db
41db complying with EN 410-3
- Light Transmission :
82%
Light Reflection :
8%/8% L
8%/8% L
U value :
4.7 W/m2K
g value :
0.66
0.65
Energy Transmission :
57% E
56% E
262
7%/7% E
7%/7% E
21.2.
Sixty (60) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for opening
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM 60-3
Classification:
Material :
Fire Resistance :
2 mm
Length Tolerance :
2 mm
Impact Resistance :
Thickness :
27 mm
29 mm
1.5 x 3m
Weight :
59 kg/m2
64 kg/m2
- Sound Reduction :
43db
complying with EN 410-3
80%
- Light Reflection :
8%/8% L
8%/8% L
- U value :
4.4 W/m2K
- g value :
0.63
0.61
52% E
50% E
6%/7% E
6%/6% E
-
21.3.
Ninety (90) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for opening
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM 90-4
Classification:
Material :
Fire Resistance :
3 mm
Length Tolerance :
2 mm
Impact Resistance :
Thickness :
40 mm
Weight :
82 kg/m2
- Sound Reduction :
8%/8% L
- U value :
- g value :
0.59
47% E
6%/6% E
-
263
All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to
21.4.
One Hundred Twenty (120) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety

glass for opening located on egress way
Opening schedule
Product name :
CONTRAFLAM 120-6
Type Insulating glass in conformance with EN 1279
Classification:
Material :
Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Spacer + Edge
Sealant
- Fire Resistance :
- Thickness Tolerance :
+3 / -2 mm
- Length Tolerance :
2 mm
- Impact Resistance :
- Thickness :
60 mm
- Glass size as per thickness 1.5 x 2.5m
- Weight :
118 kg/m2
- Sound Reduction :
13%/14% L
- U value :
- g value :
0.49
35% E
9%/9% E
-
21.5.
Rating to be as per drawings and approved by Civil Defense.
21.6.
Integrity and insulation multi-laminated

intumescent interlayer fire rate glass
21.7.
Average temperature on non - fire side not to exceed 140C and maximum
temperature not to exceed-180C above ambient temperature, as per EN
1363-1.
21.8.
Assemblies should meet EN 1363-1 requirements of passing integrity and

insulation and glass should be 1(B)1 classified for impact resistance as per
EN 12600.
21.9.
Fire rated glazing units separating between air conditioned spaces and
non-air conditioned spaces are to be insulating glazing units.
21.10.
For fire rated spandrel panels, same type of fire rated glass will be used in
addition to galvanized steel shadow box as specified in the curtain wall
sections.
21.11.
Provide an independent fire test evidence from independent approved

testing laboratory for the full system confirming the specified rating duration
and integrity and insulation classification.
21.12.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Vetrotech Saint-Gobain Contraflam units or equivalent product.
tempered
safety
glass
with
264
22. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Work included: Furnish all necessary materials, labor and equipment for the compete
installation of aluminum framing as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
(Specifiier Note : it is suggested and related items such as glass, sealants and
entrances be included whenever possible).
Work not included: Structural support of the framing system, interior closures trim,
metal subsille. (specifier list other exclusions).
23. PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Infiltration shall not
exceed .06 CFM per square foot of fixed area when tested at 6.24 P.S.F.
Water infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. No water
penetration with at a test pressure of 12 R.S.F.
Structural Performance shall be based on maximum deflection of 1/175 of the span.
The system shall perform to this criteria under a wind load of specify P.S.F.
24. PRODUCTS MATERIALS
Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 and 6063-16 alloy and Temper. Fasteners, where
exposed shall be aluminum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with
ASTM164-71. Perimeter encores shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is
properly isolated from the aluminum.
Mullion configurations shall allow for pockets at the exterior glazing face to receive
closed cell neoprene sponge gaskets (ASTM C-509) with factory molded corners.
Interior glazing seal gasket shall be fixed reliant electrometric E.P.D.M. glazing
wedge field installed under pressure.
Provisions shall be made at sealed horizontal to weep moisture accumulations to the
exterior. A cover shall be strapped over horizontals to show only a sharp,
uninterrupted exterior profile.
Vertical mullion shall be of sufficient strength to meet job requirements. Vertical and
horizontals components shall be designed for complete inside of Spandrel from
exterior without removal of vision lites.
System shall provide for expansion and contraction of component materials as well
be required by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F. without causing
harmful bucking or cracking, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners or other
effects detrimental to weathering performance.
25. FINISH
All exposed framing surfaces shall be have scratch less and other serious blemishes.
Aluminum extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by Power coating.
26. FABRICATION
The curtain wall system shall provide for both vertical and horizontal members to
project a maximum of % to the exterior. Major framing members will be fabricated,
assembled and sealed in factory to allow job site erection with a minimum of field
labor and materials.
265
The system shall provide for a minimum of separation of interior covers from metal
exposed to the exterior. This will occur at vision areas. Vertical framing members
shall have a nominal width of 3. Overall depth of system shall be 6. Horizontal
framing members shall have a nominal width of 2%.
There shall be no exposed fasteners at perimeter sections. Horizontal face covers
shall be 1/3 less in depth than vertical face covers to prevent exposed edges at
intersection of verticals.
Horizontal face covers shall have a beveled face on top side of extrusion.
27. EXECUTION INSTALLATION
All glass framing shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall be
level, square, plump and in alignment with other work in accordance with the
manufacturers installation instructions and approved shop drawings. All joints
between framing and the building structure shall be sealed in order to secure a
watertight installation.
28. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
After installation, the General Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of
aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster lime,
acid, cement, or other contaminants. The General Contractor shall be responsible for
final cleaning.
29. Polyester Powder Coating
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel,
zinc, white bronze or small areas of other metals compatible with aluminum surfaces,
they shall be kept from direct contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal
with a prime coat of zinc chromate primer or other suitable primer, followed by one or
two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint or other suitable protective coating,
excluding those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be
placed between aluminum and dissimilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting
members shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.
Aluminum surfaces in contact with lime mortar, concrete, plaster or other masonry
materials, shall be painted with alkaline- resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied
bituminous paint or water- white methacrylate lacquer.
Aluminum in contact with wood or absorptive materials which may become repeatedly
wet shall be painted with two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint or a coat of
heavy bodied bituminous paint. Alternatively paint the wood orbther absorptive
material with two coats of aluminum house paint and seal joints with a good quality of
caulking compound.
Where aluminum is in contact with treated wood, wood shall be treated with
pentachlorophenol, 5% minimum concentration or approved equal, followed with the
protective measures described for aluminum in contact with wood or other absorptive
materials.
The aluminum work shall be designed and anchored so that the work will not be
distorted nor the fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of the
metal.
Before shipment from factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall be given a
coating which will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance
of the finish on aluminum items is important, a coating of methacrylate type lacquer
shall be applied as specified hereinafter.
Apply two sprayed coats of water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimum
thickness of 0.015 mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capable
of withstanding the action of lime mortar for a period of at least one week in an
atmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 40 degree centigrade, the action of 10% (by
weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 20 degree centigrade, and the action
266
of atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. The coating shall be applied in

the manufacturer's plant to the exposed surfaces of all aluminum components subject
to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster, abrasion and other construction abuses.
Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication
compounds, moisture, dirt, accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure
proper lacquer adhesion.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminum work as required by
removing protective tape or other coating, using mild soap or detergents and clear
petroleum spirits.
Acids, caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove
excess sealing compounds care shall be exercised to prevent damage to seals or
staining or damage to adjacent work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminum work until the
completion of the works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect
condition shall be accepted.
30. Aluminum Extruded Expansion Joints
Extruded aluminum expansion joints shall be of a proprietary make, and of types as
indicated on the drawings complete with all fixings and fixtures, from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer. Extruded aluminum expansion joints shall be installed
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Floor and wall joints shall be sealed with an elastomer filled proprietary joint seal with
extruded aluminum retaining profiles on each side securely bolted to the structure.
Retaining profiles shall be set below the plaster or screed so that only the elastomer
and the edges of the profiles show.
Joint width shall be 20 mm and the joint cover be capable of absorbing 35% free
movement of the joint width. All comers, cross connections, curbs, tee joints or other
special . accessories shall be shop fabricated.
The Contractor shall produce shop drawings along with samples for the approval of
the Engineer.
ACCEPTABLE ALUMINIUM MANUFACTURERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
U.S. Aluminum U.S.A.

Technal - FRANCE
Kawneer U.S.A.
Schuco GERMAN
ESC GERMAN
Reynaers- Duffel, BELGIUM
31. HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

The following mounting height shall apply throughout the work, unless otherwise
shown or specified:
1. Lock Sets and Latches: 950mm to center of knob from floor.
2. Butt Hinges: 250mm to bottom of lowest hinge from floor; 125mm to top of upper
hinge from top of door; space other hinges equally between lower and upper hinges.
3. Door Pulls: 1.15m Finish floor to center of pull; center line in 125mm from edge of
flush doors, and centered on stile of narrow stile glass doors.
4. Deadlocks: Center line of cylinder to align with center line of cylinder for lock sets.
5. Cross-Bar of Exit Device: 1.05m Finish floor to center of cross-bar.
267
6. Push Bar: 1.05m Finish to center of push bar.

7. Push Plate: 1.15m Finish floor to center of plate through mounted to pulls.
8. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 1.65 to 1.8m above finished floor,
bottom bolt 300mm above finished floor.
34.1
FASTENERS
Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. The use of self-tapping or sheet
metal screws is prohibited except for the application of flush mounted push and kick
plates.
1. Concealed Fasteners: Furnish hardware items with appropriate type and length of
screws or other fastenings suitable to ensure permanent anchorage.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Furnish hardware with countersunk Phillips oval head type
screws where concealed fastening is not possible. The finish or colour of these
screws is to match that of the hardware item being fastened.
34.2
BUTT HINGES
A. General: Pack all hinges with machine or wood screws as required by door and
frame construction, where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the
width of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim furnish
hinges with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Furnish template hinges in
accordance with door and frame material requirements.
B. Butt hinge sizes for 45mm door thickness:
Door Thickness
Hinge Size (h x w)
less than 100mm
114 x 114mm (4.5" x 4.5")
100mm and over
125 x 125mm (5" x 5")
C. Butt hinge quantities per door leaf: These quantities are to override those shown
on the hardware schedule in cases of inconsistency.
Height of Door
1.50m or less
1.51 m to 2.25m
No. of Hinges
2
3
D. Butt Hinge Characteristics: The following apply throughout the work:

1. Ball Bearing: Bearings contained within or flush with barrels
2. Pins: All interior hinges are to have non-rising pins. All exterior hinges are
to have non-removal pins (NRP).
3. Tips: Button
4. Application: Full mortise
34.3
MORTISE LOCKS, LATCHES AND DEADLOCKS

General: Furnish mortise type lock sets and latch sets with anti-friction deadlocking
latch bolts and deadlocks as scheduled. All lock sets, latch sets or deadlocks to be
furnished complete with trim, armor fronts and cylinders, concealed fastenings,
268
washers and bushings, provide wrought box strikes for each lock set, latch set or
dead lock with curved lips of sufficient length to assure proper operation of latch bolt.
All locks shall have special type self-locking square spindles with ball bearing guide
and with square front and strike.
1.
Provide a minimum 19mm throw on locksets and latch sets for pairs of doors.
34.4
CYLINDERS
General: Security profile key, removable core cylinders master keyed into building
system, with cams to suit lock functions, and furnish with square shouldered blocking
removing cylinder.
34.5
PANIC DEVICES
A. General: Furnish panic device where scheduled, subject to the following:
1. Mounting: Devices shall be furnished with provision for concealed mounting,
through bolts will not be accepted.
2. Keying: Keyed devices shall be furnished less cylinders. Cylinders shall be as
hereinbefore specified, keyed to building system.
3. Bolts retracted feature to be provided for all concealed vertical rod devices
provided at center hung doors.
4. Outside trims: Custom applications as scheduled and as follows:
34.6
HEAD AND JAMB ACOUSTICAL GASKETS

A. Furnish head and jamb acoustical gaskets where necessary
34.7
KEYING SYSTEM - KEYING CONTROL

A. Master key system has to cover all door types such as wood, hollow metal steel
doors and aluminum doors. The system has to be designed by the hardware
supplier for approval by the~Owner and Engineer.
B. A complete masterkey system should be installed according to the hardware set
schedule, in conjunction with set numbers and/or door applications shown,
provide keys accordingly. The specific keying requirements are to be determined
in consultation with the Owner and the Engineer. Review the specific keying
requirements with the Owner and the Engineer prior to ordering cylinders.
C. Levels of Control in Masterkeying: Furnish locksets and cylinders with levels of
control as follows:
1. Masterkeys and Sub-masterkey in accordance with the Owner's and
Engineer's requirements.
D. Cylinders must have a minimum of 6 pins. Finish of cylinders shall follow and
match the finish of all other hardware used on the door.
E. Key and Removable Cores: Furnish keys, removable cores and blanks as
follows:
1- Material: Nickel Silver
2- Quantities: Furnish 3 change keys for each cylinder, unless otherwise
specified, furnish 5 masterkeys for each sub-masterkeyed section.
269
3- Extra Blanks: Furnish the following quantities of blanks for the

Owner's use in making additional keys (two blanks for each lock).
F. KEY CABINET
1. Key Cabinet: Sheet Steel Construct-on, piano hinged doorwith cylindertype
lock, great grand master keyed to building system.
2. Provide steel key cabinets with capacity of minimum 300 hooks for apartment
keys and steel cabinets with capacity of minimum 400 hooks for other keys.
3. Internal hooks for all keys.
4. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labelling with plastic strip cover over
paper labels.
5. Finish: Baked enamel colour as selected.
G. Installation of Cylinders: Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the
time of handing over to the Owner. At the time of handing over, and in the
presence of the Owner's representative, permanent key all lock cylinders, record
and file all keys in the key control system specified and turn system over to the
Owner for sole possession and control.
1- Provide half square lever handles in locks during construction, as may be
necessary for security or as may be requested by the Owner.
2- Provide construction single key cylinder 2 nos. to operate locks during
construction.
34.8
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
34.9
Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the
applicable hardware portions of these specifications. Store in a locked space to
prevent loss.
Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit
locks and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before painting. Reinstall after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion adjust and lubricate
hardware for proper operation
Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware
FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKING

The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking the
installation of finish hardware. Check test and adjust moving parts to ensure free and
smoother operation. Furnish to the Owner the special tools required to adjust and
maintain hardware.
1. After the building is completed and in use, adjust hardware to compensate for air
movement and other conditions, so that it will operate properly at all times.
2. A factory representative of the lock and latch manufacturer shall examine all
hardware furnished, with an Owners representative, 6 months after handing over
to the Owner, adjust the hardware for proper operation.
3. Clean and polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to the Owner.
34.10 DOOR/WINDOW HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS
270
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Roto, Div of EFCO corporation-Germany

WSS-Wilhelm Schlechtendahl & Cohne-Germany
Sobinco-Belgium
Dorma Gmbh + Co Germany
GezeGmbh & Co Germany
J.C.L. Engineering Ltd. U.K.
Mckinney U.S.A.
Savio Italy
271
SECTION 13a: METAL AND TERRACOTTA CLADDING

1.0 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Requirements
The cladding panel package is performance specified.
The Main Contractor shall:
a) Be responsible for the Detailed Design of the Cladding Panels and
associated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meet
the requirements of this Performance Specification.
b) Be responsible for the supply and installation of the Cladding Panels to
meet the requirements of this Performance Specification.
c) Before the preparation of the Detailed Design complete a site survey to
confirm that the line, level and module of the Drawings are compatible
with all existing structural interfaces. Any discrepancy found or intention
to alter the design intent is to be reported to the Engineer.
d) Co-ordinate the Detailed Design with that for all related works and
accommodate the specified movements and tolerances for structural
elements. The Main Contractor shall be responsible for providing all
shims and fixings to primary and secondary structures and for the coordination and provision of cleats by the Specialist Sub - Contractor.
e) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, sizes, thickness, types,
locations of fixings and sealant, all in accordance with specified
standards detailed herein.
f)
Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specified

herein and have been independently inspected and certified as specified.
g) Be responsible for sealing all junctions between the Cladding Panels and
adjacent structure to form a fully weather tight and airtight system to meet
the Performance Specification criteria.
h) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials,
components, systems, methods of installation etc. to meet the
performance criteria specified herein.
1.2 Health & Safety
a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that he complies with the latest Code
of Construction Safety Practice, the Health and Safety section of the
Contract Documents and ensure that full consideration is given to the
health and safety of operatives when manufacturing, handling and
installing the Works.
1.3 Standards
a) Comply with the latest edition of all relevant standards and provide
independently certified evidence that all specified variants of
components comply with specified requirements.
Section 13a, Metal and Terracotta Cladding
272
2.0 TYPE(S) OF CLADDING PANELS

2.1 Location
The location of the Cladding Panels is defined on the drawings but is generally as
follows:
TYPE 1
Single skin Metal cladding.
TYPE 2
Standing Seam Metal cladding.
TYPE 3
Insulated Roof Gutter
2.2 Type Architectural Terracotta cladding NBK Terrart Large .
40 mm thick NBK Ceramic Terrart Large 400 mm wide suspended faade with
special Terrart Flex Substructure system with 50 mm fully bonded rigid fire
retardant insulation backing to maintain overall building envelope u-value integrity
as per LEED silver rating requirement.
The joints to be backed by a support system which drains rainwater away from
the cavities behind.
The design installation to take into consideration all associated support fixings, T1
& T2 vertical profile, joint profile, spacer profile, tile holder, pin, butt straps and
sectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail design drawings. Also to
be include are all relevant cill, jamb, retainer, support, slip, parapet flashings etc.
Support rails / framework to be formed using Stainless Steel framework. Colour
coated flashings, cover caps to mechanical fixings, appropriate pvc barrier tape,
sealants and all other necessary components to complete the installation.
The support framework should take into consideration the local/site conditions to
accommodate any potential deflection.
The contractor should note, where applicable, the need for preformed corner
panel sections as detailed.
Technical Performance
Water Absorption : less than 6.5%
Bending Tensile Strength: greater than 20N/mm2
Raw Density : 2.09-2.16 Kg/dg3
o
Linear Thermical expansion 20-100 C

Compressive Strength : 36.5 66.5 N/mm2
Freeze / Thaw resistance: EN 150 10545 part 12 (100 cycles) to be fulfilled.
Soluble salts Din 105 part 1 should be well below permitted max limit
Colour Finish:
Brown and to Architect selection.
Manufacturer:
NBK Ceramic (UK) or approved equal
Locations: Wall Cladding etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.

2.3 Type Architectural Terracotta Louvers NBK Terrart baguette.
50x50 mm square NBK Ceramic Baguatee Terracotta louvers with special Terrart
Flex Substructure system to maintain overall building envelope u-value integrity
273
as per LEED silver rating requirement.

Material: Units to be natural clay, frost resistant with low soluble salt content and
low water absorption as defined in BS3921. The units, including site cut units, are
to be free from cracks, chips, surface blemishes or irregularity of shape, of
consistent colour and surface texture.
The design installation to take into consideration all associated support fixings,
Proprietary Locking trims, Sprung inserts, Holding Brackets, vertical profile, joint
profile, spacer profile, louvers holder, pin, butt straps and sectional profile
dimensions as set-out within the detail design drawings. Also to be include are all
relevant cill, jamb, retainer, support, slip, parapet flashings etc. Support rails /
framework to be formed using Stainless Steel framework. Colour coated
flashings, cover caps to mechanical fixings, appropriate pvc barrier tape, sealants
and all other necessary components to complete the installation.
Determine size(s), number and spacing of the louvers, fixings, configuration and
location of secondary support systems and incorporation of other accessories
and fittings to ensure the baguette system, primary support structure and other
elements forming the sun louver system and will resist all factored dead, imposed
and design live loads, and accommodate all deflections and movements without
damage.
Calculate wind loads on the baguette system appropriate to location, exposure,
height, building shape, and size in accordance with BS 6399-S Standard Method,
taking full account of existing and known future adjacent structures.
TECHNICAL CALCULATIONS TO BE PROVIDED FOR:
Basic wind speed.
Altitude factor
Direction factor
Seasonal factor
Probability factor
Terrain and building factor
louvers as detailed.
Technical Performance
Water Absorption : less than 6.5%
Bending Tensile Strength: greater than 20N/mm2
Raw Density : 2.09-2.16 Kg/dg3
Linear Thermical expansion 20-100 oC
Compressive Strength : 36.5 66.5 N/mm2
Freeze / Thaw resistance: EN 150 10545 part 12 (100 cycles) to be fulfilled.
Soluble salts Din 105 part 1 should be well below permitted max limit
Colour Finish:
Brown and to Architect selection.
Manufacturer:
NBK Ceramic (UK) or approved equal
Locations: Wall Cladding etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.
274
2.4 Type Aluminium Aerofoil fins- Hunter Douglas.

450x65 mm extruded aluminium Aerofoil fins with endcaps to maintain overall
building envelope u-value integrity as per LEED silver rating requirement.
butt straps and sectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail design
drawings. Support rails / framework to be formed using Stainless Steel framework
all other necessary components to complete the installation.
The contractor should note, where applicable, the need for preformed corner fins
as detailed.
Colour Finish:
PVDF coating to Architect selection.
Manufacturer:
Hunter Douglas or approved equal
Locations: External Glazing and Canopy etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.
2.5 Type SINGLE SKIN METAL CLADDING.

4mm flat composite aluminium cladding (ACM) Fire rated panel with 50 mm fully
bonded rigid fire retardant insulation backing to maintain overall panel rigidity and
building envelope u-value integrity where applicable. Cladding system to be PVF2
finish, to a colour agreed with the Architect.
Width tolerance: 2.0mm
Length tolerance: 4.0mm
Squareness: max. 5.0mm
Bowing: max. 0.5% of the length and / or width.
The surface shall not have any irregularities such as roughness, buckling and
other imperfections.
butt straps and sectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail design
drawings. Also to be include are all relevant cill, jamb, retainer, support, slip,
parapet flashings etc. Support rails/framework to be formed using both hot rolled
steel sections and galvanized framework, where appropriate. Colour coated
flashings, cover caps to mechanical fixings, appropriate pvc barrier tape, sealants
and all other necessary components to complete the installation.
No site welding of pre-finished panels will be acceptable
panel sections as detailed.
Colour Finish:
PVF2 to be selected by Architect.
Manufacturer:
Alpolic, Alucobond, Aluplex, Alubond or approved equal
Locations: Skylights, Wall Cladding etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.
275
2.6 Specific Interfaces

The Cladding Panels interfaces with the following works sections. The Main
Contractor shall liase with the relevant sub-contractors and ensure that all
interfacing requirements are provided for:
a) Structural Steelwork:
i) Ensure that all interfacing requirements relating to fixings are
provided.
b) Concrete works:
Co-ordinate all interfacing requirements with concrete up stands and all
other concrete works/interfaces.
a) Electrical Installations
Ensure that all interfacing requirements are provided relating to lightning
protection and earth bonding. In particular that a concealed route from
earth bonding point to earth is provided.
Ensure that all other cabling/wiring interfaces are accommodated in a concealed
location.
3.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Structural Requirements/Movements Generally
a) The Cladding Panels shall be designed, fabricated, and installed to
withstand all movements of the building structure under all design loads
or combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the
performance of the Cladding Panels.
b) Attention is drawn to the Structural Engineers Specification which
describes the requirements and the tolerances of the support structure
and surrounding elements.
c) All necessary expansion and movement joints shall be designed to
accommodate the maximum movements that can be derived from the
specified and determined design loads and movements.
Under
maximum movements the joints shall meet all the performance
requirements of the Performance Specification.
3.2 Design Life
The Cladding Panels shall be designed to withstand weather conditions based on
a 50 year return period (from Meteorological data) taking account of extremes of
wind, temperature, solar radiation, sandstorms, hail, rain and all other relevant
factors. The expected service life of the Cladding Panels is a minimum of 25
years.
3.3 Fire Performance
All materials used shall be noncombustible in accordance with BS 476: Part 4.
The surface spread of flame shall be class 0 as defined by the Building
Regulations Part B2/3/4.
3.4 Wind Loads
276
a) The Contractor shall design the Cladding Panels to withstand, without

permanent deformation, the effects of wind loads.
b) The Contractor shall make proper allowance for site exposure.
3.5 Thermal Movement
a)
c)
All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting

from: the maximum and minimum surface temperature differentials,
maximum annual range, diurnal range, absolute highest and lowest
temperature for mid-winter and mid-summer and surface temperature
in accordance with the recommendations of BS 5427.
The surface differential temperature range for components of the Roof
Coverings shall be taken as 1C and 55C.
The anual range of external air temperature is generally about 45C
d)
The 24 hour range of external air temperature is generally about 20C.
e)
The highest recorded temperature is 50.5C. and the lowest recorded

temperature is 1C.
f)
The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditions
envisaged for the works.
g)
In addition, the components shall be capable of accommodating

changes in dimension and shape of its components resulting from
varying surface temperatures between the outside and inside of the
building, without any reduction in the specified performance.
b)
3.6 Condensation
The psychometric conditions under which condensation shall not form on the
building interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/ facings,
or interstitially within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the Cladding
Panels, such that it may lead to damage or staining are:
a) External:
i)
Summer: 55 degC maximum at 100% RH.
ii)
Winter: 28 degC minimum at 6% RH.
a)
Internal:
i)
Summer: 25 degC at 100% RH.
ii)
Winter: 23 degC at 40% RH.
3.7 Setting Out and Tolerances

a) Set out components at evenly spaced centres, straight parallel and truly
aligned with other features where shown and to the modules shown on
the Drawings.
b) Permissible erection tolerances shall not exceed 2m from designed
positions in any direction and shall not be cumulative.
c) All components shall be fabricated with a tolerance on design lengths of
1mm and shall not deviate in straightness by more than 1 in 500 up to
a maximum of 2mm.
3.8 Cavity Barriers
277
Cavity Barriers to provide one hour fire protection to BS 476 and resistance to
the passage of smoke and flame shall be provided incorporating all necessary
fire stops, as indicated on the Drawings.
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 Aluminum : see Section 11
4.2 Mild Steel: see Section 11
4.3 Isolating Tape
Closed cell neoprene self-adhesive tape to the cladding manufacturers
approval. Apply to those surfaces of supports which would otherwise be in
contact with sheeting or accessories after fixing.
4.4 Breather Membrane (Cladding)
A breather membrane is to be provided to the external face of the insulated
blanking panels
4.5 General Sealant: Refer to Section 18 for Details
4.6 Insulation (Cladding)
Insulation shall be:
a) Bonded mineral fibre slabs or closed cell rigid polystyrene HFC and CFC
free.
b) Inert, durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or
water vapour.
c) Attached to or supported within the Cladding Panels so as not to bulge,
sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of
the curtain walling.
d) The Main Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the insulation
material to meet the U values specified.
4.7 Vapour Control Layers
a) Vapour Control layers shall be reinforced membranes of foil or plastics,
protected both sides by rigid facings/ linings.
b) Fixed to ensure continuity of vapour control on the warm side of thermal
insulation.
5.0 FINISHES
5.1 Protective Coating of Mild Steel Framing Sections/Reinforcement : Section11
5.2 Protective Coating of Mild Steel Mechanical Fixings : see Section 11
5.3 Anodizing : see Section 11
278
6.0 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.1 Generally
a) Fabricate and install the Cladding Panels in accordance with this
Performance Specification and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be true
to detail with continuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects,
flaws, steps, waves, or damage of any nature.
b) Fabricators and installers shall employ competent Cladding Panel
operatives. Records of their experience are to be provided to the
Engineer.
c) Select and align all products to ensure uniformity of appearance.
d) Joints shall only occur at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.
e) All fixings shall be concealed, unless indicated on final detailed drawings.
Where exposed they shall match the material and finish of the products
fixed.
f)
Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.
g) Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly,

handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the
complete installation.
h) Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
i)
The Cladding Panel works shall be set out such that all framing members
are installed in the correct position, within tolerance, and in the correct
relationship to the building structure.
j)
All fixing bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommended procedures.
k) Materials shall be kept dry until fixed.

l)
Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cutting

parts of the structure, other than where shown on the Working Drawings.
m) Isolating tape, plastics washers, or other suitable means should be used

to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals.
n) Cladding Panels shall be set out at evenly spaced centres, straight,
parallel, and truly aligned with other features where shown on the
Working Drawings.
o) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane,
with a satisfactory fit at all junctions.
p) Inspect each piece of Cladding Panels immediately before installation.
Do not install any pieces which are improperly sized or have damaged
edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage.
6.2 Metalwork
a) The detailed design of extrusions and material thickness, the dimensions
of shall be designed and submitted for approval. Refer to Section 11.
b)
279
c) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from
the same supplier or manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.
d) All support systems shall be adequate thickness and strength, not only to
meet the structural requirements, but also eliminate any risk of distortion
in the finished surfaces.
6.3 Coating/ Finishes Generally
a) All concealed/exposed metalwork shall be finished in accordance with the
relevant BS standards. Refer to Section 11.
b) Visible cover-stripping shall be made from materials that are compatible
with aluminium. It shall not shrink nor warp, nor adhere to the moving
surfaces and shall be resistant to deterioration by weathering. It shall be
capable of being renewed without disturbing the panel systems and
without removing the frame from the structure.
c) The quality of finish and corrosion protection shall be maintained by the
Main Contractor until completion of the works.
d) Protection of the works shall be provided until handover to avoid any
blemishes on the finished elements.
6.4 Fixings : see Section 20

6.5 General Sealant: see Section 18
6.6 Assembly
a) Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.
b) Joints, other than movement joints, shall be rigidly secured, reinforced
where necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.
c) Take precautions to prevent displacement of components in assembled
units. Obtain Approval for any re-assembly on site.
6.7 Installation Tolerances
a) The Main Contractor shall comply with the tolerances specified herein for
the Cladding Panels and accommodate the construction tolerances for
the cladding support structure. The Cladding Panels installation shall be
capable of accommodating steelwork tolerances in accordance with the
requirements of the Structural engineers Specification (NSSS). In
addition, where applicable, the Cladding Panels shall be capable of
accommodating the tolerances for concrete as specified in the Structural
Engineers Specification. Different tolerances for structural steelwork and
for concrete shall not prevent the Cladding Panels from achieving the
installation tolerances specified below.
b) The Cladding Panels shall be erected plumb and in proper alignment and
relation to established lines and grades as shown on the Working
Drawings. The erected system shall present true and accurate lines and
flat planes.
280
c) Permissible deviations measured in any direction shall be limited to long

wave formations of minimum 20m wave length and a maximum
amplitude of 3mm when measured from a laser reference line.
d) Joints between panels (vertical and horizontal): The actual width of any
joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more than +1mm or 10%
of the joint width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally
distributed with no sudden changes. The offset misalignment between
joints shall not exceed 0.55mm.
e) Joints (vertical and horizontal) between panels and adjoining cladding/
structure (by others): The actual width of any joint (Sealant joint) shall
not deviate from the nominal width by more than +2mm or 10% of the
joint width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally
distributed with no sudden changes. The offset misalignment between
joints shall not exceed 0.5mm.
f)
Level: the Cladding Panels shall be within +2mm of the specified datum
level. The cumulative slope between the same location on any panel
shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
g) Plumbness: the Cladding Panels shall be erected such that no point on

any panel is more than 2mm from its theoretical vertical plane. The
cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel shall not
exceed 0.5 in 1000.
h) The straight line tolerance for Cladding Panel elements in plan shall not
exceed +2mm from grid lines and building reference lines.
i)
The angular tolerance for Cladding Panel elements in plan shall not
exceed +0.5mm per 1m width for each curtain wall bay.
j)
The variation in flatness and angular twist for any Cladding Panel
component shall not exceed +2mm.
k) A method statement shall be submitted prior to fabrication detailing

proposals to achieve the specified tolerances. This shall demonstrate
that the construction programme, the effects of the building structure and
construction method and the fabrication method of both the panels and
cladding support structure is clearly understood.
l)
The construction tolerances of surrounding elements (by others) and for

the Cladding Panel shall be stated on the Working Drawings in order to
clarify and ensure that all aspects of the Cladding Panel relate
satisfactorily to the Work as a whole.
m) Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the Main Contractor

shall submit to the Engineer his proposed method of dimensional settingout and cross checking, with adjacent trades and elements to satisfy the
accuracy requirements. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or
level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Main Contractor of
his responsibility for the correctness thereof.
n) The Working Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in
manufacture of the Cladding Panel in order to accommodate
manufacturing tolerances of other interfacing elements.
o) The tolerances stated herein shall be adhered to and no revisions to the
tolerances to cater for inadequate control shall be permitted.
281
6.8 Protection
a) All fabricated and assembled units shall be protected against damage,
corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent
site operations.
b) Protective coverings shall be applied before dispatch to site and shall not
be detrimental to products, finishes or installation procedures.
6.9 Handling And Storage

a) Do not deliver to site any Cladding Panel products and units which
cannot be installed immediately or unloaded into a suitable, well
protected storage area.
b) Store products and units on level bearers clear of the ground and
separate with resilient spacers.
6.10
Interfaces
Ensure that flashing, closers, etc. (specified in another section) are located
correctly and neatly overlap the Cladding Panel to form a weathertight
junction.
6.11
Damage
a) Do not repair without prior acceptance of the Engineer. Acceptance will
not be given where products and units are badly damaged or where the
proposed repair will impair performance or appearance.
6.12
Cleaning
b) At Practical Completion of the Works, or when otherwise agreed with the
Engineer, remove any protective coverings and thoroughly clean external
and internal areas. Cleaning agents for the purpose shall be approved by
the Cladding Panel manufacturer.
6.13
Shims
Where shims are required in the works they shall match the profile of the
plates between which they are fixed. Where necessarily exposed shims shall
be finished to match adjoining metalwork as directed by the Engineer. The
sub-contractor is required not to make over allowance for shimming and only
the minimum of shimming is permissible to allow for building tolerances. It is
a requirement that shimmed connections shall generally be concealed and
shall not feature visually in the finished works.
6.14
Bi-Metallic Corrosion
Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components and
assemblies. Take appropriate measures to ensure bi-metallic/electrolytic
corrosion cannot take place, in accordance with BS PD 6484 Commentary on
Corrosion at Bi-metallic Contacts and its Alleviation.
282
6.15
Infestation
No materials used in the cladding or its component parts shall be liable to
attack or infestation by micro-organisms, fungi, insects, or other vermin. No
timber shall be used in any part of the cladding.
6.16
SUBMITTALS
Control Samples (Fabrication Samples)
Provide samples, including relevant technical literature as follows:
a) 1000mm x 1000mm sample mockup of each type of Cladding Panels,
including a junction between horizontal and vertical framing with all
proposed gasket types, extrusions, and molds in materials and colour
specified.
283
SECTION 13b: CURTAIN WALLING

1.0
TYPE(S) OF CURTAIN WALLING
1.1
CURTAIN WALLING INCLUDING WINDOWS, CW.01

- Drawing reference(s):
- Supporting structure: Concrete as indicated on the drawings.
- Curtain walling system:
Manufacturer and reference: Contractor to submit details of proposed system and
cruciform samples with tender.
Type: Stick system, thermally broken, dry gasketed, pressure equalized,
conventional stick, transom - mullion glazed system fully drained .
To include all products, fixings and interfaces necessary to complete the
fabrication and installation. Performance criteria to comply with
Design/Performance Requirements and Testing subsections.
- Internal framing member:
Material: Aluminium as clause 7.1
Finish: As clause 8.3
Colour/texture: to approval.
Minimum film thickness: as recommended by manufacturer to meet severe
exposure conditions.
- Glazing: Insulating glass units as clause 7.12, refer also to section 13. Thickness
and properties to BS 6262.
- Glazing system: Conventional, pressure equalised stick, mullion transom
system complete with thermal breaks, pressure plate, appropriate EDPM gaskets
continuous inner seals designed to accommodate minimum 24 mm insulated
glass units.
- Vapour Control : Vapour control layer as clause 7.20
- Accessories : Condensation control of all thermal insulation
cavities by
concealed buffed weep suit.
- All fastenings and trims and seals necessary to complete the installation to meet
the performance requirements, manufacturers recommendations.
- Other requirements: Units to be of modular design.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/PREPARATORY WORK
2.1
DESIGN:
- Complete the detailed design of the curtain walling and associated features
shown on the preliminary design drawings to meet the requirements of this
specification.
- Coordinate detailed design with that for all related works.
2.2
DESIGN PROPOSALS:
The preliminary design drawings indicate design intent but do not preclude
submission with tender of reasonable alternative proposals for consideration.
2.3
SPECIFICATION:
Comply with the latest edition of the Centre for Window and Cladding Technology
(CWCT) Standard for curtain walling unless specified otherwise in this section.
- Keep a copy of the CWCT Standard for curtain walling at the design office,
workshop and on site, readily accessible for reference at all times during the
course of the works.
2.4
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER:

Submit to the Engineer the following curtain walling particulars:
Section 13b, Curtain Walling
284
2.5
Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including plans, sections, elevations

sufficient detail to interfaces with associated components/ work.
Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with the
specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, including but not
limited to.
Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with the
specification of the proposed curtain walling.
Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and building
components.
Proposals for any amendments to primary supporting structure and for any
secondary supporting structure additional to that shown on preliminary design
drawings.
Schedule of builders work, special provisions and special attendance by others.
Examples of standard documentation from which the project quality plan will be
prepared.
Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
Schedule of products and finishes with a design life expectancy less than that
specified in clause 4.3, with proposals for frequencies and methods of
replacement.
Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
Areas of non-compliance with the specification.
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER:

Submit to the Engineer within 4 weeks of appointment the following curtain walling
particulars:
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the
structure.
- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master
programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main
Contract master programme.
- A quality plan in compliance with CWCT Guide to good practice for facades,
Section 6.
- Proposals to support any outstanding applications for Building Regulation
consents or relaxations.
2.6
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF CURTAIN

WALLING WORK:
Submit to the Engineer before testing or fabrication the following curtain walling
particulars:
- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/performance
requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Certification for all incorporated components manufactured by others confirming
their suitability for all locations in the curtain walling.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all products.
2.7
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE

STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:
COMMENCEMENT
OF
Submit to the Engineer before fabrication the structural bonding sealant

manufacturers project specific approval for:
- Compatibility and adhesion of all products and finishes.
285
2.8
Full details of structural sealant glazing design.

Structural sealant dimensioning.
A project specific sealant application method statement.
PRODUCT SAMPLES:
Before commencing detailed design submit three samples of each type of material to
be used on the project, with respective finishes as follows:
2
1. 2m aluminium glazed sample in approved colour showing spandrel junction.
2. Extrusions each type: 300mm long
2
3. Aluminium honeycomb panel: 1m
4. Gaskets and types, each type: 300mm long
5. Sealants: 300mm bead sample applied to metal gut showing colours.
6. Fasteners
7. Hardware
The samples to be supported with printed technical literature of the manufacturer
including Glass test reports.
The samples shall represent physical and chemical properties, finishes and colours.
2.9
SAMPLES OF FIXINGS:
At an agreed stage during detailed design work provide the Engineer with identified
samples of each type of fixing anchor including casting-in restraints and shims,
together with manufacturers recommended torque figures.
2.10
FABRICATION SAMPLES:
At an agreed stage during detailed design work provide the Engineer with samples of:
2
2m aluminium glazed sample in approved colour including louvre, spandrel panel
and flashings. Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
2.11
MOCK-UP:
At an agreed stage during detailed design work construct in an approved location a
mock-up of the curtain wall:
1. The purpose of the preconstruction mock is to be able to make a visual inspection
to ensure that it conforms to the design intent.
At this stage of the cladding development, the employer reserves the right to
have the subcontractor for the curtain wall cladding changed, at no additional cost
to the contract.
2. One complete lift of walling and balcony sliding door including different
components of glazed curtainwall system representative of actual building design
for acceptance and approval by the Engineer.
3. The mock up will be used for evaluating colour, workmanship of curtainwall
components both for themselves and in conjunction with components of the
prefinished aluminium panels. The mock up will also be reviewed for the
operation of sliding door and top hung window.
4. Adjust mock up as may be necessary to assist the Engineer with the finalisation
of colours, profiles and properties.
5. Modify mock-up as may be necessary to obtain approval.
6. When approved retain mock-up in undisturbed condition until completion of
curtain walling installation.
3.0
3.3
DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERALLY:
-
Comply with CWCT Standard for curtain walling, Section 2 - Performance

Criteria unless specified or agreed otherwise.
286
3.2
Project performance requirements specified in this subsection are to be read in

conjunction with CWCT performance criteria.
INTEGRITY:
Determine the sizes and thickness of glass panes and panels/facings, the sizes,
types and locations of framing, fixings and supports, to ensure that the curtain walling
will resist all wind loads, dead loads and design live loads, and accommodate all
deflections and movements without damage.
- Determine method(s) of attachment of the membrane to resist wind loads
calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part 2, Standard Method or CP3:
Chapter V: Part 2 using the following data:
Basic wind speed (v):
45m/s
Topography factor (S1):
1.0
Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined from CP3:
Chapter V: Part 2, table 3
Statistical factor (S3):
1
Make due allowance for any internal pressure.
3.3
DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS of framing members parallel to the curtain

walling plane must not:
-
3.4
Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of the design dimension.

Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately
adjacent glazing units, panel/facing units or other fixed units.
Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable
components such as doors and windows.
GENERAL MOVEMENT:
The curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements as follows:
1. Thermal movement of the assembly or adjacent structure and assemblies over an
air temperature range 0 degrees centigrade to 45 degrees centigrade.
2. Movement from the designed deflection of adjacent structure of /8mm as shown
on the arrangement drawings or can be ascertained from the associated shop
drawings.
3.5
AIR PERMEABILITY:
Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m/hr/m for fixed lights and 2.0 m/hr/lin.m for
opening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak
positive test pressure of 600 Pascals.
3.6
WATER PENETRATION
onto internal surfaces or into cavities not designed to be wetted must not occur when
the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pascals.
3.7
WIND RESISTANCE SERVICEABILITY:

Glazed units in framing member tests must have all edges supported.
3.8
THERMAL PROPERTIES:
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) of the curtain walling, calculated using
the elemental area method, must be not more than 1.7W/mK.
3.9
SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL:

Glass panes or units in curtain walling must have:
287
3.10
Total solar energy transmission of not more than 13 % of normal incident solar
radiation.
Total light transmission of not less than 30-40 %.
THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING:

Glass must have an adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by orientation,
shading, solar control and construction.
3.11
CONDENSATION:
The psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form on the
building interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/facings are:
- External:
Summer:52C maximum at 100% RH.
Winter: 14 C minimum at 55 % RH.
- Internal:
Summer: 22C at 55 % RH.
Winter: 22C at 55% RH.
4.0
INTERNAL SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME OF CURTAIN WALLING:

To BS 476-7, Class 0
4.1 FIRE STOPPING
must be provided at all junctions of curtain walling with compartment walls and floors.
Use materials and methods of fixing to ensure fire resistance not less than that
specified for the compartment walls and floors.
4.2 OPENING LIGHTS:
Each unit must incorporate concealed multipoint fastening operated by an internal
handle with integral lock suited to pass the same key.
4.3 DESIGN LIFE of the curtain walling must be not less than 30 years. Submit to the
Engineer a schedule for maintenance and for replacement of secondary
components.
4.4 SAFETY:
The finished surfaces of curtain walling in all accessible internal and external areas
must not:
- Have any irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
- Release irritant or staining substances.
4.5 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING REQUIREMENTS:
-
5.0
Structural sealant glazing units must be capable of installation, without site

application of structural bonding sealant.
Structural sealant glazing units must be capable of removal and replacement
without site application of structural bonding sealant.
Structural sealant glazing design must limit the design tensile stress of sealants
to 138 kPa.
TESTING
5.1
COMPARISON (TYPE) TESTING:

Fabrication and installation of curtain walling must not commence until test
results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been
submitted to the Engineer.
5.2
PROJECT TESTING (SITE):
288
5.3
At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site arrange for testing of a

section of curtain walling in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.
Protect building structure, components and finishes from any damage
consequent upon testing.
Installation of general areas of curtain walling must not continue until site test
results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been
submitted to the Engineer.
TESTING AUTHORITY:
Project testing must be carried out by a United Kingdom Accreditation Service

(UKAS) approved independent laboratory or U.A.E Municipality Accredited
Laboratory.
5.4
TEST SPECIMEN:
1. Overall dimensions 2 storeys high 2 modules wide including top hung window
and incorporating precast unit at least to one side.
2. One module of balcony sliding door including fixed screens
5.5
Features: to include all components integral to the curtain walling.

TEST SEQUENCE:
To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.8.1, Standard sequence A, as

follows:
1. Air permeability jacked position
2. Static air pressure water penetration
3. Dynamic air pressure water penetration
4. Wind resistance serviceability
5. Repeat air permeability
6. Repeat static air pressure water penetration
8. Seismic testing (serviceability and safety load)
9. Thermal cycling regime
10. Condensation test
11. Repeat air permeability
12. Repeat static air pressure water penetration
14. Wind resistance safety
15. Controlled dismantle
The tests shall be witnessed by the Employers Engineer, testing agent, the main
contractor and the curtain wall contractor.
5.6 AIR PERMEABILITY/LEAKAGE TESTS:
- To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.4. Peak pressure as specified in
clause 3.5.
- Carry out tests in calm wind conditions and standard temperature, pressure and
humidity conditions.
- Regions of concentrated air leakage are to be identified by smoke.
5.7 WATERTIGHTNESS - STATIC TESTS:
To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.5.1. Peak pressure as specified in
clause 3.6.
5.8 WATERTIGHTNESS - DYNAMIC TEST(S):
- To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.5.2. Peak pressure as specified
in clause 3.6
- Supplementary test(s) to prENV 13050.
289
5.9 WIND RESISTANCE - SERVICEABILITY TEST:

To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.6. Peak pressure equal to design
wind pressure as specified in clause 3.2
5.10 WIND RESISTANCE - SAFETY TEST:
To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.6. Peak pressure equal to 1.5 times
the design wind pressure as specified in clause 3.2
5.11 WATERTIGHTNESS - STATIC SITE TEST:
To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.11.2. Peak pressure as specified in
clause 3.6
5.12 WATERTIGHTNESS - HOSE SITE TEST:
To CWCT Standard for curtain walling, clause 3.11.3. Joints to be tested:
1. All junctions of curtain walling to be associated works including all closure
flushings.
5.13 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING TESTS:
-
6.0
Provide the structural bonding sealant manufacturer with samples of framing

profiles, glass, gaskets, assembly/weathering sealants and other curtain walling
products that are proposed for contact with structural bonding sealant.
The manufacturer must test samples with structural bonding sealant to determine
compatibility and adhesion in accordance with specified design loadings.
Any modifications made to samples to comply with test criteria must be recorded
in the sealant manufacturers project specific approval.
PRODUCTS
6.1 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS:

- To BS 1474, alloy 6063 and suitable for the specified finish.
- Structural members to comply with BS 8118.
6.2 ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET:
To BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573 in an alloy, temper and thickness suitable
for the application and specified finish.
6.3 MILD STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/REINFORCEMENT:
To the relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10113, BS EN 10137, BS EN
10155 and BS EN 10210, in a thickness suitable for the application, and for
galvanizing or other protective coating.
6.4 MILD STEEL SHEET:
To the relevant parts of BS 1449-1, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10111, BS
EN 10131, BS EN 10139, BS EN 10140, BS EN 10149, BS EN 10209 and BS EN
10268 in a grade and thickness suitable for the application, and suitable for
galvanizing or other protective coating.
6.5 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET:
To the relevant parts of BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10095,
BS EN 10258, BS EN 10259 and to BS EN 10088-2, austenitic, grade 1.4301 (304)
generally, grade 1.4401 (316) when used externally or in severely corrosive
environments, and in a thickness suitable for the application.
6.6 MECHANICAL FIXINGS:
- Stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506-1 and 2, grade A2 generally, grade A4 when
used in severely corrosive environments, or
290
Mild steel to BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating, or
Aluminium complying with BS 1474 for brackets, rivets and shear pins.
6.7 ADHESIVES must not be degradable by moisture or water vapour.

6.8 FIXING ANCHORS must be:
- Of dimensions not less than recommended by their manufacturers.
- Capable of adequate three dimensional adjustment to accommodate building
structure and curtain walling fabrication/installation tolerances.
6.9 GLASS GENERALLY:
- To BS 952 and the relevant parts of:
BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass
BS EN 1096 for coated glass
BS EN 1748 for borosilicate glass
BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass
- Panes to be accurately sized, clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles,
cracks, ripplings, dimples and other defects.
- Edges generally undisfigured. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and
extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.
6.10
-
TOLERANCES ON GLASS TO SEALED UNITS:

Distortional tolerances measured after any thermal
strengthening:
Maximum bow: 0.2% of pane dimension.
Maximum roller wave:
For 3 to 5 mm glass: 0.5 mm
For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.15 mm.
Maximum edge dip:
For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.25 mm.
toughening/heat
6.11
THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS

that is to be fixed in the locations referred in section L40/165 must be
subjected to a heat soaking regime designed to reduce the incidence of
failure due to nickel sulfide inclusions:
All panes must be heat soaked at a mean glass temperature of 280
10C for not less than 3 hours.
6.12
-
INSULATING GLASS UNITS:

To BS 5713, hermetically sealed and Kitemark certified.
Colour of aluminium perimeter spacers: black
Perimeter seals must be resistant to UV light degradation on any exposed edges.
Perimeter taping must not be used.
Perimeter seals must be compatible with any structural/ assembly/weather
sealants, specified in this section, that they come into contact with.
6.13
GLASS EDGE CONDITION FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:
Bonded, unframed outer edges must be flat ground with a small arris suitable for
open jointing or for
6.14
-
GASKETS:
Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1
Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of
drained and ventilated or pressure equalised curtain walling systems must be
formed in a complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanised rubber gaskets must
have factory moulded corner joints.
291
All gaskets must be resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.
6.15
GENERAL SEALANTS:
Must be stable and compatible with all contact products and finishes and be selected
in accordance with BS 6213 from:
Silicone to BS 5889
One part polysulfide to BS 5215
Two part polysulfide to BS 4254
One or two part polyurethane.
6.16
CURTAIN WALLING JOINT ASSEMBLY SEALANTS:
Silicone to BS 5889, type A or B, neutral curing where in contact with or close
proximity to other products which may be adversely affected by acetoxy curing.
Manufacturer and reference: to curtain walling manufacturers recommendations to
approval.
6.17
6.18
-
BONDING SEALANTS FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing.
Manufacturer and reference: to approval.
Designed and manufactured for bonding of structural sealant glazing.
Compatible with all contact and close proximity products and finishes.
WEATHERSEALING FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:
Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing.
Manufacturer and reference: to approval
Colour: to approval
Designed and manufactured for weathersealing of structural sealant glazing.
Compatible with all contact and close proximity products and finishes.
6.19
-
THERMAL INSULATION:
Material: mineral wood slabs, foil backed
Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water vapour.
Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag,
delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtain
walling.
6.20
-
VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS:

Aluminium alloy as clause 7.2, mild steel as clause 7.4 or stainless steel as
clause 7.5, not less than 1.5 mm thick, or
Reinforced membranes of foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid
facings/linings.
Fixed to ensure continuity of vapour control on the warm side of thermal
insulation.
7.0
FINISHES
7.1
PROTECTIVE
COATING
SECTIONS/REINFORCEMENT:
OF
MILD
STEEL
FRAMING
All surfaces must be:

-
7.2
Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461, or

Treated with an appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or
BS EN ISO 14713.
PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS:
All surfaces must be:

- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461, or
- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated, or
292
7.3
-
8.0
Zinc plated to BS 1706, coating classification Fe/Zn 12 and chromate conversion

class 2C or 2D.
POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATING:
To BS 4842, AAMA 2604 or AAMA 2605 subject to minimum coating thickness
recommended by the manufacturer on all significant surfaces.
Manufacturer and reference: as proposed by system manufacturer to approval.
Coatings must not contain less than 70% PVDF resin.
Prepare base metals, prime, PVDF coat test samples, protect components and
repair damage in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Apply coatings after fabricating is complete wherever possible. Any fabrication of
prefinished lengths must be previously agreed with the Engineer. Uncoated
edges must not be visible in assemblies.
8.1
-
GENERALLY:
Fabricate and install curtain walling in accordance with this specification and the
final detailed drawings.
Fabricators and installers must employ competent curtain walling operatives.
Records of their experience are to be provided to the Engineer on request.
Select and align all products to ensure uniformity of appearance.
Joints must only occur at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.
Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
All fixings must be concealed unless indicated on final detailed drawings. Where
exposed they must match the material and finish of the products fixed.
Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.
Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,
storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.
8.2 METALWORK:
As section 11, unless specified otherwise in this section.
8.3 GLAZING:
-

Fix directional patterned/wired glass generally parallel to surround and align
adjacent panes where seen together at close quarters.
8.4 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES APPLICATION:

8.5 SEALANT APPLICATION:
8.6 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:
-
Prepare for and apply structural bonding sealant in environmentally favourable

workshop conditions.
Place or fix setting blocks, edge supports, glazing retention devices and
associated accessories in accordance with the curtain walling and/or structural
bonding sealant manufacturers recommendations.
Apply structural bonding sealant as section 18.
Do not transport units until structural bonding sealant has adequately cured for a
period stated in the project specific approval.
293
8.7 ASSEMBLY:
-
Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.

Joints, other than movement joints, must be rigidly secured, reinforced where
necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.
Take precautions to prevent displacement of components in assembled units.
Obtain approval for any reassembly on site.
8.8 INSPECTION:
-
All fabrications and assembled units must be carefully inspected for match with
approved samples and for compliance with this specification and the final detailed
drawings before dispatch to site.
Give adequate notice of inspection arrangements to enable the Engineer and/or
other affected parties to be present.
8.9 PROTECTION:
-
8.10
-
8.11
-
8.12
-
8.13
8.14
All fabrications and assembled units must be protected against damage,

corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent site
operations.
Protective coverings must be applied before dispatch to site and must not be
detrimental to curtain walling products, finishes or installation procedures.
HANDLING AND STORAGE:
Do not deliver to site any curtain walling products and units which cannot be
installed immediately or unloaded into a suitable well protected storage area.
Store products and units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate with
resilient spacers.
SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE:
Not less than three weeks before commencement of curtain walling installation
carry out a geometric survey of the supporting building structure, checking line,
level and fixing points. Report immediately to the Engineer if structure will not
allow the required accuracy or security of erection.
Coordinate geometric survey for curtain walling with any other survey(s) for
adjacent cladding.
Set out erection datum points, lines and levels for a complete elevation at a time
unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION:
Ensure that fixing anchor cast-in inserts are positioned in approved locations and
that insert cavities are protected from entry of concrete.
Site drill or cut into structure only in approved locations.
Distances between all fixing components and edges of concrete must not be less
than recommended by their manufacturers.
FIXING ANCHOR ADJUSTMENT:
Before commencement of curtain walling installation adjust all fixing anchors for
line and level, allowing for adequate final adjustment during installation.
Obtain approval before carrying out corrective fabrication to fixing anchors.
PRELIMINARY CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION:
294
Complete a preliminary area of curtain walling as set out below for inspection and
approval of appearance by the Engineer.
1. One complete vertical walling section with all associated flashings and trims,
rainscreens, sliding doors, windows, etc. fully glazed representative of the
curtainwalling assembly.
8.15
-
CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION:

Set out straight, parallel and truly aligned.
Secure to fixing anchors through holes formed during fabrication only.
Tighten all mechanical fixings to manufacturers recommended torque figures. Do
not overtighten fixings intended to permit differential movement.
Remove protective coverings only where necessary to facilitate installation and
from surfaces which will be inaccessible on completion.
8.16
IN SITU WELDING is not permitted.
8.17
INTERFACES:
Ensure that flashings, closers, etc. (specified in another section) are located correctly
and neatly overlap the curtain walling to form a weathertight junction.
8.18
IRONMONGERY:
Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with matching finish
supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent damage to ironmongery and adjacent
surfaces. At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct
functioning.
8.19
-
8.20
DAMAGE:
Do not repair curtain walling without approval. Such approval will not be given
where products and units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair will
impair performance or appearance.
Repairs may require additional site testing at the discretion of the Engineer.
Schedule repairs or record on drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manual.
CLEANING:
At Practical Completion or when otherwise agreed with the Engineer, remove any
protective coverings and thoroughly clean external and internal curtain walling areas.
Cleaning agents for the purpose must be approved by the curtain walling
manufacturer and incorporated products manufacturers.
8.21
MAINTENANCE:
Prepare a maintenance manual in accordance with CWCT Guide to good practice for
facades, Section 10. Unless otherwise instructed or agreed the manual must be
completed and handed over to the Engineer at Practical Completion.
295
SECTION 14: PAINTING AND DECORATING

1.0
GENERALLY
Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labeled with the following
information:
1.1
SCOPE
The specifications cover paint work to exposed concrete and rendered surfaces,
wood work, ferrous and non ferrous surfaces in accordance with the schedule of
finishes, drawings, bills of quantities and as directed in writing by the Engineer.
The term Paint as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, lacquers, sealers and
other coatings, organic or inorganic, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish
coats.
All painting works shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced in this work.
1.2
Marking of Containers
(I)
Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labeled with the

following information:
1.
Manufacturers name, initials or recognized trademark.
2.
Title and specification number.
3.
Whether primer, undercoat or finishing coat.
4.
Whether for internal or external use, where appropriate.
5.
Color reference from BS 4800.
6.
Method of application.
7.
Batch number and date of manufacture or re-test.
(ii)
No paint shall be used more than 18 months after manufacture or re-test.
(iii)
Coating materials other than spray paints, bituminous paints and fine textured
masonry paints shall be in containers not exceeding 25 kg capacity.
1.3
Samples
(I) Sample panels minimum two square meters in area shall be prepared for each type
and color of coating material to be used in the Works for the approval of the Engineer.
(ii)
Sample pieces of each paper/fabric material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at
least the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for the approval of the
Engineer.
1.4
Manufacturers
The Contractor shall state the name and address of the manufacturer whose
materials he
proposes to use. Once approval has been given, the Contractor shall not
obtain materials
from other
sources without the prior written agreement of the Engineer.
2.0
MATERIALS
2.1
Material in General
The materials to be used shall be of the best quality and of approved types, obtained
from an approved manufacturer thoroughly mixed and ground.
Section 14, Painting & Decorating
296
Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing, spreading and leveling properties.
These properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of the
Engineer. Coats that have any noticeable pull under a large brush and that show
poor spreading and flowing properties will not be acceptable.
Paint shall dry to a uniform smooth, flat or semi gloss finish under ordinary
conditions of illumination and wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, highlighted spot
or brush marks and no evidence of cracking, chipping or flaking. Tinted paints shall
dry to a uniform color.
Re-coating of a previous painted surface shall produce no lightening, softening or
other film irregularities. Paint during and after application shall not be abnormally
pungent, offensive or disagreeable.
The color of the paint shall match the approved sample.
2.2
Preparatory Materials
(i)
Paint removers, abrasive papers and blocks, cleaning agents, etching

solutions, stopping, knotting, fillers and other commodities shall be of the
types recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to be applied.
(ii)
White spirit shall comply with B.S. 245.
(iii)
Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remain

unaffected by the resinous materials in the wood or the following paint
coating, thereby preventing the resinous materials in the timber leeching into
the paint film and causing discoloration or defective drying and shall be in
accordance with BS 1336 latest edition.
(iv)
Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary leafless, oilbased type recommended for internal or external work as appropriate.
Stopping for woodwork to receive a clear finish shall be tinted to match with
the surrounding woodwork.
(v)
Filler for plaster and rendering shall be an approved proprietary type.
(vi)
Mordant Solution
Shall be composed of a solution usually slightly acidic in nature and containing solvents,
for applying to new smooth metallic surface to remove grease, organic soaps and provide
a physical key, and shall be obtained from an approved supplier.
(vii)
Putty Filler
Shall be composed of white lead and dry filler mixed with pure linseed oil, the content of
the white lead shall be not less than ten percent (10%) of the mixture by volume and shall
be obtained from an approved supplier.
(viii)
Thinners
Shall be an approved turpentine or white spirit. Where the paints are specified to be
water thinned, fresh water shall be used.
(ix)
Pigments
Shall be pure tint colors that will easily dissolve and mix with the various coatings and
shall conform to the requirement of BS 1014: 1961 Pigments for cement, magnesium
oxychloride and concrete.
(x)
Rust Inhibitor
Shall be Galvafroid primer, manufactured by Secomastic Ltd. Bracknell, Berks,

England or Crown Chlorinated Rubber Zinc Rich Primer Produce Data Sheet No. 56,
297
manufactured by the Walpamur Co. Ltd., Darwin Lancs and / or approved equivalent.
2.3
2.4
Primers, Paints and Coatings

(i)
All brands of primers, paints and coatings shall be approved and shall comply
with the relevant B.S. where one exists.
(ii)
Primers for plaster and rendering shall be alkali resistant. Primers for other
surfaces shall comply with Table 4.2.
(iii)
Undercoats on wood and metal surfaces shall be of the drying-oil/resin binder

type, pigmented with titanium dioxide and/or colored pigments providing a Matt
or low-sheen finish suitable for subsequent application of a drying-oil type
finish.
(iv)
Water thinned priming paints and undercoats shall only be used with the
specific approval of the Engineer and compliance with B.S. 5082 will need to be
demonstrated in order to obtain such approval.
(v)
Finish coats on wood and metal surfaces shall be of the drying-oil/alkyd resin
binder type, pigmented with titanium dioxide and/or light fast, colored pigments.
Papers/Fabrics
Papers/fabrics shall be clearly marked with batch and shade numbers as appropriate.
2.5
Adhesives
Adhesives for wallpaper/fabrics shall be of a type recommended by the manufacturer
of the material to be fixed, and in the absence of such recommendation shall be an
approved type.
2.6
Epoxy Paint (Smooth Finish)

Epoxy paint shall comprise of the following system:
2.7
a)
One coat of Penguard clear sealer diluted to 25% by thinner # 17, to be applied
by roller.
b)
Two coats of Penguard texo to be applied by Putty knife, sanding should be

applied after each coat.
c)
One coat of Penguard high built by roller.
d)
Two coats of Futura II, which has to be applied after the completion of external
work.
Undercoating Paints
For exterior or interior shall be as follows
a)
White lead based undercoating in accordance with BS 4310 colors shall be

similar to the finishing paint.
b)
Other undercoating paints to be applied as recommended by the manufacturers

of the finishing paint.
3.0
WORKMANSHIP
3.1
General
(i)
Before painting commences all floors shall be washed over and every
possible precaution taken to keep down dust. No paint shall be applied to
surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be
ascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence, etc., before the
application of each coat.
(ii)
Workmanship generally shall be carried out in accordance with C.P. 231, and
298
BS 6150: 1982 unless otherwise specified.
3.2
(iii)
No primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork shall be left in an

exposed or unsuitable situation for any undue period before completion of the
painting process. No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under
adverse
weather conditions, such as rain, extreme humidity, dust
storms, etc.
(iv)
All items not required to be painted (e.g., ironmongery) shall first be fitted and
then removed before any painting preparation commences. The fittings shall
be
re-fixed in position when all painting is completed and dry for 24
hours minimum.
(v)
Mixing and application of paint shall be in accordance with the specifications

of the manufactures concerned and to the approval of the Engineer.
(vi)
The mixing of paints etc. of different brands before or during application will
not be permitted. No dilution of painting materials shall be allowed except
strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Engineer.
(vii)
Ironmongery and accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and

similar items in place prior to cleaning and painting, which are not intended to
be painted, shall be removed or protected prior to painting operations and
repositioned upon completion of painting work as directed by the Engineer.
(viii)
Equipment adjacent or against walls shall be disconnected by workmen

skilled in these trades and moved to permit the wall surfaces to be painted,
and following completion of painting shall be replaced and reconnected.
(ix)
Brushes, pails, kettles, etc., used in carrying out the work shall be clean and
free from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used
for different types or classes of material.
(x)
All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers'

printed instructions and paints of different brands shall not be mixed or used
in the same coating system. No dilution of painting material shall be allowed
except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the
Engineer.
(xi)
Concrete, blockwork, plaster and timber surfaces which are to be painted

shall be washed down prior to painting with a toxic wash applied by brush or
spray. A second wash shall be applied two days after the first wash. The
surfaces shall then be allowed to dry out completely before application of
paint.
(xii)
No exterior or interior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse

weather conditions such as rain, extreme humidity, dust storms, etc.
(xiii)
Painting work shall be shaded from direct sun light to avoid blistering and
wrinkling. Wherever possible, painting of exterior surfaces shall follow the sun
so that it is carried out in shadow.
(xiv)
Edges, corners, crevices, welds and rivets shall receive special attention to
ensure that they receive an adequate thickness of paint.
(xv)
All cracks and holes shall be cut out properly square and made good with
suitable filler or cement sand mix as appropriate, such repaired portions
being allowed to dry out and sand papered smooth
Preparation of Plastered and Rendered Surfaces for Painting

(i)
Rendered surfaces shall be allowed to dry out completely before carrying out
painting operation. Plaster applied in the winter season shall be at least ten
weeks old and that applied in the summer shall be at least five weeks old
before commencing painting operations.
(ii)
The surface shall first be scraped to remove mortar splashes etc., and then
299
made good, cutting out all defective work and repairing with plaster or render
of the same type as previously used.
3.3
(iii)
The surface shall then be vigorously brushed and rubbed down with fine
glass paper to remove loose particles and to smooth irregularities. Surface
mould where present shall be removed by washing, rubbing down and
burning off as necessary.
(iv)
Surfaces shall then be left for a week to determine whether efflorescence

reappears in which case it shall be brushed off dry and a further waiting
period of one week allowed.
(v)
Alternatively, the surfaces may be neutralized by brushing on a solution of 3

percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc chloride and removing all loose
particles after drying. No painting shall be carried out until the Engineer is
satisfied that no efflorescence is occurring.
(vi)
All render and concrete surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved putty
filler shall be spread evenly with a scrapper over all surfaces. The first coat
of stopping shall be applied after the primer coat dries out completely and the
second coat after the first undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shall
be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly and shall then be rubbed by
sandpaper until a smooth surface is achieved.
(vii)
The surface shall then be sanded using progressively finer grades of paper
until perfectly smooth and approved by the Engineer.
(viii)
A minimum of two (2) approved undercoats recommended by the

manufacturers of finishing coat shall be applied by brushing well into the
surface. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the
next coat is approved.
(ix)
New concrete shall be allowed to age a minimum of 28 days prior to coating

application. The surface must then be chemically treated or sweep blasted to
remove the laitance layer. The Ph of the concrete surface should be within
the 6.8 8.0 range for safe coating application. If the surface Ph is outside
this range, the drying of the concrete can be accelerated by applying
isopropanol or ethanol to the surface. The first priming paint coat shall be
thinned and applied with a paintbrush to obtain maximum penetration.
(x)
All rendered surfaces shall receive on or two full coat of alkali resistant primer
before the application of oil based paints as per the Engineers instruction.
(xi)
The finishing coat of paint shall be applied after the completion and testing of
the mechanical and electrical works.
Preparation of Wood Surfaces for Painting

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
All large, loose or resinous knots shall be cut out and the holes plugged with
sound wood. Nails shall be punched well below surfaces, especially
externally.
All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper in the direction of the
grain to give a smooth, even finish with arises rounded or eased.
Surface mould where present shall be removed by washing, rubbing down
and burning off as necessary.
After dusting off all oily woods such as teak and afrormosia shall be washed
with white spirit.
Two thin coats of knotting shall be applied to all knots and any other resinous
parts of softwood.
Resinous exudation and large knots shall be removed and replaced by
approved filler or knot sealer and the surface shall be primed.
Parts of wood to be enclosed in walls shall be primed unless already
impregnated with creosote or other preservative.
A full coat of primer shall be vigorously brushed in, particular care being
300
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
3.4
taken to fill end grain. Backs of members and end grains shall receive two
coats of primer.
After priming all nail, screw holes and similar depressions shall be filled with
stopping, pressed well in and finished off flush with the surface. Screw heads
shall be countersunk sufficiently to hold the stopping.
Hard stopping shall be rubbed with fine abrasive paper. If the first process of
stopping is found to be unsatisfactory it shall be repeated after the first
undercoating is applied and well dried.
After priming and stopping is completed, pore and grain irregularities shall be
treated with a coat of brush or knife applied filler, and the surface rubbed
down smooth and even.
Woodwork delivered primed shall be lightly rubbed down with abrasive paper,
and dusted off. Touch up bare areas with a similar priming including open
grained ends. The woodwork shall be stopped and filled, rubbed down and
dusted off.
Edges of exterior plywood and blockboard shall be sealed with two coats of
aluminum primer and the backs treated with a lead primer.
All woodwork scheduled to receive a clear finish shall be well sanded with the
grain, removing all dirt, etc., to give as smooth a surface as possible.
Resinous timber shall be swabbed down with White Spirit and dried
thoroughly. Spilt or
end grain shall be filled with suitable filler
recommended by the clear lacquer manufacturer, in accordance with his
instructions, and of the appropriate shade.
Wood surface specified as stained shall only be rubbed down with fine
abrasive paper and two coats of oil stain Ducco sprayed to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
Preparation of Metal Surfaces for Painting

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Bare metalwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, rust and scale
by means of chipping, scraping and wire brushing; particular attention should
be given to the cleaning of welded, brazed and soldered joints. Wash down
with white spirit and wipe dry with clean rags. Apply a coat of metal primer
immediately the cleaned surfaces have been approved by the
Engineer. One coat of approved putty shall be applied on the surfaces and
left to dry for at least twenty four (24) hours. Surfaces shall then be rubbed
by sandpaper or other approved means before second coat primer is applied
on iron and steel surfaces.
For Ferrous Surfaces:
(a) One cost of rust inhibiting Galovafroid primer or other approved equal
shall be applied by brushing well into the surface and shall be allowed to
dry and harden thoroughly before the application of subsequent coats.
(b) The under-coat and finishing coat shall be chlorinated rubber paint,
interior or exterior grades and used all in accordance with the directions
of the approved manufacturer.
(c) Chlorinated rubber paint, interior or exterior grades, shall not be applied
in damp, foggy or freezing weather or to any surface which is not
perfectly dry.
(d) Brush application is recommended although this material may be
sprayed if desired, only special thinners produced by the approved
manufacturer may be added to achieve the spraying consistency
required.
(e) Special approved thinners may be used for cleaning brushes after use.
(f) Ferrous works such as frames, covers to expansion joints, etc. which
are to be built into walls shall be primed before installation.
(g) Painting of Ferrous surfaces shall comply with BS 5493: 1977.
Galvanized metalwork scheduled for painting shall be thoroughly cleaned of
dirt, greased, dusted and washed down with white spirit and wiped dry with
clean rag. Any minor areas of rust shall be removed by wire brushing and
301
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
3.5
spot primed with a zinc rich primer. Apply at least one coat of calcium
plumbate primer to all surfaces subsequently to be painted. Primer for
galvanized steel shall be calcium plumbate primer to B.S. 3698 Type "A" or
zinc chromate primer.
If the priming coat of pre-primed metalwork has suffered damage in transit, or
during erection on site, the affected areas shall be cleaned off by wire
brushing, abrading and dusting off, the bared patches touched up with a
primer of a similar type to that already applied.
Copper scheduled for painting shall be lightly abraded with emery cloth,
washed with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rag.
When the cleaned surfaces have been approved apply: One coat of etch primer or copper pigmented primer
One coat of alkyd gloss paint
Aluminum scheduled for painting shall be lightly abraded with emery cloth,
washed with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rag. Apply a coat of etch
primer and zinc chromate primer immediately the cleaned surfaces have
been approved.
Screeds to receive an epoxy floor coating shall be brushed down, all cracks
and holes filled and all projections removed to leave a suitable dust free
surface. When the cleaned surface has been approved apply two coats of
two pack of epoxy floor coating as manufactured by an approved
manufacturer.
Priming shall follow manual preparation as quickly as possible and not later
than on the same day. With blast cleaned surfaces priming should follow
within 1 hour and under no circumstances later than after 3 hours.
Epoxy Paint for Water Tanks

Epoxy paint for internal rendered and concrete surfaces of water tanks shall be non
toxic, solvent free, and two component epoxy resin system with water-proofing
capabilities. The surface treatment and application of the paint shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers written instructions to a minimum thickness of
150 microns and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.6
Epoxy Paint
The surface treatment and application of the paint shall be strictly in accordance with
the manufactures written instruction and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.7
Paint Application
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions to clean, dry surfaces, in dust free and dry atmospheric
conditions and after any previous coats have hardened.
Priming coats shall be applied by brush unless other methods are approved
taking care to work the primer into the surface, joints, angles and end grain.
Any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on site or in transit shall be
touched up.
All surfaces of joinery which have not been primed in the workshop shall be
primed immediately on arrival at site and before fixing.
Care shall be taken to ensure that finish coats applied over calcium plumbate
primer are compatible with the primer.
Undercoats shall be applied as an even film over all exposed surfaces
avoiding an uneven thickness at edges and angles.
All priming and undercoats shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface with
fine abrasive paper and cleaned of all dust before the application of the next
coat.
Finishing coats shall be applied as an even film over all exposed surfaces,
avoiding brush marks, sags, runs and other defects. Where two gloss
finishing coats are specified the second coat shall be applied within 48 hours
302
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
3.8
3.9
of the first.
The application of paint systems for iron and steel shall result in a minimum
total film thickness of 125 microns internally or externally notwithstanding the
number of coats specified.
Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documentation Table 4.3 showing
the minimum number of coats for drying-oil/resin based paint systems shall
be complied with.
The permission of the Engineer must be obtained if it is necessary to proceed
O
O
with painting generally if the temperature is less than 40 F (5 C) and the
relative humidity in the building are greater than 80% or when such
temperatures and
humidity may be expected. Polyurethane wood
finishes shall not be applied when the temperature is less than
O
O
50 F(10 C)and the humidity of the timber is above 18%.
In the event that the Engineer is not satisfied that the quality of finish
complies with the required standards and/or the sample panel of the
Contractor will be required to repaint at his own expense such work to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. If in the opinion of the Engineer it is necessary to
remove completely the unsatisfactory paint work this shall also be done
under the direction of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
If while the work is in progress, the paint appears to be faulty, such as
consistency of color, drying time, or quality of finish , the work shall be
stopped at once and the manufacturer consulted.
The manufacturers of the material shall be given every facility for inspecting
the work during progress in order to ascertain that the materials are being
used in accordance with their directions, and to take samples of their
products from the site if they so desire for tests.
The finishing coats of the various paints or surface finishing shall be free from
sags, brush marks, runs, wrinkling , dust, bare or 'starved' patches, variation
in color and texture, evidence of touching up in any light and other blemishes.
When the work has been completed, the finished surfaces shall not be
inferior in quality, color and finishes to the samples approved by the
Engineer, and imperfections in manufacture shall not be apparent through
these finished surfaces.
Preparation of new Surfaces for Decorative Papers/Fabrics

(i)
Rendered surfaces shall be scraped to remove mortar splashes and all

irregularities, cracks and blow holes shall be filled and rubbed down when
dry, to a smooth surface removing all nibs and loose material.
(ii)
Rendering, asbestos board and other alkaline surfaces shall receive one coat
of alkali resistant primer.
(iii)
All nail and screw heads to rigid sheet surfaces shall be below the surface,
touched in with metal primer and allowed to dry before filling.
(iv)
Paperfaced plasterboard, hardboard, chipboard and the like shall receive one
coat of general purpose primer.
(v)
Surfaces which have not been primed and other surfaces recommended by
the adhesive manufacturer shall receive 1 coat which shall be allowed to dry.
Preparation of
Papers/Fabrics
Previously
Papered/Painted
Surfaces
for
Decorative
(i)
All existing paper or fabric shall be removed and the surface washed down
with warm water to remove old adhesive and size. All existing painted
surfaces shall be scraped to remove any loose material and washed with
detergent solution to remove any dirt and grease.
(ii)
All irregularities and cracks shall be filled and rubbed down when dry to a
303
smooth surface.
(iii)
3.10
Bare and filled areas shall be touched in with general purpose primer.
Hanging Decorative Papers and Fabrics

(i)
Hanging shall not commence until :

1)
All work affecting the surfaces to be covered is complete.
2)
The surfaces to be covered are dry and free from dust.
3)
The painting of adjacent surfaces is finished and dry.
(ii)
Switch plates, grilles, etc., shall be removed before hanging commences and
replaced when the surfaces are dry.
(iii)
The Engineer's instruction shall be obtained where the specified covering will
allow minor blemishes in the surfaces to show.
(iv)
Only rolls with the same shade number shall be used in any one area. Before
hanging, the rolls shall be carefully matched for color.
(v)
The manufacturer's recommendations for hanging the coverings and to which

surface the adhesive is best applied shall be followed. Great care shall be
taken to avoid staining the face of the paper or fabric.
(vi)
All lengths shall be in one piece unless greater than roll length.
(vii)
Patterned paper or fabric shall be correctly aligned and accurately matched.

Where mismatching is unavoidable the Engineer's approval shall be obtained
for the position allocated.
(viii)
Wallpaper shall be accurately butt jointed. Where incomplete widths are

required or where materials do not have straight edges the joints shall be
overlapped and cut through using a straightedge to form a butt joint. Edges
shall be neatly trimmed to a true line at junctions with other finishes.
(ix)
When finished, papers and fabrics shall be free from air bubbles, wrinkles,
gaps, tears, adhesive marks and stains and shall be secure and smooth.
4.0
STANDARDS AND TABLES
4.1
Standards
The Standards referred to in this Section are:

B.S. 245 Specification for mineral solvents.
B.S. 1336 Knotting
B.S. 2523 Lead based priming paint for iron and steel.
B.S. 3698 Calcium plumbates priming paints.
B.S. 4652 Metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media).
B.S. 4756 Ready-mixed aluminum priming paints for woodwork.
B.S. 4800 Paint colors for building purposes.
B.S. 5082 Water thinned priming paints for wood.
B.S. 5358 Low-lead solvent-thinned priming paint for woodwork.
304
4.2
Suitable Primers for Background

____________________________________________________________
SURFACES
PRIMER
____________________________________________________________
Non resinous wood
Low oil based primer to BS 5358
or
Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756
____________________________________________________________
Resinous Woods
Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756
____________________________________________________________
Iron and Steel
Red lead primer to BS 2523, Type "B"
____________________________________________________________
Calcium plumbate primer to BS 3698,
Galvanized steel
Type "A" or
Zinc chromate primer
____________________________________________________________
Blast cleaned iron and
Zinc-rich primer to BS 4652,
steel or touching-up
Types
damaged zinc coatings
1, 2, and 3
____________________________________________________________
Aluminum and
Etch primer plus zinc chromate
aluminum alloys
primer
____________________________________________________________
Copper
Externally: Etch primer or aluminum
and
pigmented primer
copper alloys
Internally: Alkyd gloss paint direct
____________________________________________________________
Lead
Alkyd gloss paint direct
____________________________________________________________
Plastics
Oil based undercoat
____________________________________________________________
305
4.3
Paint Systems
__________________________________________________________________
SURFACE
LOCATION
PAINT SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________
1 coat primer
1 coat undercoat
Internal
1 coat alkyd gloss finish
or
1 coat primer
2 coats alkyd mid-sheen finish
Wood-oil paint
________________________________________________
1 coat primer
External
2 coats undercoat
__________________________________________________________________
Internal
3 coats varnish or
polyurethane
Wood-natural ________________________________________________
finish
External
3 coats exterior grade
varnish
__________________________________________________________________
1 coat primer
Internal
1 coat undercoat
Iron and steel
including
________________________________________________
galvanized steel
2 coats primer
External
2 coats undercoat
__________________________________________________________________
1 coat etch primer
Internal
1 coat primer
Aluminum
and
1 coat undercoat
External
(lead free)
__________________________________________________________________
1 or 2 coat PVA primer
Cement rendering
Internal
2 coats undercoat
2 Acrylic Co polymer Washable emulsion
__________________________________________________________________
1 or 2 coat Acrylic Resistant Primer
Cement rendering
Internal &
2 coats Acrylic Texture coating
External
__________________________________________________________________
1 or 2coat Acrylic Resistant Primer
Cement rendering
External
2 coats water based acrylic emulsion
__________________________________________________________________
Exterior Concrete & rendering
Surfaces
1 or 2 coat of two pack epoxy under coat.

1 coat of two pack Epoxy texture spray.
2 coats of two pack polyurethane with
mix ratio 6 : 1
__________________________________________________________________
306
SECTION 15: ROADWORKS, KERBS AND PAVINGS

ii
GENERAL
(I)
Where materials used in this section (e.g. concrete and reinforcement) have
been specified elsewhere in this document, the relevant clauses shall apply to
this
section. Materials that have not been individually specified shall be of
first class quality and minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant British
Standard where applicable.
White cement shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and shall
comply with the relevant British Standard. White aggregate shall be of a color
approved by the Engineer and shall comply in all respects with the requirements
for aggregates in Section E.
(iii)
Samples of all materials to be used shall be submitted for approval. A
sample area of 3 x 3 meters shall be prepared for each hard surfacing material.
The approved sample shall be retained as the quality standard for the material
and its placement.
For excavation and filling, refer to the standards set out in Section D of this
Specification.
All tests on kerbstones shall comply with BS 7263, Part 1.
(ii)
(iv)
(v)
iii
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, CHANNELS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS

(I)
Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shall
comply with BS 7263, Part 1 and shall be hydraulically pressed. They shall
be laid and bedded on a Class II mortar bed not less than 10 mm and not
more than 40 mm thick on a foundation of concrete Grade 20 as per BS
7263, Part II.
For radii of 12 m or less, appropriate radius kerbs shall be used. Short, straight
Sections of kerb shall not be used for these radii without the Engineer's prior
approval. Drop, transition and radius kerbs shall be of Grade 30/20/S concrete,
Precast upside down in steel or GRP.
Before backing with concrete the kerbline shall be checked for line and level and
the foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Any units deviating by
more than 3 mm in 3 m from line and level shall be taken up and re-laid. The
level of any part of the kerbline shall not deviate by more than 3 mm vertically
from the specified level.
(iv)
Where filling behind the kerbs is likely to have a harmful effect on the
kerb, backing and foundation shall be protected by a method agreed with the
Engineer or as shown on the Drawings.
Joints between Precast units are to be left open. Expansion/contraction joints
are to be at 6 m centers in foundation and backing and are to be 3 to 5 mm
wide.
(ii)
(iii)
(v)
iii.1 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS.

1. Scope:
The part of BS 7263 specifies requirements for the following Precast concrete
products:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Wet pressed and semi-dry flags

Kerbs;
Channels;
Edging;
Quadrants.
Section 15, Road Works, Kerbs & Pavings
307
The Precast concretes products, referred to as a product of products in this

part of BS 7263 are intended for use in the construction of carriageways and
footways laid in accordance with BS 7263; Part 2.
2. Definitions:
For the purposes of this part of BS 7263 the definitions in BS G100; Subsection
1.5.1, from which the following definitions are taken, apply.
1.1
Nominal size. The size, which identifies a component.
1.2
Work size. The target size of a building component specified for its
Manufacture.
3. Binders
Products shall be made using one or more of the binders complying with the
appropriate British standards as given in table 1.
4. Aggregates
Products shall be made using one or more of the aggregates complying with the
appropriate standard as given in table 2.
5. Water
The water shall be either of drinking quality or shall comply with BS 3148.
6. Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with the uniformity requirements of BS 5075 and if
appropriate with the acceptance tests of the standard.
Table 1. Binders
Type of binder
Portland cement
Portland blastfurnace
Cement
Sulphate resisting
Portland cement
Portland Pulverized-fuel
Ash cement
Pulverized fuel ash
Ground granulated
Blastfuranace slagT
Lime
Low heat Portland
Blastfurnace cement
Pozzolanic cement with
Pulverized-fuel ash as pozzolana
Table 2. Aggregates
Type of aggregate
Natural aggregates
Air-cooled blastfurnace slag
Pulverized-fuel ash
Standard to be complied with

BS 12
BS 146: Part 2
BS 4027
BS 6588
BS 3892: Part 1
BS 6699
BS 890
BS 4246: Part: 2
BS 6610
Standard to be complied with

BS 882: 1983 (except grading
requirements in clause 5)
BS 1047: 1983 (except grading
requirements in 4.8)
BS 3892: Part 2
308
Ground granulated blastfurnace slag
BS 6699
7. Pigments
Pigments shall comply with BS 1014.
8. Air content
The concrete used in kerbs channels quadrants and edgings produced by the
wet cast process shall have the following entrained air contents measured in
accordance with BS 1881; part 106: (a) Products with 14mm nominal maximum aggregate size; 6% 1.5%.
(b) Products with 20mm nominal maximum aggregate size: 5% 1.5%
9. Finish
Products described as natural shall contain no pigment where products are
made with two-part mixes the surface layer shall be not less 12 mm thick for
flags or not less than 25 mm thick for all other products. The surface layer shall
be produced as an integral part of the product.
10.
Dimensions and tolerances
10.1 Dimensions
10.1.1Flags sized shall be given in table 3.
Table 3. Flag sizes

Flag type
Nominal size
Work size
Thickness
mm
mm
Mm
A
600 x 450
598 x 448
50 or 63
B
600 x 600
598 x 598
50 or 83
C
600 x 750
598 x 748
50 or 63
D
600 x 800
598 x 898
50 or 63
E
450 x 450
448 x 448
50 or 70
F
400 x 400
398 x 398
50 or 65
G
300 x 300
298 x 298
50 or 60
NOTE ; Tactile flags type TA are normally available in sites of flag types
E,F and G with an average thickness of 50mm, Tactile flags are thus
designated type TA/E TA/P or TA/G depending on their size.
Tactile flags shall be provided with domes on the wearing surface . A wearing surface
edge chamfer with dimensions 5 1 mm vertically and 5 1mm horizontally
measured at right angles, shall be provided on flags type E, F and G unless
otherwise specified.
10.1.2 Kerbs channels and edgings, kerbs, channels and edgings shall have a length in
the range 450 mm to 915 m. The length shall be measured along the vertical contact
face between the kerb and channel. The radius of the vertical contact face of a kerb
or channel shall be as given in table 4. All angles except those resulting from splayed
radiuses or chamfered force meeting as shown in figure 1 shall be square.
Table 4. External and Internal radii for kerbs and channels

External only
m
1.0
2.0
Internal and external

m
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
10.5 12.0
7.5
309
10.13
Quadrants
Quadrants shall have faces to match the profiles for kerbs type 6N, SP HB2 or HB3
respectively.
10.1.3 Dropper Kerbs

Dropper kerb shall have the sizes shown in relevant figure 1(k) or (1) dropper kerb
type or type 2 respectively.
10.2
Tolerances
Flags : the maximum dimensional deviation of any flag measured in accordance with
appendix A shall be as follows :
(vi) thickness 3mm.
(vii) dome height (tactle flags) ; 1 mm
(viii)
length and width 2mm
(ix) squareness of plan (difference between diagonals)
(1)
flag types A, B,C,D :
6 mm
(2)
flag types E,F,G : 3 mm
(x) flatness, winding and bowing;
(1)
measured over 550 to 850 mm 2 mm
(2)
Kerbs, channels and edging : The maximum dimensional deviations of any kerb
channel and edging measured as described in appendix A shall be as follows
:
(a)
length, width or height = 6 mm
(b)
straightness and winding;
1
2
(c)
squareness 2 mm clearance.
Transverse strength
11.1
Flags
When sampled and tested as described the falling loads shall be not less than the
appropriate value given in table 5.
Table 5 Transverse strength of flag

Flag Type
B,C,D
E
F
G
Minimum failing load for thickness

50 mm
60 mm
63 mm
kN
kN
kN
8.3
12.7
11.1
16.9
8.0
9.1
9.6
13.8
65 mm
kN
70mm
kN
18.6
15.4
310
Kerbs, channels and edgings

When sampled and tested as described the failing loads shall be not less that the
appropriate value given in table 6.
Table 6. Transverse strength of Kerbs, channels and edging

Depth of
(see note 1)
mm
150
125
50
50
50
50
Dropper kerbs
125
Width as tested
mm
305
160
255
255
205
160
255 to 150
Failing load
( see note 2)
kN
32.2
8.0
13.3
3.1
2.7
2.0
10.3
Note 1. Units are placed in the testing machine with the depth as stetted being the
smallest dimension.
Note 2 : The failing load for kerbs of various length may be obtained by extraociation.
e.g. if the failing load for a 125 mm x 255 mm x 915 mm kerb tested on a span of 750
mm is 13.3 kN the falling load for a 550 mm kerb of the same cross section tested on
a span of x mm will be 13.3 x (750 / x )kN.
Notes 3
Outlet kerbs, quadrants and angle kerbs are not tested for transverse strength.
12.
Water absorption.
12.1
Kerbs, channels, edgings and flags: When tested as described in appendix C

the water absorption shall not exceed the approximate value given in table 7.
Table 7. Maximum water absorption of kerbs, channels, edgings and flags.

Kerbs channels and quadrants
% by mass 2.5
% by mass 4.0
shown in figure 1.
13
Sampling for independent testing.

Samples shall be taken before the products are laid and wherever practicable, whilst
they are being moved. e.g. during loading or unloading. A sample of three products
shall be taken from a consignment of not more than 1000 products. Each of the three
products in the sample shall be taken from one of three approximately equal sections
or the consignment to be tested.
Each product of a sample shall be uniquely marked and accompanied by a certificate
from the person responsible for taking the samples, stating that sampling was carried
out in accordance with BS 7263: Part 1.
The sample shall be dispatched to the test laboratory taking precautions to avoid
damage to the products in transit.
Note : Products used for the dimensional checks may subsequently be used for
transverse strength or water absorption, tests.
311
14.
Marking
14.1
The following particulars relating to products made in accordance with this

British Standard shall be clearly marked on the delivery note, invoice,
manufacturers or suppliers certificate or brochure relating to a consignment
of products :
(vi) The name trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturing
plant.
(vii) The number and date of this British Standard, i.e. BS 7263 : part 1 : 1990,
(viii) Type of binder constituent(s) used (see clause 3)
(ix) Type of admixture(s) used (see clause 8)
(x) For flags, the type and thickness in millimeters. e.g. A50.
Marking BS 7263 : Part 1on or in relation to a product represents a
manufacturers declaration of conformity, i.e. a claim by or on behalf of the
manufacturer that the product meets the requirements of the standard. The
accuracy of the claim is therefore solely the responsibility of the person
making the claim. Such a declaration is not to be confused with third party
certificates of conformity, which may also be desirable.
iv
IN-SITU CONCRETE KERBS

(I)
(ii)
In-situ concrete kerbs shall be laid by an approved automatic kerbing machine

or by a method approved by the Engineer. The kerbs shall be dense with
regular sides, arises and chamfers finished to a fine surface free from blow
holes and dragging and shall be to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
The coarse and fine aggregates shall be as specified in the Concrete
Specification with a ten per cent fines value for the coarse aggregate of not less
than 50kN when tested in accordance with BS 812. The nominal maximum size
of aggregate shall be 20 mm.
(iii)
Concrete for kerbs shall have a 28-day cube strength of not less than 25.0
N/sq.mm. The concrete mix shall contain not less than 280 kg or more than 540
kg of sulphate-resisting cement per cubic meter. The ratio by mass of free water
to cement for saturated surface dry aggregate (the water/cement ratio) shall not
exceed 0.50. The quantity of water used shall not exceed that required to
produce a dense concrete with suitable workability to obtain full compaction with
the plant used. The mix shall be designed by the Contractor who shall prepare
and compact trial mixes in the presence of the Engineer using the same plant as
that proposed for the Works. The concrete mix and compaction plant shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval. After approval, no variations shall be made
to mix proportions or to any constituents without the Engineer's prior consent.
(iii)
Delivery, storage and batching of material and mixing, transporting and placing
of concrete shall be as specified in the Concrete Specification. Immediately after
compaction and for 7 days thereafter the kerbs shall be fully cured and
protected from drying out and against the harmful effects of weather, including
rain and rapid temperature changes. The method of protection shall be subject
to the Engineer's approval. The use of colored curing membranes will not be
permitted as the color of the kerbs after weathering shall be similar to that of
adjacent Precast units. Concrete not properly cured and protected will be
rejected and shall be removed from the Works.
(v)
Kerbs shall remain firmly secure on the surface on which they are cast. Kerbs
shall be cut whilst the concrete is green to form expansion/contraction joints at
3 m centers. Joints shall be filled and sealed with materials approved by the
Engineer.
(vi)
The vertical alignment of the finished kerb shall not depart from the design level
312
by more than 3 mm and, at any point, the maximum deviation of the kerb in line
and level shall not be greater than 3 mm in 3 m.
4.0
PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS:
4.1
Materials
4.2
(I)
Cement:
(ii)
Aggregates:
Acid Soluble Chlorides: 0.06% by weight of Fine Aggregates

0.02% by weight of Coarse Aggregates
Acid Soluble Sulphates: 0.3% by weight of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter
having pH value in the basic range (7-9).
(iii)
Water:
(iv)
The inorganic impurities shall not exceed the following limits:

2000 mg/liter
Chlorides
250 mg/liter
Sulphates
350 mg/liter
Alkali Carbonates & Bicarbonates
500 mg/liter
Pigments:
Any pigments used shall comply with BS 1014
Dimensions & Tolerances

(I)
Standard rectangular blocks shall be manufactured with a nominal
length of 200 mm and a nominal width of 100 mm. Alternative sizes and shapes
1
shall have a ratio of length to width on plan of not less than 1 /2 or greater than
1
2 /2; the width shall not be less than 80 mm or greater than 115 mm. The
minimum normal thickness for paving blocks of any size shall be 60 mm. The
preferred nominal thickness shall be 60, 80 and 100 mm.
(ii)
All arises shall be clean, plane and of uniform dimension. Wearing
surface areas shall not be less than 70% of the plan area.
Tolerances:
4.3
The cement used in the manufacture of Precast concrete

paving blocks shall comply with the requirements of either BS
12, 4027 or BS 146. The cement content of compacted
3.
concrete shall not be less than 400 kg/m
The aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed
aggregate to comply with BS 882. The salt contents shall not
exceed the following limits:
Length
Width
Thickness
+/+/+/-
2 mm
2 mm
3 mm
Compressive Strength
(I)
The average compressive strength of the block on delivery when sampled and
tested in the manner described below, shall be not less than 49 N/sq. mm in wet
conditions. No individual block strength shall fall below 40 N/sq. mm in wet
conditions.
(ii)
Correction factors for chamfers and thickness shall be :
___________________________________________________________________
Block Thickness
Correction Factors
___________________________________________________________________
Plain Block
60/65
80
100
1.00
1.12
1.18
Chamfered Block
1.06
1.18
1.24
313
4.4
Sampling Blocks
Two blocks shall be drawn from each group of 1000 blocks for sampling, 10 blocks
every designated 5000 block section or part thereof in a consignment. All samples shall
be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that the designated section or
part thereof and the consignment represented by the sample, are clearly defined.
4.5
Test for Compressive Strength

The sample specimens shall be tested in a wet condition after being stored for at least
24 hours in water maintained at a temperature of 27 Deg.C +/- 3 Deg.C. Before the
specimens are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined as follows:
(a) Where possible, the plan area or the wearing surface area shall be calculated by
multiplying the length by the width.
(b) Alternatively the plan area or the wearing area shall be calculated by cutting out
shapes of cardboard and weighing it to the nearest 0.01 g.
Where
As
As
ms
=
=
20000 ms
m
Area of block (sq. mm)
Mass of cardboard shape matching test block
(g); the block shall be placed wearing surface
uppermost on the cardboard.
Mass of 200 x 100 mm cardboard rectangle (g)
cut from the same cardboard.
In case of chamfer or radius, the width of chamfer or radius shall be measured and
marked on the cardboard shape. This shape shall then be cut out accurately and
weighed for calculation of the wearing surface area. Plywood, nominally 4 mm thick,
shall be used as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and the
machine platens, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of at
least 5 mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested.
The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at a rate of
approximately 15 N/sq.mm. per minute until no greater load can be sustained. The
maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded. The strength shall be
expressed to the nearest 0.1 N/sq.mm.
4.6
Test for Water Absorption

Blocks shall be tested for water absorption in accordance with BS 1881. Blocks shall be
deemed acceptable provided that the maximum absorption does not exceed:
a)
2% after 10 mins.
b)
5% after 24 hours
4.7
Certificate of Compliance
(I)
This certificate is to be provided by the manufacturer at the time of sale as
peritem no.12 of BS 6073
5.0
PAVERS
(I)
Multi-colored clay brick pavers shall be as specified elsewhere in the Contract
documents.
6.0
PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS

Samples of paving shall be submitted to the Engineer showing the color, pattern, and
surface finish etc., as required. The mix and method of production shall be stated and
any change proposed to the paving after approval will necessitate re-submission and
further
approval.
314
Paving shall be to the shapes and sizes shown on the drawings. They shall be cast from
Mix A sulphate resisting concrete and pressed or vibrated to give a dense, well-finished
material. Undersides of paving shall be grooved or otherwise finished to provide a good
key. Curing of the paving shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The sub-base shall be prepared in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. The slab
shall be laid firmly on the sand bed and tamped into position with a pavior's maul. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the slabs do not rock and are laid as closely together as
possible but with maximum gap of 3 mm. The joints between the concrete slabs shall be
finished carefully brushing in sand grout as soon as possible after the paving slabs are
laid. All surplus grout shall be carefully cleaned from the surface of the paving, kerbs, etc
as the works proceed.
The slabs shall be unbounded and laid to a regular grid as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The slabbing shall be laid so that the edge abutting the kerbs
shall slightly project (3 mm maximum) above the top face of the kerb. Where necessary,
the concrete slabs shall be cut to size and fitted against kerbs, surface boxes and
constructions. Cutting will be carefully carried out by mechanical means to true faces.
Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall fill in narrow gaps and surrounds to
surface boxes and obstructions with mix A concrete to the same thickness as the slabs
and bedding. The in-situ concrete strips shall not be greater than 150 mm wide and the
concrete slab shall be properly rammed and trowelled smooth and flush with adjoining
slabs.
7.0
IN-SITU CONCRETE PAVING

In-situ concrete paving shall be Mix B. Reinforcement shall be as shown on the
drawings. Samples shall be provided of the surface finishes specified when requested by
the Engineer.
8.0
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION
8.1
General
(Reference to block in this section shall refer to clay paver or concrete block unless
stated otherwise).
a)
Concrete block surfacing shall consist of Precast blocks on a bedding course 50 mm

thick laid on road-base on sub-grade, if the sub-grade cannot achieve the required CBR
value, a 200 mm thick sub-base layer shall be provided, in footings the road base shall
be replaced with sub-base naturally occurring materials.
b)
Sub-grade shall consist of approved granular material compacted to produce a minimum

laboratory CBR value of 10% at 95% of the maximum dry density achieved as cited in
BS 1377 after soaking for 96 hours.
c)
Sub-base material shall be type 1 or type 2 as defined below. The type to be used shall
be as shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
315
Type 1 material shall be crushed rock or similar hard material, or naturally occurring gravel. The
materials shall comply with the following grading :
______________________________________________________________________
BS Sieve Size, mm
Type 1
Type 2
____________________________________________________________________
Percentage by
Percentage by
weight passing
weight passing
square mesh
square mesh
______________________________________________________________________
75
100
100
37.5
85 - 100
85 - 100
10
40 - 70
45 - 70
5
25 - 45
25 - 85
0.6
8 - 22
8 - 45
0.075
0 - 10
0 - 10
______________________________________________________________________
The total sulphate content (as SO3), as determined by Method 9 Acid soluble sulphate
BS 812, part 118 and 117 respectively shall not exceed 1% by weight. The total chloride
content (as C1) shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. The materials passing at 0.425 mm
sieve shall have a plasticity index not exceeding 6.
d)
Sub-base materials shall be spread evenly and compacted to obtain a well-bound

surface finish; loose or segregated areas will be made good by addition of fines or by
replacement of the materials as directed. Compaction shall be carried out by approved
plant operating on the material at an approved moisture content until a dry density of not
less than 95% of the maximum achieved as per BS 1377, Parts 4&9 is attained. The
laboratory CBR value shall be a minimum of 30% at 95% of the laboratory maximum dry
density (or higher approved density) after soaking for 96 hours. The finished surface of
the sub-base shall be true to line and level within a tolerance of +/- 20 mm of the levels
shown on the drawings.
Road base material shall be approved natural gravel, crushed rock or other approved
material complying with one of the following grading.
______________________________________________________________________
BS Sieve Size, mm
Type 1
Type 2
______________________________________________________________________
Percentage by
Percentage by
weight passing
weight passing
square mesh
square mesh
______________________________________________________________________
50
100
100
37.5
90 - 100
95 - 100
20
90 - 80
70 - 92
10
40 - 60
50 - 70
5.00
25 - 30
35 - 55
2.36
15 - 30
26 - 44
0.425
5 - 18
10 - 23
0.075
3- 9
3- 8
______________________________________________________________________
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm sieves shall not exceed two third of the fraction
passing the 0.425 mm sieve. The material shall conform with selected grading
throughout the Contract.
316
e)
Road base material shall have physical properties, which do not exceed the following
tests values.
_______________________________________________________________
Limit
Standard
______________________________________________________________________
Liquid Limit
25% max.
BS 1377, Part 2
Linear Shrinkage
3 max.
BS 1377, Test 4
Plasticity
6 max.
BS 1377, Part 2
Los Angeles Abrasion
40 max.
ASTM C535/C131
Chloride content (as Cl)
0.5% max.
BS812, Part 117
Sulphate content (as SO3)
1% max.
BS812, Part 118
Test for Organic materials
0.2% max.
ASTMC 40
Compaction Test
(Modified Proctor)
ASTM D 1557
______________________________________________________________________
The sand equivalent shall not be less than 45%, ASTM D 2419.
Road base material other than natural gravel shall be crushed and mixed by approved
mechanical plant to produce the specified grading.
Water required to adjust the moisture shall be added at the mixer. The moisture content
may be adjusted to allow for evaporation losses during transportation and spreading.
Mixed material shall be removed from the mixer immediately and transported directly to
its ultimate location.
The material shall be spread evenly, segregation shall be made good by replacing with
properly graded material as directed.
If natural gravel is used, water necessary to adjust the moisture content shall be added
during laying by plant equipped with a sprinkler bar to give an even spread of water over
the width of the pass.
The road base shall be compacted by approved plant to a dry density which shall be not
less than 100% of the maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 or such higher
percentage as may be required to satisfy the minimum CBR requirement. The
laboratory CBR value shall be minimum of 80% after soaking for 96 hours.
The compaction plant and method shall be proven by trial at the commencement of the
works. Compaction trials shall be carried out at varying moisture content. The weights,
types and number of passes of compaction plant shall be varied to determine the
optimum compaction effort. The final levels of the road base shall be within +/- 10 mm of
the theoretical levels.
The road base shall be mechanically swept or cleaned with compressed air to remove
loose material and to leave a tightly knit close textured surface, which will not allow
penetration of laying course.
317
f)
The testing requirements for pavement layers are as listed in the following tables.
(I)
Laboratory tests to monitor the consistency of the approved material during construction.
_________________________________________________________________
Layer : Sub-base and Road-base
Frequency of Test
(not less than one test per...)
_________________________________________________________________
Test
Maximum dry density
1500 C.M.
Optimum moisture content
Grading
Plasticity Index
Linear Shrinkage
CBR
Sulphate Content
Chloride Content
__________________________________________________________________
(ii)
In-situ tests to confirm that the required degree of compaction is being achieved during
construction.
__________________________________________________________________
Layer: Sub-base and Road-base
Frequency of Test
(not less than one test per...)
__________________________________________________________________
2
Dry density
500 m
__________________________________________________________________
g)
h)
I)
Tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377, using 4.5 kg rammer methods
where applicable. Minimum number of field density tests shall be 3 per unit as indicated
in ASTM D 797 and D 75. This size of lot and unit shall be determined by the Engineer.
The laying course shall consist of clean sand with a practical size of 0.5 mm containing
not more than 3% silt plus clay by weight. The sand shall be obtained from a single
source, allowed to drain, before use and covered to minimize moisture changes.
Acid soluble sulphate and chloride contents shall not exceed 0.3% and 0.5% by weight
respectively. Tests shall be carried out to confirm achievement of these requirements at
2
the rate of one set of tests for each 1000 m in accordance with BS 812, Part 118 and
Part 117 respectively.
The profile of the laying course before compaction shall be similar to that of the finished
surface. The maximum deviation from the design levels shall be +/- 5 mm. The laying
course shall be placed to a level, which takes into account the compaction, which occurs
during vibration of the blocks, the amount of this compaction shall be determined by
trials prior to commencement of surfacing.
The surface course shall consist of approved pre-cast concrete blocks. The concrete
constituents shall comply with the requirements of the Concrete Specification given
elsewhere Cement shall be SRPC. Additional requirements are contained in the
following Clauses of this Section.
Concrete block shall be of Precast hydraulically pressed type of the size and shape
specified or indicated on the Contract drawings.
Each load of Precast concrete and paving blocks must be accompanied with the
following documents :
I)
A Certificate confirming that this particular consignment complies with relevant
standard specifications and that all necessary tests have been conducted.
ii)
An identification trademark inscribed on each block pallet fixed by the producer.
iii)
A certificate from the manufacturer, stating the category and dimension of
blocks and the average compression strength of the subject lot.
318
j)
20 samples from each consignment of upto 10,000 blocks will be selected which the
Contractor shall bring for testing characteristics strength and dimensional accuracy at a
testing center to the approval of the Engineer.
If the parameters of the specification are consistently met over the first 3 months of full
production the frequency of block testing will subsequently be relaxed to 20 random
blocks from each consignment of upto 20,000 blocks. If any of the 20 test blocks do not
comply with the requirements for compressive strength and dimensional accuracy the
whole consignment may be rejected.
k)
The testing machine shall be of suitable capacity and capable of applying the required
load at the rate specified and shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS 1610
and BS 1181.
The average compressive strength of the 20 blocks on delivery when sampled and
2
tested as specified shall not be less than 48 N/m in wet condition.
l)
m)
n)
The thickness of each sample shall be measured to the nearest 1 mm at 4 different

points using steel calipers. The value of thickness measured shall have a maximum
deviation of +/- 2 mm from the specified dimensions.
Blocks may be required to be tested for water absorption. The test shall be based on
that specified in BS 1881, Part 122, and the maximum acceptable limits for water
absorption shall be :
2.4% absorbed after 10 minutes.
5% absorbed after 24 hours.
The acceptable limits for water absorption may be required to be varied to achieve the
minimum absorption compatible with the aggregate approved for use in the paving
blocks.
The color of blocks shall be uniform and as detailed on the drawings or as directed.
Samples of each different color shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any change in the shade of the same color and may be required to
replace the discolored tiles after laying even during maintenance period.
Block laying shall commence right angle to the main pavement axis starting at one end
o
of the area. The paving blocks shall be laid in a herringbone pattern at 45 to the main
pavement axis, or in any other pattern as required with no extra cost.
Blocks shall be laid on black sand cushion so that blocks already laid are not disturbed.
Blocks shall be placed to fit closely together, the width of joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
Special edge blocks shall be used on all edges, which are parallel to or perpendicular to
the main pavement axis. Where the shape or dimensions of paved areas preclude the
use of special blocks on all edges, cut blocks shall be used. Blocks shall be cut to suit,
using a mechanical block splitter or bolster chisel. In-situ concrete shall not be used to
make up to edge restraints.
o)
The blocks shall be compacted to the required levels, using an approved plate vibrator
2
as each of 100 m of paving is laid and checked.
The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.2 to 0.3 and a compaction force of 9 to 16
KN.
Joints shall be filled by brushing in fine dry sand with a particle size of 0 to 2 mm and a
maximum sulphate content (as SO3) of 0.5% by weight. A further pass of the plate
vibrator shall be made in each direction. The finished surface level shall be within 5 mm
of the design level and the maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured
by a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 5 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks
shall not differ by more than 2 mm, in one meter.
8.2
Bond Pattern
(I)
Precast paving blocks used for vehicular carriageways will be laid to a

herringbone pattern. The direction of the pattern shall be maintained throughout
319
(ii)
8.3
the total area to be paved. Any change of direction will require the approval of
the Engineer.
The laying course shall be laid to compacted thickness of 50 mm plus a
surcharge necessary to provide the specified final bed thickness after vibration
of the block paving. During laying the sand shall be carefully screeded to a
smooth surface to receive the paving blocks. No compaction of the sand layer
and no traffic including pedestrian is to be permitted before the blocks are laid.
(iv)
The profile of the laying course shall be similar to that of the finished surface.
The maximum deviation from the design levels shall be + 10 mm. The edge
restraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all
obstacles within the area, such as manhole covers, shall be constructed to the
correct finished levels.
(v)
The paving blocks shall be laid on the sand-laying course in such a manner as
not to disturb the blocks already laid. Each block shall be placed firmly against
its neighbour so that they fit closely together.
(vi)
The joints between blocks shall not exceed 3 mm.
(vii)
Where blocks do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as
manholes or upstands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks. Blocks shall be
cut using a mechanical block splitter or saw. Any damaged or broken blocks
shall not be laid. Any blocks damaged during compaction shall be replaced at
the discretion of the Engineer.
(vii)
Due allowance shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compaction
of the laying course above, which occurs when the paving blocks are being
vibrated. The amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall be
determined by site trials prior to the commencement of the actual surfacing and
shall be repeated when the source of sand supply or a change of weather
conditions occurs.
Compaction
(I)
After each 20 sq., or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer, has
been laid, the blocks shall be compacted to the required levels using a plate
vibrator.
(ii)
The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35 sq. and have a
compaction force of 12-24 kN and a frequency of approximately 75-100Hz.
(iii)
A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction,
i.e. at 90 degrees to each other. Vibration shall continue until no further
compaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry sand with particle size of 0.3
mm shall then be brushed over the paving, and further passes of the plate
vibrator made in each direction until the sand is no longer absorbed into the
joints.
(iv)
The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrained
edge during laying.
(v)
No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the one metro
strip at the temporarily uncompacted edge, which shall be covered and
protected from rain.
8.4
Accuracy
(I)
On completion, the finished surface level shall be within 5 mm of the design

level and the maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a
3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 5 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks
shall not differ by more than 2 mm. Any areas of paving which do not comply
with these tolerances shall be removed, and sand laying course lifted and relaid
320
and the paving blocks relaid to the correct levels.

(ii)
Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall

be checked after paving the first three rows of blocks and thereafter at regular
intervals. If joints begin to open, the blocks shall be knocked together using a
hide mallet.
(iii)
9.0
SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's data on the Precast concrete block
pavers together with the instructions for all manufactured materials and products.
The Contractor shall also submit a sample for approval of color, texture and general
condition.
Any change in aggregates, admixtures, pigments or mix design will require a resubmission.
321
SECTION 16: LIFTS

ELEVATOR INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS:
The elevator shall be supplied and installed by an approved manufacturer to consultants
approval.
The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Main Contractors Contract and
the Main Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the Specialist
Sub-contract.
BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE

The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the Elevator Subcontractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator installation.
The Main Contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual facilities for the
execution of the Specialist Sub-contract.
AS-FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICE MANUALS

On completion of the elevator installation and at least one week prior to the date of inspection,
the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as-fitted elevator installation drawings. Two
sets of instruction manuals for general running and maintenance and repair are to be
provided.
GENERAL
The contractor shall supply, install test and commission and hand over the complete elevator
installation as specified with the applicable codes as BS/EN-81 or JIS.
The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
Schedules at the end of the specification.
The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers provided in
the basement for this purpose. All the works shall be co-ordinated with the other Contractors
prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility.
The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated traction
equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.
All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system of the
building, as specified under Electrical Section.
All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing
environmental conditions at site.
The lift contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the completed lift until such time
that the last taking over certificate for the whole of the works under main contract issued by
the Engineer. The lift contractor is responsible for maintenance of lifts during 12 months
defects liability period. Maintenance shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection of the
elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one month and to include for all
emergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day.
Section 16, Lifts
322
A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer/Client immediately after each
monthly inspection and cleaning and greasing.
The Contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate attention on
the day of the notification.
CAPACITY
The Elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car cable and
ropes and in accordance with the attached particular specification.
SPEED
The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the particular specification.
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
TRACTION MACHINE
The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency controlled
gearless motors, having stepless, smooth speed time characteristics.
The traction machines shall be of PM (Permanent Magnet) type, designed to meet the severe
service condition encountered in the elevator operation. No structural supports shall be
provided for elevator machine, which shall be supported by the guide rails, independent of
building structure. All vertical elevator reaction loads to be supported by guide rails such that
no load stress to the building structure.
All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth running. All
the rotating electrical machinery shall be fitted with microtherms, to provide overload
protection and shall have built in double brakes.
MOTOR DRIVE
The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive [VVVF] unit will control the motor speed
using a microprocessor.
The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs AC-to-DC conversion and
an inverter which is designed to invert DC to three-phase variable voltage variable frequency
AC. The inverter will give an output of sinusoidal current with zero [0] through fifty [50] hertz
by application of pulse width modulation technology.
The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in accordance
with speed command signal which is performed by a microprocessor in the elevator controller.
The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the following
condition:
Supply line voltage fluctuation: - 10% to +5% from the rated voltage.
Frequency variation
- + 2% from the rated frequency
The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contactors for removing the power from the motor of
the traction machine. The contactors will open each time the car stops. The brake of the
traction machine will be applied while the contacts drop out.
A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between the
speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary encoder will
Section 16, Lifts
323
control the motor speed while the car is accelerating, decelerating and landing.
Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit and the motor
of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the following conditions occurs:
Phase reversal, phase failure, failure of supply voltage, over current, overheating of thyristor
and transistor, operation of any safety device.
CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a computerized controller
(Slim type of thickness not to exceed 100 mm and to be located inside the shaft). A computer
controlled regulator will control the car speed by comparing the actual car speed detected by
a pulse-rotary encoder with an ideal speed pattern generated by a microprocessor.
While the car is accelerating, the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by the
microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
While the car is decelerating, the microprocessor will calculate and provide the ideal speed
pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.
At landing, a smooth landing pattern will be generated by a microprocessor, and as soon as
the car has stopped, the mechanical brake will be applied to hold the car.
OPERATION:
A)
SINGLE CAR:
1. The operation will be of UP/DOWN selective collective type.
The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch buttons in THE car
numbered to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of "Up" and "Down"
buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal landings, all
connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection and direction of
travel to supply the operation described below.
2. The car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main ground floor.
3. The car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
4. Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority response, long
waiting time prevention etc.,
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A)
GUIDE RAILS
For smooth running of the counterweight and the elevator car, guide rails with steel tee
sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the elevator shaft. The rails shall
rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting any physical forces on hoistway ceiling or
walls of the building.
Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on temperature
variations.
B)
HOISTING ROPES
Section 16, Lifts
324
Bright steel wire ropes with steel cores of adequate cross-section manufactured with a
factor of safety of 12.
C)
GOVERNOR ROPES
These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be securely
linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The governor ropes
shall be tensioned by a weight-loaded device located in the pit.
D)
COUNTERWEIGHT
Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the weight of
the car and the specified capacity.
E)
BUFFERS
OIL type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the counterweight.
These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS channels and correctly disposed
relative to the car and the counterweight.
The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to provide very high
safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to the top of the plunger to
withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted on the underside of the car and
the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided to check the oil level.
Spring type buffers shall be provided for speeds 60 MPM and below only.
TRAVELLING CABLES
The travelling cables shall be 450V/750V grade multi-core with stranded high conductivity
copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty. These cables shall be properly
supported by retaining straps and individual cable clamps.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system, over-speed
centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.
The operation of the system shall be such that if the car overspeeds in the downward
direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It shall, in sequence, cut off
the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and engage the safety gear gibs when the
safety gear gibs engage with the car guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bring
the car to a gradual and smooth stop within defined limits.
Re-setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward direction.
a)
Over Travel
Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and bottom of the terminal landings
to disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the car to safe stop position in
the event of an over travel in either direction.
b)
Evacuation Devices
Provision shall be made to move the car electrically through the emergency access panel
in the top floor to the nearest landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of
Section 16, Lifts
325
passengers during a power failure. No mechanical devices like brake release rod etc. are
acceptable.
c)
Fireman Emergency Operation

Fire Emergency Operation Button enclosed in a breaking glass shall be installed near
the entrance on the main landing and shall operate any one of the elevator under
conditions of emergency, in the event of fire.
When the Fireman Emergency Call Button is pressed, it shall immediately disconnect the
elevator under normal automatic operation and the car shall return to the main landing. It
shall not register any hall calls, so that the passengers will not wait for the elevator. The
car shall then only operate on the attendant operation and it shall start registering the hall
calls.
ELEVATOR CAR
The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and other facilities
shall be as called for in the schedule, under the Interior Design work package. The Lift
contractor is to advise on the max. weight factor that can be acceptable for these finishes.
The car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and manufactured all
in accordance with relevant Sections.
The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant Section of the Specification.
The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in addition to the items already
specified.
a)
Ventilation
Electric Ventilator mounted on car roof with proper vents to be provided.
b)
Emergency Lighting
Self contained, non-maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.
c)
Emergency Exit
An Emergency Exit shall be provided on car roof. This door shall be able to open either
inside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall be provided to prevent the car
travelling when this emergency exit is open.
d)
Intercommunication System
Intercommunication system between the car, main landing and the machine room.
e)
Working Platform
A working platform shall be provided on the roof of the car.
f)
Car and Landing Doors

The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic, two panel, automatic sliding doors.
The TYPE AND finish of the doors shall be as specified in the Schedule.
g)
Door Operator
Section 16, Lifts
326
The door operator shall be high speed heavy duty, with a VVVF controlled AC Motor. The
inverter shall include high speed switching device which inturn shall provide a smooth
sine curve of output current to assure smooth, quite and precise door control. The
opening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and car doors
shall operate in full synchronism. Advance door opening during car's approach to a
landing could be used to speed up passenger transfer.
h)
Safety Features
Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and maintenance work.
Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones during power
failure.
Full door height safety-edge device in the leading edge of the car doors to reverse the
doors when there is any obstruction for closing.
Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that elevator cannot
operate unless doors are closed.
Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent from starting.
The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer shall signal the overload
condition to the passengers.
Emergency light with trickle charger.
TESTING
On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions shall be carried
out in the presence of and to the approval of the Engineer.
All materials used must be of the highest quality and the best of their respective kinds and
must comply with the relevant. All weights necessary to carry out the full load and overload
tests must be provided by the Contractor and removed after use.
The tests will include the following:
No load current and voltage readings both on Up and Down Circuits.
Full load current and voltage readings both on Up and Down Circuits.
One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on Up and Down Circuits.
Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
Overload protection.
Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
All interlocks.
Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
Safety gear mechanism.
Speeds on Up and Down travel with loadings and empty.
Section 16, Lifts
327
Door contacts.
Final terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping device.
Insulation and earth continuity.
OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS

a)
Car Operating Panel (To be provided to the full height of the car and located on the side
wall)
The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with acknowledge
light for each button.
Emergency call button.
Door Open and Door Close Buttons.
Intercom Station.
Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
b)
Landing Position Indicator

Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and over the main
landing entrance of each elevator. The top floor shall have the inspection and
emergency access panel provided as a combined unit with the hall button. As the
elevator travels through the hoistway, its position shall be indicated by the illumination
of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is stopped or
passing. Indicators shall be properly designed for better recognition with colour filters
to provide good contrast. Travel direction indicators shall also be included in this
indicator.
c)
Push Buttons and Indicator for Landing

1) Up and Down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has been
registered.
2) Hall Indicators/Call Buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.
3) Fire Alarm call button in a break-glass fixture at the main landing.
NOTE: The contractor/manufacturer is to submit their model/types for operating / indicator

panels specification, being aware of this type of project.
CAR AND LANDING SILLS

Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing entrance and
on the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.
These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels.
The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to
the entrance threshold. These sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level.
Section 16, Lifts
328
The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads excerting on
them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS
General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in the Electrical
Specifications. GI trunking shall be used wherever possible instead of multiple conduits. GI
conduits and flexible conduits shall be used between trunking and apparatus.
Earthing of all the equipments shall be carried out as specified in Electrical specification and
as per IEE Regulations.
Distribution Equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and circuits. These
shall include overload protection, short-circuit protection, single phasing protection, etc. as
appropriate.
FOLLOWING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE MAIN

REQUIREMENT OF ELEVATOR CONTRACTORS.
CONTRACTOR
AS
PER
1.
Related builder's works, including wire mesh partition, shaft lighting and ladder in pit,
rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine room.
2.
Permanent 3 Phase 415V 50 HZ and 1 PH 240V 50HZ TPN + SPN circuit breakers of
required capacity etc., as required by the lift supplier
3.
Hoisting beam/hooks in the hoistway slab.
4.
Assistance in fixing steel separator beams, if required, (separator beams will be

provided by lift manufacturer), in between hoistway at approx. every 2.0 mtrs interval.
5.
Assistance in fixing steel sill projections/angle support at all landings sills to be provided
by the lift manufacturers.
6.
Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security/reception for
elevator interphone/supervisory panel.
7.
Sufficient weatherproof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator materials

at ground floor near elevator shaft.
8.
Normally open free sensing contact(s) with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
9.
Supply and installation of tubular free standing scaffolding to our requirement inside the
elevator shafts with working platform and removal thereof.
10.
Cranage facility for unloading lift materials from containers and shifting the same to
various floors.
11.
Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes with breakers, as required
by lift supplier.
12.
Interior finishes in the lift cabin or as mentioned in the particular specifications.
Section 16, Lifts
329
TENDER RETURN BIDS

The following is required within each contractors tender bid for the above scope of works.
i)
Full and detailed programme

commissioning of the works.
ii)
Detailed record of manufacturers warranties/guarantees etc.
iii)
Pre-qualification pertaining to relevant projects of this type and nature carried out, along
with suitable references.
iv)
All relevant material specification/proposals for exposed finishes (indicator panels etc).
v)
Project specific method statement.
vi)
QA/QC Plan and Procedures.
vii)
Copy of Trade Licence.
viii)
Project H + S Plan.
ix)
Tender Clarifications, where applicable.
x)
Confirmation of any additional interface requirements deemed necessary to allow a full

and complete installation.
Section 16, Lifts
for
manufacturing,
delivery,
installation
and
330
SECTION 17: POWDER COATING

1.
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Requirements
The Powder Coating is specified by Performance. The Main Contractor shall:
a) Be responsible for the fabrication/coating of Powder Coated materials and
associated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meet the
requirements of this Performance Specification.
b) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, coating thickness and types, all
in accordance with specified standards detailed herein.
c) Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specified herein and
have been independently inspected and certified.
d) Provide all submittals as specified herein.
e) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials, components,
systems, methods of installation etc. to meet the performance criteria specified
herein.
1.2 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that he complies with the latest Code of
Construction Safety Practice, the Health and Safety section of the Contract
Documents and ensure that full consideration is given to the health and
safety of operatives when manufacturing, handling and installing the Works.
1.3 Standards
independently certified evidence that all specified variants of components
2.
TYPE(S) OF POWDER COATINGS
2.1 Location:
The location of the Powder Coatings is defined on the Drawings.
2.2 Type 1: Powder Coatings
Finish is to be an exterior super durable polyester powder coating, comprising of
materials/properties that provide colour stability, gloss retention, corrosion protection with
uniform flow and finish and UV and humidity resistance.
Powder coatings to be Jotun PE-SDF or equal and approved. Powder coatings to be
approved by the engineer, prior to contractor commencing scope of works.
3.
3.1
Significant Surfaces
a. Supply drawings with the components to be coated with Powder Coated
finishes.
b. Clearly mark which surfaces are the 'significant surfaces'
Section 17, Powder Coating
331
i. All visible surfaces

ii. Other surfaces that require a 'full coating'
3.2
Jigging Points, Venting and Drainage Holes

a) No areas of uncoated metal will be accepted on 'significant surfaces under any
circumstances.
b) In any area where coating is carried out after machining, satisfactory jigging
points must be agreed in advance between the fabricator and applicator,
c) Provide pre-treatment and galvanizing venting and drain holes where necessary.
d) Obtain agreement of all parties for the location of all jigging, vent and drain holes.
e) Wherever possible ensure drainage holes are in unseen areas, but in positions to
give the most satisfactory result and ensure holes are in areas that will not
weaken joints, sections or assemblies.
3.3
Appearance
a) Ensure all visible finished surfaces are free from blisters, craters, pinholes or
scratches when viewed with normal or corrected vision from a distance of 1
metre.
b) The quality of finish must be consistent and in accordance with AAMA 260498 4.2. A slight degree of Orange Peel may be acceptable, subject to
approval from the Engineer.
3.4
Coating Thickness
a) Ensure the Powder coating has a Minimum continuous film thickness on
all specified surfaces of:
I.
II.
III.
3.5
60 microns on Aluminium,
60 microns on Galvanized steel, unless specified otherwise.
The Maximum Coating thickness should not exceed 100 Micron.
Design Life
The Powder Coatings shall be designed to withstand weather conditions taking
account of extremes of wind, temperature, solar radiation, hail, rain, sandstorms
and all other relevant factors. The expected service life of the Powder Coatings is
a minimum of 20 years. The contractor shall provide a back to back guarantee
from the applicator and manufacturer for 25 years.
A back to back (signed) guarantee between applicator and manufacturer of the
coating shall be required.
3.6
General Movement
a) The Powder Coatings shall be applied to withstand all movements of the building
structure under all design loads or combination of loads without damage or
reduction in the performance of the Coatings.
3.7
Thermal Movement
a) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the
332
maximum and minimum surface temperature differentials occurring:

I.
3.8
The surface differential temperature range for components of the

o
Powder Coatings shall be taken as 10C and 70 C.
Moisture Movement
The Powder Coatings shall withstand movement without permanent deformation
or any reduction in the specified performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from
variations in the moisture content of the air either inside or outside the
building.
b) Due to the presence of condensation on the surface of coated materials.
3.9
Service Life of Components

a) The service life of all primary components of the works shall be at least equal to
the Design Life as specified above.
3.10
Local Factors
a) The Main Contractor shall have visited the site to familiarise himself with local
requirements. Local micro climatic conditions shall be taken into account and
grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the location shall be
selected.
b) An assessment of micro climatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for
any factors likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the works
contract. More appropriate materials shall be substituted if adverse effects are
predicted.
3.11
Safety
The finished surfaces of the Powder Coatings in all accessible internal and
external areas shall not:
a) Have any irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
4.
4.1
MATERIALS
Materials to be Coated
a) Ensure the substrates to be Powder Coated are made from materials to the
relevant British Standard(s).
b) Ensure the materials and alloys are all in a suitable condition for the
application of Powder Coatings and are able to withstand curing
temperatures of approx. 200 degrees Centigrade for a minimum period of 10
minutes.
4.2
Conformity Requirements
a) Ensure the product and its application conforms to all relevant
requirements, restrictions and recommendations of:
i. AAMA 2604-98 (Aluminium)
ii. BS 6497 (Galvanized Steel)
333
iii. QUALICOAT Class 2 Certificate No. P-0440

iv. British Coating Federation: Code of safe practice.
5.
5.1
FINISHES
Preparation Generally
All components/materials are to be chemically pre-treated prior to application of
the Powder Coating finish to promote adhesion and prevent undercut
corrosion.(To the powder coaters recommendations) see Jotun Powder Coatings
Recommended Process & Process Control Requirements MTI 96-62 GB 02 / 99
5.2
Protective Coating Of Mild Steel Framing Sections/Sheet material

Prior to Polyester powder coating. All surfaces shall be:
a) Hot dip galvanized to BS 729, or

b) Treated with an appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493.
5.3
Protective Coating Of Mild Steel Mechanical Fixings

All surfaces shall be:
a) Hot dip galvanised to BS 729, or BS EN 10142, 3+7 for pre-galvanized sheet
(unpassivated).
b) No uncoated exposed aluminium surfaces or edges.
c) Galvanized coatings on metalwork to be prepared in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations prior to PPC coating.
6.
6.1

Generally
a) Apply the Powder Coatings in accordance with this Performance
Specification and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be true to detail with
continuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,
waves, or damage of any nature.
b) Main Contractor shall employ competent Powder Coating applicators as
approved by the coating manufacturer. Records of their experience are to be
provided to the Engineer. Applicators should be approved by Powder
Manufacturers list to be supplied.
6.2
Metalwork and Coatings/Finishes Generally

a) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from the
same supplier or manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
334
b) Where metallic super durable powder coatings are required, a higher level of
application control, and inspection is recommended. Refer to Jotun Powder
Coatings guidelines when applying metallic coatings.
6.3
Protection
a) All fabrications and assembled units shall be protected against damage,
corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent site
operations.
b) Protective coverings shall be applied before dispatch to site and shall not be
detrimental to Powder Coated products, finishes or installation procedures. See
Jotun Powder Coatings Technical Manual.
6.4
Handling And Storage

a) Do not deliver to site any Powder Coated products and units which cannot be
installed immediately or unloaded into a suitable, well protected storage area.
7.
7.1
TESTING
Testing of Finishes: Product test data shall be provided by the Coating
Applicator as follows:
I.
Test for Adhesion - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 2409-2mm, BS3900 Part E6
II.
Test for Flexibility - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 1519, Qualicoat Class 2
Section 2-7
III.
Film Hardness - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 2815, AAMA 2604-98 Part 7.3
IV.
Impact Resistance - in accordance with ECCTA T5 (1985) , AAMA 2604-98 Part

7.5
V.
VI.
VII.
Surface Spread of Flame - in accordance with BS 476: Part 7.

Weather Resistance - in accordance with ASTM G90-94 (B), Natural Weathering
Salt Spray Resistance in accordance with DIN 50021 ISO 9227, 3000hrs salt
spray to AAMA 2604-98 7.8.2
Sulphur Dioxide Resistance in accordance with DIN 50018, 240hrs BS3900
Part 7.8
Humidity Resistance in accordance with DIN 50017, 3000hrs to BS3900 Part
F.2.
Artificial Weathering, 2000hrs QUVA.
VIII.
IX.
X.
335
SECTION 18: SEALANTS

1.0
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Requirements
The sealants specification is non-performance designated and contains general
materials and workmanship specifications to control the standard of materials and
products.
The Main Contractor should:
a) Be responsible for the supply and installation of the Sealant to meet the
requirements of this Specification and its performance criteria.
b) Co-ordinate the installation with that for all related works and accommodate
the specified movements and tolerances for structural elements as specified
in the Structural Engineering Specifications.
c) Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specified herein
and have been independently inspected and certified as specified.
d) Provide all submittals and samples as specified herein.
e) Be responsible for sealing all junctions to form a fully weathertight and airtight
seal to meet the Specification criteria.
f)
Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials and methods
of installation to meet the criteria specified herein.
1.2 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor should ensure that he complies with the latest Code of
1.3 Standards
1.4 Related Sections
This Specification is a general specification which must be read in conjunction
with all drawings and specifications.
2.0
TYPE(S) OF SEALANT
2.1 Location
The location of the Sealant is defined on the drawings. Sealant types are to be
selected by the Main Contractor in accordance with the criteria of this
specification
incorporating
the
manufacturers
recommendations.
Manufacture/range specified are intended to set out the performance
requirements, the tenderer has the also the option of costing from an or equal
and approved source, however also providing a tender bid return based upon the
selected ranges as mentioned:
2.2 TYPE A
Section 18: Sealants
336
ManufactureCompliance-
PreparationColour-
Sonolastic NP1 ; as a single component, no sag

aliphatic polyurethane with plus or minus 25 percent
movement capability for vertical
and horizontal
joints.
MBT MIDDLE EAST / Sonneborn
SONOLASTIC ASTM CY20, Types, Grade NS,
Class
Class
25;
Federal
Specifications
CAN/CFS329.B M87,
Functions C-2-40-A-N and MCG-2-25-N CGSB
Qualification NO 51026 ANSI/UL263 4 hour fire
resistance, Design Nos J9002014 and U9002037;
USDA Compliant
In accordance to the manufacturer data sheets and
Application Method Statement
To Engineers Acceptance
2.3 TYPE B
Colour-
Sonolastic NP2 ; Multiple component high

performance Polyurethane sealant with a plus or
minus movement of 50% for vertical and horizontal
joints.
A Canadian Specification CAN/CGSB2-19.24-M80,
Sonolastic NP 2 : ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class Classifications MC-2-A, CGSB Qualification
No. 81029
To Engineers Acceptance
2.4 TYPE C
Sonolastic 150 ; low modulus, high movement, fast

curing Sealant, with a plus or minus of + 100 to 50
for aluminum and wood frames, wet glazing.
Sealant Type MR : Silicone sealant
1. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT< G,A,O.
2. TT S-0011543A (COM-NBS) Interim Federal Specification for
Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, and
Glazing in Buildings and other Structures)
3. USDA compliant
4. Joint movement capability: plus or minus 25 percent.
Colour-To Engineers Acceptance
3.0
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Sealant performance, include the following:
All exterior joints shall be filled with self-expanding compriband.
Sealant will be non-chalking, non-cracking, and resistant to ultraviolet. Based on
performance the sealant will be non-fire hazard. Sealant shall be compatible for
adhesion with Kynar finish, resin base paint, glass, stone, metal, ceramic tiles,
anodised aluminium, galvanised steel and plastics such as polycarbonate and
PVC etc. Bond width of the sealant shall be minimum 10mm. Fire-Resistive
Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, but
not less than that equalling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the
construction in which the joint occurs. Fire rated sealant will be provided around
all HVAC/Mechanical/other services installation, where the same are penetrating
fire rated walls.
Backer rod, include the following:
337
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,

nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of one of the materials
indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam, non-absorbent to liquid water and gas, non-out

gassing un unruptured state.
Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density

of 40 kg/cu.m and tensile strength of 241 kPa.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by

sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result
in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
3.1
Structural Requirements/Movements Generally

The Sealant shall be selected and installed to withstand all movements of the
building structure and elements under all design loads or combination of loads
without damage or any reduction in the performance of the sealant.
3.2
Service Life
The sealant shall be selected to withstand weather conditions based on a 50 year
return period (from Meteorological data) taking account of extremes of wind,
temperature, solar radiation, hail, rain, sandstorm and all other relevant factors.
The expected service life is a minimum of 10 years.
3.3
Thermal Movement
All components should accommodate the thermal movement resulting from the
maximum and minimum surface temperature differentials occurring:
a) The surface differential temperature range for components shall be taken as
100C and 550C.
b) The sealant shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditions envisaged
for the works.
3.4
Moisture Movement
The Sealant shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from
variations in the moisture content of the air either inside or outside the
building.
4.0
MATERIALS
338
4.1 General Sealant

Shall be compatible with all contact products and finishes and be selected in
accordance with:
a) Silicone to BS 5889.
b) One part non-sag polyurethane sealant Sonalastic NP1 from MBT to BS
5215.
c) Two component polysulphide sealant Masterflex 700 from MBT to BS 4254.
d) Two component gun grade polyurethane sealant Sonalistic NP2 from MBT
to BS 4254 or BS 5889.
4.2 Curtain Walling /Window joint Assembly Sealant
Joint assembly sealant shall be: Silicone to BS 5889, type A or B, neutral curing
where in contact with or in close proximity to other products which may be
adversely affected by acetoxy curing.
5.0
INSTALLATION
5.1 Generally
a) Install the Sealant in accordance with this specification, the manufacturers
recommendations and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be true to detail
with continuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,
waves, or damage of any nature.
b) Installers shall employ competent operatives.

5.2 Suitability of Joints
Before commencing, check that:
a) Joint dimensions are within limits specified for the sealant.
b) Surfaces are smooth and undamaged.
c) Preparatory work which must be done before assembly of the joint has been
carried out
Sealant installation schedule, include the following:
General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sealants at the following locations. For locations
and applications not specified, install sealants of types recommended by the joint sealant
manufacturer.
Exterior Joints:
1. Non-Traffic Joints: One-part non-sag urethane sealant.
2. Joints Subject to Traffic: Multi-part pourable urethane sealant.
Interior Joints:
1. Joints Subject to Traffic: Multi-part pourable urethane sealant.
2. Non-Traffic Joints:
339
a. Joint Subject to Movement of 10 to 25 Percent: One-part non-sag

urethane sealant.
b. Joints Subject to Movement Under 10 Percent: Acrylic sealant.
3. Tiled Areas and Areas Subject to Attack by Mildew: One-part mildewresistant silicone sealant.
Joints in Fire-Rated Construction: Fire-resistive joint sealant.
5.3 Applied Sealant Generally
a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that where sealant is used, careful
preparation for and application of correct de-greasing solvents and bonding
agents are carried out.
b) The Main Contractor shall ensure that surrounding elements are adequately
protected from the application of sealants. Following installation protect the
sealant from follow on trades where necessary.
c) Where sealant is applied, either on or off Site, it shall be in accordance with
BS 4254, BS 5215 or BS 5889, and shall be the most appropriate type and
grade suitable for the intended application.
d) The Main Contractor shall submit his proposal to the Engineer regarding type
and colour of sealant prior to ordering materials and the Sealant colour shall
be agreed with the Engineer. The Main Contractor shall state the period
during which the sealant will not change in colour or appearance. Any
discoloration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.
e) Excess sealant shall be removed and all joints shall be neat and clean.
f)
Sealant shall be evenly applied without bubbles in joints.
g) The Main Contractor shall determine the proper hardness, compressibility or

consistency of sealant in consultation with the manufacturer, considering the
joint movement and exposure for the size of joint.
h) Sealant shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent with
the degree of exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant
exposed to traffic shall have strength and modulus sufficiently high to resist
damage by traffic, including indentation.
i)
Sealant shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid

contamination by dust and other debris.
j)
Non stick backing strips shall be provided to ensure that 3 sided adhesion
does not take place, to the sealant manufacturers recommendations.
k) Sealants which are likely to stain or discolour or bleed into adjacent natural
materials shall not be used. In addition, run-off staining shall not occur below
or above horizontal joints.
5.4 Interfaces
Ensure that flashing, closers, etc. (specified in other sections) are located
correctly and neatly overlap the Sealant to form a weathertight junction.
340
5.5 Damage
a) Do not repair Sealant without approval. Such approval will not be given
where materials are badly damaged or where the proposed repair will impair
performance or appearance.
5.6 Cleaning
a)
At Practical Completion of the Works, or when otherwise agreed with
the Engineer, remove any protective coverings and carefully clean. Cleaning
agents for the purpose shall be approved by the Sealant manufacturer.
6.0
SUBMITTALS
6.1 Submittals to be Provided after Contract Award

a) Confirmation of the materials/ products submitted with full technical literature
of the proposed product/material including relevant testing data from
independent organizations.
b) Confirmation that the sealant and accessories comply with the contract
documents and are recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the use
intended.
6.2 Control Samples
Provide samples, including relevant technical literature as follows:
a) At an agreed stage provide the Engineer with identified samples of each type
of sealant in its respective conditions/ environment.
b) Obtain no objection before proceeding.
341
SECTION 19: CUBICAL PARTITIONS & LOCKERS

1.0
CUBICLE PARTITIONS
- Manufacturer and reference: Proprietary system, to approval.
- Finish: To approval
- Division panels: 25mm thick phenolic resin
- Doors: 25mm thick phenolic resign
Edge details: Post formed with laminate dressed around in a continuous
membrane forming a continuous waterproof and hygienic seal
- Support system: Floor and ceiling mounted proprietary support system without
need for head rail at door openings. Concealed head batten above ceiling level
and braced back to concrete soffit.
- Fixing system: Stainless steel concealed integral proprietary alen key system
recessed into thickness of panels and making secret fixing to wall bracked.
Surface mounted screw fixings will not be permitted.
- Ironmongery / Accessories: Integrated 316 grade stainless steel. Stainless steel
foot and ceiling junction surround. Bright stainless steel indicator bolt, coat hook.
2.0
STORAGE LOCKERS
Storage lockers shall be approved proprietary types in accordance with the Product
Data.
Body, back and front panel to be (TRESPA VIRTUON or equivalent)
Submit Product Data including dimensions and modules, method of locking, internal
shelving and fittings, colour range and accessories.
Internal shelves shall be interchangeable and height adjustable.
Storage lockers shall be powder coated in selected colours.
Verify colours, dimensions and modules before commencing.
MATERIAL
1.
Model: "L - Shaped" 169-30 SBB/L (TRESPA)
2.
Design
a. Width: 300mm
b. Depth: 490mm
c.
Height: 1690 (overall height of locker unit).
d. Locker Shutter is 13mm thick TRESPA VIRTUON Solid

Grade Compact Laminate colour to be selected from
manufacturers standard range.
e. Locker side panels, top, dividers and bottom made of
13mm thick solid grade compact laminate, colour white.
f.
Locker back panel made of 6mm thick MDF, colour

white.
g. Hardware includes, cylinder lock, with master key

system, hanger rod, coat hook, PVC ventilator, and
permanently engraved numbering system to be provided.
3.0
Integrated Bench:
Lockers mounted on 454mm high steel base, with 430mm high integral bench, Made
of steel box section frame, polyester powder coated to RAL 9011 (Black) with
adjustable foot. Bench top made of 13mm thick TRESPA VIRTUON compact
laminate in approved colour from manufacturers standard range
4.0
Samples:
Section 19: Cubical Partitions
342
Before placing the order submit representative sample(s) of the following:

i)
ii)
cubicle-door, pilaster, support assembly including accessories and

components in finishes specified.
Provide a site mock-up full installation of one unit (to be agreed/arrange at a
suit part of the contract/works).
Ensure that delivered materials match that of specification/sample. Samples that

do not meet the system specified will not be considered.
5.0
PROTECTION:
-
6.0
INSTALLATION:
-
7.0
Do not remove protective packaging/coverings until just before components

are required for fixing.
Stack doors and panels flat on bearers and separated by spacers where
necessary to prevent damage to or from projections.
Keep completed cubicles clean, dry and adequately protected from damage
until Practical Completion.
Do not install cubicle partitions before building is weathertight, wet trades

have finished their work, wall tiling and floor finishes are completed, and the
building is well dried out.
Set out accurately to ensure frames, panels, fascias and doors are plumb,
level and accurately aligned.
Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished surfaces except where shown on
drawings or otherwise agreed with CA.
Fix securely as section 20, using manufacturer's fixing components without
causing distortions to frames, panels and doors.
Adjust hinges so that doors hang as indicated on drawings.
Cubicle Sizes
Generally cubicle heights will be 2000mm with a 150mm air gap to base for
adjustable foot.
Generally cubicle widths 900mm with a hinged inward swing door of 700mm
wide.
Cross refer to all relevant toilet drawings for exact sizes and setting-out.
Section 19: Cubical Partitions
343
SECTION 20: FIXINGS

1.0 Requirements
The Fixings specification is non-performance designated and contains general
materials and workmanship specifications to control the standard of materials and
products.
The Main Contractor shall:
a) Be responsible for the selection supply and installation of the Fixings and
associated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meet the
requirements of this Specification and its performance criteria.
b) Co-ordinate the supply and installation with that for all related works and
accommodate the specified movements and tolerances for structural
elements as specified in the Structural Engineering Specifications.
c) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, sizes, thickness, types,
locations of fixings etc, all in accordance with specified standards detailed
herein.
d) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials, components,
systems, methods of installation etc. to meet the performance criteria
specified herein.
1.1 Health & Safety
a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that he complies with the latest Code of
1.2 Standards
1.3 Related Sections
This Performance Specification must be read in conjunction with all sections.
2.0 TYPE(S) OF FIXINGS
2.1 Location
The location of Fixings is defined on the Drawings, specific types have not been
specified and the Main Contractor and subcontractors shall select fixings in
accordance with the performance criteria of this specification.
Section 20: Fixings
344
3.0 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Generally
a) The design of the Fixings shall accommodate all the various tolerances and
movements of the building structure. Movements of the building structure will
occur from the application of dead and live loads plus moisture, shrinkage, creep
and thermal effects.
b) The design shall take account of all structural criteria and ensure that the
installation takes account of all movements and tolerances, in both permanent
and temporary conditions, in order to avoid stress and deformation.
3.2 Fixings
a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that all fixings are of sufficient strength,
appropriate to their location, and provided at adequate positions so as to ensure
the performance of the elements being attached. The fixings shall be suitable
and used solely for the purposes intended by the manufacturer in order to satisfy
the requirements of this Performance Specification.
b) Unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings, the Main Contractor shall
observe the following basic requirements:
i. Durability fixings shall be selected such that adequate protection
against corrosion likely in their position of use is provided for the
service life specified.
ii. Rigidity fixings shall be used which are suited to the likely stresses,
movements and vibrations in use.
iii. Appearance unless otherwise specified, fixings shall not be visible;
where fixings are visible shall match or suit the items being fixed or
comply with the Drawings.
iv. The method of fixing shall not damage anything being fixed or
anything receiving fixings.
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 Fasteners directly and indirectly exposed
Fasteners for materials and components forming part of external construction to
be of corrosion resistant material or have a corrosion resistant finish.
4.2 Packers
a) Provide suitable, tight packers at fixing points to take up tolerances and
prevent distortion.
b) Use non-compressible, rot proof, non-corroding materials positioned adjacent
to fixing points.
c) Ensure that packers do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with
sealant.
4.3 Nailing
a) Nails: To BS 1202
Section 20: Fixings
345
b) In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unless
specified otherwise.
c) Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.
d) Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
e) No nail fixings will be permitted to any finished timber surfaces.
4.4 Plugs
a) Proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and
conditions expected in use.
b) Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
4.5 Screw Fixing
a) Screws: To BS 1210.
b) All screws to have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all
screws into hardwood to have pilot holes about half the diameter of the
shank.
c) Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws pre-cut the
thread with a matching steel wood screw.
d) Drive countersunk heads flush with timber surface, or not less than 2 mm
below it if they are to be stopped.
e) Washers and screw cups, where specified, to be of the same material as the
screw.
4.6 Pelleting
Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber surface and glue in grain-matched
pellets not less than 6 mm thick, cut from matching timber. Pellets to occupy the
whole depth of the holes and be finished off flush with surface.
4.7 Plugging
Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber suface and glue in plugs. Plugs to
occupy the whole depth of the holes and project from the surface.
4.8 Adhesives
a) Adhesive types: As specified in the relevant section.
b) Surfaces to receive adhesive to be sound, free from dust, grease and any
other contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces
using methods and materials recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
c) Adjust surface regularity and texture as necessary to suit bonding and gap
filling characteristics of adhesive.
d) Apply adhesives using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correct
coverage. Bring surfaces together within recommended time period and
apply pressure evenly over full area of contact to ensure full bonding.
Section 20: Fixings
346
5.0 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.1 Generally
a) Supply and install the Fixings in accordance with this Specification and
Detailed Drawings.
b) Installers shall employ competent trade operatives.
c) All fixings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommended procedures.
d) No objection shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cutting
parts of the structure, other than where shown on the Working Drawings.
e) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane, with a
satisfactory fit at all junctions.
f)
All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards
set out in this Performance Specification, together with the relevant British
Standards.
g) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from the
same supplier.
h) All support systems shall be adequate thickness and strength, not only to
meet the structural requirements, but also eliminate any risk of distortion in
the finished surfaces.
i)
Protection of the works shall be provided until hand-over to avoid any

blemishes on the finished elements.
5.2 Fixing Through Finishes

Ensure that fasteners and plugs have ample penetration into the backing.
5.3 Cramp Fixing
a) When not specified otherwise, position cramps not more than 150 mm from
each end of frame sections and at 600mm maximum centres. Secure cramps
to frames with matching screws as masonry work proceeds, and fully bed in
mortar
6.0 SUBMITTALS
6.1 Control Samples
A representative sample of each fixing type to be retained on site.
Section 20: Fixings
347
SECTION 21: FACADE CLEANING SYSTEM
1.1
SUMMARY
This section includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning, training of
operators and one year warranty period for the maintenance of the Faade Cleaning
Equipment.
The primary purpose of the facade cleaning equipment is to regularly clean the facades of the
building.
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Facade cleaning system shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
Monorails with Face mounted brackets

Monorail traversing bogey
Parapet mounted davits
Slewing Powered cradle with safe working load of 200 kgs or 2 persons
SUBMITTALS:
Upon awarding the Order, the contractor shall submit a complete technical proposal for the
approval by the Consultant, which shall include the following:
Scaled shop drawings for the proposed system including:
Proposed system layout
Bracket spacing and maximum loads
Reactions at point of support
Location of the power supply points
Services to be provided by the other related sub contractors.
Upon completion of works, Operational and Maintenance manual in English shall he
submitted along with As Build Drawings for the system in 3 copies
1.3 SPECIALIST (BMU) CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENT
The building maintenance equipment shall be supplied and installed by a specialist contractor
who has a minimum of 7 years experience in the design, manufacture, installation and safe
working of same equipments in the UAE with documentary evidence.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
Design the system such that the cradle is clear of the face of the building. Fenders to allow
the cradle to rest lightly against the facades at the time of cleaning
All assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1 against failure
as a minimum.
Wire Ropes shall be completely capable of supporting the intended loads and have a factor of
safety of at least 10.
Each equipment shall be completely pre-assembled and thoroughly tested in factory prior to
dispatch for final installation.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
1.5.1 Codes and Standards:

British Standards Institution (BSI)
1.5.1.1
BS EN 288 -1: General rules for Fusion Welding.
Section 21: FACADE CLEANING SYSTEM
348
1.5.1.2 BS EN ISO 1461: specification for Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Iron and Steel
Articles.
1.5.1.3 BS 916: Specification for Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts, Hexagon and Square with
B.S.W. Threads, and Party Machined Bolts, Screws and Nuts, hexagon and
square, with B.S.W. of B.S.F. Threads.
1.5.1.4 BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip Galvanised Coatings on Fabricated Iron and Steel Articles
specification and test methods, including annexes A, B, C, D, and E.
1.5.1.5 BS 1981: Specification for Unified Machine screws and Machine screw Nuts.
1.5.1.6 BS EN 10263 - 1 & 2: Steel for cold Forged Fasteners and Similar Components,
Stainless steel.
1.5.1.7 BS 4320: Specification for Metal Washers for General Engineering Purpose - Metric
series.
1.5.1.8 BS 4464: Specification for spring Washers for General Engineering Purpose Metric
Series.
1.5.1.9 BS 4872, Part 1: Fusion Welding of steel.
1.5.1.10 BS EN 1808: Safety requirement on Suspended Access Equipment - Design
Calculations, Stability Criteria, Construction, Tests.
1.5.2 General:
Construct all components of heat treated aluminium alloy or stainless steel or hot dip
galvanised structural steel. Dissimilar metals, when used, shall be protected against
electrolytic action.
Consider the materials size and thickness shown on the drawings as for conceptual design
purposes. The facade access system contractor is to provide the final design and detailing of
the equipment and all connections.
1.5.3 Materials:
Comply with BS EN 1808: Safety requirement on Suspended Access Equipment Design
Calculations, Stability Criteria, Construction, Tests.
1.5.4 Welding:
All welding requirements and shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with BS
EN 288 -1: General rules for Fusion Welding & BS 4872, Part 1: Fusion Welding of steel.
1.5.5 Bolting:
Comply with BS 916: Specification for Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts, Hexagon and Square
with
B.S.W. Threads, and Party Machined Bolts, Screws and Nuts, hexagon and square, with
B.S.W.
of B.S.F.
Threads BS 4320: Specification for Metal Washers for General Engineering Purpose Metric
series
BS 4464: Specification for spring Washers for General Engineering Purpose Metric Series
BS 1981: Specification for Unified Machine screws and Machine screw Nuts.
PRODUCTS
2.1
FABRICATION GENERAL
349
Quality of work shall be best trade modern shop and field practice known to recognised
manufacturers specialising in this type of work. Accurately fit joints and intersecting members
in true planes with adequate fastening.
Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute according to details and
reviewed shop drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in
shop.
Fabricate finished work free from distortion, weld spatter and defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
Weld all connections unless otherwise permitted.
Where welding is not possible use approved bolted connections. Fastenings shall be
at adequate spacing. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials, colour and finish of
the base metal on which they occur.
3 SYSTEMS:
3.1 MONORAIL SYSTEM:
The monorail shall be provided with horizontal access system, fixed around the perimeter of
the building structure. The traversing trolleys, from which the cradle is suspended, shall travel
along the monorail to reach the various parts of the building. The trolleys are equipped with
separate connection shackles for primary and secondary hoist ropes. The rail is Aluminium
profile. The brackets shall be galvanised steel and fixed to the building structure by 3 nos.
Galvanised mounting bolts.
Specifications:
Track section Type
: Face mounted type extruded track
Track material
: Aluminium
Support bracket
: Hot dip galvanised steel
Mounting of Track
: Support from the parapet
Design load for the track support
: To be confirmed during shop drawings.
Support spacing of track
: 2000 mm typically and 250mm at corners and bends
Suspended height
: To suit the building height
Monorail surface finish
: Powder coated (standard RAL colour)
Support bracket surface finish : Hot dip galvanised and epoxy Painted (standard RAL
colour)
MONORAIL BRACKET GENERAL PARAMETERS
Material
Mild steel plates minimum 16mm thick
Dimension
As per project shop drawing
Quantity
Surface treatment
As per project shop drawing

Galvanized.
Finish:
Epoxy painted to standard RAL color.
MONORAIL GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material
Aluminum
Alloy
6082.
Temper
T6
Weight of the Monorail
6.4 Kg/ mtr.
External Dimension
6000 mm x 45.4 mm x 131.4 mm
UTS
220 N/mm
Elongation % in50 mm
Finish:
8
Powder coated to standard RAL color.
350
3.2 DAVIT SYSTEM:

Parapet mounted steel Davits complete with required nos. of holding brackets.
Specifications:
Davit and bracket material
Mounting of parapet davit brackets
Design load for the davit support
Support spacing
Suspended height
Davit and davit bracket surface finish
: Hot dip galvanised steel

: By means of chemical anchor bolts
: To be confirmed during shop drawings.
: To suit the cradle size
: To suit the building height
: Hot dip galvanised.
3.3 BMU SLEWING CRADLE

The Cradle to be constructed from fully welded mild steel sections, Galvanised. Aluminium
alloy cladding is to be fitted to the outside of the Cradle to give a good appearance &
protection for the operator. The cradle to have power operated steel wire climbing winch. The
winch to be push button operated & to have comprehensive safety devices.
In the event of a break down or power failure provision should be there for manual operation.
One secondary safety wire is to be provided in addition to the winch wire of the cradle with
Safety device.
BMU CRADLE SPECIFICATIONS
Model:
TRANSWILL-TW-C - SLEWING
Unladen Weight of the Cradle:
280 Kg(Excluding wire ropes & power cables)
Carrying capacity (SWL):
200 Kg
Carrying capacity-Number of persons
2 Persons
External Dimension:
3200 mm x 950 mm x 1680 (Overall)
Total Power Consumption :
3 Kw
Hoisting Speed
8.5 m/min
Fully welded mild steel sections, Hot dip
Galvanised
Full aluminium cladding and powder coated to
RAL9006
Construction
Finish
HOISTING SYSTEM
Make/ Model
Titan 403 PI,POWER CLIMBER,BELGIUM
Number of Winches
Motor Type
TEFC Brake Motor
Rated Power
0.75 KW
Phase
Rated Voltage
380-415 V
Motor
1400 rpm
Insulation Class
Method of starting
Direct On line
Enclosure
IP 55
Wire Rope Diameter
8.4 mm
WIRE ROPE REELER MOTOR

Make/ Model
Type
Number of reeler Motors
MRV-10-GHIRRI MOTORS, ITALY

Power Operated
2
351
Rated Power
Phase
Rated Voltage
Motor
Insulation Class
Method of Starting
Enclosure
Reduction Gear Ratio
0.25 Kw
3
380-415 V
1360 rpm
F
Direct on line
IP 55
1:80
REELER DRUM & WIRE ROPE

Number of drums
Diameter
400 mm
Width
120 mm
Number of Ropes
4 (2 Suspension 2 Safety)
Wire rope diameter
8.40 mm
Wire rope construction
5X26 RH cross lay, Light Performed
Material of Wire rope
Galvanized Steel
Weight of Rope
0.255 Kg/mt
Breaking Load
47 KN
Rope Factor of safety
10:1
POWER SUPPLY
Supply
CONTROL SYSTEM
Control
380-415V, 3ph, 5 Pin, 50 Hz, 16 Amp 4Core 1.5

Sq.mm Insulated Trailing Cable
Control voltage 24 V/48V controlled Via power

cable
POWERED OPERATED CRADLE FEATURES:

The Cradle to be equipped with:
Twin traction hoist
two power operated wire rope reeler drum
four galvanised steel wire ropes stored on powered reelers
four castor wheels are to be provided at the bottom.
aluminium cladding all over
rubber beading at front and sides
two fenders to allow cradle to rest lightly against the facade
anti collision bar to detect obstructions while lowering the Cradle
control box complete with emergency stop
emergency descent facility
SAFETY FEATURES:
The following safety features shall be installed on the cradle.
Emergency Stop
Lower limit safety device
Upper limit safety device
Emergency manual descent
352
Overload safety device

Safety harness points
Anti-collision bar
WORKS PROVIDED BY OTHER SECTIONS
Power supply for the system including power sockets

Support structure for the monorail brackets
Casting of all cast in anchors
Crane for Unloading, loading of material, assembly and installation of the equipments
at the site.
Temporary power supply during installation works
All civil works as and when required.
Readily erected Scaffolding/Access for the installation works
Safe Storage of the materials at site
MANUFACTURER CONTACT INFORMATION

1.
TRANSWILL ENGINEERING L.L.C

P.O.Box 231725
Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel
: +971 4 34 23 880
Fax : +971 4 34 23 881
Email : transwil@eim.ae
info@transwill.com
Web : www.transwill.com
4.
EXECUTION
EXAMNATION:
1. Examine work of other sections where such work influences the work of this section and
report unsuitable conditions to the Engineer
2. Supply anchors, inserts and templates required to be build-in by other sections in adequate
time
3. Proceed with the installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4.1
INSTALLATION
1. Window washing equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer of the equipment or his
authorized representative.
2. Erect work true to dimensions, square, plumb, level, free from distortion or defects
detrimental to appearance and performance and tightly fitted, flush and level to adjacent
surfaces.
3 Isolate metals as required to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.
4 Supply and install all equipment and all necessary electrical work from power outlets
provided by other trade.
4.2
ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
353
1. When requested, run tests on machinery and safety devices to show their proper operation
for design specified and/or shown. Upon completion of the work, leave all apparatus in
proper adjustment and operation.
2. Provide competent instructors to train employees of the Owner, or others as directed, who
will be responsible for the care, adjustment and operation of the equipment. Forward a
statement to Engineer designating the personnel given the instructions and certifying that the
instructions were furnished.
4.3
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Furnish full warranty period maintenance and call back service on equipment for a period of
one (1) year from the date of handing over of the equipment. Service shall include regular
examinations by a competent and trained mechanic to clean, oil and adjust the apparatus,
making repairs, as may be required and replacing worn parts when necessary, except such
parts necessitated by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by those doing the work of
this section in which case cost of such parts shall be paid for by the Owner.
Carry out maintenance services including emergency call back during regular working hours
and days. Firm performing work of this section shall be able to show successful experience in
the complete maintenance of such equipment and that it employs competent personnel to
handle this service. Perform all maintenance by personnel under the supervision and in the
direct employ of the firm doing work of this section.
354
SECTION 22: GRP

1.0
REQUIREMENTS
Supply and installation of GRP Liners in Water Tanks and Planters, GRP ladders and
GRP hatches as shown on drawings and as described in this section.
2.0
REFERENCE
a)
3.0
4.0
5.0
Finish Painting
DESIGNS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

a)
Provide anchors, runners and spacers, and other inserts and fittings which
are to be designed by the manufacturer to effect a complete installation.
b)
Design all anchorage and fastenings. Show details of such fastenings on the
shop drawings.
c)
Reinforce GRP units to withstand suspension loads, stress connection loads,

super imposed loads and submit all design calculations and data to the
Engineer as itemized in Article 1.4.3.
d)
Design and construct connections to permit movement where it might occur,

and to incorporate all fitments as shown on the drawings.
QUALIFICATIONS
a)
Work of this Section shall be carried out by an organization having not less
than five years of proven experience, acceptable to Engineer for this type of
work.
b)
The organization to have the capacity to perform with its own personnel and
equipment, the engineering, drafting, detailing, fabrications and erection of
the work to be constructed.
c)
Manufacturer to have all design calculations, design details, suspension

systems and shop drawings carried out by a professional engineer meeting
the requirements of Section 01300: Submittals, who shall sign and seal all
submittals.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
The following are acceptable manufacturers for the work of this Section:
6.0
a)
Dubai International Reinforced Plastics Dubai.
b)
Fibrex co. - Abu Dhabi.
c)
Mainline Interiors - Dubai.
d)
Gulf Precast Co. - Abu Dhabi.
e)
Or other manufacturer meeting the requirements of this Section and

approved by Engineer.
SHOP DRAWINGS
a)
Show each item of precast GRP, surface finishes, connecting hardware,

connecting steel, reinforcing, glass fibre, anchorage, setting and bracing,
jointing method and sealant. Drawings to be reviewed and approved prior to
commencement of any fabrication of elements.
Section 22: GRP
355
7.0
8.0
9.0
b)
Identify each unit by a standard mark shown on the shop drawings and place
legibly on each unit at the time of manufacture.
c)
Coordinate with related stages of the work to ensure complete installation of

all associated elements of the building.
GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
a)
Warranty GRP work to be colorfast and against cracking, splitting,

deformation and loosening for a period of three years from the date of
Completion Certificate of the Work. Warranty also to cover the installation of
any joint sealant provided under this Section against staining, adhesion and
cohesion failure.
b)
Upon being notified by the Engineer that defects or failure exist, promptly
replace defective parts of this work.
SAMPLES
a)
Submit three samples, 300 x 300mm of each type of GRP finish and
pigmented colour for the approval of the Engineer before casting the larger
samples specified below. Samples to be of appropriate thickness
representative of the proposed finished product, together with sample of
jointing technique and joint sealants.
b)
After approval of the 300 x 300mm samples, cast one sample of each type
and finish to conform to Article 2.3 'Finish of Panels' of this Section.
c)
The larger samples will be inspected by the Engineer at the plant. If not
approved make a new sample until approved.
d)
Erect where directed by the Engineer, and as shown on the Drawings.
e)
Submit all data on fire retardant products as specified in this Section.
f)
Submit samples of handle, hinges and keylocking mechanism in stainless

steel type 316 for approval of the Engineer.
DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

a) Prevent units coming into contact with earth or other materials which may
damage the facing material. Protect units with waterproof coverings.
b) GRP contractor to be fully responsible for the delivery, handling and storing
of the units.
c) Any dirt on the units due to storage, handling, transportation and erection
shall be capable of removal by washing. To facilitate this the units may be
given a water repellent treatment.
d) Deliver units to site, and on arrival inspect each unit as it is removed from the
vehicle.
e) All GRP units must be handled, stored and transported in such a way that no
damage or marking of architectural surfaces occurs, and so that the units are
not subject to undue stress. Delivery must be timed to coincide with the main
Contract programme.
f)
10.0
All GRP units shall be marked by some method of individual identification.
SUPPORTING STEEL
Section 22: GRP
356
11.0
12.0
a)
Supply and install all miscellaneous steel for complete installation, except for
steel forming part of a structural system and shown and identified (described)
on the Structural Drawings.
b)
Ensure any anchorage fixings do not interfere with reinforcing bars.
c)
All steel connections and fixings to be Type 316 stainless steel.
d)
All steel framing to be electro-galvanized and painted or hot-dipped

galvanized to BS 729 minimum thickness 140microns and painted.
e)
Products
MATERIALS
a)
Gelcoat: Gelcoat shall be a thixotropic isophtalic polyester gelcoat resin with

excellent durability and resistant to water and chemicals and conforming to
BS 3532:1962.
b)
Laminating Resin: Laminating resin shall be a pre-accelerated, filled

Isophtalic polyester resin, conforming to BS 3532:1962 when reinforced with
chopped strand glass mat and fully cured.
c)
Glass Reinforcement: Glass reinforcement shall be chopped strand mat of

continuous filament E glass manufactured to BS 3496: 1973. Provide finish
coat using fibreglass Surfacing Tissue, complete with Gel coat to all exposed
surfaces. Minimum glass reinforcement 600 g/m2.
d)
Polyurethane foam: shall be used within formed GRP stiffeners, where

applicable.
e)
Anisotropy: By means of correct mould filling techniques as uniform as

possible a distribution of fibre in all directions is to be achieved.
f)
Mix Design: The mix shall be determined by the Manufacturer in conjunction

with the Licensor and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance before work
commences. The proportions shall be chosen to achieve the performance
and the quality control requirements specified.
g)
Mould Release Agent: The use of a mould release agent will be permitted
provided it is compatible with the architectural finishes specified. The
manufacturer shall submit full details of the type of release agent he
proposes to use for acceptance by the Engineer.
h)
Fixings: Fixing shall be those shown on shop drawings, and all as required to
ensure complete anchorage and support, including sliding type fixings
required to allow for movement as required. All steel angles and fixings shall
be type 316 stainless steel.
i)
Sealant/Joints: As recommended by the GRP manufacturer to withstand

expansion movement, water, acids and alkalis attack; and to ensure a tight
joint without visible appearance after painted finish.
FABRICATIONS
a)
Fabricate units to profiles detailed and in accordance with the reviewed shop
drawings.
b)
The units shall be manufactured by a premix process to procedures

recommended by the Licensor. The mixing of the ingredients and any
admixtures shall be carried out by high speed mixing. The colour pigments to
match Engineer's colour selection. The glass fibres shall be blended into this
mortar paste using low speed mixing. The fibres shall be added evenly to the
mix. The total mixing time after the addition of the glass fibre should not be
Section 22: GRP
357
so long as to cause damage to the glass fibres which would affect the
properties of the GRP.
13.0
14.0
c)
Install all necessary stiffeners and plastic reinforcing to accommodate the

imposed and superimposed loads.
d)
All weight and volume measurements of mix constituents shall be carried out
in a careful manner such that the correct mix proportions are achieved.
e)
Manufacturing moulds must be stiffened to ensure good stability and surface

finish and shall be approved prior to commencement of work.
f)
Demoulding and Curing, and Post-Curing Treatment:
g)
Demoulding shall not be carried out less than six hours after manufacture.
h)
The curing enclosure shall maintain a constant relative humidity greater than
95% and a minimum temperature of not less than 15C.
i)
After the curing period, the units shall be stored under cover out of direct
sunlight for a minimum of 14 days. This is to assist uniform drying out.
FINISH OF PANELS
a)
Shape: The units are to be formed in GRP to achieve the profiles indicated
on the drawings.
b)
Finish: GRP panels to have a smooth finish. The colour and texture shall
match those of sample prepared by the Manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
c)
The finished units shall be free from surface imperfections such as

blowholes, void, ridges or any other defects that will be visible in the finished
conditions as the approved samples. Fibres in the surface of the moulding
will be acceptable providing the appearance so achieved is uniform and to
the Engineer's satisfaction but bare fibres are not to be visible.
d)
Finish to panels: finished surfaces on all exposed sides to be painted under

Section 09900: Painting.
e)
Any GRP unit not complying with the specification may be declared
unacceptable by the Engineer.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
a)
Do not install units which have chips, spalls, cracks or other deficiencies on
surfaces exposed in the finished work. Immediately remove units damaged
during installation and replace.
b)
If it is considered that a damaged section can be successfully patched,

remove the panel from the work and patch it elsewhere for future
consideration and use.
c)
All fixings and inserts shall be designed such that they retain the units in
position while allowing for expansion and contraction where needed and shall
be coordinated with supporting structure. Ensure location of anchor bolts into
concrete does not interfere with steel reinforcing.
d)
The safety and protection of GRP units shall be ensured throughout the
whole of the building contract. No approval will in any way absolve the
Manufacturer from the responsibility for protection.
e)
Where shrinkage of units will occur after erection, make final restraining
connections after shrinkage is substantially complete.
Section 22: GRP
358
f)
Install units plumb, level and in true planes with correct joint widths.
g)
Insert all necessary sealant and flashing as noted on shop drawings.

SEALING
a) Before application of sealant, clean and dry thoroughly joints of units.
Surfaces which are to receive sealant to be free from release agents or other
treatments which may affect the bond. Prime surfaces to receive sealant if
so directed by the Sealant Manufacturer.
b) Use continuous sealant backing material of size to suit width of joint if
required by manufacturer.
c) Apply sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
d) Submit samples of typical joint sealing for approval by the Engineer.
Section 22: GRP
359
SECTION 23: GRC

TYPE(S) OF CLADDING/FEATURES
115
PRECAST PANELS TO BUILDING FACADE

- Finish: smooth sand blasted color and texture to
replicate Yellow Lime Stone to clause(s) 260/320
and 470 and to architects approval. Complete with
sharp arises as indicated on the drawings.
- Units: as Clause 470.
Mould material/lining: grp to manufacturers
recommendations as clause 410/411.
Aggregate: to approval of Engineer to meet the design intent.
Matrix colour:
Chromix colouring admixture by L.M. Schofield
Europe or similar and equal approved, to architects approval
Work on surface: smooth
- Fixing: as clause 0430
- Joints: 20mm 3 part polysulphide sealant from MBT, Jotun or Fosroc.
Accessories/features/incorporated
components:
complete
with
all
accessories and components necessary to provide features and design
intent as shown on the drawings.
210
DESIGN: Complete the detailed design of the cladding and associated

features shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and the recommendations of BS 8297.
215
INTEGRITY:
- The cladding and associated features must be designed in accordance
with BS 8110 to resist all dead and live loads.
- Wind loads may be calculated in accordance with CP 3: Chapter V: Part
2 using the following data:
Basic wind speed (V): 45 m/s
Topography factor (S1): 1.0
Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined from
CP3: Chapter V: Part 2, table 3:
Statistical factor (S3): 1.
- The cladding must accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage,
creep, deflections and thermal movements.
- The precast units must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage,
handling stresses and service loads. Webs to framed units must be
reinforced.
216
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF

PRECAST CLADDING WORK: Submit to the Engineer before testing or
fabrication the following rainscreen cladding particulars:
- Detailed drawing to fully describe fabrication and installation
Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/ performance
requirements.
Certification for all incorporated components manufactuered by others
confirming their suitability for all locations in the rainscreen cladding.
Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all
products.
220
WEATHER RESISTANCE:
Section 23: GRC
360
Provide collection grooves and drainage pipes to drain moisture from the
inner face of panels and ventilate the cavity. Provide cavity trays over
openings and at junctions as necessary to prevent water from reaching
the inner fabric of the building.
Prepare specimen samples of complete cladding units, including joints
between panels and seals around windows/ doors, as described in
clause 290. Carry out tests for air permeability, water penetration and
wind resistance in accordance with BS 8297, section 5.
The cladding and associated features must be weather tight when tested
at the following peak test pressures:
Air permeability test: 50 Pa.
Water penetration test: 600 Pa.
Wind resistance test for:
Serviceability: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1200 Pa.
Safety: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1800 Pa.
Submit test results to the Engineer immediately they are available.
240
DURABILITY:
- Subject to other specified requirements, the quality of concrete and
nominal cover to reinforcement (including secondary reinforcement) must
be related and are to be chosen from the following:
________________________________________________________
Minimum acceptable concrete
grade to BS 5328
C40
C45
C50
Minimum cement content
(kg/cu m)
-With 20 mm aggregate
325
350
400
365
390
440
Maximum free water/
cement ratio
0.55
0.50
0.45
________________________________________________________
Nominal cover (mm) for:
-External faces of units
And all edges
40
30
25
-Internal faces
Completely protected
30
25
20
against weather
________________________________________________________
- The above covers are for concrete made with normal, dense, low porosity
aggregates. If water absorption of aggregates exceeds 5%:
- The maximum free water/cement ratio may be increased by 0.10
- The nominal cover must be increased by 10mm.
- Any units or parts thereof which will be subjected to more severe
wetting/freezing (e.g. copings, balustrades, parapets) must have 10 mm
additional cover on all exposed faces.
- Increase the nominal cover to allow for depth of exposure on exposed
aggregate finishes.
- If galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement is to be used submit
proposals for quality of concrete and nominal cover for approval.
242
DURABILITY:
- Minimum concrete grade to BS 5328:C45.
Minimum cement content with 20 mm aggregate: 350 kg/cu m
Maximum free water/cement ratio: 0.50.
- Nominal cover to reinforcement on external faces of units and all edges:
40 mm.
250
COVER WHEN USING SEPARATE FACING MIX(ES): Different mixes may

be used for facing and backing provided:
Section 23: GRC
361
The difference in cement content is not more than 80 kg/cu m.

The thickness of the facing mix is at least 10 mm greater than the
nominal maximum size of aggregate, and in no case less than 25 mm.
Reinforcement is not less than 20 mm away from the junction between
mixes.
The backing mix and facing mix are effectively monolithic, being placed
and compacted within one hour of each other.
260
COVER WHEN USING RECONSTRUCTED STONE:

A 25 mm thick facing mix of reconstructed stone as clause 320 may be taken
as equivalent to 10 mm of the required concrete cover to reinforcement. A
higher figure may be approved on submission of suitable evidence of
impermeability.
270
DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION:
- Detail cladding to ensure compliance with the specified requirements for
accuracy in manufacture and erection and to accommodate deviations in
the building structure.
- Select levelling and alignment devices, and types and methods of fixing
which will give ample adjustability in three dimensions.
- Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structure
to ensure coordination of dimensions and tolerances.
- Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.
280
DESIGN SAMPLE: At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make a

sample of the proposed construction, size 3m x 3m consisting of minimum 2
panels to include metal windows and structural glass openings. Sample to
show intended method of adjustment of PC units and to include all external
and internal finishes showing the proposed finish. Obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding. Keep the approved sample at the factory for
comparison with the production units.
290
MOCK-UP:
- At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up of
the following:
Mock-up:
1. Two complete panels with typical window and structural glass
opening position to be agreed with Engineer.
2. One complete corner panel to corner panel.
Purpose of mock-up: to review junctions, alignment and finish of
panelling and to incorporate detailing changes if required.
- Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Engineer and/or
arrange for tests as instructed. Obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
MAKING CONCRETE
310
CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY:

- Constituent materials, composition of mixes, production of concrete,
information to be provided, sampling, testing and compliance to be in
accordance with BS 5328 unless otherwise specified.
- The total chloride ion content of the constituents of each mix, expressed
as a percentage by weight of cement (including GGBS or PFA if used) in
the mix, must not exceed 0.4. Do not use admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
- Rate of sampling for compressive strength testing: Not less than one
sample for each day of use.
320
RECONSTRUCTED STONE FACING MIXES:
Section 23: GRC
362
To BS 1217, clauses 8 to 12
Initial surface absorption: Grade A
Aggregates and mix design to be such that surface crazing does not
occur.
After approval of appearance of samples and before making any units submit
evidence to demonstrate compliance in respect of:
Compressive strength
Drying shrinkage
Initial surface absorption
-
340
COMPLETE CORRELATED RECORDS must be maintained for each mix

type, including:
- Composition of the mixes, including any admixtures.
- Batch identification numbers related to the precast unit identification
numbers and test samples.
- Results of slump and other tests carried out at the casting yard.
- Laboratory test reports, including cube identification numbers.
350
TEST LABORATORY: All compressive strength testing to be carried out by

one UKAS/NAMAS accredited laboratory. Submit the name of the selected
laboratory to Engineer as soon as possible and in any case before
commencing manufacture.
MANUFACTURE
410
MOULDS must be:

- Of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to
give compliance with clause 420.
- Constructed to prevent loss of grout.
- Designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.
- Coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which must not be allowed
to touch the reinforcement.
- Maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defects
before each reuse. Damaged moulds must not be repaired and reused if
this would impair the surface appearance of the units.
411
MOULDS: Inform Engineer when each mould is complete and not less than
21 days before commencing manufacture of units. If GRP moulds are to be
used inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete.
420
MANUFACTURING ACCURACY:
- Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding,
when
erected, complies with clause 630 and all sizes fall within the
permissible deviations given in BS 8297, table 11.
- Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and
flatness of the mould(s) immediately before each reuse and of each unit
as soon as possible after demoulding. Make adjustments to moulds as
necessary.
430
FIXINGS and adjustment devices located away from the external face and
edges of units may be of galvanized steel. Lifting devices may be of mild
steel provided they are recessed and the subsequent filling with mortar
provides the same amount of cover as required for reinforcement in the
panel. Other devices must be of a suitable type of stainless steel. Prevent
bimetallic corrosion and staining.
435
LIFTING POINTS: Form in accordance with BS 8297, clause 3.2.6.2.
Section 23: GRC
363
440
450
REINFORCEMENT:
- In addition to reinforcement required for structural purposes, precast units
must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage and handling
stresses.
- Type of reinforcement, unless otherwise specified: To BS 4449 and/or BS
4483, cut and bent to BS 4466.
- Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS 729 after cutting, chromate
treated.
- Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744, type 304 S31 or equivalent.
- At time of placing concrete, reinforcement to be clean and free of
corrosive pitting, loose mill scale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substances
which may adversely affect the reinforcement, concrete, or bond between
the two.
- Fix accurately and securely using tying wire, approved steel clips, or tack
welding if permitted. Wire or clips must not encroach into the concrete
cover.
COVER SPACERS must not be used to concrete faces which will be
exposed in the finished work. Where such faces are to be cast against a
mould submit details of proposed method of ensuring the specified cover.
460
UNIFORMITY OF METHOD: All exposed faces which are specified to be of

the same finish must be identical in appearance. If different concrete mixes or
methods of producing such faces are proposed, submit evidence that there
will be no difference in appearance and obtain approval; otherwise all such
faces must be produced in the same way.
470
UNITS WITH NATURAL STONE FACINGS: must be cast face down, the
stone being attached to the concrete backing with stainless steel dowels (not
less than 11 per sq.mm) in accordance with BS 8297 clause 3.2.7.6 joints
between slabs must be sealed to prevent ingress of water.
480
CASTING AND CURING:

- Thoroughly compact concrete by vibration (except for certain special
finishes which may, subject to approval, be dry rammed).
- Do not demould units prematurely.
- Prevent damage to and distortion of immature units from movement,
vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid cooling and thermal shock.
- Ensure that units are protected from sun and drying winds until they are
at least 5 days old.
- Do not deliver units to site until at least 14 days after casting.
490
QUALITY OF FINISHES must be consistent throughout the contract.

Components having arrises or faces which are broken, chipped, cracked,
crazed, honeycombed, irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marred
such that their appearance or performance is significantly impaired will not be
accepted.
500
PRODUCTION CONTROL UNIT(S):

- The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be
inspected by the Engineer and, if its appearance is approved, clearly
marked and kept safely at the factory as a control standard for
appearance of subsequently produced units.
510
One standard panel one coping panel, one panel (s)

Control units to be delivered to site last.
INSPECTION: All completed units must be carefully inspected and checked

by the manufacturer for match with approved sample(s) or control unit(s) and
compliance with specification before despatch to site. Make arrangements for
the Engineer to inspect completed units in the factory.
Section 23: GRC
364
520
RECORDS:
- Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:
Unique identification number.
Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.
Date of each stage of manufacture.
Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
Specific location in the finished work.
Details of any damage and making good.
Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is a production control unit.
- Records to be available for inspection on request.
ERECTION/FIXING/JOINTING
610
ERECTION, FIXING OR JOINTING BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THE

MANUFACTURER:
The precast concrete manufacturer must:
- Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they are
understood by the site operatives.
- Provide adequate site supervision by suitably skilled person(s).
620
PROTECTION:
- Prevent overstressing of units during transit, handling, storage and
fixing. Lift units at designed lifting points only, using special lifting devices
and cradles as necessary (to be provided by the precast concrete
manufacturer).
- Store units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate with
resilient spacers.
- Prevent damage to units and any chipping, staining, marking or dirtying
of surfaces which will be visible in the completed work.
630
ACCURACY OF ERECTION:
- Before commencing erection, survey the structure including any fixing
inserts. Report to Engineer immediately if structure will not allow the
required accuracy of erection.
- Set out joint centres for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwise
agreed with Engineer. Erect units using temporary spacers to suit the
survey results and ensure generally consistent joint widths.
- Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across
transverse joints) the greatest width must not exceed the least width by
more than 3 mm. Any variation to be evenly distributed with no sudden
changes.
- The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across a
transverse joint must not be more than 3 mm.
- The offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels across
any joint must not be more than 3 mm.
- The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform as
intended and are within the recommendations of the joint sealant or baffle
manufacturer.
- Notwithstanding the tolerances stated above and in clause 420, the
finished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square,
regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions,
all to approval.
640
FINAL FIXING:
- Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening
fixings, filling bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints.
Section 23: GRC
365
Tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the

manufacturer. Do not over tighten restraint fixings intended to permit
lateral movement.
Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices must be filled with a fairly dry 1:4
cement: sand mix or a suitable epoxy or polyester mix, well tamped in.
650
MORTAR BEDDING TO SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:

- Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from frost, oil, dirt and debris.
- Insert (if necessary during erection) a suitable compressible tube or
similar to prevent mortar from falling into the cavity or restricting freedom
of relative movement between panels.
- Completely fill bed joint with a dry 1:3 cement: sand mix well rammed in.
660
SEALANT JOINTS:
- Sealant: 2 part polysulphide sealant
Colour: to approval
- Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.
670
OPEN DRAINED JOINTS:

- Ensure that rear seals are completely airtight and watertight.
- Install baffles and flashings securely and accurately to ensure that they
function as intended.
680
DAMAGED UNITS: Do not repair without approval. Such approval will not be
given where the units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair would
impair appearance or performance.
Section 23: GRC
366
SECTION 24: PRECAST CONCTETE PANEL CLADDING /

FEATURES
TENDERING
010
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

- Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including typical slab edge
detail and fixing and restraint details.
- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with
specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, including
Thermal insulation, fire stopping, sealant .
- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with
specification of proposed cladding.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/
background.
- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown on
preliminary design drawings.
- Schedule of builders work, special provisions and special attendance by
others.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will
be prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and
programme.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
- Areas of non-compliance with specification.
TYPE (S) OF CLADDING/FEATURES
110
PRECAST PANELS TO EXTERIOR WALL

- Drawing reference(s): Architectural drawings, structural drawings + any
other relevant drawings.
- Support structure. Insitu concrete frame and steel structure.
- Panel Type: Solid/rebated vertical as shown on drawings.
- Finish: smooth sandblasted finish to the fair side, smooth finish to vertical
rebates and horizontal bands all in natural YELLOW LIME tone colour to
Architects approval.
- Units: Nominal 150 mm thk. To meet structural requirements and sized to
suit the panel elevations.
Mould material/lining: grp to manufacturers recommendations as clause
410/411.
Aggregate: Medium exposed aggregate using Omani and Rawdha
chipsto approval of Engineer to meet the design intent as per the control
sample.
Matrix colour: to be advised
Work on surface: smooth
- Thermal Insulation.
- Fixing: as clause 0430
- Joints: 10-15mm open joints at other floor levels + any other as on
drawings to be filled with uv resistant mastic polyurethane sealant and
backing rod. Colour to match panels final colour. Provide weep holes
intermittently as required at the joints.
- Accessories/features/incorporated components: complete with all
accessories and components necessary to provide features and design
intent as shown on the drawings.
- Pattern: Horizontal bands and vertical rebates as indicated in elevation
drawings + as per control sample.
Section 24: PRECAST CONCTETE PANEL CLADDING / FEATURES
367
Contractor to co-ordinate any MEP requirements with respect to

AC/lighting etc.
210
DESIGN: Complete the detailed design of the cladding and associated

features shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and the recommendations of BS 8297.
Allow for necessary co-ordination and allowances as required for MEP
installations such as Faade lighting or any.
215
INTEGRITY:
- The cladding and associated features must be designed in accordance
with BS 8110 to resist all dead and live loads.
- Wind loads may be calculated in accordance with CP 3:Chapter V: Part 2
using the following data:
Basic wind speed (V): 45 m/s
Topography factor (S1): 1.0
Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined from
CP3: Chapter V:Part 2, table 3:
Statistical factor (S3): 1.
- The cladding must accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage,
creep, deflections and thermal movements.
- The precast units must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage,
handling stresses and service loads. Webs to framed units must be
reinforced.
216
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

- Submit the following cladding particulars:
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support
structure.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and
construction with methods of adjustment and tolerances.
- Labelled samples, that represent the range of variation in panel finish, for
approval of appearance.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A detailed testing, fabrication and installation programme in compliance
with Main Contract master programme.
- A quality plan in compliance with the CWCT Guide to good practice for
facades, Section 6.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation
consents or relaxations.
218
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF

PRECAST CLADDING WORK:
- Submit to the Engineer before testing or fabrication the following precast
cladding particulars:
- Detailed drawing to fully describe fabrication and installation
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/ performance
requirements.
- Certification for all incorporated components manufactured by others
confirming their suitability for all locations in the precast cladding.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all
products.
220
WEATHER RESISTANCE:
368
240
Provide collection grooves and drainage pipes to drain moisture from the
inner face of panels and ventilate the cavity. Provide cavity trays over
openings and at junctions as necessary to prevent water from reaching
the inner fabric of the building.
Prepare specimen samples of complete cladding units, including joints
between panels and seals around windows/ doors, as described in
clause 290. Carry out tests for air permeability, water penetration and
wind resistance in accordance with BS 8297, section 5.
The cladding and associated features must be weathertight when tested
at the following peak test pressures:
Air permeability test: 50 Pa.
Water penetration test: 600 Pa.
Wind resistance test for:
Serviceability: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1200 Pa.
Safety: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1800 Pa.
Submit test results to the Engineer immediately they are available.
DURABILITY:
- Subject to other specified requirements, the quality of concrete and
nominal cover to reinforcement (including secondary reinforcement) must
be related and are to be chosen from the following:
Minimum acceptable concrete grade
to BS 5328
C40
C45
C50
Minimum cement content (kg/cu m)

325
365
350
390
400
440
Maximum free water / cement ratio
0.55
0.50
0.45
40
30
30
25
25
20
Nominal cover (mm) for:

-External faces of units and all edges
-Internal faces completely protected
against weather
-
The above covers are for concrete made with normal, dense, low porosity
aggregates. If water absorption of aggregates exceeds 5%:
The maximum free water/cement ratio may be increased by 0.10
The nominal cover must be increased by 10mm.
Any units or parts thereof which will be subjected to more severe
wetting/freezing (e.g. copings, balustrades, parapets) must have 10 mm
additional cover on all exposed faces.
Increase the nominal cover to allow for depth of exposure on exposed
aggregate finishes.
If galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement is to be used submit
proposals for quality of concrete and nominal cover for approval.
242
DURABILITY:
- Minimum concrete grade to BS 5328:C45.
Maximum free water/cement ratio: 0.50.
- Nominal cover to reinforcement on external faces of units and all edges:
40 mm.
250
COVER WHEN USING SEPARATE FACING MIX (ES): Different mixes may
be used for facing and backing provided:
- The difference in cement content is not more than 80 kg/cu m.
369
The thickness of the facing mix is at least 10 mm greater than the

nominal maximum size of aggregate, and in no case less than 25 mm.
Reinforcement is not less than 20 mm away from the junction between
mixes.
The backing mix and facing mix are effectively monolithic, being placed
and compacted within one hour of each other.
260
COVER WHEN USING RECONSTRUCTED STONE:

A 25 mm thick facing mix of reconstructed stone as clause 320 may be
taken as equivalent to 10 mm of the required concrete cover to
reinforcement. A higher figure may be approved on submission of
suitable evidence of impermeability.
270
DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION:
- Detail cladding to ensure compliance with the specified requirements for
accuracy in manufacture and erection and to accommodate deviations in
the building structure.
- Select leveling and alignment devices, and types and methods of fixing,
which will give ample adjustability in three dimensions.
- Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structure
to ensure coordination of dimensions and tolerances.
- Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.
280
DESIGN SAMPLE: At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make a

sample of the proposed construction, size 3m x 3m consisting of minimum 2
panels to include any openings and features. Samples to show intended
method of adjustment of PC units and to include all external and internal
finishes showing the proposed finish. Obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding. Keep the approved sample at the factory for comparison with the
production units.
290
MOCK-UP:
- At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up of
the following:
Mock-up:
1. Two complete panels of two floor height position to be agreed with
Architect.
2. One complete corner panel to two floor height to corner panel.
Purpose of mock-up: to review junctions, alignment co-ordinator with

curtain walling, and finish of paneling and to incorporate detailing
changes if required.
Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Architect and/or
arrange for tests as instructed. Obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
MAKING CONCRETE
310
CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY:

- Constituent materials, composition of mixes, production of concrete,
information to be provided, sampling, testing and compliance to be in
accordance with BS 5328 unless otherwise specified.
- The total chloride ion content of the constituents of each mix, expressed
as a percentage by weight of cement (including GGBS or PFA if used) in
the mix, must not exceed 0.4. Do not use admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
- Rate of sampling for compressive strength testing: Not less than one
sample for each day of use.
340
COMPLETE CORRELATED RECORDS must be maintained for each mix
370
type, including:
- Composition of the mixes, including any admixtures.
- Batch identification numbers related to the precast unit identification
numbers and test samples.
- Results of slump and other tests carried out at the casting yard.
- Laboratory test reports, including cube identification numbers.
350
TEST LABORATORY: All compressive strength testing to be carried out by

one UKAS/NAMAS accredited or Dubai Municipality approved laboratory.
Submit the name of the selected laboratory to Engineer as soon as possible
and in any case before commencing manufacture.
MANUFACTURE
410
MOULDS must be:

- Of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to
give compliance with clause 420.
- Constructed to prevent loss of grout.
- Designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.
- Coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which must not be allowed
to touch the reinforcement.
- Maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defects
before each reuse. Damaged moulds must not be repaired and reused if
this would impair the surface appearance of the units.
411
MOULDS: Inform Engineer when each mould is complete and not less than
21 days before commencing manufacture of units. If GRP moulds are to be
used inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete.
420
MANUFACTURING ACCURACY:
- Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding,
when erected, complies with clause 630 and all sizes fall within the
permissible deviations given in BS 8297, table 11.
- Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and
flatness of the mould(s) immediately before each reuse and of each unit
as soon as possible after demoulding. Make adjustments to moulds as
necessary.
430
ALL fixings and adjustment devices must be of a suitable type of grade 316
stainless steel. Lifting devices may be of mild steel provided they are
recessed and the subsequent filling with mortar provides the same amount of
cover as required for reinforcement in the panel.
435
LIFTING POINTS: Form in accordance with BS 8297, clause 3.2.6.2.
440
REINFORCEMENT:
- In addition to reinforcement required for structural purposes, precast units
must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage and handling
stresses.
- Type of reinforcement, unless otherwise specified: To BS 4449 and/or BS
4483, cut and bent to BS 8666.
- Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS 729 after cutting, chromate
treated.
- Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744, type 304 S31 or equivalent.
- At time of placing concrete, reinforcement to be clean and free of
corrosive pitting, loose mill scale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substances
which may adversely affect the reinforcement, concrete, or bond between
the two.
371
Fix accurately and securely using tying wire, approved steel clips, or tack
welding if permitted. Wire or clips must not encroach into the concrete
cover.
450
COVER SPACERS must not be used to concrete faces which will be

exposed in the finished work. Where such faces are to be cast against a
mould submit details of proposed method of ensuring the specified cover.
460
UNIFORMITY OF METHOD: All exposed faces which are specified to be of

the same finish must be identical in appearance. If different concrete mixes or
methods of producing such faces are proposed, submit evidence that there
will be no difference in appearance and obtain approval; otherwise all such
faces must be produced in the same way.
480
CASTING AND CURING:

- Thoroughly compact concrete by vibration (except for certain special
finishes which may, subject to approval, be dry rammed).
- Do not demould units prematurely.
- Prevent damage to and distortion of immature units from movement,
vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid cooling and thermal shock.
- Ensure that units are protected from sun and drying winds until they are
at least 5 days old.
- Do not deliver units to site until at least 14 days after casting.
490
QUALITY OF FINISHES must be consistent throughout the contract.

Components having arises or faces which are broken, chipped, cracked,
crazed, honeycombed, irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marred
such that their appearance or performance is significantly impaired will not be
accepted.
500
PRODUCTION CONTROL UNIT(S):

- The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be
inspected by the Engineer and, if its appearance is approved, clearly
marked and kept safely at the factory as a control standard for
appearance of subsequently produced units.
One standard panel and one corner panel
- Control units to be delivered to site last.
510
INSPECTION: All completed units must be carefully inspected and checked

by the manufacturer for match with approved sample(s) or control unit(s) and
compliance with specification before despatch to site. Make arrangements for
the Engineer to inspect completed units in the factory.
520
RECORDS:
- Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:
Unique identification number.
Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.
Date of each stage of manufacture.
Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
Specific location in the finished work.
Details of any damage and making good.
Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is a production control unit.
- Records to be available for inspection on request.
ERECTION/FIXING/JOINTING
610
ERECTION, FIXING OR JOINTING BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THE

MANUFACTURER: The precast concrete manufacturer must:
372
Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they are
understood by the site operatives.
Provide adequate site supervision by suitably skilled person(s).
620
PROTECTION:
- Prevent overstressing of units during transit, handling, storage and fixing.
Lift units at designed lifting points only, using special lifting devices and
cradles as necessary (to be provided by the precast concrete
manufacturer).
- Store units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate with
resilient spacers.
- Prevent damage to units and any chipping, staining, marking or dirtying
of surfaces which will be visible in the completed work.
630
ACCURACY OF ERECTION:
- Before commencing erection, survey the structure including any fixing
inserts. Report to Engineer immediately if structure will not allow the
required accuracy of erection.
- Set out joint centres for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwise
agreed with Engineer. Erect units using temporary spacers to suit the
survey results and ensure generally consistent joint widths.
- Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across
transverse joints) the greatest width must not exceed the least width by
more than 3 mm. Any variation to be evenly distributed with no sudden
changes.
- The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across a
transverse joint must not be more than 3 mm.
- The offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels across
any joint must not be more than 3 mm.
- The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform as
intended and are within the recommendations of the joint sealant or baffle
manufacturer.
- Notwithstanding the tolerances stated above and in clause 420, the
finished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square,
regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions,
all to approval.
640
FINAL FIXING:
- Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening
fixings, filling bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints.
- Tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the
manufacturer. Do not overtighten restraint fixings intended to permit
lateral movement.
- Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices must be filled with a fairly dry 1:4
cement: sand mix or a suitable epoxy or polyester mix, well tamped in.
650
MORTAR BEDDING TO SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:

- Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from frost, oil, dirt and debris.
- Insert (if necessary during erection) a suitable compressible tube or
similar to prevent mortar from falling into the cavity or restricting freedom
of relative movement between panels.
- Completely fill bed joint with a dry 1:3 cement: sand mix well rammed in.
660
SEALANT JOINTS:
- Sealant: Polyurthane sealant with backing rods. Sonolastic NP2 (MBT) or
equal and approved.
- Colour: to approval to match panel
- Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.
670
OPEN DRAINED JOINTS:
373
680
Ensure that rear seals are completely airtight and watertight.

Install baffles and flashings securely and accurately to ensure that they
function as intended.
DAMAGED UNITS: Do not repair without approval. Such approval will not be
given where the units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair would
impair appearance or performance.
374
MIMAR EMIRATES CONSULTANTS
SECTION 25: SLOTTED ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL/CEILING

PLANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wood planks that are slotted on the front side and perforated on the backside.
B.
Sound absorbing blanket.
C.
Hardware or ceiling suspension system as required for attachment to substrate.
D.
Coordination with all trades having elements that attach to, penetrate through
or are concealed behind/above the wood planks of this section.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION

3
A.
Sound Absorbing Blanket Black, glass fiber (or mineral wool) 50 kg/m (3 pcf)
density.
B.
Mounting hardware or ceiling suspension system.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
B.
Section 09120 Suspension Framing/Furring for Plaster/Gypsum Board

Assemblies
C.
Division 15 Sections Mechanical Work
D.
Division 16 Sections Electrical Work
E.
Division 17 Sections Audio, Data, Telecommunication Work
ALTERNATES
A. Prior Approval: Proposed substitutions for products in this section may be
submitted to the architect and acoustical consultant no later than ten working
days prior to the bid due date. Substitutions shall only be considered if submitted
with complete information including acoustic data and a sample not smaller than
45 cm x 45 cm (18 x 18) showing product design, composition, size, slot/hole
pattern, veneer, finish, standard penetrations, standard joint and end conditions
and mounting hardware with suspension grid if applicable. Acceptance of
substituted products is contingent on the architects and acoustical consultants
approval and the substitutions compliance with all specified criteria. The
architect shall approve substitution request via addendum.
B. Unapproved Substitutions. Substitutions not approved via addendum shall not be
submitted to the architect or acoustical consultant.
1.05
REFERENCES
A.
Local Building Code Current Edition
B.
ISO 354 - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room.
Section 25: SLOTTED ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL/CEILING PLANKS
375
C.
1.06
American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C 423 - Sound Absorption & Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method
2. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings
3. ASTM C 636 - Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile & Lay-In Panel Ceilings
4. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
5. ASTM E 795 -Standard Practice for Mounting Test Specimens during
Sound Absorption Tests
6. ASTM E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements: Sound absorption shall be provided via two

mechanisms: Transparency and Tuned Resonant Absorption. High frequency
sound absorption shall be provided by allowing sound energy to pass through
the wooden surface by means of slots and perforations. The energy shall then
be absorbed (converted to heat) by a non-woven matt adhered to the rear
surface and also by additional porous absorption placed behind/above the
plank. Mid and low frequency sound absorption shall be provided via Tuned
Resonant Absorption with a typical bell curve configuration. As required, extra
low frequency sound absorption shall be provided by means of a dual diameter
perforation (T hole) which transitions from a small face diameter to a larger rear
diameter
B.
1. Random Incidence, Octave Band, Sound Absorption Coefficients (a) and
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Tested by independent, accredited,
facility according to ISO 354 with 30 mm thick mineral wool. (Comparable
Tests: ASTM C 423 Mount and ASTM E 795 Mount).
Topakustik (50 mm
System)
Soli Slo Hol
Ope
d
t
e
n
9
1.07
6.0%
Octave Band (Hz) Absorption

Coefficients
100
200
400
125 250 500
0
0
0
0.1
0.6
1.0
1.01 0.70 0.59
4
4
6
NR
C
0.85
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit standard cutsheet including basic system description,

options and component sizes. Identify all applicable features and options.
Cross out any inapplicable features or options.
B.
Shop Drawings: The contractor shall produce and submit shop drawings of
products and suspension or mounting systems overlaid on base drawings
(interior elevations or reflected ceiling plans) supplied electronically by the
architect. Show overall layout with dimensions and references to details as
necessary for penetrations, joints, ends and intersections with other materials
or building components. Submit schedule of all quantities, sizes, hole/slot
patterns, edge banding, borders, veneers and finishes. Field verifies site
conditions with dimensions shown on shop drawings.
C.
Samples: Submit a 12.7 cm (5) x 10.2 cm (4) sample of core material with
approximate finish or veneer and black, nonwoven, fiber backing material.
376
D.
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
Design Data / Test Reports: Submit octave band sound absorption coefficient
data and Noise Reduction Coefficient data according to ISO 354.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications: Manufacturer and installation contractor shall have a minimum of

three years experience with similar systems.
B.
Single Source: All products under this section shall be supplied by a single
manufacturer to ensure consistency in product size and finish.
C.
Pre-Installation Meeting: Installing contractor shall organize and conduct preinstallation meetings with all other trades to coordinate substrate conditions,
conditioning of the space (temperature & humidity), and elements attaching to,
penetrating through or concealed above/behind work in this section.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver wood planks to the project site in the
manufacturers original, unopened packaging. Do not unpack or handle
finished products until the project environmental requirements have been met
and the products are ready to be installed.
B.
Storage and Protection: Store all wood planks and associated wood trim pieces
in a clean, dry, fully-enclosed storage facility. Protect products from damage
that may be caused by exposure to water, chemicals, direct sunlight or
infestation.
C.
Acceptance at Site: Ensure that all project environmental requirements have

been met prior to unpacking or installing wood planks or associated wood trim
products. Full or partial installation constitutes complete product acceptance.
D.
Waste Management and Disposal: Dispose of all packaging materials and

debris in a safe and environmentally responsible manner according to the
instructions set forth by the General Contractor, local ordinances or codes and
the Environmental Protection Agency.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Project Environmental Requirements: Prior to unpacking or installing wood

products, ensure that the installation area is fully enclosed and protected from
moisture and direct sunlight. Ensure that the buildings mechanical systems
are fully operational and will not be turned off again even for testing and
balancing of the mechanical systems. Coordinate with other trades to ensure
that all work above or behind wood surfaces is complete and that all wet and
dusty trades have completed work.
B.
Product Acclamation: For a minimum period of seventy-two (72) hours and prior
to unpacking or installing any wood products, allow both the installation area
and the wood products to stabilize in temperature and humidity levels that are
representative of the final temperature and humidity levels expected after
building completion and occupation. Do not install products if the humidity
exceeds 70%.
C.
Product Handling: Handle wood planks carefully so as to avoid chipping,

scratching, scuffing or denting the wood finish or edges.
WARRANTY
377
A. Submit to Owner or Owners Representative a written and dated warranty issued

by the wood ceiling/wall manufacturer warranting the wood planks and associated
trim pieces against defects in materials or manufacturing for a period of one (1)
year from the date of delivery.
B. Components used in the system but not provided by the manufacturer are
excluded from the manufacturers warranty. Damage caused by exposure to
moisture or rapid or extreme changes to temperature or humidity are excluded
from the manufacturers warranty. Damage caused by improper storage,
handling, acclimatization, or installation is excluded from the warranty.
Appearances and colorings of wood products, stains and finishes can vary over
time and as site conditions change and are therefore excluded from the warranty.
1.12
OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Installing contractor shall provide to the building owner or to the
owners representative a copy of the manufacturers maintenance manual
supplied with the planks.
1.13
MAINTENANCE
A.
Extra Materials: If provided per the project requirements, extra materials shall
remain in the manufacturers original, unopened packaging and shall be given
to the building owner or owners representative upon substantial completion of
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.02
2.03
NH AKUSTIK + DESIGN AG (TOPAKUSTIK-TOPPERFO)

Obseestrasse 11, CH-6078 Lungern / Switzerland, phone +41 41 679 70 58,
fax +41 41 679 70 59, www.topakustik.com, contact@topakustik.com
MATERIALS
A.
Core (standard): Medium density fiberboard (MDF) made of soft and hard wood
fibers with added binding agents, 16 mm (0.67) thick or thickness on request.
B.
Veneer:
Natural Wood: European Maple (1 mm thickness).
C.
Backing Fabric: Nonwoven, black, glass fiber matt, 60 g/m (0.012 psf) surface
weight.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Planks: (consult manufacturer for available combinations)

1. Width: 128 m.
2. Length: up to 3640 mm
3. Thickness: 17 mm (natural wood veneer)
4. Slot width: 2 mm
5. Width between slots: 9 mm.
6. Perforations (round)
a. M-Hole (single diameter): 6 mm or 8 mm
7. Edge conditions
1. Tongue & Groove: 4 mm deep tongue or groove, no veneer,
unfinished, perforations set back from edge (not visible).
378
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
2.05
FINISHES
A.
2.06
Fabrication Tolerances 0.10 mm (slots & perforations); 0.50 mm (lengths &

widths)
Shop Finishing: Planks shall be shop-finished semi-gloss varnish.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Manufacturing facility for planks shall be ISO 9001 certified and provide
certification documentation upon request by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLERS
A.
Installing contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) years
successful experience installing ceilings and wall systems and must have
previous experience in similar applications using similar mounting techniques
or suspension systems.
3.02
3.03
3.04
EXAMINATION
A.
Site Verification of Conditions: Examine installation area for compliance with all
manufacturers project environmental requirements and ensure uninstalled
products have been stored, handled and acclimatized properly prior to
commencing installation. Inspect all substrates for completion and quality of
work to ensure that surfaces are level, plumb, clean, dry and completely cured
from water or solvent evaporation. Do not commence installation if the
structural capacity of the substrate is questionable or inadequate.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades: Coordinate with all other trades to ensure that
wet work including concrete, terrazzo, plastering, painting, etc. in the
installation area is complete, cured and dry prior to installation. Coordinate with
all other trades to verify that components associated with mechanical,
electrical, lighting, data, telecommunication, audio, video, fire suppression and
other building systems are installed behind or above designated installation
areas prior to commencing installation. Coordinate the exact size, location and
sequencing of building system components that penetrate the wood ceiling/wall
planks.
PREPARATION
A.
Protection: Protect all floor, wall and ceiling finishes against possible damage
prior to commencing installation and during installation.
B.
Surface Preparation: When necessary, field measure substrates to acquire

accurate dimensions of wood planks and submit final dimensions to
manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
A. Install wood planks as shown and detailed in the architectural drawings and
according to manufacturers guidelines and industry standards.
B. Install wood planks with expansion/contraction gaps equal to 1 mm (1/32) for
every 1 meter (3.28) of length/width (3 mm minimum between planks).
379
3.05
CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.06
Interface With Other Work: Support all light fixtures, HVAC air inlet/outlet
devices, speakers, signage, sprinkler heads/piping, etc. independently from
wood planks. Do not use wood planks to support the weight of any other
building element or component.
ADJUSTING
A. Following initial installation, adjust mounting hardware or suspension system so
that removable planks can be removed easily, yet stay safely secured upon
replacement. Adjust planks so that surfaces are aligned, flush and level or
plumb and gaps in between units are of a consistent width and straight.
B. Check that manufacturers expansion/contraction requirements were
maintained during installation. As required, adjust the mounting hardware or
suspension system to allow for the appropriate amount of product
expansion/contraction.
3.07
CLEANING
A. Remove dust from surfaces, grooves and penetrations by vacuuming using only a
soft brush. Do not scratch wood surfaces with sharp metal or plastic vacuum
cleaner extensions. Remove pencil marks with soft erasure. Remove general
surface dirt with a clean, soft cloth dampened with a diluted, mild, cleaning
agent and warm water. Wipe again with clean, soft cloth dampened only with
warm water. Finally, dry surface completely with clean, dry cloth. Do not use
abrasive cleaners with grit or cloths that could scratch the wood finish.
B. Remove and replace at no additional charge any materials that cannot be
cleaned to the Owners satisfaction.
3.08
Local Supplier:
Optimum llc
Tel: 0097126422045
Fax: 0097126422049
Email: optimum.info@optimumuae.com
bilal.b@optimumuae.com
END OF SECTION
380
SECTION 26: RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET

TILING/ SHEETING
TYPES OF COVERING
130
CARPET TILING
- Location: As indicated in the schedule of finishes and drawings.
- Base: Existing concrete slab or concrete screed.
- Preparation: As clause 440.
- Fabricated underlay: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer to
approval.
- Carpet tiles:
- Type: Tufted multilevel pattern loop.
- BS EN 1307 classification:
Category: Public and Commercial.
Level of use class: 33.
Luxury rating class: To be confirmed.
- Size: 500 mm x 500 mm.
- Colour/ pattern: To approval.
- Method of laying: Fully adhere every eight row with release adhesive
recommended by the manufacturer such as N5000 low VOC (no
solvents) carpet tile adhesive.
- Accessories: Carpet edge guards as clause 746 to approval in locations
as in the drawings, all other accessories as required and recommended
by the carpet manufacturer.
- Other requirements: On top of existing marble floor lay loosely without
using any takifier.
130
RUBBER FLOORING- REGUPOL EVEROLL- Elastic pre-manufactured

flooring mat made from selected bound with polyurethane
- Location: As indicated in the schedule of finishes and drawings.
- Base: Existing concrete slab or concrete screed.
- Preparation: As clause 440.
- Fabricated underlay: As recommended by the product manufacturer to
approval.
Technical data
Thickness
Specific Weight
2
Weight per m
Tensile Strength
Elongation at Break
Tear Resistance
Temperature
Resistance
Fire Resistance
Stain Resistance
Ammonia
Bleach
Unleaded petrol
Na0H
HC1
H2S04
Standards
DIN 53 571, Specimen B

DIN 53 571, Specimen B
DIN 53 515
DIN 4102
ASTM D543
Regupol Everoll
4mm
2
approx 1015 kg/ m
2
approx 4.06 kg/ m
2
approx 2.2 N/mm
approx 115%
approx 14.5 N/mm
-40 to 115 C
Class B2
No change
Slight change
No change
Slight change
Severe change
Moderate change
Section 26: RUBBER/PLASTICS/CORK/LINO/CARPET/TILING/SHEETING
381
Rubbing Alcohol
Motor Oil 10W-30
Olive Oil
Mechanical Grease
Slip Resistance
Fire Ratings
No change
Moderate change
Moderate change
Severe change
AS4586:1999
Appendix C: Wet/Barefoot
Ramp
Appendix D: Oil Wet Ramp
Spread of flame index
Smoke development index
Class C
Class R10
9
7
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
210
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
- Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from
grease, dirt and other contaminants.
- Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded,
smooth and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
220
SAMPLES
- Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample
of each type.
230
CONTROL SAMPLES
- General: Complete areas of finished work in approved locations as
follows, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding: to
approval.
250
LAYOUT ROLL MATERIALS

- Setting out of seams: Before placing orders agree setting out for
sheeting types M50/ 130.
251
LAYOUT SEAMS IN ROLL MATERIALS

- Setting out: Minimize occurrences of seams and cross seams.
- Cross seams: Not permitted in following locations: To approval.
252
LAYOUT PATTERNS
- Setting out: Before placing orders agree setting out for covering types
M50/130 .
270
EXTRA MATERIAL
- Provision of extra material: At completion, hand to Employer extra
material of each type of covering to extent of 2%.
330
COMMENCEMENT
- Required condition of works prior to laying materials:
- Building is weathertight and well dried out.
- Wet trades have finished work.
- Paintwork is finished and dry.
- Conflicting overhead work is complete.
- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which
materials are to be cut are fixed.
- Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
340
CONDITIONING
382
Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in

spaces where they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an
upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.
Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by
manufacturer with time extended by a factor of two for materials stored or
transported at a temperature of less than 10C immediately prior to
laying.
350
ENVIRONMENT
- Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain
approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied.
- Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.
360
FLOORS WITH UNDERFLOOR HEATING

- Commencement of laying: Not before a period of 48 hours after heating
has been turned off.
- Post laying start up of heating system: Slowly return heating to its
operative temperature not less than 48 hours after completing laying.
PREPARING BASES
410
NEW BASES
- Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:
- Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of
suitability.
420
EXISTING BASES
- Notification: Before commencing work, confirm that existing bases will,
after preparation, be suitable to receive coverings.
- Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:
- Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of
suitability.
430
NEW WET LAID BASES

- Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content
testing.
- Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325,
Annexe A or BS 8203, Annexe A.
- Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points
over area being tested.
- Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75%
relative humidity or less.
440
SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS

- Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and
other blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering
material.
461
-
SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND

Manufacturer: To approval.
470
EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS REMOVED

- Substrate: Clear of covering and as much adhesive as possible. Skim
with smoothing underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface.
480
EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS TO BE OVERLAID

- Substrate: Make good by local resticking and patching or filling with
smoothing underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface.
383
510
WOOD BLOCK FLOORING

- Substrate: Clean and free from wax with all blocks sound and securely
bonded. Fill hollows with smoothing underlayment compound to give
smooth, even surface.
- Missing and loose blocks: Replace and reset in adhesive to match
existing. Sand or plane to make level.
520
TIMBER BOARDING/ STRIP FLOORING

- Substrate: Boards securely fixed and acceptably level with no protruding
fasteners. Plane, sand or apply smoothing underlayment compound to
give a smooth, even surface.
530
PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING
- Substrate: Boards securely fixed, level and free from surface sealers and
contaminants.
- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.
- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.
- Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in service
conditions.
535
PARTICLEBOARD FLOATING FLOORING

- Substrate: Boards securely fixed and free from surface sealers and
contaminants.
- Level: Sand to remove areas raised more than 1 mm.
- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.
- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.
- Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in service
conditions.
LAYING COVERINGS
610
620
SETTING OUT TILES

- Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible:
- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.
- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.
COLOUR CONSISTENCY
- Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.
640
ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY

- Adhesive: Type to be as specified, recommended by covering/ underlay
manufacturer or as approved.
- Primer: Use and type as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
- Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.
- Finished surface irregularities: Trowel ridges and high spots caused by
particles on the substrate not acceptable.
650
SEAMS
- Patterns: Matched.
- Joints: Tight without gaps.
670
BORDERS/ FEATURE STRIPS IN SHEET MATERIAL

- Application: Cut strips along length of sheet to prevent curl.
- Corners: Mitre joints.
680
SEAM WELDING COVERINGS

- Commencement: Not before a period of 24 hours after laying, or until
adhesive has set.
- Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.
384
690
SEAM BONDING CARPET

- Carpet types: M50/130.
- Seaming adhesive application: Continuous bead to edges.
- Joints: Securely bonded, free of air bubbles.
700
LOOSE LAID CARPET TILES

- Areas of adhered tiles: Secure using double sided tape or peelable
adhesive.
- Joints: Tightly butted.
- Perimeter joints: Accurately cut to match abutment and prevent
movement.
720
DOORWAYS
- Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.
740
EDGINGS/ COVER STRIPS

- Product reference: To approval .
- Material/ finish: Stainless Steel/ Brushed..
- Fixing: Secure (using matching fasteners where exposed to view) with
edge of covering gripped.
750
STAIR NOSINGS/ TRIM

- Material/ finish: Polished Stainless Steel.
- Fixing: Secure, level with mitred joints. Adjusted to suit thickness of
covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Nosing
and packing strips bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by
nosing manufacturer.
- Screw fixing with matching plugs: Required.
760
STAIR COVERINGS SEPARATE RISERS AND TREADS

- Fixing: Accurately cut. Fit risers before treads.
SKIRTINGS
- Types: To drawings.
- Fixing: Secure with top edge straight and parallel with floor.
- Corners: Mitre joints.
770
780
TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING

- Covering types: To approval.
- Traffic free period: To adhesive manufacturers recommendation.
COMPLETION
820
FINISHING
- Cleaning operations:
- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If
necessary, lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.
- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to
adhesive. Allow to dry.
- Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by covering
manufacturer.
825
FINISHING NONTEXTILE ANTISTATIC FLOORING

385
Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If

necessary, lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.
Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to
adhesive. Allow to dry for not less than 24 hours before testing.
830
FINISHING RUBBER FLOORING

- Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer.
- Wet vacuum or mop up residue.
- Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.
- Final treatment: Follow recommendations of covering manufacture and
spray buff with wetting agent or dry burnish.
840
FINISHING RUBBER FLOORING

- Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer.
- Wet vacuum or mop up residue.
- Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.
- Polishing: Apply two coats of buffable or semibuffable polish of a type
recommended by covering manufacturer.
850
FINISHING CORK TILE FLOORING POLISH FINISH

- Preparation: Lightly sand joints to remove any lipping. Match original
finish.
- Remove dust and wash, using water containing a neutral detergent.
Allow to dry.
- Sealing: Apply a water based seal of a type and number of coats
recommended by cork manufacturer. Allow each coat to dry. Dry burnish.
- Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by cork
manufacturer. Dry burnish each coat.
851
FINISHING CORK TILE FLOORING POLYURETHANE FINISH

- Preparation: Lightly sand joints to remove any lipping. Match original
finish.
- Remove dust and wash with water containing a neutral detergent.
Allow to dry.
- Polyurethane varnish: Apply a type and number of coats recommended
by cork manufacturer. Allow each coat to dry.
860
TESTING ANTISTATIC FLOORING

- Flooring to be tested: M50/130.
- Test methods: BS 2050 Clause A4.1.
- Required electrical resistance values:
- Upper limit:
Average value not more than as per BS 2050.
No individual reading more than as per BS 2050.
- Lower limit:
Average value not less than as per BS 2050.
No individual reading less than as per BS 2050.
- Electrical resistivity: Submit and agree date and time of test.
Record and submit results.
- Flooring details sign: Before fixing, agree location and submit details of a
brass plate, size 50 x 75 mm, engraved with the following details:
The words ANTISTATIC FLOOR.
Manufacturer and reference of flooring.
Name of flooring contractor.
Date when laid.
386
880
WASTE
- Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching.
On completion submit pieces for selection. Hand over selected pieces to
Employer.
387
SECTION 27: FIRESTOPPING
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work
specified in this section.
Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of

fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in/ joints between fire rated
wall and floor assemblies.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
1.04
A.
Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping,
electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and
partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service
shaft walls and partitions.
B.
Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.
C.
Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
D.
Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
E.
Expansion joints in walls and floors.
F.
Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
G.
Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.
RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A.
Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to
properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress
of the work of other sections, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.05
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Joint Sealers
Masonry Work
Lath and Plaster
Gypsum Drywall Systems
Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
Fire Suppression and Supervisory Systems
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Mechanical Insulation
Fire Protection
Plumbing
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
REFERENCES
Section 27: FIRESTOPPING
388
A.
B.
Test Requirements: ASTM E-814-02, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of

Through Penetration Fire Stops"
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their
designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE
DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.
1.
UL Fire Resistance Directory:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Firestop Devices (XHJI)

Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV)
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
Forming Materials (XHKU)
Alternate Omega Point Laboratories Directory (updated
annually).
C.
Test Requirements: UL 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint

Systems (July 1998.)
D.
Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966-01, Standard test method for Fire Resistive
Joint Systems
E.
Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174 01, Standard Practice for On-site

Inspection of Installed Fire Stops.
F.
International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems

Engineering Judgments
G.
ASTM E-84-01, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
H.
All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.

(Note to specifier: Retain or delete building codes listed above as
applicable)
1.06
I.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
J.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site

during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor
personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per
manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and
drawing details.
B.
Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, UL 1479

or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of
construction being penetrated.
C.
Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing

codes having local jurisdiction.
D.
Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing

partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult
the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
389
E.
1.07
For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is
available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from
similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities
having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation.
Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the
International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994, as may be amended from
time to time).
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
with LEED
Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for

each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL
firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to
comply with Section 1300.
Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details
when no UL system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must
include both project name and contractors name who will install firestop
system as described in drawing.
Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.
Sound Insulation Test Reports: Provide Test Certificates from qualified
independent laboratories showing clearly a minimum of 54 dB sound reduction
for Firestop Systems is achieved.
Ageing Test Report showing Firestop Systems which have been tested and
rated to withstand aging in normal service life between 25 and 30 years in
accordance with DafStb Guidelines for the repair and protection of building
components part 4, Section 2.4.5.6 with subsequent fire testing to ensure long
term functionality.
Submit certificate by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply
requirements for indoor environmental quality credit.
1.08
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.09
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.10
Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise

qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the
necessary training to install manufacturers products per specified
requirements. A suppliers willingness to sell its firestopping products to the
Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on the buyer.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or

replace fire stopping system that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Age Testing Certificate: Provide Firestop Systems which have been tested and
rated to withstand aging in normal service life between 25 and 30 years in
accordance with DafStb Guidelines for the repair and protection of building
components part 4, Section 2.4.5.6 with subsequent fire testing to ensure long
term functionality. Age Testing Certificate for each product to be submitted.

A.
B.
C.
Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened

containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.
Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow
minimum storage time at job-site.
Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in
compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature
390
D.
E.
1.11
restrictions.
Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in
material safety data sheets as applicable.
Do not use damaged or expired materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B.
Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item

installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
C.
Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work.

unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
D.
Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when

temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for
installation printed on product label and product data sheet.
E.
During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping

materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.
Correct
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each

other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the
firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistancerated systems.
C.
Firestopping Materials are either cast-in-place (integral with concrete

placement) or post installed. Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to
concrete placement.
A.
2.03
Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems and joint

systems listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory; provide
products of the following manufacturers as identified below:
1.
Hilti Emirates L.L.C

PO Box : 11051 ,Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: 800-44584, 048854445, FAX: 048854405
Web site: www.hilti.ae
2.
Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A.
Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079
tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction
assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-
391
rating involved for each separate instance.

B.
Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible
plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, the
following products are acceptable:
1.
Hilti CP 680N Cast-In Place Firestop Device
2.
Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit for use with tub installations.
3.
Hilti CP 682 Cast-In Place Firestop Device
noncombustible penetrants
C.
for
use
with
Sealants, intumescent material or foams for use with non-combustible items

including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic
tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant

Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant
Hilti CP 620 Expanding Fire Foam
Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant
Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant
D.
Sealants and intumescent materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the
following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.

E.
Sealants and spray materials for use with fire-rated construction
joints, soffit joints (top of the wall joints) and other gaps, the following products are
acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Hilti CFS SP WB Speed Spray

Sealants and Spray materials used for Curtain wall Joints (openings between
Slab and Curtain Wall), the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant
G.
Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck
and gap between top of wall and metal profile deck; as a backer for spray
material.
1.
2.
H.
Hilti CP 677 Speed Plugs

Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips
Intumescent sealants for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by

high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible
cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable:
1.
392
I.
Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible
cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for

use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
K.
Hilti CP 657 Fire Flexible Bricks

Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board
Sealants and Spray materials used for openings between structurally separate
sections (Expansion Joints) of walls and floors, the following products are
acceptable:
1.
2.
5.
6.
P.
Hilti CP 636 Cement-based Firestop Mortar

Hilti CP 637 Gypsum-based Firestop Mortar
Hilti CP 657 Firestop Flexible Bricks
5.
Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations

made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical
busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
O.
Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar

Hilti CP 644 Firestop Collar
Hilti CP 648-E / CP 648-S Wrap Strips
Materials used for complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays,

multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following
products are acceptable:
2.
3.
4.
N.
Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad
Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible

plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are
acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
M.
Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick

Hilti CP 658T / CP 656 Firestop Plug
Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and
specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:
1.
L.


Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant
For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future
penetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are
acceptable:
1.
Hilti CP 657 Fire Flexible Bricks
393
2.
Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug
Q.
Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or

ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
R.
Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079

which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
3.02
3.03
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is

to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely
completion.
1.
Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for

application of materials.
2.
Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,

grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any
other substances that may affect proper adhesion.
3.
Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent

surfaces by firestopping materials.
4.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and

humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
7.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible
for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.
B.
Responsible trades to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for
installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.
INSTALLATION
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire

Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for

installation of through-penetration and construction joint materials.
1.
Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and

water resistant seal.
2.
Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper

manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might
hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
394
3.
3.04
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

A.
Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before

concealing or enclosing areas.
B.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code
authorities.
3.05
C.
Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in

accordance with ASTM E 2174, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of
Installed Fire Stops or other recognized standard.
D.
Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by

cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other
trades.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean

condition.
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop
materials
and
soiling
as
work
progresses.
395
SECTION 28: FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work
specified in this section.
Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of

fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor
assemblies.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested and listed firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
1.04
A.
Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and perimeter curtain walls.
B.
Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
C.
Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
D.
Expansion joints in walls and floors.
RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A.
Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to

properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress
of the work of other sections, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Masonry Work
Through-penetration Firestop Systems
Joint Sealers
Glazed Curtain Wall
Lath and Plaster
Gypsum Drywall Systems
REFERENCES
A.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, Volume II,
updated annually:
B.
1.
Joint Systems (XHBN)
2.
Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)
3.
Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH)
4.
Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
5.
Forming Materials (XHKU)
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (OPL) Listed Products Directory, Volume II,
updated annually:
1.
C.
Fire Resistant Joint Systems
ASTM E 1966, Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
Section 28: FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
396
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.06
1.07
1.08
ASTM E 1399, Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum
and Maximum Joint Width of Architectural Joint Systems
ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM E 2174, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire
Stops
ASTM E 2307, Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of
Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus
ANSI/UL 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
International Firestop Council Recommended (IFC) Guidelines for Evaluating
Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments
J.
All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.
K.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site

during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor
personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per
manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and
drawing details.
B.
Firestop System installation shall meet requirements of ASTM E 1966 and/or

ANSI/UL 2079 tested and listed assemblies that provide fire-resistance ratings
not less than that of the construction in which the joint occurs.
C.
Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing

codes having local jurisdiction.
D.
Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing

partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult
the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E.
For those firestop applications that exist for which no tested and listed system
is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from
similar tested and listed system designs or other tests will be submitted to local
authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation.
Engineering judgment drawings shall follow requirements set forth by the
International Firestop Council.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for

each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of
tested and listed firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation
instructions to comply with Section 1300.
B.
Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details

when no tested and listed system is available for an application. Engineering
judgment shall include both project name and contractors name who will install
firestop system as described in drawing.
C.
Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
397
A.
1.09
1.10
Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise

qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the
necessary training to install manufacturers products per specified
requirements. A manufacturers willingness to sell its firestopping products to
the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself
confer qualification on the buyer.

A.
Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened

containers, identified with brand, type, and UL or OPL label, where applicable.
B.
Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow

minimum storage time at job-site.
C.
Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in
compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature
restrictions.
D.
Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in

material safety data sheets as applicable.
E.
Do not use damaged or expired materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B.
Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item

installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
C.
Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work.

unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
D.
Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when

temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for
installation printed on product label and product data sheet.
E.
During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping

materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.
Correct
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each

other and substrates forming joints under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B.
Provide components for each fire-resistive joint system that are needed to
install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated
fire-resistance-rated systems.
A.
Subject to compliance with joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL
398
Fire Resistance Directory or OPL Listed Products Directory; provide products

of the following manufacturers as identified below:
2.03
1.
Hilti Emirates L.L.C

PO Box : 11051 ,Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: 800-44584, 048854445, FAX: 048854405
Web site: www.hilti.ae
2.
Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer; no

substitutions will be accepted.
MATERIALS
A.
Use only firestop products that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E
1966 and/or ANSI/UL 2079 for specific rated construction conditions
conforming to construction assembly type, movement capability, spacing
requirements, and fire-resistance-rating involved for each separate instance.
B.
Sealants for use with fire-resistance-rated construction joints, the following

products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Hilti CP 672 Speed Spray or equivalent.

Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant or equivalent.
Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant or equivalent.
Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant or equivalent.
Sealants for use as part of a Perimeter Fire Barrier System between fireresistance-rated floors and exterior wall assemblies, the following products are
acceptable:
1.
2.
D.
Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gap
between top of wall and metal deck profile; use as a backer for spray
material.
3.
4.
E.
Hilti CP 672 Speed Spray or equivalent.

Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant or equivalent.
Hilti CP 777 Speed Plugs or equivalent.

Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips or equivalent.
Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by ASTM E

1966 and/or ANSI/UL 2079 which is equal to the fire-resistance ratings of the
construction in which the joint occurs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is

to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely
completion.
1.
Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,

grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any
other substances that may affect proper adhesion.
2.
Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent
399
3.02
3.
surfaces by firestopping materials.

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and
humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
4.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire

Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Listed Products Directory.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for
installation of construction joint materials.
1.
3.04
3.05
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

A.
Examine sealed joints to ensure proper installation before concealing or

enclosing areas.
B.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities

and/or independent inspection agency.
C.
Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by

cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other
trades.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean

condition.
B.
Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess
firestop materials and soiling as work progresses.
400
SECTION 29: PLANTING
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
The scope of this section includes the preparation of planted areas and the supply,
planting, protection and maintenance of trees, shrubs, vines, groundcover plants and
grass of the species and size shown on the drawings. The section covers the
provision of qualified labor, equipment, and material necessary to carry out all
operations required for landscaping herein specified and shall be read in conjunction
with all other relevant sections of the Specification.
1.2
Quality Standards
1.2.1
The following British Standards are applicable:

BS 3936 - Part 1:1992 Nursery Stock. Part 1. Specification for Trees and Shrubs
BS 4428-1989
Code of Practice for General Landscape Operations
1.3
Submittals
1.3.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant information and certificates for
materials to be used for this Contract for approval. Such submittals shall include, but
not be limited to the following:
a) Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the planting plans and details to the
Consultant for review and action.
b) Product Data
Submit manufacturers certified data analysis of all standard products, including
fertilizers, soil amendments, herbicides, pesticides, fungicides, showing
description of ingredients, and recommendations for usage and application rates
for each material to be used.
c) Samples
- Samples of all materials to be used in this contract shall be submitted for
approval. The approved samples shall be the quality standard for the material
and its placement.
- All plant material shall be approved for inspection at the site nursery from where
it is sourced, prior to planting.
- The Landscape Consultant shall reserve the right to reject any plant material
deemed unacceptable which shall then be replaced with approved specimens
d) Certifications & Quality Control
- A certified analysis by an approved laboratory for non-standard products (soil,
compost).
- Certificates confirming the origin, size and age of all plant material
- Phytosanitary certificates for all imported plant material.
- Turf: submit certification from the grower for the type and trueness to the
grass variety or strain.
Section 29: PLANTING
401
Appendix 1: Schedule of Site Offices and Facilities
APPENDIX 1
SCHEDULE OF SITE OFFICES AND FACILITIES
The office requirements on this contract are as follows:
Room
No.
Description
No. of
Rooms
Total Area in m
Per
room
Total
Area
Size of
Room
Managerial Staff (with

appropriate size private
toilet)
17
17
4.2 x 4 m
Executive Staff (with

appropriate size private
toilet)
17
34
4.2 x 4 m
Staff Room
17
34
4.2 x 4 m
Reception
17
17
4.2 x 4 m
Sample Room
17
17
4.2 x 4 m
Pantry
3.8
7.6
1.9 x 2 m
Toilet
3.2
9.6
1.6 x 2 m
Meeting Room
26
26
6.4 x 4 m
Appendix 1
Room Furniture
Computer 1, TV Projector
1, Chair 1, Table 1,
Visitors Chair 2, Sofa Set
3, Filing Cabinet 2
Computer 2, Chair 2,
Table 2, Visitors Chair 4,
Filing Cabinet 2
Filing Cabinet 2
Filing Cabinet 4
TV Projector 1, Chair 25,

Table 6, Sofa Set 4,
Filing Cabinet 4
402
Appendix 2: No Objection Certificates (NOC)
Affection plan
Nakheel Preliminary approval
Nakheel Revalidated Preliminary Approval
DEWA Elec. NOC
DEWA Water NOC
DU NOC
Infrastructure NOC
Lootah Gas NOC
Trakhees Preliminary Approval
Trakhees Revalidated Preliminary Approval
Appendix 2
403
506500
IC3-C-3
506600
IC3-B-39
2782700
2782700
REVALIDATION OF NOC (LOAD LESS THAN 5000KW) OF PROJECTS LOCATED IN 'NORMAL GROWTH &
ALL MAJOR PROJECTS (INCLUDING THE NORMAL GROWTH AREA PROJECTS OF LOAD 5000KW & IC3-B-31
ABOVE) AREA IS NOT REQUIRED WITHIN 2 (TWO) YEARS AND 1(ONE) YEAR RESPECTIVELY FROM
THE DATE OF ISSUE FOR SUBMISSION OF APPLICATION "GETTING ELECTRICITY", SUBJECT TO
INCREASE IN LOAD & CHANGE OF POWER REQUIREMENT DATE
IC3-B-38
IC3-B-30
IC3-C-2
1065868
)
E
COMMUNITY : WARSAN FOURTH
IC3-B-37
NOC
IC3-C-1
11 k 132K
V Co V -S
n s t ru S 1 0 0
cted 58
/ As
laid
2782600
IC3-B-36
NOTE:-
IN ORDER TO ARRANGE PROCUREMENT OF DEWA EQUIPMENT AND IC3-B-28

MATERIALS FOR THIS
PROJECT, PLEASE SUBMIT THE ATTACHED MATERIAL REQUIREMENT FORMAT, DULY
IC3-B-35APPLICATIONS FOR SUBSTATION AND LV DESIGN APPROVALS,
FILLED IN, ALONG WITH YOUR
MINIMUM 18 MONTHS IN ADVANCE OF POWER REQUIREMENT FOR YOUR PROJECT.
SUBSTATION REQUIRED
506500
IC3-B-27
"
)
!!
(PLEASE CONTACT OUR CONNECTION SERVICES DEPT. FOR S/STN. DETAILS/APPROVAL)
NO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES TO BE STARTED WITHOUT GETTING S/STN.

APPROVAL FROM DEWA CONNECTION SERVICES DEPARTMENT
2782600
IC3-B-29
IC3-B-23
506600
NOTE:-
IN ORDER TO ARRANGE PROCUREMENT OF DEWA EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR THIS

PROJECT, PLEASE SUBMIT THE ATTACHED MATERIAL REQUIREMENT FORMAT,
DULYFILLED IN, ALONG WITH YOUR APPLICATIONS FOR SUBSTATION AND LV DESIGN
APPROVALS,MINIMUM 18 MONTHS IN ADVANCE OF POWER REQUIREMENT FOR YOUR PROJECT.
NO OBJECTION
PLEASE REFER TO SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
& CONDITIONS ATTACHED
THIS NOC PERMITS TO WORK WITHIN THE PLOT
LIMIT ONLY
WARNING
ELECTRIC UNDERGROUND CABLES (REFER FOR REPRESENTATION)
ARE SHOWN AT APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS ON THIS DOCUMENT. IT
IS LIKELY THAT ELECTRIC CABLES ARE PASSING THROUGH THE
PROPOSED WORKING AREA. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF
CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE DEWA ELECTRIC CABLES BY EXCAVATION
USING HAND SHOVEL ONLY. PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY
EXCAVATION/DRILLING WORK IN THE VICINITY OF THE PROPOSED
WORK AREA, PLEASE INFORM DEWA (ED) BY (TEL: 04-398-7106
FAX: 04-398-4754) 48 WORKING HOURS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT
OF WORK TO DEPUTE DEWA-SUPERVISOR TO SHOW ELECTRIC
CABLES IN WORK AREA/PLOT. DEWA WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE
FOR ACCIDENT CAUSED DUE TO ELECTRIC CABLES IN THIS AREA.
CHARGES WILL BE MADE TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR ANY DAMAGE
TO DEWA PROPERTY AS PER ACT (2) 1994 OF DUBAI GOVERNMENT.
PLEASE REFER CAREFULLY TO ALL THE NOTES & CONDITIONS
INCLUDING "SAFETY PREACAUTIONS AND CONDITIONS TO BE
OBSERVED" NOTES ON THE REVERSE OF THIS DOCUMENT
OR ATTACHMENTS. "ENSURE THIS DOCUMENT IS AVAILABLE WITH
SITE
PERSONNEL
AT
ALL
TIMES"
CONTRACTOR MUST DEMARCATE THE PLOT / PROJECT AREA AND LOCATE DEWA SERVICES USING CABLE
DETECTOR AND DEWA PATROLLING SECTION (TEL. NO.: 04-5066565, FAX: 04-5066791) TO BE INFORMED
ACCORDINGLY FOR NECESSARY CHECKING, PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY CONSTRUCTION WORK
(MOBILIZATION, INSTALLATION OF MACHINERIES / EQUIPMENTS , EXCAVATION, ETC.)
NOC NO : 1065868 , BUILDING
VALIDITY: 6 (SIX) MONTHS ONLY FROM DM NOC REF. : NIL

WEB REF. :
THE DATE OF ISSUE
A4
OWNER : JASSIM AL-THANI

PLOT NO : IC3-B-37 / WARSAN FOURTH
LOAD : 879 KW
SCALE 1 : 1000
DATE OF RECEIVED : 04-Aug-2013
DATE OF ISSUE : 04-Aug-2013
CONSULTANT/CONTRACTOR : M.E ENGINEERING CONS
SHEET NO : 1 OF 1
DESIGNED BY : KHIZAR HAYAT
PREPARED BY : KHIZAR_HAYAT
CHECKED BY : ABDUL SALAM KHAN
APPROVED BY: Dy Manager (NOC) / M(P) / SM(CS)
Ref: IC3-B-37-SNO34140-114063 -13-UP
Date: 03-10- 2013
M/s. M.E. Engineering Consultants

P.O. BOX: 119487
Dubai
E-Mail:
mimar@eim.ae
Development :
Community:
Plot No :
Project ID :
Project Type :
Building Description :
Lessee :
Nakheel
International city / Warsan Fourth 624
IC3-B-37
P12664
Residential
Proposed (B+G+5 floors) Residential Building + Swimming pool at 1st floor
M/s. Jassim Faisal M. T. Al Thani
Subject:
Concept Design Approval
Reference submittal for concept design approval for the above mentioned plot via your letter ref: ME/1673/13378 dated 24.09.2013 Received in Trakhees-CED on 30.09.2013.
We hereby have No objection on submitted concept design to Civil Engineering Department in compliance with
the DCR.
General Conditions:
Design concept approval is limited only to conceptual stage and no construction activities shall be
executed.
Any changes occurring subsequent to the concept design approval prior to obtaining Building Permit
requires further approval from CED - TRAKHEES.
All changes / amendments on concept approval require Master Developer approval prior to submitting
application for revision.
All outstanding comments if any shall be incorporated prior to final submission for Building Permit.
All new Trakhees regulations and design guidelines shall be adapted to the concept approval unless
Building Permit has been obtained for this project.
CED review is not extended to green building regulations.
This Concept Design NOC is valid for six months from the date of issue.
Yours faithfully,
Eng. Fatema Al Shehhi

Manager Architectural Engineering
(HK)
OurRef:JP020/IC3B37/SNO34746/114927/13MASDate:10November2013
M/s.M.E.EngineeringConsultants
P.O.Box:119487
Dubai.
Attn.Eng:SudhirMohandas EMail:me@mimargroup.comjooi50@gmail.com
Community:
InternationalCityPhase3
Project:
Proposed(B+G+5+Roof)ResidentialBuilding
PlotNo:
IC3B37
ProjectID:
P12664
Owner:
Shk.JassimFaisalMTAlThani
SoilInvestigationAgency:
HasanAlAmirSoilAnalysis
Subject:
NOCforSoilInvestigation
We refer to your submission with Ref.: ME/1944/13378 dated 06November2013 requesting the
subject NOC. We have No Objection for the soil investigation for the abovementioned plot
subjecttocompliancewiththefollowingconditions:
1. Alltheexistingservicestobeprotected.
2. BoreholedetailsshouldbeprovidedwiththecrownofroadorDubaiMunicipalityDatum(DMD)
asdatumlevel.
3. Thescopeoffieldworkis3boreholeswithdepthsof18.00m.
4. Allexplorationlocationsshallbemarkedwithreferencetostructurelayout.
5. Thegeotechnicalengineermustgiverecommendationforthemostpreferableshoring system
(ifrequired),chemicalanalysis,liquefactionanalysis,recommendationfortheexpectedtypeof
foundationandsoilparametersmustbeadoptedforthefoundationdesign.
6. The soil investigation report to be in full compliance with our guidelines regarding soil
investigation
Yoursfaithfully,
Dr.AhmadGad
ManagerStructuralEngineering
(WM)
Cc:MFile
Ref: NOC-IC3-B37 -SNO37583-118576-14-UP
Date: 14-04- 2014
M/s. M. E. ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Dubai, U.A.E
Attention: The Manger E-mail: mimar@eim.ae
Development :
Nakheel
Community:
International city / Warsan Fourth 624
Plot No :
IC3-B-37
Project ID :
P12664
Project Type :
Residential
Building Description : Proposed (B+G+5 floors) Residential Building + Swimming pool at 1st floor
Lessee :
M/s. Jassim Faisal M. T. Al Thani
Subject:
Concept Design Revalidation
Dear Sir;
Reference submittal for concept design approval for the above mentioned plot via your letter ref: ME/1471/14-378
received in Trakhees-CED/Architectural section on 07.04.2014. We hereby have approved with comments on submitted
concept design to Civil Engineering Division in compliance with the DCR & below conditions.
General Conditions:
Design concept approval is limited only to conceptual stage and no construction activities shall be
executed.
Any changes occurring subsequent to the concept design approval prior to obtaining Building
Permit.
All changes / amendments on concept approval require Master Developer approval prior to
submitting application for revision.
All outstanding comments shall be incorporated prior to final submission for Building Permit.
All new Trakhees regulations and design guidelines shall be adapted to the concept approval
unless Building Permit has been obtained for this project.
CED review is not extended to green building regulations
This Concept Design NOC is valid for six months from the date of issue.
Yours faithfully,
Eng. Fatema Al Shehhi

Manager Architectural Engineering
(HK)
Cc: M file
Appendix 3: List of Approved Suppliers
LIST OF APPROVED ARCHITECTURAL/CIVIL PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS &

SUPPLIERS
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS
GENERAL NOTES:
ALL REFERENCES WITHIN THE SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS OF THIS CONTRACT TO TRADE
NAMES OF PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS AND TRADE MARKS ARE INTENDED AS DEFINITION
OF MINIMUM STANDARD OF WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE CONTRACTOR
MAY USE OTHER MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT OR FITTINGS WHICH FULFIL THE FOLLOWING
REQUIREMENTS PROVIDED IT IS NOTIFIED AT TENDER STAGE:
A.
BE EQUAL OR SUPERIOR IN QUALITY TO THE SPECIFIED ITEM.
B.
DOES NOT ENTAIL CHANGES IN CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF RELATED WORK.
C.
IS ACCEPTABLE IN CONSTRUCTION OF THE REQUIRED DESIGN AND ARTISTIC

INTENT.
D.
DOES NOT INVOLVE ANY ADDITIONAL COST TO THE EMPLOYER.
E.
BE TO ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
ANY CLAUSES IN THE SPECIFICATION, WHICH RELATE TO WORK OR MATERIALS NOT

REQUIRED BY THE WORKS, SHALL BE DEEMED NOT TO APPLY.
CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FOR ENGINEER APPROVAL ANY SUPPLIER WHO IS SUPPLYING
MATERIALS REQUIRED BY THE DESIGN DRAWINGS / SPECIFICATIONS AND NOT LISTED IN
THIS DOCUMENT.
Appendix 3
404
Item
Manufacturer/Product
Local Agent/Representative
Email / Web Details
a)
Khansaheb Sykes, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5343453
Fax: 06-5343908
b)
National De-watering &

Drainage Services
Dubai
Tel: 04-3333123
Fax: 04-3331876
b) Email:
enquiry@nationalgroup.org
c)
Al Naboodah-WJ
Groundwater JV
P.O. Box 49204, Dubai
Tel: 04-8855254
Fax: 04-8855257
c) www.wj-me.com
Email: info@wj-me.com
De-watering Specialist/SubContractor
a) Email:
ksykes@khansahebsykes.com
Or Approved Equivalent
Anti-Termite Treatment
a)
Agricultural Materials Co.

P.O.Box 474334, Dubai
Tel: 04-8847752
Fax: 04-8847753
P.O.Box 2954, AUH
Tel: 02-6260640
Fax: 02-6260688
a) Email:
agrimatco.dubai@eim.ae
b)
Unimar Pest Control

Tel: 04-3244332
Fax: 04-3244331
b)
www.unimarcorp.com
Email:
info@unimarcorp.com
c)
Middle East Agripest, Dubai

Tel: 04-3388226
Fax: 04-3388785
c)
Email:
polyclean@eim.ae
d)
Fardan Agricultural Est., P.O.

Box 5151, Dubai
Tel: 04-2216534
Fax: 04-2216535
d)
Email:
fardanag@eim.ae
e)
f)
g)
National Pest Cont. P.O.Box

31592, Dubai
Tel: 04-3242342
Fax: 04-3242347
Universal Pest Rid Est.,
Tel: 04-3518786
Fax: 04-3519367
Arabian Agricultural Eng.
Est., P.O.Box 9119, Dxb
Tel: 04-2666446
Fax: 04-2695242
e) www.natpest.com
Email:
f)
universalpesticides@gmai
l.com
g) www.aaee-uae.com
Email:
arabagri@emirates.net.ae
Microsilica
a)
a) Elkem Microsilica
3
Appendix 3
Arabian Trading Est.

P.O. Box 5945, RAK
Tel: 07-2665677
Fax: 07-2665688
Tel: 04-2399610
Fax: 04-2399620
a) Email:
arabiantr@hotmail.com
405
b) Pachiney
b)
Cemex Topmix,
Tel: 04-3470433
Fax: 04-3470470
b) www.cemex.com
Email: info@cemex.com
GGBS
a)
Cemex Falcon,
Tel: 04-3470427
Fax: 04-3471713
a) www.cemex.com
Email: info@cemex.com
b)
National Cement Co.,

Tel: 04-3388885
Fax: 04-3388886
b) www.nationalcement.ae
Email:
cement@nationalcement.ae
c)
Sharjah Cement Co.

P.O. Box 2083, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5684681
Fax: 06-5683171
c) www.sharjahcement.com
Email: scidcho@eim.ae
d)
Gulf Concrete & Block

P.O.Box 159, RAK
Tel: 07-2221414
Fax: 07-2221167
07-2220833
d)
Email:
www.gcbreadymix.ae
Water Proofing Additives
a)
Specialized Industries, P.O

Box 1083, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5630748
Fax: 06-5635364
a) Email:
info@specialised-ind.com
Mr. Nizar (Exec. Manager)
050-5676903
Pudlo
b)
David Ball Middle East Ltd.,

Tel: 06-5575096
Fax: 06-5575097
b) Email:
pudlo@emirates.net.ae
Conplast
c)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O.Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
c)
a)
Ipanex
b)
c)
Email:
agf@fosroc.com
a)
Readymix Gulf,
P.O Box 52942, Dubai
Tel: 04-3413730
04-3474123
Fax: 04-3474552
b)
Arabian Mix
P.O. Box 158, Dubai
Tel: 04-3381731
Fax: 04-3381243
04-3502196
c)
CemexTop Mix, Dubai

Tel: 04-3470427
Fax: 04-3470740
c)
www.cemex.com
d)
Conmix Ltd., Dubai

Tel: 04-3472225
Fax: 04-3472180
d)
www.conmix.com
Readymix Concrete
Appendix 3
a) www.
Email:
suresh@readymixgulf.ae
b) www.al-ghurair.com
Email:
readymix@al-ghurair.com
406
e)
Unimix, Dubai
Tel: 04-3387816
Fax: 04-3387735
e) Email:
unimix@emirates.net.ae
f)
S.S.Lootha Ready Mix

P.O. Box 553, Dubai
Tel: 04-2672233
Fax: 04-2673594
f) www.ssloothagroup.com
Email:
readymix@sslootha.com
g)
Austrian Arabian Ready Mix

Concrete
Tel: 04-8802327
Fax: 04-8802328
g)
h)
Unibeton Ready Mix

Tel: 04-8802600
Fax: 04-8802299
h)
i)
Safemix
Tel: 04-8801788
Fax: 04-8801789
i)
www.dubaireadymix.com
Mr. Khalid Fooda
Mobile: 050-5675023
j)
Gulf Concrete & Block

P.O. Box 159, RAK
Tel: 07-2221414
Fax: 07-2221167
07-2220833
j)
www.gcbreadymix.ae
k)
Xtramix Concrete Solutions

L.L.C.
P.O. Box 32020, AUH
Tel: 02-5511118
Fax: 02-5511425
k)
Email:
xtramix@xtramix.ae
Email:
agf@fosroc.com
Email:
info@aacdxb.ae
www.unibetonreadymix.co
m
Email: info@unibetonrem.com
Water stops
a)
Fosroc
b)
Servicised
c)
Greenstreak (USA)
a)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
a)
b)
Sultan Bin Rashid,

(SULTACO),
Tel: 04-3385929
Fax: 04-3391842
b) www.sultaco.ae
Email:
secretary@sultacouae.com
c)
Prestige Engineering
Specialties Co. LLC
P.O. Box 4618, AUH
Tel: 02-6219910
Fax: 02-6219920
c) Email:
prestesp@eim.ae
a)
Emirates Iron & Steel

Factory,
P.O. Box 9022, AUH
Tel: 02-5511187
Fax: 02-5515113
a) www.esi-steel.com
Email: esi@esi-steel.com
b)
Saudi Steel
b)
Reinforcement Steel
Appendix 3
407
c)
Qatar Steel Co. FZE

P.O. Box 18255,Dubai
Tel: 04-8053111
Fax: 04-8053222
c)
d)
Turkish Origin Steel
d)
Email: info@qatarsteel.ae
10
a)
BRC Arabia FZE

Tel: 06-5572573
04-4515533 (main)
Fax: 06-5572009
04-4515544(main)
a)
Email:
brc@emirates.ae
b)
Al Ittahad Rein. Steel

Fabrication Factory
Tel: 04-3389652
Fax: 04-3389576
b) www.steelfab.ae
Email: info@steelfab.ae
c)
G2 International (LLC)
Tel: 04-2859450
Fax: 04-2857498
c) www.geapgroup.com
Email:
geapintl@emirates.net.ae
d)
Emirates Rebar Rein.

Engineering,
Tel: 04-8839267
Fax: 04-8839285
d)
e)
Buildco,
P.O. Box 2443, AUH
Tel: 02-6455500
Fax: 02-6455544
e) www.bildco.co
Email:
bildco@emirates.net.ae
f)
Cicon Building Material, P.O.

Box 660, Abu Dhabi
Tel: 02-6415444
Fax: 02-6415511
f) www.ciconuae.pk
Email:
cicon01@emirates.net.ae
g)
Geap Traders,
P.O. Box 27346, AUH
Tel: 02-5507223
04-2844406(main)
Fax: 02-5507118
04-2860849
g) www.hafele.com
Email:
hafelead@emirates.net.ae
Reinforcement Steel
Fabrications
www.emiratesrebarlimite
d.com
Email: rebar@emirates.net.ae
11
a)
Erico
P.O. Box 41962, AUH
Tel: 02-6336911
Fax: 02-6341933
P.O. Box 261488 Dubai
Tel: 04-8817250
Fax: 04-8817270
a)
b)
Ancon Middle East Fze.

Tel: 04-8834346
Fax: 04-8834347
b) www.ancon.ae
Email: info@ancon.ae
c)
Dextra Middle East FZE,

Mechanical Couplers
Appendix 3
Email:
erevar@eim.ae
c) www.dextragroup.com
Email:
408
Tel: 04-8865620
Fax: 04-8865621
middleeast@dextragroup.com
SBS Waterproofing
Membrane
a)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
a)
b)
CKK Middle East

P.O. Box 6589,Dubai
Tel: 04-2824085
Fax: 04-2825365
b) www.ckkme.com
Email: igni@ckkme.ae
c)
Al Nahda Contracting
P.O. Box 1053,Sharjah
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
c)
Email: mail@alcouae.com
12
(Also refer to Item No. 26
below )
Email:
beam@eim.ae
13
a)
GECO Chemical Co. P.O.

Box 1145, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5346467
Fax: 06-5342244
a) Email:
gecoche1@gecochemicals.ae
b)
Kangaroo Plastics,
Tel: 04-2660588
04-8804700
Fax: 04-2692658
04-8804702
b) Email:
kangaroo@kangarooplastics.co
m
c)
Cosmoplast
Tel: 06-5331264
Fax: 06-5331917
c) www.cosmoplast.com
Email:
cplast@cosomplast.com
d)
Sadco Sharjah
Tel: 06-5331419
04-8873788
Fax: 06-5333002
d)
e)
Dubai International
Reinforced Plastics
Tel: 04-2858080
Fax: 04-2850956
e) www.dirp.cc
Email: dirp@emirates.net.ae
f)
Fujairah Plastic Factories

Tel: 06-5423690
Fax: 06-5423688
f)
g)
Dubai Plastic Factories

P.O. Box 22487, Ajman
Tel: 06-7433976
Fax: 06-7436079
g)
Email: dblast@eim.ae
Polyethylene Sheets
Email:
www.fujairahplastic.com
Email:
fujiplast@emirates.net.ae
Bituminous Paint
a) Mastertop 420
14
Appendix 3
a)
BASF Chemicals Co.

P.O.Box 37127, Dxb
Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
a) www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
409
b)
Cormix RBE
b)
Cormix Middle East

P.O.Box Dubai
Tel: 04-3374484
Fax: 04-3347104
b)
c)
Lavatex RBE
c)
Falcon Chemical Ltd.

Tel: 04-8801444
Fax: 04-8801717
c)
www.falconchemicals.co
m
Email:
inquiry@falconchemicals.com
d)
Nitoproof
d)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
d)
Email: agf@fosroc.com
Existing and originated in

Thailand, no supplier
found in emirates.
a)
Fibrex Co. LLC

PO Box 462
Tel 02-5511462
Fax 02-5513331
Emirates Precast
Construction Est., Dubai
Tel: 04-8802111
Fax: 04-8802999
a)
fibrex@fibrex.ae
b)
Email:
epc@emirates.net.ae
c)
Al Muraikhi Contr. And Trg

Est., Abu Dhabi
Tel: 02-6770590
Fax: 02-6725475
c)
d)
Concrete Technology
Tel: 04-8801777
Fax: 04-8801666
d) www.concretech.ae
Email: info@concretec.ae
e)
United Precast Concrete

LLC., Dubai
Tel: 04-3474440
Fax: 04-3474746
e)
f)
Juma Al Majid East Ltd.,

Tel: 04-3477555
Fax: 04-3477888
f) Email:
jamcpp01@emirates.net.ae
g)
Gulf Precast Concrete Co.

P.O. Box19302, Dubai
Tel: 04- 8851033
Fax: 04- 8851016
g) www.gulfprecast.ae
Email: cora@gulfprecast.ae
b)
15
Pre-Cast Concrete/PC
Cladding Panels
Email:
Email:
ip@upcdubai.com
Floating Floors & Inertial
Bases
16
a)
Kinetics
Noise
Control Inc. (USA)
b)
Christie-N-Grey
(UK)
c)
Appendix 3
Mason Industries
INC. (USA)
a)
Kinetics Middle Est Ltd.

Tel: 04-8857361
Fax: 04-8857362
a) www.kineticsnoise.com
Email: info@kineticsnoise.ae
b)
Royal Gulf LLC, Dubai

Tel: 04-3935383
Fax: 04-3938056
b)
c)
Energy International
Tel: 06-5343477
Fax: 06-5343756
c) www.energyintl.com
Email:
energysh@eim.ae
Email:
410
17
Gunniting / Shotcreting
a)
Tuleila Heat Insulation

Tel: 06-5552959
Fax: 06-5591640
a) www.tuleila.com
Email:
contracts@tuleila.com
b)
Al Swiss Group of Co., P.O.

Box 6704, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5563123
Fax: 06-5564123
b) www.kkjgroup.com
Email:
18
a)
Drawish Haddad Prestressed

Concrete Co., Dubai
Tel: 04-3326707
Fax: 04-3313904
b)
Freyssinet Gulf,
P.O Box 36211, Dubai
Tel: 04-2094900
Fax: 04-2094910
b) www.freyssinet.com
Email: fme@freyssinetme.ae
c)
Australian Prestressing
Services (APS),
Tel: 04-2677997
Fax: 04-2677055
c) Email:
aps@emirates.net.ae
Precast / Pre-stressed /Post

Tensioned Concrete
a)
Email:
19
a)
Juma Al Majid,
Tel: 04-3477555
Fax: 04-3477888
a) Email:
jamcpp01@emirates.net.ae
b)
EMCON,
Tel: 04-3473400
Fax: 04-3473402
b) Email:
info@emcon.ae
c)
National Concrete Products,

P.O. Box 158, Dubai
Tel: 04-3382886
Fax: 04-3502196
d)
DAFCO Ready Mix

Tel: 06-5584666
Fax: 06-5377328
d) Email:
dafcomix@emirates.net.ae
Apex Concrete Products,

Tel: 04-3470833
Fax: 04-3470822
e) www.apexgulf.com
Email: apex@apexgulf.com
Cement Concrete Blocks
e)
f)
g)
Appendix 3
Phoenix Concrete Products,

Dubai
Tel: 04-3389868
Fax: 04-3389156
Jebel Ali Cement Products
Factory,
Tel: 04-8802696
c)
f)
www.phoenixdubai.com
g) www.jacement.com
Email: jac@jacement.com
411
Fax: 04-8802676
h)
Emirates Block Factory

Al Mafriq Al Wathba
P.O. Box 31901,AUH
Tel: 02-5822400
Fax: 02-5822551
i)
Buildco, Abu Dhabi

P.O. Box 2443, AUH
Tel: 02-6455500
Fax: 02-6455544
j)
Bynona Factory For Cement

Block, AUH
Tel: 02-5513167
Fax: 02-6728591
k)
Rock Cement Industries,

P.O. Box 165, AUH
Tel: 02-6321444
Fax: 02-6339222
h)
Email:
i) www.bildco.co
Email:
bildco@emirates.net.ae
j)
Email:
k) Email:
rockceme@emirates.net.ae
Thermal Insulated Blocks
a)
Al Amaar Block
Manufacturing CO. LLC
P.O. Box 37874, AUH
Tel: 04-8802388
Fax: 04-8802387
a) www.alamaarblock.com
Email:
almaarllc@gmail.com
b)
Al Jazeera Factory,
P.O. Box 9081, AUH
Tel: 02-5822768
Fax: 02-5822353
b)
c) Apex
c)
Apex Concrete Products,

Tel: 04-3470833
Fax: 04-3470822
d) Polystyrene Core Blocks
d)
EMCON LLC
Tel: 04-3473400
Fax: 04-3473402
e)
Emirates Block Factory

Al Mafriq Al Wathba
P.O. Box 31901,AUH
Tel: 02-5822400
Fax: 02-5822551
a) Thermalite (AAC Blocks)
20
www.aljazeerafactory.c
om
Email: jaziraac@eim.ae
c) www.apexgulf.com
Email: apex@apexgulf.com
d) Email:
info@emcon.ae
e) AAC Blocks
f) LCC SIPOREX
Riyadh, KSA
Appendix 3
e)
Email:
Email:
aide@eim.ae
f)
AIDE Improved Building

Products.
Tel: 04-2281585
Fax:04-2287266
f)
g)
Acico Industries
Tel: 04-8802490
Fax: 04-8802495
g) www.acico.com.kw
Email:
h)
Phoenix Concrete Products,

Dubai
Tel: 04-3389868
Fax: 04-3389156
h)
www.phoenixdubai.com
412
i)
Obaid Al Jassim Building

Contracting LLC
Tel: 04-8803806
Fax: 04-8803807
i) Email:
obaidajm@eim.ae
Accessories/Sundry items
for Block works
(Metal beads, laths, wall
starters,
Straps,
Arch
Formers, Wall movement
joint Systems)
a)
TMI
b)
METEX
a)
Technical Metal Ind.

PO Box 41558,AUH
Tel: 02-5502025
Fax: 02-5502024
a) www.tmi-co.com
Email: tmi@tmico.ae
b)
Metal Expansion Factory

PO Box 5374, Dubai
Tel: 04-8992444
Fax: 04-8992455
b) www.gentex.ae
Email: metex@gentex.ae
c)
Mac Al Gurg
PO Box 672, Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
Fax: 04-2691067
PO Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
Fax: 02-6720025
d)
Emirates Specialties Co.

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
21
c) CATNIC,
Corus UK Limited,
d)
EXPAMET Building
Product,
Ballyfermot,, Dublin.
c) www.macalgurg.com
Email:
mcalgurg@emirates.net.ae
d) www.esco.ae
Email: dubai@esco.ae
Fire Stop
a)
Nullifire
Protection
b)
Dow Corning (USA)
c)
Hilti
a)
A.P.S. Trading Division,

Dubai
Tel: 04-3372877
Fax: 04-3377389
b)
Emirates Specialties Co. LLC

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
c)
Hilti Emirates LLC

Tel: 80044584
Fax: 04-8854405
c) ae.contactus@hilti.com
Email:
mail@mepconsultants.com
d)
Tremco Ltd. (ME)

Tel: 04-3470460
Fax: 04-3470242
d) www.stonecor.com
Email: info@stonecor-me.com
e)
3M Gulf Ltd.,
Tel: 04-3670777
Fax: 04-3670998
e) www.3m.com
Email: 3mgulf@mmm.com
Fire
22
d)
e)
Tremco
3M
a) Email:
apskarama@apsdubai.com
b) www.esco.ae
Foam Concrete
a)
23
a)
Appendix 3
Foamcem
Al Nahda Cont. & Trad.

Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
a)
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
413
b)
c)
b)
Al Shirawi Cont. & Trad.,

Tel: 04-3335935
Fax: 04-3338898
c)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
Isocrete Ltd.
Confoam of BCR
(UK)
b)
www.alshirawi.com
Email: info@alshirawi.ae
c) www.esco.ae
Filter Membrane
a)
24
Terram
(UK)
by
a)
GECO Chemical Co. Ltd.

P.O.Box 1145, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5346467
Fax: 06-5342234
a)
Email:
gecoche1@gecochemica
ls.ae
b)

Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b)
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
c)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
c) www.esco.ae
I.C.I.
b)
Typar by Du Pont
c)
Polyfelt (Austria)
Methyl Methacrylate
(MMA) Water Proofing
Membrane
24a
(a) Stirling Lloyd
APP Bituminous
Proofing Membrane
25
a)
Stirling Lloyd GULF Concreting Products

P.O.Box 43010, Abu Dhabi
Tel: 02-6273998
Fax: 02-6273994
a)
www.gcpuae.com
Email: info@gcpuae.ae
www.western.ae
Email:
mirza@western.ae
Water
a)
Polybit
a)
Western International
Tel: 04-3285261
Fax 04-3285262
a)
b)
Unigum
of
Derbigum (Italy)
b)

Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b) Email:
mail@alcouae.com
c)
Polygum Turbo of
Atab (Belguim)
c)
Protect Middle Est.

Tel: 04-2651184
02-6126999
Fax: 04-2692823
c) Email:
protect@eim.ae
d)
Rhoflex (Italy)
d)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
d) Email:
beam@eim.ae
e)
Ruberit (Holand)
e)
CKK Mid. East Est.,

e) www.ckkme.com
Email: info@ckkme.ae
Appendix 3
414
Tel: 04-2824085
Fax: 04-2825365
f)
Ekoguard
f)

Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
f) www.esco.ae
g)
Imiplast
g)
Imperbit,
Tel: 04-8801616
Fax: 04-8801661
g)
h)
Duplas
h)
Duproof LLC
Tel: 04-8851212
Fax: 04-8851313
www.imperbit.ae
Email:
imperbit@alyousuf.com
h) www.duproof.com
Email:
duproof@emirates.net.ae
SBS Bituminous
Proofing Membrane
Water
a)
Polybit
a)
Tel: 04-3285261
Fax 04-3285262
a)
b)
Copolene
Of
Derbigum (Italy)
b)

Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b) Email:
mail@alcouae.com
c)
Parafor Solo FF of
Siplast (France)
c)
AMC Protection
Tel: 04-3416617
Fax: 04-3416618
d)
Axter
Force
Axter (France)
of
d)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
d)
e)
Cintaflex
(Holand)
2000
e)
CKK Mid. East Est.,

Tel: 04-2824085
Fax: 04-2825365
e) www.ckkme.com
Email: igni@ckkme.com
f)
Felxigum of Atab
(Italy)
f)
Protect Middle Est.

Tel: 04-2651184
02-6126999
Fax: 04-2692823
f) Email:
protect@eim.ae
g)
Imper Flex 200
g)

Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
g)
h)
Dulas
h)
Duproof LLC
Tel: 04-8851212
Fax: 04-8851313
www.western.ae
Email:
mirza@western.ae
c) www.amc-protection.net
Email:
info@amcprotection.com
sales@amc-protection.com
Email:
beam@eim.ae
26
Appendix 3
www.esco.ae
h) www.duproof.com
Email:
duproof@emirates.net.ae
415
Protection
Board
for
Waterproofing membrane
a)
Polybit
a)
Tel: 04-3285261
Fax 04-3285262
a)
b)
Protection Course
of seal tight, W.R.
Meadows
b)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b) Email:
mail@alcouae.com
c)
Texmastic Int. Inc.

(USA)
c)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
c)
d)
Axter
d)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
d)
Email:
beam@eim.ae
e)
Cartonal
e)
Souki Trade, Dubai

Tel/Fax: 04-3605859
e)
Email:
Mr. Henry(Manager)
Mobile: 050-8849148
f)
Protectar
f)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
f)
www.esco.ae
27
www.western.ae
Email:
mirza@western.ae
www.esco.ae
Extruded Polystyrene
boards
a)
b)
Isoboard
Isofoam
ND
a)
Unifoam, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5338170
Fax: 06-5338169
a)
b)
Cloisall Chemical Co.

Tel: 04-3258877
02-6264111
Fax: 04-3258484
02-6264229
b) Email:
cloisall-gulf@cloisall.com
c)
Teejan Gen Trd. LLC

Esscofoam
Tel: 04-2674367
Fax: 04-2671518
of
Roofmate by Dow
(Saudi Arabia)
28
c)
Esscofoam
of
Kuwait
Only
Civil
defence
approved Fire Resistant
product to be used
Expanded
Polystyrene
boards
a)
STYROFOAM.
b)
ESCOFOAM
c) www.teejan.ae
Email: albert@teejan.ae
a)
Arabian Chemicals Insulation

Co. Ltd.
Tel: 04-8861233
Fax: 04-8861234
a) www.eajb.com
Email: acic@acicdxb.ae
29
Only Civil defense

product to be used
Appendix 3
b)
Teejan Gen Trd. LLC

Esscofoam
Tel: 04-2674367
Fax: 04-2671518
b) www.teejan.ae
Email: albert@teejan.ae
416
Rock Wool
Insulation
/Glass
wool
a)
Fujairah rockwool
b)
Foam Glass
a) Fujairah Rockwool Factory

PO Box 211, Fujairah
Tel: 09-2222297
Fax: 09-2222573
b)
www.rockwoolfujairah.ae
Email: frf@emirates.net.ae
Pittsburgh Corning Europe

info@foamglas.ae
P.O. Box 213345

Dubai - UAE
30
Only
Civil
defense
product to be used
Tel: 04-4347140
Fax: 04-4327109
Water Tank Waterproofing
a)
31
b)
a)
Specialized Industries, P.O

Box 1083, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5630748
Fax: 06-5635364
b)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
XYPEX
Nitocote
EP405
from FOSROC
a) Email:
info@specialised-ind.com
Mr. Nizar (Exec. Manager)
0505676903
b)
Email:
agf@fosroc.com
Liquid
waterproofing
membrane
&
Water
proofing wet areas
32
a)
Duraroof
Uniroof (UK)
by
b)
Liquiseal
Carlisle
by
c)
CIM-800 by (UK)
d)
Tremproof-60
Tremco (UK)
of
e)
Polytex-UR
Polybit
by
f)
a)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
a)
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
b)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b)
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
c)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
c)
Email:
beam@eim.ae
d)
Tremco Ltd. (ME)

Tel: 04-3470460
Fax: 04-3470242
d) www.stonecor.com
Email:
info@stonecor-me.com
e)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
e)
Email:
beam@eim.ae
f)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
f)
Email:
agf@fosroc.com
Nitoproof 600 from

FOSROC
Built up Membrane Roof
Coverings
33
BITUFA
Waterproofing
V.
The Netherlands
a)
Western International,
Tel: 04-3285261
Fax: 04-3285262
b)
BEAM Engineering
a)
Appendix 3
B.
a) www.western.ae
Email: mirza@western.ae
b)
Email:
417
b)

Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
AXTER
c)
c)
SIPLAST
SIPLAST GCC
(AMC Protection)
P.O. Box 47275, AUH
Tel: 02-6222820
Fax: 02-6222830
beam@eim.ae
c) www.amc-protection.com
Email:
info@amc-protection.com
Thermal
&
Moisture
protection System (Roof)
a)
a)
Combo Roof System
34
Vehicular
Traffic
Coating system
a)
Roof Care Co. L.L.C

Tel : 04-2679641
Fax: 04-2679642
P.O. Box 54087, AUH
Tel : 02-5587668
Fax: 02-5581211
a) www.roof-care.com
Email:
roofcare@emirates.net.ae
Deck
Flowcrete
a)
a)
Email :
vik.vithlani@flowcrete.
com
Flowcrete Middle East FZCO
The Flooring Technology

Centre 18th Floor, Suite
1806, JAFZA View 19
PO Box 17641, Jebel Ali Free
Zone Dubai, UAE
Mr. Vik Vithlani
Tel: +971 (4) 8864728
Fax : +971 (4) 8864582
Mobile: +971 (50) 7081421
b)
b)
Decseal System
35
c)
c)
Trafficguard UR
d)
Mastertop 1330
d)
e)
f)
g)
Appendix 3
CCW
5123
of
Carlisle
Coating
and Waterproofing
Mameco Int. USA

(Vulkem
Traffic
Deck
Coating
system)
3M
Contractor
e)
f)
Stirling Lloyd Polychem

Union Bank , King Street,
KNUTSFORD, Cheshire
WA16 6EF,
Tel: +44 01565 633111,
Fax:+44 01565 633555
Website:
www.stirlinglloyd.com
Mr. Daniel Griffiths
+971 50 8371036
+44 (0) 7966 689 473
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
BASF Chemicals Co.
Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
Schomburg Construction
Chemicals,
Tel: 06-5563383
Fax: 06-5563373
b)
Email :
info@stirlinglloyd.com
daniel.griffiths@stirlingl
loyd.com
c) Email:
agf@fosroc.com
d)
www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
e) Email:
mail@alcouae.com
f)
Email:
418
Products (ScotchClad
Coating
System)
g)
Tricon Trd. & Contracting

Tel: 06-5331301
Fax: 06-5337971
g) Email:
twic@emirates.net.ae
Acrylic Base Glass Fibre
Reiforced Trafficable Gel
a)
Trafficguard
(U.S.A.)
b)
Tretodeck
Tremco (UK)
c)
Scotchclad
FC
a)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
a) Email:
mail@alcouae.com
of
b)
Utmost Building Material

P.O. Box 45159, AUH
Tel: 02-6448222
Fax: 02-6447700
Tel: 04-3553883
Fax: 04-3553776
b) www.utmostgrp.com
Email:
utmost@emirates.net.ae
5893
c)
36
37
3M Gulf Ltd.,
Tel: 04-3670777
Fax: 04-3670998
a)
Arabian Profile Ltd. GRC

Division,
Tel: 06-5432624
Fax: 06-5432334
b)
Dubai International
Reinforced Plastics
Tel: 04-2858080
Fax: 04-2850956
c)
Prefab Building Ind.

Tel: 04-3330012
Fax: 04-3333219
d)
JANACO International
Tel: 04-3516010
Fax: 04-3516011
e)
Terrazzo Ltd.
Tel: 06-5333609
Fax: 06-5333058
f)
Extraco
Tel: 06-5432538
Fax: 06-5221381
g)
Fibre Flex Co.

P.O. Box 70705, AUH
Tel: 02-5515222
Fax: 02-5511154
h)
Notredame Fibreglass & Ind.

Marbles Est.
GRP Products
Appendix 3
c) www.3m.com
a) Email:
apl@emirates.net.ae
b) www.dirp.cc
Email: dirp@emirates.net.ae
c) Email:
pbitrg@emirates.net.ae
d) www.janacointl.com
Email:
janaco.intl@janacointl.com
e) www.terrrazoltd.com
Email: tearrazo@eim.ae
f) www.extraco.ae
Email: info@extraco.ae
g) www.fiberflexuae.ae
Email: info@fiberflexuae.ae
h) Email:
notredame@emirates.net.ae
419

Tel: 06-5386611
Fax: 06-5388856
i)
Fibrex Co.
P.O. Box 462, AUH
Tel: 02-5511462
Fax: 02-5513331
i) www.fibrex.ae
Email: fibrex@fibrex.ae
Liquid
Applied
Damp roofing
a)
b)
Faade
Adeprimaire
Siplast
d)
AMC Protection
Tel: 04-3416617
Fax: 04-3416618
b)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
b)
c)
MBT
Tel: 04-8818123
Fax: 04-8818755
c)
Email:
d)
Grace Services
Dubai, UAE
Tel: 04-3374484
Fax:04-3347104
d)
Email:
e)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
e)
Email:
agf@fosroc.com
f)
BEAM Engineering
Tel: 06-5592665
Fax: 06-5596680
f)
Email:
beam@eim.ae
g)
CKK Mid. East Est.,

Tel: 04-2824085
Fax: 04-2825365
g)
www.ckkme.com
igni@ckkme.ae
h)
Tel: 06-5332015
Fax: 06-5331425
h)
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
by
Sibelasto of SIBA
38
c)
a)
SBS
Bituminous
Membrane
Bitunil,
Sika,
Soprema
a) www.amc-protection.net
Email:
info@amc-protection.com
sales@amc-protection.com
Email:
mail@alcouae.com
39
Timber Joinery, Doors &

Cupboards
Appendix 3
a)
ABANOS Furniture Industries

& Decoration
Tel: 04-8996111
Fax: 04-8859966
a) www.abanos.ae
Email: mail@abanos.ae
b)
Leader Furniture
Tel: 04-3330143
Fax: 04-3330153
b) www.leadersfurniture.ae
Email:
leaderfj@emirates.net.ae
c)
Haseeb Rasoul Co. FZC.

Tel: 06-5260881
Fax: 06-5260882
c) www.haseebrasoul.ae
Email:
info@haseebrasoul.ae
420
Appendix 3
d)
Romeo Design
Tel: 04-8803773
07-2589353
Fax: 04-8803774
04-3744041
d)
www.romeointeriors.com
e)
ETA Joinery
Tel: 04-3400214
Fax: 04-3400896
e)
f)
Al Habtoor Carpentry
Tel: 04-3474015
Fax: 04-3473479
f) www.hlginteriors.com
Email: ahj@hlginteriors.com
g)
Ajman Korea Furniture

P.O. Box 631, Ajman
Tel: 06-7489191
Fax: 06-7489676
g) Email:
info@ajmankorea.com
ajmkor@eim.ae
h)
D & H Door & Hardware

Tel: 04-2668095
Fax: 04-2668096
h)
i)
Mughal Wood Works

Tel: 06-5333347
Fax: 06-5331847
i) www.mughalwood.com
Email:
mughalwf@hotmail.com
j)
Eldiar
P.O. Box 35077, AUH
Tel: 02-6814100
Fax: 02-6816556
02-6818399
j) www.eldiar.com
Email:
eldiar@emirates.net.ae
k)
Laing O Rourke Al
Naboodah-Joinery
Tel: 04-3472475
04-3393939
Fax: 04-3393955
k) Email:
joinery@laingorourke.ae
l)
Emirates Development
Industry Co.
P.O. Box 44014, AUH
Tel: 02-5507999
02-6763982
Fax: 02-5507997
l) Email:
info@edico.ae
www.alphastarwoodjoine
ry.com
Email: joinery@etamne.com
Email:
info@dnh.ae
m) Federal Building Ind.

Tel: 04-3475119
Fax: 04-3471432
m) www.awrostamani.com
Email:
n)
Khansaheb Joinery Div.

Tel: 06-5340479
04-2857251
Fax: 06-5340489
04-2857539
n) www.khansaheb.ae
Email: office@kcejoinery.ae
o)
Alpha Star
o) Email:
farooq@alphastartrading.ae
421
Tel: 04-3307263
Fax: 04-3306242
p)
Al Shafar Interiors
Tel: 04-8853273
Fax: 04-8853272
q)
Ugarit Furniture
P.O. Box 286, Dubai
Tel: 04-3405551
Fax: 04-3405552
p)
www.alshafarinteriors.co
m
Email:
contact@alshafarinteriors.co
m
q) Email:
ugarit@ugarit.ae
Architectural Ironmongery
a)
a)
TESA Middle East

Tel: 04-2045701
Fax: 04- 2045702
b)
Haroon Co.
Tel: 06-5337338
Fax: 06-5331819
b) www.haroonco.com
Email:
haroonco@eim.ae
Euro Level
c)
Silver Shore Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-2628880
Fax: 04-2627775
c) Email:
sales@sstcuae.com
Dryad Simplan, UK
d)
Al Kamda General Trdg.

Tel: 04-2664200
Fax: 04-2662960
e)
Al Omran Trading
Tel: 06-5336977
06-5624860
Fax: 06-5330294
TESA SPAIN
b) OGRO, Germany
Newman Tonks, UK
c)
d)
HP +
e)
Columbo (italy)
f)
UNION
g)
VBH
h)
Glutz
a)
r.manuel@tesa.ae
d)
www.alkamda.com
Email:
info@alkamda.com
e) Email:
alomransharjah@gmail.com
40
f)
Al Moajil Trading
Tel: 04-3355587
Fax: 04-3342703
g)
VBH Middle East Fzco

Tel: 04-8870822
Fax: 04-8870833
g) Email:
susan@vbhme.com

Tel: 04-2668095
Fax: 04-2668096
h) Email:
info@dnh.ae
h)
i)
i)
James
Format
j)
KABA
Gibbons
j)
Appendix 3
Coast to coast Gen. Trading

LLC.
Tel: 04-8852818
Fax: 04-8852819
Kaba FZE
Tel: 04-5015636
Fax: 04-5015637
f)
www.almoajilhardware.
com
Email:
bushra@malmoajilhardware.
com
i)
Email:
j) www.kaba.com
Email:
info@kmdkaba.com
422
PC Rate
Natural
Stone
Slab
Cladding /Features
Proprietary
Mechanical
Fixing system (Crimping)
41
a) ABL industries
FRANCE
b) HALFEN Ltd
Dunstable, Beds - LU5 4TP
c) Fisher
Fixing
Systems
Hilhercroft Industrial Est.
a)
Hilti Inc.
Tel: 04-8060300
Fax: 04-8854404
a)
b)
Eurolink
Tel: 04-2622924
Fax: 04-2685338
Email:
ae.contactus@hilti.com
Aluminum Works & Curtain
Walling
a)
Schuco
b)
ESC
c)
Reynaers
d)
Vistawall
a)
ALICO Aluminum & Light

Industries Co
Tel: 06-5582444
Fax: 06-5384999
a)
b)
ESC Aluminium Systems

HP001,Intercontinental
Residential, Marsa Plaza,
Dubai Festival city Dubai
Tel: +971 (4) 2515656
Fax: +971 (4) 2515800
b) Email:
vasiliki.kakari@esc700.com
c)
Reynaers Middle East

www.reynaers.com
Tel : +973 (17) 877266
Fax : +973 (17) 877299
Mobile : +971 (55) 1025956
d)
42
e)
Technal
e)
f)
Hartmann
g)
h)
Installux Aluminum
h)
i)
Al Abbar
i)
Appendix 3
Union Industries INC.

P.O. Box 820, Dubai
Tel: 04-3381715
Fax: 04-3382516
Folcra
f)
g)
Leaders Aluminum & Glass

Industries
Tel: 06-5345543
Fax: 06-5345336
Folcra Beach Industries

P.O. Box 46536, AUH
Tel: 02-5510888
Fax: 02-5511512
Thomas Bennett Gulf
Tel: 04-3381919
04-8121960
Fax: 04-3381101
04-8848059
Alumco LLC
Tel: 04-8851415
Fax: 04-8851416
www.alicouae.com
Email:
alico.sales@alicoalum.net
c) Email:
aws.salih@reyaers.com
d) Email:
info@leaders4.ae
e)
www.unionindustriesllc.c
om
Email:
info@unionindustries.ae
f) Email:
info@folcrabeach.com
g) www.tbgdubai.com
Email:
info@tbgdubai.com
h)
www.alumco.ae
Email:
alumco@alumco.ae
i)
Email:
info@alabbargroup.com
Al Abbar Aluminum
423

Tel: 04-3331362
Fax: 04-3331283
43
a)
Thomas Bell-Wright Int.

Consultants
Tel: 04-3332692
Fax: 04-3332693
a) Email:
tomb-w@bell-wright.com
www.bell-wright.com
b)
GHD Global Pty Ltd.

P.O. Box 45921, AUH
Tel: 02-6968700
Fax: 02-4472915
b) www.ghd.com
Email: abumail@ghd.com
c)
Bureau Veritas Int.

Tel: 04-3453560
02-6444920
Fax: 04-3452391
Curtain Walling
Consultants & Testing
c) www.bureauveritas.com
Email:
bveritas@emirates.net.ae
Curtain Walling (Out Door
Wood Covering System).
44
a)
a)
Parklex 1000
PARKLEX Middle East,

Tel: 04-6091419
Fax: 04-6091423
a)
Email:
parkflex@parkflex.com
Structural
Assemblies
(Curtain Walling
Fixed System)
a)
Glass
Al Abbar Aluminum
Tel: 04-3331362
Fax: 04-3331283
b)
Juma Al Majid East Ltd., P.O.

Box 3762, Dubai
Tel: 04-3477555
Fax: 04-3477888
a) Email:
Seele
45
b)
a)
Spider
Pilkington Planar
Glazing System
b)
Metal profile/Flat Sheet
Cladding / Covering
(Fire
Rated
Aluminum
Composite Panels)
a)
Leaders Aluminum & Glass

Industries
Tel: 06-5345343
Fax: 06-5345336
a)
Email:
info@leaders4.ae
b)

Industries Co
Tel: 06-5582444
Fax: 06-5384999
b)
www.alicouae.com
Email:
a)
Al-Coplla
b)
Renobond
Panels)
c)
Alucobond A2
c)
ETA MELCO
P.O. 71058, Dubai
Tel: 04-2359595
Fax: 04-2725121
c)
Email:
etamelco@etamelco.com
d)
ETA (US Make)
d)
United Aluminum
Tel: 04-8858066
Fax: 04-8855389
d)
(PE
46
Appendix 3
Email:
info@ualdubai.com
424
e)
Alubond
f)
Alucobond
g)
Britol
e)
Ali Moosa & Sons Contracting

(Aluminum Division)
Tel: 06-5311533
06-5311444
Fax: 06-5311522
06-5311135
f)
Bin Lahej Contracting

Maintenance (Aluminum)
Tel: 04-3970016
Fax: 04-3971558
g)
Only
Civil
defence
approved material to used
h)
Bosco Aluminum
Tel: 04-2862305
Fax: 04-2862306
P.O. Box 32211, RAK
Tel: 07-2446629
Fax: 07-2446879
Zebian Aluminum
Tel: 06-5432540
Fax: 06-5432491
e)
www.ams.ae
Email: amsgroup@ams.ae
f)
www.mmlahej.com
Email:
g)
www.boscogrp.com
Email:
bosco@boscogrp.com
h)
Email:
info@zebian.ae
Steel Doors & Steel Frames
Note: List steel doors /
Frames suppliers is for
guidance. Fire rated steel
doors will be accepted only
if approved by Ministry of
Interior Dubai Civil
Defence
a)
i) Curries (USA)
Apex (USA)
b)
Martin
(UK)
Guardian (UK)
a)
Bin Ghurair Trading LLC

Tel: 04-8802008
Fax: 04-8801700
a) www.mei-uae.com
Email:
contact@mei-uae.com
b)
Prometal
Tel: 04-8804888
Fax: 04-8804884
b) www.prometal.ae
Email:
prometal@emirates.net.ae
c)
Rimal Intl Trading

Tel: 04-2660150
Fax: 04-2660157
c) www.alkuhaima.ae
Email: rimal@alkuhaima.ae
d)
Ram Metal Industries

Tel: 04-3472210
Fax: 04-3473865
d) www.rammetal.com
Email:
contactus@rammetal.com
Roberts
47
c)
Al Kuhaimi Metal
Doors
(Saudi
Arabia)
e)
TASK FZE LLC

Tel: 06-5572786
Fax: 06-5572411
e) www.taskfzc.com
Email: task@eim.ae
d)
Corgard, Dubai
f)

Tel: 04-2668095
Fax: 04-2668096
f)
e)
CECO
Products
g)
Bin Dasmal Doors Est.,

Tel: 04-8067600
Fax: 04-8067601
g) www.bindasmal.com
Email:
door@bindasmal.com
h)
f)
Metalco
Arabia)
Bakhit Doors
Tel: 04-2994126
h) www.bakhitdoors.com
Email:
albakhit@emirates.net.ae
Appendix 3
Door
(Saudi
Email:
info@dnh.ae
425
Fax: 04-2994616
g)
Daybar (USA)
h)
Ambico Canada
i)
Al Waheedh Metal Doors &

Windows
Tel: 04-3514361
Fax: 04-3550322
i) Email:
althaleea@gmail.com
j)
Lakshmi Metal Tech LLC

PO Box 119867, Dubai
Tel 050 9204011
Fax 04-3386272
j)
k)
Door Systems Inc.

2413 S. Broadway St. Sata
Ana. CA, 92707, USA
Tel +1 714 2857100
Fax +1 714 2587171
www.trinityholdings.com
Email:
trinity@trinityholdings.com
k)
www.doorsysinc.com
Email:
jeff@doorsysinc.com
michael@doorsysinc.com
Aluminum
Strip/Sheet
Covering/ Flashings
(Standing
Seam
Roof
Cladding)
a)
Tiger Profile
b)
ZIPLOCK
c)
KAL-ZIP
a)
Tiger Profiles & Insualtion

LLC
PO Box 23499
Tel 06-5338449
Fax 06-5336673
a)
b)
Rigidal Industries LLC

Tel: 04-8854232
Fax: 04-8854223
b)
www.rigidal.com
Email:
rigidal@rigidal.com
c)
Tiger Steel Industries

Tel: 04-2671015
Fax: 04-2671248
c)
Email:
info@nimrsteel.com
48
www.tigerprofiles.com
Access Panels
a)
Mac Al Gurg Builders

Merchants,
P.O. Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
04-2661291
Fax: 02-6720025
04-2691067
Profab
b)
Majid Bukatara Building

Material LLC
Tel: 04-3371710
Fax: 04-3371999
b) Email:
mbbmdxb@mbbm.ae
c)
Frost
c)

Merchants,
P.O. Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
04-2661291
Fax: 02-6720025
04-2691067
c)
www.macalgurg.com
Email:
d)
Cierra
d)
Tel: 04-3516010
Fax: 04-3516011
d) www.janacointl.com
Email:
a)
Nystrom
b)
49
Appendix 3
a)
www.macalgurg.com
Email:
426
e)
KHS Austria
e)
Al Majaz Trading,
Tel: 06-5591940
Fax: 06-5591941
e) Email:
almajaz@emirates.net.ae
f)
Super Alpro
f)
Al Falah Building Materials &

Trdg. Co.
Tel: 04-3807355
Fax: 04-3807366
f) www.falahco.com
Email: ponti@emirates.net.ae
zeki.farra@point-int.com
g)
Cendrex (Canada)
g)
Best Products Trdg. Co,

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-2856742
Fax: 04-2856743
g)
This company number is

for
Al
Jamashi
Constructions
Fire Hose Reel & Landing
Valve Cupboard Doors
a)
a)

Merchants,
P.O. Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
04-2661291
Fax: 02-6720025
04-2691067
a) www.macalgurg.com
Email:
b)
Dafoos Fire Protection Tech

Service
Tel: 04-2694099
04-3471388
Fax: 04-2694088
04-3471390
b) www.dafoos.com
Email: dafoos@dafoos.com
Watrous (FC Frost

Ltd.)
50
c)
New Age Co. LLC

Tel: 04-3573500
Fax: 04-3573700
c) www.newage.ae
Email:
newage@emirates.net.ae
Glass
a)
b)
VIRACON,
VISTEON-FORD
Pilkington (North American)
51
a)
Gutal Trading
Tel: 04-2680477
Fax: 04-2629236
a) www.gutal.com
Email: gutal@gutal.com
b)
INTRACO (UAE) Ltd.

Tel: 04-8814333
Fax: 04-8813320
b) www.intracousa.com
Email:
intraco@emirates.net.ae
c)
Emirates Glass,
Tel: 04-3471515
Fax: 04-3471440
c) www.emiratesglass.com
Email:
d)
Asia Guard, Dubai

Tel: 04-3411410
d)
e)
Merint
P.O. 29339, Dubai
Tel: 04-3583565
Fax: 04-3584575
e) www.merint.com
Email: merint@merint.com
Glaverbel
c)
EMICOOL
d)
Guardian Glass
e)
Saint Gobain
Email:
52
Automatic Glazed Doors

GEZE Middle East FZE
Appendix 3
a.alsharo@geze.com
427
GEZE
3rd Floor - 301

Tecom, Al Barsha, Dubai
Tel 04- 8833112
Fax 04- 8833240
Dorma Gulf,
Dorma Controls FZE
P.O. Box 17268, Jebel Ali Fzc
Tel: 04-8020400
Fax: 04-8869101
04-8869100
www.dorma-gulf.com
Email:
dorma@dormagulf.com
53
a)
Emirates Building System

(EBS)
Tel: 04-8851122
Fax: 04-8851211
a) www.ebsl.com
Email: ebsdxb@emirates.net.ae
b)
Amana Contracting & Steel

Building Co.
Tel: 04-8854448
Fax: 04-8859030
c)
Rasana Eng. Ind.

Tel: 06-5360890
Fax: 06-5360891
d)
Galadari Eng. Work Ltd.

P.O. Box 355, Dubai
Tel: 04-2667318
Fax: 04-2662151
d) Email:
gew@galadarieng.ae
e)

Tel: 04-2671015
Fax: 04-2671248
e) Email:
info@nimrsteel.com
f)
ETA
Tel: 04-3471022
Fax: 04-3471077
f) www.etamech.com
Email: info@etamech.com
g)
Cleveland Bridge &

Engineering ME
Tel: 04-8835551
Fax: 04-8835416
g) Email:
contract@clevelandbridge.co.a
e
h)
Eversendai Engineering
Tel: 04-2673738
Fax: 04-2673663
h) www.eversendai.com
Email:
sendai@emirates.net.ae
i)
Murray & Roberts Contractors

ME LLC
Tel: 04-3728500
Fax: 04-3211011
i) www.murrob.com
Email: info@murrob.ae
j)
Excel Industrial Co. Ltd.,

Tel: 06-7430320
Fax: 06-7431074
06-7435745
j) www.excel-uae.com
Email:
enquiry@excel-uae.com
b)
www.amanabuildings.co
m
c) www.rasanaeng.ae
Email:
rasanaeg@emirates.net.ae
Structural Steel Works
Appendix 3
428
k)
Arabian International Est.

Tel: 06-7421397
Fax: 06-7421490
k) Email:
realestate-mngr@uginbest.ae
54
a)
Conmix
Tel: 06-5314155
04-3472225
Fax: 06-5314332
04-3472180
a)
b)
Terraco UAE Ltd Co.

P.O Box 1672, UAQ
Tel: 06-7662425
Fax: 06-7663929
b)
Plaster, Render ,
Roughcast Coating
www.conmix.com
Email:
commix@conmix.com
www.terraco.com
Email:
terrace@terraco.ae
Plaster Accessories, Mesh,
Angle Beads Stop Beads,
Etc.GI/SS
a)
Catnic
b)
Expamet
c)
d)
a)
b)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
c)
Metal Expansion Factory,

Tel: 04-8992444
Fax: 04-8992455
Metex
Corner Core (UK)

d)
55
e)
TMI
e)
f)
SFSP
f)
g)

Merchants,
P.O. Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
04-2661291
Fax: 02-6720025
04-2691067
Renderplast
g)
Al Semsam Bldg. Mat.,

P.O. Box 325, Dubai
Tel: 04-2698464
Fax: 04-2696673
Technical Metal Ind.
P.O. Box 41558, AUH
Tel: 02-5502025
Fax: 02-5502024
Issam Kabbani Tradings
(Unitech)
Tel: 04-8847275
04-2856031
Fax: 04-8847278
Majid Bukatara Bldg. Mat.
Tel: 04-3371710
Fax: 04-3371999
a)
www.macalgurg.com
Email:
b) www.esco.ae
c) www.gentex.ae
Email: metex@gentex.ae
d)
www.algurg.com
Email:
alsemsam@emirates.net.ae
e) www.tmi-co.com
Email: tmi@tmico.ae
f) Email:
unitech.uae@ikkgroup.com
g) Email:
mbbmdxb@mbbm.ae
56
Light Wight Concrete
Appendix 3
a)
Conmix
Tel: 06-5314155
a)
www.conmix.com
Email:
commix@conmix.com
429
04-3472225
Fax: 06-5314332
04-3472180
a) Cormix Middle East Dubai
Tel: 04-3374484
Fax: 04-3347104
Soduim Silicate
Floor Hardner
a)
Not
existing,
maybe
incorrect spelling might
be Conmix also
b)
www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
DPH
b)
b)
a)
BASF Chemicals Co.

P.O. Box 37127, Dxb
Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
Master Top
c)
Falcon Chemical Ltd.

Tel: 04-8801444
Fax: 04-8801717
c)
57
www.falconchemicals.co
m
Email:
inquiry@falconchemicals.com
c)
Tuffseal
d)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
d)
d)
Nitofloor Lithurin
e)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
e) www.esco.ae
e)
BCR Liquid Dust

Proofer & Hardner
Concrete
Levelling Compounds
a)
a)
Cormix Middle East Dubai

Tel: 04-3374484
Fax: 04-3347104
a)
b)
ARDEX Middle East Fze

P.O. Box 262746, Jebel Ali,
Dubai
Tel: 04-8137844
Fax: 04-8137814
b)
c)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
c)
d)
BASF Chemicals Co.

Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
d)
www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
e)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
e)
www.esco.ae
Rezex R511
b)
Nitoflor
GP
c)
Master Top 503
leveltop
58
d)
BCR
Levelling
Compound
from
BCR (UK)
www.ardex.co.uk
Email:
msevak@ardex.ae
Epoxy Resin Based Coating
System
59
a)
Appendix 3
Flowcrete
a)
Flowcrete Middle East FZCO
The Flooring Technology

Centre 18th Floor, Suite
1806, JAFZA View 19
PO Box 17641, Jebel Ali Free
a)
Email
:
vik.vithlani@flowcrete.co
m
430
Zone Dubai, UAE

Mr. Vik Vithlani
Tel: +971 (4) 8864728
Fax : +971 (4) 8864582
Mobile: +971 (50) 7081421
b)
Mastertop
Plus
1210
c)
Nitoflor FC- 150
b)
BASF Chemicals Co.

Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
c)
Al Gurg Fosroc,
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2858606
Fax: 04-2854188
d)
d)
Sikaguard 62
e)
GEAP International,
Tel: 04-2859450
Fax: 04-2857498
FOSROC Intl. Ltd.
P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2039699
Fax: 04-2854188
P.O. Box 27971, AUH
Tel: 02-6731779
Fax: 02-6731449
b)
www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
c)
Email: agf@forsroc.com
d)
www.geapgroup.com
Email:
e) www.fosroc.com
abudhabi@fosroc.com
60
Stone / Marble Granite
a)
Al Naboodah Gypsum &

Marble products
Tel: 04-2673344
Fax: 04-2673026
a) www.alnaboodah.com
Email: angmpdxb@eim.ae
b)
Al Habtoor Marbles
Tel: 04-2859100
Fax: 04-2859 103
b) www.hlginteriors.com
c)
Carrara Mid East Industrial

Co. (LLC)
Tel: 04-2858277
Fax: 04-2859774
c) www.carrara-me.com
Email:
carrara@carrara-me.com
d)
Terrazzo Ltd.
Tel: 06-5333609
Fax: 06-5333058
d) www.terrazoltd.com
Email: terrazzo@eim.ae
Ceramic/Porcelain
Tiles/Glazed Tiles
61
Appendix 3
a)
Nexus International LLC

Tel: 04-2627752
Fax: 04-2627838
b)

Trdg. Co.
Tel: 04-3807355
Fax: 04-3807366
a) www.nexusintl.com
Email:
nexus4@emirates.net.ae
b) www.falahco.com
Email: point@emirates.net.ae
431
c)
Trade House Ltd.

Tel: 06-5593745
Fax: 06-5596357
d)
Italco International
Tel: 04-2853135
Fax: 04-2857444
e)
RAK Ceramics
P.O. Box 4714, RAK
Tel: 07-2445046
Fax: 07-2445270
e) www.rakceramics.com
Email: office@rakceram.com
f)
Nama Trading Co. LLC

Tel: 04-3497474
Fax: 04-3497472
f) www.namatrading.com
Email:
namedxb@emirates.net.ae
g)
Al Khaleej Ceramics
Tel: 04-8801888
Fax: 04-8801686
g) www.grannitto.com
Email: N/A
h)
Darwish Trading
Tel: 06-5337008
Fax: 06-5337959
h) www.darwishgroup.com
Email: dtskds@eim.ae
i)
Peninsula Technical Supplies

P.O. Box 44978, AUH
Tel: 02-6426453
Fax: 02-6426569
j)

Trdg. Co.
Tel: 04-3807355
Fax: 04-3807366
Iris, GRANITI of Italy
Granitto
j)
Al Khaleej Ceramics
PO Box 14230,Dubai
Tel: 04-8801888
Fax: 04-8801686
c) www.tradehouseltd.com
Email:
tradehse@emirates.net.ae
d) www.italco.ae
Email:
management@italco.ae
i) Email:
sunil_pts@hotmail.com
j) www.falahco.com
Email:
point@emirates.net.ae
k) www.grannitto.com
Email:
Appendix 3
432
Adhesive & Grout for floor

and Wall Tiling
a)
b)
BAL
Adesives
East
Saudia Arabia
62
c)
d)
a)
IBS Mapei
Building No.5, 2nd Floor,
Green Community - Dubai
Investment Park Dubai
Tel +971 4 8156666
Fax +971 4 8156655
b)
Alshaya Trading Co.

Tel: 04-6074100
04-2629100
Fax: 04-2692165
c)
Laticrete International Middle

East
P.O. Box 86028, RAK
Tel: 07-2446396
Fax: 07-2445915
d)

Trdg. Co.
Tel: 04-3807355
Fax: 04-3807366
MAPEI
Norcros
Middle
Laticrete
International
USA
INC,
Nicobond
a)
www.mapei.ae
Email : info@ibs-mapei.ae
b) www.alshayatrading.com
Email:
tilesandmore@alshayauae.ae
c) www.laticreterak.com
Email:
enquiry@laticreterak.com
d) www.falahco.com
Email:
ponti@emirates.net.ae
zeki.farra@poin-int.com
a)
63
Terrazzo Tiling
Terrazzo Ltd.
Tel: 06-5333609
Fax: 06-5333058
a) www.terrazoltd.com
Email: terrazzo@eim.ae
Gypsum Tile Ceiling
a)
Lindner-Depa Interiors L.L.C

Tel: 04-88412135
Fax: 04-8841970
a)
Danogips
b)
Ideal Technical Service,

Tel: 04-3335245
Fax: 04-3335244
b) Email:
its786@emirates.net.ae
British Gypsum
c)
Prefab Building Ind.

Tel: 04-3330012
Fax: 04-3333219
c) Email:
pbitrg@emirates.net.ae
d)
Projects & Supplies LLC

Tel: 04-2898828
Fax: 04-2898829
d) Email:
mailbox@projectsandsupplies.c
om
e)
Danogips Middle East

Tel: 04-8812281
Fax: 04-8812151
f)
DECO Emirates Est.

Tel: 04-8854660
Fax: 04-8854305
a)
Lindner
b)
c)
64
Appendix 3
info(at)lindnerdepa.ae
e) Email:
www.danoline.com
f) www.decoemirates.com
Email:
info@decoemirates.com
433
g)
Al Naboodah Gypsum &

Marble products
Tel: 04-2673344
Fax: 04-2673026
g) www.alnaboodah.com
Email: angmpdxb@eim.ae
h) Knauf
h)
Knauf LLC
Tel: 04-3377170
Fax: 04-3349659
h) www.knauf.ae
Email: info@knauf.ae
i) Boral
i)
Boral ME,
Tel: 04-3339666
Fax: 04-3336028
i) www.boral.com
Email: evelyn@boraluae.ae
Calcuim silicate
Ceilings
a) Supalux from Cape
Boards & Promat
Ltd. (UK)
a)
Mac Al Gurg
PO Box 672, Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
Fax: 04-2691067
PO Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
Fax: 02-6720025
Email:
b)
Promina
from
Promat
(only
European origin)
b)
Ideal Technical Service,

Tel: 04-3335245
Fax: 04-3335244
b) Email:
Its786@emirates.net.ae
c)
Armstrong
c)
Speedwell Dcor
P.O. Box 42, Dubai
Tel: 04-3390111
Fax: 04-3381617
c) Email:
speedwell@emirates.net.ae
d)
Trilite
d)
Best Products Trd. Co.,

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-2856742
Fax: 04-2856743
65
d)
This company number

is belongs to jawashi
constructions
Cement Boards/Tile
a)
a)
Arab Technical Est.

Tel: 04-8853313
Fax: 04-8853315
a) www.ate.ae
Email: info@ate.ae
b)
Oceanic Gen. Trdg. LLC.,

Tel: 04-3936855
Fax: 04-3936844
b) www.ogtllc.ae
Email: oceanic@ogtllc.ae
c)
Tel: 04-3516010
Fax: 04-3516011
c) www.janacointl.com
Email:
Everite by Nutec
66
c)
Maranit
Appendix 3
434
Thermal Insulation
Cladding
67
a)
a) ECO THERM
Terraco UAE Ltd.

Tel: 04-3262699
Fax: 04-3262733
a) www.terraco.com
Email:
specifications.dubai@terraco.ae
Paints (Internal, External &
Thermoplastic)
a)
Jotun U.A.E., LLC

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-3395000
Fax: 04-3380666
a) www.jotun.com/me
Email: csd@jotundxb.ae
a)
Jotun
b)
National
b)
National Paints
Tel: 06-5340111
Fax: 06-5340222
b) www.national-paints.com
Email:
npfcl@national-paints.com
c)
Caparol
c)
Caparol LLC.,
Tel: 04-3473538
Fax: 04-3474256
c) www.caparol.ae
Email: info@caparol.ae
d)
Kansai
d)
Al Omran Trading
Tel: 06-5336977
06-5624860
Fax: 06-5330294
d) Email:
alomransharjah@gmail.com
e)
Berger
e)
Berger Paints Emirates

Tel: 04-3391000
Fax: 04-3391322
e) www.bergeronline.com
Email:
bergrdxb@emirates.net.ae
f)
f)
Wall Glaze
Cloisall Chemical Co.

Tel: 04-3258877
02-6264111
Fax: 04-3258484
02-6264229
f) Email:
cloisall-gulf@cloisall.com
g)
Hempel
g)
Hempels Marine Paints

Tel: 06-5310140
Fax: 06-5310141
g) www.hempel.com
Email: hempel@eim.ae
h)
Crown
h)
Hussain Trading Ent. P.O.

Box 7466, Dubai
Tel: 04-2249494
Fax: 04-3378229
h)
i)
i)
Sigma
Sigma Paints S.A. Ltd., P.O.

Box 52781, Dubai
Tel: 04-8856700
Fax: 04-8856033
j)
Dulux
k)
BNP
68
Appendix 3
Email:
i)
www.sigmapaints.com
Email:
arno.meister@sigmapaints.com
j)
Al Gurg Leighs Paints,

Tel: 06-5343919
Fax: 06-5343983
j) www.ahltuae.com
Email: enquiries@agp.ae
k)
Royal Paints,
P.O. Box Sharjah
Tel: 06-5775876
Fax: 06-5774876
k)
Email:
435
l)
l)
SIPCO
Caitel Building Technology,

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-3391844
Fax: 04-3391855
l)
Email:
Anti-Fungus Paint
a)
a) DNT
69
Royal Paints,
P.O. Box Sharjah
Tel: 06-5775876
Fax: 06-5774876
Woodwork and Metalwork
Paint
a)
Jotun U.A.E., LLC

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-3395000
Fax: 04-3380666
a) www.jotun.com/me
b)
National Paints
Tel: 06-5340111
Fax: 06-5340222
b)
Jotun Paint
70
b)
a)
NC Putty
www.nationalpaints.com
Email:
npfcl@national-paints.com
Powder Coating
a)
Jotun
Coating
a)
Jotun U.A.E., LLC

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-3395000
Fax: 04-3380666
b)
Arabian Profile Co Ltd.

Tel: 06-5432624
Fax: 06-5432334
c)
Sipco Specialist Products

P.O. Box 16111, RAK
Tel: 07-2046419
04-3391844
Fax: 07-2041010
c) www.sipcospb.com
Email:
sipcospecialistproducts@rakfzb
c.ae
d)
Al Telaa Technical Industries

Co.
Tel: 04-3384996
Fax: 04-3385002
d) www.altela.com
Email: altela@emirates.net.ae
Powder
71
a) www.jotun.com/me
b) Email:
apl@emirates.net.ae
Sealants
a)
TREMCO,
USA
a)
Tremco Ltd. (ME)

Tel: 04-3470460
Fax: 04-3470242
b)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
b) www.esco.ae
c)
Sipco Specialist Product

P.O. Box 16111, RAK
Tel: 07-2046419
04-3391844
Fax: 07-2041010
c) www.sipcospb.com
Email:
sipcospecialistproducts@rakfzb
c.ae
Slough,
72
b)
Appendix 3
Dow Corning
a) www.stonecor.com
Email:
436
Fire Retardant Treatment
a)
a)
Zain Al Abedin Al Khajah

P.O. Box 364, Dubai
Tel: 04-2221561
Fax: 04-2274020
b)
Dicotech LLC
Tel: 04-3471581
Fax: 04-3470580
c)
Fire Tech Services (FTS)

P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-2214213
Fax: 04- 2212919
Sadoline, Denmark
73
a) www.zainkaja.com
Email:
zainkaja@emirates.net.ae
b) Email:
dicotech@eim.ae
c) Email:
firetech@emirates.net.ae
Sanitary Ware, Fittings and
Accessories
74
a)
Rahma Abdulla Al Shamsi

Tel: 04-2666429
Fax: 04-2693407
a) Email:
info@hrshamsi.com
a)
Roca
b)
Bradley
Corporation
b)
c)
Dyson Airblade
c)
d)
Ideal Standard
d)
Sultan Bin Rashid,

(SULTACO),
Tel: 04-3385929
Fax: 04-3391842
e)
American Standard
e)
Hammam Trading Co.

PO Box 9289, Dubai
Tel: 04-2665210
Fax: 04-2712910
f)
Kohler
f)
United Supplies Est

Tel: 04-2687755
Fax: 04-2688656
f) www.hassan-abul.com
Email:
info@unitedsupplies.ae
g)
Duravit
g)
Faraidooni Trading Co
P.O. Box 3, Dubai
Tel: 04-2222947
Fax: 04-2214660
g) Email:
ftcdxb@emirates.net.ae
h)
Grohe
h)
Alshaya Trading Co.

Tel: 04-6074100
04-2629100
Fax: 04-2692165
i)
Bobrick
i)
Mac Al Gurg
PO Box 672, Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
Fax: 04-2691067
PO Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
Fax: 02-6720025
Appendix 3
b)
www.bradleycorp.com
c)
www.dysonairblade.com
d) www.sultaco.ae
Email:
secretary@sultaco-uae.com
e) www.al-majid.com
Email: jumacom@eim.ae
h) www.alshayatrading.com
Email:
i) www.macalgurg.com
Email:
437
75
j)
Watrous
j)
Khalid Al Mohaisen Trading

Tel: 04-2665536
Fax: 04-2668770
j) www.almohaisin.com
Email:
Info.dxb@almohaisin.com
k)
Ottone Meloda
k)
Al Ghandi Building
Materials Co.
Tel: 04-2660045
Fax: 04-2685233
k) Email:
agbmc@emirates.net.ae
l)
Jacob Delafon
l)
Faraidooni Trading Co
P.O. Box 3, Dubai
Tel: 04-2222947
Fax: 04-2214660
l) Email:
ftcdxb@emirates.net.ae
m) Twyfords, UK
m) Al Futtaim Engineering
P.O. Box 159, Dubai
Tel: 04-2650999
Fax: 04-2650676
m) www.al-futtaim.com
Email:
afengineering@alfuttaim.ae
n)
TOTO
n)
n) www.rakceramics.com
Email: office@rakceram.com
o)
RAK
RAK Ceramics
P.O. Box 4714, RAK
Tel: 07-2445046
Fax: 07-2445270
a)
Al Abbar Aluminum
Tel: 04-3331362
Fax: 04-3331283
a) Email:
b)

Industries Co
Tel: 06-5582444
Fax: 06-5384999
b) www.alicouae.com
Email:
c)
Thomas Bennett Gulf

Tel: 04-3381919
04-8121960
Fax: 04-3381101
04-8848059
c) www.tbgdubai.com
Email: info@tbgdubai.com
d)
Becon Aluminum
Tel: 06-5319223
Fax: 06-5319224
d) Email:
beconmwf@althamerholdings.c
om
e)
Al Telaa Technical Industries

Co.
Tel: 04-3384996
Fax: 04-3385002
Balustrades
e) www.altela.com
Email:
altela@emirates.net.ae
Faade Cleaning System
a) Transwill
76
Appendix 3
a)
TRANSWILL ENGINEERING
L.L.C.
P.O. BOX 231725, DUBAI
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Tel: +971 4 34 23 880
Fax: +971 4 34 23 881
a) www.transwill.com
Email:
info@transwill.com
transwil@eim.ae
438
b)
Ileri Makina
b)
Danway,
Tel: 04-3473700
Fax: 04-3473232
c)
Cox
c)
EW Cox ME LLC
Tel: 04-5118200
Fax: 04-5118300
d)
MANNTECH
(Germany)
d)
Manntech Middle East

Tel: 04-3419933
Fax: 04-3419944
e)
Secalt
(Luxembourg)
e)
Tass Industries Wall

Tel: 06-7407300
Fax: 06-7408105
f)
Koltek
f)
Xsplatforms Middle East,

Tel: 04-8872488
Fax: 04-8872499
g)
Lalesse
(Netherlands)
g)
Juma Al Majid Est. (Elevator

& Moving system Div.)
Tel: 04-2851145
Fax: 04-2857890
h)
XSPlatforms
(Netherlands)
ASEA
Eurogondolas
(Spain)
Refuse chutes
a) Ostermeier (Gmbh)
(Jabel ali)
b) www.danwayllc.com
Email: info@danwayllc.com
c) www.coxgomyl.com
Email: dubai@coxgomyl.com
d) www.affan-uae.com
Email:
imran@manntech.ae
e) www.tassindustries.org
Email:
info@tassindustries.com
f) www.xsplatforms.com
Email: dean@xsplatforms.ae
g) www.al-majid.com
Email:
emsalarabia@gmail.com
i)
a)
Ostermeier Fze.
Tel: 04-2828233
Fax: 04-2828232
b)
Hardall (UK)
b)
Chab Trading L.L.C.

Tel: 04-3329248
04-3290149
Fax: 04-3329251
02-6454882
b)
c)
Chab
c)
Fikree Pipe LLC.,

Tel: 04-3377911
Fax: 04-3375391
c) Email:
fikreegr@eim.ae
d)
Hardall (UK)
d)
Hi-Tech Mech. Works

Tel: 04-3384433
Fax: 04-3384959
d)
e)
Hi-Tech (Local)
e)
Standard Fabrication & Eng.,

Tel: 04-3331818
Fax: 04-3331320
f)
Wilkinson
77
78
a) www.ostermeierfze.ae
Email: ostemeir@eim.ae
Raised Floors System

a) Hewetson
Appendix 3
a)
Specialized Architecture
System,
P.O. Box 73693, AUH
Email:
chabinds@emirates.net.
ae
www.hitechgroupuae.co
m
Email: info@hitechgroup.ae
e) Email:
stdengg@eim.ae
a) www.sas.ae
Email: sasauh@eim.ae
439
Tel: 02-5551855
Fax: 02-5551755
b)
Propa Floors (UK)
b)
Floors Carpet- Contractors,

Tel: 04-2945888
Fax: 04-2957081
c)
Tate Access Floors

(UK)
c)
Gulf Computer Support

System LLC
Tel: 04-2959191
Fax: 04-2959914
d)
PAF (UK) CBI-Italy
d)
Bin Khalaf Trdg.

P.O.Box19217, Al Ain
Tel: 03-7212077
Fax: 03-7212088
P.O. Box 206, AUH
Tel: 02-6791774
Fax: 02-
e)
USG
e)
USG Middle East Trdg.,

(Juman Al Khaleej Gen)
Tel: 04-2954443
Fax: 04-2954566
f)
Lindner
(Germany)
Norit
f)
Federal Bldg.Industries,
Tel: 04-3475119
Fax: 04-3471432
g)
MERO
system
Floor
g)
Mideast Data System

Tel: 04-3355215
Fax: 04-3350665
b) Email:
floors@eim.ae
c) www.gcss.ae
Email: Info.main@gcss.ae
d)
Email:
e) Email:
jumandxb@emirates.net.ae
f)
www.awrbuildingindustrie
s.com
Email: fbi@awrostamani.com
g) www.mds.ae
Email: mdsdxb@mdsuae.ae
Corner Guards & Bumpers
a) BALCO Inc. (USA)
b)
c)
a)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
Intrad of PJP Trdg.

Ltd. (UK) (fixed
with adhesive)
b)
Al Majaz Trading,
Tel: 06-5591940
Fax: 06-5591941
Melba (UK)
c)
79
d)
e)
f)
Appendix 3
Wilks
(UK)
Products
Arden(USA)
Pauling (USA)
d)
e)
f)
Tel: 04-3516010
Fax: 04-3516011
Peninsula Technical Supplies
P.O. Box 44978, AUH
Tel: 02-6426453
Fax: 02-6426569
Ismat Rubber Products,
Tel: 06-5345881
Fax: 06-5345883
a) www.esco.ae
b) Email:
almajaz@emirates.net.ae
c) www.janacointl.com
Email:
d) Email:
sunil_pts@hotmail.com
e) www.ismatgroup.com
Email:
admin@ismatrubber.com
Construction Specialized
440
g)
Local
h)
Acrowyn
Middle East LLC

Tel: 04-3312167
Fax: 04-3315023
f) Email:
sales@c-sgroup.ae
Speed Reduction Ramps
80
a)
Johnstone Safety
International, UK
b)
Melba
Products
Ltd., UK.
a)
Tulip Trading Co. LLC

Tel: 04-3476300
Fax: 04-3476343
a) www.tulipsafety.com
Email: tulipsas@eim.ae
b)
Shreeji Trading Co. LLC

Tel: 04-2282221
Fax: 04-2283397
b) Email:
shreeji@eim.ae
Toilets Cubicles
a)
b)
c)
Schafer
Core)
a)

Tel: 04-2664200
Fax: 04-2662960
a) www.alkamda.com
Email: info@alkamda.com
b)

Tel: 04-2664200
Fax: 04-2662960
b) www.alkamda.com
Email: info@alkamda.com
c)
Sultan Bin Rashid,

(SULTACO),
Tel: 04-3385929
Fax: 04-3391842
c) www.sultaco.ae
Email:
secretary@sultaco-uae.com
d)
Mediterranean Building
Materials Est. (MBM)
Tel: 04-3211032
Fax: 04-3211513
d) www.mbmauh.ae
Email:
mbmdxb@mbmauh.ae
e)
Materials Est. (MBM)
Tel: 04-3211032
Fax: 04-3211513
e) www.mbmauh.ae
Email:
mbmdxb@mbmauh.ae
f)
Mac Al Gurg
PO Box 672, Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
Fax: 04-2691067
PO Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
Fax: 02-6720025
f) www.macalgurg.com
Email:
mcalgur@emirates.net.ae
g)
Gibca Furniture Ind. Co.

Tel: 06-7436888
Fax: 06-7436903
h)
ETA
Tel: 04-3471022
Fax: 04-3471077
i)
(Solid
Vimsa
Kupan
d) Clip (France)
(Solid Laminated)
81
e)
Saniclips (France)
f)
BB4 Speed
g)
Trespa
h)
Perstop
i)
Loggere
Appendix 3
g) www.gfiuae.com
Email: info@gfiuae.com
h) www.etamech.com
Email: info@etamech.com
i) www.janacointl.com
Email:
441
j) Bobrick
(Soild Core & Metal)
Tel: 04-3516010
Fax: 04-3516011
j)
Alshaya Trading Co.

Tel: 04-6074100
04-2629100
Fax: 04-2692165
j) www.alshayatrading.com
Email:
k)
Al Habtoor Interiors
Tel: 04-3474015
Fax: 04-3473479
k) Domo (Germany)
(Solid Core & Metal)
l)
General Partitions
Manufacturing
Corp.
(Solid Core & Metal)
l)
k) www.hlginteriors.com
www.aseelmarble.com
Email: info@aseelmarble.com
Aseel Marbles Building

Materials
Tel: 06-5350035
Fax: 06-5350039
a)
Joseph Advertising &

Marketing
Tel: 04-8803277
Fax: 04-8803166
b)
Special Project Design

Tel: 04-3381919
Fax: 04-2861902
c)
Emirates Neon LLC

Tel: 06-5337222
Fax: 06-5331748
d)
Axon Business System

Tel: 04-2660380
Fax: 04-2693591
e)
Arabian Advertising
P.O. Box Dubai
Tel: 04-2233740
a)
www.josephgroup.ae
Email:
jareception@josephgroup.ae
b)
82
Signs / Notices
Email:
c) Email:
info@engworldwide.com
d) www.axon.ae
Email: info@axon.ae
e)
This number belongs to

other company
83
Concert Edging Kerbs &

Channels
a)

Box 3762, Dubai
Tel: 04-3477555
Fax: 04-3477888
b)
Concent
P.O. Box 136, Dubai
Tel: 04-3472011
Fax: 04-3472957
a) Email:
jamccp01@emirates.net.ae
b) www.consentblock.com
Email:
consent@emirates.net.ae
a)
84
Concrete Paving Blocks
Appendix 3

Box 3762, Dubai
Tel: 04-3477555
Fax: 04-3477888
a) Email:
jamccp01@emirates.net.ae
442
b)
Consent,
P.O. Box 136, Dubai
Tel: 04-3472011
Fax: 04-3472957
b) www.consentblock.com
Email:
consent@emirates.net.ae
85
a)
Oasis Dreams
Tel: 04-3401734
Fax: 04-3401735
a)
www.oasisdreams.ae
Email:
idirlouadi@oasisdreams.
ae
b)
Al Murooj Tr. Swimming

Pools & Landscaping
Tel: 06-5236899
Fax: 06-5236840
b)
Email:
almurooj@live.com
c)
Orient Irrigation Services

Tel: 04-2691985
Fax: 04-2693655
d)
Desert Landscape Co.

Tel: 04-3404440
Fax: 04-3404441
e)
Al Bayader Irrigation &

Contracting
Tel: 04-2822990
Fax: 04-2825440
f)
Akar Technical Services

Tel: 04-2963955
Fax: 04-2963954
Soft landscaping
g)
Gulf Landscape & Irrigation

System LLC
Tel: 04-8105571
Fax: 04-8859079
86
d) www.desertgroup.ae
Email:
desertlandscape@desertgroup.
com
e) Email:
bayader@emirates.net.ae
f) www.akartech.com
Email:
info@akartech.com
g) www.gulflandscape.com
Email:
info.glis@akigroup.com
a)
Oasis Dreams
Tel: 04-3401734
Fax: 04-3401735
a)
www.oasisdreams.ae
Email:
idirlouadi@oasisdreams.
ae
b)
Al Murooj Tr. Swimming

Pools & Landscaping
Tel: 06-5236899
Fax: 06-5236840
b)
Email:
almurooj@live.com
c)
United Technology & Trading

Co.
Tel: 04-3494666
04-2241551
Fax: 04-3494646
c) www.poolsuae.com
Email:
poolsuae@pooluae.com
Specialist Sub-Contractors
for Swimming Pool and
Jacuzzi
Appendix 3
c) www.orientirrigation.com
Email:
info@orientirrigation.com
443
d)
Bel Hasa Projects LLC

Tel: 04-3331445
Fax: 04-3336018
d) Email:
gchhugani@bhp.ae
e)
Waterman LLC
Tel: 04-2204488
Fax: 04-2207448
e) www.waterman.ae
Email:
info@waterman.ae
f)
Al Basti & Muktha LLC

Tel: 04-3439444
Fax: 04-3439445
f) www.abmgroup.ae
Email:
abmbilt@emirates.net.ae
g)
Sports Village (FS)

Tel: 04-2825444
Fax: 04-2824364
g) Email:
sportsvillage.uae@kaasgroup.c
om
87
a)
Desert Roofing
P.O. Box 185, Dubai
Tel: 04-3331165
Fax: 04-3331427
a)
b)
CKK Mid. East Est.,

Tel: 04-2824085
Fax: 04-2825365
b) www.ckkme.com
c)
Roof Care Co. L.L.C

Tel : 04-2679641
Fax: 04-2679642
P.O. Box 54087, AUH
Tel : 02-5587668
Fax: 02-5581211
c)
d)
Al Shirawi Cont. & Trad.,

Tel: 04-3335935
Fax: 04-3338898
d) www.alshirawi.com
a)
Speedwell Dcor
P.O. Box 42, Dubai
Tel: 04-3390111
Fax: 04-3381617
b)
Colour Coats
Tel: 04-2248050
Fax:04-2217954
b)
Email:
info@colorcoats.com
backed
c)
Wisdom Building Mat

Tel: 04-2676460
Fax: 04-2676095
c)
Email:
wisdomdm@eim.ae
Silicate
d)
Arabian Star Bldg. Mat.

Tel: 06-5430882
Fax: 06-5430883
d)
Email:
asdm@eim.ae
Combo Roofing
Email:
drfco@eim.ae
www.roof-care.com
Email:
Gypsum Board
(b) False Ceiling
a) Email:
speedwell@emirates.net.ae
88
(c)
Vinyl
ceiling
(d) Calcium
Board
Appendix 3
444
89
a)
United Aluminum
Tel: 04-8855399
Fax: 04-8855389
a) www.ualdubai.com
Email: info@ualdubai.com
b)

(Aluminum Division)
Tel: 06-5311533
06-5311444
Fax: 06-5311522
06-5311135
b) www.ams.ae
c)
Bin Lahej Contracting

Maintenance (Aluminum)
Tel: 04-3970016
Fax: 04-397158
c) www.mmlahej.com
Email:
d)
Bosco Aluminum
Tel: 04-2862305
Fax: 04-2862306
P.O. Box 32211, RAK
Tel: 07-2446629
d)
e)
Zebian Aluminum
Tel: 06-5432540
Fax: 06-5432491
e) Email:
info@zebian.ae
a)
Ceco Door
a) Email:
marketing@cecodoor.com
(b) McKeon Door
b)
McKeon Door
b)
www.mckeondoor.com
(c) Ambico
c)
Ambico
c)
www.ambico.com
(d) Door Systems Inc.
d)
Door Systems Inc.

2413 S. Broadway St. Sata
Ana. CA, 92707, USA
Tel +1 714 2857100
Fax +1 714 2587171
d)
www.doorsysinc.com
Email:
jeff@doorsysinc.com
michael@doorsysinc.com
(e) Lakshmi
Tech LLC
e)
Lakshmi Metal Tech LLC

PO Box 119867, Dubai
Tel 050 9204011
Fax 04-3386272
e)
Aluminum Glazed Doors &

Windows
Fire Proof Steel Door

(a) Ceco Door
90
Metal
www.boscogrp.com
Email:
bosco@boscogrp.com
www.trinityholdings.co
m
Email:
trinity@trinityholdings.c
om
Kitchen Cabinet
a)
Shafiq Dagher
Tel: 06-5436419
Fax: 06-5436215
a) Email:
dagher@emirates.net.ae
b)
Orient House Kitchen

Tel: 06-5350596
Fax: 06-5350597
Tel: 04-2716022
Fax: 04-2719639
b) Email:
mdawadin@yahoo.com
c)
Princess Palace Furniture
c)
(a) Post formed shutter
91
Appendix 3
Email:
445
Factory
Tel: 04-2672853
Fax: 04-2672401
ppffllc@eim.ae
d)
Laing O Rourke Al
Naboodah-Joinery
Tel: 04-3472475
04-3393939
Fax: 04-3393955
d) Email:
joinery@laingorouke.ae
e)
SCOM Middle East
e)
f)

P.O. Box 631, Ajman
Tel: 06-748919
Fax: 06-7489676
f) Email:
info@ajmankorea.com
ajmkor@eim.ae
a)
Shafiq Dagher
Tel: 06-5436419
Fax: 06-5436215
a) Email:
dagher@emirates.net.ae
b)

Tel: 06-5350596
Fax: 06-5350597
Tel: 04-2716022
Fax: 04-2719639
b) Email:
mdawadin@yahoo.com
c)

Factory
Tel: 04-2672853
Fax: 04-2672401
c) Email:
ppffllc@eim.ae
d)
Laing
O Rourke
Naboodah-Joinery
Tel: 04-3472475
04-3393939
Fax: 04-3393955
d) Email:
e)
SCOM Middle East
e)
f)

P.O. Box 631, Ajman
Tel: 06-7489191
Fax: 06-7489676
f) Email:
info@ajmankorea.com
ajmkor@eim.ae
a)

Tel: 06-5350596
Fax: 06-5350597
Tel: 04-2716022
Fax: 04-2719639
a) Email:
mdawadin@yahoo.com
b)

Factory
Tel: 04-2672853
Fax: 04-2672401
b) Email:
ppffllc@eim.ae
Email:
Wardrobes
(a) Post formed shutter
92
Al
Email:
Bathroom Vanities
(a) Post Formed Shutters
93
Appendix 3
446
94
Laing O Rourke Al
Naboodah-Joinery
Tel: 04-3472475
04-3393939
c) Email:
d)
SCOM Middle East
d)
e)

P.O. Box 631, Ajman
Tel: 06-7489191
Fax: 06-7489676
e) Email:
info@ajmankorea.com
ajmkor@eim.ae
a)
RAK Ceramics
P.O. Box 4714, RAK
Tel: 07-2445046
Fax: 07-2445270
a) www.rakceramics.com
Email:
office@rakceramics.com
a)
Laticrete RAK Co. LLC

P.O. Box 86028, RAK
Tel: 07-244 6396
Fax: 07-244 5915
a) www.laticrete.com
Email: gm@laticreterak.com
a)
RAK Ceramics
P.O. Box 4714, RAK
Tel: 07-2445046
Fax: 07-2445270
a) www.rakceramics.com
Email:
office@rakceramics.com
a)
Altek International Fze

Tel: 04-3124030
Fax: 04-3124031
a) www.altek.ae
Email: info@altek.ae
b)
Spray Tek Contracting

Tel: 04-2221432
Fax: 04-2275750
b) Email:
spraytek@emirates.net.ae
c)
Hi-Tech Mech. Works

Tel: 04-3384433
Fax: 04-3384959
c) www.hitechgroupuae.com
Email: info@hitechgroup.ae
a)
Ocean Rubber Ind.

Tel: 06-5344110
Fax: 06-5344220
b)
Hira Industries LLC

Tel: 04-8848414
Fax: 04-8848434
a)
ESC Aluminium System

Tel: 04-2515656
Fax: 04-2515800
a)
www.esc700.com
Email:
contact@esc700.com
b)
Reynaers Middle East WLL

P.O. Box 54245, Bahrain
Tel: +973 17877266
b)
www.reynaers.com
Email:
info@rme@reynaers.com
Cementious Tile Grout
95
Tile Glue
96
Internal Paint & Anti

Carbonation
97
c)
Spray Plaster to Ceiling
Wall/Column
Speed Humps
(a) Ocean
Industries
Guards/
Rubber
98
(b) Hira Industries
99
Aluminum
Appendix 3
Email:
a) www.oceanrubber.com
Email: oceanrbr@eim.ae
b) www.rhira.com
Email:
rhiratrd@emirates.net.ae
447
Fax: +973 17877299
Carpark Barriers
(a) Came
100
c)
United Aluminum
Tel: 04-8858066
Fax: 04-8855389
c) www.ualdubai.com
Email: info@ualdubai.com
d)
Alumetal LLC
Tel: 04-3404866
Fax: 04-3404877
d) Email:
alumetal@emirates.net.ae
e)
Arabian Aluminum
Tel: 06-5334485
Fax: 06-5334351
f)
Bosco Aluminum
Tel: 04-2862305
Fax: 04-2862306
P.O. Box 32211, RAK
Tel: 07-244662
Fax: 07-2446879
f) www.boscogrp.com
Email:
bosco@boscogrp.com
e)
Ali Moosa & Sons

Contracting (Aluminum
Division)
Tel: 06-5311533
06-5311444
Fax: 06-5311522
06-5311135
g) www.ams.ae
f)
Buhaira Aluminum & Glass

Service
Tel. 06-5368027
Fax:
h)
Email:
e) www.arabcouae.com
Email:
arabco@emirates.net.ae
(a) Came
(b) Fedral APD
(b) Fedral APD
(c) Royal Gate
(c) Royal Gate Automatic

Barriers LLC
Dubai
Tel: 04-2687687
(d) Bin Dasmal Door
(d) Bin Dasmal Door Est.

Tel: 04-8067600
Fax: 04-8067601
d)
www.bindasmal.com
Email:
doors@bindasmal.com
(e) Kazarooni
Gen.
Trading Co. LLC
(e) Kazarooni General Trading

Co. LLC
Tel: 04-2286373
Fax: 04-2271837
e)
www.kazarooni.net
Email: info@kazarooni.net
a)
Chub Trading
a)
Email:
b)
Ostermeier Fze.
Tel: 04-2828233
b) www.ostermeierfze.ae
Email: ostemeir@eim.ae
Refuse Disposal System

(a) Chub Trading
101
(b) Ostermier
Appendix 3
448
Fax: 04-2828232
(c) Mohd
Tayyeb
Khoory & Sons
c)
Mohd Tayyeb Khoory & Sons

Tel: 04-3476999
Fax: 04-3479929
d)
Standard Fabrication
Tel: 04-3331818
Fax: 04-3331320
(d) Standard
Fabrication
c) www.mgkhoory.com
Email: tayyeb@eim.ae
d) Email:
stdengg@emirates.net.ae
Building Maintenance
(a) AESA
gondolas
a)
ETA MELCO
P.O. 71058, Dubai
Tel: 04-2359595
Fax: 04-2725121
a) Email:
b)
Power Machines LLC

Tel: 04-3331519
Fax: 04-3331027
b)
c)
EW Cox ME LLC
Tel: 04-5118200
Fax: 04-5118300
d)
Xsplatforms Middle East,

Tel: 04-8872488
Fax: 04-8872499
d) www.xsplatforms.com
Email: dean@xsplatform.ae
a)
KONE (Middle East) LLC

P.O. Box: 21474 Dubai
Tel 04-2221393
Fax 04-2226292
ETA-Mitsubishi Elevator
P.O. Box 3967, AUH
Tel: 02-6767597
Fax: 02-6717180
P.O. 71058, Dubai
Tel: 04-2359595
Fax: 04-2725121
a)
c)
Otis LLC
Tel: 04-3371074
Fax: 04-3377460
c) Email:
otisuae@otis.com
d)
Arabian Elevators (LG)

Tel: 06-5739920
Fax: 06-5730962
d) www.aeec-hyundai.com
Email:
aeec@emirates.net.ae
e)
Thyssen Krupp Elevator

Tel: 04-2865277
Fax: 04-2865489
e)
f)
Schindler UAE
Tel: 04-3819191
Fax: 04-3490561
P.O. Box 38250, AUH
Tel: 02-6282955
Euro
(b) UNIT
www.powermachinesllc.co
m
Email:
powerllc@emirates.net.ae
102
Lifts
(a) Kone
(b) Mitsubishi
b)
(c) Otis
103
(d) Arabian
(LG)
Elevators
(e) Thyssen Krupp
(f)
Appendix 3
Schindler
c) www.coxgomyl.com
Email:
dubai@coxgomyl.com
sathya.srinivasan@kone.c
om
b) Email:
ahmedalikaa@etamelco.com
www.thyssenkruppelevator.com
Email:
thyssen2@emirates.net.ae
f) www.schindler.com.sa
Email:
infouae@ae.schindler.com
449
(g) Toshiba
Fax: 02-6282949
g)
Dhaher Al Muhairi (Toshiba

Lifts)
Tel: 04-2666630
Fax: 04-2666290
g)
www.toshibaelevatorgulf.c
om
Email: dmco@dmco.ae
a)
Bright Star Construction

Materials (Tru-Weld)
Tel: 04-2672773
Fax: 04-2671731
a) www.brightstarllc.com
Email:
michael.cuna@brightstarllc.a
e
b)
Webforge Middle East

Tel: 04-8873346
Fax: 04-8873347
b)
c)
Oasis Metal Manufacturing

LLC
Tel: 04-3472000
Fax: 04-3471580
c)
Email:
info@agiw.ae
a)
Buhaira Aluminum & Glass

Services LLC
Tel: 06-5368027
Fax: 06-5324878
a)
Email:
b)
Bosco Aluminum
Tel: 04-2862305
Fax: 04-2862306
P.O. Box 32211, RAK
Tel: 07-2446629
Fax: 07-2446879
Metal Bar Grating

(a) True Weld
(b) Webforge Mid East
(c) Oasis
Metal
Manufacturing LLC
104
105
106
Aluminum Chequered Plate
Composite Timber Decking
Appendix 3
www.webforge.com.au
www.valmont.com
Email: sales@webforge.ae
b) www.boscogrp.com
Email: bosco@boscogrp.com
c)

(Aluminum Division)
Tel: 06-5311533
06-5311444
Fax: 06-5311522
06-5311135
c) www.ams.ae
a)
Laing O Rourke Al
Naboodah-Joinery
Tel: 04-3472475
04-3393939
Fax: 04-3393955
a) Email:
b)
Alpha Star
Tel: 04-3307263
Fax: 04-3306242
b) Email:
farooq@alphastartrading.ae
c)
Ugarit Furniture
P.O. Box 286, Dubai
Tel: 04-3405551
Fax: 04-3405552
c) Email:
ugarit@ugarit.ae
450
d)

P.O. Box 631, Ajman
Tel: 06-7489191
Fax: 06-7489676
d) Email:
info@ajmankorea.com
ajmkor@eim.ae
a)
Roof Care Co. L.L.C

Tel : 04-2679641
Fax: 04-2679642
P.O. Box 54087, AUH
Tel : 02-5587668
Fax: 02-5581211
a) www.roof-care.com
Email:
b)
Pearl Insulation Material

Industries LLC
Tel: 04-3338398
Fax: 04-3332407
b) www.bayer.com
Email:
bufoam@emirates.net.ae
c)
Star Adhesive & Resin

Industries Factory LLC
Tel: 06-7673033
Fax: 06-7673022
c) www.star-uae.com
Email: info@star-uae.com
a)
Fibrex Co.
P.O. Box 462, AUH
Tel: 02-5511462
Fax: 02-5513331
b)
Thermafiber
b)
Email:
c)
Owens Corning
c)
Email:
a)
CSR Building Materials Ltd.
a)
Email:
b)
Johns Manvilla
b)
Email:
c)
Owens Corning
c)
Email:
a)
Hilti Inc.
Tel: 04-8060300
Fax: 04-8854404
a)
(b) Johns Manvile
b)
Johns Manville
b)
(c) 3M Fire Protection

Products Division
c)
3M Gulf Ltd.
Tel: 04-3670777
Fax: 04-3670599
d)
Tremco Ltd. (ME)

Tel: 04-3470460
Fax: 04-3470242
Building Installation
(a) Foam
Insulation
Plastic
Board
107
a) Stag Wool Fiber Rock

Woolfibre
108
a)
Glass Fibre Blanket
Insulation
109
a) www.fibrex.ae
Email: fibrex@fibrex.ae
Fire Stop System

(a) Hilti Inc
110
Email:
ae.contactus@hilti.com
Email:
c) www.3mgulf.com
(d) Tremco Incorp

d) www.stonecore.com
Email:
Joint Sealants
111
(a) Latex Joint Sealant
Appendix 3
a) Petrotech Enterprises
LLC (Bostik)
Tel: 04-2622211
a) www.petrotechgroup.org
Email: sales@petrotech.ae
451
Fax: 04-2622233
(b) Acoustical
Sealant
Joint
b)
Pecore Corp.
b)
c)
Tremco Ltd. (ME)

Tel: 04-3470460
Fax: 04-3470242
c)
d)
USG Middle East Trdg.,

(Juman Al Khaleej Gen)
Tel: 04-2954443
Fax: 04-2954566
e)
Dow Corning Corporation
f)
GE Advanced Materials
Tel: 04-4296161
Fax: 04-4296105
a)
Bayer Corporation
Tel: 04-8817773
Fax: 04-8814323
a) www.bayer.com
Email:
bme_info@bayeraq.de
b)
Dow Agro Science LLC

Tel: 04-332886
Fax: 04-3123660
b) www.dowmiddleast.com
Email:
members@zawya.com
c)
Arabian Agricultural
Engineering Est
Tel: 04- 2666446
Fax: 04- 2695242
c)
a)
FOSROC Intl. Ltd.

P.O. Box 657, Dubai
Tel: 04-2039699
Fax: 04-2854188
P.O. Box 27971, AUH
Tel: 02-6731779
Fax: 02-6731449
a) www.fosroc.com
abudhabi@fosroc.com
b)
FEB Middle East

Tel: 06-5345123
Fax: 06-5345066
b) Email:
www.mbt-middleeast.com
(c) Silicon Sealant
108
Thermite Control
Concrete Admixtures
Concrete Repair and Curing
Compound
(a) FOSROC
109
(b) FEB Middle East
e)
(c) Degussa
110
111
Concrete Pavers,
Interlocking,
Tiles & Kerbstone
Accessories for Block work
and Plasterwork
Appendix 3
a)
BASF Chemicals Co.

(Degussa Middle East)
Tel: 04-8090800
Fax: 04-8851130
CONSENT L.L.C
Email:
www.stonecor.com
Email:
d) Email:
jumandxb@emirates.net.ae
e)
Email:
f) www.ge.com
Email: inquiry@gfiuae.com
www.aaee-uae.com
Email:
arabargi@emirates.net.a
e
c) www.basf-cc.ae
Email:
consent@eim.ae
PO Box 136 Dubai

Tel 04-3472011
Fax 04-3472957
a)
Mac Al Gurg (Catnic)

PO Box 672, Dubai
Email:
452
(a) Catnic (Al Gurg)
112
b)
Issam Kabbani Tradings

(Unitech)
Tel: 04-8847275
04-2856031
Fax: 04-8847278
b) Email:
unitech.uae@ikkgroup.com
(c) Emirates Specialties
c)

PO Box 3880, Dubai
Tel: 04-3470767
06-5420220
Fax: 04-3470765
c) www.esco.ae
a)
Hunter Douglas
Tel: 04-8131800
Fax: 04-8863301
a)
Hunter Douglas
Tel: 04-8131800
Fax: 04-8863301
Architectural Terracotta
Aluminum Aero Foils
114
Steel Fibers for Concrete

Slab on Grade
Composite Slab Decking
Movable / Foldable walls

Tel: 04-2671015
Fax: 04-2671248
www.hunterdouglascontr
act.com
Email: info@hdme.com
info@nimrsteel.com
a.rasheed@mbmauh.ae
b)
Gibca Limited
Tel: 06-5333333
Fax: 06-5333444
www.skyfold.com
c)
and
a)
Material
Tel: 04-3211032
Fax: 04-3211513
116
Lab
casework
fumehood
www.hunterdouglascontr
act.com
Email: info@hdme.com
a)
Skyfold
Dorma Moveo
a)
BEKAERT (Dramix), OR EQUAL
Panelfold
117
(b) Issam Kabbani
113
115
Tel: 04-2661291
Fax: 04-2691067
PO Box 46997, AUH
Tel: 02-6741171
Fax: 02-6720025
DORMA Gulf Door Controls

FZE
Tel: 04-8020400
Fax: 04-8869101
a)
Email:
Uzma_Khan@Skyfold.com
info@gibca.com
www.bedcolab.com
Bedcolab
118
MEP Contractors
Appendix 3
a) Trans Gulf
P.O Box 2432, Dubai, UAE
Tel : +971 4 884 8753
Fax : +971 4 884 8463
a) www.transgulfdubai.com
Email:
transgulf@tgemdubai.ae
Limit : 5 Million to 500 Million
Dirhams
453
b) Bilt Middle East

P.O. Box. 2393
Dubai - U.A.E.
Tel : 04-3439798
Fax : 04-3439445
b) www.bilt.ae
Email : mail.abmbilt@eim.ae
c) Emirates Trading Agency LLC

P.O. Box. 5239
Dubai - U.A.E.
Tel.: +971 4 3185111
Fax: +971 4 3386301
c) www.etamne.com
Email: mneho@etamne.com
d) BK Gulf LLC
PO Box 10079,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates.
Tel : +971 4 880 1606
Fax : +971 4 880 1603
d) www.bkgulf.com
Email : bkgulf@emirates.net.ae
e) Drake & Scull International PJSC

P.O. Box 65794 Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971 4 8112300
Fax: +971 4 8112315
e) www.drakescull.com
Email:corporate@drakescull.co
m
f) AL SHIRAWI ELECTRICAL &

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CO. LLC.
Tel: +971 4 3337644
Fax: +971 4 3338898
119
Fire Fighting
Appendix 3
Limit : 40 Million to 330 Million

Dirhams
Limit : 100,000 to 2 Billion

Dirhams
f)
www.alshirawi.com/engin
eering
g) Macair LLC,
P.O. Box 24689, Dubai, UAE
T: +971 4 501 4800
F: +971 4 330 6430
g)
h) Streamline Electro Mechanical

Contracting LLC
Tel: +971 4 2838414
Fax: +971 4 2588838
h)
Email:
streamline@streamline.a
e
i) Menasco Mechanical Contracting

P.O. Box. 19086
Dubai - U.A.E.
Tel.: +971 4 2611164/7
Fax: +971 4 2611696
i)
Email:
info@menascodubai.com
j) Solico Contracting Co. LLC,

T: +971 4 3337644
F: +971 4 3338898
j)
Email:
mep@solicouae.com
k) Al Arabia Electro Mechanical

T: +971 4 2851145
F: +971 4 2857890
k)
l) GECO Mechanical & Electrical

Contracting LLC
P.O. Box 1150 Sharjah, UAE
Tel: +971 6 5138111
Fax: +971 6 5138450
a) National Fire Fighting
Manufacturing FZCO
Tel: +971 4 8151111
Fax: +971 4 8151222
Email: jmemcont@almajid.com
abdulsalam.qabaja@almajid.com
l)
Email:
zaheer@gecome.com
a) www.naffco.com
Email:
info@naffco.ae
454
Appendix 4: Soil Test Report
Appendix 4
455

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
REPORT
Project
Residential Building (B + G + 5)
on
Plot No. IC3-B-37
at
INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3
DUBAI
For Owner
Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh)
Consultant
M.E. Engineering Consultants
Report Ref. No.
HASA/100613/3016
Rev. No.
DUBAI
JANUARY 2014
UAE Dubai P.O. Box 510, Dubai

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
(Document No. SR01, Issue No. 01, Rev. No. 0 - Issued on 16.02.2013)
Page 1 of 42
Report Ref. No. HASA/100613/3016

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
M/s. M.E.Engineering Consultants.
P.O. Box 119487, Dubai UAE.
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Report Ref. No.

Rev. No.
Date
Subject
: Geotechnical Investigation Report
Project
: Residential Building (B + G + 5)
Plot No.
: IC3-B-37
Location
: INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 DUBAI
: HASA/100613/3016
:0
: 14th JANUARY 2014
Site Owner : Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh)

Consultant
: M.E. Engineering Consultants
Contractor
: NP
Dear Sir,
It is much pleasure for us to submit the final geotechnical investigation report for the project
mentioned above.
We hope that the information included cover all geotechnical issues related to the foundation of the
project. For any further inquiry, please do not hesitate to contact us and we are looking forward to
continued cooperation.
Very truly yours,
Engr. Muhammad Sarwar

Geotechnical Manager

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 2 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 5
AIMS AND SCOPE OF WORK................................................................................................ 5
PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 5
EXPLORATION PROGRAM AND BORING TECHNIQUES ................................................. 5
4. 1. Standard Penetration Test (SPT) ........................................................................................ 6
4. 2. Groundwater Table Measuring........................................................................................... 6
5. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND GROUNDWATER ........................................................ 6
6. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM................................................................................... 7
6. 1. Chemical Analysis ............................................................................................................. 7
6. 2. Soil Classification Tests..................................................................................................... 7
6. 3. Unconfined Compressive Strength Test.............................................................................. 7
7. DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS .......................................................................... 7
7.1
Foundation Type, Depth & Bearing Capacity..................................................................... 7
7.2
Excavation ......................................................................................................................... 8
7.3
Soil Parameters .................................................................................................................. 8
7.4
Groundwater Control ......................................................................................................... 8
7.5
Backfill Materials & Compaction....................................................................................... 9
7.6
Concrete Design For Foundation Purposes......................................................................... 9
8. GENERAL COMMENTS AND LIMITATIONS .................................................................... 10
APPENDIX A ................................................................................................................................. 13
Plate 1.
Site Plan....................................................................................................................... 14
Plate 2.
Boreholes Location ...................................................................................................... 15
APPENDIX B (FIELD RESULTS) ................................................................................................. 16
Plate 3.
Borehole Log for Borehole No. 1 ................................................................................. 18
Plate 4.
Plate 5.
APPENDIX C (LABORATORY TEST RESULTS)........................................................................ 23
Plate 6.
Particle Size Distribution for Borehole No. 1 & 3......................................................... 24
Plate 7.
Chemical Test Results.................................................................................................. 25
APPENDIX D (CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS) ............................................................................... 26
Plate 8.
Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 2.0m ~ 10.0m)....................................................... 27
Plate 9.
Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 10.0m ~ 18.0m) ..................................................... 28
Plate 10.
Plate 11.
Plate 12.
Plate 13.
APPENDIX E (USEFUL INFORMATION) ................................................................................... 33
Percussion Boring Method .............................................................................................................. 34
Rotary Drilling Method ................................................................................................................... 34
Standard Penetration Test (SPT)...................................................................................................... 35
Groundwater Table Measuring ........................................................................................................ 36
Particle Size Distribution................................................................................................................. 36
Rock Strength Classification (BS 5930: 1999)................................................................................. 37
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 3 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Unconfined Compressive Strength Test........................................................................................... 37

CIRIA Special Publication 31.......................................................................................................... 38
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE REPORT*................................................................ 40
LIST OF SYMBOLS USED IN THE REPORT* ............................................................................ 41
REFERENCES............................................................................................................................ 42

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 4 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
1. INTRODUCTION
Hassan Al Amir Soil Analysis Laboratory was commissioned by M/s. M.E. Engineering Consultants
to perform a geotechnical investigation report for the proposed construction of Residential Building
(B + G + 5) for owner Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh), on Plot No. IC3-B-37, at
INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.
The investigation has been based on a HASA proposal (TEMP/200513/01) dated 20th MAY 2013,
and subsequent approval by M/s. M.E. Engineering Consultants on 10th JUNE 2013. The work has
been performed in general accordance with British Standard BS 5930: 1999, Code of practice for
site investigations.
2. AIMS AND SCOPE OF WORK
The aim of this study is to evaluate the subsurface conditions at the site and develop the essential
criteria and parameters required to use in foundation design and construction for the proposed
project. The investigation will provide the structure engineer with the main criteria for design of all
structure members below the ground surface.
3. PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTION
The proposed project is Residential Building (B + G + 5) and the structure is mainly from reinforced
concrete and different types of partitions.
Plate1 in appendix A of this report shows the site plan as introduced from the client and Plate 2
shows the boreholes location as specified by the client.
At the time of site investigation the site consists of piles of sandy material and the borehole
locations were marked by the client as represented in the site plan.
The site is not leveled and its level is approximately 0.0m ~ +1.4m to the temporary benchmark
(TBM) established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of finishing the
boreholes.
4. EXPLORATION PROGRAM AND BORING TECHNIQUES
The program of fieldwork consisted of drilling three (3) boreholes to depths of 18.0m by rotary
boring method using 100mm (4-inches) casing as shown in appendix E of this report.
Boreholes drilling and sampling at various depths were carried out according to BS 5930 : 1999.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 5 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
The boreholes locations were set out in accordance with the instructions of the clients representative
and is shown in the site plan presented as Plate 2 in appendix A of this report.
The fieldwork was carried out under the close supervision of an experienced geotechnical engineer.
The borehole logs are presented in appendix B of this report.
4. 1.
Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) were conducted regularly at 0.5m intervals up to 2.5m and there
after 1.0m intervals up to the end of boring in accordance with the drilling procedure specified in BS
5930: 1999.
SPTs were conducted in accordance with British Standard BS 1377 part 9 : 1990 Cl. 3.3. See more
details in appendix E of this report.
4. 2.
Groundwater Table Measuring
The groundwater table was measured using Electric Contact Meter (Dip Meter), Type: KLL. Electric
Contact Meters (Dip Meters) are a portable, used for quick, easy, reliable instruments for measuring
the water level and total depth in boreholes. See more details in appendix E of this report.
It has to be noticed that the groundwater table level is affected by seasonal and tidal changes as well
as dewatering in the adjacent areas.
5. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND GROUNDWATER
The subsurface conditions as revealed from the boreholes indicated that:
The site is underlain by layer of dense to very dense, light brown, slightly silty, fine SAND
with light reddish brown sand and rare cemented sand pieces from depth 1.8m & 2.0m to
depths 2.0m & 2.5m below existing ground level.
From depths 2.0m & 2.5m to depths (8.5m, 8.0m and 7.2m) there was a layer of very weak
to moderately weak, light reddish brown, slightly to moderately weathered, very thinly
bedded, fine to medium grained, gypsiferous SANDSTONE interbeded with conglomeratic
sandstone .
From depths (8.5m, 8.0m and 7.2m) to depth 18.0m (End of Boring) there was a layer of
weak to moderately weak, light pinkish to off white creamish, moderately weathered, fine to
medium grained, CALCISILTITE interbeded with conglomeratic calcisiltite.
The groundwater table was encountered at 4.0m ~ 4.1m depth below the temporary
benchmark (TBM) established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 6 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
finishing the boreholes.

6. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM
All extracted samples were brought to the laboratory for further examination and studies. Some
selected soil samples subjected to physical and chemical tests all in accordance with applicable
standard methods as following:
6. 1.
Chemical Analysis
Chemical analysis was carried out according to BS 1377 part 3: 1990: AMD 9028: 1996 on selected
one soil sample and one water sample, which extracted from the boreholes and the results, are shown
in appendix C of this report.
6. 2.
Soil Classification Tests
The particle size distribution was carried out according to BS 1377 part 2: 1990 Cl. 9.2, AMD 9027 :
1996. The classification of soil based on the particle size distribution in the table shown in appendix
D of this report. The results for the analysis on two specimens at different depths are shown in the
appendix C of this report.
6. 3.
Unconfined Compressive Strength Test
Some of the samples extracted from the boreholes are core specimens. The unconfined compressive
strength was carried out on some selected core specimens according to ASTM D 7012-10, ASTM D
4543-08 and the results are shown in borehole log in appendix B of this report.
7. DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
7.1
Foundation Type, Depth & Bearing Capacity
Based on the encountered substrata, field, laboratory tests and the empirical equations developed by
Terzhagi and Peck, Meyerhof and modified by Bowles and taking in to consideration a safety factor 3
against shear failure of the soil. The following must be considered:
Depth of
Excavation,
m
Soil
Replacement,
m
Foundation
Level,
m
Allowable
Bearing
Capacity,
kN/m2
Modulus
of Subgrade
Reaction,
kN/m3
Type of Foundation
4.0
0.25
3.75
400
24,000
Raft Foundation
Levels are from temporary bench mark (TBM) established on the average level of the adjacent asphalt road.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 7 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Bottom of excavation must be compacted to at least 95% of the modified proctor maximum dry
density of soil using a heavy roller.
Soil replacement shall be approved granular road base material and must be compacted to at
least 98% of the modified proctor maximum dry density using a heavy roller.
The expected total settlement for raft foundation will be 50mm, this should not cause any
problem.
When excavating to foundation level, care should be taken not to disturb strata underlying
formation level otherwise settlements in excess of those quoted above could occur. If any
disturbance does occur, or if any soft spots or gypsiferous materials are encountered, the
material should be removed and replaced by selected approved granular fill, which should be
properly compacted before the foundations are constructed.
7.2
Excavation
Excavation for foundation will take place through the existing soil formation up to the specified
depths of excavation, which is mentioned above. The following will be considered:
The excavation works should be carried out in accordance with good construction practice, such
as BS 6031: 1981 Code of Practice for Earthworks or a similar recognized standard.
7.3
Temporary or permanent retaining structures may be constructed around the building line.
Soil Parameters
Retaining walls will be required as a part of basement structure and possibly as temporary works. The
following soil parameters are recommended for the design of retaining structures based on the
standard penetration test (SPT) values:
Depth from TBM, m
Average Bulk Density, , kN/m3
Average Angle of shearing resistance, o
Average Coefficient of active earth pressure, Ka
Average Coefficient of passive earth pressure, Kp
Average Coefficient of earth pressure at rest, Ko
7.4
0.0 ~ 4.0
18.0
34
0.28
3.54
0.44
Groundwater Control
The groundwater table has encountered at 4.0m ~ 4.1m depth from the temporary benchmark (TBM)
established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of finishing the boreholes,
variations in groundwater table are anticipated due to seasonal and tidal changes as well as
dewatering in the adjacent areas. Therefore, reconfirmation is recommended prior to any works
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 8 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
related to the groundwater regime.

7.5
Backfill Materials & Compaction
The following notes must be considered as appropriate when applicable:
The bottom of excavation/excavation surface must be compacted to at least 95% of the modified
proctor maximum dry density of soil using a heavy roller.
Backfill material should not contain any roots, construction debris, deleterious material.
Recommended engineering fill material shall comply with the following specifications:
Type of soil
Particle size
Fines content
Gradation
:
:
:
Inorganic and free draining with no more than trace amounts of organic matter,
gypsum or other salts.
50mm max.
15% max.
Well graded
Structural backfill should be performed in horizontal layers of thickness 150mm to 250mm

Compaction should be performed in each layer to reach the required degree mentioned in this
report. This is applicable for slabs on grade and asphalt pavements as well.
The excavated materials can not be used for structural fill without testing but can be used as
common fill provided it is not supporting any structure, i.e. around the building or somewhere
else.
7.6
Concrete Design For Foundation Purposes
Based on the chemical tests performed in our laboratory shown in appendix C of this report and
(Figure 6 & Table 13) of CIRIA Special Publication 31 (The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction
in the Gulf Region published by the Construction Industry Research and Information Association,
London 1984) shown in appendix D of this report which considers both sulphate and chloride
contamination of soils and groundwater in various exposure conditions and is not restricted just to
sub-surface concrete, it is considered that this site would be classed as having significant
contamination of chloride salts only. On this basis it is considered that Exposure Condition d(iii)
would apply, for which it is recommended that OPC or an ASTM type (I) usually have high C3A
content and ASTM type (II) usually has medium C3A content to be used in a mix meeting the
following criteria:
Minimum cement content for 20mm aggregates
320 to 400 kg/m3
Maximum water : cement ratio
0.50 to 0.42

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 9 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
Minimum cover for reinforcement
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
40mm to 50mm
In addition it is recommended that the surface of all concrete in contact with the soil should be
covered with a suitable waterproof membrane or coating. However, prior to finalizing and adopting a
mix design, appropriate consultation with the structural engineer is advised.
8. GENERAL COMMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
The following points must be considered in conjunction with this report:
As mentioned in the report the boreholes made were of 100/150mm in diameter. The
information received from the limited number and the diameter of boreholes may not represent
the entire site and may not reveal all the weak layers or conditions especially when they are
localized. Hence, no responsibility can be borne for conditions not revealed by boreholes made
on the site. In case of any such findings, we shall be contacted immediately to arrange a site
visit by a geotechnical engineer to make an on site study of such conditions after which
recommendations if it is deemed necessary will be revised.
The borehole logs and related information represent subsurface conditions only at the specific
locations and times where sampling was conducted. Any lines designating the changes between
soil and/ or rock layers represent approximate boundaries. The transition between deposits /
strata may be gradual or may occur between recovered samples.
The recommendations and discussions given in this report are based on the subsurface
conditions encountered during the site investigation work and on the results of the field and
laboratory testing on samples obtained from the limited number of boreholes. There may be,
however conditions pertaining to the site which has not been in to account due to the limited
number of boreholes.
Precautions should be taken to prevent any ingress of water into more silty horizons both during
and after construction, otherwise settlement in excess of those quoted in this report could occur.
At the time of construction it shall be made sure that the excavation levels for foundations are at
least 0.3m above the groundwater table so that compaction process at the excavated level can be
properly carried out to the required degree mentioned in our report. In case of any difficulty in
achieving proper compaction, a 250mm layer thick granular fill material shall be placed and
compacted to the required degree of compaction.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 10 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
While carrying out dewatering, it shall be ensured that no excessive settlement is caused to the
nearby structures and the process shall be carried out in stages. Moreover, suitable precautions
have to be taken especially in areas with weak strata.
Where the construction area levels are less than the proposed foundation level, filling below the
foundation level shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 250mm and each layer shall be
compacted to at least 95% of the modified proctor maximum dry density of the soil in case of
fine material or to 98% in case of granular fill (road base). The compaction percentages attained
shall be confirmed by carrying out insitu density tests for each compacted layer. For backfills
up to 1.0m, plate load test shall be carried out to confirm the efficiency of the backfill. In case
of the backfill exceeds 1.0m, cone penetration test (CPT) shall be carried out to confirm the
same.
Before pouring the concrete, the ground surface at foundation level should be free of any loose
stone fragments and dirt.
In case of any hard strata like the sandstone, siltstone or other rock types, use of a special
excavators for excavations of such strata shall be considered.
For excavations deeper than 2.0m, suitable side protections have to be ensured so that the
excavation shall not pause a threat to the personnel working on the site or cause any damage to
nearby existing buildings or roads.
In case there is an existing structure, which is waiting for demolition, and the soil investigation
has to be carried out outside the existing structure it is advisable to sink one or two more
boreholes after demolition to confirm the bearing pressure.
Suitable slopes shall be used to drain storm and wastewater away from the proposed building.
The recommendations given in this report need not considered as a final and binding. These
recommendations may be altered (where the soil parameters permit) depending on the design
requirements and by agreement with the geotechnical engineer.
All earth works including bottom of excavation inspection, site filling and the specified tests
prior to and during construction shall be carried out under the supervision of a qualified
geotechnical engineer.
The tests and experiments for the quality control on soil, construction materials, and concrete
must be considered, followed up and approved by HASA laboratory.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 11 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
HASA laboratory shall be contacted to carry out compaction or other tests if recommended in
our report at random locations selected by us in which case only a letter of confirmation can be
issued for the safe bearing capacity and foundation levels.
_______________________________
______________________
_____________
Engr. Mary Genifer C. Sambade

Geotechnical Engineer
Engr. Muhammad Sarwar

Geotechnical Manager

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 12 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
APPENDIX A
SITE PLAN
PLATE 1
BOREHOLES LOCATION
PLATE 2

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 13 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Plate 1.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Site Plan
& 510 . ."! & # $%
04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 14 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Plate 2.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Boreholes Location
& 510 . ."! & # $%
04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 15 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
APPENDIX B (FIELD RESULTS)
BOREHOLE LOGS
PLATE 3 TO 5

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 16 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
BOREHOLE LOG BH No. 1
Date of drilling started

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
2.0
4.1
: 5 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
: IC3-B-37 INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3
: M.E.Engineering Consultants
: E:
N:
: Rotary
: TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road
1B
0.0
0.50
2S
0.50
0.95
25
20
29
49
3S
1.0
1.45
16
19
25
44
4S
5 SC
1.5
1.82
1.82
2.00
19
25/95
6C
2.0
3.5
7C
8C
9C
3.5
5.0
6.5
33
17/20
100/85
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.0
: 0.0 from TBM
Dense to very dense, light brown,

slightly silty, fine SAND with light
reddish brown sand and rare cemented
sand pieces from 1.80m depth.
>50
>100
Very weak to moderately weak, light

reddish brown, slightly to moderately
weathered, very thinly bedded, fine to
medium grained, gypsiferous
SANDSTONE interbeded with
conglomeratic sandstone.
5.0
8.5
9.5
11 C
9.5
10.0
11.91
10.62
90
{87}
(53)
8.0
8.0
100
{90}
(87)
93
{93}
(90)
6.5
10 C
93
{87}
(73)
Weak to moderately weak, light

pinkish to off white creamish,
moderately weathered, fine to
medium grained, CALCISILTITE.

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
93
{90}
(90)
100
{100}
(100)
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 17 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Continued: BOREHOLE LOG BH No. 1

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
: 5 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
: E:
N:
: Rotary
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.0
: 0.0 from TBM
10.85
12 C
10.0
11.5
13 C
11.5
13.0
14 C
13.0
14.5
15 C
14.5
16.0
16 C
16.0
17.5
17 C
17.5
18.0

moderately weathered, fine to medium
grained, CALCISILTITE.
100
{90}
(60)
93
{90}
(53)
97
{87}
(40)
4.08
90
{90}
(87)
100
{97}
(47)
18.0
End of boring @ 18.0m depth.
Plate 3.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Borehole Log for Borehole No. 1
100
{100}
(100)
06.01.2014
Logged by: MS
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 18 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
2.5
: 01 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
: E:
N:
: Percussion(0.0m ~2.5m) & Rotary (2.5m to 18.0m)
1B
0.0
0.50
2S
0.50
0.95
10
16
19
35
3S
1.0
1.45
12
17
22
39
4S
1.5
1.95
15
21
26
47
5S
6 SC
2.0
2.35
2.35
2.50
19
25/85
7C
2.5
3.5
8C
3.5
5.0
9C
5.0
6.5
26
24/50
100/65
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.50
: +0.25 from TBM

sand pieces from 2.0m depth.
>50
>100
Very weak to moderately weak,

light reddish brown, slightly to
moderately weathered, very thinly
bedded, fine to medium grained,
gypsiferous SANDSTONE
interbeded with conglomeratic
sandstone.
4.35
90
{80}
(28)
1.23
100
{95}
(78)
90
{87}
(67)
1.10
10 C
6.5
90
{87}
(77)
8.0
8.0
11C
12 C
8.0
9.5

reddish to light brownish off white,
moderately weathered, fine to
medium grained, calcisiltitic
CONGLOMERATE interbeded
with calcisiltite from 16.0m to
18.0m depth.
9.5
11.0

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
93
{93}
(93)
100
{97}
(97)
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 19 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
13 C
14 C
15 C
: 01 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
: E:
N:
: Rotary
11.0
12.5
14.0
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.50
: +0.20 from TBM

reddish to light brownish off white,
moderately to highly weathered, fine
to medium grained, calcisiltitic
CONGLOMERATE interbeded with
calcisiltite from 16.0m to 18.0m depth.
12.5
8.52
99
{87}
(87)
14.0
93
{83}
(83)
15.5
97
{97}
(97)
99
{87}
(83)
16 C
15.5
17.0
17 C
17.0
18.0
2.77
80
{73}
(60)
04.01.2014
18.0
Plate 4.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Logged by: MS
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 20 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
2.5
: 30 DECEMBER 2013
: HASA/100613/3016
: E:
N:
: Percussion(0.0m ~2.5m) & Rotary (2.5m to 18.0m)
1B
0.0
0.50
2S
0.50
0.95
10
15
20
35
3S
1.0
1.45
12
17
24
41
4S
1.5
1.95
15
20
30
50
5S
2.0
2.40
18
25
25/100
>50
6 SC
2.40
2.50
25/90
100/10
>100
7C
2.50
3.50
8C
3.50
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.5
: +0.5 from TBM

sand pieces from 2.0m depth
Very weak to moderately weak, light

brown, slightly to moderately
weathered, thickly laminated to thinly
bedded, fine to medium grained,
gypsiferous SANDSTONE interbeded
with conglomeratic sandstone.
5.0
4.5
100
{100}
(80)
1.80
90
{67}
(51)
1.03
11 C
5.0
90
{77}
(73)
6.5
100
{100}
(100)
7.2
12 C
6.5
8.0
13 C
8.0
9.5
14 C
9.5
11.0

grained, CALCISILTITE interbedded
with conglomeratic calcisiltite.

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
100
{90}
(90)
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 21 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
Coordinates
Drilling method
Remarks
: 30 DECEMBER 2013
: HASA/100613/3016
: E:
N:
: Rotary
BH Dia., mm
Core Dia., mm
Core barrel
Bit type
Flush type
Casing depth, m
BH Elevation, m
: 100
: 76
: HWF
: Diamond
: Bentonite
: 2.5
: +0.5 from TBM
91 12.06
{77}
(51)
15 C
11.0

grained, CALCISILTITE interbedded
with conglomeratic calcisiltite.
12.5
91
{73}
(67)
93
{87}
(53)
16 C
17 C
18 C
19 C
12.5
14.0
15.5
17.0
14.0
15.5
92
{87}
(87)
17.0
93
{83}
(63)
10.48
100
{90}
(50)
01.01.2014
18.0
18.0
Plate 5.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Logged by: MS
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 22 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
APPENDIX C (LABORATORY TEST RESULTS)
PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION
PLATE 6
CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS
PLATE 7

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 23 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION
Date of test started

Date of test finished
Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
: 05 JANUARY 2014
: 07 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
: IC3-B-37 INTERNATIONAL CITY
Test method
Sample prep. method
Tested by
Checked by
: BS 1377 Part 2: 1990: AMD 9027:

1996: Cl. 9.2 (wet sieving)
: BS: 1377 Part 2: 1990: Cl 9.2.3.
: OU
: MG
Percentage og Passing, %
B H 1 - 1.0 : 1.45 m de pth

S am ple De scri ption : Light brown, slight ly silt y, fine SAND
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.001 0.002
BH 1- 1.0 : 1.45 m depth
0.006
0.01
0.02
0.06 0.1 0.20
0.60 1
2.0
Seive
2.0
0.002 0.006
0.02
0.06
0.20 Size, mm
0.60
Fine
Fine
Medium
Coarse
Fine
Medium
Coarse
6.0 10
20.0
60.0100
6.0
20.0
60.0
Medium Coarse
CLAY
COBLE
SILT
GRAVEL
SAND
Percentage og Passing, %
B H 3 - 1.50 : 1.95 m de pth

Sample Descript ion: brown, slightly silt y, fine SAND
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.001 0.002
BH 3 - 1.5 : 1.95 m depth
0.006
0.01
0.02
0.06 0.1 0.20
0.60 1
2.0
Seive
2.0
0.002 0.006
0.02
0.06
0.20 Size, mm
0.60
Medium
Coarse
Fine
Medium
Coarse
Fine
Fine
CLAY
SILT
Plate 6.
6.0 10
20.0
6.0
20.0
60.0
Medium Coarse COBL
GRAVEL
SAND
60.0100
Particle Size Distribution for Borehole No. 1 & 3

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 24 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS
Date of test started

Date of test finished
Report Ref. No.
Plot No. Location
Client
: 06 JANUARY 2014
: 07 JANUARY 2014
: HASA/100613/3016
Borehole
Sample
Depth, m
No.
Test method: BS 1377: Part 3: 1990
2
Soil
2.35 : 2.50
Borehole
Sample
Depth, m
No.
Test method: BS 1377: Part 3: 1990
3
Groundwater
Sampled by
Sampled brought in by
Sampling Method
Tested by
Checked by
: HASA LAB
: HASA LAB
: BS 5930: 1999 Cl. 22
: MK
: GS
pH
Value
Cl: 9
Chloride Content as
Cl in acid soluble, %
Cl: 7.3
Sulphate Content as So4 in

2 : 1 water/soil extract, g/l
Cl: 5.3 & 5.5
8.2
0.15
0.50
pH
Value
Cl: 9
Chloride Content as
Cl, %
Cl: 7.2
8.3
0.01
Sulphate Content as So4, g/l

Cl: 5.4 & 5.5
0.38
Remarks: None
Test method variation: Commercial buffer solution used for pH meter calibration.
Plate 7.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Chemical Test Results

& 510 . ."! & # $%
04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 25 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
APPENDIX D (CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS)
CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
PLATE 8 to 13
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 26 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
Plate 8.
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 2.0m ~ 10.0m)

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 27 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
Plate 9.
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 10.0m ~ 18.0m)

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 28 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Plate 10. Core Specimen from BH 2 (Depth 2.50m ~ 11.0m)

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 29 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 30 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 31 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 32 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
APPENDIX E (USEFUL INFORMATION)

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 33 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Percussion Boring Method
The boring drilling machine consists of derrick, a power unit and winch carrying a light steel cable (wire)
which passes through pulley on top of the derrick.
The percussion tool is attached by the cable.
The borehole is advanced by the percussive action of the tool, which is raised and dropped by means of the
winch unit.
The percussion tool is shell (bailer) for cohesion-less soils. It is heavy steel tube fitted with a flap or clack
valve at the lower end.
Rotary Drilling Method

Rotary drilling rig is operated by hydraulic system with (3 to 4-inches) cutting bit as drilling tool or core
barrel with 3-inches diameter which is attached to the lower end of string of hollow drilling rods.
The drilling tool may be either a cutting bit or a coring bit based on the subsurface conditions of the layers
or the formation.
The coring bit had been fixed at the lower end of a core barrel, which in turn is carried by drilling rods.
Drilling mud/circulation fluid, which is a mix of water and bentonite pumped down through the hollow
rods and passes under pressure generated by trash pump through narrow holes in the bit or barrel.
The drilling fluid (mud) cools, lubricates the drilling rods and carries the loose debris (cuttings) to the
surface through the annulus between the rods and the sides of the hole.
The circulation fluid also introduces some supports to the sides of the holes when no casings are used.
There are two forms of rotary drilling, open-hole drilling and core drilling. The details are as following:
Open-hole drilling
The open-hole drilling method is generally used in soils, and very weak to weak rocks, uses cutting bit to
break down all the material within the diameter of the hole. Open-hole drilling can be used, only, as a means
of advancing the hole, the drilling rods can then be removed to allow tube samples to be taken or in-situ tests
to be carried out.
Core drilling
Core drilling is suitable for rocks and hard clays, the bit cuts an annular hole in the material and an intact core
enters the barrel, to be removed as a sample. However, the natural water content of the material is liable to be
increased due to contact with drilling fluid. Typical core diameters used are 2-inches and 3-inches.
Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 34 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
Standard Penetration Test was conducted according to BS 1377 part 9 : 1990 Cl. 3.3.
Standard Penetration Test (SPT) is performed in soil formation using split-barrel sampler. The sampler
consists of a drive shoe at the bottom, a split barrel in the middle and a coupling at the top. The split barrel in
the middle has inside and outside diameter of 35mm and 51mm respectively. The split-barrel sampler is
attached to drive rod and then lowered to the bottom of the borehole. The sampler is driven into the soil by
means of a hammer weighing 63.5kg and falls freely from a height of 760mm. The number of blows required
for driving the sampler through three 150mm intervals is recorded. The sum of the number of blows required
for driving the last two 150mm intervals is referred to as standard penetration number, N.
This test used mainly in sands and it can also be used in gravels or gravelly sand in which case the drive shoe
may be replaced by a solid 60o cone, but when this accessory is used in any type of ground the result should be
reported separately from standard test using open drive shoe and with preface SPT
The table below presents the relative densities and angle of shearing resistance for granular soils correlated to
the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N values.
(BS 5930 : 1999) & (The Mechanics of Engineering Soils (Capper & Cassie)).
Relative density classification
Very Loose
Loose
SPT, N
0-4
4 - 10
Angle of shearing resistance,
< 29
29 - 30
Medium
Dense
10 - 30
30 - 50
30 - 35
35 - 40
Very Dense
> 50
o
> 40 o
The table below presents the consistency of cohesive soils correlated to undrained shear strength.
(BS 5930 : 1999).
Consistency of clay
Undrained shear strength,
kN/m2
Very Soft
Soft
Firm
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
< 20
20 40
40 75
75 150
150 300
> 300
The table below presents the consistency of clay and approximate correlation to the Standard Penetration Test
(SPT) N values. (Principles of Soil Mechanics (Terzaghi & Peck)).
Consistency of clay
Very Soft
Soft
Firm
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
SPT, N
<2
2-4
4-8
8 - 15
15 - 30
> 30
< 25
25 50
50 100
100 200
200 400
> 400
Undrained shear strength,

kN/m2

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 35 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Groundwater Table Measuring
The groundwater table was measured using Electric Contact Meter (Dip Meter), Type: KLL. Electric Contact
Meters (Dip Meters) are a portable, used for quick, easy, reliable instruments for measuring the water level and
total depth in boreholes, wells, observation pipes, reservoirs, as well as for the control of pumping tests. As
soon as the electrode of the measuring probe touches the water surface, the signal lamp and on the instrument
lights up and audible signal indicates. The water level can be read from the measuring tape in meters (m) and
centimeters (cm). In most cases, the groundwater table level is confirmed by measuring the level using the
traditional methods.
Particle Size Distribution
The Particle Size Distribution (Sieve Analysis) was conducted according to BS 1377 Part 2 : 1990: Cl. 9.2. and
the classification of soil based on the particle sizes shown in the table below.
Classification
Clay
Silt
Fine Sand
Medium Sand
Coarse Sand
Fine Gravel
Medium Gravel
Coarse Gravel
Cobbles
Boulders

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
Size, mm
< 0.002
0.002 to 0.06
0.06 to 0.20
0.20 to 0.6
0.60 to 2.0
2.0 to 6.0
6.0 to 20.0
20.0 to 60.0
60.0 to 200.0
> 200.0
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 36 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
Rock Strength Classification (BS 5930: 1999)

The rock strength classification based in the values of unconfined compressive strength as shown in the
following table:
Term
Very Weak
Weak
Moderately Weak
Moderately Strong
Strong
Very Strong
Extremely Strong
Field Definition
Gravel size lumps crushed between finger and thumb.
Gravel size lumps broken in half by heavy hand pressure.
Thin slabs or edges broken by heavy hand pressure.
Broken by hammer blows while hand held.
Broken by heavy hammer blows.
Rock chipped by heavy hammer blows.
Rock rings on hammer blows.
Compressive Strength (MN/m2)

< 1.25
1.25 to 5.00
5.00 to 12.5
12.5 to 50.0
50.0 to 100.0
100.0 to 200.0
> 200.0
Unconfined Compressive Strength Test

Some of the samples extracted from the boreholes are core specimens. The unconfined compressive strength
had been carried out on some selected core specimens using a calibrated proving ring (50kN. 10kN & 2kN
capacity) with a load frame. The tests are carried out according to ASTM D 7012-10, ASTM D 4543-08.
Two dial gauges were fitted as following: The first dial gauge is fitted in the load ring itself for measuring the
load acting on the specimen and the second is for measuring the accompanied strain in the specimen.

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 37 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
CIRIA Special Publication 31

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 38 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 39 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE REPORT*

ASTM
BGL
BH
BS
CPT
Dr
Dia.
EGSL
Gs
HASA
Ka
Ko
Kp
ks
LL
m
NA
PL
PSD
SL
SPT
SPT
TBM
Wc
dry
Sat
: American Society of Testing and Materials

: Below Ground Level
: Borehole
: British Standard
: Cone Penetration Test
: Relative Density
: Diameter
: Existing Ground Surface Level
: Specific Gravity
: Hassan Al Amir Soil Analysis
: Coefficient of Active Earth Pressure
: Coefficient of Earth Pressure at Rest
: Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure
: Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
: Liquid Limit
: Mass
: Not Applicable
: Plastic Limit
: Particle Size Distribution
: Shrinkage Limit
: Standard Penetration Test
: SPT with Solid Cone
: Temporary Bench Mark
: Water Content
: Bulk Density
: Dry Density
: Saturated Density
: Angle of Shearing Resistance
: Shear Strength of Soil
For borehole log :

D
U
B
S
SC
C
GW
GS
N
UCS
TCR
SCR
RQD
: Disturbed Sample
: Undisturbed Sample
: Bulk Disturbed Sample
: SPT with split spoon sampler
: SPT with solid cone
: Core Run
: Groundwater
: Ground Surface
: Standard Penetration Test Number
: Unconfined Compressive Strength
: Total Core Recovery, %
: Solid Core Recovery, %
: Rock Quality Designation, %
* Some of above abbreviations may not encountered in the report

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 40 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
LIST OF SYMBOLS USED IN THE REPORT*

SOILS
Fill
Clay
Sand
Gravel
Silt
Boulders and Cobles
ROCKS
Marl
Chalk
Limestone
Shale
Conglomerates
Siltstone
Quartz
Chert
Ash
Metamorphic Rock
Mudstone
Basalt
Sandstone
Igneous Rocks
DDD
Gypsum
SYMBOLS FOR SAMPLER
Core Barrel
Bailer
Percussion
SPT
OTHERS
Borehole Location
Site Location
*Some of above symbols may not encountered in the report

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 41 of 42

Hassan Al Amir
Soil Analysis
E- mail:
hasa.lab1@gmail.com
REFERENCES
Karl Terzaghi & Ralph B. Peck.

SOIL MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING PRACTICE, 3rd Edition.
Braja M. Das
PRINCIPLES OF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING, 5th Edition.
Joseph E. Bowles
FOUNDATION ANALYSIS AND DESIGN, 5th Edition.
MJ Tomlinson
FOUNDATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, 6th Edition.
BS 5930: 1999.
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SITE INVESTIGATION.
CIRIA SPECIAL PUBLICATION-31.
The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region, published by the Construction Industry
Research and Information Association, London 1984.

Tel 04 341 6086 Fax 04 341 6096
& 510 . ."! & # $%

04 341 6096 8: 04 341 6086 45%67
Page 42 of 42

378 Volume 2 Part I Civil Specifications

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

378 Volume 2 Part I Civil Specifications

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Proposed B + G + 5 floors Residential Building

Plot no. IC3-B37, International City Phase-3, Dubai UAE

SHEIKH JASSIM FAISAL M. T. AL-THANI

Mr. JAMAL M.M. YASIN ABUHIJLEH

BASEMENT WATERPROOFING................................................................................................. 119

INTEGRAL-CRYSTALLINE-WATERPROOFING-OF-CONCRETE-ADMIXTURE ...................... 143

The 5th floor consists of lift lobby, staircases, corridors, 2 lifts,

Attendance and Facilities to the nominated sub-contractors

Temporary Site Office

Water and Electricity

Hoisting & Lifting

Lifting including loading and unloading of all heavy equipment.

Definitive List of Attendance Items

Units of Measurement and Abbreviations

Inconsistency in Contract Documents

Errors in Computing Contents of Contract Documents

Temporary Site Offices, Sanitary Facilities and Equipment

No Objection Certificates (NOCs)

Temporary Works and Reinstatement

Locating, Protecting, Maintaining and Diverting Services and Public Utilities

Water for the Works

Temporary Power and Lighting for the Works

Safety and Security

Contractors Quality Assurance and Quality (QA/QC)

Method of documenting QA/QC operations, inspections and testing.

Laboratories used to Perform Tests shall be approved by the Engineer

Safeguard of Life and Health

Keeping Site Free from Rubbish

As Built and Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals

Customs and Local Dues

Material, Goods and Workmanship Generally

Schedule Procurement of Material

Sample and Testing Materials

-Slump cone with base plate and tamping rod.

Co-ordination of Builders Work

Labor force working during the period.

Site Progress Meetings

Safety of Adjoining Existing Buildings, Roads, Services, Etc.

Safe Access and Maintenance of Traffic Flows

Protection of Finished Works

Working Environmental Conditions

Access to or Possession or Use of the Site

Limitation of Working Space

Limitations of Working Hours

Construction Procedure, Progress Reporting and Co-ordination Procedure

Level 1 Master Schedules

Each area by trade/discipline

f. Overall WORK Progress

Level 2 Overall Project CPM Network

90 DAY Starter Schedule

LEVEL 4 Detailed Schedules

Documents planned for completion but not complete.

Documents due for issue in next period.

Planning and Scheduling of CONSTRUCTION WORKS

Overall Construction Schedule.

Furthers details on Construction Planning requirements are detailed in Clauses H to K.

Detailed quantified WORK program Schedules.

Basis of Progress Measurement

Ordering, manufacturing and Delivery of EQUIPMENT

d. CONSTRUCTION (including progress of CONSTRUCTION activities and commissioning activities).

Product description and date sheets

Capabilities. The system shall be capable of interfacing with network activities.

Subcontracting Progress Measurement

Issue RFQ to bidders